Loading...
LIFT STATION 16 - 20-0008-UT• TO: BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT Owen Kohler, Assistant City Attorney Jennifer Poirrier, City Manager's Office Brian Aungst Sr., Mayor City of Clearwater Rosemarie Call, City Clerk Office FROM: Jennifer Burgett, Engineering Contract Procurement Specialist DATE: August 3, 2023 RE: Lift Station 16 20 -0008 -UT Attached are the contract documents awaiting review and approval for the above noted project. Once signed, please route to the next person for signature. Council approved this contract on July 20, 2023. Should you have any questions, please contact me at 727-444-8207. Thank you, Jennifer Burgett. ROUTING: ❑ City Attorney - Owen Kohler ❑ City Manager's Office - Jennifer Poirrer O City Mayor's Office - Brian Aungst Sr. ❑ City Clerk's Office - Rosemarie Call O City Engineers Office - Jennifer Burgett D ' TE: 5 1 ce 3 1I • • Lift Station 16 Pierce St. (20 -0008 -UT) CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS Prepared for BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL, • BAY TO BEACH ............mw Bid Ready Documents December 2022 • Addendum No.1 - Issued 02/16/23 - Corrected file. Previous file was missing Section IVa: Supplemental Technical Specifications City of Clearwater, Florida Lift Station 16 Pierce St. (20 -0008 -UT) TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TC) BIDDERS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS APPENDIX OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer COVER Page II Updated 2/11/2016 • • • • • • SECTION 1 INVITATION TO BID NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS Insert Project Name Here Documents and plans for Project 20 -008 -UT are available at www.myclearwater.com/bid. The work includes: The WORK shall consist of furnishing tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles, and furnishing all labor, transportation, and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications, and performing all work or other operations required for the replacement of the LS -16 pump station in Pierce St. Pre -Bid Conference: [Insert Date & Time here] [Insert location here] Pre -qualification DEADLINE: [Insert Date] Category: [Insert Category Type Pre -qualification Amount: [Insert amount] Bids DUE: [Insert Date & Time here] Bid Opening: [Insert Date & Time here] Location: [Insert location here] City of Clearwater, Project # [Insert Project #] Procurement Office, 3rd Floor 100 S. Myrtle Ave, Clearwater, FL 33756-5520 Issued by Lori Vogel, CPPB, Procurement Manager For additional information contact Engineering Dept.: 727-562-4750 SECTION I Page 1 Updated 05/28/2020 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6. CONTRACT TIME 3 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15. OPENING OF BIDS 5 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19. BID PROTEST 7 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 8 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 8 SECTION II i Updated 12/22/2021 • • • SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders • 1. COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1. Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are accessible through the City of Clearwater website at address: www.myclearwater.com/bid. Bidding Documents may include, but are not limited to, plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits, bid/proposal form, and addendums. 1.2. Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub -bidders, or others. • • 2. QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1. Each prospective Bidder must pre -qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner. An application package for pre -qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758.4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. Pre -qualification requirement information is also available on the City of Clearwater Website at address: www. myclearwater. com/government/city-departments/engineering/construction- management. Contractors wanting to pre -qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten workdays) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre -qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. It is the Contractor's responsibility to confirm pre - qualification status before a Bid Opening. The Contractor shall provide copies of the current Contractor License/Registration with the State of Florida and Pinellas County in the bid response. 3. EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1. It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer in writing of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2. For the purposes of bidding or construction, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof. Drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, may be relied upon by Bidder for accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. SECTION II Page 1 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 3.3. Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4. Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6. On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8. The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4. INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1. All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed in writing to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, via the Jiffy Reprographics Plan Room to all parties recorded by the Plan Room as plan holders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified on the pre-bid meeting agenda, prior to the date for opening of Bids, may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. SECTION II Page 2 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 5. BID SECURITY OR BID BOND • 5.1. Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Proposal/Bid Bond (on form provided in Section V) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. 5.2. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid Opening. 5.3. The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in, the State of Florida. 6. CONTRACT TIME 6.1. The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. • 7. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1. Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement, Section V. • 8. SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1. The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9. SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1. If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder SECTION II Page 3 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid Security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person, or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10. BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1. The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be printed in ink or typewritten. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which they will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4. All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11. SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1. Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a sealed envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Bids in any other form will not be accepted. 11.2. The sealed bid envelope shall contain, but not be limited to, the Proposal/Bid Bond and corresponding Power of Attorney, Affidavit, Non -Collusion Affidavit, Proposal (pages one SECTION II Page 4 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders and two), Addendum Sheet, Bidder's Proposal, and Scrutinized Companies and Business • Operations with Cuba and Syria Certification Form, and E -Verify form. • • 12. MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1. Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2. After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13. REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1. To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any, and all Bids, and to waive any, and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14. DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non -Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15. OPENING OF BIDS 15.1. Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16. LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1. The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. SECTION II Page 5 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 16.2. The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3. The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use, and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4. The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials purchased by the City and incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, as may be indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17. IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1. In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. SECTION II Page 6 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders 18. AWARD OF CONTRACT • 18.1. Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2. In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether the Bids comply or not with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4. Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5. The successful bidder/contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida • Statutes, specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. 19. BID PROTEST • 19.1. RIGHT TO PROTEST: Pursuant to Section 2.562(3), Clearwater Code of Ordinances, a bidder who submitted a response to a competitive solicitation and was not selected may appeal the decision through the bid protest procedures, a copy of which shall be available in the Procurement Division. A protesting bidder must include a fee of one percent of the amount of the bid or proposed contract to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed SECTION II Page 7 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021 SECTION II — Instructions to Bidders $5,000.00 nor be less than $50.00. Full refund will be provided should the protest be upheld. No partial refunds will be made. 20. TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918-08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21. CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1. The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction -related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction -related Best Management Practices. SECTION II Page 8 of 8 Updated 12/22/2021 • SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1. DEFINITIONS 1 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED, STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 5 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 6 3.1. INTENT 6 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS, SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, REFERENCE POINTS 7 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 7 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 7 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 III 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS 8 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS 9 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE 9 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE 10 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 10 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE 10 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE10 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE 10 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS 10 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS 11 6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 12 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 13 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 13 6.5. USE OF PREMISES 14 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 15 • 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.7.1. E -VERIFY 16 6.8. PERMITS 16 SECTION III i Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III—General Conditions 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10. EMERGENCIES 18 6.11. DRAWINGS 18 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES 23 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION 24 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS 24 7. OTHER WORK 25 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE 25 7.2. COORDINATION 26 8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITY 26 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 26 9.1. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE 26 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 27 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 27 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 27 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 27 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 28 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK 29 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 29 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 31 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK 31 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 32 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION 32 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK 33 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 33 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD 34 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 34 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 35 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 35 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 36 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 36 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION 37 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 38 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS 38 SECTION III ii Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 39 • 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 39 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE 39 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION 40 17. MISCELLANEOUS 41 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 41 17.2. GIVING NOTICE 41 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION 41 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS 42 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 42 19. MATERIAL USED 42 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 42 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS 42 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK 43 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 43 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES, AND INDEMNIFICATION 44 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44 • 22.1. GENERAL 44 22.2. EXAMPLE 45 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 45 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE 45 23.2. PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 46 23.3. FIXED SIGN 46 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS 46 23.5. SIGN COLORING 46 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT 46 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE 46 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 47 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 47 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM AND ISRAEL CERTIFICATION FORM 48 • SECTION III iii Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 1. DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment, or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to ensure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding SECTION III Page 1 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 • SECTION III — General Conditions contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm, or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule (CPM) A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty-four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent SECTION III Page 2 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D. O. T. Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending, or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. SECTION III Page 3 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times, that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre -construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, SECTION III Page 4 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2. PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1. DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2. COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3. COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED, STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. Pursuant to Section 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, the Notice to Proceed cannot be issued until Contractor provides City with a certified copy of the recorded bond issued by the Pinellas County Clerk of Court. 2.4. BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or SECTION III Page 5 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5. PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE After Contract has been fully executed and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at the preconstruction conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also submit a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the list is complete, and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall submit to the Owner's Representative prior to the Notice to Proceed, a completed Emergency Call List, a completed Authorized Signature List, and Verification of Illegal Discharge Construction Site Training. 2.6. PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi-weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. 3. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1. INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and SECTION III Page 6 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2. REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS, SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, REFERENCE POINTS 4.1. AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements, rights of entry for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of Contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which Contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2. INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly SECTION III Page 7 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 • • SECTION III — General Conditions notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change, or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3. PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the Sunshine State One Call of Florida prior to any excavation. The Sunshine State One Call of Florida is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4. REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, unless otherwise noted in the Contract, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $200.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. SECTION III Page 8 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 5. BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond pursuant to Section 255.05, Florida Statutes in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents in Section V and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, acquire and maintain (and cause any Subcontractors, representatives or agents to acquire and maintain) during the term with the City, sufficient insurance to adequately protect the respective interest of the parties. Coverage shall be obtained with a carrier having an AM Best Rating of A -VII or better. In addition, the City has the right to review the Contractor's deductible or self-insured retention and to require that it be reduced or eliminated. Specifically, the Contractor must carry the following minimum types and amounts of insurance on an occurrence basis or in the case of coverage that cannot be obtained on an occurrence basis, then coverage can be obtained on a claims -made basis with a minimum four (4) year tail following the termination or expiration of this Agreement: The following insurance limits may be achieved by a combination of primary and umbrella/excess liability policies. 5.2.1. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage, including but not limited to, premises operations, products/completed operations, products liability, contractual liability, advertising injury, personal injury, death, and property damage in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence and $2,000,000 (two million dollars) general aggregate. SECTION III Page 9 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 5.2.2. COMMERCIAL AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance coverage for any owned, non -owned, hired or borrowed automobile is required in the minimum amount of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) combined single limit. 5.2.3. WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE Statutory Workers' Compensation Insurance coverage in accordance with the laws of the State of Florida, and Employer's Liability Insurance in the minimum amount of $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee each accident, $100,000 (one hundred thousand dollars) each employee by disease and $500,000 (five hundred thousand dollars) aggregate by disease with benefits afforded under the laws of the State of Florida. Coverage should include Voluntary Compensation, Jones Act, and U.S. Longshoremen's and Harbor Worker's Act coverage where applicable. Coverage must be applicable to Employees, Contractors, Subcontractors, and Volunteers, if any. 5.2.4. PROFESSIONAL LIABILITY/MALPRACTICE/ERRORS OR OMISSIONS INSURANCE Professional Liability/Malpractice/Errors or Omissions Insurance coverage appropriate for the type of business engaged in by the Contractor with minimum limits of $1,000,000 (one million dollars) per occurrence. If a claims -made form of coverage is provided, the retroactive date of coverage shall be no later than the inception date of claims -made coverage, unless prior policy was extended indefinitely to cover prior acts. Coverage shall be extended beyond the policy year either by a supplemental extended reporting period (ERP) of as great a duration as available, and with no less coverage and with reinstated aggregate limits, or by requiring that any new policy provide a retroactive date no later than the inception date of claims -made coverage. 5.2.5. CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT/INLAND MARINE/PROPERTY INSURANCE If Contractor is using its own property in connection with the performance of its obligations under this Agreement, then Contractor's Equipment—Inland Marine Insurance and/or Property Insurance on an "All Risks" basis with replacement cost coverage for property and equipment in the care, custody and control of others is recommended. City is not responsible for Contractor's (or any Subcontractors, Representatives, or Agents) equipment or property. 5.2.6. BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE The City will provide at its expense, Builder's Risk Insurance for the project to cover all risks of loss in the complete and full value of the project. Contractor agrees to cooperate in a timely manner with providing any information or documentation required for the application and by the carrier as the project proceeds. 5.3. OTHER INSURANCE PROVISIONS Upon approval of this Agreement by City Council, and then annually upon the anniversary date(s) of the insurance policy's renewal date(s) for as long as this Agreement remains in effect, the Contractor will furnish the City with a Certificate of Insurance(s) (using appropriate ACORD certificate, SIGNED by the Issuer, and with applicable endorsements) evidencing all of the SECTION III Page 10 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions coverage set forth above and naming the City as an "Additional Insured." In addition, when requested in writing from the City, Contractor will provide the City with certified copies of all applicable policies. The address where such certificates and certified policies shall be sent or delivered is as follows: Attn: Contract and Procurement Specialist City of Clearwater Engineering Department P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 1. The Description (of Operations/Locations/Vehicles) should specify Project Name and Project Number. 2. Contractor shall provide thirty (30) days written notice of any cancellation, non -renewal, termination, material change or reduction in coverage. 3. Contractor's insurance as outlined above shall be primary and non-contributory coverage for Contractor' s negligence. 4. Contractor reserves the right to appoint legal counsel to provide for the Contractor's defense, for any and all claims that may arise related to Agreement, work performed under this Agreement, or to Contractor's design, equipment, or service. Contractor agrees that the City shall not be liable to reimburse Contractor for any legal fees or costs as a result of Contractor providing its defense as contemplated herein. The stipulated limits of coverage above shall not be construed as a limitation of any potential liability to the City, and the City's failure to request evidence of this insurance shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor's (or Subcontractors, Representatives, or Agents) obligation to provide the insurance coverage specified. 5.4. WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. SECTION III Page 11 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 6. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES III 6.1. SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE • • Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person, so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, disrespectful or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor represents the City of Clearwater and shall conduct themselves in a professional manner to the public at all times. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $80.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2. LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours. Contractor shall adhere to the Community Development Code, Section 3-1508 regarding noise restrictions from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. any day and all -day Sunday. Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. SECTION III Page 12 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment or materials to be incorporated into the Work under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, per Section III, Article 21. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. 6.3. SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute, therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. Request for substitute shall identify why a substitute is submitted and include advantages to the Owner. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4. SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list SECTION III Page 13 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 • SECTION I11— General Conditions the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable obj ection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5. USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, SECTION III Page 14 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1. STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. Use of right of way within the limits of construction must be approved by the City. All applicable erosion control, tree barricade and restoration, including time limits, specifications, etc., must be followed. Contractor must provide portable restroom that is lockable for the safety of the Contractor and the surrounding residents. 6.5.2. RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially in the Right -of -Ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater therefore, these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Any irrigation systems or components damaged or impacted by construction activities shall be repaired or replaced "in-kind" within forty-eight (48) hours to minimize the loss of turfgrass or landscape plantings, particularly during periods of drought. • Sod must be restored "in-kind" within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or another project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6. LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. SECTION III Page 15 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7. LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.7.1. E -VERIFY • Contractor and its Subcontractors shall register with and use the E -Verify system to verify the work authorization status of all newly hired employees. Contractor will not enter into a contract with any Subcontractor unless each party to the contract registers with and uses the E -Verify system. Subcontractor must provide Contractor with an affidavit stating that Subcontractor does not employ, contract with, or subcontract with an unauthorized alien. Contractor shall maintain a copy of such affidavit. The City may terminate this Contract on the good faith belief that Contractor or its Subcontractors knowingly violated Florida Statutes 448.09(1) or 448.095(2)(c). If this Contract is terminated pursuant to Florida Statute 448.095(2)(c), Contractor may not be awarded a public contract for at least 1 year after the date of which this Contract was terminated. Contractor is liable for any additional costs incurred by the City as a result of the termination of this Contract. See Section 448.095, Florida Statutes (2020). See "VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY FORM" in Appendix. • 6.8. PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. SECTION III Page 16 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9. SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration, or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when execution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. SECTION III Page 17 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.10. EMERGENCIES • In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. • • 6.11. DRAWINGS 6.11.1. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, AND SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will have a transmittal cover sheet identifying the shop drawing name, number, and technical specification reference; will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of SECTION III Page 18 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to back charge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20%) of the total number of first-time submittals, per the approved initial submittal log. Owner's Representative reserves the right to back charge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first-time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be back charged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event, that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be back charged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2. AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. All abandoned during construction pipes and utilities must be clearly identified on the As-Builts including the methods used to abandon. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up redline prints do not SECTION III Page 19 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 • SECTION III — General Conditions conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the As -Built Drawings does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1. General The Contractor shall prepare an AS -BUILT SURVEY per chapter 5J-17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The Contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J-17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also known as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "AS -BUILT SURVEY" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the Contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting, and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New and replaced service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. The terminal ends of all subdrains, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3. Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Force Main) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting, and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also, all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally, there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. SECTION 111 Page 20 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.11.2.4. Electrical and Control Wiring The As -Built Drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The As -Built Drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5. Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built Survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6. Standards The As -Built Survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J-17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the As -Built Survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7. Other The As -Built Drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3. CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1. Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1. Prefixes and Suffixes AB-... prefix denotes As -Built information DI-... prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities DEMO-... prefix denotes demolition P-... prefix denotes proposed entities — line work and symbols F-... prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols X-... prefix denotes existing entities — line work and symbols ... -CANOPY Suffix denotes tree canopies ...-CL suffix denotes centerline of road, ditch, swale etc. ...-LN suffix denotes all linework ...-PT suffix denotes points from survey data or from design stakeout ...-TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix 6.11.3.1.2. Laver Naming Definitions: BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation SECTION III Page 21 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions BOC curbs BOLLARD bollards BRUSH brush lines CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances CONCSLAB concrete slabs DRIVE driveways EASEMENT easements EOP edge of pavement without curbs FENCE all fences FLOW flow lines GRADE grade slopes, grade breaks GROUND soft ground (unpaved, unimproved) HANDRAIL handrails HEDGE hedges LANDSCAPE landscape areas LOT platted lot lines information MISC miscellaneous linework MONU property corners, monumentation PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances PROPERTY property lines information ROAD roads ROW Right -of -Way information SEAWALL seawalls SHORE shoreline, water elevation SWALE swales TOB top of bank TOE toe of slope TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TREE trees, bushes, planters UT-ELEC power lines and appurtenances UT -GAS gas lines and appurtenances UT-RCW reclaimed water UT -SAN sanitary lines and appurtenances UT -STM storm lines and appurtenances UT-TCOM telecommunication systems UT-WAT potable water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers WALK sidewalk WALL walls, except seawall Other layers may be created as required or needed, using above format or easy to understand logic. 6.11.3.2. Layer Properties All AutoCAD objects shall be drawn with their General Properties to be "ByLayer", pertaining to "Color", "Linetype", and "Lineweight". III 6.11.3.3. Text Styles All text shall use standard AutoCAD fonts. SECTION III Page 22 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions Text style for X-... (existing) layers shall use the Simplex font, oblique angle of 0°, and a text height of 0.06 times the plot scale. Text style for P-... (proposed) and F-... (future) layers shall use the Simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5°, and a text height of 0.1 times the plot scale. 6.11.4. DELIVERABLES The As -Built Survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 "=20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver two hard copies and one digital copy of all drawings. Requested file formats are Autodesk DWG and Adobe PDF files. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562-4762 or e-mail address Thomas. Mahony myClearwater.com. 6.12. CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification, or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non -execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13. CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. SECTION III Page 23 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 6.14. INDEMNIFICATION III To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify, and hold the City, its officers, agents, and employees, harmless from and against any and all liabilities, demands, claims, suits, losses, damages, causes of action, fines or judgments, including costs, attorneys', witnesses', and expert witnesses' fees, and expenses incident thereto, relating to, arising out of, or resulting from: (i) the services provided by Contractor personnel under this Agreement; (ii) any negligent acts, errors, mistakes or omissions by Contractor or Contractor personnel; and (iii) Contractor or Contractor personnel's failure to comply with or fulfill the obligations established by this Agreement. Contractor will update the City during the course of the litigation to timely notify the City of any issues that may involve the independent negligence of the City that is not covered by this indemnification. The City assumes no liability for actions of Contractor and will not indemnify or hold Contractor or any third party harmless for claims based on this Agreement or use of Contractor -provided supplies or services. Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, this indemnification provision shall not be construed as a waiver of any immunity to which Owner is entitled or the extent of any limitation of liability pursuant to § 768.28, Florida Statutes. Furthermore, this provision is not intended to nor shall be interpreted as limiting or in any way affecting any defense Owner may have under § 768.28, Florida Statutes or as consent to be sued by third parties. 6.15. CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 411 Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. • 6.16. PUBLIC RECORDS The CONTRACTOR will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, TO THE CONTRACTOR'S DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT, CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS, Rosemarie Call, phone: 727-562-4092 or Rosemarie.Call(amyclearwater.com, 600 Cleveland Street, Suite 600, Clearwater, FL 33755. The Contractor's duty to comply with public records law applies specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency") to perform the service being provided by the Contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the SECTION III Page 24 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the Contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the Contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the Contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the Contractor shall destroy any public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the Contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the Contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for the retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the Contractor of the request and the Contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The Contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the Contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. A Contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subject to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a Contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the Contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: g) 1. The court determines that the Contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public request, including a statement that the Contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the Contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the Contractor at the Contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the Contractor's registered agent. Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. A Contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. j) 7. OTHER WORK 7.1. RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is SECTION III Page 25 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 • SECTION 111— General Conditions denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2. COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime Contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8. OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9. OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. SECTION III Page 26 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 9.2. CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3. REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4. SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5. DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner SECTION III Page 27 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 • SECTION III — General Conditions and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6. LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. SECTION III Page 28 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 10. CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions, or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: • changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and • changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; • provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting SECTION III Page 29 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION 111— General Conditions data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the Work, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, Subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the Work. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full -unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand-by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15%) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a Subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5%), and the Subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10%). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10%) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. SECTION III Page 30 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION 111— General Conditions The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2. ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3. UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. 12. CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the SECTION III Page 31 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13. TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1. TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner SECTION III Page 32 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2. UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4. CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has SECTION III Page 33 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5. WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically, and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6. ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7. OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven SECTION III Page 34 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and Employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14. PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1. APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed once each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor, and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including As -Built Survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on-site marked up As -Built Drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affidavit that all Subcontractors and Suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the Contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. SECTION III Page 35 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 14.2. CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE • Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. • • 14.3. REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty-five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies, and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to SECTION III Page 36 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4. PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons, therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5. FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6. FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As -Built, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance SECTION III Page 37 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 • SECTION III — General Conditions required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, and (ii) executed consent of the surety to final payment using the form contained in Section V of the Contract Documents. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7. FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay Contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8. WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. SECTION III Page 38 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 15. SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1. OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2. OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events: • Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); • Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; • Contractor violates Article 6.7.1 of this Section III; • Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; • Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed; • Lack of funding. The City's performance and obligation to pay under this Contract is contingent upon an annual appropriation by the Clearwater City Council. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses, and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses, and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. SECTION III Page 39 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 • • • SECTION III — General Conditions Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): • for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; • for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; • for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; • and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3. CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16. DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise SECTION III Page 40 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17. MISCELLANEOUS 17.1. SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2. GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3. NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4. PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6. RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to three (3) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the Contractor/Vendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. SECTION III Page 41 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 17.7. ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND/OR DUMPSTERS 111 All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal and hauling needs. For availability or pricing contact City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, by phone: (727) 562-4929. • • 18. ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19. MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 20. CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications and Technical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality, more stringent or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Engineer/Architect's interpretation. 21. OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 21.1. SALES TAX SAVINGS The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials or equipment for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. Owner -purchasing of construction materials or equipment, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the materials or equipment purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials or equipment as -bid by the Contractor. For purposes of calculating Engineering Fees, Contractor Fees, Architects' Fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items or materials that exceed $10,000 in value and/or items identified in Section V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, equipment, and materials for consideration as ODP materials or equipment (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix). SECTION 111 Page 42 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 21.2. TITLE AND OWNER RISK Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copy of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials or equipment. Invoices for ODP materials or equipment shall be issued to the Owner, and a copy sent to the Contractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials or equipment by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials or equipment; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor. 21.3. CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials or equipment furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Owner shall coordinate with Contractor and Vendor delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials or equipment furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials or equipment. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As ODP materials or equipment are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers and approve the vendor's invoice for items delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials or equipment is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and/or an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward an electronic copy of the invoice and supporting documentation to the Owner for payment within fourteen (14) calendar days of receipt of said goods or materials. Such payment shall be directly from public funds, from Owner to Vendor. The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials or equipment conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials or equipment are patently defective, and whether such materials or equipment are identical to the materials or equipment ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non -conformities in ODP materials or equipment upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials or equipment in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials or equipment can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials or equipment, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials or equipment into the Project, including liquidated damages. SECTION III Page 43 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 21.4. ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES, AND INDEMNIFICATION IIIThe Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials or equipment it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials or equipment in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials or equipment delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials or equipment which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials, equipment and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage -repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or Subcontractor. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials or equipment. ODP Purchase Orders must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor Purchase Order. If material costs needed for project exceed the ODP Purchase Order amount, the ODP Purchase Order will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP Purchase Order will be paid for by the Contractor. • 22. RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION • 22.1. GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4-1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. SECTION III Page 44 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2. EXAMPLE BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing the (state project name) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right- of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23. PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1. SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be SECTION III Page 45 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, SCOPE OF WORK. 23.2. PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3. FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size. Sign material shall be Aluminum DIBOND or exterior grade plywood with a minimum thickness of 1/2 -inches painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (3'/2"x3%2") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24 -inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. 23.4. PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24 -inches by 30 -inches (24"x30") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 -inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 23.5. SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's logo. The Project Manager/City Representative shall provide the appropriate electronic logo file(s) to the Contractor. 23.6. SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right-of-way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7. SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal, and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SECTION III Page 46 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION III — General Conditions 23.8. TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 6' PROJECT NAME PROJECT NUMBER DEPARTMENT NAME N CONTRACTOR: COMPLETION DATE: FUNDING. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL• BAY TO BEACH 3'634" 4"x4" P.T. Post (Typ.) Project Sign Details: Font Type: Franklin Gothic Medium, (ALL CAPS) Font Colors: Blue - Pantone 3015 and Black. 24. AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written Notice to Proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in Section IV, Scope of Work. Contract Time to commence at start date noted on the Notice to Proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of SECTION III Page 47 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 • • SECTION III — General Conditions Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight-hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25. SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM AND ISRAEL CERTIFICATION FORM Pursuant to Section 287.135, Florida Statutes, any vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Any vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or is engaged in a boycott of Israel, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for ANY amount. Each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on the aforementioned lists, or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, or engaged in a boycott of Israel at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with Section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. Boycott Israel or boycott of Israel means refusing to deal, terminating business activities, or taking other actions to limit commercial relations with Israel, or persons or entities doing business in Israel or in Israeli - controlled territories, in a discriminatory manner. A statement by a company that it is participating in a boycott of Israel, or that it has initiated a boycott in response to a request for a boycott of Israel or in compliance with, or in furtherance of, calls for a boycott of Israel, may be considered as evidence that a company is participating in a boycott of Israel. The certification forms (the Certification) are attached hereto, and must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non-responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, or engaged in a boycott of Israel, then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the City of Clearwater, on a case-by-case basis and in its sole discretion, may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract for goods or services, if the conditions set forth in Section 287.135, Florida Statutes, apply. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification forms. SECTION III Page 48 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 SECTION 111— General Conditions See Section V of the Contract for Certification Forms to be executed and submitted with the Bid/Proposal Form. SECTION III Page 49 of 49 Updated 6/1/2021 � SECTION IV • • TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Content: 100 SERIES: GENERAL 1 101. SCOPE OF WORK 1 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 2 102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 2 102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 2 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS 2 103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS 3 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 3 105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 3 105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3 105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING 3 105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 3 105-4. EQUIPMENT 4 105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION 4 105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION 4 105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION 4 105-8. LIGHTING 4 105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL 4 105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX 5 105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE 5 105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 5 106. STREET SIGNS 5 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5 107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 5 107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 5 107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 6 107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 7 107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 7 107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 7 107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 8 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 8 108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS 8 108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 8 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 10 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND INFRASTRUCTURE WORK 10 201-1. EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION FOR UNDERGROUND INFRASTRUCTURE 11 202. OBSTRUCTIONS 22 SECTION IV i Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications 203. DEWATERING 23 203-1. GENERAL 23 203-2. OBSERVATION WELLS 24 203-3. PUMPING AND DRAINAGE - GENERAL 24 203-4. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 28 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 29 204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 29 204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 29 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 29 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 29 206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 30 206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 30 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 30 207-1. GENERAL 30 207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL 30 207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 30 207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 31 207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 31 207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 31 207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 31 207-8. MAINTENANCE 31 207-9. COMPLIANCE 31 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES 32 208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS 32 208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION 32 208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL 32 208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL 32 208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY 33 208-6. RIP -RAP 33 208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL 33 209. MAINTENANCE OF OPERATIONS 33 209-1. GENERAL 33 209-2. EXECUTION 33 209-3. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 35 210. DETECTION OF FACILITIES 35 211. RELOCATIONS 36 211-1. RELOCATION SHOWN ON DRAWINGS 36 211-2. RELOCATIONS NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS 36 212. RESTORATION PROCEDURES 36 212-1. INTERIM RESTORATION 36 212-2. FINAL RESTORATION 36 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 38 301. CONCRETE 38 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 38 SECTION IV ii Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications • 302-1. EXCAVATION 38 302-2. FORMS 38 303. REINFORCEMENT 38 303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 39 304. BACKFILL 39 304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL 39 304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION 39 305. RIPRAP 40 305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 40 305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 40 306. FLOWABLE FILL 41 307. MATERIAL INDEPENDENT TESTING 42 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER 43 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 43 401-1. BUILT UP TYPE 43 401-2. PRECAST TYPE 44 401-3. DROP MANHOLES 46 401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS 46 401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS 46 401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 46 401-7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 46 • 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES 46 402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 46 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 46 403-1. MATERIALS 46 403-2. INSTALLATION 47 403-3. INSPECTIONS OF LINES AND MANHOLES 47 403-4. TESTING 49 403-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 49 404. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE SANITARY SEWER REHABILITATION 50 404-1. GENERAL 50 404-2. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT 51 404-3. SUBMITTALS 51 404-4. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) FOR GRAVITY SEWER MAINS 52 404-5. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) FOR SERVICE LATERALS 55 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 59 405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT 59 405-2. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT 60 405-3. CEMENTITIOUS COATING SYSTEM 61 405-4. RAVEN 405 EPDXY COATING SYSTEM 65 405-5. SPRAYWALL POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM 69 405-6. INTERNAL MANHOLE CORBEL SEALING SYSTEM 73 406. SMOKE AND DYE TESTING 76 • 406-1. GENERAL PROTOCOL 76 406-2. REPORTING 76 SECTION IV iii Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications 406-3. DYE INVESTIGATION 78 406-4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 80 406-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 80 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES 81 501. SCOPE 81 502. MATERIALS 81 502-1. GENERAL 81 502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 81 502-3. GATE VALVES 93 502-4. VALVE BOXES 94 502-5. HYDRANTS 95 502-6. SERVICE SADDLES/ POLYETHYLENE SERVICE LINES 96 502-7. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 97 502-8. TAPPING SLEEVES AND LINESTOPS 97 502-9. LINE STOPPING ASSEMBLIES 99 502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 100 503. CONSTRUCTION 100 503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 100 503-2. PIPE LAYING 101 503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 119 503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING POTABLE WATER OR RECLAIMED WATER LINES 122 504. PIPELINE CLEANING 123 504-1. PIPELINE PIGGING 123 504-2. FINAL PIPELINE FLUSHING 124 505. TESTS 124 505-1. HYDROSTATIC PIPELINE TESTING 124 505-2. NOTICE OF TEST 125 506. DISINFECTION AND TESTING 125 506-1. DISINFECTION MATERIALS 125 506-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM 126 506-3. FINAL DISINFECTION PROCEDURE FOR POTABLE WATER MAINS 126 506-4. FLUSHING AND RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 128 506-5. BACTERIALOGICAL TESTS 128 507. CORRECTION OF NON -CONFORMING WORK 129 508. OBTAINING WATER FOR FLUSHING AND TESTING 129 509. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 129 509-1. GENERAL 129 509-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 130 509-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 130 509-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 130 509-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 130 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 132 SECTION IV iv Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications • 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 132 601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT 132 602. UNDERDRAINS 132 602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 132 602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 132 603. STORM SEWERS 133 603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION 133 603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 133 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 134 604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 134 604-2. PRECAST TYPE 134 604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT 135 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 135 605-1. MATERIAL 135 605-2. PERFORMANCE 136 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS 137 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 137 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 137 • 702-1. BASE 137 702-2. SUBGRADE 139 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 139 703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 139 703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 140 703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 140 703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 140 703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 140 703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 141 703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES AND APPURTANENCES 141 703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 142 703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 142 703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 142 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 143 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS 143 705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 143 705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 143 706. CONCRETE CURBS 143 706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 144 706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 144 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 144 • 707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 144 707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 144 707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS 145 SECTION IV v Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV -Technical Specifications 707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 145 707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 145 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 145 708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 145 708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 145 708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 146 708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 146 708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 146 708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 146 708-7. TYPES OF MILLING 146 708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 147 708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 147 708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT 147 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 148 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 148 801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 148 802. SIGNING AND MARKING 148 802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 149 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING 149 803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 149 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 150 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 150 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 150 902-1. IRRIGATION 150 902-2. LANDSCAPE 156 903. SODDING 166 904. SEEDING 167 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 167 905-1. SCOPE 167 905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK 167 905-3. WORK METHODS 168 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE 169 907. COMPLETION OF WORK 170 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 170 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 170 910. TREE PROTECTION 170 910-1. TREE BARRICADES 170 910-2. ROOT PRUNING 171 910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING 172 911. IRRIGATION SYSTEM DESIGN 172 912. IRRIGATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION 173 SECTION IV vi Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV — Technical Specifications 100 SERIES: GENERAL 101. SCOPE OF WORK Project Name: Lift Station 16 Pierce St. Project Project Number: 20 -0008 -UT Scope of Work: 1. Demolition of the existing LS -16 facilities. This includes the existing wetwell, valve vaults, concrete slab, valves, piping, conduits/cables, electrical/control panels, light fixtures, instrumentation/control equipment, fencing, etc. as shown in the Contract Documents. 2. Site civil work associated with the WORK, including site preparation grading, erosion control, excavation and backfill materials. Modifications to manholes and bypass pumping as shown in the Contract Documents as well as restoration work of pervious and impervious areas affected by the construction activities. 3. Installation of a new 15 -ft diameter, cast in place wetwell with three submersible, solids handlingpumps, inclusive of all accessories and appurtenances as shown in the Contract Documents. The wetwell rim shall be installed at elevation 15.0 -ft. this includes commissioning and start up services including individual equipment startup and testing; pipingsystem testing; providing the services ofmanufacturerfieldtechnician and representatives to provide services for installation, startup, and training; coordination with the OWNER, ENGINEER, other CONTRACTORS, and regulatory agencies. 4. Furnish and install cable, conduits, light fixtures, electrical panels, transformer(s), automatic transfer switch, lightning protection system and equipment (including new natural gas backup generator), flow meter, pressure gauge, level transducers, floats, telemetry control units (TCU), and control panels shown in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall also perform a short circuit and coordination study as part to the WORK. Electrical panels shall be installed at elevation 17.0 -ft. The existing communications antenna should also be relocated as part of this work. 5. Furnish and install elevated structures, retaining walls and platforms to service and maintain the wetwell, electrical, control and instrumentation equipment as shown in the Contract Documents. 6. Protection, removal, replacement and overall improvements of landscape features at the site. This includes furnish and installation of irrigation system, trees, plants and shrubs as shown in the Contract Documents 7. Furnish and install extruded aluminum protective cover, inclusive of fixed, extruded aluminum louvers and structural elements as show in the Contract Documents. The structural components of the protective cover shall be coordinate such as it will be supported from structural platform components, but not be integral to these components. This Item is item is classified as a BID ALTERNATE. The WORK is located immediately East of the existing LS -16 facilities, approximately 600 -ft West of the intersection of S Osceola Ave and Pierce St., across from the public parking lot. The Contractor shall provide copies of a current Contractor License/Registration with the state of Florida and Pinellas County in the bid response. The Contractor shall provide fixed project signs as described in Section III, Section 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required at no additional cost to the city due to the Contractor's schedule of work. SECTION IV Page 1 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Contract Period: 275 Calendar Days 102. FIELD ENGINEERING 102-1. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the State of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -Built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Section 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 102-1.1. GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the city. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Professional Land Surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. 102-1.2. LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 102-2. LINE AND GRADE PERFORMED BY THE CITY If line and grade is supplied by the city, at the completion of all work the Contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $200.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $200.00. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As -built Surveys to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Section 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 103. DEFINITION OF TERMS For the Purpose of these Technical Specifications, the Definition of Terms from Section III, Article 1 — Definitions of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculationupon which the award of the contract is to be made. The city does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities SECTION IV Page 2 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the Contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. The basis of payment for work and materials will be the actual amount of work done and materials furnished. Contractor agrees that they will make no claim for damages, anticipated profits, or otherwise on account of any difference between the amounts of work performed and materials actually furnished and the estimated amounts thereof. 103-1. REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. The most stringent specification prevails in the case where more than one specification is referenced for the same task. Contractor shall utilize applicable Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standards and Specifications for tasks that are not covered by city's Standards and Specifications. 104. STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 105. AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 105-1. CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre -construction conditions. 105-2. SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty-one (21) days prior to construction in any area. 105-3. PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio/video recording shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre -construction color audio/video recording documentation. Use of drones must be in accordance with Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations. SECTION IV Page 3 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 105-4. EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials, and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio/video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio/video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 105-5. RECORDED AUDIO INFORMATION Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 105-6. RECORDED VIDEO INFORMATION All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day, and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes, and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during video playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. 105-7. VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the video viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed by the Contractor in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed ten feet (10'). The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 105-8. LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No videoing shall be done during precipitation, mist, or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient light is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 105-9. SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size, and value of the surface features within the construction area's zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel used during videoing shall not exceed forty-four (44) feet per minute. SECTION IV Page 4 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 105-10. VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videos shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by video number and project title. Each video shall have a log of that video's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. • • 105-11. AREA OF COVERAGE Video coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 105-12. COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 106. STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is prohibited. All street signs shall be removed, covered, or relocated by the city's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the city's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 107. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 107-1. CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 107-2. WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the FDOT for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. This plan shall be reviewed and approved by city Engineering Department Traffic SECTION IV Page 5 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Operations personnel regardless if Maintenance of Traffic (MOT) plan details are included in the contract plans. 107-2.1. WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety are to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation they will be facing as the driver proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved pedestrian longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and marked detours shall be provided by appropriate signs." Per the 2014 FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction or latest revision. FDOT Design Standards (DS): 102-5 Traffic Control, 102-5.1 Standards, are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans (use the latest edition). All traffic control plans must be submitted to the city Engineering Department, Traffic Operations Division for review and approval prior to installation. Contractor shall also provide notification to city Engineering, Traffic Operations Division a minimum of 72 -hours in advance of mobilization. Approved MOT must always be on site and accessible to the city Project Manager and/ or Representative. 107-3. ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increases with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed without prior approval by the City Engineer or designated Representative (Engineering Traffic Operations Manager). 107-3.1. ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County or Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 107-3.1.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. SECTION IV Page 6 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 107-3.2. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with city Engineering Traffic Operations Division staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 107-3.2.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of seven (7) day notice period prior to road closure and potentially longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 107-3.3. MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 107-3.3.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Releases can be issued as PowerPoint Presentation for C -View System utilizing television monitors. 107-3.4. MAJOR ARTERIALS 107-3.4.1. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Releases shall be issued by the city Public Communication Department. The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than seven (7) days. 107-4. APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN • The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone (727) 562-4747, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. Contractor is required to submit the MOT preparer's accreditation along with the plan submittal. • 107-5. INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The city Engineering Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The city's Construction Inspector assigned to the project may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the city representative. 107-6. PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise. SECTION IV Page 7 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 107-7. CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The city may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a twenty-four (24) hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a twenty-four (24) hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this sub section may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 108. OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 108-1. CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines, the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1: Having the power lines de -energized and visibly grounded. Option 2: Maintaining a minimum distance of twenty feet (20') of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV and fifty feet (50') of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3: Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the following table. 108-2. REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES VOLTAGE [nominal, kV, alternating current] MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE [feet] Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 200 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 Over 750 to 1,000 45 SECTION IV Page 8 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Over 1,000 (as established by the utility owner/operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the National Electric Code and all applicable local codes and regulations SECTION IV Page 9 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 200 SERIES: SITEWORK 201. EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND INFRASTRUCTURE WORK The Contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The Contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the Contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the Contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor shall submit to the city if requested prior to the start of work a safety plan for the excavation and work activities. The Contractor will identify their Competent Person to city staff at the start of construction. Clearwater Fire Dept. requires a Trench Permit and site inspection for any depths greater than five feet (5') and any excavation that exceeds twenty feet (20') shall require the submittal of a trench shoring plan prepared by a Professional Engineer actively licensed in the State of Florida. City staff is required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the Contractor. City staff, in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements, is to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The city's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the city's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform to OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the Contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the city's work at the Contractor's expense. The construction quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract do not contain sufficient quantities to allow the Contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than four hundred feet (400') of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the city and/or the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be a minimum of six inches (6") wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, except at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without additional compensation. SECTION IV Page 10 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 201-1. EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION FOR UNDERGROUND INFRASTRUCTURE • • 201-1.1. GENERAL Scope of Work: The work included under this Section consists of dewatering, excavating, trenching, sheeting/shoring, grading, backfilling, and compacting those soil materials required for the construction of the structures, piping, ditches, utility structures and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Definitions: A. Maximum Density: Maximum weight in pounds per cubic foot of a specific material as determined by ASTM D1557. B. Optimum Moisture Content: The optimum moisture content shall be determined by ASTM D 1557 specified to determine the maximum dry density for relative compaction. Field moisture content shall be determined on the basis of the fraction passing the 3/4 -inch sieve. C. Rock Excavation: Excavation of any hard -natural substance which requires the use of special impact tools such as jack hammers, sledges, chisels, or similar devices specifically designed for use in cutting or breaking rock, but exclusive of trench excavating machinery. D. Suitable Soil Materials: Suitable materials for fills shall be a non -cohesive, non -plastic granular local sand and shall be free from vegetation, organic material, marl, silt or muck and shall be classified as A-1, A-3 or A-2-4 in accordance with AASHTO Designation M-145. Not more than 10 percent (%) by weight of fill material shall pass the No. 200 Sieve. The Contractor shall furnish all additional fill material required. E. Unsuitable Soil Materials: Unsuitable materials are classified as A-2-5, A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A- 6, A-7, and A-8 in accordance with AASHTO Designation M-145. Plan for Earthwork: A. The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined to his satisfaction, prior to the submission of his bid, the conformation of the ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantities of materials to be encountered, the nature of the groundwater conditions, the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract according to the General Conditions. B. Prior to commencing the excavation, the Contractor shall submit a plan of his proposed operations, including maintenance of traffic, to the Engineer and the city for review and approval. The Contractor shall consider, and his plan for excavation shall reflect, the equipment and methods to be employed in the excavation. The prices established in the Proposal for the work to be done will reflect all costs pertaining to the work. No claims for extras based on substrata or groundwater table conditions shall be allowed. Trench Safety: A. All trench excavations which exceed 5 feet in depth shall comply at all times with the applicable trench safety standards as stated in the OSHA excavation safety standards 29 CFR S. 1926.650 Subpart P as regulated and administered by the Florida Department of Labor and Employment Security as the "Florida Trench Safety Act". B. The Contractor shall comply with all of the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act. The Contractor shall acknowledge that included in various items of his bid proposal and in the total bid price are costs for complying with the provisions of the Act. Testing: A Certified Testing Laboratory employed by the Contractor shall make such tests as are required to demonstrate compliance with these specifications. The Contractor shall schedule his work to permit a SECTION IV Page 11 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications reasonable time for testing before placing succeeding lifts and shall keep the laboratory informed of his progress. All costs for all testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Changed Job Conditions: If, in the opinion of the Engineer or the city Representative, conditions encountered during construction warrant a change in the structure footing elevation, or in the depth of removal of unsuitable material from that indicated in the soils report, an adjustment will be made in the contract price as provided in the General and Special Conditions. Utility Construction Surveys: A. Prior to commencing excavation, backfill or dewatering for utilities, the Contractor shall conduct a survey of those existing structures which, in the opinion of the Engineer, may be subject to settlement or distress resulting from excavation or dewatering operations. B. The Contractor shall monitor the structures surveyed to ascertain evidence of settlement or distress during construction. If settlement or distress becomes evident, the Contractor shall be required to repair the structures to the previous condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the city. All costs for repairs shall be paid by the Contractor. Submittals: A. Submit to the Engineer for review the proposed methods of construction, including dewatering, excavation, bedding, filling, compaction, and backfilling for the various portions of the work. Review shall be for method only. The Contractor shall remain responsible for the adequacy and safety of the methods. B. Submit to the Engineer for review and approval the sieve analyses and soil classifications completed by the Geotechnical Engineer hired by the Contractor, for materials to be used for pipe bedding and trench and structural backfill including Structural Fill, Class I and Class II soil materials, Crushed Stone bedding materials and Coarse Sand materials. C. Submit to the Engineer for review, the soil compaction results 201-1.2. mATERIALS General Requirements: A. All fill materials from on and off-site sources shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer and the city. B. All fill material shall be unfrozen and free of organic material, trash, or other objectionable material. Excess or unsuitable material as designated by the Engineer shall be removed from the job site by the Contractor. Common Fill Materials: A. Common fill shall be sand, free of clay, organic material, muck, loam, wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be compressible, or which cannot be compacted properly. It shall not contain stones, rock, concrete or other rubble larger than 1 -1/2 -inches in diameter. It shall have physical properties which allow it to be easily spread and compacted. B. Common fill shall be no more than 10 percent by weight finer than the No. 200 mesh sieve. C. The Contractor shall utilize as much excavated material as possible for reuse as backfill material in accordance with the Contract Drawings and Project Specifications or as directed by the Engineer. D. The Engineer shall direct the Contractor on the type of material allowed in certain sections of the earthwork operations. SECTION IV Page 12 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Structural Fill: Structural fill shall be well graded sand to gravel -sand having the following gradation: U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 1 -inch 100% No. 4 Sieve 75% to 100% No. 40 Sieve 15% to 80% No. 100 Sieve 0 to 30% No. 200 Sieve 0 to 10% Class I Soils*: Manufactured angular, granular material, 1/4 -inch to 1-1/2- inches in size, including materials having significance such as crushed stone or rock, broken coral, crushed slag, cinders, or crushed shells. Sieve analysis for crushed stone is given below separately. A. Crushed Stone: Crushed stone shall consist of clean mineral aggregate free from clay, loam or organic matter conforming with particle size limits as included in Table 201-A below. Unless approved otherwise by the engineer, crushed stone for PVC, FRP or HDPE pipe bedding shall conform with ASTM C33 stone size No. 89 and crushed stone for ductile iron pipe shall conform to ASTM C33 stone size No. 68 or 78. * Soils defined as Class I soils are not defined in ASTM D2487. Class II Soils**: A. GW: Well -graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines, clean. Fifty (50) percent or more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. B. GP: Poorly graded gravels and gravel -sand mixtures, little or no fines, clean. Fifty (50) percent or more retained on No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. C. SW: Well -graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines, clean. More than fifty (50) percent passing No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. D. SP: Poorly graded sands and gravelly sands, little or no fines, clean. More than fifty (50) percent passing No. 4 sieve. More than 95 percent retained on No. 200 sieve. ** In accordance with ASTM D2487, less than 5 percent passing No. 200 sieve. Coarse Sand: Sand shall consist of clean mineral aggregate with particle size limits as follows: U.S. Sieve Size Percent Passing By Weight No. 10 Sieve 100% No. 20 Sieve 0 to 30% No. 40 Sieve 0 to 5% Other Material: All other material, not specifically described, but required for proper completion of the work shall be selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. 201-1.3. cLEARING AND gRUBBING 201-1.3.1. GENERAL A. Clearing: Clearing shall completely remove and dispose of all timber, shrubs, brush, stumps, limbs, roots, grass, weeds, other vegetative growth, rubbish and all other objectionable obstructions resting on or protruding through the surface of the ground. Remove all evidence of their presence from the surface including sticks and branches. Remove and dispose of trash piles and rubbish that is scattered over the construction site or collects there during construction. Those trees, shrubs, vegetative growth, and fencing, if any, which are designed by the Engineer to remain, shall be SECTION IV Page 13 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications preserved and protected as hereinafter specified. Clearing operations shall be conducted so as to prevent damage to existing structures and installations and to those under construction, so as to provide for safety of employees and others. B. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of the complete removal of all stumps, roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter, matted roots, brush, timber, logs, and any other organic or metallic debris remaining after clearing not suitable for foundation purposes, resting on, under or protruding through the surface of the ground to a depth of 18 -inches below the subgrade or the bottom of utility trenches. All depressions excavated below the original ground surface for or by the removal of such objects, shall be refilled with suitable materials and compacted to a density conforming to the surrounding ground surface. C. Stripping: Remove and dispose of all organics and sod, topsoil, grass, and grass roots, and other objectionable material remaining after clearing and grubbing from the areas designated to be stripped. Grass, grass roots and organic material in areas to be excavated or filled shall be stripped to the depth as noted in the soils report. In areas so designated, topsoil shall be stockpiled. Stripped material and unsuitable material, such as organic material, shall be disposed of by the Contractor unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. 1. In areas so designated, topsoil shall be stripped and stockpiled. Topsoil so stockpiled shall be protected until it is placed as specified. Any topsoil remaining after all work is in place shall be disposed of by the Contractor. 201-1.3.2. CLEARING AND GRUBBING OPERATIONS Clearing and Grubbing Limits: All excavation areas associated with new structures, slabs, utilities and roadways shall be cleared and grubbed to the following depths: A. Proposed Structures: 2 -feet below existing grade within a 5 -foot margin of each structure and replaced with compacted structural fill material as specified in Section 201-2.2 B. Building Site Areas not specifically noted above: 2 -feet below existing grade within a 5 -foot margin of each building site area and replaced with compacted structural fill material as specified in Section 201-2.2. C. Utility Trenches: 1.5 -feet below the bottom of the utility trench within the entire width of the trench and replaced with compacted Class II Soils, Type SW or SP material as specified in Section 201- 2.2. D. Roadway and Paved Area: 2 -feet below existing grade within a 5 -foot margin of areas paved and replaced with compacted common fill material as specified. E. All Other Areas: 1 -foot below completed surface and replaced with compacted common fill material as specified. Areas to be Stripped: All excavation and embankment areas associated with new structures, slabs, walks, and roadways shall be stripped. Stockpile areas shall be stripped. 201-1.3.3. DISPOSAL OF DEBRIS MATERIAL A. Disposal of Clearing and Grubbing Debris: The Contractor shall dispose of all material and debris from the clearing and grubbing operations by hauling such material and debris away to an approved disposal site and dispose of in accordance with all local laws, codes, and ordinances. Disposal by burning or burial on-site shall not be permitted. The cost of disposal (including hauling) of cleared and grubbed material and debris shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, the cost of which shall be included in the contract price. B. Disposal of Stripped Material: Remove all stripped material and dispose off-site in a legal manner, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer to stockpile the material, such as topsoil, for use in the final Work. SECTION IV Page 14 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 201-1.3.4. PRESERVATION OF TREES AND SHRUBBERY A. Trees and Shrubbery: All existing trees, shrubbery, and other vegetative material may not be shown on the Drawings. Inspect the site as to the nature, location, size, and extent of vegetative material to be removed or preserved, as specified herein. Preserve, in place, trees that are specifically shown on the Drawings and designated to be preserved. B. Tree Protection: Those trees which are designated for preservation shall be carefully protected from damage. The Contractor shall erect such barricades, guards, and enclosures as may be considered necessary for the protection of the trees during all construction operations. C. Preservation and Protection of Trees, Shrubs, and Other Plant Material: 1. All plant materials (trees, shrubbery, and plants) beyond the limits of clearing and grubbing shall be saved and protected from damage resulting from the work. No filling, excavating, trenching, or stockpiling of materials will be permitted within the drip line of these trees or plants. The drip line is defined as a circle drawn by extending a line vertically to the ground from the outermost branches of a tree, plant, or group of plants. To prevent soil compaction within the drip line area, no equipment will be permitted within this area. 2. When trees are close together, restrict entry to area within drip line by fencing or a protective barrier. In areas where no fence or barrier is erected, the trunks of all trees 2 - inches or greater in caliper shall be protected by encircling the trunk entirely with boards held securely by 10 -gauge wire and staples. This protection shall extend from ground level to a height of 6 -feet. Neatly cut and remove tree branches where such cutting is necessary to affect construction operations. The cutting and removing must be performed or supervised by an I.S.A certified arborist. Remove branches other than those required to affect the work to provide a balanced appearance of any tree. Scars resulting from the removal of branches shall be treated with a tree sealant. • • 201-1.3.5. PRESERVATION OF DEVELOPED PRIVATE PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care to avoid unnecessary disturbance of developed private property. Trees, shrubbery, gardens, lawns, and other landscaping, which in the opinion of the Engineer must be removed, shall be replaced and replanted to restore the construction easement to the condition existing prior to construction. B. All soil preparation procedures and replanting operations shall be under the supervision of a nurseryman experienced in such operations. C. Improvements to the land such as fences, walls, outbuildings, etc., which of the necessity of construction activities must be removed, shall be replaced with equal quality materials and workmanship. D. The Contractor shall clean up the construction site across from developed private property directly after construction is completed upon approval of the Engineer. 201-1.3.6. PRESERVATION OF PUBLIC PROPERTY The appropriate paragraphs of Sections 203-2.3.4. and 203-2.3.5. of these specifications shall apply to the preservation and restoration of all damaged areas of public lands, parks, rights-of-way, easements, etc. 201-1.4. EXCAVATION PROTECTION 201-1.4.1. SHEETING AND BRACING A. Furnish, put in place, and maintain such sheeting and bracing as required to support the sides of excavations, to prevent any movement which could in any way diminish the width ofthe excavation below that necessary for proper construction, and to protect adjacent utilities or structures, other aboveground structures, utility poles, etc. from being undermined, and to protect workers from SECTION IV Page 15 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications hazardous conditions or other damage. Such support shall consist of braced steel sheet piling, braced wood lagging and soldier piles and beams or other approved methods. If the Engineer or the city is of the opinion that at any points, sufficient or proper supports have not been provided, they may order additional supports to be put in place at the expense of the Contractor, and compliance with such order shall not relieve or release the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. Care shall be taken to prevent voids from occurring adjacent to the sheeting, but if voids are formed, they shall be immediately filled and compacted. Where soil cannot be properly compacted to fill a void, lean concrete shall be used as backfill, at no additional expense to the city. B. The Contractor shall construct the sheeting outside the neat lines of the foundation unless deemed otherwise for the Contractor's method of operation. Sheeting shall be plumb and securely braced and tied in position. Sheeting and bracing shall be adequate to withstand all pressure to which the structure or trench shall be subjected. Any deformation, movement or bulging which may occur, shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense, to provide the necessary clearances and dimensions. C. Where sheeting and bracing is required to support the sides of excavations for utility structures, other structures, power poles, etc., the Contractor shall engage a Professional Geotechnical Engineer, registered in the state of Florida, to design the sheeting and bracing. The sheeting and bracing installed shall conform to the design, and certification of the installation shall be provided by the Professional Geotechnical Engineer. D. The installation of sheeting, particularly by driving or vibrating, may cause distress to existing structures. The Contractor shall evaluate the potential for such distress and, if necessary, take all precautions to prevent distress of existing structures because of sheeting installation. E. The Contractor shall leave in place to be embedded in the backfill all sheeting and bracing not shown on the Drawings but which the Engineer or the city may direct him in writing to leave in place at any time during the progress of the work for the purpose of preventing injury to any structures or property, whether public or private. The Engineer or the city may direct that timber or steel sheeting used for sheeting and bracing be cut off at any specified elevation. F. The right of the Engineer or the city to order sheeting and bracing to be left in place shall not be construed as creating any obligation on their part to issue such orders, and their failure to exercise their right to do so shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for damages to persons or property occurring from or upon the work occasioned by negligence or otherwise, growing out of a failure on the part of the Contractor to leave in place sufficient sheeting and bracing to prevent any caving or moving of the ground. G. Steel or wood sheeting installed for utility pipeline construction shall not, under any circumstances be withdrawn, if driven below the top of any utility pipeline. Steel sheeting, soldier piles and wood sheeting earth support systems installed for utility pipeline construction shall be cut-off and left -in- place at least 3 -feet below the ground surface, but no lower than 2 -feet above the top of the utility pipe. H. All sheeting and bracing not left in place shall be carefully removed in such manner as not to endanger the new construction or other structures, utilities, or property outside the construction area. All voids left or caused by withdrawal of sheeting shall be immediately refilled with sand by compacting with tools specifically adapted to that purpose, or otherwise as may be directed by the Engineer or the city. 201-1.5. EXCAVATING FOR UTILITY STRUCTURES Excavation work shall be performed in a safe and proper manner with appropriate precautions being taken against all hazards. Excavations shall provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to be performed therein and for installation and removal of concrete forms. In no case shall excavation faces be undercut for extended footings. SECTION IV Page 16 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Excavation shall be made to such dimensions as will give suitable room for building the foundations and the structures, for bracing and supporting, for pumping and draining, for installing the pipelines, and for all other work required. A. Excavation for precast or prefabricated structures shall be carried to an elevation two (2) feet lower than the proposed outside bottom of the structure to provide space for the backfill and bedding material. B. Excavation for structures constructed or cast -in-place in dewatered or dry excavations shall be carried down to the 2 -feet below the bottom of the structure where dewatering methods are such that a dry evacuation bottom is exposed and the naturally occurring material at this elevation leveled and left ready to receive construction. Material disturbed below the founding elevation in dewatered excavations shall be replaced with Class B concrete. Prior to backfilling, document the location, elevation, size, material type and function of all new subsurface installations, and utilities encountered during excavation and construction. Excavation equipment operators and other concerned parties shall be familiar with subsurface obstructions as shown on the Drawings and should anticipate the encounter of unknown obstructions during the work. Encounters with subsurface obstructions shall be hand excavated. Excavation and dewatering shall be accomplished by methods which preserve the undisturbed state of subgrade soils. Subgrade soils which become soft, loose, "quick" or otherwise unsatisfactory for support of structures as a result of inadequate dewatering or caused by other construction methods, shall be removed and replaced with crushed stone as required by the Engineer at the Contractor's expense. The bottom of excavations shall be rendered firm and dry before placing any structure or pipe. Excavated material not suitable for backfill shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor, in a legal manner. The bedding schedule for pipes shall be as shown in Table 201-C. If the sub -grade is unsuitable, the Contractor shall, remove and replace all unsuitable material below pipe with selected common fill or bedding rock, compacted to 95 percent Modified Proctor density. All pavements and sidewalks shall be cut prior to removal, with saws or accepted power tools. Excavated material shall be stockpiled in such a manner as to prevent nuisance conditions. Surface drainage shall not be hindered. All structure and pipe locations and elevations as required herein must be permanently documented by the Contractor, on the As-Builts, prior to the Engineer's approval of the Application for Payment for that work. 201-1.6. TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY PIPELINES 201-1.6.1. TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPE LAYING - GENERAL A. The Contractor shall not open more trench in advance of pipe laying than is necessary to expedite the work. Four hundred (400) feet shall be the maximum length of open trench for any pipeline under construction. All trench excavation shall be open cut from the surface. B. Alignment, Grade, and Minimum Cover: The alignment and grade or elevation of each pipeline shall be fixed and determined from offset stakes. Vertical and horizontal alignment of pipes, and the maximum joint deflection used in connection therewith shall be in conformance with the requirements of Section 500 covering installation of pipe. C. Where pipe grades or elevations are not definitely fixed by the Contract Drawings, trenches shall be excavated to a depth sufficient to provide a depth of backfill cover over the top of the pipe of Between the range of 30- 42 -inches. Greater pipe cover depths may be necessary on vertical curves or to provide necessary clearance beneath existing pipes conduits, drains, drainage structures, or SECTION IV Page 17 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications other obstructions encountered at normal pipe grades. Measurement of pipe cover depth shall be made vertically from the outside top of pipe to finished ground or pavement surface elevation. 201-1.6.2. LIMITED TRENCH WIDTHS A. Trenches shall be excavated to a width which shall provide adequate working space and sidewall clearances for proper pipe installation, jointing, and embedment. However, minimum permissible sidewall clearances between the installed pipe and each trench wall, expressed in inches, shall be as follows: Nominal Pipe Size, in Inches Nominal Sidewall Clearance, in Inches 60 24 54 21 48 19 36 or smaller 12 B. Stipulated minimum sidewall clearances are not minimum average clearances but are minimum clear distances which shall be required. C. Cutting trench banks on slopes to reduce earth load to prevent sliding and caving will be permitted only in areas where the increased trench width will not interface with surface features or encroach on right-of-way limits. Slopes shall not extend lower than one foot above the top of the pipe. 201-1.6.3. MECHANICAL EXCAVATION The use of mechanical equipment will not be permitted in locations where its operation would cause damage to trees, buildings, culverts, and other existing property, utilities, or structures above or below ground. In all such locations, hand excavating methods shall be used. Mechanical excavation equipment used for trench excavation shall be of the type, design, and construction, and shall be so operated, such that the rough trench excavation bottom elevation can be controlled, that uniform trench widths and vertical sidewalls are obtained at least from an elevation one foot above the top of the installed pipe to the bottom of the trench, and that trench alignment is such that the pipe when accurately laid to specified alignment will be centered in the trench with adequate clearance between the pipe and sidewalls of the trench. Undercutting the trench sidewall to obtain clearance shall not be permitted. 201-1.6.4. PAVEMENT CUTTING Cuts in concrete pavement, asphalt pavement, and asphaltic base pavements shall be no larger than necessary to provide adequate working space for proper installation of pipe and appurtenances. Cutting shall be started with an asphalt or concrete saw in a manner which will provide a clean groove for the full depth of pavement along each side of the trench and along the perimeter of cuts for structures. Asphalt pavement and asphaltic base pavement over trenches excavated for pipelines shall be removed so that a shoulder not less than 6 -inches in width at any point is left between the cut edge of the pavement and the top edge of the trench. Trench width at the bottom shall not be greater than at the top and no undercutting shall be permitted. Pavement cuts shall be made to and between straight or accurately marked curved lines which, unless otherwise required, shall be parallel to the centerline of the trench. Pavement removed for connections to existing lines or structures shall not be greater than necessary for the installation as determined by the Engineer. Road restoration shall be full road width. 201-1.6.5. ARTIFICIAL FOUNDATIONS IN TRENCHES Whenever so ordered by the Engineer due to the presence of unsuitable material at the designed depth, the Contractor shall excavate to such depth below grade as the Engineer may direct and the trench bottom shall be brought to grade with such material as the Engineer may order installed. All piling, concrete, or other SECTION IV Page 18 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications foundations made necessary by unstable soil shall be installed as directed by the Engineer. Compensation for extra excavation and piling, concrete, or other foundations, except where provided by contract unit prices, shall be made in accordance with the contract provisions for extra work. 201-1.6.6. BELL HOLES Bell holes shall provide adequate clearance for tools and methods used in installing pipe. No part of any bell or coupling shall be in contact with the trench bottom, trench walls, or granular embedment when the pipe is jointed. 201-1.7. UNDERCUT OF EXCAVATIONS If the bottom of any structure or trench excavation is below that shown on the Drawings or specified because of Contractor error, convenience, or unsuitable subgrade due the Contractor's excavation methods, the Contractor shall refill to normal grade with approved fill at his own cost. Fill material and compaction method shall be as directed by the Engineer. 201-1.8. STABILIZATION OF EXCAVATIONS Subgrades for concrete structures and trench bottoms shall be firm, dense, and thoroughly compacted and consolidated; shall be free from mud and muck; and shall be sufficiently stable to remain firm and intact. Subgrades for concrete structures or trench bottoms which are otherwise solid, but which becomes mucky on top due to construction operations, shall be reinforced with one or more layers of crushed rock or gravel. Not more than 1/2 -inch depth of mud or muck shall be allowed to remain on stabilized trench bottoms when the pipe bedding material is placed thereon. The finished elevation of stabilized subgrades for concrete structures shall not be above subgrade elevations shown on the Drawings. All stabilization work shall be performed by and at the expense of the Contractor. 201-1.9. BACKFILL AND COMPACTION 201-1.9.1. MATERIALS A. To the maximum extent available, excess earth obtained from structure and trench excavation shall be used for the construction of fills and embankments. B. Materials used as backfill shall be free from rocks or stones larger than 1 -1/2 -inches in their greatest dimension; brush or vegetation, stumps, logs, roots, debris, and organic or other deleterious materials; and must be acceptable to the Engineer. C. Backfilling and construction of fills and embankments during freezing weather shall not be done except by permission of the Engineer. No backfill, fill, or embankment materials shall be installed on frozen surfaces, nor shall frozen materials be in any backfill, fill or embankment. 201-1.9.2. BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Backfill materials shall be placed in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 8 -inches in un - compacted thickness. Material deposited in piles or windrows by excavating and hauling equipment shall be spread and leveled before compaction. B. Each layer of material being compacted shall have the optimum uniform moisture content to ensure satisfactory compaction. The Contractor shall be required to add water and harrow, disc, blade, or otherwise work the material in each layer to ensure uniform moisture content and adequate compaction. SECTION IV Page 19 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications C. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling or other method acceptable to the Engineer to 95% of relative density at optimum moisture content as determined by Modified Proctor Method, ASTM D1557, latest revision. D. Whenever a trench passes through a backfill or embankment area, material shall be placed and compacted to an elevation 12 -inches above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. E. Backfill and compact excavations and construct embankments for structures according to the schedule listed in Table 201-B. Backfill and bedding schedule for pipes is listed in Table 201-C. (Modified Proctor for compaction shall be as determined by ASTM D-1557, latest revision). F. Pipe shall be laid in open trenches unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. G. Excavations shall be backfilled to the original grade or as indicated on the Drawings. Deviation from this grade because of settling shall be corrected. Backfill operation shall be performed to comply with all rules and regulations and in such a manner that it does not create a nuisance or safety hazard. H. Embankments shall be constructed true to lines, grades and cross sections shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer or the city. Embankments shall be placed in successive layers of not more than 8 -inches in thickness, loose measure, for the full width of the embankment. As far as practicable, traffic over the work during the construction phase shall be distributed so as to cover the maximum surface area of each layer. I. If the Contractor requests approval to backfill material utilizing lifts and/or methods other than those specified herein, such request shall be in writing to the Engineer. Approval will be considered only after the Contractor has performed tests, at the Contractor's expense, to identify the material used and density achieved throughout the backfill area utilizing the method of backfill requested. The Engineer's approval shall be in writing. 201-1.9.3. STRUCTURE FOUNDATION PREPARATION The existing ground beneath proposed tankage, building foundations and equipment base slabs and slabs on grade shall be removed and the area proof rolled. Proof -rolling should consist of at least 10 passes of a self-propelled vibrator compactor capable of delivering a minimum impact force of 30,000 to 35,000 pounds per drum to the soils. Each pass should overlap the preceding pass by 30 percent to insure complete coverage. Backfilled areas shall be compacted in 8 -inch layers to a density of not less than 95 percent of Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM D1557, latest revision, for a depth of not less than 2 -feet below the bottom of the foundations or concrete slabs. Any unsuitable foundation material shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. Slabs on Grade: Subgrades for concrete slabs shall be removed, backfilled, and compacted to the required grade. The top 2 -feet of concrete slab subgrade in cut sections and all fill material shall be compacted in 8 - inch layers to a density of not less than 95 percent of Modified Proctor Dry Density as determined by ASTM D1557, latest revision. 201-1.10. DRAINAGE FROM EXCAVATIONS Trenches across roadways, driveways, walks, or other traffic ways adjacent to drainage ditches or water courses shall not be backfilled prior to completion of backfilling the trench on the upstream side of the traffic way to prevent impounding water after the pipe has been laid. Bridges and other temporary structures required to maintain traffic across such unfilled trenches shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor. Backfilling shall be done so that water will not accumulate in unfilled or partially filled trenches. SECTION IV Page 20 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications All material deposited in roadway ditches or other water courses crossed by the line of trench shall be removed immediately after backfilling is completed and the original sections, grades, and contours of ditches or water courses shall be restored. Surface drainage shall not be obstructed longer than necessary. 201-1.11. FINAL GRADING After other outside work has been finished, and backfilling completed and settled, all areas on the site of the work which are to be graded shall be brought to grade within the tolerance off 0.1 feet at the indicated elevations, slopes, and contours where seeding or sodding is not required or, where sodding is required within three (3) inches of finished grade. Use of graders or other power equipment will be permitted for final grading and dressing of slopes, provided the result is uniform and equivalent to hand work. All surfaces shall be graded to secure effective drainage. Unless otherwise shown, a slope of at least one percent shall be provided. After grading and where seeding is required, topsoil shall be evenly spread to a minimum depth of six (6) inches. Topsoil shall be from an Engineer approved source and shall be free of trash, debris and surface vegetation. Grading and surfacing shall be completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner. 201-1.12. EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL Insofar as needed, suitable excavated materials shall be used in fills and embankments as shown on the Drawings. All suitable excess excavated material shall be placed at an on-site stockpile area as directed by the city. The Contractor shall segregate different types of excavated materials (i.e. sands, clayey sands) as much as possible in the stockpile areas. All unsuitable materials shall be disposed of by the Contractor offsite, in a legal manner. The Contractor shall slope and compact the stockpile with a light roller type vehicle to maintain stability. The Contractor shall maintain proper soil and erosion control measures. 201-1.13. SETTLEMENT The Contractor shall be responsible for all settlement of backfill, fills, and embankments which may occur within the guarantee period stipulated in the General Conditions of the Contract. The Contractor shall make, or cause to be made, all repairs or replacements made necessary by settlement within 30 days after notice from the Engineer or the city. SECTION IV Page 21 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications TABLE 201-A STANDARD SIZES OF COARSE AGGREGATE AMOUNTS FINER THEN EACH LABORATORY SIEVE (SQUARE OPENINGS), MASS PERCENT TABLE 201-B COMPACTION AND BACKFILL SCHEDULE FOR STRUCTURES Area U. S. Sieve Size, Percent Passing By Weight Aggregate Nominal Size Structural Fill (Section 201-2.2., Structural Fill) 8 -inch lifts compacted to 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor maximum dry density under pavement). Fill should not be placed over any in-place soils until those layers have been compacted to 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor maximum dry density under pavement). Around structures, foundations and slabs (minimum 5 -foot outside structure) Structural Fill (Section 201-2.2., Structural Fill) 8 -inch lifts compacted to 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor maximum dry density under pavement). Use light rubber -tired or vibratory plate compactors. From cleared existing surface to subgrade for paved and gravel roadwaydry surfaces Common Fill ( Section 201-2.2., Common Fill) 12 -inch lifts, compacted to 95% Modified Proctor density maximum (98%Modified Proctor maximum dry density under pavement). Disturbed area requiring seeding and mulching Size Square 1 -1/2 -in 1 -in. 3/4 -in. 1/2 -in. 3/8 -in. No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 50 No. Openings 57 1 -in. to No. 4 100% 95%- 100% -- 25%- 60% -- 0-10% 0-5% -- -- 68 3/4 -in. to No.8 -- 100% 90%- 100% -- 30%- 65% 5%- 25% 0- 10% 0-5% -- 78 1/2 -in. to No. 8 -- -- 100% 90%- 100% 40%- 75% 5%- 25% 0- 10% 0-5% -- 89 3/8 -in. to No. 16 -- -- -- 100% 90%- 100% 20%- 55% 5%- 30% 0-10% 0-5% TABLE 201-B COMPACTION AND BACKFILL SCHEDULE FOR STRUCTURES Area Material Compaction Beneath structures, foundations, slabs, and pavements. (minimum 2 -foot depth below concrete foundation bottom) Structural Fill (Section 201-2.2., Structural Fill) 8 -inch lifts compacted to 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor maximum dry density under pavement). Fill should not be placed over any in-place soils until those layers have been compacted to 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor maximum dry density under pavement). Around structures, foundations and slabs (minimum 5 -foot outside structure) Structural Fill (Section 201-2.2., Structural Fill) 8 -inch lifts compacted to 95% Modified Proctor maximum dry density (98% Modified Proctor maximum dry density under pavement). Use light rubber -tired or vibratory plate compactors. From cleared existing surface to subgrade for paved and gravel roadwaydry surfaces Common Fill ( Section 201-2.2., Common Fill) 12 -inch lifts, compacted to 95% Modified Proctor density maximum (98%Modified Proctor maximum dry density under pavement). Disturbed area requiring seeding and mulching Topsoil 2 -inch to 4 -inch lifts, compacted to 85% Modified Proctor maximum dry density. 202. OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from damage or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the city of Clearwater thereof. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a Florida registered Professional Surveyor and Mapper (PSM). Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector/Project Manager for the approved means of removal and replacement. SECTION IV Page 22 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • 203. DEWATERING • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 203-1. GENERAL The work to be performed under this Section shall include the design and installation of a temporary dewatering system(s) until completion of construction to remove subsurface waters from structure or utility trench excavations as required. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment; labor and materials necessary to remove storm water or subsurface groundwater from excavation areas in accordance with the requirements set forth, as shown on the Drawings, and/or geotechnical report. Qualifications: For major dewatering activities the temporary dewatering system shall be designed, installed and operated by a firm who regularly engages in the design, installation and operation of dewatering systems and who is fully experienced, reputable, and qualified in the design, installation and operation of such dewatering systems. The firm shall have a successful record of operation for a minimum of five (5) years prior to bid date. The dewatering system firm shall have experience for installation of at least three (3) successful dewatering operations of a similar nature and size in the state of Florida. The dewatering system shall be developed to the point that it is capable of dewatering the site surrounding all structures or utility trenches as shown on the Drawings. Each dewatering system shall be capable of dewatering and maintaining groundwater levels at the respective excavations. Observation wells shall be constructed for the purpose of testing each system. The Contractor shall at all times during construction provide and maintain proper equipment and facilities to remove and dispose of all water entering excavations, and shall keep such excavations dry so as to obtain a satisfactory undisturbed subgrade foundation condition until the fill, structures or pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural levels. In critical dewatering situations, the Contractor shall have on hand at the construction site, backup dewatering pumps and other critical components of the dewatering system that are operational and could be used in the event of breakdowns of the primary equipment. The Contractor's plan shall include temporary culverts, barricades, and other protective measures to prevent damage to property or injury to any person or persons. Prior to construction, the dewatering plan shall be prepared and submitted to the city's Engineering Department, Public Utilities Department, Industrial Pretreatment Program (IPP) Coordinator, Wastewater Environmental Manager and the Public Utilities Department Director or Assistant Director for review and approval. It shall include site-specific notes and details presenting the Contractor's proposed dewatering and disposal methods. The city will field -inspect the dewatering operation throughout construction. All costs for dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per linear foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 203-1.1. Definition of Terms for Dewatering System Minor Dewatering Activity: A single stage well point dewatering system, operating for less than 30 days total duration, and not requiring a Notice of Dewatering Activity filed with the local Water Management District. Major Dewatering Activity: Any major dewatering system, operating for more than 30 days duration, requiring a Notice of Dewatering Activity filed with the local Water Management District. Major dewatering systems shall include, but not be limited to, multi -stage well point dewatering systems, drilled horizontal or vertical sock drain systems, dewatering deep well pump systems and educator dewatering systems. SECTION IV Page 23 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 203-2. OBSERVATION WELLS For major dewatering activities, prior to excavation, the Contractor shall install groundwater observation wells at locations as directed and designed by the Contractor's Geotechnical Engineer and as approved by the Engineer adjacent to structures or underground utility under construction for the purpose of monitoring water levels during excavations. Where required, the observation well construction shall consist of well screen, casing, and cap of approved size and material of construction. The observation well shall be placed in a 2 -1/2 -inch bore hole which shall be carried to an elevation at least 4 feet below the final bottom grade of structure or utility trench excavation. The annular space surrounding the intake point and the riser pipe shall be sealed in such a way as to prevent infiltration from surface water. The observation well shall be developed in such a manner as to ensure proper indication of subsurface water levels adjacent to the well. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the observation wells and for observing and recording the elevation of groundwater until the structure or utilities requiring excavation are completed and backfilled. Each observation well shall be observed and recorded daily. Measurements shall be supplied daily to the Engineer and the city. The Engineer may require that the observation wells reflect true groundwater levels by adding water to the well, recording the drop in the level from the time the water was added. Any plugged observation well shall be redeveloped, if necessary, to indicate true groundwater levels. Observation wells shall be fully grouted and abandoned when the dewatering system is removed as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer, and in a manner acceptable to the Geotechnical Engineer. 203-3. PUMPING AND DRAINAGE - GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipes, except sub drains, shall be laid "in the dry". In the dry shall be defined to be within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content of the soil. The Contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity under drain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils 2 -feet below the proposed bottom of excavation and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures. As a minimum, the water level shall be 2 -feet below the trench bottom. Well or sump installations shall be constructed with proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil from the surrounding soils. Dewatering by trench pumping shall not be permitted if migration of fine-grained natural material from bottom, side walls, or bedding material may occur. A well point system, trench drain, sump pump operation, or other dewatering method shall be utilized to maintain the excavation in a dry condition for preparation of the trench bottom and until the structures or pipes to be built thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural levels. No water shall be allowed to contact masonry or concrete within 24 hours after being placed. Water entering the excavation from surface runoff shall be collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to sumps, and pumped from the excavation to maintain the excavation bottom free from standing water. The Contractor shall take all additional necessary precautions and prevent uplift of any structure during construction. SECTION IV Page 24 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV—Technical Specifications Flotation of structures or piping shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages which may result from failure of the dewatering system. The conveying of water other than storm water surface runoff in open ditches or trenches will not be allowed unless prior approval is obtained. Permission to use any drainage ditches, storm sewers, drains or other storm drainage facilities for water conveyance or disposal purposes during dewatering operations shall be obtained from the controlling authority having jurisdiction. Any requirements and costs for such use shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. However, the Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or blocking up the flow in the drainage facilities, and the Contractor shall leave the facilities unrestricted and as clean as originally found. Any damage to existing facilities shall be repaired or restored, as directed by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction, at no cost to the city or the Owner of the facilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. The Contractor may be required to divert the water from the dewatering process to a location determined by the Engineer or city Project Manager or Inspector and obtain a discharge permit from Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP). Alternatively, if Contractor elects to contain produced groundwater on the project site, a dewatering plan must be submitted to the Engineer or city for approval (even if a discharge permit is not required). The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to preclude the accidental discharge of fuel, oil, or other contaminants in order to prevent adverse effects on groundwater or receiving water quality. 203-3.1. DEWATERING EQUIPMENT The dewatering equipment shall be standard dewatering equipment of proven ability as designed, manufactured, and installed by firms having experience in the design and production of such equipment. The equipment furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of surface or subsurface waters that may accumulate in the excavation. Flotation and migration of fines shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages that may result from the operation and/or failure of this system. Sound levels for dewatering pumps shall meet governmental agencies ordinance levels. Sound levels in excess of such ordinance are sufficient cause to have the work halted until equipment can be quieted to these levels Work stoppage by the Engineer, city or other governmental agencies for excessive noise shall not relieve the Contractor of the other portions of this specification including, but not limited to contract time and contract price. Engine -driven pumps shall be equipped with critical grade type silencers, sound blankets or other types of sound mitigation measures to comply with Noise Ordinances. Engine driven dewatering pumps shall have a maximum rating of 80 decibels at a distance of 5 feet from the engine for sound attenuation, nor shall the pump engine noise exceed 50 decibels at a distance of 50 feet from the engine. There may be practical and feasible, electrical "power drops" and electric motor -driven equipment shall be used in lieu of portable generators. The dewatering system shall operate in such a manner as to preserve the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed structures or utilities and to preserve the integrity of any adjacent structures. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished following backfilling and compaction, and after the Contractor and the Engineer both agree, that the system is no longer required. All materials and equipment constituting the dewatering system shall be removed by the Contractor. SECTION IV Page 25 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Immediately upon completion of the dewatering operations, the Contractor shall remove all of his equipment, materials, and supplies from the site of the Work, remove all surplus materials and debris, fill in all holes or excavations, grout all groundwater monitoring wells installed for the dewatering operations and grade the site to elevations of the surface levels which existed before the work started. The site shall be thoroughly cleaned and graded as directed by the Engineer and approved by the city. 203-3.2. DEWATERING CONSIDERATIONS The Contractor shall install a temporary dewatering system for the removal of subsurface water encountered during construction of the proposed structures or underground utilities. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of storm or subsurface waters which may accumulate in the excavations. If well points are used, Contractor shall adequately space well points to maintain the necessary dewatering. Provide suitable filter sand and/or other means to prevent pumping of fine sands and silts. A continual check shall be maintained by the Contractor to ensure that the subsurface soil is not being removed by the dewatering operations. Pumping from well points shall be continuous and standby pumps shall be provided. The Contractor's proposed method of dewatering shall include groundwater observation wells to determine the water level during construction. Observation wells shall be installed along pipelines as required to verify depth to water level and at locations approved by the Engineer. At all times, site grading shall promote drainage. Surface runoff shall be diverted from excavations. Water entering the excavation from the surface shall be collected in shallow ditches around the perimeter of the excavation, drained to sumps, and pumped or drained by gravity to maintain an excavation bottom free from standing water. Flotation shall be prevented by the Contractor by maintaining a positive and continuous removal of water. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all damages which may result from failure to adequately keep excavations dewatered. The Contractor shall construct and place all pipelines, structures, concrete work, structural fill, backfill and bedding material in -the -dry. If subsurface water is encountered, utilize suitable equipment to adequately dewater the excavation so that it will be "in -the -dry" for work and pipe laying. For the purposes of this specification, "in -the -dry" is defined to be within ±2 percent of the optimum moisture content of the soil. A well point system or other dewatering method accepted by the respective jurisdictional agency (agencies) shall be utilized, if necessary, to maintain the excavation in a dry condition for preparation of the trench bottom and for pipe laying. The Contractor shall not make the final 24 -inches of excavation until the water level is a minimum of 2 -feet below proposed bottom of the excavation. Dewatering by trench pumping will not be permitted if migration of fine-grained natural material from bottom, side walls, or bedding material will occur. In the event that satisfactory dewatering cannot be accomplished due to subsurface conditions or where dewatering could damage existing structures, obtain the Owner's and the Engineer's approval of wet trench construction procedures before commencing construction. 203-3.3. DISPOSAL OF PUMPED WATER Discharge water to on-site disposal areas (if shown on the Drawings) or as required by permits. The Contractor shall dispose of water from the Work in a suitable manner without damage to adjacent properties or facilities. No water shall be discharged without appropriate treatment for adverse contaminants. No water shall be drained in work built or under construction without prior consent from the Owner. Water shall be filtered to remove sand and fine soil particles before disposal into any drainage system. SECTION IV Page 26 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Discharge water from dewatering operations to temporary infiltration pits, if possible. Discharge to storm sewers, canals, stream, or wetlands, only if specifically allowed for in Dewatering Permit. No discharges from dewatering operations shall be allowed to wastewater collection systems or wastewater pumping stations at any time. In no case, shall discharges from dewatering operations result in turbidity reaching wetlands or any waterways. If turbidity exceeds limits allowed by jurisdictional permitting agency(ies), stop all activities, and install additional erosion and sedimentation control as required by the Southwest Florida Water Management District or the FDEP. Flooding of streets, roadways, driveways, or private property shall not be permitted during dewatering activities. Contractor shall not dam -up, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, roadway pavements or other structures. For proper water discharges and disposal from dewatering operations, the Contractor may be required to divert or provide discharge piping to transport the water to a suitable place for legal discharge, as determined by the Engineer and the city. 203-3.4. GROUNDWATER TREATMENT (IF REQUIRED) If the concentrations of tested groundwater quality parameters exceed those allowable in the FDEP Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from any Non -Contaminated Site Activity (62- 621.300(2), F.A.C.), the Contractor shall treat the effluent discharged from the dewatering system. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the city Engineering Department and discuss the parameters that exceed allowable limits. The Contractor shall meet with the FDEP to determine treatment and disposal alternatives that are acceptable to the FDEP. The Contractor shall apply for and obtain any and all permits and/or treatment approvals that FDEP requires including but not limited to the following: 1. Generic Permit for Discharges from Petroleum Contaminated Sites (62-621.300(1)). Allows discharges from sites with automotive gasoline, aviation gasoline, jet fuel, or diesel fuel contamination; or, 2. Permit for all Other Contaminated Sites (62-04; 62-302; 62-620 & 62-660). The coverage is available only through the individual NPDES permit issued by FDEP, allows discharges from sites with general contaminant issues i.e. ground water and/or soil contamination other than petroleum fuel contamination; or, 3. Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non -Contaminated Site Activity (62-621.300(2), F.A.C.); or, 4. Generic Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large or Small Construction Activities (62- 621.300(4)(a), F.A.C.); or, 5. An Individual Wastewater Permit (62-604.300(8) (a). The Contractor shall implement the appropriate treatment that is acceptable to FDEP, the Engineer and the city to attain compliance for all excess limits encountered during dewatering activities. Treatment may include, but is not limited to: Chemical, Physical, Biological, Electrolysis, Ion Exchange, Aeration, Activated Carbon Absorption, or any combination of the these. The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize the spread of contamination into uncontaminated areas. Provide for the health and safety of all workers at the job site and make provisions necessary for the health and safety of the public that may be exposed to any potentially hazardous conditions. Ensure provision SECTION IV Page 27 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications adhere to all applicable laws, rules or regulations covering hazardous conditions and will be in a manner commensurate with the level of severity of the conditions. If necessary, provide contamination assessment and remediation personnel to handle site assessment, determine the course of action necessary for site security and perform the necessary steps under applicable laws, rules and regulations for additional assessment and/or remediation work to resolve the contamination issue. Delineate the contamination area(s) and any staging or holding area required and develop a work plan that will provide the schedule of projected completion dates for the final resolution of the contamination issue. Maintain jurisdiction over activities inside any delineated contamination areas and any associated staging or holding areas. Be responsible for the health and safety of workers within the delineated areas. Provide continuous access to representatives of regulatory or enforcement agencies having jurisdiction. 203-4. PERMIT REQUIREMENTS The dewatering of any excavation areas and the disposal of water during construction shall be in strict accordance with the latest revisions of the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), and all local and state government rules and regulations. The Contractor shall be responsible for submitting the Notice of Intent to use the Generic Permit for the Discharge of Groundwater from Dewatering Operations and associated fee in accordance with FDEP Requirements, F.A.C. 62-621.300(2)(b) and must receive written notice from the FDEP prior to discharging produced groundwater into the city's streets, storm sewers or waterways. The Contractor shall obtain and pay all respective fees for all local, state, and federal permits required applicable to the withdrawal, treatment and disposal/discharge of water produced from the dewatering operations, prior to the start of work. Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring and complying with all permits required to discharge produced water from dewatering and shall protect waterways from turbidity during the operation. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits per FDEP "Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non -Contaminated Site Activity" Chapter 62-621.300(2), FAC. The Contractor shall have on-site and available for review the analytical testing results performed in accordance with FDEP Chapter 62-621.300(2), FAC. Consumptive Use Permit (CUP): If pumping requirements exceed certain limits, the Contractor shall pay for and obtain a CUP from the regional Water Management District for such pumped volumes. If a consumptive use permit is required by the local Water Management District, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining said permit. Comply with all conditions of the Dewatering Permit issued by the Water Management District. Apply for permit extensions or modifications, when required. All water produced from dewatering shall be pumped from the trench or other excavation and shall be disposed of in strict accordance with applicable permits. The Contractor will be allowed to discharge product water from dewatering into storm sewers, or ditches having adequate capacity, canals or suitable disposal pits, or other surface waters in accordance with the Dewatering Plan, provided that the water has been sampled and tested by the Contractor, is in compliance with the concentration limits specified in 62- 621.300(2) FAC, and the Contractor has obtained an FDEP Generic Permit for the production of groundwater. The frequency of water sampling and testing shall be determined by the Engineer based on existing conditions and field observations. SECTION IV Page 28 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 204. UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated from under pipes, structures and roadways and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off-site at their expense. The limits and depths of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. Approved replacement materials shall meet the requirements of Section 304. • 204-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of cubic yards of clean fill placed as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. Included in the cost of removing unsuitable material is the cost to place suitable material/clean fill. 204-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 205. UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the current code adopted by the American Public Works Association: SAFETY RED Electric Power Lines, Cables, Conduit and Lighting Cables HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas, Oil, Steam, Petroleum or Gaseous Materials SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Communication, Alarm or Signal Lines, Cables or Conduit SAFETY BLUE Potable Water SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems and Drain Lines PURPLE Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry Lines WHITE Proposed Excavation PINK Temporary Survey Markings Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be six-inch (6") x three inch (3") and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be four - inch (4") x two inch (2") and be placed on the curb face. 206. CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. SECTION IV Page 29 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION W —Technical Specifications Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 206-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 206-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 207. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 207-1. GENERAL Erosion and sediment control shall conform to the requirements of the FDOT Standard Specifications for Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution. Contractor shall use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the city of Clearwater Standard Indices. Contractor shall prepare and submit a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit in accordance with FDEP criteria for an NPDES construction activity permit. Visit www.dep.state.fl.us/water/stormwater/npdes for more information. Contractor shall obtain a FDEP generic permit for the discharge of produced groundwater. All soil erosion and sediment control measures shall be installed prior to disturbance and maintained through project completion. 207-2. TRAINING OF PERSONNEL The city may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current FDEP Florida Stormwater, Erosion, and Sedimentation Control Inspector Training & Certification. All personnel working on the Project shall complete illicit discharge training once per calendar year. Contractor shall provide documentation to the city prior to Notice to Proceed (NTP). Example of training and training sign -in sheet will be provided by the city to the Contractor at the Pre - Construction Meeting. 207-3. STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other temporary vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. SECTION IV Page 30 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications III 207-4. PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES • • Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an un -stabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 207-5. PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) or the city of Clearwater Standard Indices, or equals approved by the City Engineer before installation. 207-6. SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days after finished grade is established. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded and maintained by the Contractor prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 207-7. UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: no more than 400 linear feet of trench shall be open at any one time; and, wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. No trench shall be open at the end of a workday, weekdays, or weekends. 207-8. MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked daily by the Contractor, especially after each rainfall. The erosion and sedimentation control devices shall be cleaned out and/or repaired as required so sediment removal for the device does not exceed fifty (50) percent of its capacity. Contractor shall prepare and submit a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) Construction Inspection Report on a weekly basis and within 24 hours of a storm that is 0.50 inches or greater. No additional payment will be made to the Contractor for the re-establishment of erosion control devices which may become damaged, destroyed, or otherwise rendered unsuitable for their intended function during the construction of the Project. Near completion of the project, after obtaining written approval by the Engineer, the Contractor shall dismantle and remove the temporary devices used for sediment control during construction. All erosion control devices in seeded areas shall be left in place until the grass is established. Seed areas around devices, and mulch after removing or filling temporary control devices. Cleanup all areas. 207-9. COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements as determined by the city's project manager or inspector may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". SECTION IV Page 31 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 208. CONSTRUCTION AND REPAIR OF SEAWALLS AND OTHER BEACH EROSION CONTROL STRUCTURES 208-1. EXISTING SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS Existing seawalls and revetments on natural water bodies may be replaced with a revetment or with a vertical seawall with the provision of rip rap placed at the base of the wall up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall. Revetments and seawalls may be replaced with a vertical seawall in manmade water bodies, provided that the seawall is within the property line and maintains the established shoreline. 208-2. TOP OF CAP ELEVATION The top of cap elevation for all replacement and new seawalls and seawall caps shall not exceed 4.8 feet North American Vertical Datum (NAVD 88) If the top of a seawall cap is constructed at an elevation differing from the adjacent property owner top of cap elevation by greater than one foot, then a return wall is required to sufficiently provide for the break in grade at the property line. Seawalls exceeding 4.8 feet NAVD 88 in height prior to the effective date of this Section may be maintained, repaired, and replaced to their current height. 208-3. SEAWALLS AND REVETMENTS LOCATED SEAWARD OF THE CCL Seawalls and revetments located seaward of the coastal construction setback line are controlled by regulations of the Division of Beaches and Shores of the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. Replacement of a seawall or revetment that is located seaward of the coastal construction setback line necessitates submission of a permit application to the state department of environmental protection. 208-4. PLACEMENT OF NEW SEAWALL The placement of a new seawall waterward of an existing seawall is permitted, subject to the following conditions: A. A Florida registered professional engineer must certify the new seawall design. B. The new seawall shall not extend more than 18 inches from the waterward face of the original alignment of the existing vertical seawall location. C. The new seawall shall be placed vertically plumb. D. Placing a seawall in front of an existing seawall shall only be permitted once unless the seawall behind the new seawall is removed. E. Existing seawall sections that interfere with new seawall location shall be removed. F. The new seawall shall include an adequate closure of gaps at each property line. G. For zoning purposes, the setbacks for the property will be measured from either the property line or the waterside of the original seawall slab, whichever is more restrictive, and will not be adjusted to accommodate the new seawall addition. For purposes of pier construction, the shore normal dimensions will be measured from the waterside of the original seawall slab. SECTION IV Page 32 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 208-5. POST CONSTRUCTION SURVEY Prior to final inspection and approval of a new or replacement seawall or seawall cap, a post -construction survey shall be required. Repairs of existing seawalls and seawall caps which do not alter the height or location shall not be subject to this requirement. 208-6. RIP -RAP On all -natural waterways, an apron of rip -rap shall be placed at the base of all new and repaired seawalls up to the mean high water line for the entire length of the seawall to absorb the wave energy and protect the underlying soft earth or sand from being carried away, as well as to provide habitat for desirable marine species. This rip -rap shall be required at the base of all new seawalls and at the time that an existing seawall is repaired where the replacement constitutes greater than 50 percent of the entire length of the seawall or includes the replacement of a panel. 208-7. RETAINING WALL IN LIEU OF VERTICAL SEAWALL A retaining wall may be built as an alternative to a vertical seawall, provided that all activities, including dredging, filling, slope grading, or equipment access and similar activities and all portions of the wall are located landward of the mean high water line. 209. MAINTENANCE OF OPERATIONS • 209-1. GENERAL This Section sets forth the requirements for scheduling and performing the work to keep existing utilities in continuous, reliable operation. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to maintain existing utilities service during construction. Contractor shall also keep on hand adequate equipment, supplies, and incidentals to repair pipe breaks and to contain and dispose of all spilled materials. • 209-2. EXECUTION A. Before any work begins, the Contractor shall submit for city review a Maintenance of Flow Plan. The Maintenance of Flow Plan shall include all procedures to be performed by the Contractor to maintain continuous operation of the city's existing utility services. The Plan shall also include emergency response and remedial action measures. Maintenance of Flow Plan: 1. The Contractor shall prepare a Maintenance of Flow Plan with two points of contact that describes in detail the work that will be performed by the Contractor to maintain continuous operation of the city's existing utility services. Maintenance of Flow Plan shall address the temporary and permanent flow diversion of utilities and other city facilities. 2. Temporary diversion of the utility flows shall be done using a minimum of two (2) bypass pumps (one duty, one standby) to pump from the upstream manhole to the downstream manhole. Bypass pumps shall have hospital grade sound attenuation. The Contractor shall obtain peak wet weather flow rates in the utility from the city and shall demonstrate in the Maintenance of Flow Plan that adequate pumping capacity is provided to accommodate peak wet weather flow. The Contractor and city personnel that are experienced in the SECTION IV Page 33 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications collection system shall determine the float levels in the field, pump on, standby or lag pump on, and high-level alarm. The Contractor shall have full responsibility for the operation and management of the temporary diversion/ bypass. The high-level alarm shall be connected to an auto dialer or remote monitoring system to notify the Contractor of an alarm condition. The bypass pump suction manhole shall use the collection system for a temporary wet well storage; however, surcharging in the existing utility system shall be limited. Once the high-level float alarm is triggered, it shall allow enough time for emergency Contractor personnel to arrive on scene and resolve the problem prior to any utility overflows. The bypass suction and discharge pipes may require the removal of the manhole tops which will result in excess odor escaping from the manholes. The Contractor shall provide a means to seal odors within the bypass manholes to minimize odors during the temporary diversion. 3. The Maintenance of Flow Plan shall include a sequence of construction with projected time, in days, for each step in the sequence. 4. If the work required to maintain utility operation must occur during evening, night or weekend hours, the Contractor shall notify the affected residents in advance of the projected work. The Contractor shall reimburse the city for overtime work, including inspector overtime, in excess of regular working hours. The Contractor must also get permission from city Project Manager before working outside of Noise Ordinance hours. 5. Identify the person(s) responsible for executing the Maintenance of Flow Plan and the systems to be put in place for monitoring the existing utility system's ability to maintain flow. B. All utility relocation work shall be completed prior to construction. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with the site, including the locations, sizes, and conditions of the existing utilities in and around the work zones where relocation of existing utilities is required. The location of storm sewer inlets, drainage swales, and runoff patterns should be identified, and a Plan developed to contain potential releases. C. The Contractor shall carry out his operations in accordance with all applicable OSHA regulations, including confined space entry requirements, as well as local, city, and state requirements, and in accordance with the approved MOT plan. In addition, the Contractor shall protect the public from harm while performing the work by using barricades, warning lights and other means as necessary. D. The Contractor shall keep existing utilities in service during all phases of construction and coordinate any system shutdowns with the city sufficiently in advance to provide alternative service. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 10 days' notice. Contractor shall protect the city's utility system for any spills or overflows during construction. The city's Project Manager and Dispatch (727-462-6633) shall be notified of any spills or overflows immediately. E. Any temporary work, facilities, roads, walks, protection of existing structures, piping, blind flanges, valves, equipment, etc. that may be required shall be furnished and maintained by the Contractor. The cost shall be included in the appropriate bid items. F. The Contractor shall schedule the work in such a manner so that all existing utility systems are maintained in continuous operation. All short-term or partial utility system shutdowns shall be approved in writing by the city. If, in the opinion of the city, a shutdown is not required in order for the Contractor to perform the work, the Contractor shall utilize alternative methods to accomplish the work. The city shall be provided a minimum of ten (10) business days' notice of Contractor's need for any existing utility system shutdown or if there is a need of assistance from the Public Utilities Department. Contractor must also provide the city with at least two (2) business days' notice before Contractor is allowed to work at city facilities. G. Required shutdowns shall not begin until all materials are on -hand, pre -assembled, as possible, and ready for installation. Upon commencement of the shutdown period, the Contractor shall proceed with the work continuously, start to finish, until the work is completed, and the system is tested, cleared for service, and ready for operation. If the Contractor completes all required work before SECTION IV Page 34 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications the specified shutdown period has ended, the city may immediately place the system back in service. H. The city shall have the sole authority to prohibit or order work stopped. The city reserves the right to cancel scheduled shutdowns if conditions warrant. Delays to the Contractor caused by cancellations will be considered in evaluating requests for a time extension. They will not be considered an entitlement to additional compensation. However, compensation may be considered at city's sole discretion. I. During inclement weather, all work which might be damaged or rendered inferior by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of the city as to suspensions shall be final and binding. During suspension of the work from any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and protected to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise, if the city shall so direct surplus materials shall be removed. Contractor shall protect the city's utility system from inflow during inclement weather during the construction. J. The Contractor shall submit a Critical Path Method (CPM) work schedule at the pre -construction meeting showing all critical items of work and anticipated shut down times. Note that no activity will be allowed until the CPM is approved by the city or the Engineer of Record (EOR). K. Contractor must submit a detailed schedule and process description for proposed testing. Training of all new equipment must be videotaped including two weeks of training prior to startup. If there are multiple sites under the same contract each site startup shall occur as soon as it is complete. If there are multiple shifts at any site(s) where city staff require training, Contractor shall hold multiple trainings convenient for each shift. L. Required shutdowns shall not begin until all materials are on -hand, pre -assembled to the extent possible, and ready for installation. Upon commencement of the shutdown period, the Contractor shall proceed with the work continuously, start to finish, until the work is completed, and the system is tested, cleared for service, and ready for operation. If the Contractor completes all required work before the specified shutdown period has ended, the city may immediately place the system back in service. 209-3. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT There shall be no separate measurement and payment for this task. 210. DETECTION OF FACILITIES The locations of all existing underground piping, structures, and other facilities are shown based on information received from the respective owner. The locations are shown without express or implied representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete, correct, or a represent a true picture of the actual underground facilities to be encountered. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the correct location and sizing of all utilities (including connection points). All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call"/ "Sunshine 811" at 8-1-1; "Sunshine 811" administrative offices may be reached at (800) 638-4097. The Contractor shall at all times employ acceptable methods and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to avoid unnecessary delay, injury, damage, or destruction of existing utilities or cause interference. The Contractor shall conduct exploratory excavations as necessary for the purpose of locating underground pipelines, structures, and utilities in advance of construction. Test pits shall be excavated in areas of potential conflicts between existing and proposed facilities and at piping connections to existing facilities a minimum of 48 hours and 1000 ft in advance of work. If there is a potential conflict, the Contractor shall notify the Owner and Engineer immediately and provide as much information as possible including but not SECTION IV Page 35 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications limited to location, elevation, utility type, material, and size. Test pits shall be backfilled immediately after their purpose has been satisfied. There shall be no additional compensation for exploratory excavations. 211. RELOCATIONS 211-1. RELOCATION SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Relocations shown on the Drawings: Public utility installations or structures, including but not limited to poles, signs, fences, piping, conduits and drains that interfere with the positioning of the work which are shown on the Drawings to be removed, relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made, therefore. All existing castings, including valve boxes, junction boxes, manholes, hand holes, pull boxes, inlets and similar structures in the areas of construction that are to remain in service and in areas of trench restoration and pavement replacement, shall be adjusted by the Contractor to bring them flush with the surface of the finished work. All existing utility systems which conflict with the construction of the work herein, which can be temporarily removed and replaced, shall be accomplished at the expense of the Contractor. Work shall be done by the utility unless the utility approves in writing that the Work may be done by the Contractor. 211-2. RELOCATIONS NOT SHOWN ON DRAWINGS Where public utility installations or structures are encountered during the course of work, and are not indicated on the Drawings or in the specifications, and when in the opinion of the city, removal, relocation, replacement, or rebuilding is necessary to complete the work, such work shall be accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction or such work may be requested in writing by the city for the Contractor to perform and fairly compensated once work is complete. If such work is accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, it will be carried out expeditiously and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete the removal, relocation, replacement, or rebuilding as necessary. 212. RESTORATION PROCEDURES 212-1. INTERIM RESTORATION All excavations shall be backfilled and compacted as specified by the city and Engineer at the end of each working day. For excavations within existing paved areas, the limerock base or soil cement base shall be spread and compacted to provide a smooth surface free of aggregate material. The Contractor shall keep the site accessible to the city Staff at all times for the purpose of operating and maintaining the existing facility during construction. All pipe and fittings shall be neatly stored in a location, which will cause the least disturbance to the public. All debris shall be removed and properly disposed of by the end of each working day. 212-2. FINAL RESTORATION After completing all installations, pressure testing, bacteriological testing, and associated work, final restoration shall be performed. In no event shall final restoration begin after substantial completion. Any SECTION IV Page 36 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications additional restoration required after testing shall be repaired in a timely manner at no additional cost to the city. Maintenance of all restored facilities shall be the Contractor's responsibility. This maintenance shall be performed on an on-going basis during the course of construction. The Contractor's Progress Schedule shall reflect the above restoration requirements. SECTION IV Page 37 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 300 SERIES: MATERIALS 301. CONCRETE The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all concrete placements. Contact Building Inspectors from the city Planning Department if building a structure is required. The Contractor shall give Building Inspectors a minimum of 48 hours in advance to inspect. Unless otherwise noted elsewhere or directed, the following requirements shall be adhered to: All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at twenty-eight (28) days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M85 latest edition. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 or latest current edition. All ready -mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C94 or latest edition. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of three inches (3") to five inches (5"), except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than five cubic yards (5 cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every fifty cubic yards (50 cy) or part thereof exceeding five cubic yards (5 cy), one set of three (3) compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 302. EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 302-1. EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point six inches (6") outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. 302-2. FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal, except curbs. Curb forms shall be metal only, unless at radius, intermittent sections less than ten (10) linear feet or with written permission from the Engineer. The forms shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. 303. REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Reinforcement deformation shall be performed as per ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement or latest edition. Reinforcement steel grades shall be billet intermediate or hard. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A1064 SECTION IV Page 38 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications or latest edition that is relevant. Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A1064) or latest edition that is relevant. Welded wires shall be elevated with the use of chairs. Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM A775/A77 requirements or latest edition. 303-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 304. BACKFILL 304-1. MATERIALS AND GENERAL Material for backfill other than under Gabion mattresses shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from any deleterious material including but not limited to clay, muck, organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than three inches (3") in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Material for backfill under Gabion mattresses shall be an A-1 soil meeting AASHTO M145 (latest edition). Backfill shall be carried up evenly in layers not exceeding eight inches (8") in thickness and shall be compacted into place by mechanical tamping to 98% before the next layer is applied. A hydro -hammer shall not be used for compaction. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed below the pipe haunch, around the sides, and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to twelve inches (12") above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. For backfill in small areas that do not permit any type of tamping, Contractor may use flowable fill to achieve required density. Refer to Section 306 for more details on flowable fill. Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be effective, as determined by the Engineer, Contractor may use #57 stone (meeting FDOT's specifications) and hand tamping until backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to make the use of the mechanical tampers practical. Fully wrap the stones with a layer of Type D filter fabric of FDOT Index 199 (latest edition). Do not place stones within four feet (4') of the ends of trench or ditch; use normally accepted backfill material at the ends. Where new cast -in-place concrete work is performed, do not place backfill until the specified twenty-eight (28) days compressive strength occurs. Heavy construction equipment shall not be permitted to cross over pipes or culverts until placing and compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation of at least four feet (4') above the top of the pipe or culvert. The cost of backfill, flowable fill, alternative approved material for wet conditions, and extra dewatering effort to achieve required density, etc., shall be included in the contract unit price or lump sum price for the item of the work specified. 304-2. TESTING AND INSPECTION Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory, approved by the Engineer, to perform density testing on backfilled material. All testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer's Representative. The test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The Contractor shall be charged for all retests and re -inspection services. SECTION IV Page 39 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Backfill under all types of pavement areas shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 6" in thickness unless an alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by AASHTO T 180 - Modified Proctor Density Test (latest edition) to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted to the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction as determined by AASHTO T 180 - Modified Proctor Density Test (latest edition). Backfill under buried structures shall be in accordance with these specifications to prevent future subsidence. Backfill Testing: The Contractor shall demonstrate the adequacy of backfill compaction by performing density testing. For each test location, density testing shall be performed at six-inch (6") lifts. The character of the backfill material will be observed during the excavation for density testing to determine conformance with the specifications. Density testing shall be performed using nuclear field density equipment or conventional weight -volume methods. If the weight -volume method is used, volume shall be determined by using the sand replacement test (ASTM D1556/ D1556M the latest edition) or liquid displacement methods (ASTM D2167 latest edition). If nuclear methods are used, the trench correction effect shall be accounted for by recalibrating the nuclear gauge on its calibration block at the location of each test prior to taking the density measurement. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, tools, and labor to prepare the test site for testing. Normal Testing Frequency: One test shall be performed for each one hundred feet (100') of backfill or fraction thereof or for each single run of pipe/culvert connecting two (2) successive structures whichever is less. The location of the test within each section shall be selected by the Engineer's Representative. Testing shall progress as each one hundred -foot (100') section is completed. Four (4) tests equally spaced around each structure shall be performed on each six-inch (6") lift. Testing which indicates that unacceptable material has been incorporated into the backfill, or that insufficient compaction is being obtained shall be followed by expanded testing to determine the limits of the unacceptable backfill. Expanded Testing Requirements: If normal testing within a testing section indicates unacceptable backfill, the Engineer's Representative may require additional testing within the same test section to determine the limits of unacceptable backfill. Additional testing required by the Engineer's Representative shall be paid for by the Contractor and shall not exceed testing of four (4) additional locations within the test section. Unacceptable backfill within the limits established by the testing shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the city. Additional testing beyond that required may be performed by the Contractor at his expense to further delineate limits of unacceptable backfill. 305. RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 305-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap will be weight, in tons, in surface dry natural state. The scales must be calibrated and certified by an independent party and carry a state certification. 305-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand -cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand -cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. SECTION IV Page 40 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 306. FLOWABLE FILL Flowable fill is used in backfill and to fill all abandoned pipelines that are not removed. Mains that need to be abandoned shall be cut, capped, and filled with flowable fill meeting the requirements specified herein. Flowable fill shall adhere to Section 121 of FDOT specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall be responsible for producing a flowable mixture using these guidelines and adjusting his mixture design as called for by circumstances or as may be directed by the Engineer. General mix requirements are as follows: Components Excavatable Non Excavatable Cellular Concrete Cement (1b/yd3) 75-100 75-150 Min 150 Supplementary Cementitious Materials (1b/yd3) None 150-600 Fine Aggregate * * * Water ** ** ** Air 5-35% 5-15% *** Unit Weight (lb/ft) 90-110 100-125 20-80 28 Day Compressive Strength **** **** **** * Fine aggregate shall be proportioned to yield 1 cubic yard (yd3). * * Mix design shall produce a consistency that will result in a flowable self -leveling product at the time of placement * * * In cellular concrete, preformed foam shall be proportioned at the jobsite to yield 1 cubic yard in accordance with design requirements * * * * The requirements for percent air, compressive strength, and unit weight are for laboratory designs only and are not intended for jobsite acceptance requirements Weights for fine aggregate and water shall be adjusted according to cementitious content. The mix proportions shall be adjusted for removability, pumpability and flowability. If required, strength test data shall be provided prior to batching. If required by the Engineer, the flowability can be measured by afflux time determined in accordance with ASTM C939/ C939M — 16a (latest edition) and shall be 30 seconds +/- 5 seconds as measured on mortar passing the No. 4 sieve. The equipment required to perform this test shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall flush all raw sewage, sludge, debris, and water from the force mains prior to filling pipeline with flowable fill. If not discharged into a sanitary sewer system, the Contractor shall collect all flushing water and dispose of at a wastewater treatment facility. City Public Utilities Department IPP Coordinator and Director and/or Assistant Director must approve ofthe discharge into the collection system or wastewater treatment plant. The Contractor must locate and verify all connections ofthe piping before filling the pipeline with flowable fill to avoid redirection and reconnection and report them to the Engineer. During placement of fill, compensate for irregularities in sewer pipe, such as obstructions, open joints, or broken pipe to ensure no voids remain unfilled. SECTION IV Page 41 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Clean placement areas of sewer and water lines of debris that may hinder fill placement. Remove excessive amounts of sludge and other substances that may degrade performance of fill. Remove free water prior to starting fill placement. All proposed new force mains shall be installed, pressure tested, and placed in-service prior to abandoning the existing force mains. All pipes shall be abandoned in a manner which results in the abandoned pipeline not being pressurized. Plowable fill shall be produced and delivered using concrete construction equipment. Placing flowable fill shall be by chute, pumping or other methods approved by the Engineer. The flowable fill shall be placed to the designated fill line without vibration or other means of compaction. Placement shall be avoided during inclement weather, e.g. rain or ambient temperatures below 40°F. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent any damages caused by the hydraulic pressure of the fill during placement prior to hardening. Also, necessary means to confine the materials within the designated space shall be provided by the Contractor. During placement of the fill, the Contractor is to avoid construction stoppage that would exceed the working time of the fill. If for any case that the fill would harden, the Contractor is responsible for properly installing fill into the abandoned pipeline from another location and shall meet the requirements specified herein. A city Engineering Department Representative shall be present to witness the placement of flowable fill in abandoned pipelines. A 48-hour notice shall be given to the city before the placement of fill. The flowable fill shall be proportioned and placed as specified herein. In general, the strength desired is the maximum hardness that can be excavated at a later date using conventional excavating equipment. No curing protection is required. The fill shall be left undisturbed until material obtains sufficient strength. Sufficient strength is a minimum of 150 psi penetration resistance as measured using a handheld penetrometer. The penetrometer shall be provided by the Contractor. All flowable fill areas subjected to traffic loads must have a durable riding surface. Payment of the applicable lump sum price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary and will include, but is not limited to the necessary costs associated with the installation of the flowable fill as shown in the Drawings and as described in the Contract Documents. 307. MATERIAL INDEPENDENT TESTING The city shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the city, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the city, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. SECTION IV Page 42 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 400 SERIES: SANITARY SEWER • • 401. SANITARY MANHOLES 401-1. BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to the inside of the adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: formed directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, or lay half tile in concrete. For invert channels formed using the brick and mortar, or the half tile in concrete approaches the entire bench and channel area will be coated with a minimum of one-half inch of Xypex Megamix II or approved equal. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed 12 inches (12"). Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twelve inches (12"). Doghouse manholes and flat top manholes are not permitted. If a drop manhole is needed, only outside drop manholes allowed. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled with mortar, shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire interior and exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch (1/2") of Mega Mix II with Bio San as supplied by Xypex or approved equal. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. Maintenance of Flow Plan: 1. The Contractor shall prepare a Maintenance of Flow Plan that describes in detail the work that will be performed by the Contractor to maintain continuous operation of the city's existing utility services. Maintenance of Flow Plan shall address the temporary and permanent flow diversion of gravity sewers and service laterals. 2. Temporary diversion of the gravity sewer flows shall be done using bypass pumps (one duty, one standby) to pump from the upstream manhole to the downstream manhole. Bypass pumps shall have hospital grade sound attenuation. The Contractor shall obtain peak wet weather flow rates in the gravity sewer from the city and shall demonstrate in the Maintenance of Flow Plan that adequate pumping capacity is provided to accommodate peak wet weather flow. The Contractor and city personnel that are experienced in the collection system shall determine the float levels in the field, pump on, standby or lag pump on, and high-level alarm. The high-level alarm shall be connected to an auto dialer to notify the Contractor of an alarm condition. The bypass pump suction manhole shall use the collection system for a temporary wet well storage; however, surcharging in the existing sewer system shall be limited. Once the high-level float alarm is triggered, it shall allow enough time for emergency Contractor personnel to arrive on scene and resolve the problem prior to any sanitary sewer overflows. The bypass suction and discharge pipes may require the removal of the manhole tops which will result in excess odor escaping from the manholes. The contractor shall provide a means to seal odors within the bypass manholes to minimize odors during the temporary diversion. 3. The Maintenance of Flow Plan shall include a sequence of construction with projected time, in days, for each step in the sequence. SECTION IV Page 43 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 4. If the work required to maintain utility operation must occur during evening, night or weekend hours, the Contractor shall notify the affected residents in advance of the projected work. The Contractor shall reimburse the city for overtime work, including inspector overtime, in excess of regular working hours. The Contractor must also get permission from city Project Manager before working outside of Noise Ordinance hours. 5. Identify the person(s) responsible for executing the Maintenance of Flow Plan and the systems to be put in place for monitoring the existing utility system's ability to maintain flow. 401-2. PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement, with Xypex Admix C -1000R or approved equal, shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of five inches (5"). The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C478 (latest edition). Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket, Pro Stik Butyl Sealant or "O" ring to provide a watertight joint. Caulking of joint shall not be allowed. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Xypex admixture must be added to the concrete at the time of batching. Under normal conditions, the crystalline powder shall be added to the concrete mix at the following rates: 1. Xypex Admix C -1000R 3.5 % by weight of cement content Note: For enhanced chemical protection or for meeting specific project requirements or where the concrete mix design contains higher than 25% type F fly ash content or includes a Portland cement/slag cement/type C fly ash blend, consult with manufacturer or its authorized representative to determine appropriate dosage rates. One set of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the city Project Manager and Engineer of Record for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from Contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on city of Clearwater Engineering Index 302 Sheets. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification compacted soil approximately five inches (5") thick as referenced in Section 304-2 and twelve inches (12") of # 57 grade stone, wrapped in geotextile to secure proper seating and bearing. Refer to these Technical Specifications, Section 304 for backfill and compaction requirements. 401-2.1. MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone/corbel and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Section 703-7, Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. All final grade adjustment of manhole covers, and frame assemblies shall be completed utilizing injection molded high density polyethylene (HDPE) adjustment rings as manufactured by LADTECH, Inc. or an approved equal. The adjustment rings shall be manufactured from polyethylene plastic as identified in ASTM Specification D4976 (Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Molding and Extrusion SECTION IV Page 44 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Materials) the latest edition. Material properties shall be tested and qualified for usage per the ASTM Test Methods referenced in the above ASTM standard. The adjustment rings shall be molded from 100% recycled material. The plastic rings shall be manufactured utilizing the injection molding process as defined by SPE (Society of Plastic Engineers). The adjustment rings shall be tested to assure compliance with impact and loading requirements per the AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway Bridges latest edition. Installation shall be per manufacture's recommendations for vacuum test installations only. The annular space between the rings and cone basin, the rings, and the rings and cover frame shall be sealed utilizing an approved butyl rope (not caulk) sealant. All adjustment for matching road grade shall be made utilizing a molded and indexed slope ring. All grade rings shall be covered by the LADTECH, Inc. warranty or one of equal terms and duration. Grade rings shall be Traffic Rated AASHTO HS -20 (latest edition). 401-2.2. STAINLESS STEEL MANHOLE STORM WATER INFLOW ABATEMENT INSERTS (DISH/PAN) 401-2.2.1. MATERIALS AND DESIGN General: The insert, gasket and relief valve shall be manufactured of materials resistant to corrosion from atmospheres containing hydrogen sulfide and dilute sulfuric acid. Insert: The insert body shall be manufactured of 304 stainless steel with a thickness of not less than 18 gauge. The insert shall have straight sides designed to allow a loose fit into the ring for easy removal. The insert manufacturer must furnish a "load test verification" showing a load test failure in excess of 3000 lbs. For added strength, no less than three (3) ribs shall be stamped in bottom of the insert. Gasket: The gasket shall be extruded onto the stainless dish with a Synthetic elastomer having the following physical properties: Tensile Strength: 335 psi - ASTM D412 Elongation 400-600% - ASTM D412 Shore Hardness: 25 Shore A - ASTM D2240 Adhesion to Stainless: 580 psi - ASTM D4541/D7234 (Use latest edition) Relief Valve: The gas relief valve shall be designed to release at a pressure of .5 to 1.5 PSI and have a water leak down rate no greater than 5 gallons per 24 hours. The valve shall be installed in the insert by means of a hole tapped in the insert by the manufacturer. The valve shall be made of nitrite for prevention of corrosion from contact with hydrogen sulfide, dilute sulfuric acid and other gases associated with waste- water collections systems. Handle: The dish shall have a handle of 3/16" plastic -coated stainless-steel cable installed on the body of the dish. The handle shall be attached with a #6 high-grade stainless-steel rivet. The cable shall be braided in a manner which resists cutting with common bolt cutters. The cable terminal and eye shall be stainless steel. Manhole Frames: Manhole frame sizes vary, and the city will provide the successful bidder with specific dimensions and number of required inserts for each manhole frame size. Maximum insert outside diameter (OD) will not exceed 26.5 inches nor be less than 23 inches. Most frames have an outside diameter of 23.5 inches with a clear opening of 21.5 inches. 401-2.2.2. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Payment of each inflow abatement insert shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment necessary but not limited to the costs associated for the installation of the sanitary manholes' pans/dishes. SECTION IV Page 45 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 401-3. DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings, and specials as detailed on the drawings. Only outside drop manholes allowed. 401-4. FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Clearwater Standard Detail Index 301. 401-5. MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior of all precast manholes shall not require any specific coating. The interior shall be coated with either SpraywalliD, Polyurethane or Raven 405 Epoxy at the direction of the city at a thickness not less than 125 mil. For new manholes install geotextile wrap at the joints. 401-6. CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by NPC Kor-N-Seal® with stainless steel bands or approved equal water stop coupling. 401-7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Payment of each inflow abatement insert shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment necessary but not limited to the costs associated for the installation of the sanitary manholes. 402. RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 402-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 403. SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 403-1. MATERIALS 403-1.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. All polyvinyl chloride mains (pipe and fittings) shall be at least 6 -inch -diameter, SDR 26, and conform to ASTM D3034; laterals can be four -inch (4") PVC schedule 40. Pipe and fittings shall be plainly marked with the ASTM designation. Strong back stainless steel Fernco is required for all non-mechanical PVC connections. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D3212 (latest edition). The laying length ofpipe joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20'). SECTION IV Page 46 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or the construction plans, ductile iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 502-2.1. of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except the pipe interior shall be lined with Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between buildings lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. A two-way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 403-1.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE, DUCTILE IRON OR HDPE. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, polyvinyl chloride, ductile iron and HDPE force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 502-2.1 and 502-2.2 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be lined with Protecto 401 ceramic epoxy in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultraviolet radiation shall be rejected. 403-2. INSTALLATION 403-2.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of Thermoplastic gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D2321 (latest edition). The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus eight inches (8") to twelve inches (12") on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and placement of the pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support the pipe, the Contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and pipe bedding and replace with Class I material (one half inch (1/2") diameter aggregate) to provide firm support of the pipe. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The Contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector, the location of all new laterals. 403-2.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 503 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 403-3. INSPECTIONS OF LINES AND MANHOLES A. Inspection of completed lines and manholes shall be scheduled within a reasonable time after construction or when required by the Engineer. Before scheduling an inspection, the Contractor shall prepare the lines by cleaning and flushing. Manholes shall be clean, finished, and free of leaks. B. Manholes shall be on a true and uniform grade. The inverts shall have a smooth steel troweled finish. All benches shall be uniformly sloping. The frames shall be tight and properly set in mortar SECTION IV Page 47 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications on solid masonry. The invert, benches and adjacent pipe shall be free of splattered mortar. All required interior lining or paint shall be kept intact. Manhole frames shall be adjusted to grade with the covers and frames cleaned and free of mortar and asphaltic mixtures. All precast manhole seams shall be filled with an approved asphaltic compound. C. Pipe between manholes shall be true to line and grade. Dips and sags with one inch or more of trapped water shall be cause for rejection. Air testing may be required also at the Contractor's expense. Contractor shall provide personnel to assist with inspections. D. The Contractor shall provide city Public Utilities Department and the Engineer with a Television Inspection of the completed gravity sewers in accordance with the following: 1. Shall be performed by a National Association of Sewer Service Companies (NASSCO) Pipeline Assessment & Certification Program (PACP) Certified Operator who will use software that is compatible with CUES Granite products latest version software to NASSCO PACP Standards. 2. Shall be submitted as digital media that includes video and data base file in PACP format and include a printed copy of the PACP television inspection log. 3. Shall perform a manhole inspection and provide a completed NASSCO Manhole Inspection form (latest version) for each manhole that is inspected 4. All pertinent data recorded in audio on the media to include: a. Subdivision name and phase number. b. Manhole numbers (these numbers must match manhole numbers on "as built" and record drawings). c. Date of inspection d. Size and material of pipe e. Service connection locations, right or left f. All distances between manholes g. Locations of suspected and obvious pipe deficiencies (i.e., bad joints, breaks or leaks, etc.) 5. PVC pipe shall have a deflection test using a seven and one-half percent (go -no-go) test mandrel of appropriate size, which shall be visible on video at all times. 6. The printed NASSCO PACP television report (indicating manhole numbers) which will accompany the media. This written report must include: a. Manhole numbers (these numbers must match manhole numbers on "as -built" and record drawings). b. Service connection locations, right or left. c. Reference to service connection locations out of manholes. d. Locations of suspected and obvious pipe deficiencies (i.e., bad joints, breaks or leaks, etc.). e. Depth of each manhole. f. Actual measured distance (on ground) between manholes. 7. All visual and television inspections shall be completed by the contractor and approved by city Public Utilities Department and Engineer after the road base has been constructed but prior to the placing of any asphalt. 8. Television Inspection Media must clearly show details of structural defects, misalignments and infiltration. SECTION IV Page 48 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • 403-4. TESTING • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 403-4.1. TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level shall be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level shall be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed fifty (50) gallons per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at their own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The Contractor shall TV inspect all mains and provide to the Engineer to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any dips or sags of more than five percent (5%) of the pipe inside diameter (ID) dimension from its design alignment shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 403-4.2. TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi for two (2) hours, as described in Section 504 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 403-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT 403-5.1. GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per linear foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract bid. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per linear foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two-way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment, and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 403-5.2. FORCE MAIN PIPE PAYMENT Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 506 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. SECTION IV Page 49 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications 404. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE SANITARY SEWER REHABILITATION 404-1. GENERAL It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewers, mains and service laterals, by the installation and curing of a resin impregnated felt tube/cured-in-place pipe (CIPP) liner. The liner shall be jointless, continuous from manhole to manhole, watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage. Installation and curing shall include all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. Any proposed installer/contractor, or liner system, must be pre -approved by the city prior to receiving bids. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The city reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. The contractor shall provide trenchless reconstruction of service laterals and mainline sewers. The contractor shall have the capability of performing city's selected services which include televised inspection, data collection, system flow analysis, and pipeline reconstruction. The contractor shall employ adequate staff to perform the services required, staff should include Project Representative, Project Manager, Field Supervisor and Senior Foreman. Field supervisory personnel employed by the CIPP Contractor will have at least five (5) years of experience in the performance of the work and tasks as stated in the Contract Documents. Staff shall be proficient and experienced in all phases of services mentioned. The contractor shall perform all work and shall be a licensed Contractor for these services. The contractor shall be certified in confined space entry (OSHA) and traffic control. The contractor shall provide services that include safety measures for both the public and workers, including traffic control, and shall coordinate all scheduling with the city. The contractor shall work with the city in establishing priorities and in preparing work assignments. The contractor shall be completely responsible for the control of the environment of the work site during on-site operations. All precautions shall be taken by the selected contractor to protect the workers, public and city staff from the exposure to harmful or hazardous substances with the sewer system. The contractor shall be responsible for the transport and disposal of all waste materials. The selected contractor shall be responsible for all waste material spills and clean-up in the loading, hauling, and unloading of the contractor's equipment. The contractor shall be responsible for conforming to any and all requirements regarding hauling and disposal of sewer wastes from each city's work site in accordance with OSHA regulations and those that may be mandated by the Federal of State Governments. The contractor shall ensure that all waste material transporters possess all required local, state and federal transportation permits and that they comply with all local, state and federal regulations, including but without limitation, 40 CFR Part 263, "Standards Applicable to Transporters of Hazardous Wastes" and Chapter 17-730, Part 3, Florida Administrative Code, as may be amended from time to time. The contractor shall inform the city of its planned work schedules and shall afford the city reasonable opportunity to observe and inspect the contractor's work in process. The city will be advised of all schedule changes and notified when a work site is left for a 24-hour period when work is not complete. The contractor shall report to city's Inspector their daily progress. SECTION IV Page 50 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Work hours shall be from 7:00 AM to 3:30 PM Monday through Friday unless authorized in writing by the city's Project Manager. 404-2. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer rehabilitation using the cured -in-place product shall be made per linear foot including all preparation, installation, curing, flow maintenance, lateral reconnection, submittals, light cleaning (3 passes of cleaning head) of piping, material removal & disposal, CCTV inspection/reporting (pre & post installation) sealing of all leaks, connection to all manholes, traffic control on city streets, testing such as infiltration and/or exfiltration, provision of equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc., to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary sewer mains and from the connection to the main to the terminus of the liner for service laterals. 404-3. SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following information: 1. Manufacturer's certification that the materials to be used meet the referenced standards and these specifications. 2. License or certificate verifying Manufacture's/Licensor's approval of the installer. 3. Proposed equipment and procedures for accomplishing the work. 4. Lining Manufacturer's product data and instructions for resin and catalyst system. 5. Design Calculations, in accordance with the Appendix of ASTM F1216 or latest edition, for each length of liner to be installed including the thickness of each proposed CIPP. It will be acceptable for the Contractor to submit a design for the most severe line condition and apply that design to all of the line sections. To be completed and certified by a Professional Engineer proficient in the design of pipeline systems. All calculations shall include data that conforms to the requirements of these specifications. 6. A detailed installation plan describing all preparation work, cleaning operation, pre -closed-circuit television (CCTV) inspections, flow maintenance, traffic control, installation procedure, method of curing, service reconnection, quality control, testing to be performed, final CCTV inspection, and all else necessary and appropriate for a complete CIPP liner installation. 7. Tube wet -out and cure method including: a complete description of the proposed wet -out procedure, manufacturer's recommended cure method- for each diameter and thickness of CIPP liner to be installed, and detailed curing procedure detailing the curing medium and the method of application. 8. A detailed installation schedules. 9. All SDS sheets for all materials to be furnished for the project. 10. Weekly work schedules shall be submitted no later than close of business on proceeding Thursdays for the work on the following week. Scope of the schedule shall include the following: cleaning operations, CCTV pre & post operations, lining, and crew leader's information including phone number. SECTION IV Page 51 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 404-4. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) FOR GRAVITY SEWER MAINS 404-4.1. LINER MATERIAL The liner material shall be an epoxy, vinyl ester or polyester fiber felt resin -impregnated tubing or city Engineering Department approved equal, sized to tightly fit the internal circumference and length of the designated gravity sewer. The cured liner shall meet the minimum initial structural properties as listed in ASTM F1216. The liner shall be designed in accordance with the Appendices in ASTM F1216. It shall be assumed that a fully deteriorated gravity sewer pipeline having no structural strength will be rehabilitated with H-20 traffic loading, the water table's at the ground surface and the product installed will have a minimum expected lifetime of fifty (50) years. In no case shall the liner thickness be less than six millimeters (6 mm) for pipe sizes six inches (6") through eight inches (8") and 7.5 millimeters for pipe sizes ten inches (10") through twelve inches (12") in diameter. Minimum liner thickness for pipes greater than twelve inches (12") shall be as specified by the city. Liner shall be sized by Contractor to provide a tight fit to the inside circumference of the host pipe and shall be a continuous jointless lining from manhole to manhole. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall use an epoxy vinyl ester or polyester resin and catalyst system, and a fiber felt tube compatible with the inversion or other approved alternate installation process and having the following minimum physical properties for the cured nine: PROPERTY VALUE TEST METHOD MINIMUM (psi) Tensile Strength ASTM D638 or latest edition 3,000 Flexural Strength Modified ASTM D790 or latest edition 4,500 Flexural Modulus of Elasticity Modified ASTM D790 250,000 Long -Term (50 year) Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D7790 or latest edition 125,000 The epoxy vinyl ester or polyester resin and fiber felt tubing system shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASTM F1216 and be fabricated to a size that, when installed, will neatly fit the interior of the host pipe. Allowance shall be made for circumferential stretching during a direct (non -inversion) pull in. The CIPP product shall fit tightly to the host sewer pipe (with minimal shrinkage) in such a way as to minimize water migration (tracking) between the liner and the host pipe. A vacuum impregnation process shall be used in conjunction with a roller system to achieve a uniform distribution of the resin throughout the tube under controlled conditions. The volume shall be adjusted by adding five to ten (10) percent excess resin for the change in resin volume due to polymerization and to allow for any migration of resin into cracks or joints in the host pipe. The outside of the fabric tube shall be marked every 5 feet with the name of the manufacturer or CIPP system, manufacturing lot and production footage. 404-4.2. CHEMICAL JOINT, CRACK AND ANNULAR SPACE SEALING MATERIALS FOR ACTIVE LEAKS AND SERVICE LATERAL CONNECTIONS Chemical joint and crack sealing materials shall have the following properties: 1. React quickly to form a permanent watertight seal 2. Resultant seal shall be flexible and immune to the effects of wet/dry cycles 3. Non -biodegradable and immune to the effects of acids, alkalis, and organics in sewage 4. Component packaging and mixing compatible with field conditions and worker safety SECTION IV Page 52 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 5. Extraneous sealant left inside pipe shall be readily removable; and shall be compatible with the repair resin utilized. Chemical joint sealing material shall be acrylic resin type and shall be furnished with activators, initiators, inhibitors, and any other materials recommended by the manufacturer for a complete grout system. Sealing grout shall be furnished in liquid form in standard manufacturer's containers. 404-4.3. MANHOLE CONNECTIONS A seal, consisting of a resin mixture or hydrophilic seal compatible with the installed CIPP shall be applied at manhole walls in accordance with the CIPP System manufacturer's recommendation. Cost associated with manhole seals shall be included in the contract price of CIPP installation. 404-4.4. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 404-4.4.1. CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor shall perform light cleaning (3 passes of the jet head) using a jetting system capable of providing 60 gallons of flow at 3,000 psi. After light cleaning has been completed the Contractor shall attempt a pre- installation CCTV inspection. If the Contractor believes that the piping requires additional cleaning the collected CCTV video will be provided to the Inspector before beginning any heavy cleaning of the piping. Light cleaning is included in the cost of liner installation and heavy cleaning will be measured as a separate pay item. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Flow maintenance will be provided by the Contractor as required. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sanitary sewer facilities from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the city's treatment plants. 404-4.4.2. TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of pipe is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected with a digital CCTV camera and recorded in DVD format. Cost of CCTV inspections is included in the cost of pipe lining CCTV data shall be provided to the city designated Project Manager. Asset Management (OWAM) software. This section describes the requirements of the Contractor in providing the following minimum requirements for video capture, photo capture and database structure to the city. The city is currently using CUES Granite video and data collection software. The Contractor shall provide the TV Inspections in the same CUES Granite product database, photo, and video capture format. The Contractor -provided TV inspections, database, DVDs, photos, and related files shall have the ability to direct synchronize to the city's existing CUES Granite product database. 404-4.4.2.1. IMAGE (PHOTOS) CAPTURE FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS The Inspection image files (pictures) shall have the ability to export to industry standard formats to include JPEG, BMP, and TIFF formats and be transferable by disk, thumb drive, DVD and/or external hard drive to an external personal computer utilizing standard viewers and printers. SECTION IV Page 53 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 404-4.4.2.2. DIGITAL VIDEO FORMAT AND REQUIREMENTS Digital video files (Inspection Videos) shall be captured and/or recorded in the MPEG format or as specified by the city. The video capture files shall be in MPEG format with data linking (Inspection Observations) to the database file(s). The "Link" of the video capture file to the database observation file is required. The inspection observation(s) shall link to the video record in real-time. The accompanying database shall support the following code system: PACP, or current code system being utilized by the city. The Database and Software program (CUES Granite products) shall be able to import asset data from an Esri ArcGIS (v.10.1+) geodatabase utilizing the network features to associate Sewer Mains with corresponding Sewer Nodes. The database structure shall retain information on the various structures found within a sewer or storm system. It is important that the structures, nodes, manholes and pipe identifiers and related attribute information be retained as separate tables from the inspection allowing import of existing data from multiple sources. The data structure allows different projects to reside within a single database. Information gathered in projects shall be available to view by project or by system. Data gathered during project inspection shall be available to view by the selected structure. Therefore, all inspections can be viewed on a structure even if gathered in different projects. 404-4.4.2.3. SYNCHRONIZATION The database shall have the ability to synchronize assets and inspections from replicated databases. The synchronization process should have built-in error checking for duplicates, updates and any modifications to the data being synched. This allows for multiple sources of data to be effectively consolidated into a single unitary database for analysis and evaluation. 404-4.4.3. LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, joint -less liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the city of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall provide flow maintenance measures as described by the approved Flow Maintenance Plan. Flow Maintenance Plan shall be approved by the city Project Manager prior to 48 -hours of mobilization. Flow Maintenance Plan shall include redundancy. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at their expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 404-4.4.4. LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted, as directed by the city to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the city. Cost for robotic reconnection shall be included in the cost to install the liner. If the city wishes to reconnect service lateral using a different method the cost to do so will be measured and paid for separately. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the city. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers seven days before commencement with SECTION IV Page 54 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • appropriate information regarding the construction project. Contractor shall notify the Senior Public Information Coordinator from the city Public Communications Department prior to distribution. 404-4.4.5. TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the city. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight (8) hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 404-4.4.6. TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Post cleaning and television inspection shall proceed only after all necessary work and preparation has been completed, including the following: • Placement of traffic control measures in accordance with these specifications • Implementation of adequate flow control • Pre -installation cleaning and television inspection • Installation of CIPP liner in accordance with specifications • All services re -instated including grout sealing in accordance with these specifications The Contractor shall clean and televise the assigned gravity sewer in accordance with Sections 404-4.4.1, 404-4.4.2, 404-4.4.2.1, 404-4.4.2.2 and 404-4.4.2.3. The interior surface of the pipeline shall be cleaned with high pressure water jet equipment immediately prior to conducting the post television inspection. Jetting equipment will provide a minimum of sixty (60) gallons per minute of water at 3,000 psi. All service locations, gouges, cracks, bumps, bulges and obstructions, such as dropped joints, shall be noted on the • inspection. In the case of bellies in the line, the pipe shall be cleared of any standing water to provide continuous visibility during the post inspection. The Contractor shall provide all inspections in digital PACP format including printed inspection logs to the city. Cost associated with post -televising and cleaning shall be included in the contract price of CIPP installation. The finished liner shall be free of significant visual defects, damage, deflection, holes, leaks and other defects. • Each individual pipe segment contained in a development is to be considered an "individual project" such that all work, including all deliverables shall be reviewed and accepted prior to the city accepting and processing payment for that individual project. No partial payments will be made on individual sewer proj ects. 404-4.4.7. CLEANUP Cleanup is an essential part of the work. As the work progresses and is completed, the Contractor shall clean the various sites of all operations and completely restore all work areas to the satisfaction of the city. This cleanup shall be done as promptly as practicable and shall not be left until the end of the construction period. No part of the work shall be considered complete and no payment will be made until cleanup is completed. 404-5. CURED -IN-PLACE PIPE (CIPP) FOR SERVICE LATERALS 404-5.1. LINER MATERIAL The lining material shall be a fiberglass/polyester needle fleece vacuum epoxy resin -impregnated or equivalent material tube, matching the diameter of the lateral pipe, which is inserted into the service lateral to be rehabilitated and cured -in-place by an acceptable curing method. No Polyester resins will be accepted. SECTION IV Page 55 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The epoxy shall be suitable for the design conditions as well as the curing process. The cured liner shall provide a service life of 50 years and shall have the minimum structural nronerties listed helnw PROPERTY VALUE TEST METHOD MINIMUM (psi) Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 Flexural Strength Modified ASTM D790 4,500 Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 250,000 The liner system shall consist of a sectional liner in the mainline (full wrap around the circumference of the main line extending 5" on either side of the service) and the continuous lateral liner shall have the capacity to extend to within 10 feet of the building foundation. The liner shall form a continuous, one-piece, tight fitting, corrosion resistant and verifiable non -leaking cured in place pipe. The one-piece section liner shall be manufactured in a factory setting prior to its arrival on site. No component of the liner (i.e. lateral tube to mainline piece) shall be glued or sewn fused in the field prior to installation. The material shall be capable of conforming to offset joints, bells, and disfigured pipe sections. The liner shall be designed, fabricated, and installed for the actual conditions encountered for this application including the material of the host pipe, in accordance with the applicable provisions of ASTM F1216(latest edition), and shall meet the following minimum design conditions: AASHTO H-20 live load with one truck passing; Soil Weight 120 pounds per cubic foot. Coefficient of friction Ku'=0.130; Groundwater: At the ground surface; fully deteriorated pipe with 2 percent (min.) ovality. If ovality of existing pipe is found to be worse, use actual percent up to 5 percent (max.); Soil Modulus 1,000 psi; Factor of Safety = 2; Soil Depth: Depth of Cover will be determined by field measurements. The liner shall be designed to withstand all imposed loads, including live loads and, if applicable hydrostatic pressure. The liner shall have sufficient wall thickness to withstand all anticipated external pressures and loads that may be imposed after installation. The design shall be performed and certified by a professional engineer licensed by the Florida. The liner and resin shall be manufactured by Trelleborg Pipe Seals, BLD, Inc., LMK, Inc., or approved equal. The finished liner product shall be chemically resistant to domestic sewage over the expected lifetime of the rehabilitated pipe. The lateral liner system shall create epoxy resin migration into the defect/joints of the existing lateral. A combination of mechanical and chemical bonding shall be created between the lateral lining system and existing host pipe. 404-5.2. EPDXY RESIN MATERIAL The epoxy system shall meet the requirements of ASTM F1216 (latest edition), Section 5.2. The epoxy installed liner system shall produce a liner that will comply with the structural requirements specified herein and shall provide chemical resistance for the flow media in the gravity pipe. The epoxy shall be compatible with the rehabilitation process, shall be able to cure in the presence or absence of water, and shall have an initiation temperature for cure as recommended by the epoxy manufacturer. Polyester and Vinylester resins contain styrene and volatile organic compounds which are susceptible to shrinkage and UV Curing will not be accepted. Submitted documentation from the epoxy manufacturer specifically describing the chemical characteristics of the epoxy system, including allowable mixing, impregnation, and handling time, transportation and storage time, and recommended curing cycle including temperatures, pressures, and times. The epoxy manufacturer's documentation must also include maximum allowable time for handling the impregnated tube prior to insertion and the maximum allowable elapsed time from insertion to exotherm. If remedial measures are available to extend either of the maximum allowable times indicated above, without affecting the physical properties of the epoxy, the epoxy manufacturer should describe these measures and the time limits beyond which even these measures will not prevent alteration of the physical properties of the epoxy. SECTION IV Page 56 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 404-5.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION The Contractor, when required, shall provide for the flow of sewage around the section(s) of main pipe where the service lateral designated for lining is located. The bypass shall be made by plugging the line at an existing upstream manhole and pumping the flow into a downstream manhole or adjacent system. The pump and bypass lines shall be of adequate capacity and size to handle the flow. Contractor must coordinate installation with property owner(s). Delivery, storage, and handling of approved products are the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall keep them safe from damage and stored with the proper environmental containment as outlined by the manufacturer. No products should be used that have exceeded the designated shelf life as outlined by the manufacturer. Remove damaged products from site. Promptly replace damaged products with new products at no additional cost to the city. If the service lateral lining process requires the installation of a cleanout, the city must approve the work before it is done. • • 404-5.3.1. PRE -LINING INSPECTION Prior to inspecting each service lateral the piping will be cleaned to allow passage of the camera. A recorded CCTV video survey must be completed on the sewer main and service laterals with a pan and tilt camera. The inspection shall confirm the location and clock reference of the lateral junctions to be lined, any offsets within the mainline or service lateral, any intrusion from the lateral into the main; the angle at which the connection comes in; any changes in angle of approach of the lateral for the length of the repair; the potential flows coming through the lateral pipe; the potential flows going through the sewer main pipe; the diametric size of the connection for the length of the liner; the size of the main pipe at the point of the liner and the presence of active infiltration within the vicinity of the work area. Cost to complete the necessary pipe cleaning and CCTV inspection will be included in the cost to install the lateral liner. Two copies of the pre -lining inspection shall be submitted to the Public Utilities Dept. The Contractor shall be responsible for having a copy of the pre -lining inspections in the field as well. Immediately prior to liner insertion, the camera shall traverse the lateral to inspect for debris which may have entered the line after the existing condition video recording. 404-5.3.2. LATERAL PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clear the line of obstructions such as solids, roots, or broken pipe that will prevent the insertion of the liner. A high speed rotating hydraulic cutter shall be used to cut roots, grease or other obstructions in the pipe. The cut shall be made flush with the wall of the pipe to be restored, and the debris shall be pushed down the lateral pipe to the main pipe and to the downstream manhole and is to be removed by the contractor. If inspection reveals an obstruction that cannot be removed by conventional cleaning equipment, the Contractor shall notify the city and the cleaning effort shall be abandoned. The Contractor shall confirm that the sewer is clean enough to ensure an effective lining. The line segment shall not be lined until approved by the city. Built-up deposits on the sewer main and lateral pipe walls shall be removed. The removal shall reach at least one foot beyond the liner product to allow the bladder to inflate tightly against the pipe walls ensuring a smooth transition from the liner product to the existing pipe wall. Where the sewer main pipe has been lined previously with a CIPP liner, a check should be made to ensure the prior lateral reopening work created a lateral opening that is flush with the lateral pipe. If this is not the case, the mainline CIPP must be trimmed back using a lateral cutter. Where active infiltration is present and when it is recommended by the liner manufacturer the infiltration must be stopped in advance by grouting. SECTION IV Page 57 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 404-5.3.3. LINER INSTALLATION Notify all property owners not identified for service flow maintenance that their sewage service will be discontinued while the liner is being installed. Notify each affected property owner at least 7 days in advance of commencement of the work, giving the date, start time and time when service will be completely restored. Also provide a telephone number which property owners can call for information during the work. If required for flow maintenance for selected services, Contractor shall excavate at the property line down to the service lateral for the installation of a cleanout. The preferred method of excavation shall be vacuum excavation. Although other installation techniques may be accepted, they must be pre -approved by the city. The service lateral shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to attaching the PVC wye connection. The riser pipe shall be sealed with a screw type plug, the excavation backfilled with sand or pea gravel, and the surface restored to preconstruction conditions. Service lateral liner material shall be vacuum impregnated on site with the epoxy resin immediately prior to installation. Impregnation should be carried out under vacuum using electric impregnation table with pinch rollers set at the correct gap as per the manufacturer's instructions. Impregnation should take place in a clean, temperature -controlled cab in which the materials are protected from direct sunlight, objects which may damage the coating. Impregnation should not take place using a manual roller in which the material is subject to excessive pressure and that the materials are squeezed resulting in a resin slug. All the calculated resin shall be confined to the liner to ensure the correct mechanical properties can be achieved. Impregnation should not take place outside in an uncontrolled environment in which the materials are exposed to the elements. The liner should not be placed on the ground where it is susceptible to damage from objects such as stones, grit, glass etc. During and upon completion of the impregnation process the liner should be stored in a container to avoid damage prior to loading the material into the installation device. The liner product shall be loaded inside a pressure apparatus above ground. The pressure apparatus, with an end attached to a robotic manipulator device, shall be positioned in the mainline pipe at the service connection that is to be rehabilitated. The robotic device together with a television camera will be used to align the repair product with the service connection opening. The robotic device shall hold the collar in place while air pressure, supplied to the pressure apparatus through a hose, shall be used to invert the liner into the lateral pipe. The insertion pressure will be adjusted to fully deploy the liner product into the lateral connection and hold the liner product tight to the main and lateral pipe walls. After insertion is completed, recommended pressure must be maintained on the impregnated liner product for the duration of the curing process. The Contractor shall apply a heat source and circulation system to affect a cure of the epoxy system. The equipment shall be capable of uniformly raising the temperature of the pressurized fluid above the temperature required to affect a complete curing of the epoxy system. Initial cure shall be deemed to be completed when the temperature gauge on the heat source indicates that the temperature inside the tube is of a magnitude to realize an exotherm. The minimum cure period shall be as recommended by the system manufacturer. The finished liner product shall be free of dry spots, lifts, delamination, and excess epoxy. The installed liner product should not inhibit the post installation video inspection, using a closed-circuit television camera, of the mainline and service lateral pipes or future pipe cleaning operations. During the warranty period any defects with the liner product that affect the performance or cleaning of the lateral connection shall be repaired at the contractor's expense in a manner acceptable to the city. The Contractor shall inform the city of service laterals in which a liner product cannot be installed due to pre-existing conditions. These services will be identified, documented, video recorded, and the city will be SECTION IV Page 58 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications informed of the conditions encountered. The Contractor will not attempt to install a liner product in these services unless directed by the city. Contractor may be permitted, at the direction of the city, to install service liners from inside the existing cleanout location to the main line sewer if conditions allow. Final liner product must include a lateral connection repair brim type liner to seal the connection at the host pipe and overlap the service liner installed from the cleanout. 404-5.3.4. TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Following installation of the service lateral liners, conduct a final, video recorded, CCTV/color television inspection of the completed work including the service lateral connections at the sewer main and the full length of all service laterals lined during the progress of the work. Copies of these recordings and those made prior to the liner installation shall be submitted to the city for approval and shall be retained by the city. Field acceptance of the liner shall be based on the city's evaluation of the installation including CCTV inspection video recordings and a review of certified test data for the installed pipe samples. groundwater infiltration of the liner shall be zero. There shall be no evidence of splits, cracks, breaks, lifts, kinks, delamination or crazing in the liner. If any defective liner is discovered after it has been installed, it shall be removed and replaced with either a sound liner or a new pipe at no additional cost to the city. The cost for all necessary testing shall be included in the cost associated with the lining. The Contractor shall clean up each project area after the work is completed and all testing is accepted. Remove and dispose of all excess materials and debris at each location as directed by the city. 405. SANITARY MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 405-1. SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the repair, rehabilitation and groundwater infiltration abatement of manhole walls, corbels/cones, pipe connections and bench and channel/trough areas. All manhole rehabilitation products will be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. The purpose of the rehabilitation work is to eliminate inflow and infiltration, provide corrosion protection, and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met in the completion of the work and the contractor shall be responsible for all necessary maintenance of traffic. The contractor shall warrant all work against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 years, unless otherwise noted, from the date of final acceptance of the project. Contractor shall, within a reasonable time after receipt of written notice thereof, repair defects in materials or workmanship which may develop during said one year period, and any damage to other work caused by such defects or the repairing of same, at his own expense and without cost to the city. The following lists all elements of potential rehabilitation activity: 1. REMOVE STEPS 2. STOP ACTIVE INFILTRATION. 3. PATCH VOIDS AND ALL FRAME CONNECTIONS WITH NON -SHRINK GROUT. 4. REMOVE LOOSE COATING MATERIALS. 5. RESURFACE CORBEL/WALLS WITH CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR. 6. REBUILD/REPAIR BENCH & CHANNEL/TROUGH/SEAL PIPE CONNECTIONS. 7. COAT CORBEL/CONE, WALLS, BENCH AND TROUGH WITH AN APPROVED CEMENTITIOUS, EPDXY, OR POLYURATHANE, COATING/LINING SYSTEM. 8. ADJUST FRAME AND COVER HEIGHT. 9. RESET FRAME AND COVER. SECTION IV Page 59 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 10. REMOVE ROOTS. 11. PROVIDE INFLOW INSERT/DISH/PAN. 12. REMOVE DEBRIS. 13. PERFORM STRUCTURAL REPAIR. 14. REPLACE FRAME AND COVER. 15. SEAL FRAME TO CORBEL/CONE CONNECTION WITH AN APPROVED POLYUREA COATING/LINING SYSTEM It is implicit that many of the repair activities listed above will not be measured and paid for separately as they will be included in the cost of rehabilitating the manhole substrate. These activities include stopping active infiltration, patching voids, removal of loose coating materials, resurfacing of the corbel & wall, removing roots, and removing miscellaneous debris. Repair activities which will have a separate measurement and payment item include: Rebuilding/Repairing Bench & Channel/Trough; Interior Manhole Coating; Adjusting/Resetting Frame & Cover, Replacing Frame & Cover and Sealing Frame to Corbel Connection. 405-2. MEASUREMENT & PAYMENT 405-2.1. MANHOLE LINERS/COATING Payment for manhole rehabilitation shall be per vertical linear foot of liner/coating which is installed/applied. Lining systems will generally be measured from the manhole bench to the top of existing, or new, corbel/cone. Cementitious, Epoxy and Polyurethane coating systems will be measured from the lowest pipe invert to the bottom of the manhole frame. No separate payment will be made for the following items: Flow Maintenance; Maintenance of Traffic; Debris Disposal; Miscellaneous Excavation, including necessary pavement removal and replacement; Infiltration control in manhole and at all pipe connections; Grout, Brick and mortar placement to fill voids and level surfaces; Brick replacement; Root removal, Installation of pipe extensions and connectors as necessary; Removal and replacement of manhole steps, Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery; Replacement of roadway base (including backfill and compaction) and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required to complete the identified rehabilitation. The cost of such work shall be included in the pay item, per vertical linear foot of liner/coating. 405-2.2. REPLACE FRAME & COVER Payment for manhole frame and cover replacement will include removal of existing frame and cover and replacement with a new frame and cover which meets the criteria established by Section 401-4 of the city's specifications. The Contractor will also install and/or replace manhole pans and dishes if it is damaged or missing. Refer to Section 401-2.2. from these Section IV Technical Specifications. Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces". Payment will be made for each manhole frame and cover replaced. No separate payment will be made for maintenance of traffic, necessary pavement removal and replacement, or replacement of grass or shrubbery. 405-2.3. REBUILD BENCH & CHANNEL/TROUGH Payment for rebuilding bench and channel/trough will include removal of existing bench and channel (if applicable) and constructing a new bench and channel using the criteria established by Section 401-1 of the city's specifications. Payment will be made for each bench and channel repaired/installed. No separate payment will be made for the removal of the existing bench and channel, by-pass pumping, and preparation of the manhole invert. SECTION IV Page 60 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 405-2.4. RESET/ADJUST MANHOLE FRAME & COVER Payment for adjusting, or resetting, manhole frame will include removal of existing frame, removal of existing mortar, preparing top of corbel surface, installation of necessary riser material as described in Section 401-2.1, and placement of existing frame. No separate payment will be made for necessary maintenance of traffic, pavement removal and replacement, or replacement of grass or shrubbery. All work will be performed in accordance with Section 401-4 of the city's specifications. Where manholes fall in paved areas, refer to Standard Detail Index 104, "Street and Driveway Replacement for Concrete and Asphaltic Concrete Surfaces". Payment will be made for each manhole frame and cover adjusted. No separate payment will be made for maintenance of traffic, necessary pavement removal and replacement, or replacement of grass or shrubbery. • • 405-2.5. SEAL MANHOLE FRAME TO CORBEL CONNECTION WITH POLYUREA MATERIAL Payment for providing a water tight connection between the manhole frame and the manhole corbel /cone will include placement of non -shrink grout in any area between the frame and corbel which is void of mortar, preparing the frame and corbel/cone to accept the polyurea material and testing the thickness of the application. No separate payment will be made for necessary maintenance of traffic. All work will be performed in accordance with Section 405-7 of the city's specifications. 405-3. CEMENTITIOUS COATING SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray/apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall, channel, invert and bench surfaces of brick, concrete, or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2C product or approved equal. Described are procedures for manhole cleaning preparation, application of material and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2C product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum one half inch (1/2") thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. As it is the intention of the city to rehabilitate the entire structure; corbel, walls, bench and channel/trough the contractor will be required to provide by-pass pumping as the necessary cure time exceeds four (4) hours. In no case will flow through plugs be allowed. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. 3. The spray application of a pre -blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a two (2) coat application. 405-3.1. SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be made in accordance with the following: 1. Technical data sheet on each product used, including ASTM test results indicating the product conforms to and is suitable for its intended use per these specifications. 2. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each product used. 3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations. 4. Applicator Qualifications: a. Manufacturer certification that the Applicator has been trained in the handling, mixing and application of the products to be used. SECTION IV Page 61 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications b. Certification that the equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved by the protective coating manufacturer and Applicator personnel have been trained and certified for proper use of the equipment. c. Written document providing three (3) years of experience and five (5) recent references of Applicator indicating successful application of the materials provided d. Installed a minimum of 50,000 square feet of plural component spray applied coating the same or similar to that specified within the last two (2) years. e. Proof of any necessary federal, state, or local permits or licenses necessary for the project. 405-3.2. MATERIALS 405-3.2.1. PATCHING MIX A Strong A Seal or approved equal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C109) 15 min., 200 psi; 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C1072) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 405-3.2.2. INFILTRATION CONTROL A Strong A Plug or approved equal shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C109) 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C1072) 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 405-3.2.3. GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout or approved equal shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable and have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi. 405-3.2.4. COATING MIX Strong Seal MS 2C or approved equal shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at twenty-eight (28) days: The physical requirements must be verified by an independent, certified, third party testing laboratory within the last five years. The proposed third -party laboratory must be submitted with the bid package; any bid package not including the verifiable, independent third -party testing shall be ruled non-responsive and will be refected. 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C1072) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf 7. Chemical Resistance (ASTM D543/G20) immersion service for: a. Municipal sanitary sewer environment b. Sulfuric Acid, 30% c. Sodium Hydroxide, 10% d. Sodium Hypochlorite, 3% SECTION IV Page 62 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be one-half inch (1/2") to five-eighths inch (5/8") long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the unmixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 to 51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65% to 75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 to 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of 0.67 cubic foot of volume. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide SDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two (2) coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure a minimum of one-half inch (1/2") thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 405-3.2.5. WATER Water shall be clean and potable not to exceed 80°F (Fahrenheit). 405-3.2.6. OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. • 405-3.3. APPLICATION EQUIPMENT • A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump are to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 405-3.4. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-3.4.1. PREPARATION 1. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high-pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with brick and quick setting patching mix. 2. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 3. Any bench, invert/channel/trough or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged, or diverted as required to ensure all liquids are maintained below or away from the surfaces to be coated until final applications are cured as recommended by the manufacturer. SECTION IV Page 63 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 5. Prior to commencing surface preparation, Contractor shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive the coating and notify city, in writing, of any noticeable disparity in the site, structure or surfaces which may interfere with the work, use of materials or procedures as specified herein. 405-3.4.2. MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for thirty (30) seconds to one (1) minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 405-3.4.3. SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to ensure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled, and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be fifteen (15) minutes to one (1) hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of one-half inch (1/2"). The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than twenty-four (24) hours have elapsed between applications. The bench will be sprayed such that a gradual slope is produced from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than one-half inch (1/2"). The invert/channel/trough area shall also be sprayed in a manner that provides a gradual slope through the structure while achieving one-quarter inch (1/4") thickness coverage. The wall/bench and bench/invert/channel/trough intersections shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The fmal application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. The corbel/cone to manhole frame joint shall be sealed according to Section 405-7. 405-3.4.4. PREPARATION OF SAMPLES At some point during the application, at least four (4) two inch (2") cubes will be prepared for each manhole, or from every fifty (50) bags of product used, identified and submitted, in accordance with the city's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C109. 405-3.4.5. CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. 405-3.5. TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole will be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed, and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten inches (10") of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine inches (9"). The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty-eight inch (48") diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty inch diameter (60"), and ninety (90) seconds for seventy-two inch (72") diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the city. SECTION IV Page 64 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 405-4. RAVEN 405 EPDXY COATING SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray/apply a monolithic epoxy material to the wall, channel, invert and bench surfaces of brick, concrete, or any other construction material; Raven 405 product or approved equal. Described are procedures for manhole cleaning preparation, application of material and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained, and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials for applying the Raven 405 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural liner of a minimum 125 mil thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. As it is the intention of the city to rehabilitate the entire structure; corbel, walls, bench, and channel/trough the contractor will be required to provide by-pass pumping as necessary if the cure time exceeds one (1) hour. In no case will flow through plugs be allowed. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. 3. Preparing the manhole to provide a clean, dry, sound and monolithically smooth surface 4. The spray application of a Solvent -free epoxy coating to be applied to specified thickness • • 405-4.1. SUBMITTALS Submittals shall be made in accordance with the following: 1. Technical data sheet on each product used, including ASTM test results indicating the product conforms to and is suitable for its intended use per these specifications. 2. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each product used. 3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations. 4. Applicator Qualifications: a. Manufacturer certification that the Applicator has been trained in the handling, mixing and application of the products to be used. b. Certification that the equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved by the protective coating manufacturer and Applicator personnel have been trained and certified for proper use of the equipment. c. Written document providing three (3) years of experience and five (5) recent references of Applicator indicating successful application of a 100% solids high -build solvent -free coating by spray application. d. Applicator must provide written documentation of having installed a minimum of 50,000 square feet of plural component spray applied epoxy coating the same or similar to that specified within the last two (2) years. e. Proof of any necessary federal, state, or local permits or licenses necessary for the project. 405-4.2. MATERIALS 405-4.2.1. PATCHING MIX Strong Seal, or approved equal, shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi; 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistance SECTION IV Page 65 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 405-4.2.2. INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug, or approved equal, shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C109) 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C1072) 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 405-4.2.3. GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout, or approved equal, shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable and have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and one (1) day strength of 50 psi. 405-4.2.4. COATING MATERIAL Coating product shall be applied to all interior surfaces to protect the host substrate and repair materials from all forms of chemical or bacteriological attack typically found in municipal sanitary sewer systems and to impart a degree of structural enhancement. Coating product physical properties shall be substantiated through submittal of accredited third -party testing results and shall be representative of the actual field applied product and cure mechanism(s) to be employed in the field. The physical requirements must be verified by an independent third -party testing shall be ruled non-responsive and will be rejected. 100% Solids, Solvent -Free, Ultra -High Build Epoxy Coating to be spray applied to all interior surfaces of exposed concrete above the spring line or as otherwise detailed: 1. Manufacturer: Raven Lining Systems, Broken Arrow, Oklahoma 800-324-2810 or 918-615-0140 fax. 2. Product: Raven 405, or approved equal — 100% solids, solvent -free ultra -high -build epoxy system exhibiting the following characteristics: a. Product Type: amine cured epoxy b. VOC Content (ASTM D2584): 0% c. Compressive Strength, (ASTM D695): 18,000 psi d. Tensile Strength, (ASTM D638): 7,600 psi e. Flexural Modulus, (ASTM D790): 700,000 psi f. Adhesion to Concrete, (ASTM D4541/7234): >200 psi with substrate (concrete) failure g. Chemical Resistance (ASTM D543/G20) immersion service for: • Municipal sanitary sewer environment • Sulfuric Acid, 30% • Sodium Hydroxide, 10% • Sodium Hypochlorite, 3% h. Successful Pass: Sanitation District of L.A. County Coating Evaluation Study and SSPWC 210.2.3.3 (Greenbook "Pickle Jar" Chemical Resistance test) 100% Solids, Solvent -Free, Ultra -High Build Epoxy Coating to be manually or spray applied to interior surfaces of exposed concrete above or below the typical flow line; specifically designed for accelerated cure and suitable for release of flow in less than 45 minutes at normal service temperatures or as otherwise detailed. 405-4.2.5. OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior city approval. SECTION IV Page 66 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV—Technical Specifications 405-4.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-4.3.1. PREPARATION 1. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high-pressure water spray (minimum 5,000 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with brick and quick setting patching mix. 2. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 3. Any bench, invert/channel/trough or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged, or diverted as required to ensure all liquids are maintained below or away from the surfaces to be coated until final applications are cured as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. The area between the corbel and the manhole frame and any other area that might exhibit movement or cracking due to expansion and contraction shall be grouted with a flexible grout or gel. A termination groove "key" cut into the substrate between the bottom of the manhole frame and concrete is recommended for placement of the flexible grout or gel. The "key" shall be a minimum 1/4" w x'/a" d, cut at a minimum 45° angle (60° maximum). 6. Prior to commencing surface preparation, Contractor shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive the coating and notify city, in writing, of any noticeable disparity in the site, structure or surfaces which may interfere with the work, use of materials or procedures as specified herein. 405-4.3.2. APPLICATION Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the coating product(s) manufacturer, including environmental controls, product handling, mixing, application equipment, and methods. Spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply the coating product(s) and s Prepared surfaces shall be coated via spray application of the coating product(s) described herein unless otherwise recommended by the coating product manufacturer. In all cases the coating product shall be applied to a minimum dry film thickness of 125 mils to surface profiles. Subsequent top coating or additional coats of the coating product(s) shall occur within the products recoat window. Additional surface preparation procedures will be required if this recoat window is exceeded. Coating product(s) shall interface with adjoining construction materials/components throughout the manhole structure to effectively seal and protect substrates from attack by corrosive elements and to ensure the effective elimination of infiltration into the sewer system. Termination points of the coating product(s) shall be made at the manhole frame and corbel joint (or other man way as is present), and a minimum of 1" interfacing within each pipe penetrating the structure. The corbel/cone to manhole frame joint shall be sealed according to Section 405-7. The entire bench and invert/channel/trough will be thoroughly coated noting that the invert/channel/trough area will be sprayed in a manner that provides a gradual slope through the structure while achieving 125 mils thickness coverage. 405-4.4. TESTING & ACCEPTANCE Coating system thickness shall be inspected to ensure compliance with the specifications herein. 1. During application a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414 (latest edition) - Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of Organic Coatings by Notched Gages, shall be SECTION IV Page 67 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications used. Measurements shall be taken, documented, and attested to by Contractor for submission to the city. 2. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, coating system thickness shall be measured according to SSPC-PA 9 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness on Cementitious Substrates Using Ultrasonic Gages. High voltage holiday detection for coating systems installed in corrosive environments, when it can be safely and effectively employed, shall be performed to ensure monolithic protection of the substrate. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, all surfaces shall be inspected for holidays in accordance with NACE RPO 188-99 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates or ASTM D4787 Standard Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates. All detected holidays shall be marked and repaired according to the coating product(s) manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Test voltage shall be a minimum of 100 volts per mil of coating system thickness. 2. Detection of a known or induced holiday in the coating product shall be confirmed to ensure proper operation of the test unit. 3. All areas repaired shall be retested following cure of the repair material(s). 4. In instances where high voltage holiday detection is not feasible a close visual inspection shall be conducted, and all possible holidays shall be marked and repaired as described above. 5. Documentation of areas tested, equipment employed, results, and repairs made shall be submitted to the city by the Contractor. Adhesion of the coating system to the substrate shall be confirmed in a minimum of 10% of the manholes coated, or for large structures once every 1000 square feet of coated area. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM D7234 Pull -Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull -Off Adhesion Testers. city's Project Manager shall select the manholes/areas to be tested. 1. For each test manhole a minimum of three 20 mm dollies shall be affixed to the coated surface; one at the cone/corbel area, one at the midsection and one near the bottom of the structure. 2. For larger structures a minimum of three 20 mm dollies shall be affixed to the coated surface at random locations within each 1000 square foot area or as otherwise agreed upon. 3. The adhesive used to attach the dollies to the coating shall be rapid setting with tensile strengths in excess of at least twice the anticipated failure point (generally 1000 psi) and permitted to cure in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. The coating and dollies shall be adequately cleaned and prepared to receive the adhesive. Failure of the dolly adhesive shall be deemed a non - test and require retesting. 4. Prior to performing the pull test, the coating shall be scored to the substrate, or within 10 mils of the substrate surface, by mechanical means without disturbing the dolly or coating system bond within the test area. 5. Two of the three adhesion pulls in each test area shall exceed 200 psi and shall include substrate adhered to the back of the dolly or no visual signs of the coating product in the test hole. Pulls tests with results between 150 and 200 psi may be acceptable if more than 50 percent of the substrate in the test area is adhered to the dolly. 6. Should a structure, or area, fail to achieve two successful pulls as described above, additional testing shall be performed at the discretion of the Owner or Project Engineer. Any areas detected to have inadequate bond strength shall be evaluated by the city. Further bond tests may be performed in that area to determine the extent of potentially deficient bonded area and repairs shall be made by Contractor. 7. All adhesion testing shall be performed by qualified personnel using calibrated equipment as specified by the applicable ASTM standard(s). SECTION IV Page 68 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 8. All adhesion testing shall be documented and submitted in a consistent format detailing location, test values, description of the failure point/mode, scoring method employed, adhesive used, cure time of coating and adhesive and other data as deemed necessary by the city. 9. All adhesion test locations shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the city. 10. Visual inspection shall be made by the Project Engineer and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the finished coating affecting the performance of the coating system or the operational functionality of the structure shall be marked and repaired according to the recommendations of the coating product(s) manufacturer. 405-5. SPRAYWALL POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray/apply a monolithic polyurethane material to the wall, channel, invert and bench surfaces of brick, concrete, or any other construction material; SprayWall product or approved equal. Described are procedures for manhole cleaning preparation, application of material and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the SprayWall product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural liner of a minimum 125 thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. As it is the intention of the city to rehabilitate the entire structure; corbel, walls, bench and channel/trough the contractor will be required to provide by-pass pumping as the necessary if the cure time exceeds one (1) hour. In no case will flow through plugs be allowed. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. 3. Preparing the manhole to provide a clean, dry, sound and monolithically smooth surface 4. The spray application of a Solvent -free polyurethane coating to be applied to specified thickness. 405-5.1. SUBMITTALS The following items shall be submitted: 1. Technical data sheet on each product used, including ASTM test results indicating the product conforms to and is suitable for its intended use per these specifications. 2. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each product used. 3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations. 4. Applicator Qualifications: a. Manufacturer certification that the Applicator has been trained in the handling, mixing and application of the products to be used. b. Certification that the equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved by the protective coating manufacturer and Applicator personnel have been trained and certified for proper use of the equipment. c. Written document providing three (3) years of experience and five (5) recent references of Applicator indicating successful application of a 100% solids high -build solvent -free coating by spray application. d. Written document stating that the contractor has installed a minimum of 50,000 square feet of plural component spray applied polyurethane coating the same or similar to that specified within the last two (2) years. e. Proof of any necessary federal, state or local permits or licenses necessary for the project. SECTION IV Page 69 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 405-5.2. MATERIALS 405-5.2.1. PATCHING MIX Strong Seal, or approved equal, shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C109) 15 min., 200 psi; 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 735,000 psi 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 405-5.2.2. INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug, or approved equal, shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C109) 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C952) 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 405-5.2.3. GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout, or approved equal, shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacturer's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable and have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 250 psi and a one (1) day strength of 50 psi. 405-5.2.4. COATING MATERIAL The resin -based material shall be used to form the sprayed structurally enhanced monolithic liner covering all interior surfaces of the structure, including benches and channels/troughs of manholes. The finished liner shall be SprayWall® as manufactured by Sprayroq, Inc. or approved equal and conform to the minimum physical requirements listed below. A minimum of 125 mil. coating thickness is required. The physical requirements must be verified by an independent, certified, third party testing laboratory within the last five years and must be submitted with the bid package. Any bid package not including the verifiable, independent third -party testing sha 1 be ruled non-responsive and will be rejected. 1. VOC Content (ASTM D2584) 0% 2. Compressive Strength, (ASTM D695) 18,000 psi 3. Tensile Strength, (ASTM D638) > 7,450 psi 4. Flexural Modulus, (ASTM D790) 735,000 psi 5. Adhesion to Concrete, (ASTM D4541/7234) >200 psi with substrate (concrete) failure 6. Chemical Resistance (ASTM D543/G20) immersion service for: • Municipal sanitary sewer environment • Sulfuric Acid, 30% • Sodium Hydroxide, 10% • Sodium Hypochlorite, 3% 7. Successful Pass: Sanitation District of L.A. County Coating Evaluation Study and SSPWC 210.2.3.3 (Greenbook "Pickle Jar" Chemical Resistance test) The initial flexural modulus of elasticity (short term) of the submitted resin material will be utilized with the long-term deformation percentage as determined by ASTM D2990 (see below) in the design equation outlined in ASTM 1216-09, Appendix Xl. The value of the long-term flexural modulus of the proposed product will be certified by an independent, certified, third party testing lab, independent of the SECTION IV Page 70 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Manufacturer and submitted with the bid package. [The definition of long-term value will be identified as initial flexural VER 01 w/Flat Wall 2015 Page 7 of 12 modulus of elasticity less the reduction in value caused by Creep over a fifty (50) year minimum period and verified by third party DMA testing (ASTM D2990).] All design submittals will include this certified third -party DMA testing (ASTM D2990) value in their respective design calculations for each structure being rehabilitated. Coating product physical properties shall be substantiated through submittal of accredited third -party testing results and shall be representative of the actual field applied product and cure mechanism(s) to be employed in the field. Polyurethane coating to be manually or spray applied to interior surfaces of exposed concrete above or below the typical flow line; specifically designed for accelerated cure and suitable for release of flow in less than 45 minutes at normal service temperatures or as otherwise detailed. 405-5.2.5. OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 405-5.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-5.3.1. PREPARATION 1. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high-pressure water spray (minimum 5,000 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with brick and quick setting patching mix. 2. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 3. Any bench, invert/channel/trough or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Any active flows shall be dammed, plugged, or diverted as required to ensure all liquids are maintained below or away from the surfaces to be coated until final applications are cured as recommended by the manufacturer. 5. The area between the corbel and the manhole frame and any other area that might exhibit movement or cracking due to expansion and contraction, shall be grouted with a flexible grout or gel (Sikadur 42 Grout Pak LE, Pro-Stik Butyl Sealant, or equal). A termination groove "key" cut into the substrate between the bottom of the manhole frame and concrete is recommended for placement of the flexible grout or gel. The "key" shall be a minimum '/4" w x 1/4" d, cut at a minimum 45° angle (60° maximum). 6. Prior to commencing surface preparation, Contractor shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive the coating and notify city, in writing, of any noticeable disparity in the site, structure or surfaces which may interfere with the work, use of materials or procedures as specified herein. 405-5.3.2. APPLICATION Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the protective coating manufacturer, including material handling, mixing, environmental controls during application, safety, and spray equipment. The spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply the specified protective coating materials and shall be regularly maintained and in proper working order. SECTION IV Page 71 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The protective coating material must be spray applied by a Certified Applicator of the protective coating manufacturer. Specified surfaces shall be coated by spray application of a solvent -free, 100% solids, rigid polyurethane structural lining as further described herein. Airless spray application equipment approved by the coating manufacturer shall be used to apply each coat of the protective coating. The air source is to be filtered to completely remove all oil and water. If necessary, subsequent top coating or additional coats of the protective coating should occur as soon as the basecoat becomes tack free, no later than the recoat window for the specified products. Additional surface preparation procedures will be required if this recoat window is exceeded. The roughness of the substrate will dictate the thickness needed to create the monolithic liner and eliminate any opportunity for voids in the coating. The minimum value for coating thickness shall be a minimum 125 mils. Coating product(s) shall interface with adjoining construction materials/components throughout the manhole structure to effectively seal and protect substrates from attack by corrosive elements and to ensure the effective elimination of infiltration into the sewer system. Termination points of the coating product(s) shall be made at the manhole frame and corbel joint (or other man way as is present), and a minimum of 1" interfacing within each pipe penetrating the structure. The entire bench and invert/channel/trough will be thoroughly coated noting that the invert/channel/trough area will be sprayed in a manner that provides a gradual slope through the structure while achieving 125 mils. thickness coverage. 405-5.4. TESTING & ACCEPTANCE Coating system thickness shall be inspected to ensure compliance with the specifications herein. 1. During application a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414 - Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of Organic Coatings by Notched Gages, shall be used. Measurements shall be taken, documented, and attested to by Contractor for submission to the city. 2. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, coating system thickness may be measured according to SSPC-PA 9 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness on Cementitious Substrates Using Ultrasonic Gages. High voltage holiday detection for coating systems installed in corrosive environments, when it can be safely and effectively employed, shall be performed to ensure monolithic protection of the substrate. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, all surfaces shall be inspected for holidays in accordance with NACE RPO 188-99 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates or ASTM D4787 Standard Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings Applied to Concrete Substrates. All detected holidays shall be marked and repaired according to the coating product(s) manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Test voltage shall be a minimum of 100 volts per mil of coating system thickness. 2. Detection of a known or induced holiday in the coating product shall be confirmed to ensure proper operation of the test unit. 3. All areas repaired shall be retested following cure of the repair material(s). 4. In instances where high voltage holiday detection is not feasible a close visual inspection shall be conducted, and all possible holidays shall be marked and repaired as described above. 5. Documentation of areas tested, equipment employed, results, and repairs made shall be submitted to the city by the Contractor. Adhesion of the coating system to the substrate shall be confirmed in a minimum of 10% of the manholes coated, or for large structures once every 1000 square feet of coated area. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, testing shall be conducted in accordance with SECTION IV Page 72 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications ASTM D7234 Pull -Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull -Off Adhesion Testers. City's Project Manager shall select the manholes/areas to be tested. 1. For each test manhole a minimum of three 20 mm dollies shall be affixed to the coated surface; one at the cone/corbel area, one at the midsection and one near the bottom of the structure. 2. For larger structures a minimum of three 20 mm dollies shall be affixed to the coated surface at random locations within each 1000 square foot area or as otherwise agreed upon. 3. The adhesive used to attach the dollies to the coating shall be rapid setting with tensile strengths in excess of at least twice the anticipated failure point (generally 1000 psi) and permitted to cure in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. The coating and dollies shall be adequately cleaned and prepared to receive the adhesive. Failure of the dolly adhesive shall be deemed a non - test and require retesting. 4. Prior to performing the pull test, the coating shall be scored to the substrate, or within 10 mils of the substrate surface, by mechanical means without disturbing the dolly or coating system bond within the test area. 5. Two of the three adhesion pulls in each test area shall exceed 200 psi and shall include substrate adhered to the back of the dolly or no visual signs of the coating product in the test hole. Pulls tests with results between 150 and 200 psi may be acceptable if more than 50 percent of the substrate in the test area is adhered to the dolly. 6. Should a structure, or area, fail to achieve two successful pulls as described above, additional testing shall be performed at the discretion of the Owner or Project Engineer. Any areas detected to have inadequate bond strength shall be evaluated by the city. Further bond tests may be performed in that area to determine the extent of potentially deficient bonded area and repairs shall be made by Contractor. 7. All adhesion testing shall be performed by qualified personnel using calibrated equipment as specified by the applicable ASTM standard(s). 8. All adhesion testing shall be documented and submitted in a consistent format detailing location, test values, description of the failure point/mode, scoring method employed, adhesive used, cure time of coating and adhesive and other data as deemed necessary by the city. 9. All adhesion test locations shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the city. 10. Visual inspection shall be made by the city's agent and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the finished coating affecting the performance of the coating system or the operational functionality of the structure shall be marked and repaired according to the recommendations of the coating product(s) manufacturer. 405-6. INTERNAL MANHOLE CORBEL SEALING SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray/apply a monolithic polyurea material to the frame and adjacent corbel surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material. The work covered by this item includes but is not limited to furnishing all labor, equipment, materials and supervision, and performing all work necessary to seal the manhole as specified herein or equal to the manhole through the frame joint area and the area above the manhole corbel/cone. Described are procedures for manhole/frame cleaning preparation, application of material and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the product directly to the manhole and frame joint with a minimum of 6 -inch overlap on each surface and a minimum thickness of 125 mils. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications: 1. The removal of any rust or loose and unsound material. SECTION IV Page 73 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 2. Preparing the manhole corbel/cone and frame to provide a clean, dry, sound and monolithically smooth surface 3. The spray application of a Solvent -free polyurea coating to be applied to specified thickness. 405-6.1. SUBMITTALS The following items shall be submitted: 1. Technical data sheet, including ASTM test results indicating the product conforms to and is suitable for its intended use per these specifications. 2. Safety Data Sheet for the product (SDS). 3. Project specific guidelines and recommendations. 4. Applicator Qualifications: a. Manufacturer certification that the Applicator has been trained in the handling, mixing and application of the products to be used. b. Certification that the equipment to be used for applying the products has been approved by the protective coating manufacturer and Applicator personnel have been trained and certified for proper use of the equipment. c. Written document providing three (3) years of experience and five (5) recent references of Applicator indicating successful application of a 100% solids high -build solvent -free coating by spray application. d. Proof of any necessary federal, state, or local permits or licenses necessary for the project. 405-6.2. MATERIALS 405-6.2.1. PATCHING MIX Strong Seal, or approved equal, shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C109) 15 min., 200 psi; 6 hrs.; 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 405-6.2.2. INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug, or approved equal, shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C109) 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C952) 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 405-6.2.3. COATING MATERIAL Manhole seal shall be designed to prevent leakage of water into the manhole through the frame joint area and the area above the manhole cone including all extensions to the corbel area. The seal shall remain flexible allowing for the repeated vertical or horizontal movements of the frame due to frost lift, ground movement or the thermal movement of pavements. The final coating shall be made no less than 125 mils. of corrosion resistant aromatic or approved equal. The product shall have a minimum elongation of 800%. Final liner shall have a minimum tensile strength of 3250 psi. The manhole sealing system shall conform to the physical requirements of ASTM D412. SECTION IV Page 74 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The physical requirements must be verified by an independent, certified, third party testing laboratory within the last five years and must be submitted with the bid package. Any bid package not including the verifiable, independent third -party testing shall be ruled non-responsive and will be rejected. 405-6.3. INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 405-6.3.1. PREPARATION 1. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high-pressure water spray (minimum 5,000 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with brick and quick setting patching mix. 2. All patching materials shall be cured prior to the installation. Preparation of the frame surface shall include sandblasting (minimum of 70 CFM) and an acetone wet wipe to ensure a clean surface as required by manufacturer on uncoated substrate. 3. If coating is to be on top of SprayWall, or Raven 405, then termination points need to be cut which are 1/4" x 1/4" cut on 45° angle at top and bottom of application, then sanding of the SprayWall, or Raven 405, with 40 grit paper, cleaned and an application of Lords 7701 is required prior to application to ensure adhesion. 4. Prior to commencing surface preparation, Contractor shall inspect all surfaces specified to receive the coating and notify city, in writing, of any noticeable disparity in the site, structure or surfaces which may interfere with the work, use of materials or procedures as specified herein. 405-6.3.2. APPLICATION Application procedures shall conform to the recommendations of the polyurea coating manufacturer, including material handling, mixing, environmental controls during application, safety, and spray equipment. The spray equipment shall be specifically designed to accurately ratio and apply the specified protective coating materials and shall be regularly maintained and in proper working order. The polyuria coating material must be spray applied by a Certified Applicator of the coating manufacturer. Airless spray application equipment approved by the coating manufacturer shall be used to apply each coat of the protective coating. The air source is to be filtered to completely remove all oil and water. If necessary, subsequent top coating or additional coats of the polyurea coating should occur as soon as the basecoat becomes tack free, no later than the recoat window for the specified products. Additional surface preparation procedures will be required if this recoat window is exceeded. 405-6.3.3. TESTING & ACCEPTANCE Coating system thickness shall be inspected to ensure compliance with the specifications herein. 1. During application a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414 - Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of Organic Coatings by Notched Gages, shall be used. Measurements shall be taken, documented, and attested to by Contractor for submission to the city. 2. After the coating product(s) have cured in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, coating system thickness may be measured according to SSPC-PA 9 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness on Cementitious Substrates Using Ultrasonic Gages. 3. Visual inspection shall be made by the city's agent and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the finished coating affecting the performance of the coating system or the operational functionality of the structure shall be marked and repaired according to the recommendations of the coating product(s) manufacturer. The contractor shall warrantee proper adhesion of the coating material to the frame and corbel/cone for a minimum often (10) years. SECTION IV Page 75 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 406. SMOKE AND DYE TESTING 406-1. GENERAL PROTOCOL Conduct smoke testing of gravity sewers for defects and identify manholes which could not be located, and all new structures not shown on GIS. Smoke and Dye testing will be completed using the following Protocols: Smoke testing will provide detailed information on wet weather inflow sources to the sanitary sewer. In order to identify collection system defects and illicit connections, non-toxic smoke will be forced into the sewer by high-capacity blower capable of achieving a minimum of 1,750 cfm of airflow. Any break in the sewer will allow the smoke to escape provided the smoke machine generates sufficient pressure. One line segment will be tested at one time with plugging. The maximum length of sewer to be smoke tested in a single setup shall be 400 linear feet per blower. Dual blower smoke testing shall be performed for pipe sections over 400 linear feet with a maximum of 800 linear feet. Smoke testing shall not be performed during or following weather conditions that may impair detecting escaping smoke (i.e. very windy, rainy, or high groundwater conditions, etc.) Smoke testing will not be performed on surcharged lines. In case of surcharged lines, the selected Contractor will contact the city and identify the issue. Once the surcharge has been eliminated, the city will contact the selected Contractor to re -smoke the test area. Smoke testing will document when smoke does not travel the entire length of piping, or when smoke is not detected at the roof stack of connecting buildings. In these cases, CCTV inspection (by others) will be required of both mainline and lateral piping. When a defect is identified as being a potential significant inflow source it will be recommended for dye testing. The smoke shall be non-toxic, odorless, and non -staining. A Safety Data Sheet shall be submitted and approved by city prior to the commencement of smoke testing. Prior to testing, the selected Contractor shall submit a schedule outlining test dates and locations to the city, three weeks prior to commencing the smoke testing. The selected Contractor shall prepare Smoke Testing notices (English & Spanish) advising residents and local authorities of the smoke testing program. The notices shall be approved by the city prior to distribution. Extra copies of the notices will be provided to the city for distribution to other city agencies, including the Fire Department, Police Department, Emergency Services and others. The selected Contractor shall distribute smoke testing notices to residences in the project area including the local fire and police precincts, approximately 48-72 hours in advance of the smoke testing. For large facilities such as schools or hospitals, a log will be maintained that documents the property manager's notification of planned smoke testing activities. A local Contractor's telephone number will be provided for those individuals with questions or for anyone requiring special assistance. Field personnel will be uniformed and will conspicuously display identification badges. Private individuals requesting additional identification will be asked to contact the city and crews shall carry a letter from the city authorizing the holder of the letter to perform the work described. Each day the fire department and other affected agencies will be notified of the crew location since smoke may enter homes through defective plumbing. 406-2. REPORTING Field results shall be documented in an Excel spreadsheet and on printed maps. The Excel spreadsheet shall include the following information: a. defect and photo number b. address and locations of defects c. type of defect found d. is defect public or private e. address of residences that did not smoke during testing and residents' houses that were smoked with defect description (if possible) SECTION IV Page 76 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • 1 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications f. address of residences that did not have a cleanout plug(s) or lids and or in low-lying areas g. manholes ID on those with no manhole inserts, with debris, or in low-lying areas h. any defective sewer mains found in the field. The printed and digital maps shall include the following: a. boundary of the test area b. sanitary sewer line segments tested c. location and boundary of blower setups d. locations of defects with defect number and photo of defect e. address of residences that did not smoke during testing (plumbing roof vent: negative) and residences that smoke in house f. ID numbers for manhole missing water -tight manhole inserts g. location of smoking storm sewer catches basins The field documentation will include: a. sketched of the location and nature of each system defect b. pertinent information for prioritizing repair of the defects c. information needed to assess the best mitigation method d. color digital photographs will be taken to document defects during smoke testing e. location of defect will be measured from permanent objects (corner of house, light pole, etc.). In addition to the standard documentation procedure, each smoke testing crew will be equipped with a computer tablet which is `blue -toothed' to a GPS receiver. The crew can see their location on the downloaded `cloud -based' map and as inflow sources are identified photographs will be taken to document each defect and an X, Y coordinate value will be assigned to each image. As each defect image is automatically uploaded to the `cloud -based' map a defect type code will be attached to the image. Each inflow source or defect can then be displayed on the map and each defect type is assigned a different symbol/color/indicator. This form of documentation allows for comprehensive QA/QC of each completed smoke test and assurance that no defect is left unrecorded. The following is an overview of the required smoke testing process and reporting. 1. Field review the area selected area and note on the map all "hundred block" addresses. 2. Distribute smoke notice to all homes, businesses, schools, police and Fire & Rescue, etc. In addition, Fire & Rescue will be notified of any proposed smoke testing activities forty-eight to seventy-two hours prior to initiation. 3. During the initial field review, identify all types of businesses, specifically any doctors' offices, hospitals, schools, retirement homes (communities), assisted living facilities (ALFs), or any other establishment that may need special consideration and handling during the actual smoke test. Strict consideration and coordination with customers who have sensitive needs must be adhered to, some of whom will not be included on any smoke testing schedule as the nature of their business, such as hospitals, is far too delicate. 4. Twenty -Four hours minimum must expire from the issuance of smoke testing notices to allow all affected to prepare for the testing. For special exceptions, such ALFs and persons with health problems living at home, etc., direct in person of telephone contact shall be made if at all possible. 5. On the day of the testing, the selected portion of the study area will be identified and all street names and related hundred block addresses will be given to the police and fire department/emergency personnel for the area where the testing will occur. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL THE AREA SELECTED FOR THAT DAY'S TESTING BE MODIFIED TO INCLUDE ADDITIONAL WORK UNLESS THE POLICE & FIRE DEPARTMENT/EMERGENCY PERSONNEL HAVE BEEN NOTIFIED FIRST. The name and ID number of the fire department person contacted will be documented on the appropriate form. SECTION IV Page 77 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The fire department/emergency personnel will be provided the exact locations and specific time frames of where and when the tests will be performed. 6. Multi -day scheduling with one-time reporting to the police and fire department/emergency personnel will not be permitted. 7. The city's Project Manager will be notified on a daily basis with the same information. 8. Should the fire department/emergency personnel respond to the target area during the actual smoke testing, all testing will cease immediately and the Smoke Testing Team's field supervisor in charge will contact the fire unit responding to answer any questions that the fire department officer may have. 9. All testing activity will cease when any resident complains of smoke entering their establishment. Smoke Testing Team's field personnel will then attempt to isolate where the smoke is entering the establishment and make the occupant aware of what the problem may be. All defective plumbing found inside should be documented appropriately for future reference. The occupant will be advised to have the defect repaired by a licensed plumber. 10. During the actual smoke testing, Smoke Testing Team field personnel will scout the area for smoke escaping from ground sources, roof vents, storm drain structures, etc. All sources of Rainfall Dependent Infiltration/Inflow will be photographed, measured, drawn, and documented accordingly with addresses, data, and sketches. The smoke test form will identify which sewer segment is being tested by its component identification in the city's GIS database. 11. All defects encountered will also be recorded using handheld tablets 'blue tooth' to a GPS receiver. The tablet will have access to the city's wastewater collection system GIS which will be overlaid on a digital ortho map and the GPS unit will allow the smoke test team member to see his location on the map in real time and allow for the accurate recording of a defect's type and location. Each defect image taken will be geocoded to a specific location and the information will be stored electronically for future use. It is understood that the city staff members may accompany the selected Contractor's field staff during the smoke testing initiative to gain a better understanding of how to quantify potential inflow volumes from the smoke defects recorded and how to compare the smoke testing defect results to the previously recorded flow data. It is further understood that the selected Contractor's staff will install cleanout plugs and storm water manhole inflow dishes (provided by the city) concurrently with the smoke testing operations. The selected Contractor will develop a `Smoke Testing Results' spreadsheet that identifies each pipe section tested and the results of the test, whether positive or negative. A separate spreadsheet: `Smoke Testing Defects', will be prepared that identifies all defects encountered during the smoke testing activity. This spreadsheet will contain a column which identifies the surface area associated with each defect, and if there is a need to conduct dye water testing/flooding. 406-3. DYE INVESTIGATION The results of the smoke testing may not always clearly or positively indicate the source of a sanitary sewer interconnection or defect. Further investigation may be required to fully define the I/I sources or defects under the following conditions: 1. Smoke injected into the sanitary sewer is seen in storm sewer catch basins. This may be caused by defective catch basin laterals in the vicinity of the sanitary sewer (if the sanitary sewer has open joints, cracks or breaks). Dye testing may be needed to determine if the catch basin is connected to the sanitary sewer. CCTV (by others) of the sanitary sewer may be needed to identify the point of the smoke exfiltration. 2. Smoke does not freely pass from one manhole to the next, or vent from property's roof stack/ roof plumbing vent, during the sanitary sewer smoke testing. CCTV (by others) of the sanitary sewer/lateral may be needed to identify sewer blockages or pipe sags. SECTION IV Page 78 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Upon completion of the initial smoke testing within a service area, the selected Contractor will submit a list of locations that require further investigation to the city. Upon approval from the city, the city may request the selected contractor to accompany a city diagnostic crew to further investigate the inconclusive smoke test results. Techniques employed by the city may include dye testing, CCTV inspections (by others) manhole/catch basin inspection, sewer line lamping (by others), and storm sewer cleaning (by others). Where initial smoke test results warrant further investigation as approved by the city, a non-toxic dye approved by the city will be used to investigate specific potential interconnections. Contractor shall submit the SDS for all dyes used. Storm sewer cross -connections and area drains that are suspected of being connected to the sanitary sewer will be positively identified using the dye tracer procedure. Laterals suspected of having significant leaks or breaks will also be investigated. Field documentation, including sketches showing the location of all tests conducted and digital photographs, where feasible, will be used to record findings. Internal pipeline inspection will determine the exact source of the suspected interconnection and establish the best abatement option. The following identifies the dye water protocols to be implemented. 406-3.1. DYE WATER TRACING Private/Public sector dye water tracing will be conducted by introducing a small quantity of liquid dye concentrate into suspect sources such as downspouts, area drains, patio drains, window well drains, and driveway drains, and then introducing a sufficient volume of clean water to locate the source's discharge point. During each tracing, sanitary sewers, storm drains, and curb lines located downstream of the sources shall be monitored for signs of dyed water. The quantity of dye concentrate and water used will vary depending on pipe size and the quantity of flow and debris in each line section. A report will be prepared for each location where dye water tracing has been performed. The report will identify where the dye water was introduced and its' susceptibility for entering the wastewater collection system. Photos will be taken of where the dye water is introduced and where it is recorded discharging into the downstream wastewater collection system manhole. CCTV inspection equipment (by others) will be utilized to identify exactly where the dye water is entering the wastewater collection system piping. 406-3.2. DYE WATER FLOODING Dye water flooding results will be documented for each location where the storm drainage system is flooded. Each dye water flood report will identify the section of wastewater gravity piping being tested, the location(s) where the storm water system piping was isolated and flooded, photographs of each setup and CCTV inspection results (by others) identifying the location(s) where dye water was identified entering the wastewater collection system. The following information will also be documented; evidence of dyed water in manholes downstream from the ponding area, stream crossing, or other suspected sources where the dyed water is placed, and time of travel from contributing source to the manhole sampled, and the concentration of the dyed water observed; The Field Inspection Procedures for Dyed Water Flooding are as follows: 1. A mixture of water and any approved dye coloring substance will be introduced to the identified source. Dye water team inspectors will be stationed immediately downstream on the local sanitary and storm sewer lines. Observations, whether positive or negative, will be documented appropriately. Whenever possible the dyed water point of exit will be documented by CCTV inspection equipment (by others). 2. Prior to any dye testing, the appropriate city staff shall be notified of the specific location of testing and what adjacent waterways may be affected when the dye water is released into the storm drainage system. SECTION IV Page 79 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Fire hydrants used to supply the water source needed will be opened slowly and closed in the same manner. A flow restrictive device shall be used on the hydrant to prevent discoloration problems. Should the water be running cloudy or dirty after use, the fire hydrant shall be left open at a slow pace until the water clears. If long term draining is required, the Dye Water Team shall notify the city. 406-4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Measurement shall be the number of linear feet smoke tested and each occurrence of dye water tracing and dye water flooding. 406-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for smoke testing as measured above and each occurrence of dye water tracing and dye water flooding, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to perform the smoke and dye testing. SECTION IV Page 80 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 500 SERIES: POTABLE AND RECLAIMED WATER MAINS, FIRE LINES AND APPURTENANCES • • 501. SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials, and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, fire lines, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. All materials identified and specified in this section shall be NSF 61 and ISO 9001 compliant. 502. MATERIALS 502-1. GENERAL Materials, equipment, and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of the best quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering, and shall be fabricated in a first-class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted to the Engineer of Record with each shipment of materials. Engineer of Record shall certify and submit all material test results to the city Project Manager within 10 calendar days of performing test(s). 502-2. PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 502-2.1. DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile iron pipe shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C151/ A21.51, latest revision. The minimum thickness class for underground pipe shall be Thickness Class 51 for 4 -inch pipe or greater, 3" ductile iron water mains or service lines are not allowed, Thickness Class 50 for 6 -inch through 12 -inch pipe and Pressure Class 250 for 16 -inch pipe and larger. Flanged pipe shall have a minimum thickness class of Class 53. Pipe thickness class or pressure class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the fol owing table: Size Thickness Class (TC) Pressure Class (PC) Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" TC51 0.26 350 6" TC50 0.25 350 8" TC50 0.27 350 12" TC50 0.31 350 16" PC250 0.31 250 20" PC250 0.33 250 SECTION IV Page 81 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 24" PC250 0.37 250 30" PC250 0.42 250 36" PC250 0.47 250 Pipe larger than 8 -inches in diameter or pipes which are deeper than 10 -feet shall be ductile iron only, for open cut installations. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch through 12 -inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. Pipe shall have a minimum rated water working pressure of 250 psi and shall be furnished in laying lengths of 20 feet or less, unless specifically shown otherwise on the Drawings. All piping and fittings shall be new and unused, no refurbished piping or fittings shall be accepted. Ductile iron pipe shall be used for all hydrant installations, large meter sets 3" or larger and for fire line installations from the main to the backflow preventer. Fittings: Fittings for bends, tees, crosses, etc. from 4 -inch through 36 -inch in size installed on ductile iron pipe shall be either mechanical joint, restrained joint or flanged joint as indicated on the Drawings and shall have a minimum working pressure of 250 psi. Fittings shall be cast ductile iron and shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C110, ANSI/AWWA C111 and ANSI/AWWA C153, latest revisions for flanged and mechanical joint pipe. Fittings for compact ductile iron cast fittings in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53, latest revision with mechanical joint bells or ductile iron cast fittings in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C 110/A 21.10, latest revision with mechanical joint bells. Fittings shall be coated and lined as indicated on the Drawings, in the manner specified below for ductile iron pipe. The rubber gaskets for flanged, mechanical, and push -on joints shall be as described below. The working pressure minimum rating shall be 350 psi for 4 -inch to 24 -inch fittings. Fittings larger than 24 -inch shall be pressure rated to 250 psi minimum. Fittings shall be designed to withstand without bursting a hydrostatic test of three times the rated water working pressure. All fittings shall have a date code cast into the fitting in addition to the pressure rating and material code. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA Standards, the latest revisions shall apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture shall be acceptable. Push -On Joints: Push -on -joints shall be used for straight pipe lengths only. No fittings with push -on -joints shall be allowed. Pipe using push -on joints shall be in strict accordance with AWWA C111 and ANSI A21.11, latest revision. Jointing materials shall be provided by the pipe manufacturer and installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended practice. The gaskets for push -on pipe joints shall be made of EPDM rubber. Push -on joints shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city. Mechanical Joints: Jointing materials for mechanical joints shall be provided by the pipe and fitting manufacturer. Materials assembly, bolting and gaskets shall be in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111 and ANSI/AWWA C110/ A 21.10 and ANSI/AWWA C153/ A 21.53, latest revisions. Tee head bolts and nuts for underground mechanical joint ductile iron fittings shall be manufactured of CORTEN, high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel in accordance with ASTM A242, or an equal approved by the Engineer. The gaskets for mechanical joints shall be made of EPDM rubber. Flanged Joints: Bolt circle and bolt holes for flanges shall be drilled and faced to match ANSI B16.1, Class 125, with any special drilling and tapping as required to insure correct alignment and bolting. All accessory hex -head bolts and nuts and full faced gaskets for each joint size shall be furnished as a flange accessory package. SECTION IV Page 82 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 1. Gaskets: Full face, Toruseal gaskets, or approved equal shall be used for flanged pipe connections. Gaskets shall be suitable for a water pressure of 350 psi at a temperature of 180F. The gaskets for flanged joints shall be made of EPDM rubber. 2. Bolts and Nuts for Flanges: Bolts and nuts for flanges shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M for nuts. The nuts shall have a hardness that is lower than that of the bolts and washers by a difference of 50 Brinnell hardness to prevent galling during installation. 3. Flanges shall be long -hub type screwed tightly on pipe by machine at the foundry prior to facing and drilling. Flange machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibitor immediately after facing and drilling. Field assembled screwed on flanges are prohibited. 502-2.1.1. MANUFACTURED RESTRAINED JOINTS FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE Restrained Pipe Joints and Fittings: Thrust restraint for buried piping shall be provided by restrained joints. Concrete thrust blocks shall not be acceptable. Pipe joints and fittings shall be restrained in accordance with the Drawings and the requirements of this Specification. It is intended that, at a minimum, all fittings shall be restrained. In cases where the calculated required length of restrained pipe is not evenly divisible by nominal laying lengths of pipe, the total required length of restrained pipe shall be rounded up to the next closest nominal length that is evenly divisible by the standard laying length. A. Manufactured Restrained Joints: Manufactured restrained joints shall be manufacturer's standard specifically modified push -on type joints with joint restraint provided by ductile iron retainer rings joined together by corrosion -resistant, high strength steel tee head bolts and nuts or with joint restraint provided by a welded -on retainer ring and a split flexible ring assembled behind the retainer ring. Gaskets for manufactured restrained pipe joints shall be made of EPDM rubber. Manufactured restrained joints shall be as listed as an equal approved by the city. B. Gripping -Type Gasket Restraint: Gripping -type gaskets may be used for ductile iron pipe 12 -inches in size and smaller, when approved by the city. This type of restrained joint shall be the manufacturer's standard push -on type joint with joint restraint provided by a specially designed gasket with high strength stainless steel gripping elements which have sharp teeth on its inner surface for gripping the spigot end of the pipe joint. The gripping type gasket shall be made of EPDM rubber. The gripping type gasket manufacturer's joint restraint shall only be considered for use on pipe sizes from 4 -inch to 12 -inch. Gripping type gasket restraints shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city. C. Manufactured restrained joint pipe and fittings shall be ductile iron only and shall comply with applicable portions of this Specification. Manufactured restrained joints shall be capable of deflection during assembly. Deflection shall not exceed 50 percent of the manufacturer's recommendations. D. Tee head bolts and nuts for restrained joints shall be manufactured of CORTEN, high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel in accordance with ASTM A242, or an equal approved by the Engineer. 502-2.1.2. ALTERNATE MECHANICALLY RESTRAINED JOINTS FOR DI PIPE Thrust restraint for buried piping shall be provided by restrained joints. Concrete thrust blocks shall not be acceptable. When prior approval is obtained from the Engineer, ductile iron pipe and fittings with mechanical joints or ductile iron pipe with push -on joints may be restrained using a follower gland or ring which includes a restraining mechanism. Joint restraints shall have a working pressure rating of 350 psi for 3 -inch to 16 -inch ductile iron pipe, 250 psi for 18 -inch to 36 -inch ductile iron pipe, with a minimum pressure SECTION IV Page 83 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications rating safety factor of 2 to 1. The restraint shall be accomplished by multiple gripping wedges incorporated into a follower gland meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C 110/A21.10. 502-2.1.2.1. Restraints for Ductile Iron Pipe with Mechanical Joint Fittings Joint restraints for ductile iron pipe to mechanical joint fittings shall be MEGALUGE Series 1100 restraints by EBAA Iron, or an approved equal listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List. When actuated during installation, the restraining device shall impart a multiple wedging action against the pipe wall, which increases resistance as internal pressure in the pipeline increases. A. The restrained joint shall maintain flexibility after installation. Glands shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 and restraining devices shall be of heat-treated ductile iron with a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. The gland shall have standard dimension and bolting patterns for mechanical joints conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111 and C153, latest revisions. The restraining wedges shall have twist -off nuts to insure proper torquing. B. Tee head bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion -resistant, high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel in accordance with ASTM A242. C. No other retainer gland type device will be acceptable. After installation prior to backfilling, all parts of the joint restraint system shall be coated with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 502-2.1.2.2. Restraints for Ductile Iron Pipe with Push -on Joints Joint restraints for ductile iron push -on pipe joints 4 -inch to 36 -inch shall be constructed of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 and shall have a working pressure for 350 psi for 4 -inch to 16 -inch and 250 psi for 18 -inch and larger fittings. Restraint shall be accomplished by a wedge action restraint ring on the spigot joined to a split ductile iron ring behind the bell and the two rings connected by restraint rods and nuts. Torque limiting twist off nuts shall be used to ensure proper actuation of the restraining wedges. The restraints shall be MEGALUG® Series 1700 restraint harnesses as manufactured by EBAA Iron or an approved equal. A. The restrained joint shall maintain flexibility after installation. Restraint rings shall be manufactured of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 and the ring restraining wedge devices shall be of heat-treated ductile iron with a minimum hardness of 370 BHN. The restraining wedges shall have twist -off nuts to insure proper torquing. B. Restraint rods and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion -resistant, high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel in accordance with ASTM A242. C. No other restraint harness type device will be acceptable. After installation prior to backfilling, all parts of the joint restraint system shall be coated with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 502-2.1.3. Ductile Iron Pipe Installed with Steel Casings General: All pipe placed within steel casings shall be push -on joint ductile iron pipe restrained by the use of mechanical bell restraints as specified above in Section 502-2.1.2.2. The rods for the bell restraints shall be double nutted to prevent over -belling of the joint during push -in of the carrier pipe into the casing. The carrier pipe shall have properly sized casing spacers installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be double sealed by brick and cement mortar and include a casing end seal with stainless steel bands as shown on in the engineering construction standards. Cement -Mortar Interior Lining (Potable or Reclaimed Water): Ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials shall be cement lined in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104, latest edition, "Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water". The cement lining shall have standard thickness SECTION IV Page 84 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications and, after curing, the lining shall have a seal coat of bituminous material in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80, latest revision and shall be listed by ANSI/NSF Standard 61 for potable water contact. Pipe Labeling: Pipe manufacturer shall label in large legible lettering on the exterior of the pipe the type of pipe interior lining. Exterior Coatings for Buried Pipe: Ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials to be installed underground shall be coated on the exterior at the factory with one coat, 1 mil DFT, of asphaltic coating per AWWA C151, C110 and C153. All clamps, bolts, nuts, studs, and other uncoated parts of joints for underground installation shall be coated with coal tar epoxy prior to backfilling. Coal tar epoxy shall be equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. Exterior Coating for Exposed Pipe: Ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials to be installed aboveground shall be furnished with a shop applied primer on the exterior. All above ground ductile iron pipe and fitting installations shall be painted in the field with an epoxy -epoxy -urethane system coating from an approved coating manufacturer, color: Safety Blue for potable water, Pantone Purple for reclaimed water or Safety Green for wastewater. 502-2.t4. POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT FOR BURIED DUCTILE IRON PIPE Polyethylene tube encasement shall be provided and installed for all buried ductile iron pipe segments and fittings for corrosion protection as specified herein. Both material and installation procedures shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C105/ A21.5-10. Polyethylene encasement material shall be manufactured with UV inhibitors. The polyethylene encasement shall be color coded as follows: A. Potable Water Service — Blue Polyethylene Encasement. B. Reclaimed Water Service — Pantone Purple Polyethylene Encasement. C. Wastewater Service — Green Polyethylene Encasement. The polyethylene encasement shall be a minimum of 8 mils thick and shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide suitable protection of pipe installation in corrosive soil. All pipe joints shall consist of a minimum of one foot of polyethylene overlap onto the adjacent pipe at both ends. All overlap material shall be secured in place with at least two wraps of 1 -inch wide x 8 mils thick polyethylene adhesive tape. Any slack liner material along the pipe barrel shall be taken up by folds secured in-place with adhesive tape. Repair any rips, punctures, or other damage to polyethylene with tape or by patching. All valves, fittings and specialty items shall be jointed with proper overlaps and fastening as described above. Prepare openings for service taps, air -reliefs, etc., by making a cut in the polyethylene and temporarily folding back the edges. After installation is completed, replace the polyethylene and repair the cut with polyethylene adhesive tape. Care shall be taken during backfilling so that no damage will occur to the polyethylene encasement. In general, backfilling shall be done in accordance with AWWA Standard C 600. The Contractor shall install polyethylene encasement in accordance with all liner and pipe manufacturer recommendations. Polyethylene encasement shall be required for below ground installations of ductile iron pipe and fittings where the installed ductile iron utility pipe will be located less than 10 feet from a gas main. 502-2.2. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Each length of PVC pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation such as the name or trademark of the manufacturer, the location of the manufacturing plant, SECTION IV Page 85 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications and the class or strength classification of the pipe. All PVC pipe shall bear the NSF -DW seal. Each length of pipe shall also bear and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. The markings shall be plainly visible on the pipe barrel. This required identification shall be factory applied by the manufacturer. Pipe which is not marked clearly with the required identification is subject to rejection. All rejected pipe shall be promptly removed from the project site by the Contractor. PVC pipe is approved for underground installations only. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4 -inch through 8 -inch shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C900, DR18, latest revision and the American Society for Testing & Materials for the PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D1784. Pipe shall have gasketed integral bell ends and shall be homogeneous throughout and be free of visible cracks, holes, foreign material, blisters, or other visible deleterious faults. Pipe shall be designed for maximum working pressure of not less than 235 psi and with not less than a sustained hydrostatic pressure of 470 psi for a safety factor of 2 to 1 for AWWA C900 pipe. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall be manufactured to the same outside diameter (O.D.) as Ductile Iron Pipe only. Pipe larger than 8 -inches in diameter or pipes which are deeper than 10 -feet shall be ductile iron only. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch through 8 -inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 235 20 6 18 235 20 8 18 235 20 12 18 235 20 Bell and Spigot Pipe Joints: Pipe joints shall be gasketed, push -on type made with integral bell and spigot pipe ends in accordance with ASTM D3139, latest revision. The bell shall consist of an integral thickened wall section designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. The bell shall be supplied with factory glued rubber ring gasket which conforms to the manufacturer's standard dimensions and tolerances. The gasket shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477 "Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" and shall be manufactured of EPDM elastomeric material. PVC pipe shall be approved by the Engineer and the Owner or approved equal. Integral Pipe Color: All PVC pipe for potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and wastewater force mains shall be extruded or fabricated with an integral color in the PVC material. The integral color for the PVC pipe shall be as follows: A. Potable Water: PVC pipeline color - Blue. B. Reclaimed Water: PVC pipeline color — Pantone Purple C. Wastewater: PVC pipeline color — Green The use of white or any other color pipe for potable water, reclaimed water or wastewater service shall be prohibited. Fittings: Fittings for PVC pressure pipe shall be ductile iron fittings with restrained mechanical joint ends, linings and coatings as specified in Section 502-2.1 for ductile iron fittings. Restrained Joints for PVC Pipe: Thrust restraint for buried piping shall be provided by restrained joints. Concrete thrust blocks shall not be acceptable. Thrust restraints shall be used at all valves, tees, bends, and other fittings for the Restrained Joint PVC pipe and Push -on Joint PVC pipe. Where indicated on the Drawings, to prevent pipe joints and fittings from separating under pressure, pipe joints and fittings for PVC pipe shall be restrained as follows: SECTION IV Page 86 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications A. PVC pipe bell and spigot push -on joints, adjacent to restrained fittings, shall be restrained using a harness type restraint device. The harness restraint shall be split to enable installation of the restraint after the spigot has been installed into the bell. The restraint unit shall consist of a split ring that fits behind the bell, a split restraint ring that installs on the spigot and a number of clamping bolts to connect the other two parts. The restraining device shall consist of multiple individually activated gripping wedges or a series of serrations to grip the pipe and maximize restraint capability in conjunction with a sufficient number of clamping bolts connecting the retainer on the bell side of the joint pipe to the restraint ring on the other side to hold the spigot. The restraining device and components shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A536, Grade 65- 42-10. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A242. The restraint device shall be the EBBA Iron MEGALUG' Series 1500 TD Restrainer or an equal. B. Mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be restrained with the EBBA Iron MEGALUG' Series 2000 PV Restrainer or an equal approved. The restraining device shall consist of a retainer gland such that it can replace the standard mechanical joint gland and can be used with the standard mechanical joint bell conforming to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 and ANSI/AWWA C153/A21- 53. The restraining device shall have a pressure rating equal to that of the PVC pipe on which it is used. Twist off nuts, sized same as the tee -head bolts shall be used to insure proper actuating of restraining devices. The restraining gland shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting ASTM A536, Grade 65-42-10. The tee head bolts and nuts, and the clamping bolts and nuts, shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A242. 502-2.2.1. RESTRAINED JOINT PVC PIPE (DIRECTIONAL BORE) Restrained Joint PVC pipe and couplings used for directional bores shall be made from un -plasticized PVC compounds having a minimum cell classification of 12454-B, as defined in ASTM D1784 (latest edition). All compounds shall qualify for a Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4°F, in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2837 (latest edition latest edition). Blue pipe (safety blue paint color) shall be supplied for the potable water system and purple pipe (pantone 522C paint color) shall be supplied for the reclaimed water system as specified in Section 502-2.2. Nominal outside diameters and wall thickness of PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C900 for pipe sizes between 4 and 16 -inches. Nominal outside diameters and wall thickness of 4" PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2241 (latest edition). PVC pipe shall be furnished in sizes 4" (Pressure Rating 250 psi, DR17), 4" (Class 305, DR -14) and 6" and 8" (Class 235, DR -18). Pipe shall be furnished in standard laying lengths of 20 ft. + 1 in. PVC pipe used for directional bores shall be joined using a restrained joint coupling system or ring restraint with Rieber Gasket meeting the requirements of ASTM F477, latest edition. Pipe and/or couplings shall be designed as an integral system and shall be provided by a single manufacturer for maximum reliability and interchangeability. Assembled joints shall meet the leakage test requirements of ASTM D3139 (latest edition). No external pipe -to -pipe restraining devices which clamp onto or otherwise damage the pipe surface as a result of point -loading shall be permitted. Maximum allowable axial jacking loads for the pipe shall be provided by the pipe manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide and utilize appropriate instrumentation that the Engineer shall monitor, to ensure that the jacking loads never exceed 80% of the maximum allowable axial jacking loads allowed by the pipe manufacturer. Only experienced personnel shall be used to install pipe. If used, coupling edges shall be beveled to reduce drag force when pipe is installed by directional bore or Micro tunneling. Assembly of joints shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Manufacturer/Product: Certain Teed Certa-Lok C-900, no approved equal. SECTION IV Page 87 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 502-2.3. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE This Section includes materials and methods of installation of high-density polyethylene pipe (HDPE) and fittings for water, reclaimed water, and wastewater utility use as required and as specified herein. For point repairs only if the flow cannot be stopped the use of stiffeners is allowed. The high density, very high molecular weight polyethylene pipe shall be made from a HDPE material having a minimum material designation code of PE4710 and shall conform to AWWA C906, latest revision. The material shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3350 and shall have a minimum cell classification of PE445574C/E. In addition, the pipe shall be listed as meeting NSF -61. HDPE pipe shall have outside diameter sizes matching ductile iron pipe (DIPS) and shall have the minimum wall thickness and dimension ratio (DR) as shown on the Drawings for a particular installation. Minimum pressure ratings for HDPE pipe shall be 250 psi DR 9 and 200 psi for DR -11. The DR rating or the minimum pipe wall thickness of the pipe for a particular HDD installation shall be as called out on the Drawings. The polyethylene compound shall be suitably protected against degradation by ultraviolet light by means of carbon black, well dispersed by pre -compounding in a concentration of not less than 2 percent. The pipe manufacturer shall be listed and in good standing with the Plastic Pipe Institute as meeting the recipe and mixing requirements of the resin manufacturer for the resin used to manufacture the pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured by Performance Pipe (Chevron), JM Eagle or an approved equal. HDPE pipe shall be manufactured and identified by color based on the type of utility service. HDPE pipe and tubing less than 6 -inch in size shall be manufactured entirely in the required color. For HDPE pipe 6 - inch and greater, color coding shall be accomplished either through an exterior surface entirely of the required color or through striping. The color coding shall be permanently co -extruded on the pipe exterior surface as part of the pipe's manufacturing process. The pipe shall be manufactured as one solid color per the applicable service color or shall be black in color with three (3) permanent solid color stripes, per the applicable service color, extruded into the piping material. The colored stripes shall appear on three (3) sides of the pipe, run the entire length of the pipe, and each stripe shall be no less than 1 -inch wide. Painting HDPE pipe to accomplish color coding shall not be permitted. The pipe identification color coding based on the intended Type of Utility Service shall be as follows: 1. Sewer — green (safety green paint color) 2. Water — blue (safety blue paint color) 3. Reclaimed water — purple (pantone 522C paint color) In addition to the identification color being co -extruded, HDPE Pipe shall have been continuously marked by the manufacturer with permanent printing with the following information at a minimum: A. Nominal Size (Inches). B. Dimension Ratio (DR). C. Pressure Rating (psi). D. Trade Name. E. Material Classification (PE4710). F. Plant, Extruder and Operator Codes. G. Resin Supplier Code. H. Date Produced; and I. HDPE pipe used for potable water mains shall bear the NSF Seal of Approval. 502-2.3.1. MECHANICAL JOINT ADAPTERS (MJ ADPATERS) Mechanical Joint Adapter Fittings shall have a material designation code of PE4710, and a minimum Cell Classification of PE445474C/E. Mechanical Joint Adapters can be made to ASTM D3261 or if machined, must meet the requirements of ASTM F2206. MJ Adapters shall have a pressure rating equal to the pipe SECTION IV Page 88 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications unless otherwise specified on the plans. Markings for molded or machined MJ Adapters shall be per ASTM D3261. Where shown on the drawings, 4 -inch and larger transitions to mechanical joint fittings and valves shall be ductile iron mechanical joint. Connection to the mechanical joint fittings shall be accomplished using a mechanical joint adapter kit. The mechanical joint adapter fitting shall be fused onto the pipe and shall result in a restrained joint with a pressure rating no less than 150 psi. The D.I./HDPE mechanical joint adaptor shall consist of: 1. A molded or fabricated HDPE mechanical joint transition fitting. 2. A mechanical joint rubber gasket fabricated of EPDM. 3. A mechanical joint restraining gland. The restraining gland shall be manufactured of high strength, ductile iron meeting ASTM A536, Grade 65-42-10. 4. The tee head bolts and nuts shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel, meeting the requirements of ASTM A242. 502-2.3.2. BUTT FUSION PROCESS AND INSTALLATION The pipe shall be joined by the butt fusion procedure outlined in ASTM F2620 or PPI TR -33. All fusion joints shall be made in compliance with the pipe or fitting manufacturer's recommendations and shall be butt -welded flush to the outside diameter of the pipe. Joints shall provide axial pullout resistance. Fusion joints shall be made by qualified fusion technicians per PPI TN -42. A record or certificate of training for the fusion operator must be provided to the Engineer that documents training to the fundamentals of ASTM F 2620. All HDPE fusion equipment operators shall be qualified to perform pipe joining. Fusion equipment operators shall have current, formal training on all fusion equipment employed on the project and shall be certified by the pipe supplier/manufacturer. Training records for qualified fusion technicians shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Training received more than two years prior to operation with no evidence of activity within the past 6 months shall not be considered current. When the fusion machine operator is employed by the HDPE pipe and fusion machine supplier, the supplier shall maintain an ISO 9001 Certified Quality Management System. Sections of HDPE shall be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground and butt fused in strict accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The finished pipe assembly shall be pressure tested prior to insertion underground. All HDPE pipe shall be cut, fabricated, and installed in strict conformance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Joining, laying, and pulling of polyethylene pipe shall be accomplished by personnel experienced in working with high density polyethylene pipe. The pipe supplier shall certify in writing to the Engineer that the Contractor is qualified to join, lay, and pull the pipe or representative of the pipe manufacturer shall be on site to oversee the pipe joining. Expenses for the representative shall be paid for by the Contractor. The butt fused joint shall have a zero -leak rate under the following conditions: A. External pressure up to 60 psi from bentonite injection, slurry system operation, or groundwater head. B. Internal hydrostatic pressure testing of 150 psi. The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturer a certificate of compliance to the effect that the pipe and fittings supplied for this Contract have been inspected at the plant and that they meet the requirements of these specifications. The Contractor shall submit these certificates to the Engineer prior to installation of the pipe materials. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to visual inspection at time of delivery and before they are lowered into the trench to be laid. Joints or fittings that do not conform to these SECTION IV Page 89 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications specifications will be rejected and must be removed immediately by the Contractor. The entire product of any plant may be rejected when, in the opinion of the city, the methods of manufacture fail to secure uniform results, or where the materials used are such as to produce inferior pipe or fittings. Each joint fusion shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring device (data logger) affixed to the fusion machine. Joint data shall be submitted as part of the As -Built record information, in accordance with this Technical Specification. Butt Fusion Machines: Only appropriately sized, and outfitted fusion machines that have been approved by the pipe supplier shall be used for the fusion process. Fusion machines must incorporate the following properties, including the following elements: A. Heat Plate: Heat plates shall be in good condition with no deep gouges or scratches within the pipe circle being fused. Plates shall be clean and free of any contamination. Heater controls shall properly function, and cord and plug shall be in good condition. The appropriately sized heat plate shall be capable of maintaining a uniform and consistent heat profile and temperature for the size of pipe being fused, per the pipe supplier's recommendations. B. Carriage: Carriage shall travel smoothly with no binding at less than 50 psi. Jaws shall be in good condition with proper inserts for the pipe size being fused. Insert pins shall be installed with no interference to carriage travel. C. General Machine: Overview of machine body shall yield no obvious defects, missing parts, or potential safety issues during fusion. D. Data Logger: The current version of the pipe supplier's recommended and compatible software shall be used. Protective case shall be utilized for the hand-held wireless portion of the unit. Data Logger operations and maintenance manual shall always be with the unit. If fusing for extended periods of time, an independent 110V power source shall be available to extend battery life. E. Joint Recording: Each fusion joint shall be recorded and logged by an electronic monitoring device (data logger) connected to the fusion machine. The fusion data logging and joint report shall be generated by software developed specifically for the butt -fusion of thermoplastic pipe. The software shall register and/or record the parameters required by the manufacturer and these Specifications. Data not logged by the data logger shall be logged manually and be included in the Fusion Technician's joint report. Required Auxiliary Equipment: Other equipment specifically required for the butt fusion process shall include the following: A. Pipe rollers shall be used for support of pipe on either side of the fusion machine. B. A weather protection canopy that allows full machine motion of the heat plate, fusion assembly and carriage shall be provided for fusion in inclement and /or windy weather. C. Fusion machine operations and maintenance manual shall always be kept with the fusion machine. D. Facing blades specifically designed for cutting HDPE pipe. The pipe shall be installed in a manner that does not exceed 70 percent of the recommended maximum bending radius of the pipe. When the pipe is installed by pulling in tension, 75 percent of the recommended Safe Pulling Force, according to the pipe supplier, shall not be exceeded. Joint Fusion Bead Removal: Contractor shall trim and remove the butt fusion beads from the inside and the outside of the HDPE pipe at the butt fused joint following joint fusing. without disrupting pipe service. The restraints shall be manufactured by EBAA Iron Series 1500 or 1600 or approved equal. SECTION IV Page 90 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 502-2.4. PIPING IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM 502-2.4.1. EXTERIOR MARKINGS FOR BURIED PIPE All ductile iron and polyvinyl chloride pressure pipelines installed by open cut shall receive a color -coded continuous self-adhesive vinyl tape, installed by the contractor, with the width and located as indicated below. Pipe tape striping shall be in the color required for the service as specified below. A. Tane Striae Markin Locations: Up to 4 -inch diameter pipe (1 location) 3 -inch wide tape placed at center -top of pipe. 6 to 16 -inch diameter pipe (2 locations) 6 -inch wide tape placed on both sides, top half of pipe. 20 -inch and larger diameter pipe (3 locations) 6 -inch wide tape placed on both sides' top half of pipe with a third stripe centered along top of pipe. B. Color of Tane Striae Marking: Potable Water Marking Stripe Tape Blue with Black or White Lettering, "POTABLE WATER MAIN" or similar wording. Reclaimed Water Marking Stripe Tape Purple with White or Yellow Lettering, "RECLAIMED WATER MAIN" or similar wording Force Main Marking Stripe Tape Green with Black or White Lettering, "WASTEWATER FORCE MAIN" or similar wording 502-2.4.2. LOCATION DETECTION WIRE: A. Location Detection Wire for Open -Cut Pipeline Installations: All ductile iron and polyvinyl chloride pressure pipelines installed by open cut shall be laid with two (2) strands of Location Detection Wire applied to the pipe. The detection wire shall be continuous, high strength copper clad steel (HS -CCS) 10 gauge AWG wire insulated with 30 mil thick high molecular weight — high density polyethylene (HMW -HDPE) insulation with a minimum break load of 684 pounds and specifically designed for use in open cut installations, equal to "1030 -HS High Strength Tracer Wire" manufactured by Copperhead Industries, LLC, or an approved equal. Each wire shall be continuous with splices made only by spicing connectors manufactured by the wire manufacturer equal to "LSC 1030C Snake BiteTM Locking Connectors" as manufactured by Copperhead Industries, LLC or an approved equal. The 2 wires shall be taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 5 -feet between each piece of tape, with a minimum of 3 taping locations for each 20 - foot length of pipe. The tape used shall be 3M Scotch Rap All -Weather Corrosion Protection Tape, polyvinyl chloride backing with rubber adhesive, 4 -inches wide or Engineer Approved Equal. Following installation of the pipeline including backfill and compaction, the Contractor shall perform a second 12 -volt DC electrical continuity test on each of the two (2) tracer wires. B. Location Detection Wire for Horizontal Directional Drilling Pipeline Installations: All polyvinyl chloride or HDPE pressure pipe installed by directional drilling methods shall be installed with three (3) insulated tracer wires. The three (3) tracer wires shall be attached at 120 -degree locations around the pipe to help ensure continuity of at least one wire subsequent to the HDD installation. The tracer wire shall be continuous, extra high strength copper clad steel (EHS-CCS) 10 gauge AWG wire insulated with 45 mil thick high molecular weight — high density polyethylene (HMW -HDPE) insulation with a minimum break load of 2,032 pounds and specifically designed for use in directional drilling installations, equal to "1045-EHS Solo Shot EHS, Extra High Strength Tracer Wire" manufactured by Copperhead Industries, LLC, or an approved equal. SECTION IV Page 91 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Continuity shall be maintained in the wire along the entire length of the pipe installed by HDD. No splices shall be allowed for each wire attached to the HDD pipeline unless approved by the city or the Engineer. If approved, permanent splices shall be made using wire connectors approved for underground applications with splices made only by spicing connectors manufactured by the wire manufacturer equal to "LSC1O30C Snake BiteTM Locking Connectors" as manufactured by Copperhead Industries, LLC or an approved equal. If splices are approved by the city or the Engineer, all miscellaneous splicing components shall be furnished, installed, and tested by the Contractor and witnessed by the city or the Engineer. At a minimum, the location detection wires shall be attached to the pipe with nylon wire ties, with ties located at 5 -foot intervals, as shown in the Standard Details. The Contractor may suggest other methods of attachment, with the approval of the city or the Engineer. Prior to installation of the pipeline into the bore hole, the Contractor shall perform a 12 -volt DC electrical continuity test on each of the three (3) wires during the aboveground pressure test. Following installation of the pipeline into the bore hole, the Contractor shall perform a second 12 -volt DC electrical continuity test on each of the three (3) tracer wires. Failure of continuous continuity for at least one of the three tracing wires attached to the HDD pipeline, at the discretion of the city or the Engineer, shall be cause for rejection of the HDD installation, resulting in the abandonment and reinstallation of the directionally drilled pipeline. The HDD tracer wires shall be spliced twelve (12) inches below grade to three (3) 10 -gauge tracer wires, as specified above for open cut installations, and brought up in the valve boxes at the ends of each HDD line segment. The splices shall be made only by methods per the tracer wire manufacturer's recommendations and by splicing connections manufactured by the tracer wire manufacturer. The splicing connectors shall be the "LSC1O30C SnakeBiteTM Locking Connector" as manufactured by Copperhead Industries, LLC, the Direct Bury Lug as manufactured by DryConn®, or an approved equal. C. Color of Location Detection Wires: The insulation color for the wire shall match the color for the pipes intended service as follows: 1. Potable Water Mains — Blue Insulation. 2. Reclaimed Water Mains - Panton Purple Insulation. 3. Wastewater Force Mains — Green Insulation. D. Termination of the Location Detection Wires: The tracer wires shall be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2 -inch PVC pipe to 18 -inches above the top of the concrete slab. The 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2 -inch removable brass plug with recessed square nut 502-2.4.3. WARNING TAPE: In addition, all underground pipelines installed by open -cut methods shall be buried with identification tape installed over the centerline of the pipe at a depth of 1.0 foot below finished grade. The identification tape shall be as follows: A. Identification tape shall be manufactured of reinforced polyethylene film with a minimum overall thickness of 4 mils and shall have a 0.35 mil thick magnetic metallic foil core. The tape shall be highly resistant to alkalis, acids, and other destructive agents found in soil. Tape width shall be 3 - inches and shall have background color specified below, imprinted with black letters. Imprint shall be as specified below and shall repeat itself a minimum of once every 2 -feet for entire length of tape. Tape shall be Terra Tape Sentry Line, or an approved equal. B. Tape background colors and imprints shall be in accordance with the following table: Tape Imprint Background Color Imprint Color "Caution — Potable Water Main Buried Below" Blue Black SECTION IV Page 92 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications "Caution — Reclaimed Water Main Buried Below" Purple White "Caution — Wastewater Force Main Buried Below" Green Black 502-2.5. RESTRAINED JOINT COUPLINGS Restrained Joint Pipe Couplings: Restrained joint pipe couplings used to join and restrain two pieces of plain end pipe shall be sized to suit the outside diameter of the pipe ends to be jointed with restrained ends. Transition couplings shall be used to join pipes of different outside diameters. Pipe couplings shall be bolted type with ASTM A536 ductile iron middle ring and end followers. Coatings: All ductile iron parts of the coupling shall be coated on the interior and exterior with a fusion bonded thermosetting epoxy coating, applied electrostatically prior to assembly, and complying with AWWA C550 with a 12 -mil nominal coating thickness. The coating shall be equal to Mega -Bond as manufactured by EBBA Iron, Inc., or an approved equal. Gaskets: Gaskets for the coupling shall be wedge type manufactured of EPDM resilient rubber. Bolts: Torque limiting nuts and gripping restraint wedges shall be manufactured of corrosion resistant, low alloy, high strength steel. Threaded restraint rods and hexagonal nuts shall be manufactured of high strength, Type 316 stainless steel. Bolts and nuts shall conform dimensionally to ANSI/AWWA C111, latest revision. Approved Manufacturer: Restrained joint couplings shall be Series 3800 as manufactured by EBBA Iron, Inc., or an approved equal. 502-3. GATE VALVES 41, General: Gate valves shall open by turning to the left (counterclockwise), when viewed from the stem. When fully open, gate valves shall have a clear, unobstructed waterway equal to the nominal diameter of the pipe. All internal valve components shall be removable from the valve bonnet without removing the valve body from the pressure main. Operating nut or hand wheel shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction of opening. Each valve shall have the manufacturer's distinctive marking, pressure rating and year of manufacture cast on the body. Prior to shipment from the factory, each valve shall be tested by applying to it a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the specified working pressure. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be conducted in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C500 or ANSI/AWWA C509, latest revisions, whichever is applicable. Only gate valve sizes 4 -inch and larger shall be acceptable. Large Gate Valves: Gate valves with nominal sizes from 4- to 12 -inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C509, latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi differential pressure with zero leakage. Gate valves with nominal sizes from 16- to 36 -inches shall conform to AWWA C515, latest revision, and shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psi differential pressure with zero leakage. Valves shall be ductile iron body resilient wedge type with Nitrile rubber 0 -ring stem seals. Stems shall be sealed with three (3) 0 -rings. The top two 0 -rings shall be replaceable with the valve fully open and subject to the full rated working pressure. 0 -rings in a cartridge shall not be allowed. All cast ferrous components of the gate valve including the valve body, wedge, bonnet and stuffing box shall be constructed of ductile iron in conformance with ASTM A536. The valve stem shall be manufactured of manganese bronze in accordance with ASTM B763 and the wedge nut shall be manufactured of bronze in accordance with ASTM B584. The valve stem shall have an integral thrust collar; two-piece stem collars shall not be acceptable. The valve shall have Delrin thrust washers above and below the thrust collar to assist in the operation of the valve. Valve wedge shall be symmetrical and constructed to assure uniform seating pressure between the wedge seat circumference and body seating surface, providing a complete seal at the rated pressure with flow from either direction. Resilient wedge of the valve shall be formed by a special corrosion and chloramine • SECTION IV Page 93 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications resistant, EPDM synthetic elastomer which is permanently bonded to and completely encapsulates the ductile iron valve disc. The wedge nut shall be independent of the wedge and held in place on three sides by the wedge to prevent possible misalignment. All bolting materials for buried gate valves shall be Type 304 stainless steel with hexagonal shaped heads with dimensions conforming to ANSI B18.2.1; metric bolting materials shall not be allowed. Gate valves shall be NSF 61 listed. Resilient wedge type gate valves shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city. Valve End Joints: All gate valves shall have either mechanical joints per ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 or restrained joints as specified above for ductile iron or PVC pipe for underground service, or flanged ends, Class 125 per ANSI B16.1, for above ground service or valves in vaults to fit the pipe run in which they are to be used. Gate valves installed on push -on joint pipe shall have mechanical joint ends unless otherwise specified. Gate Valve Operators: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified herein, gate valves shall have non -rising stems. Buried gate valves shall be furnished with a 2 -inch square AWWA standard nut operator with a valve box and cover. All buried gate valves shall be installed in the vertical position only. Buried gate valves 16 -inches and larger in nominal size installed vertically shall be provided with a spur gear box, valve operator. The spur gear shall be an EXEECO 1S-5 to IS -10 spur gear, depending on the valve size, with a gear ratio not more than 2:1. Gate valves located aboveground or inside structures shall be furnished with a rising stem and a handwheel operator which shall have an arrow cast in the metal indicating the direction of opening. Gate valves used as isolation valves for double check valve backflow preventers for fire lines or reduced pressure back flow preventers shall be of the open screw and yoke (OS&Y) design with rising stems and with a handwheel operator. Gate valves larger than 16 -inches in nominal size shall be provided with a smaller gate valve bypass sized by the gate valve manufacturer. Interior Valve Lining: Interior of the valve body shall be lined with a fusion bonded or thermo-setting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550, latest revision. Lining shall be holiday -free, NSF 61 approved, with a minimum thickness of 16 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free from rust and grease before lining. Exterior Valve Coatings: All exterior surfaces of iron body gate valves shall be clean, dry, and free from rust and grease before coating. For buried service, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be coated at the factory with coal tar epoxy with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 20 mils. Prior to back filling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods, and other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. For valves installed above -ground, the exterior ferrous parts of all valves shall be shop primed at the factory with one coat, minimum dry film thickness of 4 mils, of a rust -inhibitive universal epoxy primer. Primer shall be suitable for finish paint specified. Following installation, above -ground valves shall be finish painted in accordance with city Construction Standards. Two Inch (2") diameter gate valves or smaller are not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch (3") diameter valves are not allowed. 502-4. VALVE BOXES Furnish, assemble, and place a valve box over the operating nut for each buried valve. The valve box shall be designed to prevent the transmission of surface loads directly to the valve or piping. Valve boxes shall be of the adjustable screw-type of suitable length with an interior diameter of not less than 5-1/4 inches. The valve boxes shall be manufactured of cast iron and shall be of the three-piece design SECTION IV Page 94 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications including a bottom section, middle section and top section with cover. The bottom section shall have a flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area to prevent settling. The cast iron cover shall be cast with the applicable service; "WATER", markings for potable water mains, "RECLAIMED" marking for reclaimed water mains or "SEWER", markings for wastewater force mains. The top section shall be adjustable for elevation and shall be set to allow equal movement above and below finished grade. The castings shall be manufactured of clean, even grain, gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30B for Gray Iron Castings; and shall be smooth, true to pattern, free from blow holes, sand holes, projections, and other harmful defects. The seating surfaces of both the cover and the top section shall be machined so that the cover will not rock after it has been seated. The valve boxes shall be coated inside and outside with an asphaltic coating prior to machining, so that the machined seating surfaces will be free of any coating. Valve extension stems shall be provided for all buried valves when the valve operating nut is deeper than 3 feet below final grade. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Standard Detail Index 402; Sheet 1 of 3 & Sheet 2 of 3 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Standard Detail Index 502; Sheet 1 of 3 & Sheet 2 of 3 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. 502-5. HYDRANTS Fire hydrants shall be dry barrel, break away type with 5 -1/4 -inch minimum main valve opening and shall comply with AWWA C502, latest revision, for a 150 -psi working pressure and shall also be UL/FM listed. All hydrants shall be hydrostatically tested at the factory in accordance with AWWA C502, latest revision. Hydrants shall be the compression type, closing with line pressure. The main valve shall be solid encapsulated EPDM rubber. The main valve stem shall be Type 304 or higher -grade stainless steel and manufactured in two sections with a breakable coupling. The main hydrant valve shall open left (counterclockwise). Hydrants shall be fully bronze mounted with all working parts of bronze. Valve seat ring shall be threaded bronze and shall screw into a bronze retainer insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0 -rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. All interior working parts of the hydrant, including the seat ring, shall be removable through the top of the hydrant to allow repairs without disturbing the barrel of the hydrant after it has been installed. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. The hydrant operating nut shall be of one-piece bronze or ductile iron construction and open counterclockwise. Operating nut shall be a No. 7, 1 -1/2 -inch, pentagonal shaped nut. The operating threads shall be totally enclosed in an operating chamber, separated from the hydrant barrel by a rubber 0 -ring stem seal and lubricated by a grease or an oil reservoir. Fire hydrants shall be the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in at least two sections bolted together, of ample length for 3-1/2 foot depth of bury with necessary extensions to place the safety break flange located approximately 2 -inches above finished grade. Breakaway bolts shall not be approved. The fire hydrant shall be provided with a 6 -inch mechanical joint epoxy lined elbow. The hydrant shall be provided with two, 2 -1/2 -inch hose nozzles and one, 4 -1/2 -inch pumper nozzle, all having National Standard hose threads. All nozzles shall have caps attached by stainless steel chains. Hose nozzle cap nuts shall be 1 -1/2 -inch AWWA standard pentagonal shape. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 -turn type with 0 -ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless-steel locking device. The hydrant shall be cast with no drain or weep holes or the drain or weep holes shall be permanently plugged by the manufacturer. All bolts, nuts and studs for fire hydrants shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Fire hydrant base, lower barrel and 6 -inch elbow shall be epoxy coated inside and outside. Upper barrel shall have an interior epoxy coating with the exterior coated with an epoxy primer and a two-part SECTION IV Page 95 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications polyurethane top coating. Fire hydrant upper barrel exterior colors shall have National Standard Yellow, UV resistant enamel, polyurethane, or fusion bonded epoxy. Approved Fire Hydrants: Only those fire hydrants listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, shall be used in extension to or replacement of the city's potable water system: Absolutely no substitutions for fire hydrants shall be allowed without the approval of the city Engineering Department. All shipments of fire hydrants to the project site shall be palletized, securely anchored to the pallet(s) and delivered by delivery trucks with mechanical, motorized tailgates for receipt by the Contractor. All hydrant assemblies shall be provided with an auxiliary 6 -inch resilient seated gate valve for isolation so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. Gate valves for fire hydrant installations shall be as specified above in Section 502-2.7. Piping used from the water main tee to the fire hydrant shall be 6 -inch ductile iron pipe only. Ductile iron pipe shall be in accordance with Section 502-2.1. The fire hydrant assembly shall be provided with anchoring hydrant fittings including a locked hydrant tee with split gland to provide the locking together of the entire assembly for joint restraint. Hydrants shall be restrained by using bolted mechanical swivel -type connecting joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. Restrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. If used, mechanical restrained joints shall comply with Section 502-2.1.2 of these Technical Specifications. All fire hydrants shall be provided with a fiber mesh reinforced concrete shear pad with dimensions as shown in the Drawings. Fire hydrants shall be located in the general location as shown on the Drawings. Final field location of all hydrants shall be as required by the city. All hydrants shall be located no less than 6 -feet and no more than 10 -feet from the curb or edge of pavement of the adjacent roadway. Fire hydrants shall be located in a manner to provide complete accessibility and separated from any and all obstructions such as utility poles, posts, walls, etc., by a distance of at least five feet, measured from the centerline of the fire hydrant to the nearest physical feature, which may obstruct access or view of any fire hydrant, unless otherwise required by the Owner. All fire hydrants located within FDOT rights-of-way shall conform to FDOT clear zone requirements. In order to minimize any inconvenience to property owners, new fire hydrants shall be installed at or near side property lines. Fire hydrants shall be installed such that the 4 -1/2 -inch pumper nozzle faces the street or driveway, unless otherwise directed by the Fire Department or the Owner's representative. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the city Engineering Department. 502-6. SERVICE SADDLES/ POLYETHYLENE SERVICE LINES Service Saddles: Service saddles shall have ductile iron bodies in accordance with ASTM A536, latest revision, with double stainless-steel straps. Ductile iron body shall have a fusion bonded nylon coating with a minimum thickness of 12 mils. Straps shall be Type 304 stainless steel with premium grade Type 304 L stainless steel bolts and Type 304 stainless steel washers and nuts. The nuts shall be Teflon coated. The gasket material shall be an EPDM elastomeric compound resistant to degradation by oil, natural gas, acids, alkalis, most aliphatic fluids, and chloramines. The outlet of the saddle shall have female NPT threads. Approved service saddles shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city. SECTION IV Page 96 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Service saddles shall be used on all service taps on water main pipelines 4 -inch in size and larger. The largest service connection allowable for a 4 -inch main shall be a 1 -1/2 -inch tapped connection. Service saddles shall be used on all 2 -inch service connections on water main pipelines 6 -inch and larger. Taps larger than 2 -inch in size shall require using a tapping sleeve as specified below in Section 502-12. Corporation Stops: Corporation stops shall be all bronze bodies with an all bronze ball and Teflon seats, in accordance with AWWA C800. Inlet and outlet threads shall have NPT threads. Corporation stops shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city. Polyethylene Service Lines: All polyethylene service lines require stiffeners must be approved by the city and manufactured by Mars Company, Ocala, FL 34483.3" service lines are not allowed. Refer to reclaimed water Standard Detail Index 501 Sheet 2 of 2. 502-7. BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The city owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the city and installed by city work forces. Backflow prevention devices that are installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA C511, latest edition for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Devices or AWWA C506, latest edition for Double Check Valve Assembly Backflow Prevention Devices. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. The type of device, and when required, shall be determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customer's private system, as determined by the city Utility Engineering Department. The two types of backflow prevention devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly Backflow Prevention Device: a device composed of two (2) single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the water tightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device: a device containing a minimum of two (2) independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. a. Reduced -pressure principle back flow preventers shall include an integral sensing system that will automatically open a relief valve whenever the differential pressure between the inlet supply and the reduced pressure zone drops to 2 psi. The relief valve shall remain open until a positive pressure differential of 2 psi is re-established. If pressure upstream of the first check valve drops to atmospheric or below, the relief valve shall remain fully open providing an internal air gap between the first check valve and the water level in the reduced pressure zone. The unit shall also be constructed such that any minor leakage of the second check valve will result in visible flow from the relief valve, even if the first check valve is totally disabled. 502-8. TAPPING SLEEVES AND LINESTOPS Tapping valves and tapping sleeves shall be installed where shown on the drawings to make "wet" taps into existing potable water, reclaimed water mains or wastewater force mains. Tapping valves shall only be installed in the vertical position. SECTION IV Page 97 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Tapping Sleeves for Taps 4 -inch to 12 -inch in Size: Fabricated all stainless steel body tapping sleeves to tap pipelines 4 -inch through 30 -inch in size with outlet tap sizes ranging from 4 -inches through 12 -inches, shall have heavy welded ASTM A240, Type 304 stainless steel body; Type 304 stainless steel bolts, Grade 8 per ASTM A194, epoxy coated; Type 304 stainless steel nuts, Grade 8 per ASTM A194, fluoropolymer coated; and a 3/4 -inch Type 304 stainless steel test plug. The tapping sleeve, unless otherwise specified shall have a 18-8 Type 304 stainless steel outlet flange which meets the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C228 Class SD, ANSI 150 LB drilling recessed for tapping valve per MSS-SP60. The tapping sleeve gasket shall be EPDM rubber. Stainless steel body tapping sleeves shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city. Mechanical Tapping Sleeves for Taps Larger Than 12 -inch in Size: Mechanical joint split tapping sleeves shall be ductile iron capable of withstanding a 250 -psi working pressure or the pipe rated working pressure, whichever is greater. The tapping flange for the sleeve shall have a groove that shall mate to the raised lip on the tapping valve flange. Gaskets shall be vulcanized EPDM resilient rubber material. All tapping connections for "size on size" taps shall utilize mechanical joint tapping sleeves only. The tapping sleeve shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the tapping valve. Bolts and nuts for the tapping sleeve split flange connection shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M for nuts. The nuts shall be fluoropolymer coated and have a hardness that is lower than that of the bolts and washers by a difference of 50 Brinnell hardness to prevent galling during installation. All interior and exterior surfaces of the mechanical joint split tapping sleeves shall be clean, dry, and free from rust and grease before coating. The interior and exterior surfaces of all mechanical joint split tapping sleeves shall be coated at the factory with fusion bonded or thermo-setting epoxy coating with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 16 mils. Tapping Valves: Tapping valves are special gate valves designed to mate to the flange of a mechanical tapping sleeve with a mechanical joint outlet connection. The tapping flange of the valve shall have a raised lip that will mate with the grooved flange of the tapping sleeve flange. The tapping valve shall have an oversized diameter waterway to allow passage of the tapping machine cutter assembly, without sustaining damage to the valve. Each tapping valve shall have the manufacturer's distinctive marking, pressure rating, the words" Ductile Iron" or "DI", and year of manufacture cast on the body. Prior to shipment from the factory, each valve shall be tested by applying to it a hydrostatic pressure equal to twice the specified working pressure. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be conducted in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C509, latest revision. Resilient -seated type tapping valves shall be as listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List, or an equal approved by the city. A. Tapping valves with nominal sizes from 4- to 12 -inches shall conform to ANSI/AWWA C509, latest revision, and shall be designed for a minimum working pressure of 250 psi. Tapping valves with nominal sizes from 16 inches and larger shall conform to AWWA C515, latest revision, and shall be designed for a working pressure of 250 psi. Valves shall be ductile iron body, resilient wedge type with Nitrile rubber 0 -ring stem seals. Stems shall be sealed with three (3) 0 -rings. The top two 0 -rings shall be replaceable with the valve fully open and subject to the full rated working pressure. 0 -rings in a cartridge shall not be allowed. All cast ferrous components of the tapping valve including the valve body, wedge, bonnet and stuffing box shall be constructed of ductile iron in conformance with ASTM A536. The valve stem shall be manufactured of manganese bronze in accordance with ASTM B763 and the wedge nut shall be manufactured of bronze in accordance with ASTM B584. The valve stem shall have an integral thrust collar; two-piece stem collars shall not be acceptable. The valve shall have Delrin thrust washers above and below the thrust collar to assist in the operation of the valve. Valve wedge shall be symmetrical and constructed to assure uniform seating pressure between the wedge seat circumference and body seating surface, providing a complete seal at the rated pressure with flow from either direction. Resilient wedge of the valve shall be formed by a special corrosion and chloramine resistant, EPDM synthetic elastomer which is permanently bonded to and completely encapsulates the ductile iron valve disc. SECTION IV Page 98 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The wedge nut shall be independent of the wedge and held in place on three sides by the wedge to prevent possible misalignment. All bolting materials for buried tapping valves shall be Type 316 stainless steel, as specified below, with hexagonal shaped heads with dimensions conforming to ANSI B18.2.1; metric bolting materials shall not be allowed. Tapping valves shall be NSF 61 listed. B. Tapping Valve Ends: All tapping valves shall have a special flange with a raised lip to mate with the groove in the tapping sleeve flange and a mechanical joint end on the discharge side of the valve. C. Tapping Valve Connection Bolting: Bolts and nuts for the tapping valve flange connection shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts and ASTM A194, Grade 8M for nuts. The nuts shall be fluoropolymer coated and have a hardness that is lower than that of the bolts and washers by a difference of 50 Brinnell hardness to prevent galling during installation. Jointing materials for the mechanical joint valve end and the mechanical joint tapping sleeve ends shall be in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C111 and ANSI/AWWA C153, latest revisions. Tee head bolts and nuts for the mechanical joint ends shall be manufactured of CORTEN, high strength, low alloy, corrosion resistant steel in accordance with ASTM A242, or an equal approved by the Engineer and the Owner. D. Tapping Valve Operators: Tapping gate valves shall have non -rising stems and shall open by turning to the left (counterclockwise), when viewed from the stem. Tapping valves shall be furnished with a ductile iron 2 -inch square AWWA standard nut operator with an arrow cast into the metal indicating the direction of opening. Tapping valves 16 -inches and larger in nominal size shall be provided with a spur gear box, valve operator. The spur gear shall be an EXEECO IS -5 to IS -10 spur gear, depending on valve size, with a gear ratio not more than 2:1. E. Interior Tapping Valve Linings: The interior of the tapping valve body shall be lined with a fusion bonded or thermo-setting epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C550, latest revision. Lining shall be holiday -free, NSF approved, with a minimum thickness of 16 mils. Surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free from rust and grease before lining. F. Exterior Tapping Valve Coatings: All exterior surfaces of tapping valves shall be clean, dry, and free from rust and grease before coating. The exterior ferrous parts of all tapping valves shall be coated at the factory with fusion bonded or thermo-setting epoxy coating with a minimum total finish dry film thickness of 16 mils. Prior to back filling, all uncoated nuts, bolts, glands, rods, and other parts of joints shall be coated in the field with two coats of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 502-9. LINE STOPPING ASSEMBLIES Specialty line stop fittings shall be used for applications where it is necessary to isolate a section of pipe without interrupting service. The Contractor shall provide a submittal which clearly identifies the materials used for line stop applications. Sleeves used to line -stop existing mains shall be provided and installed at locations as shown on the Drawings or as required for construction of the new force main tie-in to an existing force main. Line - stopping sleeve shall be steel fusion epoxy coated body with stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers. Contractor shall determine the outside diameter of the existing main prior to ordering sleeve. The back (bottom) section shall be solid and designed within an outside diameter range specific to the pipe it is being installed on. The front (top) section will also be full encirclement design with a welded installed nozzle and flange outlet. Line stop fitting sleeves shall be the high strength type having a wide body, made of a minimum material strength of A-283 grade steel, ASTM A-36 Steel or equal, which conforms to and reinforces the pipe. The sleeve shall have as a minimum 7/8 -inch wide gasket of Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (NBR, Buna-N) per ASTM D2000 with hydro activated lip, captured in a recessed groove around the outlet. Bolts, nuts and washers shall be 3/4 -inch stainless steel 18-8 type 304. A 3/4 -inch forged steel test outlet will be placed SECTION IV Page 99 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications into the nozzle branch outlet, at the factory, for the purposes of site pressure testing after the fitting has been installed around the pipe. Tapping sleeves and line stops shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the specified model. The fitting may not be retrofitted in any way after being installed on the pipe. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the fitting is properly restrained. The line -stopping equipment shall consist of a resilient sealing element, which shall be attached to and transported by a plug inserted perpendicularly into the pipe. The linear actuator shall extend and retract the Line -Stopper into and out of the pipe. When retracted from the pipe, the element and inserter shall be contained within the stopper housing. The hollow cylindrical sealing element shall be molded of natural rubber. The lower interior chamber of the element shall be enlarged into a hemispherical cavity to allow symmetrical deformation into sealing conformity with the bore of the pipe. The linear actuator shall be hydraulic and shall have a self-contained hand operated pump. The actuator shall exert a force sufficient to perpendicularly deform the cylindrical element into axially symmetrical sealing contact with the bore of the pipe. Design of actuator shall provide adequate stroke and means to continually align the line -stop bullet stopping assemblies in sizes 4 -inch thru 20 -inch with pressure rating to 250 psig. Equalization of pressure across the sealed element shall not be required to retract the element from the pipe. No equalization fittings shall be required downstream of the line -stopper. Line -stopping equipment must be capable of function and acceptance of multiple stopper heads and shall be compatible with existing system fittings. 502-10. BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Hydrant Blow offs are not allowed. 503. CONSTRUCTION 503-1. MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent damage to the pipe or fittings and their respective coatings. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be rolled off the carrier or dropped. Unloading shall be done by lifting with a forklift or crane using straps and a spreader bar. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand, free of sharp objects which could damage the pipe. Stacking of the pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause excessive deformation of the bottom layers of pipes. Pipe shall be stacked no higher than 6 -feet high on the project site for safety reasons. Where necessary, due to ground conditions, the pipe shall be stored on wooden sleepers, suitably spaced and of such width as not to allow deformation of the pipe at the point of contact with the sleeper or between supports. 3. The interior surfaces of valves and piping shall be kept free of dirt and debris. 4. Pipe and fittings which require the protection from UV, such as PVC or HDPE pipe, shall be covered and protected in accordance with manufacturer instructions. 5. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at their expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. SECTION IV Page 100 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 6. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 7. All materials shall be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged, unsatisfactory or defective material shall be used. 8. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 9. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 503-2. PIPE LAYING 503-2.1. INSPECTION PRIOR TO INSTALLATION All pipe, fittings, valves, and other material shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer and the City after delivery and prior to installation. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. No broken, cracked, imperfectly coated, or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be installed. When a defect or crack is discovered, the injured or defective piece shall not be installed and shall be removed from the project site. All homing marks shall be checked for proper length to not allow a separation or over homing of connected pipe. Homing marks incorrectly marked on pipe shall result in rejection of pipe and removal from the site at the Contractor's expense. III 503-2.2. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS • General: Excavation, backfill, and compaction shall conform to the provisions of Section 201-2. — Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities. Upon satisfactory installation of the pipe bedding material as specified in Section 201-2. — Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities, a continuous trough for the pipe barrel and recesses for the pipe bells or couplings shall be excavated by hand digging. When the pipe is laid in the prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall receive continuous, uniform support and no pressure will be exerted on the pipe joints from the trench bottom. Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be installed as shown or indicated on the Drawings. All joint lubricant compounds shall be NSF approved. Water in Excavations: Water shall not be allowed in the trenches while underground pipes are being laid and/or tested. All pipe shall be laid "in the dry". Installation of potable water pipes, reclaimed water pipes or wastewater force main pipes shall not proceed in the trench until the trench has been properly dewatered and prepared. Refer to Section 203, Dewatering for dewatering requirements for the installation of pipelines. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. Water shall not be allowed in the trenches while the pipes are being laid and/or tested. The Contractor shall not open more trench than the available pumping facilities are able to dewater the trench to the satisfaction of the Engineer or the city's Inspector. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for legally disposing of all water so as not to injure or interfere with the normal drainage of the area in which he is working. In no case SECTION IV Page 101 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications shall the pipelines being installed be used as drains for such water, and the ends of the pipe shall be kept properly and adequately plugged during construction by the use of approved stoppers and not by improvised equipment. All necessary precautions shall be taken by the Contractor to prevent the entrance of mud, sand, or other obstructing matter into the pipelines. If on completion of the work any such materials have entered the pipelines, it must be cleaned as directed by the Engineer and the city's Inspector so that the entire system will be left clean and unobstructed. The Contractor shall not leave trenches open overnight. Pipe Bedding: The Contractor shall provide pipe bedding material in accordance with the Standard Details on the Drawings and Section 201-2. — Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities. The Contractor shall hand -grade bedding to proper grade ahead of pipe laying operation. Bedding shall provide a firm, unyielding support along the entire pipe length. If the trench has been excavated below the required depth for pipe bedding material placement, the Contractor shall fill the excess depth with pipe bedding material to the proper grade. The Contractor shall excavate bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of the entire j oint. Pipe Cradle: Upon satisfactory installation of the pipe trench as specified in Section 201-2. — Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities and the pipe bedding, a continuous trough for the pipe barrel and recesses for the pipe bells or couplings shall be excavated by hand digging so that when the pipe is laid in the prepared trench, true to line and grade, the pipe barrel shall receive continuous, uniform support and no pressure will be exerted on the pipe joints or pipe bell from the trench bottom. Cleanliness: Mud, silt, gravel, and other foreign material shall be kept out of the pipe and off the jointing surface. The interior of the pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material before being gently lowered into the trench and shall be kept clean during laying operations by means of plugs or other methods accepted by the Engineer and the city. During suspension of work for any reason at any time, a suitable watertight plug shall be placed in the end of the pipe last laid to prevent mud or other foreign material from entering the pipe. Connections to Existing Utilities: All connections to existing piping systems shall be made as shown or indicated on the Drawings after consultation and cooperation with the city Utility Department. Some such connections may have to be made during off-peak hours (late night or early morning). Pipe Joint Deflection: Whenever it is desirable to deflect pipe joints to avoid obstructions or to maintain required alignment, the amount of the joint deflection shall not exceed 50 percent of the maximum limits allowed by the pipe manufacturer for ductile iron pipe. No bending or joint deflection of PVC pipe shall be permitted at any time. Changes in horizontal and vertical alignment of PVC pipe shall be achieved by use of fittings only. Pipe Installation: In preparation for pipe installation, placement (stringing) of pipe should be as close to the trench as practical on the opposite side of the trench from the excavated material. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Pipe laying shall proceed with the bell ends of the pipe pointing in the direction of the work progress unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on a grade of 10 percent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe pointing upgrade. Before pipe is joined, gaskets shall be cleaned of all dirt and stones and other foreign material. The spigot ends of the pipe and/or pipe gaskets shall be lubricated lightly with an NSF approved lubricant as specified by the pipe manufacturer and approved by the Engineer and the city. No sulfur based joint compound shall be used. Sufficient pressure shall be applied to the pipe to properly seat the spigot end into the bell of the previously laid pipe. Any damage to the pipe due to over-exertion shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense All damaged pipe shall be removed for the Project site. SECTION IV Page 102 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Pipe and fittings shall be laid accurately to the lines and grades indicated on Drawings or required. The depth of cover over the pipeline shall vary to provide uniform gradient or slope to the pipe, whether grading is completed or proposed at time of pipe installation. Where grades for the pipeline are not indicated on the Drawings, maintain a uniform depth of cover with respect to finish grade. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. All pipe laid shall be retained in position to maintain alignment and joint closure until sufficient backfill has been completed to adequately hold the pipe in place. Care shall be taken to ensure a good alignment both horizontally and vertically and to give the pipe a firm bearing along its entire length. Any pipe which has its grade or joint disturbed after laying shall be taken up and relayed. All pipe and fittings shall be cleared of sand, dirt, and debris before laying. All precautions shall be taken to prevent sand, dirt, or other foreign material from entering the pipe during installation. If necessary, a heavy, tightly woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end of the pipe before lowering into the trench and left there until the connection is made to the adjacent pipe. Any sand, dirt, or other foreign material that enters the pipe shall be removed from the pipe immediately. During pipe laying operations, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed into the pipe interior. Interior of all pipe and fittings shall be kept clean after installation until accepted in the complete Work. Any time that pipe installation is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other method approved by the Engineer and the city Inspector. Plugs shall remain in pipe ends until all water is removed from the trench. No pipe shall be installed when trench conditions are unsuitable for such work, including standing water, excess mud, or rain. Thrust Restraint: A. General: Thrust restraint shall be accomplished by piping restrained joints or mechanical restraining devices. B. Required Length of Restrained Joints: The length of restrained joints required shall be in accordance with the lengths shown on the Plan and Profile Drawings. The restrained joint lengths listed in the Restrained Joint Pipe Tables in the Drawings are absolute minimum lengths required and may not reflect the actual length of restrained joints required for a particular fitting arrangement or situation. C. Concrete Trust Blocks: Concrete thrust blocks shall not under any circumstances be allowed on the Project for thrust restraint at fittings. D. Concrete Trust Collars: Concrete thrust collars shall be used under extraordinary circumstances when approved by the Engineer and the city. If thrust collars are used, they shall conform to the details shown on the Drawings and shall be constructed of Class I concrete, which shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days. No pipeline work shall be accomplished adjacent to a thrust collar until the concrete has reached its full compressive strength and can handle the required thrust restraint. Initial Backfill: A. After pipe has been laid, inspected, and found satisfactory, sufficient backfill shall be placed along the pipe barrel to hold the pipe securely in place while conducting the preliminary hydrostatic test. No backfill shall be placed over the joints until the preliminary test is satisfactorily completed, leaving them exposed to view for the detection of visible leaks. B. Upon satisfactory completion of the preliminary hydrostatic test, backfilling and compaction of the trench shall be completed. SECTION IV Page 103 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Location Detection Wire: Refer to the city Standard Detail Drawings for wire location and installation notes. Location Detection Wires shall be installed for all potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and wastewater force mains. For open cut installation the two (2) detection wires shall be attached generally at the three o'clock and nine o'clock positions on the pipe with nylon pipe straps or tape located at 5 -foot intervals for each 20 -foot length of pipe. The wire shall be installed through valve boxes, valve vaults, air release valve enclosures, etc., and provide sufficient excess (12 -inches minimum) such that a loop in the wire can be raised above ground level. An energy source shall be attached to each of the wires to energize each wire to facilitate location of the wire and pipe using a metal detector. Prior to acceptance, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer and the city Inspector that each of the wires is continuous and unbroken through the complete run of the pipe by performing a continuity test of the 10 gauge location detection wires for the entire length of the potable water main, the reclaimed water main or the wastewater force main at each valve test station box. The test shall also include energizing each of the wires and locating the entire run of pipe with the Engineer and the city Inspector present. Underground Identification Tape: Install a continuous underground utility identification tape for all underground potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and wastewater force mains installed by open - cut methods. The identification tape shall be installed over the centerline of the pipe at a depth of 12 -inches below finished grade. Aboveground and Exposed Piping: Piping shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the job site and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all equipment access areas and openings. Changes in sizes shall be made with appropriate reducing fittings. Pipe connections shall be made in accordance with the details shown and manufacturer's recommendations. Open ends of pipelines shall be properly capped or plugged during installation to keep dirt and other foreign material out of the system. Pipe supports and hangers shall be provided where indicated or as required to ensure adequate support of the piping. All above ground piping shall be painted with the appropriate color. 503-2.3. INSTALLATION OF DUCTILE IRON PIPE Handling and Cutting Pipe: A. Care shall be taken in handling, cutting, and laying ductile iron pipe and fittings to avoid damaging the pipe and interior cement mortar lining, scratching, or marring machined surfaces, and abrasion of the exterior pipe coating. All cracked pipe and fittings shall be removed at once from the Work. B. Pipe cutting shall be done by skilled workmen in a neat workmanlike manner without creating damage to the pipe and interior lining and to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Cut ends shall be square and rough edges of ductile iron pipe shall be ground smooth. For push -on joint connections, the cut end shall be beveled to prevent gasket damage during joint assembly. Interior lining and exterior coatings of the pipe shall be repaired at cut ends per the manufacturer's instructions prior to joint assembly. Laying Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings: A. Bedding for Ductile Iron Pipe: Minimum bedding requirements shall be Type 3 as defined in ANSI/AWWA C600, latest revision. Provide proper bedding required, in accordance with thickness class of pipe being laid, restrained joints required and depth of cover. At a minimum the pipe shall be bedded in compacted 4 -inch thick select fill and backfilled and compacted to the top of the pipe to a minimum of 95% Modified Proctor. Proper pipe laying conditions shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C150 and C151, latest revisions, and ANSI/AWWA C600, latest revision. B. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be laid in accordance with American Water Works Association Standard ANSI/AWWA C600, latest revision, entitled "Standard for Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances ", with the following sections specifically applying: SECTION IV Page 104 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 1. Section 3.3 - Pipe Installation. 2. Section 3.4 - Joint Assembly. C. Polyethylene tube encasement shall be installed for all buried ductile iron pipe segments and fittings for corrosion protection. Installation procedures shall be in accordance with AWWA C105/ANSI A21.5-10, latest revision, entitled Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe Systems, Section 4.4 - Installation. Ductile Iron Pipe Joints: A. General: The joints of all pipelines shall be made leak tight. The particular joint used shall be approved by the Engineer and the city Inspector prior to installation. Where shown on the Drawings or where, in the opinion of the Engineer or the city Inspector, settlement or vibration is likely to occur, all pipe joints shall be bolted mechanical joint type with mechanical restraints, push -on joints with mechanical restraints or manufactured restrained joint type as specified above, or as indicated on the Drawings. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Mechanical Restrained Joints: All types of mechanical joint and push -on joint pipes with mechanical restraints shall be laid and jointed in full conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, which shall be submitted to the Engineer and the city Inspector for review and approval before work is begun. Only specially trained and skilled workmen shall be permitted to makeup mechanical restrained joints. Torque wrenches, set as specified in AWWA Standard C111, shall be used; or spanner type wrenches not longer than specified therein may be used with the permission of the Engineer and the city Inspector. The gasket shall be inserted, and the joint surfaces cleaned and lubricated with soapy water before tightening the bolts to the specified torque. C. Manufactured Restrained Joints: Manufactured restrained joints shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Joint assembly shall be made in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, which shall be submitted to the Engineer or the city Inspector for review and approval before commencing work. D. Flanged Joints: Flanged joints shall be made up by inserting the gasket between the flanges. The threads of the bolts and the faces of the gaskets shall be coated with suitable lubricant immediately before installation. Joints shall be fitted so that the contact faces bear uniformly on the gasket. 1. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged fittings. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing and lubricate bolts with oil and graphite. 2. Insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange to the proper tension. 3. Execute care when tightening joints to prevent undue strain upon valves, pumps, backflow preventers and other equipment. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen, or remove the nuts and bolts, reset or replace the gasket, re- install or re -tighten the bolts and nuts, and re -test the joints. Joints shall be watertight; no leaks shall be allowed. 503-2.4. INSTALLATION OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Storage and Handling of PVC Pipe: PVC pipe shall be delivered to the site in unbroken bundles packaged in such manner as to provide protection against damage. When possible, pipe should be stored at the job site in the unit packages until ready for use. Packaged units shall be handled using a forklift or a spreader bar with fabric straps. Packaged units shall not be stacked at the job site higher than two units high. SECTION IV Page 105 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications When it is necessary to store PVC pipe for long periods of time, exposure to direct sunlight shall be prevented by covering the pipe with an opaque material. Adequate air circulation above and around the pipe shall be provided as required to prevent excessive heat accumulation. PVC pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources of hot objects such as heaters, fires, boilers, or engine exhaust. Pipe gaskets shall be protected from excessive exposure to heat, direct sunlight, ozone, oil, and grease. The interior and all sealing surfaces of pipe, fittings, and other appurtenances shall be kept clean and free of dirt and foreign matter. Care shall be taken in handling and laying pipe and fittings to avoid severe impact blows, crushing, abrasion damage, gouging, or cutting. Pipe shall be lowered, not dropped, from trucks or into trenches. All cracked, damaged, or defective pipe and fittings, or any length of PVC pipe having a gouge, scratch, or other permanent indentation of more than 10 percent of the wall thickness in depth, shall be rejected and removed at once from the Work and replaced with new acceptable pipe. Field Cutting PVC Pipe: Field cutting of pipe shall be done in a neat workmanlike manner without creating damage to the pipe. The pipe shall be cut square with a fine-toothed hand or power saw or other cutter or knife designed for use with plastic pipe. Prior to cutting, the pipe shall be marked around its entire circumference or a square -in vise shall be used to ensure the pipe end is cut square. Remove burrs by smoothing edges with a knife, file, or sandpaper. Field Cutting Bell and Spigot PVC Pipe: Bevel the cut end of the pipe using a pipe beveling tool, wood rasp, or portable sander to prevent damage to the gasket during joint assembly. A factory -finished beveled end should be used as a guide to ensure proper beveling angle and correct depth of bevel. Round off any sharp edges on the leading edge of the bevel with a knife or file. The Contractor shall provide a seat homing mark on the field cut pipe in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's written instructions. Laying PVC Bell and Spigot Pipe: A. Pipe Bedding: Bedding for PVC pipe shall be as specified in Section 201-2. — Excavation, Backfilling and Compaction for Utilities using granular pipe bedding material. B. All PVC pipe shall be laid in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's published installation guide, the AWWA Manual of Practice No. M23 "PVC Pipe - Design and Installation" and the Uni-Bell Plastic Pipe Association installation recommendations. PVC Pipe Joint Assembly for Rubber Gasketed Bell and Spigot Pipe: A. The PVC bell and spigot joint shall be assembled in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's installation instructions, ASTM D2774, and AWWA Manual M23. Clean the interior of the bell, the gasket, and the spigot of the pipe to be jointed with a rag to remove any dirt or foreign material before assembling. Inspect the gasket, pipe spigot bevel, gasket groove, and sealing surfaces for damage or deformation. B. Lubricate the spigot end of the pipe with an NSF approved lubricant supplied or specified by the pipe manufacturer for use with gasketed PVC pipe in potable water systems. The lubricant should be supplied as specified by the pipe manufacturer and shall be NSF approved. After the spigot end is lubricated, it must be kept clean and free of dirt and sand. If dirt and sand adhere to the lubricated end, the spigot must be wiped clean and re -lubricated. C. Insert the spigot into the bell so that it contacts the gasket uniformly. Align the pipe sections and push the spigot end into the bell until the manufacturer's reference mark on the spigot is flush with the end of the bell. The pipe should be pushed into the bell using a bar and wood block. The joint shall not be assembled by "stabbing" or swinging the pipe into the bell, nor shall construction machinery be used to push the pipe into the bell. After joining the pipe, a metal feeler gauge shall be used to verify that the joint gasket is properly located. D. If undue resistance to insertion of the spigot end is encountered or if the reference mark does not reach the flush position, disassemble the joint and check the position of the gasket. If the gasket is twisted or pushed out of its seat, inspect the components, repair, or replace damaged items, clean SECTION IV Page 106 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications the components, and repeat the assembly steps. Be sure the pipe is in proper alignment during assembly. If the gasket was not out of position, check the distance between the spigot end and the reference mark and relocate the mark if it is out of position. E. Restrained joints for PVC pipe shall be provided where indicated on the Drawings. Joint assembly shall be made in strict accordance with the joint restraint manufacturer's instructions, which shall be submitted to the Engineer and the city for review and approval before commencing work. 503-2.5. DIRECTIONAL BORING INSTALLATION The work of this Section includes all labor, machinery, construction equipment and appliances required for installation of high-density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe or Certa-Loc PVC pipe below the ground using directionally controlled horizontal drilling equipment and methods. All directional boring methods and equipment shall be approved by the Engineer and the city before any work shall be permitted. All directional boring and pipe installation methods shall be performed in a good workmanlike and safe manner. Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) is a construction method consisting of drilling a small diameter pilot hole within the designed tolerances for radius requirements, followed by enlargement of the hole by back reaming to accommodate the utility pipeline. 503-2.5.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The overall work scope shall include, but not be limited to steerable directional boring equipment, boring pits and equipment, sheeting, location signs as required, maintenance of traffic and miscellaneous appurtenances to complete the entire Work as shown on the Contract Drawings, and restoration. Directional boring operations shall be performed within the right-of-way and/or easements shown on the Drawings. The HDD Contractor shall assume full responsibility for his methods of construction, the stability and accuracy of the drilled and reamed hole and pits constructed by him, and all costs for damages resulting from any failure thereof and be solely responsible for the safety of the pits and related structures, and personnel engaged in underground construction throughout the duration of the work. The general dimensions, arrangement and details for the drilled pilot hole and entry and exit pits to be constructed shall be as indicated on the approved Shop Drawings. Methods of excavation, equipment and procedures for the HDD operation and pits shall be selected to provide adequate working space and clearances for the work to be performed. Utility Protection: Utility lines and structures indicated on the Drawings, which are to remain in service, shall be protected from any damage. Where utility lines or structures not shown on the Drawings are encountered, Contractor shall report them to the city and the Engineer before proceeding with the Work. All utilities within 10 feet of the drill pilot bore, back ream or utility carrier pipe installation will be exposed through a soft -dig "pot -hole" or other opening, in accordance with appropriate utility locate laws and regulations, to ensure, through visual inspection, that the drill, reamer or utility carrier pipe has caused no damage to the utility and maintains adequate clearance. All potholes to locate existing utilities shall be sealed with an excavatable grout to avoid a possible flow path for the HDD drilling mud. Prior to commencing drilling operations, positively locate and stake all existing utility pipelines, cables, storm sewers, or other underground facilities which are located within 10 feet of the designed drilled path. All work covered by these Technical Specifications shall be performed in accordance with the applicable local, state and federal codes and laws which pertain to such work and supplemental regulations which are contained in these Technical Specifications. SECTION IV Page 107 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications At all times when construction is not in progress, watertight plugs shall be installed in all pipe ends and openings, either following aboveground pipe fusing and storage before pipe pulling or following underground installation after pipe pull back. 503-2.5.2. SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall prepare a detailed schedule for the work and submit it to the Engineer and the city for approval. The schedule shall include all major tasks to be performed, including but not limited to the following: pipe delivery; rig mobilization and setup; pipe assembly; pilot hole drilling; reaming; pressure testing the pipe before installation; pipe pulling; pressure testing and pigging/flushing the pipe after installation; disinfection of potable water pipelines; anticipated work hours for each task, daily work hours and dates anticipated for each task. At least 10 days prior to mobilization of equipment, the Contractor shall submit a detailed installation plan to the city and the Engineer for review and approval. The plan shall also include a detailed Plan and Profile of the bore plotted at a scale no smaller than 1 -inch equals 20 feet horizontally and 1 -inch equals 4 feet vertically. The Contractor shall include a site plan of the entrance and exit pits, the pipe lay down area and equipment staging. Traffic control plans for entry pit, exit pit, and pipe lay down area if different than what is indicated on the Roadway Traffic Control Plan Drawings. Submit pipe, fittings, specials, joint restraint systems, adapters and couplings shop drawings including complete dimensions including length, internal diameter, pressure rating and wall thickness; maximum allowable deflection of the pipe; detailing; mechanical connections; and necessary accessories for manufacture, transportation, storage, handling, and installation. Submit pipe assembly procedures including: 1. Descriptions of procedures means and methods for storing, fabricating, handling, transporting, and protecting pipe segments. 2. Calculations of stresses and longitudinal strains developed in pipe during handling and installation. 3. Description of controls to safeguard that the allowable pulling forces will not be exceeded during the installation. 4. Description of procedures for lifting pipe. 5. Calculations showing allowable lifting configurations so allowable stresses will not be exceeded. 6. Welding procedures for high density polyethylene pipe. Submit a description of procedures, methods and materials that will be used to repair pipe or pipe joints damaged during installation. Submit a description of methods and materials that will be used to correct leaks in pipe or pipe joints. Equipment Submittal: Contractor shall submit manufacturer and specifications of directional drilling equipment to be used to ensure that the equipment will be adequate to complete the project. Submittal shall demonstrate that anticipated pullback forces do not exceed the tensile strength of the HDPE pipe with a minimum factor of safety of 2.0. Include calculations prepared by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Florida demonstrating maximum allowable pullback forces for this installation / material combination. Drilling Plan Submittal: Contractor shall submit a Drilling Plan including: Drilling Operations, Reaming Operations, Estimated Pullback Loads, Drilling Fluids Management, Safety Plan, and a Contingency Plan. A. Drilling Operations submittal shall include: 1. The number and size of construction crew, hours to be worked, pilot hole drilling procedure, reaming procedure, method of tracking and controlling the drilling head, method of verifying pipe location for as -built drawing and schedule for completing major activities. SECTION IV Page 108 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 2. Provide a 2 -inch x 34 -inch layout drawing(s), scale 1 -inch = 20 feet, indicating location of the entry, exit pits, and fluid storage pits, location of fused pipe before pulling (shall not block access to private property), location and type of fusion equipment, storage of waste fluid, and fluid recycling plan (if used). 3. Spoil handling, separation and disposal. 4. Provide a detail of the planned bore path and the method of monitoring and controlling the speed, line, grade, and rate of fluids delivery. 5. Include the sequence, size and description of each reamer and the capabilities of each through the type of soils anticipated to be encountered in the project area. 6. The Contractor shall maintain the alignment and minimum radii as detailed on the plan sheets and as specified herein. 7. The drill plan should include a final swabbing of the bore path prior to pipe pullback. 8. Contractor shall not proceed with work until Drilling Plan is approved by the Engineer and the city. B. Reaming Operations submittal shall include the required bore hole size for pullback of the pipeline. The Reaming Operation Plan shall be submitted for review prior to initiation of construction. C. Estimated Pullback Loads submittal shall include: 1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an estimate of the anticipated pullback loads that will be required to install the pipe. 2. Contractor shall include the calculated buoyant force or buoyant weight of the pipe and proposed method for counterweighting or ballasting the pipe during pullback. a. Calculation shall be based on anticipated density of the drilling fluid(s) to be used. b. Any counterweight or ballast pipe placed inside the pipe shall be free from any dirt, grease, oil, or other contaminants that may prevent proper disinfection. D. Drilling Fluids Management submittal shall include: 1. Submit MSDS sheets for drilling fluid additives proposed, demonstrating they are non- hazardous. 2. Proposed mix design for each specific geological strata or formation anticipated during drilling of the bore path. 3. Estimate of drilling fluids and quantities to be utilized during each reaming pass. 4. Delivery volume and pressure for each reaming pass and the proposed method for monitoring. 5. Details of the drilling fluid/soil slurry solids separation, recycling or disposal plan that will describe the equipment and capacities for separation and recirculation. a. If direct vacuum excavation of the slurry is selected, the disposal site shall be identified, and copies of all required permits shall be presented to the Engineer. b. The Contractor shall submit a written plan that details the estimated quantity of slurry to be vacuum excavated and provide substantiation that there is sufficient equipment to adequately pump or shuttle the slurry to and from the disposal site(s) as required to maintain a near continuous drilling and pipe pull-back. 6. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a contingency plan for a quick response team to address inadvertent fluid discharges to the surface (frac-outs). In the event that a drilling fluid fracture, inadvertent returns or loss of returns occurs during pilot hole drilling operations, Contractor shall cease drilling, wait at least 30 minutes, inject a quantity of drilling fluid with a viscosity exceeding 120 seconds as measured by a March funnel and then wait another 30 minutes. If mud fractures or returns loss continues, Contractor will cease operations and notify the Engineer and the city. The Engineer, the city and the Contractor will discuss additional options and the Work will then proceed accordingly. Repair and clean-up of damages associated with frac-outs will be resolved in a timely fashion as directed by the city at the Contractor's expense. SECTION IV Page 109 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications E. Safety Plan submittal: The Contractor shall be responsible for securing a safe worksite that meets all Federal, State, and Local government codes. A project safety and contingency plan which shall include but shall not be limited to drilling fluid containment and cleanup procedures, equipment and plan for compromised utility installations including electrical and power lines, potable water, reclaimed water, wastewater, storm water and any other subsurface utility. F. Contingency Plan submittal: Contractor shall submit contingency plans to address procedures to be employed in the event the following may occur: 1. Obstruction encountered during drilling or reaming. 2. Broken drill pipe. 3. Collapsed or buckled carrier pipe or casing pipe. 4. HDD fails to advance or fails to respond to steering actions. 5. Alignment deviation is outside allowable limits. 6. Installation (pull back) forces reach 75% of the max allowable forces. 7. Ground settlement/heaving exceed allowable limits set by the Engineer and the city. Project Records and As -Built Drawings submittals shall include the following: A. Fusion joint data and fusion technician data indicating conformance with this Technical Specification and applicable standards. This will include fusion joint warranty information and recommended project specific fusion parameters, including criteria logged and recorded by data logger. B. Certified copies of test reports of factory tests for the pipe to be inserted into the bore hole prepared by HDD methods required by the applicable standards and this Technical Special Provision. Report shall include at minimum include following information: 1. Dimensional Checks 2. Pipe Burst 3. Flattening 4. Extrusion Quality (Acetone Immersion) C. Project Records: Maintain a complete set of project records. Maintain a daily activity log during Horizontal Directional Drilling operations. Log shall accurately record entire workday. These documents shall include but not be limited to: 1. Start and finish time of each section of drill pipe for pilot hole drilling and reaming. 2. For pilot hole drilling, drill bit location at least every 10 ft. along the drill path. Mark the as -built drawings on a daily basis with drilling progress. 3. General description of ground condition drilled. 4. Details and perceived reasons for delays greater than one hour other than normal breaks and shift changes. 5. Details of any unusual conditions or events. As -built Drawings: Maintain at the construction site a set of field drawings for recording the pilot hole as - built conditions. Plot as -built conditions on the field drawings, including the location in plan and elevation of the pilot hole. 503-2.5.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE AND COORDINATION OF WORK HDD Contractor's Experience: Any horizontal directional drilling operations 16" or larger diameter installation shall be conducted by an experienced HDD Contractor. The HDD Contractor shall have minimum of five years of experience constructing horizontal directional drills for pipelines of the same or larger diameter and the same or greater lengths. A responsible representative of the HDD Contractor and the city must be present at all times during a directional drilling operation. A responsible representative as specified herein is defined as a person experienced in the type of Work being performed and who has authority to represent the Contractor in a routine decision making capacity concerning the manner and method of carrying out the Work. SECTION IV Page 110 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Qualifications and Experience of Contractor Personnel: The Contractor shall employ skilled, experienced superintendent(s), drill rig operators, and key personnel. A competent and experienced superintendent representing the HDD Contractor, that is thoroughly familiar with the equipment and type work to be performed, must always be in direct charge and control of their operation. In all cases the superintendent shall be continually present at the job site during the actual directional drilling. The superintendent(s) and drill rig operators shall each have at least three years of successful experience using the HDD process, on at least five (5) projects with similar or greater diameters, pull back length and ground conditions. The superintendent(s), drill rig operator, and key personnel shall demonstrate successful completion of at least five (5) projects where pipe was installed with horizontal directional drilling techniques. The Contractor shall furnish resumes of the superintendent(s), drill rig operator(s) and other key personnel. Personnel experience records should include project names, locations, pull back lengths, ground conditions, pipe materials, project description, city project number, Engineer, and references with names, addresses and telephone numbers. The superintendent, drill rig operator(s) and other key personnel listed in the submittal shall be on-site during all construction related activities required for HDD installation. A responsible representative of the HDD Contractor and the city shall be present at all times during the directional drilling operation. A responsible representative as specified herein is defined as a person experienced in the type of Work being performed and who has authority to represent the Contractor in a routine decision making capacity concerning the manner and method of carrying out the Work. The HDD Contractor shall always have a sufficient number of competent workers on the job to ensure the directional bore is made in a timely and satisfactory manner. Adequate personnel for carrying out all phases of the actual drilling operation must be on the job site from the beginning through the completion of the work. The Contractor shall use certified HDPE pipe welding and fusion operators. The certifications of these individuals shall be made available prior to construction. HDPE pipe welding and fusion operators shall be certified by the pipe manufacturer prior to commencement of pipe welding and fusing operations. The equipment used in directional boring, also known as horizontal directional drilling, shall be of adequate commercial size and satisfactory working condition for safe operation, and may be subject to approval by the city or at the discretion of the Engineer. Such approval, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for making a satisfactory installation meeting the criteria set forth herein. Only workmen experienced in directional boring operations shall be used in performing the Work. The Contractor shall provide all structures, safety equipment, and professional services required to provide for the health and safety of the general public and of personnel involved in directional boring work in accordance with the requirements of the regulatory agencies having jurisdiction The Contractor shall take all measures necessary to protect surrounding public and private property, adjacent buildings, roads, drives, sidewalks, and appurtenances from damage due to directional boring work. Responsibility and payment for correction of such damage shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the city. The HDD operation is to be operated in a manner to eliminate the discharge of water, drilling mud, and cuttings to nearby water bodies or to the land areas involved during the construction process. If inadvertent spills to nearby water bodies occur, the Contractor shall immediately provide environmental controls and cleanup to the satisfaction of, and at no additional expense to the city. Best Management Practices (BMP's) for erosion control within the Contractor's work area shall be implemented and maintained at all times during drilling and back -reaming operations to prevent siltation and turbid discharges in excess of State Water quality Standards pursuant to Rule 62-302, F.A.C. Methods shall include but are not limited to the immediate placement of turbidity containment devices such as turbidity screen, silt containment fence, hay bales, and earthen berms, etc. to contain the drilling mud. SECTION IV Page 111 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 503-2.5.4. HDD PIPE PRODUCTS The horizontal directional drilling shall only use Certa-Loc PVC or butt -welded HDPE pipe which meets the requirements specified in Section 502. Refer to Section 502-2.4. for the HDPE Butt Fusion Process and installation procedures for HDD installations. 503-2.5.5. GENERAL HDD INSTALLATION CONSIDERATION The Contractor shall furnish all equipment and materials required, including but not limited to the following: 1. Drilling equipment (Drilling rig, drill head, drill pipe, drilling control system, pipe pull heads, pipe rollers). 2. Water pumps, hoses, fittings, storage tanks, vacuum truck(s), filters, hay bales, and silt fences, as required. 3. Drilling fluids containment, collection, cleaning and disposal equipment, and materials. 4. Fuel and lubricants. 5. Bentonite and related mixing equipment. 6. All hydrostatic testing equipment and materials. 7. Side booms, cranes, backhoes, trucks and other equipment and materials necessary to load and unload pipe, and to support and smoothly transition the pipe while being pulled into the reamed hole. All equipment used in the horizontal directional drilling operation shall have the built-in capacity, stability and necessary safety features required to fully comply with the Technical Specifications and requirements of this section without showing evidence of undue stress or failure, and shall otherwise be in sound operating condition. Backup equipment, sufficient spares and replacement items shall be required where job site conditions indicate that severe damage to the roadway or a hazardous condition may result in the event of an equipment breakdown and where the condition of the equipment to be used indicates that routine component replacement or repair will likely be necessary during the drilling operation. If equipment breakdowns or other unforeseen stoppages occur and forward motion of the directional cutting head is halted at any time other than for reasons planned in advance (addition of drill stems, etc.), the bore hole shall remain filled with Bentonite slurry and the slurry shall be recirculated periodically. If an existing utility is damaged, pavement cutting for inspection may be approved by the roadway authority (state, county or city) and the city representative after consideration of all pertinent facts indicates that such action would offer the most practical solution to the problem for all parties concerned. Any such authorized pavement opening shall be repaired according to appropriate regulatory agency's specifications and requirements. No cutting of the pavement will be allowed on interstate or other limited access roadways unless approved by FDOT. The boring tool shall have a steering capability and have an electronic tool detection system. The position of the tool during operation shall be capable of being determined accurately both horizontally and vertically. 503-2.5.6. HDD DRILLING EQUIPMENT AND DRILLING FLUID General: The directional drilling equipment shall consist of a directional drilling rig of sufficient capacity to perform the bore(s) and pullback of the pipe(s), a drilling fluid mixing and delivery system of sufficient capacity to successfully complete the crossing, a drilling guidance system to accurately guide boring operations, a vacuum truck or mud separation plant of sufficient capacity to handle the drilling fluid volume, and trained and competent personnel to operate the system. All equipment shall be in good, safe operating condition with sufficient supplies, materials and spare parts on hand to maintain the system in good working SECTION IV Page 112 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications order for the duration of this project. All required equipment shall be included per the emergency and contingency plan as submitted per these Technical Specifications. Drilling Rig: A. The directional drilling machine shall consist of a hydraulically powered system to rotate, push and pull drill pipe while delivering a pressurized fluid mixture to a steerable drill head. The machine shall be anchored to withstand the pulling, pushing and rotating forces required to complete the project. B. The drilling rig hydraulic system shall be self-contained with sufficient pressure and volume to power drilling operations. Hydraulic system shall be free of leaks. C. The drilling rig shall have a system to monitor and record maximum pull-back forces during pull- back operations. D. The drilling rig shall be grounded during drilling and pullback operations. There shall be a system to detect electrical current from the drilling string and an audible alarm that automatically sounds when an electrical current is detected. Drill Head: A. The horizontal directional drilling equipment shall produce a stable fluid filled bore hole with the use of a steerable drill head. B. The system shall be able to control the depth and direction of the pipe. C. Drill head shall contain all necessary cutters and fluid jets for the operation and shall be of the appropriate design for the soil or rock being drilled. Drill Pipe: Drill pipe shall be constructed of high quality 4130 seamless tubing, Grade D or better, with threaded box and pins. Tool joints should be hardened to 32-36 RC. Drill pipe shall be capable of drilling • the design drill path and of pulling back the HDPE pipe. Drilling Fluid System: A. Drilling Fluid (Mud): 1. Drilling Fluid shall be a high-quality bentonite drilling fluid or equivalent to ensure hole stabilization, cuttings transport, bit and electronics cooling and hole lubrication to reduce drag on the drill pipe and the product pipe. Oil based drilling fluids or fluids containing additives that can contaminate the soil or ground water shall not be considered acceptable substitutes. Composition of the fluid must comply with all applicable local, state and federal environmental regulations. 2. Drilling fluid shall be composed of clean potable water and the appropriate additive(s) for the fluid to be used. Water shall be from a clean potable source and shall meet the mixing requirements of the manufacturer. Reclaimed water shall not be considered an acceptable alternative to potable water. 3. Potable water shall be obtained from a metered city Water Utility construction service connection paid for by the Contractor. The contractor shall follow all city Water Utility Department requirements regarding backflow prevention, service water metering, and cross connection control. 4. The water and additives shall be mixed thoroughly to assure the absence of any clumps or clods. No hazardous additives may be used. 5. Drilling fluid shall be maintained at a viscosity sufficient to suspend cuttings and maintain the integrity of bore wall(s). 6. Drilling fluid shall be disposed of off-site in accordance with local, state and federal requirements and/or permit conditions. Disposal of drilling fluids shall be in compliance with environmental regulations, right-of-way and workspace agreements and permit requirements. • SECTION IV Page 113 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 7. No additional chemicals or polymer surfactants shall be allowed to be added to the drilling fluid as submitted for this project without written consent of the city and the Engineer. B. Drilling Fluid Mixing System: 1. A self-contained, closed, drilling fluid mixing system shall be of sufficient size to mix and deliver drilling fluid for the project. 2. The drilling fluid reservoir tank shall be a minimum of 1,000 gallons. 3. The mixing system shall be able to ensure thorough mixing of the drilling fluid. The drilling fluid reservoir tank shall be sized for adequate storage of the fluid. 4. The mixing system shall continually agitate the drilling fluid during drilling operations. C. Drilling Fluid Delivery and Recovery System: 1. The mud pumping system shall have a minimum variable capacity of 35 to 500 gpm and the capability of delivering the drilling fluid at a constant minimum pressure of 1200 psi. 2. The delivery system shall have filters or other appropriate in-line equipment to prevent solids from being pumped into the drill pipe. 3. Used drilling fluid and drilling fluid spilled during drilling operations shall be contained and disposed of in a legal manner at approved solid waste landfills. The use of spill containment measures shall be maintained around drill rigs, drilling fluid mixing system, entry and exit pits and drilling fluid recycling system (if used) to prevent spills into the surrounding environment. Pumps, vacuum truck(s), and/or storage of sufficient size shall be in place to contain excess drilling fluid. 4. A closed-loop drilling fluid system and a drilling fluid cleaning system should be used to the extent practical, depending upon project size and conditions. Under no circumstances shall drilling fluid that has escaped containment (i.e. inadvertent returns) be reused in the drilling system. Pipe Pull Heads: A. Pipe pull heads shall be utilized that employ a positive through -bolt design assuring a smooth wall against the pipe cross-section at all times. B. Pipe pull heads shall be specifically designed for use with high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe or PVC fusible pipe as appropriate and shall be as recommended by the pipe supplier. Drilling Control System: A. Calibration of the electronic detection and control system shall be verified prior to the start of the bore. B. The drilling head shall be remotely steerable by means of an electronic or magnetic detection system. The drilling head location shall be monitored in three dimensions, X, Y and Z: 1. Distance along the baseline, X. 2. Offset from the baseline, Y, and. 3. Depth of bore, Z. C. The guidance system shall be capable of tracking at all depths up to 50 feet and in any soil condition, including hard rock. It shall enable the driller to guide the drill head by providing immediate information on the tool face, azimuth (horizontal direction), and inclination (vertical direction). The guidance system shall be accurate and calibrated to the manufacturer 's specifications of the vertical depth of the borehole at sensing position at depths up to 50 feet and accurate to 2 -feet horizontally. D. Point of rotation of the head shall also be monitored. Pipe Rollers: Pipe rollers shall be used for pipe assembly and during final product pull back. SECTION IV Page 114 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 503-2.5.7. PREPARATION AND MOBILIZATION FOR HDD OPERATIONS Do not commence directional drilling until all required submittals have been approved by the Engineer and the city. Do not begin drilling until all pipe and special items for drilling have been delivered. All drilling operations shall be accomplished during daylight hours and shall not begin after the hour pre- established as the latest starting time that will allow completion during daylight hours. Planned nighttime work will generally not be allowed unless stipulated in the special conditions of the city's Agreement. In emergency situations, or where delay would increase the likelihood of a failure, nighttime work may be allowed to complete the drilling operations. Mobilize all necessary personnel, equipment, and materials to construct an entry area for drilling operations. Provide appropriate supports to maintain safe working conditions; ensure stability of the entry, exit, settlement, and containment pits; minimize loosening, deterioration and disturbance of the surrounding ground. The drilling site shall contain the horizontal directional drilling rig, drill pipe storage racks, water and slurry pumps, slurry mixing tank, cuttings separation equipment, primary settlement and containment pits, dry storage area for bentonite, crane or lifting equipment, and site office. The pipe launcher/roller system (or equal) shall be constructed in the specified area. The pipe lay down area shall be as determined in conjunction with the Engineer and the city and shall be used to facilitate the installation of the pipeline. • • 503-2.5.8. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Provide equipment and procedures to maximize the recirculation of drilling mud and to minimize waste. Provide solids control and fluid cleaning equipment of a configuration and capacity that can process surface returns and produce drilling fluid suitable for reuse. Inadvertent surface returns or "frac-outs" of drilling fluid that is accessible on land must be cleaned up immediately and the surface area washed and returned to original condition. All drilling fluids, spoils and separated material will be disposed of in compliance of state and local environmental regulations. If the amount of surface returns exceeds that which can be contained and collected using small sumps, drilling operations shall be discontinued until surface return volumes can be brought under control. Equipment and materials for cleanup and contingencies must be provided and stored at all HDD sites. Construction related activities involving fuels and lubricants such as vehicle refueling and equipment maintenance, including the draining and pumping of lubricants shall be conducted at a minimum distance of 50 feet from surface water bodies, drainage ditches or swales, drainage pathways and storm water collection structures to eliminate contamination in case of a spill. Any fuels, drilling fluids, or lubricants spilled shall be cleaned up immediately and comply with all FDEP requirements. Contractor shall provide sanitation and garbage facilities on both sides of the HDD operation. Wastes shall be transported offsite for disposal. Immediately upon completion of work, all rubbish and debris shall be removed from the job site. All construction equipment and implements of service shall be removed and the entire area involved shall be left in a neat, clean, and acceptable condition approved by the city. 503-2.5.9. DRILLING OPERATIONS Supply all necessary drilling equipment for completing the HDD installation as shown on the approved Shop Drawings. SECTION IV Page 115 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The plan and profile for the horizontal directional drilling operation shall be in accordance with the approved Shop Drawings. Drill entrance and exit angles shall be as shown on the approved Shop Drawings. Drilling Tolerances: A smoothly curved pilot hole shall follow the designated centerline of the pipe profiles as shown on the Drawings. The directional tolerance of the holes will be as follows: A. Deviations from, and corrections to, the design centerline of the HDD pipeline construction shall not exceed 2 percent in depth per 100 feet horizontal or a lesser rate determined by the structural characteristics of the selected pipe and jointing system. B. The as -built variance from the designed bore path shall not exceed plus or minus 1 -foot in the vertical plane and plus or minus 2 -feet in the horizontal plane. 503-2.5.10. HDD INSTALLATION General: The Contractor shall install the HDPE pipe by the horizontally drilled, directionally controlled method of construction. Instrumentation: The Contractor shall always provide and maintain instrumentation which shall accurately locate the pilot hole position in the X, Y and Z axes relative to the ground surface and measure drill string axial and torsional loads. Drilling fluid flow rate and pressure shall also be monitored. The Contractor shall maintain and provide to the city Inspector and the Engineer access to the data generated by the downhole survey tools. Drilling Guidance and Pullback: A. Pipe installed by horizontal directional drilling shall be located as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall plot the actual horizontal and vertical alignment and the depth of the pilot bore at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Deviations between the recorded position of the drill string and the specified position of the drill string shall be documented and immediately brought to the attention of the Engineer. This "as -built" plan and profile shall be updated as the pilot bore is advanced. At the completion of the pilot hole, the Contractor shall provide the coordinates of the pilot hole as specified. B. The Contractor shall provide and use on land, a separate steering system employing a ground survey grid system, equal to "Tru -Tracker". C. The Contractor shall have accurate working gauges which register tensile force being used to pull the pipeline back through the reamed borehole. If, during the pipeline pulling process, this force reaches 75 percent of the allowable load for the pipeline, the Engineer shall be notified immediately, and the Contractor shall prepare to initiate the contingency plan provided within the approved Project submittals. Logs shall be kept referencing all forces exerted on the pipeline during the installation. D. The Contractor shall provide adequate pipe supports/rollers along the stringing area (for both entry and exit pits) to support the required length of pipe for each location. The rollers shall be comprised of a non-abrasive material arranged in a manner to provide support to the bottom and bottom quarter points of the pipeline allowing for free movement of the pipeline during pullback. E. The pipe entry area shall be graded to provide support for the pipe to allow free movement into the borehole. The pipe shall be guided in the borehole to avoid deformation of, or damage to the pipe. The pipe shall be installed in a manner which will not cause upheaval, settlement, cracking, movement, or distortion of surface features. F. During pullback operations, the Contractor shall monitor roller operation and use side booms if required to assist movement of the pipe and to avoid damage to the pipe. G. Cease installation operations if damage to the pipe occurs. Damage to the pipe shall be repaired immediately. Pulling operations shall not resume until the pipe has been repaired. SECTION IV Page 116 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications H. Pipe pullback shall be planned to occur continuously until complete, except for stoppages planned in the course of the operation such as drill rod removal or if damage to the pipe is observed during pullback that needs to be repaired before continuing. Contractor shall implement necessary buoyancy control as stated in the approved HDD Method and Work Plan. Location Detection Wire for HDD Pipeline Installations: Refer to Section 502-2.5.2. B. for specifications regarding material and installation of Location Detection Wires for HDD installations. 503-2.5.11. DRILLING MUD AND CUTTINGS The horizontal directional drilling operation shall be conducted in a manner to eliminate the discharge of water, drilling mud, and cuttings to areas not involved in the construction process. The Contractor shall immediately contain and clean-up any inadvertent drilling fluid returns. The Contractor shall also provide equipment and procedures to maximize the recirculation or reuse of drilling mud to minimize waste disposal. Disposal of water, drilling fluids, drilling mud, cuttings, and muck shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Disposal of waste materials shall be in a legal manner at approved solid waste landfills. 503-2.5.12. REAMING AND PULLBACK Reaming: Reaming operations shall be conducted at the discretion of the Contractor. Choosing to simultaneously ream and pull back the pipe is at the discretion and the sole risk of the Contractor. All provisions herein relating to simultaneous reaming and pulling back operations shall also pertain to reaming operations. A. Prior to pulling pipe, enlarge pilot hole to the diameter identified in the reaming procedure submittal. The Contractor shall ream the borehole to a minimum of 12 -inches larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or 1.5 times the outside diameter of the pipe, whichever is less, using the appropriate tools. Complete a swab pass if necessary. B. Ream at rates consistent with the drilling equipment and mud system selected. C. Continue to monitor the drilling fluid viscosity and density to reduce the potential for frac-out. Pulling Loads: The Contractor shall be responsible for determining safe pulling loads required for proper installation. Such loads shall be minimized to prevent failure of the pipeline during installation. Once pullback operations have commenced, operations shall continue without interruption until the pipe is completely pulled into the borehole. During pullback operations, the Contractor shall not apply more than the maximum safe pipe pull pressure at any time. A break away head rated at the maximum safe pull pressure shall be utilized. Torsional Stress: A properly sized and fully operational swivel shall be installed between the reaming assembly at the end of the drilling pipe and the pipeline to restrict torsional stress from being transmitted to the pipeline. Ballast: The pipeline must be filled with water (ballasting) as installation proceeds, to prevent buckling and reduce buoyancy. Pull Section Support: The pipe section shall be supported as it proceeds during pull back so that it moves freely. 503-2.5.13. PIPELINE PROTECTION Protect the interior of the pipe from entry of foreign matter until the installation is complete and accepted. Contractor shall video record the inside of the pipe after it has been installed and verify that no cracks, breaches, gouges, holes, etc. have occurred during pullback that would decrease the integrity of the pipe. SECTION IV Page 117 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 503-2.5.14. PIPELINE CLEANING Following installation of the pipeline installed by HDD, the pipeline shall be hydraulically cleaned and flushed as specified in Section 504 of these Technical Specifications. 503-2.5.15. PIPELINE TESTING Pressure Testing: Hydrostatically test pipe before and after installation in accordance with ASTMF2164- Field Leak Testing of Polyethylene Pressure Piping Using Hydrostatic Pressure and Section 505. of these Technical Specifications. A. Test Duration: The total test time including initial pressurization, initial expansion, and time at test pressure, must not exceed a total of 8 hours. If the test is not completed due to leakage, equipment failure, etc., the test section shall be depressurized and allowed to "relax" for a minimum of 8 hours before it is brought back up to test pressure. The test procedure consists of initial expansion phase and leakage test phase. B. Initial Expansion Phase: During the initial expansion phase, the test section is pressured to the test pressure and enough make-up water is added each hour for a total of three hours to return to test pressure. C. Leakage Test Phase: The leakage test phase immediately follows the initial expansion phase. The test section shall be brought back up to the test pressure and remain at that pressure for 4 -hours in duration. At the end of the 4 -hour test time period, the test section shall be within +/-2 psig of the test pressure with zero leakage (no water added). D. Zero Leakage: The portion of the HDD pipeline to be hydrostatically tested with HDPE butt fused joints shall have zero leakage for the entire 4 -hour leakage test duration for the HDD pipe section to have passed the leakage test. Test Pressure: The test pressure for the HDD pipeline shall be 150 psi for potable water and reclaimed water or 100 psi for wastewater. The Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, and labor required for making pressure and leakage tests. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer and the city Inspector. 503-2.5.16. DISINFECTION FOR HDD POTABLE WATER PIPELINES Final disinfection for potable water pipelines installed by HDD, following cleaning, flushing and pipeline testing, shall be in accordance with Section 506. of these Technical Specifications. 503-2.5.17. CITY ACCEPTANCE If the finished installation of the HDD is not satisfactory to the city, the Engineer or other jurisdictional entity, due to any of the following: the pipe alignment being outside of the specified limits of ±1.0 foot of the coordinates for the entry or exit points stated on the Drawings; failure to pass the leakage or pressure tests; or internal damage to the pipeline; the pipeline shall be abandoned, fully pressure grouted in place, in accordance with the jurisdictional authority, and an alternate installation shall be constructed. The abandoned pipeline shall be properly shown on Record Drawings to be submitted following conclusion of the construction work. If the HDD pipeline construction is to provide an HDPE casing pipe for a carrier utility pipe, casing spacers shall not be permitted inside the HDPE casing pipe. If the HDD installation is for a casing pipe, the Contractor shall end -seal the annular space between the casing pipe and the carrier pipe using concrete brick and mortar which shall extend at least 8 -inches into the casing pipe. To secure the ends of the casing and to preclude the entrance of water and soil into the casing, the casing ends shall be completely sealed to be watertight with a neoprene rubber seal specifically manufactured for that purpose. The neoprene end seal shall be attached to the casing and the carrier pipe SECTION IV Page 118 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications with Type 304 stainless steel bands. The casing end seals shall be constructed to be basically watertight to preclude the intrusion of groundwater into the casing. Casing end seals shall be equal to Cascade Water Works Model CCES or an approved equal listed in the City of Clearwater Approved Products List. The Engineer shall inspect the installed pipe ends for roundness and/or damage. Evidence of significant surface scratching shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. Gouges or excessive surface damage of more than 10 percent of the wall thickness will be grounds to abandon the bore and have the Contractor re - drill another pipeline at no cost to the city. The city shall be provided with test logs from the Contractor indicating the actual maximum pull loads, maximum deflection angle encountered during the pulling operation and the actual X, Y and Z coordinates of the pipe centerline at a maximum of every 10 feet horizontally of the HDD pipe for review as part of final acceptance. Contractor shall review the internal video of the HDD installation and report any deficiencies to the Engineer and the city. A copy of the video shall be provided to the city as part of the Record Documents submittal for the completed and accepted Work. 503-2.5.18. REPAIR Pipes damaged during handling or installation shall be pushed or pulled out or repaired in-place using replacement sections and butt fusion welds recommended by the pipe manufacturer following methods described in the approved submittal. 503-2.5.19. CLEANUP AND REPAIR Following the installation, remove all equipment, material, drilling mud and waste from both work area ends of the HDD installation. The project site shall be returned to a condition equal to or better than the pre -construction condition of the site. All excavations will be backfilled and compacted to 98% maximum dry density under roadways and hardscape, or to 95% maximum dry density for all other areas and shall be graded to original contours. Compaction Testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 201-2.9 — Backfill and Compaction of these Technical Specifications. All pavement and hardscape shall be repaired per applicable jurisdictional standards, excess materials shall be removed from the site, and disturbed areas shall be re -landscaped. All drilling fluid shall be properly disposed of per these Technical Specifications and all applicable jurisdictional laws. Areas or facilities disturbed or damaged during construction shall be restored to original or better condition with new materials prior to the completion of construction unless specifically identified on the Drawings to be modified. This includes areas or facilities outside or inside the roadway rights-of-way, previous construction activities being done as part of this Project, and ancillary roadways, retention ponds, landscaping, signage, billboards, utility boxes and equipment, utility poles, and utility lines. 503-3. SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 503-3.1. GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 503-3.2. Fittings The weight of ductile iron fittings shall not be carried by the pipe on which they are installed. The fitting shall be supported by a concrete cradle as shown on the standard details. Concrete used for supports shall SECTION IV Page 119 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications have a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days. Concrete for the support cradle shall be poured against undisturbed soil. All glands, clamps, bolts, nuts, studs, and other uncoated parts of fitting joints for underground installation shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 503-3.3. VALVES Valves for potable water mains and reclaimed water mains shall be located within the street rights-of-way lines unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed adjacent to the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18 -inches from the main line. Valves of the size and type shown on the Drawings shall be set plumb and installed at the locations indicated on the Drawings. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written installation and operation instructions; with the approved shop drawing submittals; and with the details shown on the Drawings. Buried valves shall be installed such that they are supported properly in their respective positions, free from distortion and strain with a concrete cradle as shown on the Standard Details. Concrete used for supports shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days. Concrete for the support cradle shall be poured against undisturbed soil. Valves shall be installed such that their weight is not borne by piping or equipment that are not designed to support the weight of the valve. Exposed aboveground valves shall be supported with fabricated piping supports so that the weight of the valve is not carried by the pipeline. Install gate valves with the operating stem in the vertical position. Valves shall be carefully inspected during installation; they shall be opened wide and then tightly closed and the various nuts and bolts shall be tested for tightness. Special care shall be taken to prevent any foreign material from becoming lodged in the valve seat. Check and adjust all valves for smooth operation. Aboveground Valves: For aboveground flanged valves, clean iron flanges by wire brushing before installing the valves. Clean stainless-steel flange bolts and nuts lubricate threads with a fluoropolymer coating to prevent galling and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. Flanged joints shall be watertight; no leaks shall be allowed. Buried Valves: For buried valves, a valve box shall be centered accurately over the operating nut and the entire assembly shall be plumb. Extensions or risers for valve boxes shall be an integral part of the box. No cut sections of ductile iron or PVC pipe shall be used to extend the valve box to its proper height. The tops of valve boxes shall be adjusted to the proper elevation as specified below and as shown on the Drawings. Care shall be taken while constructing valve boxes to ensure that valve stems are vertical and the cast iron valve box has been placed centered and plumb over the valve stem nut of the valve with base bearing on compacted fill and the top flush or above final grade, as specified below. Valve boxes shall have sufficient bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling. When installation is complete, no pressure shall be exerted by the valve box on either the valve or the pipe. The Contractor shall remove any sand or undesirable trash or debris from valve box interior prior to final inspection. A. In paved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set 1/4 -inch below pavement. Following paving operations, a 24 -inch square shall be neatly cut in the pavement around the box and the paving removed. The top of the box shall then be adjusted to the proper elevation and a 24 -inch square by 6 -inch thick concrete pad poured around the box cover. Concrete pads in traffic areas shall be reinforced with No. 4 reinforcement bars as shown on the Drawings. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,500 psi compressive strength at 28 days. B. In unpaved areas, tops of valve box covers shall be set 2 inches above finished grade. After the top of the box is set to the proper elevation, a 24 -inch square by 6 -inch thick concrete pad shall be SECTION IV Page 120 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications poured around the box cover. Concrete for the pad shall be 3,500 psi compressive strength at 28 days. C. The concrete pad for the valve box cover shall have a 3 -inch diameter, brass identification disc embedded in the concrete surface as shown on the Drawings. The brass identification disc shall have the information as shown on the Drawings neatly engraved, not stamped, on it. Refer to City Standard Detail Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 3 & Sheet 2 of 3 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Standard Detail Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 3 & Sheet 2 of 3 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. Hydrostatic Testing: Valves shall be tested hydrostatically, concurrently with the pipeline in which they are installed. Protect or isolate any parts of valves, operators, or control and instrumentation systems whose pressure rating is less than the pressure used for the pressure test(s). If valve joints leak during pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and hydrostatically retest the joints. Coating Repair: Following installation of buried valves, repair any scratches, marks and other types of surface damage, etc., with a coating equal to the original coating supplied by the manufacturer. Prior to backfilling, all nuts, bolts, and other parts of the valve joints shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. 503-3.4. FIRE HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. Each hydrant shall be connected to the potable water main with a 6 -inch ductile iron branch tee with flow controlled by an independent 6 -inch mechanical joint gate valve for isolation at the branch of the water main tee. If the fire hydrant is placed greater than 20 -feet from the main, an additional 6 -inch mechanical joint valve shall be installed at the hydrant location and shall be included in the hydrant assembly cost. The fire hydrant valve cannot be located anywhere within the hydrant ductile iron pipe branch line to circumvent the requirement of using two valves. Refer to City Standard Detail Index 409, for potable water hydrants. All fire hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Fire hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Hydrostatic Testing: Fire hydrants shall be tested hydrostatically, concurrently with the pipeline in which they are installed. If the hydrant mechanical joints leak during pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and hydrostatically retest the joints. Coating Repair: Following installation of buried portions of the hydrants, repair any scratches, marks and other types of surface damage, etc., with a coating equal to the original coating supplied by the manufacturer. Prior to backfilling, all buried nuts, bolts, and other parts of the hydrant mechanical joints shall be coated with two coats, 10 mils DFT per coat, of coal tar epoxy equal to Carboline Bitumastic No. 300-M. Reclaimed Water System: No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the city's Engineering Department. 503-3.5. ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION IV Page 121 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant run out length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 503-4. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING POTABLE WATER OR RECLAIMED WATER LINES The Contractor shall coordinate making connection of the new mains to mains which are in service at the time of construction with the city. All potable water or reclaimed water main connections, regardless of new or existing pipe size, to existing potable water or reclaimed water mains shall be made by the Contractor only after the connection procedure and his Work scheduling has been reviewed and approved by the Engineer and the city Engineering Department. The Contractor shall submit a written request to the Engineer and the city Engineering Department a minimum of 5 working days prior to scheduling said connections. The request shall outline the following. A. Location of points of connection, fittings to be used, and method of flushing and disinfection, if applicable. B. Estimated construction time for said connections. The Engineer and the city Engineering Department shall review the Contractor's submittal within 3 working days after receiving it and inform the Contractor regarding approval or denial of his request. If this request is rejected by the city, the Contractor shall resubmit his request modifying it in a manner acceptable to the city. Connections to existing potable water or reclaimed water mains shall only be made following completion of new potable water or reclaimed water main cleaning operations and successful completion of pressure and leakage testing and disinfection clearance of the new potable water main. The Contractor shall not connect to existing facilities unless the Engineer and a representative of the city are present. All connections shall only be made on the agreed upon date and time. If the Contractor does not initiate and complete the connection work in the agreed upon manner, the Contractor shall be required to reschedule the said connection by following the procedure outlined above. Operation of all existing potable water or reclaimed water system valves shall be the responsibility of the city's personnel only. At no time shall the Contractor operate any existing system valves. System valves shall be defined as any valve which has main pressure against either side of the valve. The Contractor shall notify the city to request that a valve be operated, at least 5 days prior to the time operation is required. Upon satisfactory completion of all hydrostatic testing of the new potable water or reclaimed water pipeline, and disinfection of the new potable water pipeline, remove restrained joint caps from both ends of the new pipeline, close main line isolation valves on the existing main, cut and drain the existing main and swab all pipe and fittings for the connection to be installed on the new main with 10 percent hypochlorite solution. The connection of the new main to the existing main shall be made as swiftly as possible and any water collected in the ditch shall be pumped out and kept below the level of the pipe bottom. Following connection and make-up of all fittings, the new pipeline shall then be placed into service by the city's operating personnel. In the event any existing customers will be without potable water while a connection is being made, the Contractor shall notify the city's Inspector 72 hours prior to disconnection. The city Utility Department shall notify the affected customer(s) when the water will be turned off and when the service is estimated to be resumed. In some instances, these connections may have to be made at late night or early morning hours. No user shall be without potable water service for more than three hours, unless approved otherwise by the city. SECTION IV Page 122 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 504. PIPELINE CLEANING Following installation of the potable water or reclaimed water pipelines, the pipelines shall be cleaned using a combination of hydraulic cleaning using poly -pig swabbing devices and full bore flushing as specified below. • 504-1. PIPELINE PIGGING All pipelines shall be hydraulically cleaned utilizing multiple pass operations with a polypropylene swabbing device, also referred to as "pigging" operations, of the piping system. Between successive operations, the pig diameter shall increase, and the pig material shall stiffen. Poly pigs shall be blown elastomer polyurethane with open cell -type construction having a material density suitable for use within the system to be cleaned. Pipe cleaning poly pigs shall have a parabolic nose, crisscross coated with a resilient peripheral surface that engages the inner cylindrical wall of the pipe to maintain a sliding seal. Pipe cleaning poly pigs shall be able to pass through a reduction of a minimum of sixty-five percent (65%) of the original cross-sectional area of the pipe and shall be bi-directional. Cleaning procedures shall conform to the Poly Pig manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall provide pig launching and retrieval points for the pipeline cleaning, as required. The poly pig cleaning operation shall be completed prior to connection of the new potable water main or reclaimed water main to an existing potable water main or reclaimed water main. Passage of cleaning poly pigs through the system shall be constantly monitored, controlled, and all poly pigs entered into the system shall be individually marked and identified so that the exiting of the poly pigs from the system can be confirmed. Cleaning of the pipeline system shall be done in conjunction with the initial filling of the system for the hydrostatic testing. The line to be cleaned shall only be connected to an existing potable water or reclaimed water distribution system at a single connection point. Only the city's operating personnel shall operate the supply valve from the existing potable water or reclaimed water distribution system. The Contractor shall locate and open all new in-line valves beyond the point of connection on the pipeline to be cleaned during the swabbing operation. At the receiving or exit point for the poly pig, the Contractor is responsible for creating a safe environment for collection of debris, water, and the swab. The Contractor shall provide for the protection of surrounding personnel and property and the safe retrieval of the poly pig. Temporary blowoffs may be required for the purpose of flushing mains. Temporary blowoffs shall be installed as close as possible to the ends of the main being flushed. Blowoffs installed on the main shall be the same diameter as the main. Temporary blowoffs shall be removed and plugged after the main is flushed. The city Utility Department shall be notified at least 72 hours prior to pigging and flushing mains. Cleaning and flushing shall be accomplished by propelling the poly pig down the pipeline to the exit point with potable or reclaimed water, depending on the type of main being cleaned. Flushing shall continue until the water is completely clear and poly pig is retrieved. A. Re -apply a series of individual poly pigs in varying diameters and/or densities as required, to attain proper cleanliness of pipeline. B. Pigging speed shall range between two and five feet per second. SECTION IV Page 123 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 504-2. FINAL PIPELINE FLUSHING Following the pigging process for cleaning the pipeline, the length of new water main shall be final flushed with a full -bore clean water flush with a flushing velocity of at least 2.5 fps. The time required for the final full bore flush shall be based on the time needed at the required flushing velocity to provide one complete turnover of the quantity of water in the pipeline based on the length and diameter of water main being flushed. Blowoffs and temporary drainage piping used for flushing shall not be discharged into any gravity sewer or pumping station wet well. The Contractor shall obtain prior approvals from the Engineer and the city as to the methods and locations of flushing water discharge. At the discretion of the city, full bore water flushing may not be required for a particular water main based on the size of the main being cleaned and the quantity of water usage required for a full bore water flush. Following the pigging and flushing process, pressure testing of the pipeline shall be completed in accordance with Section 505 below. 505. TESTS 505-1. HYDROSTATIC PIPELINE TESTING General: The Contractor shall perform hydrostatic pressure and leakage tests on all newly laid pressure pipes, fittings and valves for potable water mains and reclaimed water mains. After installation of the water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid water main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test as described below. Standard: AWWA C600, Section 4, with the exceptions required herein. The Contractor shall furnish all closure pieces in the pipe as required. All equipment required for the hydrostatic pressure test shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall include, but not be limited to, graduated containers, pressure gauges, meters, testing taps and valves, hydraulic pressure pumps, suitable hoses and piping and any other equipment needed to hydrostatically test the pipelines. Hydrostatic tests shall be conducted on all newly laid potable water main or reclaimed water main pipes, fittings, and valves including any branch lines to the curb. Tests shall be made between valves not exceeding 2,000 feet. The Contractor may conduct a preliminary hydrostatic test after the trench has been partially backfilled with the joints left exposed for an initial leakage test for his inspection and informational purposes only. The hydrostatic testing for acceptance shall only be conducted after the trenches have been completely backfilled and compacted as specified. Test new pipelines which are to be connected to existing pipelines by isolating the new line from the existing line by means of pipe caps, special flanges, or blind flanges. After the new line has been successfully tested, remove temporary caps or blind flanges and connect to the existing piping. The Engineer and the city's Inspector shall be present during all inspection, pressure, and leakage testing for the results to be considered acceptable for the city's acceptance of the new potable water main or reclaimed water main system. Successful passage of both the pressure test and the leakage test is required before acceptance by the city. The hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing described herein is intended for non -butt -welded jointed pipe with gasketed j oints. Where any section of the piping contains concrete thrust collars, do not proceed with the pressure test until at least 10 days after the concrete has been poured. If high -early cement is used for the concrete thrust collars, the time may be reduced to three (3) days, if the Engineer and the city Engineering Department SECTION IV Page 124 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications both concur that the concrete has cured and reached adequate strength. When testing cement mortar -lined piping, fill the pipe to be tested with water and allow it to soak for at least 48 hours to absorb water before conducting the pressure test. Each section of pipe to be tested shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure shall be applied by means of a pressure pump connected to the pipe in a satisfactory manner. Before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe as described below. If defective pipes, fittings or valves are discovered in consequence of this pressure test, all such items shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound new material, the pipe shall be re -cleaned and the pressure test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. Provisions of AWWA C-600, where applicable, shall apply. Hydrostatic Pressure Test: A. Test Pressure: Potable Water Mains - 150 psi; Reclaimed Water Mains —150 psi; Wastewater Force Mains — 150 psi. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic pressure pump. The test pressure shall be maintained ±2 psig throughout the entire test period. B. Test Duration: 2 -hours. If during the test, the integrity of the tested line is in question, the Engineer or the city's Inspector may require an additional pressure test. C. Air Release Requirements: Tapping saddles and corporation cocks at least 3/4 -inch in diameter, pipe riser and angle globe valves shall be installed by the Contractor at each dead-end and at all high points in the main to bleed all air from the water main to be tested. D. Zero leakage and no pressure loss shall be allowed for the pressure pipe being tested. Visible Leakage: All visible leaks evident at the ground surface shall be repaired and leakage eliminated. Leakage Repair: Repairs to leaks shall be completed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's written recommendations. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage. Damage or Defects: Any exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joints shall be examined during the test. Any damage or defects that are discovered shall be replaced with new material at no additional cost to the city. The test shall be repeated until no damage or defects are discovered. 505-2. NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the city's Project Manager and/or Representative forty-eight (48) hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. City inspector/CEI shall certify and submit all hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing results to the city Project Manager within 10 days of performing test(s). 506. DISINFECTION AND TESTING Before the new potable water system is put into operation, all new potable water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes into contact, shall be thoroughly disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651. This section includes materials and procedures for disinfection of water mains by the continuous feed method. 506-1. DISINFECTION MATERIALS Dry Calcium Hypochlorite: High test granular calcium hypochlorite (HTH) used as the chlorinating agent shall contain between 65 to 70 percent of available chlorine by weight. The dry calcium hypochlorite shall be stored in a cool, dry, and dark environment, prior to its use, to minimize deterioration. Sodium Hypochlorite Solution: Sodium hypochlorite solution used as the chlorinating agent shall be obtained fresh and shall have a minimum concentration of 10 percent by weight available chlorine. To SECTION IV Page 125 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications minimize degradation, sodium hypochlorite solution shall be stored in opaque, closed polypropylene containers, isolated from contact with any metals and out of direct sunlight. The solution shall be stored in covered (as dark as possible) areas and as cool as possible, prior to use on the jobsite. Sodium hypochlorite solution is highly corrosive. Therefore, the Contractor shall use this chlorinating agent with caution and per the recommendations of the sodium hypochlorite solution manufacturer. Chlorine Residual Test Kit: To measure chlorine concentration, provide and use a mid-range total chlorine test kit with a digital titrator, using sodium thiosulfate as the titrant. Maintain fresh reagents for the test kit and maintain all components of the kit in good working order available for immediate testing of chlorine residuals at the point of sampling. 506-2. FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to pressure testing and application of the disinfection agent for disinfection, all pipelines shall be hydraulically cleaned utilizing multiple pass operations with a polypropylene swabbing device, also referred to as "pigging" operations, of the piping system, followed by full bore flushing. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. Cleaning and flushing prior to pressure testing and disinfection shall be in accordance with Section 504 of these Technical Specifications. 506-3. FINAL DISINFECTION PROCEDURE FOR POTABLE WATER MAINS Before any portion of a new potable water piping system is to be placed into service, it shall be disinfected; and proper disinfection shall be demonstrated by bacteriological testing conducted in accordance with "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Sewage" for the coli -aerogenes group, by a commercial laboratory approved by the FDEP, and acceptable to the Engineer and the city, or may be completed by the Pinellas County Health Department. All pipe, fittings, valves, and all other appurtenances installed for use in potable water pipelines shall be disinfected prior to being placed in service. Disinfection procedures shall be approved by the Engineer and the city and shall be in conformance with ANSI/AWWA C651, latest revision. Contractor shall comply with all General Notes on the Drawings and special requirements that are included with the FDEP permit related to disinfection and clearance of new potable water mains. Pipe subjected to contaminating materials shall be treated in a manner approved by the Engineer and the city. Should such treatment fail to remove contaminants from the pipe, contaminated sections of pipe shall be replaced with new uncontaminated pipe. Only potable water from an existing city water main shall be used for disinfection and final flushing of new potable water pipelines. The potable water shall be obtained as described below in Section 508 of these Technical Specifications. Disinfection Procedure: Disinfection of a completed potable water pipeline shall be accomplished using the following procedure: A. All water piping, fittings, valves, and appurtenances shall be disinfected with a chlorine solution with a sufficient concentration such that the initial chlorine concentration in the water line shall be a minimum of 75 mg/1 available chlorine, at any point in the line, and that a chlorine residual of not less than 30 mg/1 remains in the water, at any point in the line, after standing 24 hours in the pipeline. The contact period may be longer than 24 -hours, if required by the city or the Engineer SECTION IV Page 126 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being disinfection shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. B. Chlorine may be applied to the water pipeline as a liquid 10% sodium hypochlorite solution, or as a mixture of water and high-test calcium hypochlorite. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for safe handling of chlorinating agents and shall meet requirements of OSHA and other regulatory agencies for safe handling of chlorinating agents. C. The dry high-test calcium hypochlorite (HTH) may be used to make up a high concentration chlorine solution which will be used for disinfection. The hypochlorite solution to be used for disinfection should be mixed based on the HTH manufacturer's recommendations. Under no circumstances will undiluted, dry calcium hypochlorite be placed in the pipeline to be disinfected. D. The chlorine solution, either 10% sodium hypochlorite or a calcium hypochlorite mixed solution, shall be metered into the pipeline with a small metering pump. E. Disinfection of Valves, Blind Flanges and Appurtenances: Swab exposed interior surfaces of valves and blind flanges with a 10% sodium hypochlorite solution prior to installation and bolting in place. F. Disinfection of Tapping Sleeves, Tapping Valves and Line Stops: Flush exterior of pipe with potable water after removal of existing coating. Swab exterior of pipe and interior of tapping, sleeve, tapping valve and line stop valve with a 10% sodium hypochlorite solution. Disinfect per AWWA C651, Section 4.8. After completion of tapping and line stopping, swab interior of pipe, valves, and faces of flanges to be connected to bypass piping with a 10% sodium hypochlorite solution. G. Disinfection of Connections to Existing Pipelines: Disinfect isolation valves, pipe, and appurtenances per AWWA C651, Section 4.7. Flush with potable water until discolored water, mud, and debris are eliminated. Swab interior of pipe and fittings with a 10% sodium hypochlorite solution. Following disinfection procedures, flush with potable water again until water is free of chlorine odor. H. Water from the existing, in-service water line shall be made to flow at a constant, slow rate into the water line to be disinfected. A jumper connection from the existing potable water main to the new water main, utilizing a reduced pressure principle backflow preventer approved by the city, shall be used to obtain water for disinfection. Chlorine solution shall be injected or pumped at a regulated rate into the new main, at a point not more than 10 feet downstream from the beginning of the new water main. The method of tapping the water main for the chlorine injection point and the location of the tap shall be approved by the Engineer and the city. I. Proportion the two rates so that the chlorine concentration in the pipeline is maintained at a minimum concentration of 75 mg/L. Check the concentration at points downstream during the filling to ascertain that sufficient chlorine is being added. J. Chlorine solution shall be circulated in the water main by opening the water control valve and systematically manipulating valves, fire hydrants and blowoffs. K. Water service lines, if applicable, shall be disinfected in a similar manner as that for water mains, including corrective measures, by methods acceptable to the Engineer and the city. L. Chlorine solution shall remain in the water lines for not less than 24 -hours, but longer than 24 - hours, if directed by the Engineer or the city. M. Extreme care shall be exercised at all times to prevent concentrated chlorine solution from entering existing water mains. If methods of disinfection used by the Contractor differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. SECTION IV Page 127 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 506-4. FLUSHING AND RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After 24 -hours, or when approved by the Engineer and the city, the free residual chlorine concentration in the water line at the pipe extremity sample points shall be checked to make sure the free residual chlorine concentration is at least 30 mg/1; if not, the water lines shall be re -disinfected as described above. Final flushing of lines with potable water may proceed after 24 hours, or when approved by the Engineer and the city, provided the free residual chlorine analysis is satisfactory at 30 mg/L or above. Flushing shall be continued until a chlorine residual test shows that the pipelines contain only the normal chlorine residual in the feed potable water, not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test kit. Prior to flushing water with high chlorine concentrations, obtain approvals from the Engineer and the Owner as to the methods and locations of discharge. City inspector/CEI must certify and submit all residual chlorine test results to the city Project Manager within 10 days of performing test(s). 506-5. BACTERIALOGICAL TESTS Following disinfection and thorough flushing of the water lines, as specified herein, the Contractor, and/or the city Public Utilities Department Water Division (or the Engineering Department), shall furnish all labor and materials required to obtain samples of water from the potable water line, at established remote sampling points approved by the FDEP, properly collected in suitable sterilized containers obtained from the Pinellas County Health Department or an analytical laboratory approved by the city and certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. Proper techniques and procedures shall be used to collect the water samples to avoid outside contamination resulting in a false positive coliform result. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of bacteriological samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sample collection and shall be followed in all respects. Two (2) series of successive samples shall be obtained at each established sampling point in accordance with AWWA C651, Section 5.1, to obtain a bacteriological quality test result to demonstrate the absence of coliform bacteria in each separate section of the pipeline being tested after chlorination, flushing and refilling. Each test series will require two samples at each sampling point. The period between each series of samples shall be a minimum of 24 -hours. Samples shall be delivered by the Contractor to the County Health Department or the approved analytical laboratory for bacteriological examination within 6 hours of obtaining the samples. Samples shall be collected in conformance with the County Health Department standards and lab testing schedule. Prior to collecting samples, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the city, who will have representatives present during bacteriological sample collection. Collect at least one set of samples from every 1,000 feet of the new water main and line stopping insertion point, plus one set from the end of the line and at least one set from each branch. At each connection to an existing pipeline, take two additional samples. Bacteriological test results will be available approximately 48- to 72 -hours after samples have been submitted to the testing laboratory. If test results are unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall immediately re - chlorinate and retest the water lines as described above and proceed with such corrective measures as are necessary to secure disinfected lines. All services shall be re -chlorinated if the lines are re -chlorinated. The water lines shall be re -disinfected and re -tested, at the Contractor's expense, until approved by the Engineer, the city, and the Pinellas County Health Department or FDEP, as applicable. At satisfactory completion of the bacteriological test requirements, potable water pipelines shall be placed into service in a manner approved by the Engineer and the city Engineering Department. Complete the pipeline where temporary disinfection or test facilities were installed. Potable water mains shall not be SECTION IV Page 128 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications placed into service until all requirements of the State and Pinellas County Public Health Departments are met, and the Letter of Clearance is obtained from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (FDEP). The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and the city at least 72 hours prior to placing potable water pipelines into service. The city Inspector/CEI shall certify and submit all bacteriological test results to the city Project Manager within 10 days of performing the test(s) as required by the Florida Department of Environmental Protection. 507. CORRECTION OF NON -CONFORMING WORK All non -conforming work shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no additional expense to the city. Non -conforming work shall be defined as failure to adhere to any specific or implied directive of this Project Manual and/or the drawings, including but not limited to paid not laid straight, true to the lines and grades as shown on the drawings, damaged or unacceptable materials, misalignment or diameter ring deflection in pipe due to bedding or backfilling, visible or detectable leakage and failure to pass any specified test or inspection. 508. OBTAINING WATER FOR FLUSHING AND TESTING The potable water supply shall be protected with an air gap or a reduced pressure principle backflow preventer approved by the city if potable water is used for flushing and testing. Only potable water shall be use for flushing and pressure testing of potable water pipelines. Reclaimed water may be used for flushing and pressure testing of reclaimed water lines or wastewater force mains. The city will provide the water required for city Projects. The Contractor shall coordinate with the city for a temporary construction water service connection, intended for usage during flushing and testing. For private development projects the Contractor will need to obtain temporary potable water service during construction, the Contractor shall be required to pay for the installation and for the water used. The piping, fittings, backflow preventer, and appurtenances required for the temporary construction water service shall be supplied by the city of Clearwater. 509. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 509-1. GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work unless otherwise specified: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and/or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joint materials SECTION IV Page 129 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 509-2. FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 509-2.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipeline, including the length of valves and fittings. 509-2.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains completely and ready for operation. 509-3. FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 509-3.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the actual number of size and type of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. 509-3.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 509-4. FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 509-4.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 509-4.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, and equipment and installing the gate valve complete with valve box and cover, concrete pad and valve disc, including any jointing materials and any restraint devices required. 509-5. FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 509-5.1. MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the city utilities system are listed in Section 502-5 of these Technical Specifications. No exceptions. SECTION IV Page 130 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 509-5.2. PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials and equipment and installing the fire hydrant assembly complete including all necessary anchor tees, swivel - type thrust anchorage, 6 -inch ductile iron pipe between the main and the fire hydrant and gate valve(s) and valve boxes and covers, concrete pad(s) and valve disc(s) on the hydrant branch line and , including any jointing materials and any restraint devices required. • • SECTION IV Page 131 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 600 SERIES: STORMWATER 601. RAISING OR LOWERING OF STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 601-1. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 602. UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub -surface drainage pipe as directed in the Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non- degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be eight inches (8") in diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 described in FDOT Section 948-1.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe that exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93 a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non -perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly -chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultraviolet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi® 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. Filter aggregate for underdrains shall be as specified in the FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 901 — Coarse Aggregate, and shall be either #6 or #57. If #57 is used, it must be washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag, or crushed gravel. 602-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of linear feet of eight inch (8") Sub -drain in place and accepted. 602-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per linear foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, SECTION IV Page 132 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 603. STORM SEWERS All storm drainpipe installed within the city shall be steel reinforced concrete unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 430 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi® 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to fmd that the inverts coincide, and pipe is clear throughout. 603-1. TESTING AND INSPECTION The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a watertight sewer under all conditions. The work under this Section shall include the internal video recording of new stormwater drainage pipes and drainage structures. The Contractor shall provide the city with a video of the completed stormwater drainage system, and a written report. The Contractor shall pump down and clean the pipes and drainage structures, to the satisfaction of the city, prior to video recording. The video shall be of the standard DVD format, in color, with all the pertinent data and observations recorded as audio on the DVD. The data should include: 1. An accurate recorded footage of the pipe lengths. 2. The drainage structure number and pipe size. 3. The run of the pipe and direction of flow (i.e. from S-1 to S-2). 4. Details of structural defects, broken pipes, sags, dips, misalignments, obstructions, and infiltration. The written report shall include the four (4) items listed previously. All visual and video recording inspections shall be completed by the Contractor and be in accordance with Section 430-4.8 of FDOT Standard Specifications. Any deficient or damaged pipe discovered during the video recording process shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to repair or replace at their own expense within the contractual duration. As a complement to the video report, the Contractor shall also provide digital photos of areas of concern in electronic (computer CD/DVD) and hard copy form (in color). All known pipe breaks or those breaks discovered after the video inspection shall be repaired by the Contractor regardless of the test allowances. Faulty sections of drainage pipes or drainage structures rejected by the Engineer shall be removed and re-laid by the Contractor. Sections of pipe that are repaired, re-laid or replaced shall be accompanied with a corresponding post construction video inspection at the Contractor's expense. In all cases that a leak is found, re -inspection shall be required at the Contractor's expense, to confirm that the problem has been resolved. 603-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 1111 Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage SECTION IV Page 133 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, gravel bedding if needed for stabilization, labor, and incidentals, etc.). 604. STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to city of Clearwater Standards Details Index Numbers 201 to 236. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of these Technical Specifications, Sections 301, 302, 303 and 202, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 604-1. BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Built up type manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on city of Clearwater Standard Details Index Numbers 201. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with grout. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled, and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with a skim coat of one-half inch (1/2") of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledgehammer. 604-2. PRECAST TYPE Precast manholes shall be constructed as shown on city of Clearwater Standards Details Index 202. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches (5") thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturer's option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. SECTION IV Page 134 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 604-3. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. • 605. GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 605-1. MATERIAL 605-1.1. PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES 605-1.1.1. GABION & MATTRESS BASKETS Gabion and mattress baskets units shall conform to ASTM A975, be of non -raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.106 inches. 605-1.1.2. PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 'h inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.134 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.174 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter, coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. 605-1.1.3. GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL The filler stone shall be from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. Crushed concrete shall not be used for filler material. • 605-1.1.4. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to the latest edition of FDOT Standard Specifications, Section 985. SECTION IV Page 135 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 605-2. PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than twelve inches (12") into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. In wet conditions, a base shall be established by spreading and compacting #57 stone prior to placement of geotextile fabric and gabions or mattresses. SECTION IV Page 136 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 700 SERIES: STREETS AND SIDEWALKS • • 701. RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced with the same type of material that was destroyed or damaged, or to existing city Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing city Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with city approved material. All replaced base shall be at least eight inches (8") compacted thickness, or same compacted thickness as the base destroyed plus two inches (2") and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T-180. Refer to Standard Detail Index 104. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per linear foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All necessary restoration exceeding this footprint will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per linear foot; sidewalk four inches (4") or six inches (6") thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of six inches (6") thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh. The Contractor shall notify the Construction Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 702. ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 702-1. BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Section 101 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be eight inches (8") compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be twelve inches (12") compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Section 204 - Unsuitable Material Removal of the city's Technical Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the city's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the city approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. SECTION IV Page 137 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. Shell Base: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition of Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. Limerock Base: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. When used, Contractor is required to submit documentation certifying the materials were obtained from a FDOT certified pit. 3. Crushed Concrete Base: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition of Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 100. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. Superpave Asphalt Base: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition of Section 234 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 5. Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement Base: Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) base shall be constructed in accordance with the latest edition of Section 283 of FDOT's Standard Specifications and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. As per FDOT Section 283, RAP material shall be used as a base course only on non -limited access paved shoulders, shared use paths, or other non -traffic bearing applications. The cost for preparation, placement, and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 702-1.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of cubic yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (1/2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so, approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702-1.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. SECTION IV Page 138 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 702-2. SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with the latest edition of Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT 's Standard Specifications. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Section 204 - Unsuitable Material Removal of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value of the subgrade after the materials are mixed for the stabilized subgrade and provide the results to the Engineer. 702-2.1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of cubic yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per the latest edition of Section 161-6.4 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per the latest edition of Section 160-7.2 of FDOT 's Standard Specifications. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so, approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 702-2.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT 111 The unit price for subgrade shall include roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. • 703. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 703-1. ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 703-1.1. AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to the latest edition of Sections 901 through 915 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 703-1.2. BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to the latest edition of Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. SECTION IV Page 139 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 703-2. HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The city shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the city, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the city, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per FDOT's Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of /4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least twenty-five feet (25') from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per FDOT's Standard Specifications. In addition, for excesses of one-quarter inch (1/4") or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 703-3. ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs, acceptance procedures and quality control/assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of Sections 330 and 334 of FDOT Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 703-4. ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following FDOT requirements: • Type SP/Spec 334-1 • Type FC/Spec 337-8 • Type B/Spec 234-8 • ATPB/287-8 703-5. GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface SECTION IV Page 140 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, Quality Control Testing, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications(latest edition). • • 703-6. CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 703-6.1. CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703-6.2. POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 703-7. ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES AND APPURTANENCES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. Refer to Section 401-2 of these Technical Specifications for additional information. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: 1. The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. 2. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of ASTM A36. 3. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless-steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. 4. The use of cast iron or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfills using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. SECTION IV Page 141 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications All manhole and valve box adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc., will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments, so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 703-8. ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Construction Inspector or Engineer, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off from sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling, and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be one-quarter inch (1/4") above the lip or face of said curb per City Standard Detail Index 101. 703-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. The scales must be calibrated and certified by an independent party and carry a state certification. 703-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. SECTION IV Page 142 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 704. ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Section applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than ten percent (10%) from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: https://www.fdot.gov/construction/fuel-bit/fuel-bit.shtm For additional information, call FDOT at (850) 414-4252. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The city reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. • • 705. ASPHALT DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing asphalt driveways that must be altered for project construction shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six inches (6"). Remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street. Use Section 703 Asphaltic Concrete, of these Technical Specifications, as specified for the street paving. When the finished surface of the existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Asphalt Driveways. 705-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yards of Asphalt Driveways in place and accepted. 705-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Asphalt Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 706. CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed a hundred feet (100') and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed ten feet (10'). In addition, all the requirements of these city Technical Specifications Sections 301, 302 and 303 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. SECTION IV Page 143 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications The finished surface must have a reasonably uniform texture, must be within 1/4 inch of a true profile grade, and must have no deviation in excess of 1/4 inch from a straight edge applied to the pavement perpendicular to the centerline. Areas varying from a true surface in excess of the above stated tolerance may be accepted without correction if the Engineer determines that they were caused by preexisting conditions which could not reasonably have been corrected by the milling operations. Any unsuitable texture or profile, as determined by the Engineer, must be corrected by the Contractor at no additional expense to the city. 706-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be linear feet of curb in place and accepted. 706-2. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per linear foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 707. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 707-1. CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet and scoring marks shall be made every five feet (5'). Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade prepared in accordance with Section 702 of these Technical Specifications. In addition, all the requirements of Sections 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. 707-2. CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six inches (6") in thickness with 6/6 x 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four feet (4') measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade prepared in accordance with Section 702 of these Technical Specifications. In addition, all the requirements of Sections 301, 302 and 303 of these Technical Specifications shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. SECTION IV Page 144 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 707-3. CONCRETE CURB RAMPS The contractor is responsible for constructing ADA compliant concrete curb ramps per the plans and installing detectable warning surfaces on said ramps as called for in the plan set. Concrete curb ramps and detectable warning surfaces are to be constructed per FDOT Standards and Specifications. 707-4. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of four inch (4") concrete sidewalk, six inch (6") concrete sidewalk, and six inch (6") concrete driveways in place and accepted. 707-5. BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 708. MILLING OPERATIONS 708-1. EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Section, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT 's Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall notify the city Project Manager a minimum of twenty-four (24) hours in advance of all milling. 708-2. ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS The following are the additional milling requirements: A. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the Contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. B. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven (7) days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. C. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre -wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. D. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. F. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. G. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. SECTION IV Page 145 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications H. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the city's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the city approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. I. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 708-3. SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS Unless otherwise specified, all salvageable materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the city. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the city Project Manager to schedule delivery of material at least 48 hours prior to starting work. 708-4. DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the city shall become the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the city. 708-5. ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All private utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. city -owned utilities and structures shall be located by the Owner/City and adjusted by the contractor. The Contractor shall arrange their schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours' notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 708-6. ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Sections 703-7 of the city's Technical Specifications. 708-7. TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the city: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot (6') wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. SECTION IV Page 146 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 708-8. MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately fifty (50) feet from the low point of the existing swale. 708-9. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 708-10. BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. SECTION IV Page 147 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 800 SERIES: TRAFFIC SIGNALS, SIGNS AND MARKINGS 801. TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 603 through 699, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the city's Traffic Engineering Division prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LEDs and, approved by both the city's Traffic Engineering Division and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is prohibited unless directed by the city's Traffic Engineering Division. All damaged inductive loop detectors shall be restored by the contractor per FDOT Index 17781. 801-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 802. SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per most current FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators/flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the city's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. The Contractor is responsible for restoring all striping in paint and reflective beading per the FDOT indices mentioned above. The city's Traffic Engineering department shall follow up with thermoplastic striping at a later date unless otherwise specified. SECTION IV Page 148 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 802-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 803. ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per most current Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 803-1. BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing, and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SECTION IV Page 149 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 900 SERIES: LANDSCAPING/RESTORATION 901. WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The Contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The Contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the Contractor shall obtain written permission. 902. GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 902-1. IRRIGATION 902-1.1. DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system as indicated on the drawings and/or specifications. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 902-1.1.1. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FEDSPEC Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly, and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the Contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders, with three rings and a USB with the electronic design files (including the irrigation As Builts), containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the Contractor's address and business telephone number, twenty-four (24) hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of SECTION IV Page 150 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the city maintenance staff with a written the Operations Manual and "hands on" training for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Irrigation Zones equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 902-1.1.2. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation of twenty- four -inch (24") diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials during the construction period. C. The Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. III 902-1.1.3. WARRANTY A. The Contractor(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the city. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, the Contractor shall be corrected at no expense to the city. • 902-1.2. PRODUCTS 902-1.2.1. GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 902-1.2.2. PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80 per detail drawings. 902-1.2.3. PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe SECTION IV Page 151 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 902-1.2.4. PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. Submit to the city Project Manager for approval. The solvent that cement that should be used is 303 PVC Cement Regular Clear. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings have been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. The purple primer cleaner for PVC is 8800. 902-1.2.5. THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 902-1.2.6. GATE VALVES 902-1.2.6.1. MANUAL GATE VALVES TWO INCHES (2") AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. Nibco Brass Body Construction, female threaded on both sides, sized appropriately to source pipe - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Slip/Threaded Coupler 4. Schedule 80 Nipple 902-1.2.6.2. GATE VALVES TWO AND A HALF INCHES (21/2") AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-0509 2. 2001b. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with two inches (2") square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve three inches (3") and larger. The "street key" shall be five feet (5') long with a two inch (2") square operating nut. 902-1.2.7. SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by city of Clearwater) 1. The Contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. B. Schedule 80 or higher, sized two (2) times the diameter of pipe to be sleeved 902-1.2.8. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The electric globe remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated; balance -pressure across -the - diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate per manufacturer's recommendations with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (psi). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. Submit to the city Project Manager for approval. SECTION IV Page 152 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications B. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel, and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a one -inch (1"), 1 1/2", 2", 3" (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one -inch (1") female threaded inlet and outlet for threaded connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Irritrol or approved equal. Any valve that is 3" or larger than must submit to the city Project Manager for approval. F. Identify all control valves using Aluminum or Bronze metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. G. All electric valves to have gate valves on source side of each valve. 902-1.2.9. VALVE BOXES A. For electronic irrigation valves use a Brooks #36 concrete valve box with #36-T cast iron traffic bearing cover or approved equal. B. For wire splices and gate valves use a Carson with T cover (Heavy Duty) ten inch (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks or approved equal. The color of the lids need to be Pantone 522C if reclaimed. 902-1.2.10. AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three (3) independent programs with eight (8) start times each, station run time capability from one (1) minute to twelve (12) hours in one (1) minute increments, and a seven (7) day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. Submit to the city Project Manager for approval. 902-1.2.11. FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection or over air. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one nine volt (9V) alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number ofUNIK Control Modules or A/C placed times, whichever is applicable. SECTION IV Page 153 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. E. Field transmitter to be provided to city Parks and Recreation at time of acceptance of project. F. Submit to the city Project Manager for approval. 902-1.3. EXECUTION 902-1.3.1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in Contractor's absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Specifications. F. No irrigation piping or any irrigation component shall be installed in a retention pond bottom or slopes or passing through retention pond. No piping shall be 12" from top of bank. G. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In the event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. H. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the Contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. I. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. J. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base installation. 902-1.3.2. EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 902-1.3.2.1. TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight(vertically). Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain six inch (6") horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain six inch (6") vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45° to 90°. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching, and working near existing utilities. 902-1.3.2.2. BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have eighteen inches (18") of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than one half inch ('/z"). C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Standard Specifications. SECTION IV Page 154 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs before landscape installation begins. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T180. Under landscaped areas, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six inches (6") thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 902-1.3.2.3. ROUTING OF PIPING A. Routing of pressure and non -pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Engineer and/or city any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout all systems using an approved staking method and maintain the staking of approved layout. 902-1.3.3. INSTALLATION 902-1.3.3.1. WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the city. 902-1.3.3.2. ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accordance with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Specifications. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 902-1.3.3.3. SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The Contractor shall verify the location and size of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies before work begins. 902-1.3.3.4. PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least fifteen (15) minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four (4) hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80°F, allow soluble weld joints at least twenty-four (24) hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipelines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: SECTION IV Page 155 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. Refer to Section 503-2.3. of these Technical Specifications. 2. Secure permission from the city Landscape Architect before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by city and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 902-1.3.3.5. CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the city's Project Manager and/or Representative prior to installation. 902-1.3.3.6. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at final grade. Set in turf areas whenever possible. B. Install valves in turf areas in a plumb position with twenty-four inch (24") minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, three feet (3') minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than seven feet (7') from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 902-1.3.3.7. GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfilling. C. Install in 10" round, Carson Heavy Duty valve box or approved equal (Pantone 522C if reclaim). 902-2. LANDSCAPE 902-2.1. GENERAL 902-2.1.1. REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities, and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the city in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 902-2.1.2. SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. SECTION IV Page 156 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV—Technical Specifications • 902-2.1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the city and the city Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, submit to the city Project Manager for approval. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in their employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). City and city Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call"/ "Sunshine 811" at 8-1-1; "Sunshine 811" administrative offices may be reached at (800) 638-4097. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 902-2.1.4. SUBMITTALS • A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two (2) copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Contractor for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one (1) year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. • 902-2.1.5. ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The city, through their Project Manager, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the city Project Manager for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 902-2.1.6. ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT.: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SECTION IV Page 157 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications C. W.: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches, or fronds. ST.TR.: Straight trunk. MIN.: Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 -gallon, 7 gallons, etc. O.C.: On center, distance between plant centers. DIA.: Diameter. LVS.: Leaves. D.B.H.: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four -inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner's Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 902-2.1.7. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 902-2.1.7.1. PLANT MATERIALS A. Use Florida Grades and Standards (most current edition) for all plant materials within these Technical Specifications. B. Provide container -grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. C. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate root balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of four (4) weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls SECTION IV Page 158 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Palms shall be planted within twenty-four (24) hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label all plants of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 902-2.1.8. JOB CONDITIONS 902-2.1.8.1. ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub -grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the city Landscape Architect or Project Manager in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the city Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the city Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures before plant installations begin. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the city Landscape Architect in writing for change approval before work is performed E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to sod installation or seeding lawns. Protect existing lawn, trees, and promptly repair all damages from planting operations that is satisfactory and approved by the city. 902-2.1.8.2. SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the city's Project Manager and/or the city Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc., in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the city. C. The city's Project Manager and/or Representatives may request work stoppage in writing. Upon written request from the city's Project Manager, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the city of Clearwater, the city's Project Manager, or the General Contractor, with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 902-2.1.8.3. UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. SECTION IV Page 159 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 902-2.2. PRODUCTS 902-2.2.1. MATERIALS 902-2.2.1.1. PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc., shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Schedule. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions) or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. The scientific and common name both need to be provided for each plant materials. 902-2.2.1.2. PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use Florida Grades and Standards (latest edition) for all plant materials within these Technical Specifications. B. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous, and free from insects, pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. C. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Tree species must have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. D. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). E. The city Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name, variety, size, quality, or designated area. F. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. G. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit to the Landscape Architect proof of it being non -available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. H. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the city Landscape Architect, with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. I. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. J. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. Only natural biodegradable burlap will be acceptable. K. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. SECTION IV Page 160 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications L. Container -grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 902-2.2.1.3. GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a certified species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious weed, freshly mowed before cutting, and pest and disease free when laid. It must not be stacked more than twenty-four (24) hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation through the acceptance of the project. B. Sod shall be laid side to side with no gaps and all at level grade, so no scalping occurs. Contractor will make changes as deemed necessary by the city before acceptance of work. C. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 902-2.2.1.4. MULCH A. Mulch shall be as specified in the plans B. Install mulch to an even depth of three inches (3") before compaction, as shown in the PLANTING DETAILS in the plans. 902-2.2.1.5. STAKES AND GUYS A. Use the University of Florida Urban Tree Foundation Planting Details and Specifications Staking details. Use the latest edition of the Staking Details from the Urban Tree Foundation (http://urbantree.org/details staking.shtml) B. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of three (3) stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two — three-quarter inch (3/4") steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. Submit to the city Project Manager for approval. C. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 902-2.2.1.6. PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the city, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of one-third (1/3) peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy loam, with no lumps over one inch (1"). C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a native, friable soil with known analysis and composition that is like soil makeup. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from weeds, clay, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. 902-2.2.1.7. TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members six feet (6') to eight feet (8') on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot (1') for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH (four and one half feet) above grade. SECTION IV Page 161 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 902-2.2.1.8. ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Submit to city Project Manager and Landscape Architect for approval (if applicable). 902-2.2.1.9. PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 902-2.2.1.10. PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 902-2.3. EXECUTION 902-2.3.1. PREPARATION 902-2.3.1.1. OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities, or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the city Project Manager and Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 902-2.3.1.2. GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with mutually agreed on herbicide per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" or approved equal per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre -emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Rodeo" or approved equal and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity, and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the city. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over one- and one-half inches (1'/2") in any dimension from individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 902-2.3.1.3. PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread three inches (3") of one- third (1/3) Florida peat and two-thirds (2/3) sandy, or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer six inches (6") to eight inches (8") into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to ensure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. 902-2.3.1.4. PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. SECTION IV Page 162 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub -grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of four inches (4"). C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 902-2.3.2. INSTALLATION 902-2.3.2.1. BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well -drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 902-2.3.2.2. LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc., as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule C. Leave an eighteen -inch (18") (450 millimeters) borders of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the city Project Manager and Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the Plans. 902-2.3.2.3. PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be two (2) times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, planted "high" withl 0% of the root ball height above the surrounding grade. C. Native soil shall be used in back -filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. D. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 four inches (4") (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back- fill up to the proper grade. Use the Florida Grades and Standards (latest edition). Failure to comply is cause for rejection. E. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be three (3) to five (5) times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. F. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground cover adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of eighteen inches (18") from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. SECTION IV Page 163 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 902-2.3.2.4. SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to one inch (1") to one- and one-half inches (1-1/2") below top of walks prior to laying sod. C. Within two (2) hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of two inches (2") (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. D. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed and rolled, the edges of the area shall be smooth and conform to the grades indicated. E. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. F. On slopes 3:1 or steeper, and as required, a geotextile fabric shall be installed per manufacturer's specifications prior to placing sod. The sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 902-2.3.2.5. SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 902-2.3.2.6. TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Use the latest edition of the Staking Details from the Urban Tree Foundation (http://urbantree.org/details staking.shtml). Submit to the city Project Manager for approval. B. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees 1 year after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. 902-2.3.2.7. MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a three inch (3") layer (before compaction) of 1.5" round pine bark nuggets or brown shredded hard wood mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. Submit to the city Project Manager for approval. C. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum six-inch (6") clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum six-inch (6") clearance for the walls of buildings. 902-2.3.2.8. CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the city. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. No pruning should be done by the contractor, but can be done by the landscape contractor. SECTION IV Page 164 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 902-2.3.2.9. PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the city's and adjacent property from damage. C. The Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 902-2.3.2.10. REPAIR OF DAMAGES A. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by their operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. B. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by their work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the city's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 902-2.3.3. MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first-class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent • with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the city of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch (1") of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 902-2.3.4. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 902-2.3.4.1. INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the city or the city's Project Manager that the job is ready for inspection. Within fifteen (15) days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the city and/or Landscape Contractor. 902-2.3.4.2. REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in the Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within fifteen (15) days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. • 902-2.3.4.3. ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material, if any, have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the city or Project Manager will accept the project in writing. SECTION IV Page 165 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications B. Upon Final Acceptance, the city assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the city shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from their Contract price. The final selection rests with the city or their representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the city reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under -specified plant materials. No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 902-2.3.5. WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the city. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the city. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 903. SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the Contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with the latest editions of Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications. The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than seventy-two (72) hours can be used. The city shall be notified in advance by 2 business days and reserves the right to view and inspect the sod before installation. A city Project Manager shall inspect the sod at the site once delivered and will not be allowed to be laid until approved. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat, and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the city a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the city a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. SECTION IV Page 166 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 904. SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized, and seeded in basic conformance with FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 905. LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 905-1. SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the city in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the specified landscaped street areas including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic. • Trash and debris removal from the job site. • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces. • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms. • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted). • Irrigation service and repair. • Mulch replacement. • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 905-2. SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The city may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, such as cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. SECTION IV Page 167 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 905-3. WORK METHODS 905-3.1. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the city (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 905-3.2. DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The Contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 905-3.2.1. LITTER AND DEBRIS Remove trash and debris from the project site. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is the Contractor's responsibility. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the city to clean up. The Contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the Contractor would be considered. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the Contractor. 905-3.2.2. VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the city within twenty-four (24) hours after providing the service. 905-3.2.3. PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular species. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, consistent with the following specification. 1. PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.): Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; and remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation, such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 905-3.2.3.1. TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the Contractor, according to the approved Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 905-3.2.3.2. PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The city reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. SECTION IV Page 168 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications • 905-3.2.4. WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by Contractor at their expense. 905-3.2.5. MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually three inches (3"). 905-3.2.6. IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the system's proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. 905-3.2.7. LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on city properties. 905-3.2.8. PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three (3) pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. • 905-3.2.9. FREEZE PROTECTION The city will provide a freeze/frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze/frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a city facility. Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The city will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The city will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated city facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the city. The city shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The city may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man- hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The city and Contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the city. • 906. LEVEL OF SERVICE The Project Site is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within seven (7) working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six (6) and no further than ten (10) calendar days apart. SECTION IV Page 169 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications 907. COMPLETION OF WORK Within twenty-four (24) hours of completing work, notify the city Project Manager either in writing of said completion and request the substantial completion letter. 908. INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the city shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the city shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given forty-eight (48) hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the city will pay for services billed. 909. SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a twelve (12) month period on plants, trees, and palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as they feel appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 3. All work shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or their employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The city shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs on the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the city Supervisor of such occurrences and shall schedule to perform the required work to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 910. TREE PROTECTION 910-1. TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two-thirds (2/3) of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch (2") lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet (4') in length with a minimum of one foot (1') anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet (8') apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one -inch (1") by four -inch (4") lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The city's Project Manager must approve any variation from the above requirements. SECTION IV Page 170 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the city's Project Manager D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 910-2. ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw, or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than eighteen inches (18") from existing grade. Any questions should be addressed to the city's Project Manager. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the city's Project Manager and/or Representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches (10") per one inch (1") of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the city's Project Manager prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of eighteen inches (18") from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than eighteen inches (18"). H. Root pruning shall be performed using a root cutting machine specifically designed for this purpose. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the city's Project Manager, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected, and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. SECTION IV Page 171 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IV —Technical Specifications K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the city Project Manager may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 910-3. PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub, and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. C. No protected tree shall have more than thirty percent (30%) of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked, or lion tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition and will require replacement consistent with the current City Code of Ordinances and Community Development Code. 911. IRRIGATION SYSTEM DESIGN The requirements for Irrigation System Design are the following: A. The application rate must not exceed the ability of the soil to absorb and retain the water applied during any one application. B. The design operating pressure must not be greater than the available source pressure. C. The design operating pressure must account for peak use times and supply line pressures at final buildout for the entire system. D. Distribution devices and pipes should be designed for optimum uniform coverage. The first and last distribution device should have no more than a 10% difference in flow rate. This usually corresponds to about a 20% difference in pressure. E. "Head to head" placement of sprinklers to achieve 100% coverage. F. Flexibility must exist to meet a site's peak water requirements and allow for the modification of the system's operation to meet seasonal irrigation changes or local restrictions. G. Distribution equipment (such as pop -ups, rotors, bubblers and drip) in a given zone must have the same precipitation rate. H. Turf and landscape areas should be zoned separately based on plant water requirements. Bubblers, drip, rotors and pop -ups will all be on separate zones. I. All water delivery devices (heads, tree bubblers, valves) shall be free of buried obstructions 8-10" below each device to be acceptable. SECTION IV Page 172 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 • SECTION IV —Technical Specifications J. Install valves in Turf areas where possible K. Install all irrigation heads at finish grade unless approved by Parks and Rec. before installation. L. The design package should include a general irrigation schedule with recommendations and instructions on modifying the schedule for local climatic and growing conditions. M. If required by plant species, the design should account for the need to leach out salt buildup from poor quality water. N. Water supply systems (such as wells and pipelines) should be designed for varying control devices, and backflow prevention. O. Water conveyance systems should be designed with thrust blocks and air release valves, such that flow velocity is 5 feet per second or less. P. Pipelines should be designed to provide the system with the appropriate pressure required for maximum irrigation uniformity. Q. Pressure regulating or compensating equipment must be used where the system pressure exceeds the manufacturer' s recommendations. R. Equipment with check valves must be used in low areas to prevent low head drainage. S. A rain -sensing device must be used to automatically shut off system when raining. T. Non -planted areas, including impervious surfaces should not be irrigated. U. The city of Clearwater, Parks and Beautification must approve irrigation plan before irrigation construction begins. 912. IRRIGATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION The requirements for Irrigation System Installation are the following: A. Only qualified specialists under the direct supervision of a "Certified Irrigation Designer" or a "Certified Irrigation Contractor" should install the irrigation system. Certifications are through "The Irrigation Association". B. The construction must be consistent with the design. C. The designer must approve any design changes before construction. D. Construction and materials should meet existing standards and criteria. E. Mainline — To be laid with tracking wire / tape firmly attached throughout project. Leave 18" of excess cable at terminal ends in 6" round valve boxes. See Parks and Rec Irrigation Spec page for type. F. Sleeve size will be 2 times the diameter of pipe to be sleeved. Example 1.5" feed pipe dia. = 3" sleeve diameter. G. Acceptable safety practices must be followed during construction. H. All underground cables, pipes and other obstacles should be identified, and their locations flagged. I. Obtain all permits before construction. J. Always give the city Engineering and Parks & Recreation Department a copy of the As -Built plans, operating manuals, warranties, and written instructions on how to change the irrigation system's timers/clock/controllers. K. At the end of construction, the site must be cleaned of all construction materials. SECTION IV Page 173 of 173 Updated 6/2/2021 SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 3317 01 74 40 STRUCTURAL DESIGN, SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE CONCRETE STRUCTURE TESTING DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03 01 30 CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMING 03 21 00 REINFORCEMENT STEEL 03 31 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 32 00 JOINTS IN CONCRETE 03 60 00 GROUTING DIVISION 04 — MASONRY (NOT USED) DIVISION 05 — METALS 05 05 19 05 05 00 05 52 00 POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK ALUMINUM RAILING DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTIC, AND COMPOSITES (NOT USED) DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS 08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS DIVISION 09 — FINISHES (NOT USED) 09 96 00 PROTECTIVE COATING DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10 73 00 PROTECTIVE COVERS STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB SECTION IVa TOC - 1 • • • • • SECTION IVa SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 3317 01 74 40 STRUCTURAL DESIGN, SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE CONCRETE STRUCTURE TESTING DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 19 DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE 03 01 30 CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMING 03 21 00 REINFORCEMENT STEEL 03 31 00 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 32 00 JOINTS IN CONCRETE 03 60 00 GROUTING DIVISION 04 — MASONRY (NOT USED) DIVISION 05 — METALS 05 05 19 05 05 00 05 52 00 POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK ALUMINUM RAILING DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTIC, AND COMPOSITES (NOT USED) DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION (NOT USED) DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS 08 91 19 FIXED LOUVERS DIVISION 09 — FINISHES (NOT USED) 09 96 00 PROTECTIVE COATING III DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES 10 73 00 PROTECTIVE COVERS STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB SECTION IVa TOC - 1 DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING (NOT USED) • DIVISION 23 — HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (NOT USED) DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL 26 00 00 ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL 26 05 19 WIRING AND CABLING 26 05 26 GROUNDING 26 05 33 ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 05 36 WIRING DEVICES 26 05 73 PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES 26 29 00 LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS 26 32 13 STANDBY POWER GENERATION 26 43 00 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 50 00 LIGHTING DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (NOT USED) DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK 31 05 16.13 RECYCLED CONCRETE AGGREGATE AND BANK RUN SHELL 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 23 15 EXCAVATION 31 23 19 DEWATERING 31 23 23.13 BACKFILL 31 40 00 SHORING, SHEETING AND BRACING DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCING 32 84 00 PLANTING IRRIGATION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 23 SODDING 32 93 00 TREES SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS 32 93 01 LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES 32 93 02 LANDSCAPE SLOPE PROTECTION 32 93 05 LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES 33 01 30 33 92 20 33 95 43 MANHOLE REHABILITATION DUCTILE IRON PIPING LARGE PVC NON -PRESSURE PIPE STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB SECTION IVa TOC - 2 DIVISION 40 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS 40 05 00 40 05 07 40 91 00 40 91 02 40 91 06 40 91 07 40 91 08 40 93 00 40 95 10 40 95 13 40 95 15 PIPING, GENERAL PIPE SUPPORTS PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION FLOW MEASURING LEVEL MEASURING LEVEL DETECTION PRESSURE MEASURING PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTION RTU CONTROL SYSTEMS HARDWARE CONTROL PANELS CONTROL PANELS, INSTRUMENTATION DIVISION 41 — PROCESSING EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 43 - MATERIAL HANDLING EQUIPMENT 43 20 00 43 24 06 43 30 00 43 30 12 43 30 16 43 30 18 43 30 24 43 30 52 PUMPS, GENERAL SUBMERSIBLE SOLIDS -HANDLING PUMPS VALVES, GENERAL GATES AND VALVE ACTUATORS CHECK VALVES BALL VALVES PLUG VALVES MISCELLANEOUS VALVES DIVISION 46 — WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 01 00 EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB SECTION IVa TOC - 3 • • SECTION 01 33 17 — STRUCTURAL DESIGN, SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The Contractor shall provide calculations and details for structural and non-structural components, supports, and anchorages as required by the Contract Documents and the 2020 FBC. The contractor shall furnish and install all such structural and non-structural components, supports, and anchorages in accordance with the calculations and details. B. The Contractor shall provide calculations and details for structures and non -building structures, supports, and anchorages as required by the Contract Documents and the 2020 FBC. The contractor shall furnish and install all such structures and non -building structures, supports, and anchorages in accordance with the calculations and details. C. Where a conflict exists between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the 2020 FBC, the more stringent requirement shall apply. D. Design parameters used to determine Wind design forces shall be as listed herein. 1.2 REFERENCES A. FBC 7th Edition Florida Building Code (2020) B. ASCE 7 American Society of Civil Engineers Standard 7-16 — Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. • C. ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (2018 edition) D. TMS 402 Building Code for Masonry Structures (2016 edition) E. TMS 602 Specifications for Masonry Structures (2016 edition) 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Contractor Submittals. B. Calculations and Details 1. Calculatons and details are considered a Delegated Designs as defined in Florida Statutes. 2. Calculations and details shall be complete, accurate, and in accordance with the requirements of the FBC and ASCE 7, and shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida. 3. Calculations shall be clear and concise and show equipment and other non-structural component anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements proposed by the Contractor. The calculations shall substantiate a complete load path from the component or equipment being anchored into the supporting structure or foundation. 4. The calculations and details shall demonstrate a complete lateral and vertical load path, and shall clearly indicate all forces imposed on the supporting structure. STANTEC STRUCTURAL DESIGN, SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 01 33 17 - 1 5. Calculations and details are required for all Non -Structural components, supports, anchorages, and attachments. a. Non -Structural components shall include all architectural, mechanical, and electrical components, equipment, piping, ductwork, and all other similar or related appurtenances necessary to produce the complete architectural, mechanical, and electrical systems. 6. When the Contract Documents require the CONTRACTOR to design structures or structural components, calculations and details for those structures and structural components, and their supports, anchorages, and attachments, are required. 7. When computer generated calculations and analyses are included as part (or as the whole) of the calculations, the calculations shall include, but not be limited to, the following: derivations of all input parameters; clear indication of the applicable load combinations and building code equations; diagrams of all members, geometry, loads, forces, reactions and deflections, for all components and connections; and output results demonstrating all stress, force, deflection and other Contract Document and building code requirements have been satisfied. 8. All calculations associated with anchorage into concrete or masonry shall be done using Strength Level forces, and shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of ACI 318 and ACI 530, respectively. 9. Refer to Part 2 below for additional requirements. 1.4 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA A. Design Requirements 1. Design Parameters: a. Risk Category: III. b. Basic 3 -second Wind Gust Speed: 155 miles per hour. c. Exposure Category: C. d. Topographic Factor, Kn: 1.0. e. NTE — include other factors when appropriate PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Non -Structural Component Supports and Anchors 1. Unless otherwise indicated, non-structural component supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for all applicable static, dynamic, operational, and wind loads. a. Wall -mounted equipment weighing more than 250 pounds or which is within 18 - inches of the floor shall be provided with fabricated steel supports. Pedestals shall be of welded steel or engineered framing support systems. If the supported STANTEC STRUCTURAL DESIGN, SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 01 33 17 - 2 equipment is a panel or cabinet or is enclosed with removable sides, the pedestal shall match the supported equipment in appearance and dimensions. b. All equipment and all other non-structural components shall be supported and anchored in place by methods that satisfy the building code and the Contract Documents. 2. Component attachments shall be bolted, welded, or otherwise positively fastened without consideration of frictional resistance produced by the effects of gravity. B. Non -Building Structures 1. Non -Building Structures shall be designed in accordance with ASCE 7 Chapter 15. 2. Non -Building Structures, foundations, supports, anchors, and restrainers shall be adequately designed for all applicable static, dynamic, operational, and wind loads. C. Anchors — General 1. Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00. 2. Grouts for anchor bolts shall be in accordance with Section 03 60 00. 3. The Contractor shall determine the size, type, capacity, location, and other placement requirements of anchorage elements. Anchoring methods and leveling criteria in the manufacturer's literature shall be followed. Submit methods and criteria with the calculations and details. 4. Anchor bolt calculations shall clearly show that the capacity of the anchor and the capacity of the concrete that the anchor is embedded in are adequate to resist all applicable load combinations, including wind loads. 5. Reduction factors associated with edge distance, embed length, grout and base plate thickness, and bolt spacing shall all be considered and based on the actual dimensions of the concrete or masonry that resists the anchorage forces. 6. Where anchorage is required into or through equipment pads, the following requirements shall apply unless otherwise approved by the Engineer: a. For tensile forces, the embed length and associated concrete failure zone shall be provided entirely within the structural slab. No portion of the equipment pad may be considered as effective in resisting tensile forces. b. For shear forces, the edge distance and associated concrete failure zone shall be provided entirely within the equipment pad. No portion of the structural slab may be considered as effective in resisting shear forces. 7. Anchor bolt details shall include required bolt diameter, embed, spacing, and edge distances. 8. Where additional reinforcement is required to satisfy anchorage requirements, such reinforcement shall be included in the anchorage details, and shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. D. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Foundations STANTEC STRUCTURAL DESIGN, SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 01 33 17 - 3 1. Equipment foundations are indicated on Drawings. The Contractor, through the equipment manufacturer, shall verify the size and weight of the equipment foundation to ensure compatibility with equipment. 2. Equipment foundation dimensions shall be coordinated with the equipment base geometry and the edge distance and embed requirements of the equipment anchorage calculations. E. Mechanical and Electrical Equipment Equipment (Housekeeping) Pads 1. General a. Equipment, tanks, control cabinets, enclosures, and related equipment shall be mounted on concrete equipment pads, unless otherwise indicated. The top surface of the equipment pads shall be level, unless otherwise indicated, or otherwise required by the equipment manufacturer. b. Equipment pads shall be sized to accommodate the bearing and anchorage requirements of the equipment, subject to the constraints listed below. c. Final geometry of the equipment pads shall not result in a condition that violates applicable building code provisions, including but not limited to the provisions of the National Electric Code. 2. Mechanical Equipment Pads a. Mechanical equipment pad heights shall be coordinated with process equipment and piping elevation requirements. Where no such elevation constraints exist, the equipment pad height shall be as shown on the drawings, or as indicated below when no specific height is provided. 1) Equipment pads for mechanical equipment shall be 3.5 inches tall (maximum) at the front of the equipment. b. Mechanical equipment pads shall extend not more than 2 inches beyond the front, back, and sides of the equipment, except as indicated below, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. 1) Where necessary to meet wind anchorage requirements, the pads may be extended beyond the 2 inch limit indicated above. The pads shall extend not more than 6 inches beyond the front, back, and sides of the equipment. 3. Electrical Equipment Pads a. Electrical equipment pads shall be 3.5 inches tall (maximum) at the front of the equipment. b. Electrical equipment pads shall extend not more than 2 inches beyond the front, back, and sides of the equipment, except as indicated below, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED) - END OF SECTION - STANTEC STRUCTURAL DESIGN, SUPPORT AND ANCHORAGE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 01 33 17 - 4 SECTION 01 42 13 - ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 GENERAL • • A. Wherever in these Specifications references are made to the standards, specifications, or other published data of the various international, national, regional, or local organizations, such organizations may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. As a guide to the user of the Specifications, the following acronyms or abbreviations which may appear shall have the meanings indicated herein. 1.2 ABBREVIATIONS AA Aluminum Association AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists ABMA American Bearing Manufacturer's Association — ABMA ACGIH American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists ACI American Concrete Institute AF&PA American Forest and Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association AHA American Hardboard Association AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers Al The Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects AIHA American Industrial Hygiene Association Al IM Association for Information and Image Management AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction AMA Acoustical Material Association AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc ANS American Nuclear Society ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc. APA The Engineered Wood Association API American Petroleum Institute APWA American Public Works Association ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASA Acoustical Society of America ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASNT American Society of Nondestructive Testing ASQ American Society for Quality ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWCI American Wire Cloth Institute AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Preservers Association STANTEC ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 01 42 13 - 1 AWPI American Wood Preservers Institute AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BBC Basic Building Code, Building Officials and Code Administrators International BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association CABO Council of American Building Officials CDA Copper Development Association CEMA Conveyors Equipment Manufacturer's Association CGA Compressed Gas Association CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute CLPCA California Lathing and Plastering Contractors Association CMAA A division/section of the Material Handling Industry of America CPG Compressed Gas Association CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute DCDMA Diamond Core Drilling Manufacturer's Association DHI Door and Hardware Institute DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association El Energy Institute EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EPA Environmental Protection Agency ETL Electrical Test Laboratories FCC Federal Communications Commission FCI Fluid Controls Institute FEMA Federal Emergency Management Association FHWA Federal Highway Administration FM Factory Mutual System FPL Forest Products Laboratory HI Hydronics Institute, Hydraulic Institute HSWA Federal Hazardous and Solid Waste Amendments IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials IBC International Building Code ICBG International Conference of Building Officials ICC International Code Council ICC -ES International Code Council Evaluation Service ICCEC Electrical Code ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association IECC International Energy Conservation Code IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IFC International Fire Code IFGC International Fuel Gas Code IMC International Mechanical Code IME Institute of Makers of Explosives IPC International Plumbing Code, Association Connecting Electronic Industries IRC International Residential Code ISA Instrument Society of Automation ISDI Insulated Steel Door Institute ISEA Industrial Safety Equipment Association ISO International Organization for Standardization ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers ITU -T Telecommunications Standardization Sector of the International Telecommunications Union LPI Lightning Protection Institute LRQA Lloyd's Register Quality Assurance STANTEC ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 01 42 13 - 2 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association MIL Military Standards (DoD) MPTA Mechanical Power Transmission Association MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's NAGE National Association of Corrosion Engineers DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association International NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers NAPF National Association of Pipe Fabricators NBBPVI National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors NCCLS National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association NESC National Electrical Safety Code NETA International Electrical Testing Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association or National Fluid Power Association NISO National Information Standards Organization NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology NLGI National Lubricating Grease Institute NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NSF National Sanitation Foundation NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PPI Plastic Pipe Institute RCRA Resource Conservation and Recovery Act RIS Redwood Inspection Service, a division of the California Redwood Association, CRA RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association RVIA Recreational Vehicle Industry Association RWMA Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association SAE Society of Automotive Engineers SDI Steel Door Institute, Steel Deck Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPFA Steel Plate Fabricator's Association SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSBC Southern Standard Building Code, Southern Building Code Congress SSPC Society for Protective Coating SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction STLE Society of Tribologists and Lubricating Engineers TAPPI Technical Association of the Worldwide Pulp, Paper, and Converting Industry TFI The Fertilizer Institute TIA Telecommunications Industries Association TPI Truss Plate Institute UBC Uniform Building Code UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. USEPA United States of America Environmental Protection Agency WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WDMA National Window and Door Manufacturers Association WEF Water Environment Federation STANTEC ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 01 42 13 - 3 WI Woodwork Institute WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. WWPA Western Wood Products Association PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION STANTEC ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 01 42 13 - 4 • • • SECTION 01 42 19 - REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Titles of Sections and Paragraphs: Titles and subtitles accompanying specification sections and paragraphs are for convenience and reference only and do not form a part of the Specifications. B. Applicable Publications: Whenever in these Specifications references are made to published specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever no date is indicated, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the respective issuing agencies which have been published as of the date that the Contract is advertised for Bids shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set forth in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings will be waived because of any provision of or omission from said standards or requirements. C. Specialists, Assignments: In certain instances, specification text requires (or implies) that specific WORK is to be assigned to specialists or expert entities who must be engaged to perform that WORK. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements over which the CONTRACTOR has no choice or option. These requirements shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with the enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the WORK; also they are not intended to interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of WORK is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of Contract requirements remains with the CONTRACTOR. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. The CONTRACTOR shall construct the WORK in accordance with the Contract Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and specifications. B. References to "Building Code" or "Uniform Building Code" shall mean Uniform Building Code of the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) "Electric Code" or "National Electric Code (NEC)" shall mean the National Electric Code of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). The latest edition of the codes as approved by the Municipal Code and used by the local agency as of the date that the WORK is advertised for Bids shall apply to the WORK herein, including all addenda, modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto. C. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, drawings, and the other Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. All conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the ENGINEER for clarification and direction prior to ordering or providing any materials or furnishing labor. The CONTRACTOR shall bid for the most stringent requirements. D. References to "OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part 1926, Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. STANTEC REFERENCE STANDARDS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 01 42 19 - 1 E. References to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and amendments thereto. F. Applicable Standard Specifications: References in the Contract Documents to "Standard Specifications" or SSPWC shall mean the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. 1.3 REGULATIONS RELATED TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible that all WORK included in the Contract Documents, regardless if indicated or not, shall comply with all EPA, OSHA, RCRA, NFPA, and any other federal, state, and local regulations governing the storage and conveyance of hazardous materials, including petroleum products. B. Where no specific regulations exist and the OWNER has not waived the requirement in writing, chemical, hazardous, and petroleum product piping and storage in underground locations shall be double containment piping and tanks or be installed in separate concrete trenches and vaults with an approved lining that cannot be penetrated by the chemicals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION STANTEC REFERENCE STANDARDS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 01 42 19 - 2 SECTION 01 74 40 - CONCRETE STRUCTURE TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform hydrostatic of all concrete structures designed to contain fluids in accordance with the Contract Documents. • • 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with City Specifications Section IV, paragraph 6.11. B. Include a testing plan and schedule, including methods for water conveyance and water disposal for approval. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. Temporary valves, bulkheads, gauges, compressors, and other air and water control equipment shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Nothing shall be used which would be injurious to the WORK. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PRELIMINARY CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Prior to testing, structures shall be cleaned by thoroughly hosing down all inner surfaces with a high pressure hose and nozzle of sufficient size to deliver a minimum flow of 50 gpm. Water, dirt, and foreign material accumulated in this cleaning operation shall be discharged from the structure or otherwise removed. 3.2 HYDRAULIC TESTING OF STRUCTURE A. General 1. Release of water from structures after testing has been completed shall be as acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2. Testing shall be performed prior to backfilling except where otherwise acceptable to the ENGINEER. Testing shall not be performed sooner than 7 days after forms are removed or test cylinders from the roof concrete have reached 75 percent of the 28 - day strength required by Section 03 31 00 — Cast -In -Place Concrete, whichever occurs later. B. Leakage Test and Repairs: The leakage test shall be performed as follows: 1. The test shall consist of filling the structure with water to the maximum operating water surface. The rate of filling shall not exceed 24 inches of depth per day. 2. Inspect the structure for visible leakage. Locations with any visible leakage, as evidenced by liquid droplets, flowing water, or moist areas on the outside surface which only could have originated from inside the structure, will be considered defective and shall be repaired before testing proceeds. STANTEC CONCRETE STRUCTURE TESTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 01 74 40-1 3. An initial water level reading shall be made. 4. Seven days following the initial reading, a second reading shall be made. The structure shall be considered to have passed the test if water loss during the 7 -day period, as computed from the two water level readings, does not exceed 0.2 percent of the total volume of water in the structure. 5. If intermediate readings or observed leakage indicate that the allowable leakage criterion will be exceeded, the test may be terminated before the end of the 7 -day period and appropriate action taken to correct the problem before commencing a new 7 -day test period. 6. If the structure fails to pass the test, the test may be repeated for up to 3 additional 7 -day test periods. If, at the end of 28 days, the structure still fails to pass the leakage test, the CONTRACTOR shall empty the structure as acceptable to the ENGINEER and shall examine the interior for evidence of any cracking or other conditions that might be causing the leakage. Cracks shall be repaired in accordance with Section 03 01 30 — Concrete Repair and Rehabilitation. Any evidence of leakage shall be repaired. 7. Following these operations, the CONTRACTOR shall again test the structure. The structure will not be accepted until the water loss leakage test is passed and all visible leakage repaired. 3.3 TESTING OF APPURTENANT PIPING A. Piping appurtenant to pneumatic structures shall be tested in accordance with City Specifications, Section 4, paragraph 403-3.1. END OF SECTION STANTEC CONCRETE STRUCTURE TESTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 01 74 40-2 SECTION 02 41 19 - DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall demolish and reconstruct existing civil, landscaping, structural, architectural, mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and instrumentation facilities as indicated, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 COORDINATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully coordinate the WORK in areas where existing facilities are interconnected with new facilities and where existing facilities remain operational. The WORK as indicated is not all-inclusive, and the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to perform the reconstruction indicated plus that which can be reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents as necessary to complete the Project. The Specifications and Drawings identify the major facilities that shall be demolished and reconstructed, but auxiliary utilities such as water, air, chemicals, drainage, lubrication, fluid power, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily shown B. The CONTRACTOR shall note that the Drawings used to indicate demolition and reconstruction are based on record drawings of the existing facilities. These record drawings have been reproduced to show existing conditions and to clarify the scope of WORK as much as possible. Prior to Bidding, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct a comprehensive survey at the Site to verify the correctness and exactness of the Drawings, the scope of WORK, and the extent of auxiliary utilities. • C. While demolition and reconstruction are being performed, the CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate access for the continued operation and maintenance of equipment and treatment processes. The CONTRACTOR shall erect and maintain fences, warning signs, barricades, and other devices around the reconstruction as required for the protection of the CONTRACTOR's employees and the OWNER's personnel at the plant. The CONTRACTOR shall remove such protection when reconstruction activities are complete, or as WORK progresses, or when requested by the ENGINEER. • 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Demolition and reconstruction activities and procedures, including operational sequences, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. The procedures shall provide for safe conduct of the WORK, careful removal and disposition of materials and equipment, protection of existing facilities which are to remain undisturbed, coordination with existing facilities to remain in service, and timely disconnection and reconnection of utility services. The procedures shall include a detailed description and time schedule of the methods and equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of operation. A storage plan for salvaged items shall be included. 1.4 DEMOLITION A. Existing pavement, structures, equipment, piping, valves, ductwork, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and related appurtenances such as anchors, supports, and hardware indicated or required to be demolished as part of the WORK shall be removed and disposed of unless otherwise indicated. Removal of buried structures, utilities, and STANTEC DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 02 65 00 - 1 appurtenances includes the related excavation and backfill as required. Removed items shall be disposed of offsite by the CONTRACTOR. B. Items to be removed include: 1. Submersible pump and apprutances 2. Valve vault and apprutances 3. ARV valve assembly 4. Bypass valve assembly 1.5 SALVAGE A. Items of existing equipment, piping, valves, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and appurtenances indicated to be salvaged shall be removed without any degradation in condition from that prior to removal. Salvaged items shall be stockpiled and protected on the Site at a location chosen by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to properly safeguard the salvaged items against damage and loss during removal and handling. B. Items to be salvaged include: 1. Electrical and control panel 1.6 RELOCATION A. Items of existing equipment, piping, valves, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and appurtenances to be relocated shall be removed without any degradation in condition from that prior to removal. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to properly safeguard the relocated items against damage and loss during removal, handling, storage, and installation in the new location. B. Items to be relocated include: 1. Communications antenna 1.7 ABANDONMENT A. Items of existing equipment, piping, valves, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and appurtenances to be abandoned shall be prepared by the CONTRACTOR as indicated. B. Items to be abandoned include: STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 65 00 - 2 Item Description FRP wetwell Wetwell beyond 5 -ft below grade shall be abandoned in accordance to drawings STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 65 00 - 2 1.8 REHABILITATION A. Existing civil, landscaping, structural, architectural, mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and instrumentation WORK disturbed or damaged by reconstruction activities shall be repaired and rehabilitated as indicated. B. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced with new items to restore items or surfaces to a condition equal to and matching that existing prior to damage. C. In buildings with reconstruction WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall not use any OWNER equipment (e.g., bridge cranes and monorails) unless authorized in advance in writing by the ENGINEER. Such authorization shall be subject to documentation by the CONTRACTOR of the proposed load on the equipment and be subject to OWNER requirements for usage on operating and maintenance needs. Any damage to a crane shall be repaired or replaced to the ENGINEER's satisfaction. 1.9 DISPOSAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the offsite disposal of debris resulting from reconstruction in compliance with local, state, and federal codes and requirements. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate demolition and reconstruction WORK with the OWNER and ENGINEER. Unless otherwise indicated, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the sequence of activities. WORK shall be performed in accordance with applicable safety rules and regulations. B. The CONTRACTOR shall verify that any utilities connected to structures, equipment, and facilities to be removed, relocated, salvaged, replaced, or abandoned are rendered inoperable, replaced with new utilities, or adequately bypassed with temporary utilities before proceeding with demolition and reconstruction. C. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to avoid damage to adjacent facilities and to limit the WORK activities to the extent indicated. If reconstruction beyond the scope indicated is required, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain approval from the ENGINEER prior to commencing. 3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES A. Before beginning any reconstruction, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully survey the existing facilities and examine the Specifications and Drawings to determine the extent of reconstruction and coordination with the WORK. Existing facilities not subject to reconstruction shall be protected and maintained in accordance with Section 01 50 10 - Protection of Existing Facilities. Damaged existing facilities shall be repaired to the previous condition or replaced. B. Persons shall be afforded safe passages around areas of demolition. STANTEC DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 02 65 00 - 3 C. Structural elements shall not be overloaded. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for shoring, bracing, or adding new supports as may be required for adequate structural support as a result of WORK performed under this Section. The CONTRACTOR shall remove temporary protection when the WORK is complete or when so authorized by the ENGINEER. D. The CONTRACTOR shall carefully consider bearing Toads and capacities before placement of equipment and material on Site. In the event of any questions as to whether an area to be loaded has adequate bearing capacity, the CONTRACTOR shall consult with the ENGINEER prior to the placement of such equipment or material. 3.3 DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RELOCATION A. The Contract Documents indicate existing facilities to be demolished, salvaged, and/or relocated. Auxiliary utilities including such services as water, air, chemicals, drainage, lubrication, fluid power, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily indicated. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the scope of the WORK to remove the equipment indicated; coordinate its shutdown, removal, replacement, or relocation; and submit an outage plan. The removal of existing facilities for demolition, salvage, and relocation shall include the following requirements: 1. Equipment supports, including concrete pads, baseplates, mounting bolts, and support hangers, shall be removed. Damage to the existing structure shall be repaired as indicated. 2. Exposed piping including vents, drains, and valves shall be removed. Where exposed piping penetrates existing floors and walls, the piping, including wall thimbles, shall be removed to a minimum depth of 2 -inches. Resultant openings in the structure shall be repaired as indicated. 3. Electrical control panels, junction boxes, motor control centers, and local switches and pushbuttons shall be removed. 4. Exposed electrical conduits and associated wiring shall be removed. Resultant openings in structures shall be repaired as indicated. STANTEC DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 02 65 00 - 4 5. Connections to embedded electrical conduits shall be removed a minimum of 2 - inches inside the finished surface of the existing structure. Wiring shall be removed and the resulting openings shall be repaired as indicated. 6. Associated instrumentation devices shall be removed. 7. Auxiliary utility support systems shall be removed. 8. The area shall be thoroughly cleaned such that little or no evidence of the previous equipment installation will remain. 9. Asphalt and concrete pavement, curbs, and gutters shall be removed as necessary to perform reconstruction. The limits of removal shall be sawcut. When the required improvements have been constructed, new asphalt and concrete pavement, curbs, and gutters shall be placed to match the original unless otherwise indicated. 10. Footings, foundation walls, below -grade construction and concrete slabs on grade shall be demolished and removed to a depth which will not interfere with new construction, but not less than 36 -inches below existing ground surface or future ground surface, whichever is lower. 11. Below -grade areas and voids resulting from demolition of structures shall be completely filled. Fill and compaction shall be in accordance with Section 31 30 00 - Earthwork. After fill and compaction, surfaces shall be graded to meet adjacent contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures, or as indicated. 12. When existing pipe is removed, the CONTRACTOR shall plug the resulting open ends whether or not so indicated. Where removed piping is exposed, the remaining piping shall be blind -flanged or fitted with a removable cap or plug. 13. When existing piping is removed from existing structures, the CONTRACTOR shall fill resulting openings in the structures and repair any damage such that the finished rehabilitated structure shall appear as a new homogeneous unit with little or no indication of where the new and old materials join. The openings in water -bearing structures shall be filled with non -shrink grout to be watertight and reinforced as required or indicated. In locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to view, the grout shall be recessed approximately 1/2 -inch and the recessed area filled with cement mortar grout. 14. Electrical reconstruction shall be conducted by the CONTRACTOR in a safe and proper manner to avoid injury from electrical shock to the OWNER's and CONTRACTOR's personnel. Electrical equipment to be shut off for a period of time shall be tagged, locked out, and sealed with a crimped wire and lead seal and made inoperable. At no time shall electrical wiring or connections which are energized or could become energized be accessible to CONTRACTOR, OWNER, or other personnel without suitable protection or warning signs. STANTEC DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 02 65 00 - 5 B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform a functional test of existing equipment that is relocated and reinstalled to ensure the equipment functions in the manner documented during the initial inspection. The CONTRACTOR shall inform the ENGINEER in writing a minimum of 5 Days prior to the functional testing in order for the OWNER and ENGINEER to witness • the test. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the relocated equipment does not function in a satisfactory manner, the CONTRACTOR shall make repairs and modifications necessary to restore the equipment to its original operating condition at no additional cost to the OWNER. 3.4 ABANDONMENT A. Existing facilities to be abandoned shall be prepared as indicated. Where existing buried piping is to be abandoned, the CONTRACTOR shall remove the abandoned pipe for a distance of 5 -feet from any connecting structures. Openings at the existing structures shall be repaired. The remaining pipe shall be capped at both ends prior to backfill. Buried piping, 12 -inches diameter or greater shall be completely sand -filled prior to closure of the piping ends. 3.5 REHABILITATION A. Certain areas of existing structures, piping, conduits, and the like will be affected by WORK necessary to complete modifications under this Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to rehabilitate those areas affected by its construction activities. B. Where new rectangular openings are to be installed in concrete or concrete masonry walls or floors, the CONTRACTOR shall score the edges of each opening (both sides of wall or floor slab) by saw -cutting clean straight lines to a minimum depth of 1 -inch and then chipping out the concrete. Alternately, the sides of the opening (not the corners) may be formed by saw cutting completely through the slab or wall. Saw cuts deeper than 1 -inch (or the depth of cover over existing reinforcing steel, whichever is less) shall not be allowed to extend beyond the limits of the opening. Corners shall be made square and true by a combination of core drilling and chipping or grinding. Necessary precautions shall be taken during removal of concrete to prevent debris from falling into or entering adjacent tanks in service or from damaging adjacent equipment or piping. Saw cuts allowed to extend beyond the opening shall be repaired by filling with non -shrink grout. The concrete around any exposed reinforcement steel shall be chipped back and exposed reinforcement steel cut a minimum of 2 -inches from the finished face of the new opening and be painted with epoxy paint. The inside face of the new opening shall be grouted with an epoxy cement grout to fill any voids and cover the exposed aggregate and shall be trowel -finished to provide a plumb and square opening. C. Where new piping is installed in existing structures, the CONTRACTOR shall accurately position core -drilled openings in the concrete as indicated or otherwise required. Openings shall be of sufficient size to permit a final alignment of pipelines and fittings without deflection of any part and to allow adequate space for satisfactory packing where pipe passes through the wall to provide watertightness around openings so formed. The boxes or cores shall be provided with continuous keyways to hold the filling material in place, and they shall have a slight flare to facilitate grouting and the escape of entrained air during grouting. Before placing the non -shrink grout, concrete surfaces shall be sandblasted, thoroughly cleaned of sand and any other foreign matter, and coated with epoxy bonding compound. STANTEC DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 02 65 00 - 6 • • D. Pipes, castings, or conduits shall be grouted in place by pouring in grout under a head of at least 4 -inches. The grout shall be poured or rammed or vibrated into place to fill completely the space between the pipes, castings, or conduits, and the sides of the openings so as to obtain the same watertightness as through the wall itself. The grouted casings shall then be water cured. E. In locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to view, the non -shrink grout shall be recessed approximately 1/2 -inch and the recessed area filled with cement mortar grout. F. When new piping is to be connected to existing piping, the existing piping shall be cut square and ends properly prepared for the connection. Any damage to the lining and coating of the existing piping shall be repaired. Dielectric insulating joints shall be installed at interconnections between new and existing piping. G. Where existing equipment, piping, and supports, electrical panels and devices, conduits, and associated appurtenances are removed, the CONTRACTOR shall rehabilitate the affected area such that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains. Openings in concrete floors, walls, and ceilings from piping, conduit, and fastener penetrations shall be filled with non -shrink grout and finished to match the adjacent area. Concrete pads, bases associated with equipment, supports, and appurtenances shall be removed by chipping away concrete and cutting any exposed reinforced steel and anchor bolts a minimum of 2 -inches below finished grade and be painted with epoxy paint. The area of concrete to be rehabilitated shall be scored by saw cutting clean, straight lines to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches, and concrete within the scored lines removed to a depth of 1-1/2 inches (or the depth of cover over reinforcing steel, whichever is less). The area within the scored lines shall be patched with non -shrink grout to match the adjacent grade and finish. Abandoned connections to piping and conduits shall be terminated with blind flanges, caps, and plugs suited for the material, type, and service of the pipe or conduit. H. Existing reinforcement to remain in place shall be protected, cleaned, and extended into new concrete. Existing reinforcement not to be retained shall be cut-off as follows: 1. Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, reinforcement shall be cut-off flush with the concrete surface at the removal line. 2. Where the concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, the reinforcement shall be cut back 2 -inches below the finished concrete surface, the ends painted with epoxy paint and the remaining holes patched with a cement mortar grout. I. Where existing handrailing is removed, post embedments and anchors shall be removed and post holes shall be filled with non -shrink grout flush to the floor surface. At the point of continuation of existing handrailing, a new post with rail connections matching the existing handrailing system shall be installed. New posts in existing concrete floors shall be installed in core -drilled socket holes and the annular space between the post and hole filled with non -shrink grout. J. Where reconstruction activities damage the painting and coating of adjacent or nearby facilities, the damaged areas shall be surface prepared and coated in accordance with Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating to match the original painting and coating with a compatible system. Surfaces of equipment items that are to be relocated shall be prepared and be coated in accordance with Section 09 96 00 — Protective Coating. STANTEC DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 02 65 00 - 7 3.6 DISPOSAL A. Demolition and removal of debris shall minimize interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities that shall not be closed or obstructed without permission from the OWNER. Alternate routes shall be provided around closed or obstructed traffic ways. B. Site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from reconstruction operations shall be legally removed and disposed of. Structures and equipment to be demolished shall be cleaned prior to demolition and the wash water properly disposed of. No trace of these structures shall remain prior to placing of backfill in the areas from which structures were removed. C. Refuse, debris, and waste materials resulting from demolition and clearing operations shall not be burned. 3.7 OCCUPANCY AND POLLUTION CONTROL A. Water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, chutes, and other suitable methods shall be used to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in the area. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with government regulations pertaining to environmental protection. B. Water shall not be used if it creates hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice, flooding, or pollution. 3.8 CLEANING A. During and upon completion of WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove tools and equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust and shall leave areas affected by WORK in a clean, approved condition. B. Adjacent structures shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, and debris caused by reconstruction, as requested by the ENGINEER or directed by governing authorities, and adjacent areas shall be returned to condition existing prior to start of WORK. END OF SECTION STANTEC DEMOLITION AND RECONSTRUCTION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB PAGE 02 65 00 - 8 SECTION 03 01 30 - CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Remove, repair, or rehabilitate new concrete members and surfaces as indicated. B. Provide all materials and equipment necessary to accomplish the WORK. C. Repair damage to concrete and concrete surfaces which results from the removal of embedded items, from construction activities, or which existed previously in structures indicated to be repaired. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS ACI 201.1R-08 Guide for Making a Condition Survey of Concrete in Service ACI 546R-14 Concrete Repair Guide 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings • 1. Submit detailed drawings showing proposed methods for supporting existing structures, equipment, and piping during demolition and repair activities. • C. Concrete Repair Products and Procedures 1. Submit a comprehensive plan for each repair method indicated within this Section, the plan shall including the following: a. Manufacturer's literature containing instructions and recommendations on the mixing, handling, placement, curing, and appropriate uses for each product. b. Curing products and procedures for each repair method for which curing is recommended by the manufacturer. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONCRETE RESTORATION FIRMS A. The concrete restoration WORK shall be performed by an experienced firm customarily engaged in performing similar repair work on cast -in-place concrete structures. B. The restoration firm shall have completed at least 5 similar projects in the last 5 years. C. The restoration firm shall be certified by the manufacturer of the repair materials. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Tests of Cement Based Mortars and Grouts STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 1 1. The ENGINEER may take compression test specimens during construction from the first placement of each type of mortar or grout, and at intervals thereafter as selected by the ENGINEER in order to ensure continued compliance with the indicated requirements. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall assist the ENGINEER in obtaining specimens for testing. 3. The compression tests and fabrication of specimens for repair mortar and non - shrink grout will be performed as specified in ASTM C 109. 4. A set of 5 specimens will be made for testing at 7 days, 28 days, and additional time periods as appropriate. 5. Any material, already placed, which fails to meet the indicated performance requirements is subject to removal and replacement as part of the WORK. 6. The cost of laboratory tests on mortar and grout will be paid by the OWNER, but the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any additional tests and investigation on the WORK that does not meet the indicated requirements. 7. The CONTRACTOR shall supply all necessary materials for fabricating the test specimens. B. Repair Concrete: Repair concrete shall be tested as required in Section 03 31 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. C. Epoxy Grout: Epoxy grout shall be tested as required in Section 03 60 00 — Grouting. D. Construction Tolerances: Construction tolerances shall comply with the requirements of Section 03 31 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete, except as otherwise indicated. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All products and materials in contact with potable water shall be certified as being in conformance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61 — Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects. 2.2 REPAIR MORTAR A. Provide repair mortar as a pre-packaged, 2 -component, polymer -modified, cementious, non -sag mortar, specifically formulated for the repair of surface defects. B. Provide the mortar with a penetrating corrosion inhibitor. C. Repair mortar shall have the following properties: Physical Property Compressive Strength (min.) at 7 days Value 6000 psi ASTM Standard C-109 STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 2 at 28 days 7000 psi Bond Strength (min.) at 28 days 2200 psi C-882 (modified) Freeze/Thaw resistance (min.) 300 cycles 98 percent C-666 D. Provide a minimum repair thickness of 1/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated. E. Repair Mortar shall be SikaTop 123 Plus, by Sika Corporation, or equal. 2.3 NON -SHRINK GROUT A. Provide non -shrink grout conforming to the requirements of Section 03 60 00 — Grouting. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement 1. Use Type II Portland cement unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where repairs are to be made on wall surfaces open to view and above normal water surface elevations, blend white Portland cement with the Type II cement as needed in order to match the color of the adjacent existing concrete surface. B. Structural Repair Grout 1. Where required, provide structural repair grout meeting the requirements of Section 03 60 00 — Grouting. 2. Provide a minimum repair thickness of 3 inches. C. Cement Grout 1. Provide cement grout that meets the requirements of Section 03 60 00 — Grouting. 2. Provide a minimum repair thickness of one inch. D. Miscellaneous Materials: For concrete construction materials not covered specifically in this Section, conform to the requirements of Section 03 31 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. 2.5 AGGREGATE A. Obtain the written permission of the manufacturer and ENGINEER before using aggregate to extend repair mortar and grout products. B. If allowed and unless otherwise indicated, provide aggregate consisting of 3/8 -inch clean, washed gravel or crushed stone as required in Section 03 31 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 3 2.6 BONDING AGENT AND ANTI -CORROSION COATING A. Provide a bonding agent that is a solvent -free, moisture -tolerant, epoxy -modified, cementitious product, specifically formulated as a bonding agent and anti -corrosion coating. B. Bonding Agent shall be Armatec 110 EpoCem, by Sika Corporation, or equal. 2.7 EPDXY GROUT A. Provide an epoxy grout conforming to the requirements of Section 03 60 00 — Grouting. 2.8 EPDXY RESIN A. Use epoxy resin for structural crack repair. B. For crack injection, provide a 2 -component, moisture -tolerant, low -viscosity, high- strength epoxy resin adhesive that is specially formulated for that usage. C. Provide a minimum bond strength of 2900 psi when tested per ASTM C 882 at 14 days, moist cured. D. Epoxy Resin shall be Sikadur 35, Hi -Mod LV, by Sika Corporation, KEMKO 068 LoVis IR, by ChemCo Systems, Inc., or equal. 2.9 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Waterproofing 1. Provide a 2 -component, polymer -modified, cementitious waterproofing and protective slurry mortar for concrete. 2. Apply the material in 2 coats, with a coverage of 40 sq ft/gal/coat. 3. Waterproofing shall be Sika Top Seal 107, by Sika Corporation, or equal. 2.10 FORMWORK A. Where needed, provide formwork that meets the requirements of Section 03 11 00 — Concrete Formwork. 2.11 REINFORCEMENT STEEL A. Where required, provide reinforcing steel that meets the requirements of Section 03 21 00 — Reinforcement Steel. 2.12 POLYURETHANE SEALANT A. Provide a 2 -part polyurethane, gun -grade sealant. B. Polyurethane Sealant shall be Sikaflex — 2C, by Sika Corporation, or equal. 2.13 POLYURETHANE CHEMICAL GROUT A. Use polyurethane chemical grout for non-structural crack repair. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 4 B. Polyurethane Chemical Grout shall be SikaFix HH, by Sika Corporation, Flex LV PURe, by WR Grace/De Neef, Flex SLV PURe, by WR Grace/De Neef, or equal. 2.14 HYDROPHILIC WATERSTOP A. Provide hydrophilic waterstop of the type which expands in the presence of water to form a watertight joint seal without damaging the concrete in which it is cast. B. Provide hydrophilic waterstop that is bentonite -free, and manufactured from chloroprene rubber and modified chloroprene rubber with hydrophilic properties. C. Hydrophilic Waterstop shall be Hydrotite RSS-040 P, by Greenstreak Group, Inc., KM 4mm String, by Adeka Ultra Seal, or equal. 2.15 HIGH STRENGTH EPDXY GEL A. High -Strength Epoxy Gel for crack surface sealing shall be Denepox Rapidgel, by WR Grace/De Neef, or equal. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Repairs 1. Repair techniques will be reviewed during the pre -construction meeting between the CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and OWNER. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall be familiar with the cause of deteriorated concrete and shall choose the right equipment, repair materials and techniques to be used for each particular repair. 3. Choose repair materials to match the adjacent concrete surface in color and texture. 4. Apply repair materials in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, including temperature and moisture requirements throughout application and curing. 5. Protect adjacent portions of the structure, including all valves, pipes, mechanical equipment, and filter media from debris generated by repair activities. 6. For portions of the structure that are not identified to be repaired, maintain in their original condition. B. Structural Stability 1. Use caution not to weaken the structural capacity of a beam, column, wall, slab, walkway, or other concrete member during concrete removal. 2. For severely deteriorated concrete members, consult with the ENGINEER before removing a major portion of any structural member. 3. Shoring may be required in order to support the structure and to protect workers. C. Provide off-site disposal of debris generated as a result of repair procedures. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 5 D. Provide concrete construction procedures not specifically addressed in this Section in accordance with the requirements of Section 03 31 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3.2 REPAIR SEQUENCING A. Unless otherwise indicated, perform concrete repairs in the following sequence, with no activity in an area being started until previous activities in that area have been completed, including curing, cleanup, and the like: 1. removal of equipment, miscellaneous metals, and other surface features that would interfere with the repair; 2. removal of concrete sections which require complete replacement; 3. surface preparation hydroblasting over the entire area to be repaired; 4. embedded metal repair; 5. crack repair; 6. spalled and delaminated concrete repair; 7. scaled concrete; 8. pop -out repair, and repair of other surface damage, deterioration, or defects; 9. patching of holes in concrete; 10. replacement of concrete sections which require complete replacement; 11. new construction; and 12. application of protective coatings. B. For areas which require combinations of spalled and delaminated concrete repair, scaled concrete, and pop -out repair, perform these repairs at the same time. C. Limit the size of the repair area in order to permit the repairs to be performed together, without sacrificing the quality of the individual repairs. 3.3 EMBEDDED METAL REPAIR A. Unless otherwise indicated, repair anchor bolts and other embedded metal, except rebar, that are exposed at the concrete surface and are showing signs of corrosion, as follows: 1. Cut off or otherwise remove corroded metal fastened at the surface; 2. Burn back embedded metals to a depth of at least 1.5 inches beyond the surface of sound concrete; 3. Chip away unsound concrete around the embedded metal. 4. Apply epoxy grout to the repair area until level with the surface of the surrounding sound concrete. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 6 • B. Unless otherwise indicated, repair embedded rebar that is exposed at the concrete surface following the procedures outlined in the appropriate concrete repair subsection, below. 3.4 CRACK REPAIR A. Structural Cracks - Structural Cracks are defined as follows: 1. All cracks where reinforcing steel is passing across the crack, including erratic cracks, and cracks at construction joints. 2. Cracks identified by the ENGINEER as structural cracks. 3. Repair structural cracks with epoxy resin. B. Non Structural Cracks - Non Structural Cracks are defined as follows: 1. Cracks occurring at flexible joints, contraction joints or expansion joints. 2. Cracks identified by the ENGINEER as non structural cracks. 3. Repair non-structural cracks with polyurethane chemical grout. C. Efflorescence 1. Prior to the crack repair, clean efflorescence from the cracks and the surrounding area. III2. Clean the efflorescence by light hydro -blasting or scrubbing. • D. Pressure Injection: Pressure Injection to be performed prior to leak testing and roof membrane installation. 1. General a. The indicated repair materials have been selected to minimize the loss of material during the injection process. The areas selected for crack repair are to be identified by the Contractor, Engineer or Construction Manager and be determined prior to leak tests and roof membrane installation. The injection of cracks may also be required as a result of the leak test. b. In order to avoid excessive loss of injected material at the lower exposed portions of the cracks, space the injection ports a distance no greater than the thickness of the wall being repaired. 2. Open through thickness structural cracks are to be repaired to deliver a water tight hydraulic structure passing the specified leakage test. All 3 foot long minimum or greater through thickness cracks greater than a minimum 15 mil thickness in the walls are to be injected unless they do not accept grout. All 2 foot long minimum through thickness cracks greater than 10 mil thickness in the foundation, water conduits, floor slabs and roof are to be injected unless they do not accept grout. Perform structural crack repairs by pressure injection in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, and in accordance with the following basic procedure: STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 7 a. Remove unsound and foreign materials from the crack in a manner that does not trap debris in the crack and prevent the flow of repair materials. b. Remove any contamination by flushing with water or solvent, allowing adequate time for air -drying or blow out the solvent with compressed air. For potable water applications, any solvents must be fully flushed from the joint unless NSF/ANSI Standard 61 approved. c. Install the injection ports in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. d. Sealing 1) Seal the surface in order to keep the pressure injecting materials from leaking out before it has set or gelled. 2) Seal a surface by brushing an epoxy over the surface of the crack and allowing it to harden, or use high injection pressures to cut-out the cracks in a 'V' shape, fill with an epoxy, and strike off flush with the surface. 3) Surface patching or sealant shall be performed where needed to provide for complete penetration of the injected polyurethane grout and to prevent wastage. Seal surface of crack with fast setting hydraulic cement or high strength epoxy gel. The floor surface along the cracks shall be cleaned and all wasted grout and surface seal material shall be completely removed from the concrete surface following completion of the repair work e. Inject the repair materials, with consideration of the following items: 1) Carefully select the pressure of the hydraulic pump or other device, because too much pressure can extend the existing cracks and cause more damage. 2) For vertical cracks, start by pumping material into the entry port at the lowest elevation until the material level reaches the entry port above, then cap the lower injection port and repeat the process at successively higher ports until the crack has been completely filled. 3) For horizontal cracks, start at one end of the crack and work to the other end, filling the crack until the pressure can be maintained. 4) For very fine cracks, start the injection of repair material at the widest end and proceed toward the thinner end, using low -viscosity repair material. f. Cleanup 1) Remove the surface seal by grinding or other appropriate means. 2) Coat fittings and holes at injection ports with an epoxy patching compound. 3) If crack repairs are part of repair for surface defects, painting with epoxy is not necessary and surface preparation may be started after crack repairs have been completed. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 8 3. Open through thickness non-structural cracks are to be repaired to deliver a water tight hydraulic structure passing the specified leakage test. Open through thickness cracks with lengths of at least 3 feet on each side of the wall and roof, at least 2 feet of length on the foundation or floor slab are to be injected unless they do not accept grout. All 3 foot long minimum or greater through thickness cracks greater than a minimum 15 mil thickness in the walls are to be injected unless they do not accept grout. All 2 foot long through thickness cracks greater than 10 mil thickness in the floors and roof are to be injected unless they do not accept grout. Perform non- structural crack repairs in accordance with the manufacturer's directions, and in accordance with the following basic procedure: a. Remove unsound and foreign materials from the crack in a manner that does not trap debris in the crack and prevent the flow of repair materials. b. Remove contamination by flushing with water or solvent, allowing adequate time for air -drying or blow out the solvent with compressed air. Any solvents must be fully flushed from the joint unless NSF/ANSI Standard 61 approved. c. Install the injection ports in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. d. Moisture 1) For non-structural cracks, moisture must be present for the chemical grout to react. 2) Prior to injecting the repair materials, inject the crack with a small amount of water in order to completely moisten the crack. e. Inject the repair materials, with consideration of the following items: 1) Carefully select the pressure of the hydraulic pump or other device, because too much pressure can extend the existing cracks and cause more damage. 2) For vertical cracks, start by pumping material into the entry port at the lowest elevation until the material level reaches the entry port above, cap the lower injection port and repeat the process at successively higher ports until the crack has been completely filled, and then, starting again at the lowest port, re-inject into all ports in order to ensure that all voids are properly sealed off. 3) For horizontal cracks, start at one end of the crack and work to the other end, filling the crack until the pressure can be maintained. 4) For very fine cracks, start the injection of repair material at the widest end and proceed toward the thinner end. f. Cleanup 1) Remove excess surface material by grinding or other appropriate means. 2) Coat fittings and holes at injection ports with an epoxy patching compound. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 9 3) If crack repairs are part of repair for surface defects, painting with epoxy is not necessary and surface preparation may be started after crack repairs have been completed. 3.5 SPALLED AND DELAMINATED CONCRETE REPAIR A. Repair spalls and delaminated concrete using repair mortar. B. Surface Preparation 1. Remove all delaminated concrete and all unsound concrete beyond the spalled or delaminated area. 2. Boundaries a. Determine the boundaries of the patch by sawcuts to a depth of at least 1/4 inch up to one inch deep. b. Refer to the Structural Drawings for sawcut locations. c. Where the sawcut locations are not shown on the Drawings, the boundaries shall be layouts designed to reduce boundary edge length. d. Avoid excessive or complex edge conditions. 3. Sawcuts a. Perform sawcuts perpendicular to the surface or slightly undercut. b. Construct sawcuts in maximum 1/4 -inch increments. c. After each incremental cut, inspect the cut surface in order to ensure that the existing reinforcement has not been cut. d. If at any depth the reinforcement becomes exposed, terminate the sawcut and notify the ENGINEER. 4. Chip away concrete within the repair area to a depth sufficient to expose sound concrete over the entire repair area, or to a minimum depth required by repair mortar, whichever is greater. 5. Base the selection of partial depth concrete removal equipment on the size of repair area, depth of concrete to be removed, and the location of the deteriorated concrete such as wall, slab -on -grade, underside or top of elevated slab. 6. Removal a. The maximum allowable pneumatic chipping hammer shall be a 30 -Ib class hammer. b. Hydroblast removal shall use a maximum pressure of 40,000 psig. c. Sand blasting is not permitted. d. Hydroblast concrete removal is recommended for Targe area of surface defects. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 10 e. Remove water blasting debris daily in order to prevent it from setting up. f. If a chipping hammer is used, ensure that the existing reinforcement is not damaged during the concrete removal operations. g. Remove protrusions, such as mortar spatter or fins, by grinding or by striking with a hammer or other tool. 7. Reinforcement a. Remove concrete from around reinforcement when the rebar is rusted, more than half the rebar perimeter is already exposed, the concrete bond around the rebar is broken, or if the concrete is unsound or honey -combed. b. Remove concrete in order to provide a clear space of minimum one inch on all sides of the reinforcement, such that the rebar can be cleaned and the repair material will completely surround the rebar. c. Clean exposed reinforcement by water blasting or wire brushing. d. After fully exposing and cleaning the reinforcement, check for steel deterioration, and if the cross-sectional area of the steel has been reduced by more than 10 percent, whether by deterioration, surface preparation, or a combination of both, provide additional reinforcement. e. Consult with the ENGINEER before adding or replacing rebar. C. Repairing Surface Defects 1. Clean the concrete surface after removing unsound concrete, repairing cracks, and cleaning the reinforcement. 2. Ensure that the concrete surface and reinforcement are free of form -release agents, curing compounds, surface hardeners, oils, grease, food, chemicals, and other contaminants. 3. Remove dust, including new dust generated by surface preparation or scarifying. 4. Prior to application of the bonding agent, apply anti -corrosion coating to exposed rebar in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, allow the coating to dry, reapply the coating, and allow to dry again. 5. Prior to applying the repair mortar, apply bonding agent in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Repair Mortar a. Apply repair mortar in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b. The thickness of each lift of repair mortar shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, with the minimum thickness being not less than 1/4 inch. III7. Fully consolidate the repair mortar, working the material into the substrate to completely fill all pores and voids in the area to be filled. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 11 8. Bring the repair surface into alignment with the adjacent existing surfaces in order to provide a uniform, even surface. 9. Match the repair surface to adjacent existing surfaces in texture by applying necessary coatings and surface treatments. 10. Float -finish the repaired surface using wood or sponge floats. 11. For repaired surfaces to receive a protective coating, brush -finish the surface in order to produce a roughened substrate for the coating. 12. Minimum and maximum ambient and surface temperatures shall be as recommended by repair material manufacturer. D. Curing 1. Curing of repair mortar to receive waterproofing shall be as follows: a. Keep the mortar continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum period of at least 7 consecutive days, beginning immediately after the mortar has reached final set; b. Weight the curing blankets or otherwise held them in place in order to prevent being dislodged by wind or other causes, and to be substantially in contact with the concrete surface; c. Ensure that edges are continuously held in place; and, d. Keep the curing blankets and concrete continuously wet by the use of sprinklers or other means, both during and after normal working hours. 2. If the repair mortar is not to receive waterproofing, provide curing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations except that the minimum cure period shall be 7 days. 3. During cold weather, maintain the repair material temperature above 50 degrees F for at least 3 days after placement. 3.6 SCALED CONCRETE REPAIR A. Repair scaling and pop -outs using repair mortar. B. Surface Preparation 1. Prior to repair, prepare the surface in accordance with the repair mortar manufacturer's recommendations with the following minimum requirement. 2. Remove unsound concrete from surfaces by high-pressure water blasting, using a minimum pressure of 10,000 psigg and maximum pressure of 40,000 psigg. 3. Clean exposed reinforcement by water blasting or wire brushing. C. Repairing Surface Defects STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 12 1. Clean the concrete surface after removing unsound concrete, repairing cracks, and cleaning reinforcement. 2. Ensure that the concrete surface and reinforcement are free of form -release agents, curing compounds, surface hardeners, oils, grease, food, chemicals, and other contaminants. 3. Remove dust, including new dust generated by surface preparation or scarifying. 4. Prior to application of the bonding agent, apply anti -corrosion coating to exposed rebar in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, allow the coating to dry, reapply the coating, and allow to dry again. 5. Prior to applying the repair mortar, apply bonding agent in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 6. Apply repair mortar in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using a minimum repair material thickness of 1/4 inch. 7. Fully consolidate the repair material, working the material into the substrate to completely fill all pores and voids in the area to be filled. 8. Bring the repair surface into alignment with the adjacent existing surfaces in order to provide a uniform, even surface. 9. Match the repair surface to adjacent existing surfaces in texture by applying necessary coatings and surface treatments. 10. Float -finish the repaired surface using wood or sponge floats. D. Provide strip joint in newly placed mortar at the location of repaired cracks. E. Curing 1. Curing of repair mortar to receive waterproofing shall be as follows: a. Keep the mortar continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum period of at least 7 consecutive days, beginning immediately after the mortar has reached final set; b. Weight the curing blankets or otherwise held them in place in order to prevent being dislodged by wind or other causes, and to be substantially in contact with the concrete surface; c. Ensure that edges are continuously held in place; and, d. Keep the curing blankets and concrete continuously wet by the use of sprinklers or other means, both during and after normal working hours. 2. If the repair mortar is not to receive waterproofing, provide curing in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations except that the minimum cure period shall be 7 days. III3. During cold weather, maintain the repair material temperature above 50 degrees F for at least 3 days after placement. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 13 3.7 POP -OUT REPAIR, AND REPAIR OF OTHER SURFACE DAMAGE, DETERIORATION, OR DEFECTS A. Repair pop -outs and other surface damage, deterioration, and defects which are 1/4 inch deep or shallower, using the procedures described under "SCALED CONCRETE REPAIR," above. B. Repair other pop -outs and surface damage, deterioration, and defects using the procedures described under "SPALLED AND DELAMINATED CONCRETE REPAIR," above. 3.8 REPLACEMENT OF CONCRETE SECTIONS WHICH REQUIRE COMPLETE REPLACEMENT A. Refer to the Structural Drawings for locations where the level of concrete deterioration is such that complete removal and replacement of the deteriorated section is required. B. At these locations, remove the deteriorated concrete in accordance with the details on the Structural Drawings and the requirements of this Section. C. Limits 1. The limits of concrete removal shall be as indicated on the Structural Drawings. 2. If no limits of removal are indicated, determine the limits in accordance with the procedures described under "Boundaries — Spalled and Delaminated Concrete Repair." D. Provide sawcuts in accordance with the procedures described under "Sawcuts — Spalled and Deliminated Concrete Repair." E. After removal of the concrete, prepare the area and provide repair concrete in accordance with the details on the Structural Drawings and the requirements of this Section. F. Unless otherwise indicated, match the finished cross-section of the repaired concrete to the cross-section of the adjacent undamaged concrete. 3.9 PATCHING OF HOLES IN CONCRETE A. General 1. For the purposes of this Section, holes are defined as penetrations completely through the concrete member and with interior surfaces approximately perpendicular to the surface of the existing member. 2. Interior surface areas which are inclined and do not meet this criteria shall be chipped as needed to meet this requirement. 3. The perimeter of holes at the surface shall form a regular shape composed of curved or straight line segments. 4. Provide the minimum depth of placement for the material used; score the existing concrete by sawcutting, and chip as needed to meet this requirement. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 14 5. Roughen the interior surface of holes less than 12 inches in diameter to a minimum of 0.125 -inch amplitude, and roughen larger holes to a minimum of 0.25 -inch amplitude. 6. At holes, coat the existing surface to be repaired with a bonding agent. B. Patching Small Holes: For holes which are less than 12 inches in their least dimension and extend completely through concrete members, fill with non -shrink grout. C. Patching Large Holes 1. Fill holes which are larger than 12 inches in their least dimension with structural repair grout. 2. Provide Targe holes which are normally in contact with water or soil with hydrophilic waterstop placed in a groove. 3. Alternatively, bond the hydrophilic waterstop to the surface using an epoxy grout which completely fills all voids and irregularities beneath the waterstop material. 4. Install the waterstop in accordance with the requirements of Section 03 32 00 — Joints in Concrete. 5. Provide reinforcing steel in layers matching existing reinforcement location, size, spacing and cover requirements unless directed otherwise by the ENGINEER. 6. In locations where NSF/ANSI Standard 61 approval is required by the authority having jurisdiction, use one of the following procedures: a. Provide Product Data showing the proposed structural repair grout is NSF/ANSI Standard 61 approved. b. Complete the repair with structural repair grout. Coat all surfaces required to have NSF/ANSI Standard 61 approval completely with Sikadur 31, Tyfo S, or equal. c. Place the structural repair grout to within 1 '/2" of the finished surface of the repair. Complete the remainder of the repair with SikaTop123 Plus, or equal. 3.10 PATCHING OF LINED HOLES A. General 1. This WORK applies to those openings which have embedded material over all or a portion of their inside edge. 2. The requirements for repairing holes in concrete, as indicated above, apply as modified herein. 3. The ENGINEER will determine whether the embedded material is allowed to remain. B. Where embedded material is allowed to remain, trim it back a minimum of 2 inches from the concrete surface. STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 15 C. Roughen or abrade the embedded material in order to promote good bonding to the repair material. D. Remove substances that interfere with good bonding. E. Completely remove embedded items that are not securely and permanently anchored into the concrete. F. Completely remove embedded items which are larger than 12 inches in their least dimension, unless they are composed of a metal to which reinforcing steel can be welded; where reinforcement is required, weld it to the embedded metal. G. The following requirements shall apply to concrete members which are in contact with water or soil: 1. Using epoxy grout, fill lined openings which are less than 4 inches in their least dimension; 2. Using an epoxy bonding agent, coat lined openings which are greater than 4 inches but Tess than 12 inches in their least dimension, prior to being filled with non -shrink grout. 3. Using an epoxy bonding agent, coat lined openings which are greater than 12 inches in their least dimension, and provide a hydrophilic waterstop bonded to the interior of the opening with epoxy adhesive, prior to being filled with approved repair material. 3.11 APPLICATION OF PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Protective coating shall be submitted, furnished, and installed in accordance with Specification Section 09 96 00 — Protective Coatings. END OF SECTION STANTEC CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 01 30 - 16 • • • SECTION 03 11 00 - CONCRETE FORMING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish concrete formwork, bracing, shoring, and supports for cast -in-place concrete and shall design and construct falsework, all in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Contractor Submittals. B. Manufacturer's information demonstrating compliance with requirements for the following: 1. Form ties and related accessories, including taper tie plugs, if taper ties are used. 2. Form gaskets. 3. Form release agent, including NSF certification if not using mineral oil. 4. Manufacturer's design information on formwork, form materials, and locations for use. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tolerances: The variation from required lines or grade shall not exceed 1/4 -inch in 10 - feet, non -cumulative, and there shall be no offsets or visible waviness in the finished surface. Other tolerances shall be within the tolerances of ACI 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by the ENGINEER, lumber brought on the Site for use as forms, shoring, or bracing shall be new material. Forms shall be smooth surface forms and shall be of the following materials: Walls Steel, fiberglass, or plywood panel Columns Steel, plywood or fiberglass Roof and floor Plywood All other WORK Steel panels, fiberglass, plywood or tongue and groove lumber B. Form materials that may remain or leave residues on or in the concrete shall be certified as compliant with NSF Standard 61 — Drinking Water System Components. STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 CONCRETE FORMING PAGE 03 11 00 - 1 C. Water-based form release agent shall be Clean Strip J1EF by Dayton Superior, or equal. 2.2 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS A. Materials for concrete forms, formwork, and falsework shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, construction grade or better, in conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard 2. Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded, exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork, shall conform to the requirements of PS 1 — Construction and Industrial Plywood, for Concrete Forms, Class 1, and shall be edge sealed. 3. Form materials shall be metal, wood, plywood, or other material that will not adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the shape, form, line, and grade indicated. Metal forms shall accomplish such results. Wood forms for surfaces to be painted shall be Medium Density Overlaid plywood, MDO Ext. Grade. 4. Steel leave in place forms shall not be used. B. Unless otherwise indicated, exterior corners in concrete members shall be provided with 3/4 -inch chamfers or be tooled to 1/2 -inch radius. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have fillets unless otherwise indicated. C. Forms and falsework to support the roof and floor slabs shall be designed for the total dead load, plus a live load of 50 psf minimum. The minimum design load for combined dead and live loads shall be 100 psf. 2.3 FORM TIES A. Form ties shall be provided with a plastic cone or other suitable means for forming a conical hole to insure that the form tie may be broken off back of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties or other removable form tie fasteners having a circular cross-section shall not exceed 1-1/2 inches; and all such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming. Form ties for water -retaining structures shall have integral waterstops that tightly fit the form tie so that they cannot be moved from mid -point of the tie. Form ties shall be ST -4 Hex Head Snaptie by MeadowBurke, Snap -Ties by Dayton/Richmond, or equal. B. Removable taper ties may be used when approved by the ENGINEER. A preformed neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug sized to seat at the center of the wall shall be inserted in the hole left by the removal of the taper tie. Use HD -9 Taper -Tie by MeadowBurke, Taper -Tie by Dayton/Richmond, or equal. STANTEC CONCRETE FORMING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 11 00 - 2 • • • PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Forms to confine the concrete and shape it to the required lines shall be used wherever necessary. The CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for the adequate design of forms, and any forms that are unsafe or inadequate in any respect shall promptly be removed from the WORK and replaced. Provide worker protection from protruding reinforcement bars in accordance with applicable safety codes. A sufficient number of forms of each kind shall be available to permit the required rate of progress to be maintained. The design and inspection of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall comply with applicable local, state, and Federal regulations. Plumb and string lines shall be installed before concrete placement and shall be maintained during placement. Such lines shall be used by CONTRACTOR's personnel and by the ENGINEER and shall be in sufficient number and properly installed. During concrete placement, the CONTRACTOR shall continually monitor plumb and string line form positions and immediately correct deficiencies. B. Concrete forms shall conform to the shape, lines, and dimensions of members required, and shall be substantial, free from surface defects, and sufficiently tight to prevent leakage. Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain their position and shape under a Toad of freshly -placed concrete. If adequate foundation for shores cannot be secured, trussed supports shall be provided. C. Forms shall be removed unless approved otherwise by the ENGINEER. 3.2 FORM DESIGN A. Forms shall be true in every respect to the required shape and size, shall conform to the established alignment and grade, and shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain their position and shape under the Toads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the concrete. Suitable and effective means shall be provided on forms for holding adjacent edges and ends of panels and sections tightly together and in accurate alignment so as to prevent the formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects in the finished concrete. Plywood, 5/8 -inch and greater in thickness, may be fastened directly to studding if the studs are spaced close enough to prevent visible deflection marks in the concrete. The forms shall be tight so as to prevent the Toss of water, cement, and fines during placing and vibrating of the concrete. Specifically, the bottom of wall forms that rest on concrete footings or slabs shall be provided with a gasket to prevent loss of fines and paste during placement and vibration of concrete. Such gasket may be a 1- to 1 -1/2 -inch diameter polyethylene rod held in position to the underside of the wall form. Adequate clean-out holes shall be provided at the bottom of each lift of forms. The size, number, and location of such clean -outs shall be as acceptable to the ENGINEER. Whenever concrete cannot be placed from the top of a wall form in a manner that meets the requirements of the Contract Documents, form windows shall be provided in the size and spacing needed to allow placement of concrete to the requirements of Section 03 31 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete. The size, number, and location of such form windows shall be as acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Vertical Surfaces: Vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, except where placement of the concrete against the ground is indicated. Not less than 1 -inch of concrete shall be added to the indicated thickness of a concrete member where concrete STANTEC CONCRETE FORMING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 11 00 - 3 is permitted to be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Permission to do this on other concrete members will be granted only for members of comparatively limited height and where the character of the ground is such that it can be trimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing until the concrete has been placed. B. Construction Joints: Concrete construction joints will not be permitted at locations other than those indicated, except as may be acceptable to the ENGINEER. When a second lift is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number, location, and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any unsatisfactory effect whatsoever on the concrete. Pipe stubs and anchor bolts shall be set in the forms where required. C. Form Ties 1. Embedded Ties: Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before being filled with mortar. Wire ties for holding forms will not be permitted. No form -tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the concrete. Ties shall not be removed in such manner as to leave a hole extending through the interior of the concrete members. The use of snap -ties that cause spalling of the concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. If steel panel forms are used, rubber grommets shall be provided where the ties pass through the form in order to prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods extending through the concrete are used to support or to strengthen forms, the rods shall remain embedded and shall terminate not less than 1 -inch back from the formed face or faces of the concrete. 2. Removable Ties: Where taper ties are approved for use, the larger end of the taper tie shall be on the wet side of walls in water retaining structures. After the taper tie is removed, the hole shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened for bond. A precast neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug shall be located at the wall centerline. The hole shall be completely filled with non -shrink grout for water bearing and below -grade walls. The hole shall be completely filled with non -shrink or regular cement grout for above -grade walls that are dry on both sides. Exposed faces of walls shall have the outer 2 -inches of the exposed face filled with a cement grout that shall match the color and texture of the surrounding wall surface. 3.4 REUSE OF FORMS A. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to the ENGINEER. Light sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture on exposed concrete surfaces. Exposed concrete surfaces are defined as surfaces which are permanently exposed to view. In the case of forms for the inside wall surfaces of hydraulic/water retaining structures, unused tie rod holes in forms shall be covered with metal caps or shall be filled by other methods acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3.5 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Careful procedures for the removal of forms shall be strictly followed, and this WORK shall be done with care so as to avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted. In the case of roof slabs and above -ground floor slabs, forms shall remain in place until test cylinders for the roof concrete attain a minimum STANTEC CONCRETE FORMING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 11 00 - 4 compressive strength of 75 percent of the 28 Day strength in Section 03 31 00. No forms shall be disturbed or removed under an individual panel or unit before the concrete in the adjacent panel or unit has attained 75 percent of the 28 Day strength and has been in place for a minimum of 7 Days. The time required to establish said strength shall be as determined by the ENGINEER who will make several test cylinders for this purpose from concrete used in the first group of roof panels placed. If the time so determined is more than the 7 Day minimum, then that time shall be used as the minimum length of time. Forms for vertical walls of waterholding structures shall remain in place at least 36 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms for parts of the WORK not specifically mentioned herein shall remain in place for periods of time as recommended in ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 3.6 MAINTENANCE OF FORMS A. Forms shall be maintained in good condition, particularly as to size, shape, strength, rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. Before concrete is placed, the forms shall be thoroughly cleaned. The form surfaces shall be treated with a nonstaining mineral oil or other lubricant acceptable to the ENGINEER. Any excess lubricant shall be satisfactorily removed before placing the concrete. Where field oiling of forms is required, the CONTRACTOR shall perform the oiling at least 2 weeks in advance of their use. Care shall be exercised to keep oil off the surfaces of steel reinforcement and other metal items to be embedded in concrete. 3.7 FALSEWORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the design, engineering, construction, maintenance, and safety of falsework, including staging, walkways, forms, ladders, and similar appurtenances, which shall equal or exceed the applicable requirements of the provisions of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction, and the requirements herein. B. Falsework shall be designed and constructed to provide the necessary rigidity and to support the loads. Falsework for the support of a superstructure shall be designed to support the loads that would be imposed if the entire superstructure were placed at one time. C. Falsework shall be placed upon a solid footing, safe against undermining, and be protected from softening. When the falsework is supported on timber piles, the maximum calculated pile loading shall not exceed 20 tons. When falsework is supported on any portion of the structure which is already constructed, the load imposed by the falsework shall be spread, distributed, and braced in such a way as to avoid any possibility of damage to the structure. END OF SECTION STANTEC CONCRETE FORMING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 11 00 - 5 SECTION 03 21 00 - REINFORCEMENT STEEL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide reinforcement steel and appurtenant WORK, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings 1. Furnish shop bending diagrams, placing lists, and drawings of reinforcement steel prior to fabrication. 2. Diagrams a. The shop bending diagrams shall show the actual lengths of bars to the nearest inch, measured to the intersection of the extensions (tangents for bars of circular cross section) of the outside surface. b. Include bar placement diagrams that clearly indicate the dimensions of each bar splice. 3. Reinforcement a. Details of the concrete reinforcement steel and concrete inserts shall be submitted at the earliest possible date after receipt by the CONTRACTOR of the Notice to Proceed. b. Said details of reinforcement steel for fabrication and erection shall conform to ACI 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement, and the indicated requirements. 4. Mechanical Couplers a. Where mechanical couplers are required or permitted to be used to splice reinforcement steel, submit the following items: 1) manufacturer's literature containing instructions and recommendations for installation for each type of coupler used; 2) certified test reports that verify the load capacity of each type and size of coupler used; and 3) Shop Drawings that show the location of each coupler with details of how they are to be installed in the formwork. STANTEC REINFORCEMENT STEEL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 21 00 - 1 5. Welding a. If reinforcement steel is to be spliced by welding at any location, submit mill test reports containing the information necessary for determination of the carbon equivalent per AWS D1.4 - Structural Steel Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel. b. Submit a written welding procedure for each type of weld for each size of bar which is to be spliced by welding; merely a statement that AWS procedures will be followed is not acceptable. c. If reinforcement steel is spliced by welding at any location, submit certifications of procedure qualifications for each welding procedure and certification of welder qualifications, for each welding procedure and for each welder performing on the WORK. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials Testing 1. If requested by the ENGINEER, furnish samples from each heat of reinforcement steel in a quantity adequate for testing. 2. Costs of initial tests will be paid by the OWNER. 3. Costs of additional tests if material fails initial tests shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. B. Welding III1. Welder qualifications and procedure qualifications shall be as indicated in AWS D1.4. 2. If requested by the ENGINEER, furnish samples of each type of welded splice in a quantity and of dimensions adequate for testing. 3. At the discretion of the ENGINEER, radiographic testing of direct butt -welded splices will be performed. 4. Provide assistance necessary to facilitate testing. 5. Repair welds that fail to meet AWS D1.4. 6. The costs of testing will be paid by the OWNER, but the costs of tests that show failure to meet requirements shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Materials that may remain or leave residues on or within the concrete shall be certified as compliant with NSF Standard 61- Drinking Water System Components. • STANTEC REINFORCEMENT STEEL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 21 00 - 2 2.2 REINFORCEMENT STEEL A. Reinforcement steel for cast -in-place reinforced concrete construction shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Bar and spiral reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet - Steel Bars, for Grade 60 reinforcement, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Welded Reinforcement a. Bar and spiral reinforcement that is welded shall conform to ASTM A 706 - Low Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, for Grade 60 reinforcement, unless otherwise indicated. b. The carbon equivalent in reinforcing that is welded shall not exceed 0.55 percent. 3. Welded Wire Reinforcement a. Welded wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A 1064 - Standard Specification for Carbon -Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete, and the indicated Details. b. Welded wire reinforcement with longitudinal wire of W4 size wire and smaller shall be in flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than 10 -inches. c. Welded wire reinforcement with longitudinal wires larger than W4 size shall be in flat sheets only. B. Accessories 1. Accessories shall include necessary chairs, slab bolsters, concrete blocks, tie wires, dips, supports, spacers, and other devices to position reinforcement during concrete placement. 2. Bar Supports a. Bar supports shall meet the requirements of the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, including special requirements for supporting epoxy -coated reinforcing bars. b. Wire bar supports shall be CRSI Class 1 for maximum protection with a 1/8 - inch minimum thickness of plastic coating that extends at least 1/2 inch from the concrete surface. c. Plastic shall be gray in color. 3. Concrete Blocks a. Concrete blocks (dobies) used to support and position reinforcement steel shall have the same or higher compressive strength as required for the concrete in which they are located. b. Wire ties shall be embedded in concrete block bar supports. STANTEC REINFORCEMENT STEEL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 21 00 - 3 C. Epoxy coating for reinforcing and accessories, where indicated, shall conform to ASTM A 775 - Epoxy - Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. • 2.3 MECHANICAL COUPLERS A. Mechanical couplers shall be provided where indicated and where approved by the ENGINEER. • • B. The couplers shall develop a tensile strength that exceeds 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcement bars being spliced at each splice. C. Multi -Component Couplers 1. Where the type of coupler used is composed of more than one component, components required for a complete splice shall be provided. 2. This shall apply to mechanical splices, including those splices intended for future connections. D. Connection 1. The reinforcement steel and coupler used shall be compatible for obtaining the required strength of the connection. 2. Straight threaded type couplers shall require the use of the next larger size reinforcing bar or shall be used with reinforcing bars with specially forged ends which provide upset threads which do not decrease the basic cross section of the bar. E. Couplers shall be Lenton Form Saver by Erico Products, Dowel Bar Splicer System by Dayton/Richmond, or equal. 2.4 WELDED SPLICES A. Welded splices shall be provided where indicated and where approved by the ENGINEER. B. Welded splices of reinforcement steel shall develop a tensile strength that exceeds 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcement bars that are connected. C. Materials as required to conform the welded splices to AWS D1.4 shall be provided. 2.5 EPDXY GROUT A. Epoxy for grouting reinforcing bars shall be specifically formulated for such application, for the moisture condition, application temperature, and orientation of the hole to be filled. B. Epoxy grout shall be in conformance with the requirements of Section 036000 — Grout. STANTEC REINFORCEMENT STEEL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 21 00 - 4 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Reinforcement steel, welded wire reinforcing, couplers, and other appurtenances shall be fabricated, and placed in accordance with the Building Code and the indicated supplementary requirements. 3.2 FABRICATION A. General 1. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately formed to the dimensions and shapes indicated, and the fabricating details shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315 and ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, except as modified by the Drawings. 2. Bars shall be bent cold. 3. Bars shall be bent in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318. 4. Fabricate reinforcement bars for structures in accordance with accepted bending diagrams, placing lists, and placing drawings. B. Fabricating Tolerances 1. Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall conform to the following fabricating tolerances: a. Sheared Length: plus and minus one inch b. Depth of Truss Bars: plus zero, minus 1/2 inch c. Stirrups, Ties and Spirals: plus and minus 1/2 inch d. Other Bends: plus and minus one inch 3.3 PLACEMENT A. Reinforcement steel shall be accurately positioned as indicated, and shall be supported and wired together to prevent displacement using annealed iron wire ties or suitable clips at intersections. B. Reinforcement steel shall be supported by concrete, plastic or metal support spacers, or metal hangers that are sufficiently strong and rigid to prevent any displacement of the reinforcement steel. C. Where concrete is to be placed on the ground, supporting concrete blocks (or dobies) shall be used in sufficient numbers to support the bars without settlement, but in no case shall such support be continuous. D. Concrete blocks used to support reinforcement steel shall be tied to the steel with wire ties that are embedded in the blocks. STANTEC REINFORCEMENT STEEL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 21 00 - 5 E. For concrete over formwork, provide concrete, metal, plastic, or other acceptable bar chairs and spacers. F. Limitations on the use of bar support materials shall be as follows. 1. Concrete Dobies a. permitted at any location except where architectural finish is required b. required for slabs on grade and surfaces in contact with or above ozonated process water 2. Wire bar supports will be permitted only at slabs over dry areas, interior dry wall surfaces, and exterior wall surfaces. 3. Plastic bar supports will be permitted at every location except on -grade. G. Tie wires shall be bent away from the forms in order to provide the required concrete coverage. H. Bars additional to those indicated that may be found necessary or desirable by the CONTRACTOR for the purpose of securing reinforcement in position shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR at no additional expense to the OWNER. I. Except where in conflict with the Building Code, unless otherwise indicated reinforcement placing tolerances shall be within the limits in Section 7.5 of ACI 318. J. Moving Bars 1. Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcement steel, conduits, or embedded items. 2. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter or enough to exceed the above tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be as reviewed and accepted by the ENGINEER. K. Welded Wire Reinforcement 1. Welded wire reinforcement placed over horizontal forms shall be supported on slab bolsters. 2. Slab bolsters shall be spaced not more than 30 -inch on centers, shall extend continuously across the entire width of the reinforcement mat, and shall support the reinforcement mat in the plane indicated. 3. Welded wire reinforcement placed over the ground shall be supported on wired concrete blocks (dobies) spaced not more than 3 feet on centers in any direction. 4. The construction practice of placing welded wire reinforcing on the ground and hooking into place in the freshly placed concrete shall not be used. L. Storage and Handling 1. Epoxy -coated reinforcing bars shall be stored, transported, and placed in such a manner as to avoid chipping of the epoxy coating. STANTEC REINFORCEMENT STEEL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 21 00 - 6 2. Non-abrasive slings made of nylon and similar materials shall be used. 3. Specially coated bar supports shall be used. 4. Chips or cracks in the epoxy coating shall be repaired with a compatible epoxy repair material prior to placing concrete. M. Accessory Spacing 1. Accessories supporting reinforcing bars shall be spaced such that there is no deflection of the accessory from the weight of the supported bars. 2. When used to space the reinforcing bars from wall forms, the forms and bars shall be located such that there is no deflection of the accessory when the forms are tightened into position. 3.4 SPACING OF BARS A. The clear distance between parallel bars (except in columns and between multiple layers of bars in beams) shall be not Tess than the nominal diameter of the bars, nor less than 1-1/3 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate, nor less than one inch. B. Where reinforcement in beams or girders is placed in 2 or more layers, the clear distance between layers shall be not Tess than one inch. C. In columns, the clear distance between longitudinal bars shall be not less than 1-1/2 times the bar diameter, nor less than 1-1/2 times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate, nor less than 1-1/2 inches. D. The clear distance between bars shall also apply to the distance between a contact splice and adjacent splices or bars. 3.5 SPLICING A. General 1. Reinforcement bar splices shall only be used at indicated locations. 2. When it is necessary to splice reinforcement at points other than where indicated, the character of the splice shall be as reviewed and accepted by the ENGINEER. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, dowels shall match the size and spacing of the spliced bar. B. Splices of Reinforcement 1. The length of lap for reinforcement bars, unless otherwise indicated, shall be in accordance with ACI 318 for a Class B splice. 2. Welded Wire Reinforcement a. Laps of welded wire reinforcement shall be in accordance with ACI 318. b. Adjoining sheets shall be securely tied together with No. 14 tie wire, one tie for each 2 running feet. STANTEC REINFORCEMENT STEEL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 21 00 - 7 c. Wires shall be staggered and tied in such a manner that they cannot slip. 3. Splices in column spiral reinforcement, when necessary, shall be made by welding or by a lap of 1-1/2 turns. C. Bending or Straightening 1. Reinforcement shall not be straightened or re-bent in a manner which will injure the material. 2. Bars shall be bent or straight as indicated. 3. Do not use bends different from the bends indicated. 4. Bars shall be bent cold, unless otherwise permitted by the ENGINEER. 5. No bars partially embedded in concrete shall be field -bent except as indicated or specifically permitted by the ENGINEER. D. Couplers 1. Couplers that are located at a joint face shall be of a type that can be set either flush or recessed from the face as indicated. 2. The couplers shall be sealed during concrete placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. 3. Couplers intended for future connections shall be recessed a minimum of 1/2 inch from the concrete surface. 4. After the concrete is placed, the coupler shall be plugged with plastic plugs which have an 0 -ring seal and the recess filled with sealant to prevent any contact with water or other corrosive materials. 5. Threaded couplers shall be plugged . E. Unless indicated otherwise, mechanical coupler spacing and capacity shall match the spacing and capacity of the reinforcing indicated for the adjacent section. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Reinforcement steel shall always be protected from conditions conducive to corrosion until concrete has been placed around it. B. The surfaces of reinforcement steel and other metalwork to be in contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar, and other foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. C. Where there is delay in depositing concrete, the reinforcement shall be re -inspected and, if necessary, re -cleaned. 3.7 EMBEDMENT OF DRILLED REINFORCING STEEL DOWELS A. Hole Preparation STANTEC REINFORCEMENT STEEL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 21 00 - 8 1. The hole diameter shall be as recommended by the epoxy manufacturer but shall be no larger than 1/4 inch greater than the diameter of the outer surface of the reinforcing bar deformations. 2. The depth of the hole shall be as recommended by the epoxy manufacturer to fully develop the bar but shall not be less than 12 bar diameters, unless indicated otherwise. 3. The hole shall be drilled by methods that do not interfere with the proper bonding of epoxy. 4. Existing reinforcing steel in the vicinity of proposed holes shall be located prior to drilling, and the location of holes shall be adjusted to avoid drilling through or nicking any existing reinforcing bars. 5. The hole shall be blown clean with clean, dry compressed air to remove dust and loose particles. B. Embedment 1. Epoxy shall be injected into the hole through a tube placed to the bottom of the hole. 2. The tube shall be withdrawn as epoxy is placed but kept immersed to prevent formation of air pockets. 3. The hole shall be filled to a depth that insures excess material will be expelled from the hole during dowel placement. 4. Dowels shall be twisted during insertion into the partially filled hole so as to guarantee full wetting of the bar surface with epoxy. 5. The bar shall be inserted slowly enough to avoid developing air pockets. END OF SECTION STANTEC REINFORCEMENT STEEL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 21 00 - 9 SECTION 03 31 00 - CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide cast -in-place concrete, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The following types of concrete are covered in this Section: 1. Structural Concrete • • a. Regular Mix: Roof, floor slabs, columns, walls, pavements, and other concrete items not indicated otherwise in the Contract Documents. b. Thick Section Mix: For 12 -inch and thicker walls, slabs on grade, pavements, and footings. This type of concrete may be used at the indicated locations at the CONTRACTOR's option if the ENGINEER agrees. c. Pea Gravel Mix: At the bottom 6 inches of walls. 2. Other Concretes a. Sitework Concrete: Concrete to be used for curbs, gutters, catch basins, sidewalks, fence and guard post embedment, underground duct bank encasement, and other concrete appurtenant to electrical facilities, unless otherwise indicated. b. Lean Concrete 1) Concrete to be used for thrust blocks, pipe trench cut-off blocks, and cradles that are indicated as unreinforced 2) Lean concrete shall be used as protective cover for dowels intended for future connections. C. The term "hydraulic structure" shall mean environmental engineering concrete structures for the containment, treatment, or transmission of water, wastewater, other fluids, or gases. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. B. Mix Designs 1. Prior to beginning the WORK and within 14 Days of the Notice to Proceed, submit preliminary concrete mix designs which shall show the proportions and gradations of materials proposed for each class and type of concrete. 2. Mix designs shall be checked through trial batch and laboratory testing by an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3. Costs related to trial batch and related laboratory testing shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility as part of the WORK. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 1 4. Since laboratory trial batches require 35 calendar days to complete, the CONTRACTOR shall test a minimum of 2 mix designs for each class of concrete. C. Delivery Tickets 1. Where ready -mix concrete is used, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish delivery tickets at the time of delivery of each load of concrete. 2. Each ticket shall show the state -certified equipment used for measuring and the total quantities, by weight, of cement, sand, each class of aggregate, admixtures, the amount of water in the aggregate added at the batching plant, and the amount allowed to be added at the Site for the specific design mix. 3. In addition, each ticket shall state the mix number, total yield in cubic yards, and the time of day, to the nearest minute, corresponding to the times when the batch was dispatched, when it left the plant, when it arrived at the Site, when unloading began, and when unloading was finished. D. Test Data: Test data relating to the cement, aggregate, and admixtures shall be less than 6 months old. E. Submit crystalline waterproofing admixture product data, installation instructions, and general recommendations for applications. Provide test reports from approved independent testing laboratory certifying the waterproofing admixture system conforms to the characteristics specified herein. Provide document signed by the manufacturer or manufacturer's representative certifying that the materials to be installed comply with the requirements of this specification. F. Furnish the following submittals in accordance with ACI 301 — Structural Concrete: 1. mill tests for cement 2. admixture certification, including chloride ion content 3. aggregate gradation test results and certification 4. materials and methods for curing 1.3 CONCRETE CONFERENCE A. The ENGINEER will chair a meeting to review the detailed requirements of the CONTRACTOR's proposed concrete design mixes and to determine the procedures for producing proper concrete construction no later than 14 Days after the Notice to Proceed. B. Parties involved in the concrete WORK shall attend the conference, including the following at a minimum: 1. CONTRACTOR's representative 2. testing laboratory representative 3. concrete subcontractor 4. reinforcing steel subcontractor and detailer STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 2 5. concrete supplier 6. admixture manufacturer's representative IDC. The conference shall be held at a time and place proposed by the CONTRACTOR and accepted by the ENGINEER. D. The conference shall be held at least 5 Days after acceptance. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General • • 1. Tests on component materials and for compressive strength of concrete shall be performed as indicated. 2. Tests for determining slump shall be in accordance with ASTM C 143 — Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 3. Testing for aggregate shall include sand equivalence, reactivity, organic impurities, abrasion resistance, and soundness, according to ASTM C 33 — Concrete Aggregates. 4. The cost of trial batch laboratory tests on cement, aggregates, and concrete shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. 5. The cost of laboratory tests on field -placed cement, aggregates, and concrete will be the OWNER'S responsibility. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the cost of any tests and investigations of WORK that is determined to be Defective WORK. 7. The testing laboratory shall meet or exceed ASTM C 1077 — Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. 8. Concrete for testing shall be furnished by the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall assist the ENGINEER in obtaining samples and disposal and cleanup of excess material. B. Field Compression Tests 1. Compression test specimens shall be taken during construction from the first placement of each type of concrete and at intervals thereafter as selected by the ENGINEER to insure continued compliance with the Specifications. 2. Each set of specimens shall be a minimum of 5 cylinders. 3. Compression test specimens for concrete shall be made in accordance with Section 9.2 of ASTM C 31 — Practices for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 4. Specimens shall be 6 -inches diameter by 12 -inches tall cylinders. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 3 5. Compression tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 39 — Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 6. One test cylinder shall be tested at 7 Days, and 2 test cylinders tested at 28 Days. 7. The remaining cylinders shall be held to verify test results, if needed. C. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete 1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete shall be in accordance with ACI 318 — Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, Chapter 5 "Concrete Quality," and as indicated. 2. A statistical analysis of compression test results shall be performed according to ACI 214 — Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Methods. 3. The standard deviation of the test results shall not exceed 640 psi, when ordered at equivalent water content as estimated by slump. 4. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, immediate corrective action shall be taken to increase the compressive strength for subsequent batches of the type of concrete affected. 5. When the standard deviation of the test results exceeds 640 psi, the average strength for which the mix is designed shall be increased by an amount necessary to satisfy the statistical requirement that the probability of any test being more than 500 psi below or the average of any 3 consecutive tests being below the required compressive strength is 1 in 100. 6. The required average strength shall be calculated by Criterion No. 3 of ACI 214 using the actual standard deviation. 7. Concrete that fails to meet the ACI requirements and the indicated requirements is subject to removal and replacement. D. Aggregate Testing: Aggregate testing shall be performed for the trial batch in the Article below entitled "Trial Batch and Laboratory Tests" prior to construction and every 12 months during construction to determine continued compliance. E. Construction Tolerances 1. The CONTRACTOR shall set and maintain concrete forms and perform finishing operations to ensure that the completed WORK is within tolerances. 2. Surface defects and irregularities are defined as finishes and are different from tolerances. 3. Tolerance is the permissible variation from lines, grades, or dimensions indicated on the Drawings. 4. Where tolerances are not indicated, permissible deviations shall be in accordance with ACI 117 — Standard Tolerance for Concrete Construction and Materials. 5. The following non -cumulative construction tolerances apply to finished walls, columns and slabs unless otherwise indicated: STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 4 ITEM TOLERANCE Variation of the constructed linear outline from the established position in plan. in 10 feet: 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more: 1/2 inch Variation from the level or from the grades indicated. in 10 feet: 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more: 1/2 inch Variation from plumb in 10 feet: 1/4 inch in 20 feet or more: 1/2 inch Variation in the thickness of slabs and walls. minus 1/4 inch plus 1/2 inch Variation in the locations and sizes of slabs and wall openings plus or minus 1/4 inch PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. General 1. Concrete materials in contact with potable water shall be classified as acceptable for potable water use in accordance with NSF/ANSI Standard 61 as required by the authority having jurisdiction. Not all products listed herein are for use in contact with potable water. 2. Cement for concrete that will contact potable water shall not be obtained from kilns that burn metal rich hazardous waste fuel. 3. Materials shall be delivered, stored, and handled so as to prevent damage by water or breakage. 4. Cement reclaimed from cleaning bags or leaking containers shall not be used. 5. Cement shall be used in the sequence of receipt of shipments. B. Materials and storage of materials shall comply with ACI 301, as applicable. C. Materials for concrete shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Cement a. Cement shall be standard brand Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150 — Portland Cement, for Type II or Type V. b. A minimum of 85 percent of cement by weight shall pass a 325 screen. c. A single brand of cement shall be used throughout the WORK, and prior to its use, the brand shall be accepted by the ENGINEER. d. The cement shall be suitably protected from exposure to moisture until used. e. Cement that has become lumpy shall not be used. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 5 f. Sacked cement shall be stored in such a manner so as to permit access for inspection and sampling. Certified mill test reports, including fineness, for each shipment of cement to be used shall be submitted to the ENGINEER, if requested, regarding compliance with the Specifications. g. 2. Water a. Water for mixing and curing shall be potable, clean, and free from objectionable quantities of silty organic matter, alkali, salts, and other impurities. b. The water shall be considered potable, for the purposes of this Section only, if it meets the requirements of the local governmental agencies. c. Agricultural water with high total dissolved solids (greater than 1000 mg/L TDS) shall not be used. 3. Aggregates a. Aggregates shall be obtained from pits acceptable to the ENGINEER, shall be non-reactive, and shall conform to ASTM C 33 — Concrete Aggregates. b. The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as indicated, and the substitution of lightweight sand for fine aggregate will not be permitted. c. Coarse Aggregates 1) Coarse aggregates shall consist of clean, hard, durable gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock, or a combination thereof. 2) The coarse aggregates shall be prepared and handled in 2 or more size groups for combined aggregates, with a maximum size greater than 3/4 inch. 3) When the aggregates are proportioned for each batch of concrete, the 2 size groups shall be combined (also refer to the Article below entitled "Trial Batch and Laboratory Tests"). d. Fine Aggregates 1) Fine aggregates shall be natural sand or a combination of natural and manufactured sand that is hard and durable. 2) When tested in accordance with ASTM D 2419 — Test Methods for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate, the sand equivalency shall not be Tess than 75 percent for an average of 3 samples, nor less than 70 percent for an individual test. 3) The gradation of fine aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 for the fineness modulus of the sand used, including the optional grading in Section 6.2. 4) The fineness modulus of sand used shall not be greater than 3.1. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 6 5) When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the fine aggregate shall produce a color in the supernatant liquid no darker than the reference standard color solution. e. Combined Aggregates 1) Combined aggregates shall be well graded from coarse to fine sizes and shall be uniformly graded between screen sizes to produce concrete that has optimum workability and consolidation characteristics. 2) Where a trial batch is required for a mix design, the final combined aggregate gradations will be established during the trial batch process. 3) When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the coarse aggregate shall show a Toss not exceeding 42 percent after 500 revolutions or 10.5 percent after 100 revolutions. f. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the ratio of silica released to reduction in alkalinity shall not exceed 1.0. g. When tested in accordance with ASTM C 33, the loss resulting after 5 cycles of the soundness test shall not exceed 10 percent for fine aggregate and 12 percent for coarse aggregate when using sodium sulfate. 4. Ready -mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 94 — Ready Mixed Concrete. 5. Admixtures a. Admixtures shall be compatible and shall be furnished by a single manufacturer capable of providing qualified field service representation. b. Admixtures shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. c. If the use of an admixture is producing an inferior end result, the CONTRACTOR shall discontinue use of the admixture. d. Admixtures shall not contain thiocyanates nor more than 0.05 percent chloride ion, and shall be non-toxic after 30 days. e. Air Content 1) An air -entraining agent meeting the requirements of ASTM C 260 — Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete shall be used. 2) Concrete floors to receive a dry -shake floor hardener shall have an air content not to exceed 3 percent. 3) The OWNER reserves the right, at any time, to sample and test the air - entraining agent. 4) The air -entraining agent shall be added to the batch in a portion of the mixing water. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 7 5) The solution shall be batched by means of a mechanical batcher capable of accurate measurement. 6) Air content shall be tested at the point of placement. 7) The air entraining agent shall be Micro -Air by Master Builders; Daravair by W.R. Grace; Sika AEA -15 by Sika Corporation; or equal f. Set -Controlling and Water -Reducing Admixtures 1) Admixtures may be added at the CONTRACTOR's option, subject to the ENGINEER's approval, to control the set, effect water reduction, and increase workability. 2) The cost of adding an admixture shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. 3) Concrete containing an admixture shall be first placed at a location determined by the ENGINEER. 4) Admixtures shall conform to ASTM C 494 — Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 5) The required quantity of cement shall be used in the mix regardless of whether or not an admixture is used. 6) Concrete shall not contain more than one water -reducing admixture. 7) The set -controlling admixture may be either with or without water - reducing properties. 8) Where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently greater than 80 degrees F, a set -retarding admixture such as Plastocrete 161MR by Sika Corporation, Pozzolith or Delvo by BASF, Daratard by W.R. Grace, or equal shall be used. 9) Where the air temperature at the time of placement is expected to be consistently Tess than 40 degrees F, a non -corrosive set accelerating admixture such as Plastocrete 161 FL by Sika Corporation, MasterSet FP 20 by BASF, Daraset by W.R. Grace, or equal shall be used. 10) Mid -Range Water Reducers a) General use water -reducing admixtures shall be mid-range and shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type A and F. b) Use Daracem by W.R. Grace, Polyheed by BASF, Sikament by Sika Corporation, or equal. c) The quantity of admixture used and the method of mixing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 11) High -Range Water Reducers STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 8 a) High -range water reducers shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or G. • b) Use ADVA by W.R. Grace, ViscoCrete by Sika Corporation, Glenium by BASF, or equal. c) The high -range water reducer shall be added to the concrete after all other ingredients have been mixed and initial slump has been verified. d) No more than 14 ounces of water reducer per sack of cement shall be used. e) The water reducer shall be considered as part of the mixing water when calculating the water/cement ratio. • • f) If the high -range water reducer is added to the concrete at the Site, it may be used in conjunction with the same water reducer added at the batch plant. g) Concrete shall have a slump of 3 inches, plus or minus 1/2 inch, prior to adding the high -range water reducing admixture at the Site. h) The high -range water reducing admixture shall be accurately measured and pressure injected into the mixer as a single dose by an experienced technician. i) A standby system shall be provided and tested prior to each day's operation of the primary system. j) Concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 70 mixer revolutions or 5 minutes after the addition of the high -range water reducer, unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer. g. Other Admixtures 1) Flyash a) Flyash shall not be used for concrete sections containing process water in water or wastewater treatment plants or potable water. b) For other concrete, fly ash may be substituted for not more than 15 percent, by weight, of cement in structural concrete and not more than 30 percent, by weight, for sitework concrete, and not more than 50 percent, by weight, of cement in other concrete. c) Fly ash shall conform to ASTM C618 and shall not have loss -on - ignition greater than 3 percent. d) The water/cement ratio shall be calculated based on cement plus fly ash. 2) Ground Blast Furnace Slag Cement STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 9 a) Slag cement shall not be used for concrete sections containing process water in water or wastewater treatment plants or potable water. b) Slag cement shall conform to ASTM C989 — Ground Granulated Blast -Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars, Grade 100 or 120. c) Blended cements shall conform to ASTM C595 — Blended Hydraulic Cements, Type 1S, or ASTM C1157 — Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement. d) Slag cement substitution, if used, shall be not Tess than 25, nor more than 50 percent by weight of cement. e) Slag cement substitution shall not be used with fly ash substitution. f) The water/cement ratio shall be calculated based on cement plus slag cement. 3) Fiber reinforcing a) Fiber -reinforced concrete shall be furnished where indicated. b) Fiber reinforcement shall be synthetic fiber reinforcement. c) Use Fibermesh 300, as manufactured by Propex, or equal. d) Fiber reinforcing shall be batched at the plant at a rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard of concrete. e) Material: 100 -percent virgin homopolymer polypropylene -fibrillated fibers; containing no reprocessed olefin materials f) Conformance: ASTM C 1116, Type III g) Fire Classifications: UL Report File No. R8534-11; Southwest Certification Services (SWCS), Omega Point Laboratories No. 8662-1 h) Fiber Length: one inch i) Alkali Resistance: alkali -proof j) Absorption: nil k) Specific Gravity: 0.91 1) Melting Point: 324 degrees F (162 degrees C) h. Crystalline Waterproofing Admixture 1) Crystalline waterproofing admixture shall be included in all structural concrete. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 10 2) The crystalline waterproofing admixture shall be Xypex Admix C-500 by Xypex Chemical Corporation. No substitutions are permitted. 3) Dosage rate shall be 2% to 3% by weight of cement content. 4) Crystalline waterproofing admixture shall be batched in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions in the aggregate. 2.2 CURING MATERIALS A. General: Curing compounds shall be resin -based and shall be compliant with local VOC requirements, unless otherwise indicated herein. B. Regular Curing Compound 1. Regular curing compound shall be white -pigmented and shall conform to ASTM C 309 - Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete, Type 2, Class B. 2. Sodium silicate compounds will not be accepted. 3. The concrete curing compound shall be: a. Kurez VOX White Pigmented by Euclid Chemicals Company; b. L&M Cure R-2 by L&M Construction Chemicals; c. 1200 -White by W.R. Meadows; d. Kure -N -Seal WB White Pigmented by Sonneborn/Degussa Building Systems; e. or equal. C. Dissipating Curing Compound 1. When the curing compound must be removed for finishes or grouting, compounds shall be of a dissipating type, conforming to ASTM C 309, Type 1 or 2, Class B. 2. The dissipating curing compound shall be: a. Korez DR VOX by Euclid Chemical Company; b. L&M Cure R-2 by L & M Construction Chemicals; c. 1100 -Clear by W.R. Meadows; d. or equal. D. Curing Compound for Applications Requiring NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Compliance 1. When the curing compound is required to conform to NSF/ANSI Standard 61, the curing compound shall be water-based and shall be compliant with all local VOC requirements; shall conform to ASTM C 309; and shall be certified to conform to the requirements of NSF/ANSI Standard 61. 2. The NSF/ANSI Standard 61 Certified curing compound shall be: STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 11 a. E -Cure by SpecChem, LLC; b. Atlas Quantum -Cure NSF by Atlas Tech Products; c. or equal. E. Concrete Curing Blanket 1. Polyethylene Sheets a. Polyethylene sheets for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have a nominal thickness of 6 mils. b. The loss of moisture when determined in accordance with ASTM C 156 — Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface. 2. Polyethylene -Coated Waterproof Paper a. Polyethylene -coated waterproof paper sheeting for use as concrete curing blanket shall consist of white polyethylene sheeting free of visible defects, uniform in appearance, shall have a nominal thickness of 2 -mils, and shall be permanently bonded to waterproof paper conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification UU-B-790A — Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber (Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellant and Fire Resistant). b. The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with ASTM C 156, shall not exceed 0.055 gram per square centimeter of surface. 3. Polyethylene -Coated Burlap a. Polyethylene -coated burlap for use as concrete curing blanket shall be 4 mils thick, with white opaque polyethylene film impregnated or extruded into one side of the burlap. b. The burlap shall weigh not less than 9 ounces per square yard. c. The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with ASTM C 156, shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface. F. Curing Mats 1. Curing mats for use in Curing Method 6, below, shall be heavy shag rugs or carpets or cotton mats quilted at 4 inches on center. 2. Curing mats shall weigh a minimum of 12 ounces per square yard when dry. G. Evaporation Retardant 1. An evaporation retardant shall be used. 2. The evaporation retardant shall be: a. MasterKure ER 50 by BASF/Master Builders; STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 12 b. Eucobar by Euclid Chemical Company; c. E -CON by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; d. or equal. 2.3 NON-WATERSTOP JOINT MATERIALS A. Materials for non-waterstop joints in concrete shall conform to the following requirements: 1. The preformed joint filler shall be a non -extruding neoprene sponge or polyurethane type conforming to Section 03 32 00 — Joints in Concrete. 2. Mastic Joint Sealer a. The mastic joint sealer shall be a material: 1) that does not contain evaporating solvents; 2) that will tenaciously adhere to concrete surfaces; 3) that will remain permanently resilient and pliable; 4) that will not be affected by the continuous presence of water; 5) that will not in any way contaminate potable water; 6) and that will effectively seal the joints against moisture infiltration even when the joints are subject to movement from expansion and contraction. b. The sealer shall be composed of special asphalts or similar materials blended with lubricating and plasticizing agents to form a tough, durable mastic substance containing no volatile oils or lubricants. c. The sealer shall be capable of meeting the indicated test requirements, if testing is required by the ENGINEER. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bonding Agents 1. Bonding agents shall be epoxy adhesives. 2. Bonding agents for bonding freshly -mixed, plastic concrete to hardened concrete shall be: a. Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod Epoxy Adhesive by Sika Corporation; b. MasterEmaco ADH 326 by BASF/Master Builders; c. BurkEpoxy MV by Edoco; d. or equal. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 13 3. Bonding agents for bonding hardened concrete or masonry to steel shall be: a. Sikadur 31 Hi -Mod Gel by Sika Corporation; b. BurkEpoxy NS by Edoco; c. Concresive Paste (LPL) by MBT/Degussa Building Systems; d. or equal. B. Colorant for duct bank concrete shall be an integral red oxide coloring pigment used in the proportion of 8 pounds per cubic yard of concrete. 2.5 CONCRETE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Concrete shall be composed of cement, admixtures, aggregates, and water of the qualities indicated. 2. The exact proportions in which these materials are to be used for different parts of the WORK shall be determined during the trial batches. 3. In general, the mix shall be designed to produce a concrete capable of being deposited to obtain maximum density and minimum shrinkage, and, where deposited in forms, to have good consolidation properties and maximum smoothness of surface. 4. The aggregate gradations shall be formulated to provide fresh concrete that will not promote rock pockets around reinforcing steel or embedded items. 5. The proportions shall be changed whenever necessary or desirable to meet the required results, and such changes shall be subject to review by the ENGINEER. B. Fine Aggregate Composition 1. In mix designs for structural concrete, except for 1/2 -inch and 3/8 -inch maximum size aggregate, the percentage of fine aggregate in total aggregate by weight shall be as indicated in the following table: FINE AGGREGATE Fineness Modulus Percent (maximum) 2.7 or less 41 2.7 to 2.8 42 2.8 to 2.9 43 2.9 to 3.1 44 2. For other concrete, the maximum percentage of fine aggregate of total aggregate by weight shall not exceed 50 percent. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 14 C. Duct Bank Concrete 1. Duct bank concrete shall contain an integral red -oxide coloring pigment. 2. The concrete shall be dyed red throughout. 3. Using a surface treatment to color duct banks will not be accepted. D. Water/Cement Ratio 1. The indicated water/cement ratio is for a saturated -surface dry condition of aggregate. 2. Throughout every Day, the added batch water shall be adjusted for the total free water in the aggregates, which shall be determined as follows: a. The total moisture content of all aggregate shall be calculated by ASTM C 566 — Test Method for Total Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying. b. Subtract the moisture absorbed by the coarse aggregate, calculated by ASTM C 127 — Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. c. Subtract the moisture absorbed by the fine aggregate, calculated by ASTM C 128 — Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Fine Aggregate. E. Concrete Property Tables 1. The maximum cement contents (determined from the maximum W/C Ratios and maximum Water Contents given in the Concrete Property Tables below) are intended to minimize drying shrinkage and heat of hydration of the concrete. 2. It is understood that the indicated maximum cement contents may require additional water reducing agent for the workability required by the CONTRACTOR'S methods, and may not result in the least costly concrete mix for the required concrete strength. 3. If the CONTRACTOR wishes to increase the maximum cement content for any mix, the CONTRACTOR must notify the ENGINEER in writing and submit the request within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed. 4. Increases in cement content shall be at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. STRUCTURAL CONCRETE STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 15 Type of WORK Regular Mix (roof, floor slabs, walls, pavements, and other concrete items not categorized elsewhere) Thick Section Mix (12 -inch and thicker walls, slabs on grade, pavements, and footings) Congested Section Mix (Use where indicated or at the CONTRACTOR's option and approved by the ENGINEER) Pea Gravel Mix (concrete at the bottom 6 inches of waterstopped 1 walls) At the CONTRACTOR's option, superplastic Regular Mix may be substituted for the first lift Min 28 Day Compressive Strength, psi 4500 4500 5000 5000 Max Aggregate Size, in 1 1-1/2 1/2 3/8 Cement Content per cubic yard, Ib, minimum 564 564 600 752 Water content per cubic yard, Ib, maximum 254 254 240 301 Max W/C Ratio by weight 0.42 0.42 0.40 0.40 Total Air Content, percent 4.5 to 7.5 4 to 7 5.5 to 8.5 6 to 9 Slump 4 inches +/- 1 in with high -range water reducer: 7 inches +/- 2 in 4 inches +/- 1 in with high -range water reducer: 7 inches +/- 2 in with high -range water reducer: 7 inches +/- 2 in with high -range water reducer: 7 inches +/- 2 in STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 16 OTHER CONCRETE Type of WORK Sitework Concrete (curbs, gutters, sidewalks, catch basins, fence embedments, encasements, and ductbanks) Lean Concrete (thrust blocks, pipe trench cut-off blocks, and cradles) Min 28 Day Compressive Strength, psi 3000 2000 Max Aggregate Size, in 1 1 Cement Content per cubic yard, Ib, minimum 470 376 Water content per cubic yard, Ib, maximum 254 270 Max W/C Ratio by weight 0.45 0.60 Total Air Content, percent 4 to 7 4.5 to 7.5 Slump 4 inches +/- 1 in ductbanks and encasements: 5 inches +/- 1 in 4 inches +/- 1 in NOTE: The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that the limiting parameters above are not a mix design. Admixtures may be required to achieve workability required by the CONTRACTOR's construction methods and aggregates. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing concrete with the required workability and strength. F. Adjustments to Mix Design 1. The CONTRACTOR may elect to decrease the water/cement ratio to achieve the strength and/or add water reducers, as required to achieve workability. 2. The mixes shall be changed whenever such change is necessary or desirable to secure the required strength, density, workability, and surface finish, and the CONTRACTOR shall be entitled to no additional compensation because of such changes. 3. Any changes to the accepted concrete mix design shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review and shall be tested again in accordance with the indicated requirements. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 17 2.6 CONSISTENCY A. The quantity of water in a batch of concrete shall be just sufficient, with a normal mixing period, to produce a concrete that can be worked properly into place without segregation and which can be compacted by vibratory methods to give the desired density, impermeability, and smoothness of surface. B. The quantity of water shall be changed as necessary, with variations in the nature or moisture content of the aggregates, in order to maintain uniform production of a desired consistency. C. The consistency of the concrete in successive batches shall be determined by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143 — Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. D. The slumps shall be as indicated with the concrete properties. 2.7 TRIAL BATCH AND LABORATORY TESTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall only use a mix design for construction that has first met the trial batch testing requirements. B. Before placing any concrete, a testing laboratory selected by the ENGINEER shall prepare a trial batch of each class of structural concrete, based on the preliminary concrete mixes submitted by the CONTRACTOR. C. Aggregate Proportions 1. During the trial batch the aggregate proportions may be adjusted by the testing laboratory using the two coarse aggregate size ranges to obtain the required properties. 2. If one size range produces an acceptable mix, a second size range need not be used. 3. Such adjustments will be considered refinements to the mix design and will not be the basis for extra compensation to the CONTRACTOR. 4. Concrete shall conform to the indicated requirements whether the aggregate proportions are from the CONTRACTOR's preliminary mix design or whether the proportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. 5. The trial batch shall be prepared using the aggregates, cement, and admixture proposed for the project. D. The trial batch materials shall be of a quantity such that the testing laboratory can obtain 6 compression test specimens from each batch. E. The determination of compressive strength shall be made by testing 6 -inch diameter by 12 -inch high cylinders, which have been made, cured, and tested in accordance with ASTM C 192 — Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory, and ASTM C 39. F. The testing schedule shall be 3 compression test cylinders tested at 7 Days and 3 at 28 Days. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 18 G. The average compressive strength for the 3 cylinders tested at 28 Days for any given trial batch shall be not Tess than 125 percent of the indicated compressive strength. H. A sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch shall be performed according to the requirements of ASTM C 136 — Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates, and values shall be provided for percent passing each sieve. 2.8 MEASUREMENT OF CEMENT AND AGGREGATE A. The amount of cement and of each separate size of aggregate entering into each batch of concrete shall be determined by direct weighing equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR and acceptable to the ENGINEER. B. Weighing Tolerances Material Percent of Total Weight Cement 1 Aggregates 3 Admixtures 3 2.9 MEASUREMENT OF WATER A. The quantity of water entering the mixer shall be measured by a suitable water meter or other measuring device of a type acceptable to the ENGINEER and capable of measuring the water in variable amounts within a tolerance of one percent. B. The water feed control mechanism shall be capable of being locked in position in order to constantly deliver the required amount of water to each batch of concrete. C. A positive, quick -acting valve shall be used for a cut-off in the water line to the mixer, and the operating mechanism shall prevent leakage when the valve is closed. 2.10 READY -MIXED CONCRETE A. General 1. At the CONTRACTOR'S option, ready -mixed concrete may be used if it meets the indicated requirements as to materials, batching, mixing, transporting and placement, and is in accordance with ASTM C 94 and the following supplementary requirements. 2. Ready -mixed concrete shall be delivered to the WORK, and discharge shall be completed within one hour after the addition of the cement to the aggregates or before the drum has been revolved 250 revolutions, whichever occurs first. 3. The use of non -agitating equipment for transporting ready -mixed concrete will not be permitted. 4. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready -mixed concrete will not be permitted. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 19 5. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready -mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at the batching plant by the ENGINEER. B. Counters 1. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically -actuated counters by which the number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. 2. The counter shall be of the resettable, recording type and shall be mounted in the driver's cab. 3. The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting the mixers at mixing speeds. C. Mixing 1. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not Tess than 70 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment. 2. Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. 3. Materials, including the mixing water, shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing. D. Uniformity 1. Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the mixed batch as discharged is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to consistency, mix, and grading. 2. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4- and 3/4 -point of the load during discharge result in slumps differing by more than one inch when the required slump is 3 inches or less, or if they differ by more than 2 inches when the required slump is more than 3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the WORK unless the causative condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is verified by additional slump tests. 3. Mechanical details of the mixer, such as water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation, general mechanical condition of the unit, and clearance of the drum, shall be checked before a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted. E. Each batch of ready -mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be accompanied by a delivery ticket that is furnished to the ENGINEER in accordance with the Paragraph in Part 1 of this Section entitled "Delivery Tickets." PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING A. Proportioning of the mix shall conform to ACI 301. B. Mixing shall conform to ACI 301. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 20 C. Slumps shall be as indicated. D. Re -tempering of concrete or mortar that has partially hardened will not be permitted. III3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. General • • 1. Earth surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling prior to the placing of any concrete, and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time of placing concrete thereon. 2. The surface shall be free from standing water, mud, and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Joints in Concrete 1. Construction joints are defined as concrete surfaces upon which or against which concrete is to be placed, but placement of concrete has been stopped or interrupted and the ENGINEER has determined that the new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with the concrete previously placed. 2. The surfaces of horizontal joints shall be given a compacted, roughened surface for good bonding. 3. Except where coated joint surfaces have been indicated, the joint surfaces shall be cleaned of laitance, loose or defective concrete, foreign material, and be roughened to a minimum 1/4 -inch amplitude. 4. Cleaning and roughening shall be accomplished by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate) followed by thorough washing. 5. Pools of water shall be removed from the surface of construction joints before the new concrete is placed. 6. In addition to specified waterstops apply one coat of Xypex Concentrate slurry at a rate of 2 Ib./sq. yd. (1 kg/m2) to joint surfaces between concrete pours. Moisten surfaces prior to slurry application. Apply slurry and keep moist for 12 hours then allow slurry to set or dry. Where joint surfaces are not accessible prior to pouring new concrete, contact Xypex Technical Services Representative for assistance 7. Gravel a. After the surfaces have been prepared, each approximately horizontal construction joint shall be covered with a 6 -inch lift of a pea gravel mix. b. The gravel mix shall be placed and spread uniformly. c. Wall concrete shall follow immediately and shall be placed upon the fresh pea gravel mix. C. Placement Interruptions STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 21 1. When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set, the working face shall be given a shape by the use of forms or other means that will secure proper union with subsequent WORK. 2. Such construction joints shall be made only where acceptable to the ENGINEER. D. Embedded Items 1. No concrete shall be placed until the formwork, the installation of parts to be embedded, the reinforcement steel, and the preparation of surfaces involved in the placing have been completed and accepted by the ENGINEER at least 4 hours before the placement of concrete. 2. Surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with dried grout from previous usage shall be cleaned before the surrounding or adjacent concrete is placed. 3. Inserts or other embedded items shall conform to the indicated requirements. 4. Reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and similar items shall be set and secured in the forms at locations as indicated or shown by Shop Drawings, and shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER before any concrete is placed. 5. Accuracy of placement shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. E. Casting New Concrete Against Old Concrete 1. Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (defined as any concrete which is greater than 60 Days old), the surface of the old concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened by hydroblasting or sandblasting to expose aggregate. 2. The joint surface shall be coated with an epoxy bonding agent unless determined otherwise by the ENGINEER. F. Water 1. No concrete shall be placed in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or has been diverted by pipes or other means, and carried out of the forms, clear of the WORK. 2. No concrete shall be deposited underwater nor shall the CONTRACTOR allow still water to rise on any concrete until the concrete has attained its initial set. 3. Water shall not be permitted to flow over the surface of any concrete in such manner and at such velocity as will injure the surface finish of the concrete. 4. Pumping or other necessary dewatering operations for removing ground water, if required, shall be subject to review by the ENGINEER. G. Corrosion Protection 1. Pipe, conduit, dowels, and other ferrous items required to be embedded in concrete construction shall be positioned and supported prior to placement of concrete such that there will be a minimum of 2 inches clearance between said items and any part of the concrete reinforcement. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 22 2. Securing such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement will not be permitted. H. Openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and anchors shall be provided, where practicable, during the placement of concrete. I. Anchor bolts shall be accurately set and shall be maintained in position by templates while embedded in the concrete. J. Cleaning: The surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, grease, loose scale and rust, grout, mortar, and other foreign substances immediately before the concrete is placed. 3.3 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING, AND PLACING A. General 1. The placement of concrete shall conform to the applicable portions of ACI 301 and the indicated requirements. 2. No aluminum materials shall be used in conveying any concrete. B. Non -Conforming WORK or Materials 1. Concrete which during or before placing is found not to conform to the indicated requirements will be rejected and shall be immediately removed from the WORK. 2. Concrete that is not placed in accordance with these requirements or which is of inferior quality shall be removed and replaced. C. Unauthorized Placement 1. No concrete shall be placed except in the presence of an authorized representative of the ENGINEER. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing at least 24 hours in advance of the placement of any concrete. D. Placement in Wall and Column Forms 1. Concrete shall not be dropped through reinforcement steel or into any deep form, nor shall concrete be placed in any form in such a manner as to leave accumulation of mortar on the form surfaces above the placed concrete. 2. In such cases, means such as hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber, or metal shall be used for placing concrete in the forms in a manner that it may reach the place of final deposit without separation. 3. In no case shall the free fall of concrete below the ends of ducts, chutes, or buggies exceed 4 feet in walls and 8 feet in columns. 4. Concrete shall be uniformly distributed during the process of deposition, and in no case after deposition shall any portion be displaced in the forms more than 6 feet in the horizontal direction. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 23 5. Concrete in wall forms shall be deposited in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet, and care shall be exercised to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where such are required for sloping members. 6. Each layer shall be placed while the previous layer is still soft. 7. The rate of placing concrete in wall forms shall not exceed 5 feet of vertical rise per hour. 8. Sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of forms such that the concrete at the places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Casting New Concrete Against Old 1. An epoxy adhesive bonding agent shall be applied to the old surfaces according to the manufacturer's written recommendations. 2. This provision shall not apply to joints where waterstop has been provided. 3. Refer to Section 03 32 00 — Joints in Concrete, for other requirements. F. Conveyor Belts and Chutes 1. Ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of concrete discharge throughout the CONTRACTOR's conveying, hoisting, and placement system shall be designed and arranged such that concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. 2. Conveyor belts, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3. Chutes longer than 50 feet will not be permitted. 4. The minimum slopes of chutes shall be such that concrete of the indicated consistency will readily flow in them. 5. If a conveyor belt is used, it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. 6. Conveyor belts and chutes shall be covered. G. Placement in Slabs 1. Concrete placement in sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top for the full width of the placement. 2. As the WORK progresses, the concrete shall be vibrated and carefully worked around the slab reinforcement, and the surface of the slab shall be screeded in an up-slope direction. H. Temperature of Concrete 1. The temperature of concrete when it is being placed shall be not more than 90 degrees F nor less than 50 degrees F. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 24 2. For sections Tess than 12 inches thick, the temperature of concrete when placed shall be not less than 55 degrees F. I. Hot Weather Procedures 1. If required by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall submit detailed procedures for the production, transportation, placement, protection, curing, and temperature monitoring of concrete during hot weather. 2. The submittal shall include procedures to be implemented upon abrupt changes in weather conditions or equipment failures. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to additional compensation for satisfying the hot weather placement placement requirements below. J. Hot Weather Placement 1. If the temperature of the concrete is 85 degrees F or greater, the time between introducing the cement into the aggregates and discharge shall not exceed 45 minutes. 2. If the concrete is placed when the weather is such that the temperature of the concrete would exceed 90 degrees F, the CONTRACTOR shall employ effective means such as pre -cooling of aggregates, using ice as mixing water, or placing at night as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete below 90 degrees F as it is placed. 3. During the curing period, the maximum temperature decrease measured at the surface of the concrete shall not exceed 50 degrees F in 24 hours nor 5 degrees F in one hour. 3.4 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. General: If the pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory end results, the CONTRACTOR shall discontinue the pumping operation and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment 1. The pumping equipment shall have 2 cylinders and shall be designed to operate with one cylinder in case the other one is not functioning. 2. In lieu of this requirement, the CONTRACTOR may have a standby pump on the Site during pumping. 3. The minimum diameter of the hose conduits shall be in accordance with ACI 304.2R — Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 4. Pumping equipment and hose conduits that are not functioning properly shall be replaced. 5. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete will not be permitted. IIC. Field Control: Concrete samples for slump, air content, and test cylinders shall be taken at the placement end of the hose. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 25 3.5 ORDER OF PLACING CONCRETE A. General 1. The order of placing concrete in the WORK shall be acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2. In order to minimize the effects of shrinkage, the concrete shall be placed in units as bounded by construction joints at the indicated locations. B. The placing of units shall be done by placing alternate units in a manner such that each unit placed shall have cured at least 5 Days for hydraulic structures and 2 Days for all other structures before the contiguous unit or units are placed, except that the corner sections of vertical walls shall not be placed until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 10 Days for hydraulic structures and 4 Days for all other structures. C. Concrete Surfaces 1. The surface of the concrete shall be level whenever a run of concrete is stopped. 2. For a level, straight, intermediate joint on the exposed surface of walls, a wood strip at least 3/4 -inch thick shall be tacked to the forms on these surfaces. 3. The concrete shall be carried approximately 1/2 inch above the underside of the strip. 4. The strip shall be removed one hour after the concrete is placed, and any irregularities in the edge formed by the strip shall be leveled with a trowel and laitance shall be removed. 3.6 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. As concrete is placed in the forms or in excavations, it shall be thoroughly settled and compacted throughout the entire depth of the layer which is being consolidated, into a dense and homogeneous mass, filling all corners and angles, thoroughly embedding the reinforcement, eliminating rock pockets, and bringing only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete. B. Vibrators 1. Vibrators shall be Group 3 in accordance with ACI 309 — Consolidation of Concrete, high speed power vibrators (8000 to 12,000 rpm) of an immersion type in sufficient number and with at least one standby unit as required. 2. Group 2 vibrators may be used only at specific locations when accepted by the ENGINEER. C. Waterstops 1. Care shall be exercised when placing concrete around waterstops. 2. The concrete shall be carefully worked by rodding and vibrating to make sure that air and rock pockets have been eliminated. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 26 3. Where flat -strip type waterstops have been placed horizontally, the concrete shall be worked under the waterstops by hand, making sure that air and rock pockets have been eliminated. 4. Concrete that is surrounding the waterstops shall be given additional vibration over and above that used for adjacent concrete placement to ensure complete embedment of the waterstops in the concrete. D. Concrete in Walls 1. Concrete in walls shall be internally vibrated and at the same time rammed, stirred, or worked with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels, or forked tools until it completely fills the forms or excavations and closes snugly against each surface. 2. Subsequent layers of concrete shall not be placed until the layers previously placed have been worked thoroughly. 3. Vibrators shall be provided in sufficient numbers, with standby units as required, to accomplish the required results within 15 minutes after concrete of the prescribed consistency has been placed in the forms. 4. The vibrating head shall not contact the surfaces of the forms. 5. Care shall be exercised not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.7 FINISHING CONCRETE SURFACES A. General 1. Concrete surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness of any kind, and shall present a finished, smooth, continuous hard surface. 2. Allowable deviations from plumb or level and from the alignment, profiles, and dimensions are defined as tolerances and shall be as indicated. 3. These tolerances are to be distinguished from irregularities in finish as indicated. 4. Aluminum finishing tools shall not be used. B. Formed Surfaces 1. No treatment shall be required after form removal except for curing, repair of defective concrete, and treatment of surface defects. 2. Where architectural finish is required, treatment(s) shall be as indicated. 3. Surface holes larger than %-inch in diameter or deeper than ' -inch are defined as surface defects in basins and exposed walls. C. Unformed Surfaces 1. General STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 27 a. After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, unformed top surfaces of slabs, floors, walls, and curbs shall be brought to a uniform surface with suitable tools. b. Immediately after the concrete has been screeded it shall be treated with a liquid evaporation retardant, and the retardant shall be used again after each operation as necessary to prevent drying shrinkage cracks. 2. The classes of finish for unformed concrete surfaces are defined as follows: a. Finish U1 1) Sufficient leveling and screeding to produce an even, uniform surface with surface irregularities not to exceed 3/8 inch. 2) No further special finish is required. b. Finish U2 1) After sufficient stiffening of the screeded concrete, surfaces shall be float finished with wood or metal floats or with a finishing machine using float blades. 2) Excessive floating of surfaces while the concrete is plastic and dusting of dry cement and sand on the concrete surface to absorb excess moisture will not be permitted. 3) Floating shall be the minimum necessary to produce a surface that is free from screed marks and is uniform in texture. 4) Surface irregularities shall not exceed 1/4 inch. 5) Joints and edges shall be tooled where indicated or as determined by the ENGINEER. c. Finish U3 1) After the Finish U2 surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent excess of fine material from being drawn to the surface, steel troweling shall be performed with firm pressure such as will flatten the sandy texture of the floated surface and produce a dense, uniform surface free from blemishes, ripples, and trowel marks. 2) The finish shall be smooth and free of irregularities. d. Finish U4 1) Trowel the Finish U3 surface to remove local depressions or high points. 2) In addition, the surface shall be given a light broom finish with brooming perpendicular to drainage unless otherwise indicated. 3) The resulting surface shall be sufficiently rough to provide a nonskid finish. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 28 e. Unformed surfaces shall be finished according to the following schedule: UNFORMED SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE Area Finish grade slabs and foundations to be covered with concrete or fill material U1 floors to be covered with grouted tile or topping grout U2 water bearing slabs with slopes 10 percent and less U3 slabs not water bearing U4 top surface of walls U3 3.8 CURING AND DAMPPROOFING A. General: Concrete shall be cured for not less than 7 Days after placement, in accordance with the methods indicated below for the different parts of the WORK. Surface to be Cured or Dampproofed Method unstripped forms 1 construction joints between footings and walls, and between floor slab and columns 2 encasement and ductbank concrete and thrust blocks 3 concrete surfaces not specifically indicated in this Paragraph 4 floor slabs on grade in hydraulic structures 5 slabs not on grade 6 wall sections with forms removed 6 B. Method 1 1. Wooden forms shall be wetted immediately after concrete has been placed and shall be kept wet with water until removal. 2. If steel forms are used the exposed concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet until the forms are removed. 3. If forms are removed within 7 Days of placing the concrete, curing shall be continued in accordance with Method 6, below. C. Method 2 1. The surface shall be covered with burlap mats which shall be kept wet with water for the duration of the curing period, until the concrete in the walls has been placed. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 29 2. No curing compound shall be applied to surfaces cured under Method 2. D. Method 3 1. The surface shall be covered with moist earth not less than 4 hours nor more than 24 hours after the concrete is placed. 2. Earthwork operations that may damage the concrete shall not begin until at least 7 Days after placement of the concrete. E. Method 4 1. The surface shall be sprayed with a liquid curing compound. 2. The compound shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions at a maximum coverage rate of 200 square feet per gallon and in such a manner as to cover the surface with a uniform film that will seal thoroughly. 3. Seal Protection a. Where the curing compound method is used, care shall be exercised to avoid damage to the seal during the 7 -Day curing period. b. If the seal is damaged or broken before expiration of the curing period, the break shall be repaired immediately by the application of additional curing compound over the damaged portion. 4. Wherever curing compound has been applied by mistake to surfaces against which concrete subsequently is to be placed and to which it is to adhere, such compound shall be entirely removed by wet sandblasting just prior to the placing of new concrete. 5. Application Schedule a. The curing compound shall be applied as soon as the concrete has hardened enough to prevent marring on unformed surfaces and within 2 hours after removal of forms. b. Repairs to formed surfaces shall be made within the 2 hour period; provided, however, that any such repairs which cannot be made within the said 2 hour period shall be delayed until after the curing compound has been applied. c. When repairs are to be made to an area on which curing compound has been applied, the area involved shall first be wet -sandblasted to remove the curing compound. 6. At locations where concrete is placed adjacent to a panel which has been coated with curing compound, the panel shall have curing compound reapplied to an area within 6 feet of the joint and to any other location where the curing membrane has been disturbed. 7. Prior to final acceptance of the WORK, visible traces of curing compound shall be removed in such a manner that does not damage the surface finish. F. Method 5 STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 30 1. Until the concrete surface is covered with curing compound, the entire surface shall be kept damp by applying water using nozzles that atomize the flow such that the surface is not marred or washed. III2. The concrete shall be given a coat of curing compound in accordance with Method 4, above. • • 3. Not less than one hour nor more than 4 hours after the curing compound has been applied, the surface shall be wetted with water delivered through a fog nozzle, and concrete -curing blankets shall be placed on the slabs. 4. Curing Blankets a. The curing blankets shall be laid with the edges butted together and with the joints between strips sealed with 2 -inch wide strips of sealing tape or with edges lapped not less than 3 inches, and fastened together with a waterproof cement to form a continuous watertight joint. b. The curing blankets shall be left in place during the 7 -Day curing period and shall not be removed until after concrete for adjacent WORK has been placed. c. If the curing blankets become torn or otherwise ineffective, the CONTRACTOR shall replace damaged sections. d. During the first 3 Days of the curing period, no traffic of any nature and no depositing, temporary or otherwise, of any materials will be permitted on the curing blankets. e. During the remainder of the curing period, foot traffic and temporary depositing of materials that impose light pressure will be permitted only on top of plywood sheets 5/8 -inch minimum thickness, laid over the curing blanket. f. The CONTRACTOR shall add water under the curing blanket as often as necessary to maintain damp concrete surfaces. G. Method 6 1. Method 6 shall apply to both walls and slabs. 2. The concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the application of water for a minimum period of at least 7 Days, beginning immediately after the concrete has reached final set or the forms have been removed. 3. Until the concrete surface is covered with the curing mats, the entire surface shall be kept damp by applying water using nozzles that atomize the flow such that the surface is not marred or washed. 4. Curing Mats a. Heavy curing mats shall be used as a curing medium to retain the moisture during the curing period. b. The curing mats shall be weighted or otherwise held substantially in contact with the concrete surface to prevent dislodging by wind or other causes. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 31 c. Edges shall be continuously held in place. 5. The curing mats and concrete shall be kept continuously wet by the use of sprinklers or other means both during and after normal working hours. 6. Immediately after the application of water has terminated at the end of the curing period, the curing mats shall be removed, the entire concrete surface shall be wetted, and curing compound shall be immediately applied to the entire surface in accordance with Method 4, above. 7. The CONTRACTOR shall dispose of excess water from the curing operation in order to avoid damage to the WORK. 3.9 PROTECTION A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect the concrete against damage until final acceptance. B. Weather Protection 1. Fresh concrete shall be protected from damage due to rain or damaging winds. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever precipitation is imminent or occurring. 3.10 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS A. General 1. Surface defects are defined in Finishing Concrete Surfaces, above. 2. As soon as forms are removed, the exposed concrete surfaces shall be carefully examined and any irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground in order to secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. Plastering or coating of surfaces to be smoothed will not be permitted. 4. No repairs shall be made until after inspection by the ENGINEER. 5. In no case will extensive patching of honeycombed concrete be permitted. 6. Concrete containing minor voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shall be repaired as indicated below. 7. Concrete containing extensive voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shall be completely removed and replaced.. 8. Repairs of surface defects shall be performed promptly. B. Preparation 1. Defective surfaces to be repaired shall be cut back from trueline a minimum depth of 1/2 -inch over the entire area. 2. Feathered edges will not be permitted. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 32 3. Where chipping or cutting tools are not required in order to deepen the area properly, the surface shall be prepared for bonding by the removal of Iaitance and soft material, plus not less than 1/32 -inch depth of the surface film from hard portions by means of an efficient sandblast. 4. After cutting and sandblasting, the surface shall be wetted sufficiently in advance of shooting with shotcrete or with cement mortar such that while the repair material is being applied the surfaces underneath will remain moist but not so wet as to overcome the suction upon which a good bond depends. C. Materials 1. The material used for repair shall consist of a mixture of one sack of cement to 3 cubic feet of sand. 2. For exposed walls, the cement shall contain such a proportion of Atlas White Portland cement as is required to make the color of the patch match the color of the surrounding concrete. D. Holes 1. Holes left by tie -rod cones shall be reamed with suitably toothed reamers in order to leave the surfaces of the holes clean and rough. 2. Holes then shall be repaired in an approved manner with dry -packed cement grout. 3. Holes left by form -tying devices having a rectangular cross section and other imperfections having a depth greater than their least surface dimension shall not be reamed but shall be repaired in an approved manner with dry -packed cement grout. E. Repairs 1. Repairs shall be built up and shaped in such a manner that the completed WORK will conform to the indicated requirements, using approved methods which will not disturb the bond, cause sagging, or cause horizontal fractures. 2. The surfaces of repaired concrete shall receive the same kind and amount of curing treatment as required for the concrete in the repaired section. F. Cracks: Prior to filling any structure with water, cracks shall be repaired in accordance with the requirements of Section 03 01 30 — Concrete Repair and Rehabilitation. 3.11 CONCRETE REPAIR AND REHABILITATION A. All defects and repairs not covered under Treatment of Surface Defects shall be repaired per Section 03 01 30 - Concrete Repair and Rehabilitation. 3.12 CARE AND REPAIR OF CONCRETE A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect concrete against injury or damage from excessive heat, lack of moisture, overstress, or any other cause until Final Acceptance. B. Particular care shall be exercised in order to prevent the drying shrinkage damage of concrete and to avoid roughening or otherwise damaging the concrete surface. STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 33 C. Any concrete found to be damaged, or which may have been originally defective, or which becomes defective at any time prior to the final acceptance of the completed WORK, or which departs from the established fine or grade, or which, for any other reason, does not conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, shall be repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable materials to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. END OF SECTION STANTEC CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 31 00 - 34 • • SECTION 03 32 00 - JOINTS IN CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide joints in concrete, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Joints in concrete structures shall be the types defined below and will be permitted only where indicated, unless specifically accepted by the ENGINEER. 1.2 TYPES OF JOINTS A. Construction Joints 1. When fresh concrete is placed against a hardened concrete surface, the joint between the pours shall be defined as a construction joint. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, joints in water -bearing members shall be provided with a waterstop and/or sealant groove of the shape indicated. B. Contraction Joints 1. Contraction joints are similar to construction joints except that the fresh concrete shall not bond to the hardened surface of the earlier pour. 2. The slab reinforcement shall be stopped 4-1/2 inches from the joint; which is provided with a sleeve -type dowel, in order to allow shrinkage of the concrete of the later pour. 3. Waterstop and/or sealant groove shall be provided where indicated. C. Expansion Joints 1. In order to allow the concrete to expand freely, a space shall be provided between the 2 pours, and the joint shall be formed as indicated. 2. The space shall be obtained by placing a filler joint material against the earlier pour to act as a form for the later pour. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, expansion joints in water bearing members shall be provided with a center -bulb type waterstop. 4. Provide premolded expansion joint material with the edge at the indicated distance below or back from the finished concrete surface. 5. Provide a slightly tapered, dressed and oiled wooden strip secured to or placed at the edge of the expansion joint during concrete placement, and remove the strip later to form a space for the sealing material. STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 1 6. The space so formed shall be filled with a joint sealant material as indicated below. In order to keep the 2 wall or slab elements in line, the joint shall also be provided with a sleeve -type dowel as indicated. D. Control Joints 1. The function of the control joint is to provide a weaker plane in the concrete where shrinkage cracks would likely occur. 2. Formed Groove a. A groove, of the shape and dimensions indicated, shall be formed or saw -cut in the concrete and the groove shall then be filled with a joint sealant material. b. The formed groove shall be placed in the first of the two sections cast at the control joint, in order to assure that the sealant bonds to the second section across the joint and not to the cement paste from the first pour. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings 1. Furnish placement drawings showing the location and types of joints for each structure. 2. Test Reports a. Furnish certified test reports from the sealant manufacturer on the actual batch of material supplied, demonstrating compliance with the indicated requirements. b. Furnish the test reports before using the sealant on the Project. 3. Welding Certification a. Furnish copies of the waterstop welding certification by manufacturer or authorized agent of the manufacturer. b. Every person who is to be involved with waterstop installation shall be required to have individual certification on file with the ENGINEER, stating that the named individual is certified and trained to install waterstop in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and specifications. 4. Furnish manufacturer's information demonstrating compliance of the following with the indicated requirements: a. bearing pad b. neoprene sponge STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 2 c. preformed joint filler d. backing rod e. waterstop f. slip dowels g. PVC tubing C. Samples 1. Prior to production of the material required under this Section, submit qualification samples of waterstops which accurately represent the material being provided. 2. Such samples shall be extruded or molded sections of each size or shape to be installed. 3. The balance of the material to be used shall not be produced until after the ENGINEER has reviewed the qualification samples. D. Certificates 1. Furnish written certification from the manufacturer, as an integral part of the shipping form, that the material shipped to the Site meets or exceeds the indicated physical property requirements. 2. Supplier certificates will not be accepted. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waterstop Inspection 1. Waterstop field joints shall be subject to inspection, and no such WORK shall be scheduled or started without having made prior arrangements with the ENGINEER for the required inspections. 2. Provide not less than 24 hours notice for the scheduling of such inspections. 3. Field joints in waterstops shall be subject to inspection for misalignment, bubbles, inadequate bond, porosity, cracks, offsets, and other defects that would reduce the potential resistance of the material to water pressure at any point. 4. Defective field joints shall be replaced with material that passes inspection, and faulty material shall be removed from the Site and destroyed. B. The following waterstop defects represent a partial list of defects which shall be grounds for rejection: 1. offsets at joints greater than 1/16 inch or 15 percent of material thickness at any point, whichever is less STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT. STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 3 2. exterior cracking at the joint due to incomplete bond, which is deeper than 1/16 inch or 15 percent of material thickness at any point, whichever is less 3. any combination of offset or exterior cracking that will result in a net reduction in the cross-section of the waterstop in excess of 1/16 inch or 15 percent of material thickness at any point, whichever is Tess 4. misalignment of the joint which results in misalignment of the waterstop in excess of 1/2 inch in 10 feet 5. porosity in the welded joint as evidenced by visual inspection 6. bubbles or inadequate bonding which can be detected with a penknife test. (If, while prodding the entire joint with the point of a penknife, the knife breaks through the outer portion of the weld into a bubble, the joint shall be considered defective.) 7. visible signs of separation when the cooled splice is bent by hand at any sharp angle 8. evidence of burned material C. Waterstop Samples 1. Prior to use of the waterstop material in the field, a sample of a prefabricated (shop made fitting) mitered cross and a tee constructed of each size or shape of material to be used shall be submitted. 2. Samples shall be prefabricated (shop made fitting) so that the material and workmanship represent the fittings to be provided. 3. In addition, field samples of prefabricated fittings (crosses, tees, and the like) will be selected at random by the ENGINEER for testing by a laboratory at the OWNER's expense. 4. When tested, the tensile strength across the joints shall be at least 1120 psi for PVC waterstops. D. Construction Joint Sealant 1. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare adhesion and cohesion test specimens at intervals of 5 Days while sealants are being installed. 2. The sealant material shall show no signs of adhesive or cohesive failure when tested in accordance with the following procedure in laboratory and field tests: a. Sealant specimen shall be prepared between 2 concrete blocks (1 -inch by 2 - inch by 3 -inch). b. Spacing between the blocks shall be one inch. c. Coated spacers (2 -inch by 1 -1/2 -inch by 1/2 -inch) shall be used to set and hold sealant cross-sections of 1/2 -inch by 2 -inch with a width of one inch. STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 4 d. The sealant shall be cast and cured in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, except that the curing period shall be not less than 24 hours. e. Following the curing period, the gap between the blocks shall be widened to 1- 1/2 inches, and spacers shall be used to maintain this gap for 24 hours prior to inspection for failure. 1.5 SPECIAL CORRECTION OF DEFECTS REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a 5 -year written warranty of the entire sealant installation against faulty and/or incompatible materials and workmanship, together with a statement that the CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace, to the satisfaction of the OWNER, any defective areas which become evident within the 5 -year period. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Joint materials shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61. 2.2 WATERSTOPS A. PVC Waterstops 1. Waterstops shall be extruded from an elastomeric polyvinyl chloride compound containing the plasticizers, resins, stabilizers, and other materials necessary to meet the indicated requirements of this Section. 2. No reclaimed or scrap material shall be used. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the waterstop manufacturer and shall furnish to the ENGINEER for review, current test reports and a written certification of the manufacturer that the material to be shipped to the Site meets the physical requirements as outlined in the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Specification CRD - 0572 -PVC Waterstops, and those indicated. 4. Flatstrip and Center -Bulb Waterstops a. Flatstrip and center -bulb waterstops shall be manufactured such that at no place shall the thickness of waterstops, including the center bulb type, be Tess than 3/8 inch. b. The waterstop shall be provided with hog rings installed at 12 inches on centers along the waterstop. c. Shapes shall be as indicated, or as acceptable to the ENGINEER. STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 5 5. Multi -Rib Waterstops a. Multi -rib waterstops shall be as indicated or as acceptable to the ENGINEER. b. Prefabricated joint fittings shall be used at intersections of the ribbed -type waterstops. 6. Retrofit Waterstops a. Retrofit waterstops and batten bars shall be as indicated or as acceptable to the ENGINEER. b. The waterstop shall be supplied as a complete system including waterstop, SS batten bar, SS anchor bolts, and epoxy gel. 7. When tested in accordance with the indicated test standards, the waterstop material shall meet or exceed the following requirements: Physical Property, Sheet Material Value ASTM Std Tensile Strength -min, psi 2000 D 638, Type IV Ultimate Elongation -min, percent 350 D 638, Type IV Low Temp Brittleness, max degrees F -35 D 746 Stiffness in Flexure, min, psi 600 D 747 Accelerated Extraction (CRD -0572 Tensile Strength -min, psi 1500 D 638, Type IV Ultimate Elongation, min, percent 300 D 638, Type IV Effect of Alkalies (CRD -0572 Change in Weight, percent plus 0.25/minus 0.10 Change in Durometer, Shore A plus and minus 5 D 2240 Finish Waterstop Tensile Strength -min, psi 1400 D 638, Type IV Ultimate Elongation, min percent 280 D 638, Type IV STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 6 B. Preformed Hydrophilic Waterstop 1. Hydrophilic (bentonite -free) waterstops shall be Hydro -Flex Waterstop as manufactured by Henry Co., or Earthshield Type 20, as manufactured by JP Specialties, or equal. 2. The cross-sectional area of the waterstop shall not be less than 0.5 square inch. 3. Hydrophilic waterstop shall be the type that expands in the presence of water to form a watertight joint seal without damaging the concrete in which it is cast. 4. The waterstop shall be manufactured from butyl rubber with hydrophilic properties. 5. The waterstop shall have a delay coating to inhibit initial expansion due to moisture present in fresh concrete. 6. The minimum expansion ratio of modified chloroprene shall be not less than 2 -to -1 volumetric change in distilled water at 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). 7. The bonding agent for hydrophilic waterstop shall be the manufacturer's recommended adhesive for wet, rough concrete. C. When types of waterstops not listed above are indicated, they shall be subjected to the same requirements as those listed in this Section. 2.3 JOINT SEALANT FOR WATER -BEARING JOINTS A. The joint sealant shall be a polyurethane polymer designed for bonding to concrete which is continuously submerged in water. B. No material will be accepted which has an unsatisfactory history as to bond or durability when used in the joints of water -retaining structures. C. Joint sealant material shall meet the following requirements (73 degrees F and 5 percent R.H.): Work Life, minutes 45 - 180 Time to Reach 20 Shore A Hardness (at 77 degrees F, 200 gram quantity), max 24 hours Ultimate Hardness (ASTM D 2240, Shore A) 20 - 45 Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412), min 175 psi Ultimate Elongation (ASTM D 412), minimum 400 percent Tear Resistance (Die C, ASTM D 624), pounds per inch of thickness, min 75 Color Light Gray STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 JOINTS IN CONCRETE PAGE 03 32 00 - 7 D. Polyurethane sealants for waterstop joints in concrete shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Sealant shall be 2 -part polyurethane with the physical properties of the cured sealant conforming to or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C 920 — Elastomeric Joint Sealant, or Federal Specification TT -S-0227 E(3) - Sealing Compound, Elastomeric Type, Multicomponent, for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing Buildings and Other Structures, for 2 -part material, as applicable. 2. For vertical joints and overhead horizontal joints, only "non -sag" compounds shall be used, conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 920, Class 25, Grade NS, or Federal Specification TT -S-0227 E(3), Type II, Class A. 3. For plane horizontal joints, use the self -leveling compounds meeting the requirements of ASTM C 920 Class 25, Grade P, or Federal Specification TT -S- 0227 E(3), Type I. 4. For joints subject to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic, a compound providing non - tracking characteristics and having a Shore A hardness range of 35 to 45 shall be used. 5. Primer materials, if recommended by the sealant manufacturer, shall conform to the printed recommendations of the manufacturer. E. Sealant Manufacturers 1. Sealants shall be PSI -270 as manufactured by Polymeric Systems Inc., Sikaflex 2C, as manufactured by Sika Corporation, Pelseal (with Viton) 2112/2012, or equal. 2.4 JOINT MATERIALS A. Bearing Pad 1. The bearing pad shall be neoprene conforming to ASTM D 2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications, BC 420, 40 durometer hardness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Neoprene Sponge 1. The sponge shall be neoprene, closed -cell, expanded, conforming to ASTM D 1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber, Type 2C5 -E1. C. Joint Filler 1. Joint filler for expansion joints in waterholding structures shall be neoprene conforming to ASTM D 1056, Type 2C5 -E1. 2. Joint filler material in other locations shall be of the preformed non -extruding type, constructed of cellular neoprene sponge rubber or polyurethane of firm texture. 3. Bituminous fiber type will not be accepted. STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 8 4. Non -extruding and resilient -type preformed expansion joint fillers shall conform to the requirements and tests set forth in ASTM D 1752 - Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction, for Type I, except as otherwise indicated. 2.5 BACKING ROD A. The backing rod shall be an extruded closed -cell, polyethylene foam rod. B. The rod material shall be compatible with the joint sealant material, and shall have a tensile strength of not less than 40 psi and a compression deflection of approximately 25 percent at 8 psi. C. The rod shall be 1/8 inch larger in diameter than the joint width except that a one -inch diameter rod shall be used for a 3/4 -inch wide joint. 2.6 SLIP DOWELS A. Slip dowels in joints shall be smooth epoxy -coated bars conforming to ASTM A 775 - Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. 2.7 PVC TUBING A. PVC tubing in joints shall be SDR 13.5, conforming to ASTM D 2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure -Rated Pipe (SDR Series). PART 3 -- EXECUTION • 3.1 GENERAL • A. Waterstops shall be embedded in the concrete across joints as indicated. B. Waterstops shall be fully continuous for the extent of the joint. C. Splices necessary to provide such continuity shall conform to the printed instructions of the waterstop manufacturer. D. The CONTRACTOR shall take suitable precautions and provide means to support and protect the waterstops during the progress of the WORK, and shall repair or replace any waterstops damaged during progress of the WORK at no additional cost to the OWNER. E. Waterstops shall be stored so as to permit free circulation of air around the waterstop material. F. When any waterstop is installed in the concrete on one side of a joint while the other portion of the waterstop remains exposed to the atmosphere for more than 2 Days, suitable precautions shall be taken to shade and protect the exposed waterstop from direct rays of the sun during the entire exposure time until the exposed portion of waterstop is embedded in concrete. STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 9 3.2 SPLICES IN PVC WATERSTOPS A. Splices in PVC waterstops shall be performed by heat sealing the adjacent waterstop sections in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. It is essential that: 1. The material shall not be damaged by heat sealing. 2. The splices shall have a tensile strength of not less than 80 percent of the unspliced material. 3. The continuity of the waterstop ribs and of its tubular center axis shall be maintained. 4. No edge welding will be accepted. C. Butt joints of the ends of 2 identical waterstop sections may be made while the material is in the forms. D. Other Joints 1. Joints with waterstops involving more than 2 ends to be jointed together, and joints that involve an angle cut, alignment change, or the joining of 2 dissimilar waterstop sections, shall be prefabricated prior to placement in the forms, allowing not less than 24 -inch long strips of waterstop material beyond the joint. 2. Upon inspection and approval, such prefabricated waterstop joint assemblies shall be installed in the forms and the ends of the 24 -inch strips shall be butt -welded to the straight run portions of waterstop in place in the forms. E. Where a centerbulb waterstop intersects and is jointed with a non-centerbulb waterstop, care shall be taken to seal the end of the centerbulb, using additional PVC material if needed. 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Setting Waterstops 1. In order to eliminate faulty installation that may result in joint leakage, particular care shall be taken as to the correct positioning of the waterstops during installation. 2. Adequate provisions shall be made to support and anchor the waterstops during the progress of the WORK and to ensure proper embedment in the concrete. 3. The symmetrical halves of the waterstops shall be equally divided between the concrete pours at the joints. 4. The center axis of the waterstops shall be coincident with the joint openings. 5. Thoroughly work the concrete in the vicinity of joints for maximum density and imperviousness. STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 10 B. Waterstop Placement 1. In placing waterstops in the forms, means shall be provided to prevent them from being folded over by the concrete as it is placed. 2. Waterstops shall be held in place with light wire ties on 12 -inch centers, which shall be passed through hog rings at the edge of the waterstop and tied to the curtain of reinforcing steel. 3. Horizontal waterstops, with their flat face in a vertical plane, shall be held in place with continuous supports to which the top edge of the waterstop shall be tacked. 4. In placing concrete around horizontal waterstops with their flat face in a horizontal plane, the concrete shall be worked under the waterstops by hand in order to avoid the formation of air and rock pockets. C. In placing centerbulb waterstops in expansion joints, the centerbulb shall be centered on the joint filler material. D. Waterstop in vertical wall joints shall terminate 6 inches from the top of the wall, where such waterstop does not connect with any other waterstop and is not to be connected to a future concrete placement. E. Joint Location 1. Construction joints and other types of joints shall be provided where indicated. 2. If not indicated, construction joints shall be provided at a 25 -foot maximum spacing. 3. Where joints are indicated to be spaced greater than 40 feet apart, additional joints shall be provided to maintain the 25 -foot maximum spacing. 4. The location of joints, regardless of type, shall be submitted for acceptance by the ENGINEER. F. Joint Preparation 1. Special care shall be used in preparing concrete surfaces at joints where bonding between 2 sections of concrete is required. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, such bonding shall be required at every horizontal joint in walls. 3. Surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with Section 03 31 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. G. Retrofit Joint Preparation 1. Existing surfaces to receive a retrofit waterstop shall be clean and free from any loose or foreign material. 2. The surface shall be given a light sandblast or hydroblast finish to 1/8 -inch amplitude prior to the application of epoxy and waterstop. STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 11 H. Construction Joint Sealant 1. Construction joints in water -bearing floor slabs and elsewhere as indicated shall be provided with tapered grooves which shall be filled with a construction joint sealant. 2. The material used to form the tapered grooves shall be left in the grooves until just before the grooves are cleaned and filled with joint sealant. 3. After removing the forms from the grooves, laitance and fins shall be removed, and the grooves shall be sand blasted. 4. The grooves shall be allowed to thoroughly dry, after which they shall be blown out and immediately thereafter they shall be primed and filled with the construction joint sealant. 5. The primer shall be furnished by the sealant manufacturer, and no sealant shall be used without a primer. 6. Care shall be used to completely fill the sealant grooves. 7. Areas designated to receive a sealant fillet shall be thoroughly cleaned as outlined for the tapered grooves prior to application of the sealant. I. The primer and sealant shall be placed strictly in accordance with the printed recommendations of the manufacturer, taking special care to properly mix the sealant prior to application. J. The sides of the sealant groove shall not be coated with bond breaker, curing compound, or any other substance which would interfere with proper bonding of the sealant. K. The sealant shall achieve final cure at least 7 Days before the structure is filled with water. L. The sealant shall be installed by a competent waterproofing specialty contractor with a successful record of performance in similar installations. M. Mixing 1. Catalyst -cured, 2 -part materials shall be thoroughly and uniformly mixed, and special care shall be taken to properly mix the sealer before its application. 2. Before any sealer is placed, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange to have workers performing the WORK carefully instructed on the proper method of mixing and application by a representative of the sealant manufacturer. N. Failure to Cure 1. Any joint sealant that fails to fully and properly cure after the manufacturer's recommended curing time for the conditions of the WORK shall be completely removed, and the groove shall be thoroughly sandblasted to remove traces of the uncured or partially cured sealant and primer. STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 12 2. The groove shall be re -sealed with the indicated joint sealant. 3. Costs of such removal, joint treatment, re -sealing, and appurtenant WORK shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility as part of the WORK. O. Hydrophilic Waterstop 1. Where a hydrophilic waterstop is indicated, it shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations except as may be modified in this Section. 2. When requested by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish technical assistance in the field. 3. Hydrophilic waterstop shall only be used where complete confinement by concrete is provided. 4. Hydrophilic waterstop shall not be used in expansion or contraction joints nor in the first 6 inches of a non -intersecting joint. 5. Location a. The hydrophilic waterstop shall be located as near as possible to the center of the joint, and it shall be continuous around the entire joint. b. The minimum distance from the edge of the waterstop to the face of the member shall be 5 inches. 6. Placement a. Where the thickness of the concrete member to be placed on the hydrophilic waterstop is less than 12 inches, the waterstop shall be placed in grooves formed or ground into the concrete. b. The groove shall be at least 3/4 inch deep and 1-1/4 inches wide. c. When placed in the groove, the minimum distance from the edge of the waterstop to the face of the member shall be 2-1/2 inches. 7. Where a hydrophilic waterstop is used in combination with PVC waterstop, the hydrophilic waterstop shall overlap the PVC waterstop for a minimum of 6 inches and shall be adhered to PVC waterstop by a single component water -swelling sealant as recommended by the manufacturer. 8. The hydrophilic waterstop shall not be installed where the air temperature falls below the manufacturer's recommended range. 9. Preparation a. The concrete surface under the hydrophilic waterstop shall be smooth and uniform, and the concrete shall be ground smooth if needed. STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 13 b. Alternatively, the hydrophilic waterstop shall be bonded to the surface using an epoxy grout that completely fills voids and irregularities beneath the waterstop material. c. Prior to installation, the concrete surface shall be wire brushed to remove any Iaitance or other materials that may interfere with the bonding of epoxy. 10. Securing a. The hydrophilic waterstop shall be secured in place with concrete nails and washers at 12 -inch maximum spacing. b. The above requirement shall be in addition to the adhesive recommended by the manufacturer. P. Retrofit Waterstop 1. Retrofit waterstops shall be set in a bed of epoxy over a sandblasted surface with stainless steel batten bars and 1/4 -inch diameter stainless steel anchors at 6 inches on -center, staggered, and in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION STANTEC JOINTS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 32 00 - 14 • SECTION 03 60 00 - GROUTING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide grout, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. For concrete repair material and procedures, reference Section 03 01 30 — Concrete Repair and Rehabilitation. B. Grout provided as a base support for mechanical and electrical equipment shall conform to manufacturer's requirements and the requirements of this section. C. The following types of grout are covered in this Section: 1. Non -Shrink Grout 2. High Strength Non -Shrink Grout 3. Non -Shrink Grout for High Sulfate Environments 4. Non -Shrink Epoxy Grout 5. Topping Grout and Concrete/Grout Fill 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. ASTM C109 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement IIIMortars (Using 2 -in. or [50 -mm] Cube Specimens) B. ASTM C307 -- Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical -Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings C. ASTM C531 — Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical -Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes D. ASTM C579 — Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical -Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes E. ASTM C580 — Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical -Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes F. ASTM C827 — Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures G. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Shear H. ASTM C1090 — Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of Cylindrical Specimens from Hydraulic -Cement Grout I. ASTM C1107 — Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout ID(Nonshrink) STANTEC GROUTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 60 00 -1 J. ASTM C1116 — Standard Specification for Fiber -Reinforced Concrete K. ASTM C1339 — Standard Test Method for Flowability and Bearing Area of Chemical - Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Contractor Submittals. 1. Certified testing lab reports for tests indicated herein. 2. Test results and service report from the field tests and the demonstration and training session verifying the requirements indicated herein. 3. Manufacturer's literature containing instructions and recommendations on the mixing, handling, placement, curing, and appropriate uses for each type of grout used in the WORK, and location of use. 4. Documentation indicating that the grouts contain no chlorides or other chemicals that cause corrosion. 5. Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheet documenting composition of grouts. 6. Submit manufacturer's written warranty as indicated herein. 7. Name and telephone number of grout manufacturer's representative who will give on- site service. The representative shall have at least one year of experience with the indicated grouts. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Tests 1. Compression test specimens will be taken from the first placement of each type of grout, and at intervals thereafter selected by the ENGINEER. The specimens will be made by the ENGINEER or its representative. 2. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for cement grout and cement based non -shrink grout will be performed in accordance with ASTM C1107 at intervals during construction selected by the ENGINEER. 3. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for topping grout and concrete/grout fill will be performed in accordance with Section 03 31 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete at intervals during construction selected by the ENGINEER. 4. Compression tests and fabrication of specimens for epoxy grouts will be performed in accordance with ASTM C579, Method B, at intervals during construction selected by the ENGINEER. A set of 3 specimens will be made for testing at 7 Days and each earlier time period as appropriate. 5. The cost of laboratory tests on grout will be paid by the OWNER except where test results show the grout to be defective. In such case, the CONTRACTOR shall pay for the tests, removal and replacement of Defective Work, and re -testing, all as part of the WORK. STANTEC GROUTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 60 00 -2 6. The CONTRACTOR shall assist the ENGINEER in obtaining specimens for testing and shall furnish materials necessary for fabricating the test specimens. B. Construction Tolerances: Construction tolerances shall be as indicated in Section 03 31 00 unless indicated otherwise. C. Pre -Installation Demonstration and Training 1. Non -Shrink Grouts a. The grout manufacturer shall give a demonstration and training session for the cement based and epoxy non -shrink grouts to be used on the project before any installation of grout is allowed. b. The CONTRACTOR shall transport the test cubes to an independent test laboratory, obtain the test reports, and report these demonstration and training test cube strengths to the ENGINEER. 1.5 SPECIAL CORRECTION OF DEFECTS PROVISIONS A. Manufacturer's Warranty 1. Furnish one year warranty for WORK provided under this section. 2. Manufacturer's warranty shall not contain a disclaimer limiting responsibility to the purchase price of products or materials. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS III2.1 APPLICATION A. Unless indicated otherwise, grouts shall be provided as listed below whether indicated on the Drawings or not. • Application Type of Grout Under precast concrete elements High Strength Non -Shrink Storage tanks and other non -motorized equipment or machinery under 30 horsepower Non -Shrink Motorized equipment over 30 horsepower and equipment under 30 horsepower but subject to severe shock Toads and high vibrations Non -Shrink Epoxy Filling biockout spaces for embedded items such as railing posts, gate guide frames, etc. Non -Shrink Toppings and concrete/grout fill less than 3 -inches thick Topping Grout Toppings and concrete/grout fill greater than 3 -inches thick Structural Concrete per 03 31 00 STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 GROUTING PAGE 03 60 00 -3 Anchor bolts, anchor rods and reinforcing steel required to be set in epoxy or adhesive. Post Installed Anchors in Concrete per Section 05 0519 Repair of holes and defects in concrete members. Concrete Repair and Rehabilitation per Section 03 01 30 2.2 NON -SHRINK GROUTS A. General 1. All non -shrink grout shall be cement based unless otherwise noted. 2. Cement -based non -shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, fluid, non -gas liberating, non-metallic, cement type grout requiring only the addition of water. Cement from kilns burning metal -rich hazardous waste fuel shall not be used. 3. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each non -shrink grout shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. 4. The manufacturer's product information shall state the acceptability of the non -shrink grout for the intended purpose and location. 5. Grout shall not contain chlorides or additives that may contribute to corrosion. 6. Grout placed in continuously wet environments or in exterior conditions shall not contain gypsum or calcium salt. 7. All cement -based non -shrink grout shall have the following general properties: a. Meet the requirements of ASTM C1107. b. Have a maximum early age height change of 4.0 percent expansion, and shall have no shrinkage (0.0 percent) in accordance with ASTM C827. The grout when tested shall not bleed or segregate at maximum allowed water. c. No shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum of 0.3 percent expansion in the hardened state when tested in accordance with ASTM C1090. d. A minimum bond strength (concrete to grout) of 1900 psi per modified ASTM C882. 8. Environmental and ambient conditions shall be a factor in the selection of non -shrink grout. If a non -shrink grout is to be used in a high sulfate environment, marine environment, high temperature environment, or freeze/thaw environment, the manufacturer's product information shall state the acceptability for each environmental condition. 9. Grout shall be suitable for use in high sulfate environments. B. Non -Shrink Grout STANTEC GROUTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 60 00 -4 1. Non -Shrink Grout shall have a minimum 28 Day compressive strength of 5000 psi when mixed at a fluid consistency and tested per ASTM C109. 2. Non -Shrink Grout shall be Five Star Grout by Five Star Products, Five Star Fluid Grout 100 by Five Star Products, Sikagrout 212 by Sika Corporation, or approved equal. C. High Strength Non -Shrink Grout 1. High Strength Non -Shrink Grout shall have a minimum 28 -Day compressive strength of 10,000 psi when mixed at a fluid consistency and tested per ASTM C109. 2. High Strength Non -Shrink Grout shall be Five Star High Strength Grout by Five Star Products, Sikagrout 428 FS, or approved equal. D. Non -Shrink Grout for High Sulfate Environments 1. Non -Shrink Grout for High Sulfate Environments shall have a minimum 28 Day compressive strength of 7000 psi when mixed at a fluid consistency and tested per ASTM C109. 2. Non -Shrink Grout for High Sulfate Environments shall be Five Star Special Grout 150 by Five Star Products, or approved equal. 2.3 NON -SHRINK EPDXY GROUT A. Non -shrink epoxy grout shall be a flowable, non -shrink, 100 percent solids system. The epoxy grout system shall have 3 components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, each premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any non-reactive diluents. B. The manufacturer's product information shall state the acceptability of the epoxy grout for the intended purpose and location. C. Variation of component ratios is not permitted unless specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each container in which the materials are packaged. D. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous reactive diluents are not acceptable. E. Non -shrink epoxy grout shall have a negligible (less than 0.0006 in/in) length change after hardening, and a coefficient of thermal expansion less than 0.00003 in/in F when tested in accordance with ASTM C531. F. Non -shrink epoxy grout shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 9000 psi in 24 hours and 13,000 psi in seven days when tested in accordance with ASTM C579, method B. G. The effective bearing area shall be a minimum of 85 percent effective bearing area (EBA) in accordance with ASTM C1339, for bearing area and flow. H. The chemical formulation of the non -shrink epoxy grout shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application. Do not reduce aggregate loading or add solvents to increase fiowability. STANTEC GROUTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 60 00 -5 I. Non -shrink epoxy grout shall have the following minimum properties when tested at 7 Days: 1. Minimum bond strength to concrete of 3000 psi per ASTM C882 modified. 2. Minimum bond strength to steel of 1700 psi per ASTM C882 modified. 3. Minimum flexural strength of 2500 psi per ASTM C580. 4. Minimum tensile strength of 2000 psi per ASTM C307. J. Non -shrink epoxy grout shall be Five Star DP Epoxy Grout by Five Star Products, Inc., Masterflow 648 by BASF Corporation, Sikadur 42 Grout -Pak by Sika Corporation, or approved equal. 2.4 TOPPING GROUT AND CONCRETE/GROUT FILL A. Where fill thickness is 3 -inches or greater, structural concrete as indicated in Section 03 31 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete, may be used when accepted by the ENGINEER. Fiber reinforcing shall be as indicated below. B. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete/grout fill for built-up surfaces of tanks, channels, and basin bottoms shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixtures proportioned and mixed as indicated. Materials and procedures indicated for structural concrete in Section 03 31 00 - Cast -in -Place Concrete, shall apply unless indicated otherwise. C. Topping grout and concrete/grout fill shall contain a minimum of 564 pounds of cement per cubic yard with a maximum water/cement ratio of 0.45. D. Coarse aggregate shall be graded as follows: U.S. Standard Sieve Size Percent By Weight Passing 1/2 in 100 3/8 in 90-100 No. 4 20-55 No. 8 5-30 No. 16 0-10 No. 30 0 E. Final mix design shall be as determined by trial mix design as indicated in Section 03 31 00. F. Topping grout and concrete grout/fill shall contain air -entraining agent per Section 03 31 00. STANTEC GROUTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 60 00 -6 G. Strength: Minimum compressive strength of topping grout and concrete/grout fill at 28 days shall be 4000 psi. H. Topping grout where the fill thickness is 3 inches or greater shall contain fiber reinforcing, unless otherwise shown on the Contract Documents. Fiber reinforcing shall be 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers specifically manufactured in a blended gradation for use as concrete secondary reinforcement. Fibers shall be added at a rate of 1.5 pounds per cubic yard of concrete. Fibers shall conform to ASTM C1116. 2.5 CURING MATERIALS A. Curing materials shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 00 and as recommended by the manufacturer of prepackaged grouts. 2.6 CONSISTENCY A. The consistency of grout shall be as necessary to completely fill the space to be grouted for the particular application. Dry pack consistency is defined such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow. Where "dry pack" is called for in the Contract Documents, it shall mean a grout of that consistency; the type of grout to be used shall be as indicated herein for the particular application. B. The slump for topping grout and concrete/grout fill shall be adjusted to match placement and finishing conditions but shall not exceed 4 -inches. 2.7 MEASUREMENT OF INGREDIENTS A. Measurements for cement grout shall be made accurately by volume using containers. Shovel measurements shall not be allowed. B. Prepackaged grouts shall have ingredients measured by means recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Grout shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.2 GENERAL A. CONTRACTOR shall arrange for the manufacturer of prepackaged grouts to provide on- site technical assistance within 72 hours of request, as part of the WORK. B. Grout shall not be placed until base concrete or masonry has attained its design strength, unless authorized otherwise by the ENGINEER. C. When cementitious grouts are used on concrete surfaces, the concrete surface shall be saturated with water for 24 hours prior to placement. Upon completion of the saturation period, excess water shall be removed with clean, oil free compressed air prior to grouting. Concrete substrate shall not be wet prior to placement of epoxy grouts. D. Surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 00. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the adjacent concrete unless otherwise indicated. STANTEC GROUTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 60 00 -7 E. Surfaces that will be in contact with grout shall be free of dirt, loose rust, oil, wax, grease, curing compounds, laitance, loose concrete, and other deleterious materials. F. Shade the WORK from sunlight for at least 24 hours before and 48 hours after grouting. G. Contact the grout manufacturer's representative for assistance on hot and cold weather grouting techniques and precautions if applicable. 3.3 GROUTING PROCEDURES A. General: Mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, curing, and other means of execution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer. B. Structural, equipment, tank, and piping support bases shall be grouted, unless indicated otherwise. 1. The original concrete shall be blocked out or finished off a sufficient distance below the plate to provide for a minimum one -inch thickness of grout or other thickness if indicated. 2. After the base plate has been set in position at the proper elevation by steel wedges or double nuts on the anchor bolts, the space between the bottom of the plate and the original pour of concrete shall be filled with non -shrink -type grout through a headbox of appropriate size. The mixture shall be of a fluid consistency and poured continuously into the space between the plate and the base concrete. Forms for grout shall be tight against retaining surfaces, and joints shall be sealed as recommended by the grout manufacturer to be liquid -tight. Forms shall be coated as recommended by the grout manufacturer for easy form release. Where this method of placement is not practical or where required by the ENGINEER, alternate grouting methods shall be submitted by the CONTRACTOR for acceptance by the ENGINEER. 3. Concrete equipment pads for equipment bases that will be epoxy -grouted shall be sized so that, when the equipment base is fully grouted, the epoxy grout is stopped not less than 4 -inches from the edge of the pad. C. Topping Grout and Concrete/Grout Fill 1. Mechanical, electrical, and finish WORK shall be completed prior to placement of topping or concrete/grout fill. To ensure bonding to the base slab, the base slab shall be given an exposed aggregate finish. Alternatively, where accepted by the ENGINEER, the base slab shall be given a roughened textured surface by a close - spaced rake while the surface is green. After curing, high pressure washing shall expose the aggregates and produce not less than a 3/16 -inch amplitude roughness. Jackhammers or chipping hammers shall not be used. 2. The minimum thickness of grout topping and concrete/grout fill shall be one -inch. Where the finished surface of concrete/grout fill is to form an intersecting angle of Tess than 45 degrees with the concrete surface it is to be placed against, a key shall be formed in the concrete surface at the intersection point. The key shall be a minimum of 3-1/2 inches wide by 1-1/2 inches deep. 3. The base slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted to saturated surface dry (SSD) condition per the International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) -- Technical Guide for Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and STANTEC GROUTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 60 00 -8 Polymer Overlays, prior to placing topping grout and grout fill. No topping grout shall be placed until the slab is completely free from standing pools or ponds of water. A thin coat of neat cement grout shall be broomed into the surface of the slab just before topping or fill placement. The neat cement grout shall not be allowed to dry before topping placement. If it does dry, it must be immediately removed using wet stiff brooms and reapplied. The topping and fill shall be compacted by rolling or thorough tamping, brought to established grade, and floated. Grouted fill for tank and basin bottoms where scraping mechanisms are to be installed shall be screeded by blades attached to the revolving mechanism of the equipment in accordance with the procedures outlined by the equipment manufacturer after the grout is brought to the established grade. Coat surface with evaporation retardant as needed to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks. 4. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. 5. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots which shall be immediately eliminated. When the topping or fill has hardened sufficiently, it shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free from pinholes and other imperfections. An approved type of mechanical trowel may be used as an assist in this operation, but the last pass over the surface shall be by hand -troweling. During finishing, no water, dry cement, or mixture of dry cement and sand shall be applied to the surface. 6. As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound. After the topping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by the ENGINEER, the tank shall be filled with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for 14 days. 3.4 CONSOLIDATION A. Grout shall be placed in such a manner, for the consistency necessary for each application, to assure that the space to be grouted is completely filled. END OF SECTION STANTEC GROUTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 03 60 00 -9 SECTION 05 05 19 — POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide post -installed anchors and appurtenances, complete and in place, as indicated in accordance with the Contract documents. B. Unless otherwise indicated, drilled concrete anchors shall be adhesive anchors. C. Section Includes: 1. Adhesive anchors 2. Expansion anchors 3. Screw anchors 4. Undercut anchors (dynamic loading) 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Definitions 1. Epoxy anchors are considered to be adhesive anchors. 2. Expansion anchors, screw anchors, and undercut anchors are considered to be mechanical anchors. B. References 1. FBC — 7th Edition Florida Building Code (2020) 2. IBC 2015 — International Building Code 3. ACI 318 — Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-14) and Commentary 4. ACI 350 — Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete Structures and Commentary (ACI 350-06) 5. ACI 355.2 — Qualification of Post Installed Mechanical Anchors in Concrete and Commentary (ACI 355.2-07). 6. ASCE 7 — ASCE Standard ASCE/SEI 7-1016 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures 7. ASCE 41-13 - ASCE Standard ASCE/SEI 41-13 Seismic Evaluation and Retrofit of Existing Buildings 8. ICC ES AC 193 — Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements 9. ICC ES AC 308 —Post Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements 10. NSF 61 — NSF/ANSI 61-2016 Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects STANTEC POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 05 19- 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Contractor Submittals. IIIB. Submit the following: 1. Product data and technical information 2. Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for adhesives 3. Manufacturer's literature containing installation instructions and appropriate uses for each type of post -installed anchor and location of use 4. Current ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES Evaluation Reports 5. Certification for each installer demonstrating that they have been qualified in accordance with the Quality Assurance requirements below C. No substitution for the indicated anchors will be considered unless accompanied with an ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES report verifying strength and material equivalency. D. Complete structural calculations and anchorage details shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor for all anchors and anchor groups that are shown but not completely detailed (type, size, location, spacing and embedment) on the Contract Documents. Calculations and anchorage details shall be completed and submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage. 1. Where adhesive anchors are used for structural applications (such as dowels between new and existing concrete) and an embedment depth is not shown on the contract documents, the anchor shall be installed in accordance with Method 1 or Method 2 below: a. Method 1: The minimum depth of embedment shall be greater than or equal to the development length (Id) determined in accordance with ACI 318 for a cast in place reinforcing bar of the same diameter and grade, unless it can be shown by calculation that the anchor spacing and edge distance is sufficient to develop the tensile strength of the anchor in a lesser depth of embedment. Calculations shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. b. Method 2: Adhesive anchors in concrete that cannot develop the tensile capacity of the steel element may be used to transfer forces, provided that the loads on the anchor are amplified by the system overstrength factor (CI.) in Table 12.2-1 of ASCE 7-16, or where unreduced forces are used in accordance with ASCE 41-13 for existing structures. Calculations shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Special inspection for all post -installed anchor installations shall be provided: 1. As recommended or required by the ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES report. 2. As required by the enforceable building code. 3. As otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. STANTEC POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 05 19- 2 B. The most stringent of the above requirements shall be used. The cost of Special Inspection of post -installed anchors shall be paid for by the OWNER. C. Before installing adhesive anchors in the WORK, anchor installers shall be trained and qualified at the Site by the manufacturer's representative. Training and qualification for each installer shall include at least: 1. Hole drilling procedure, hole preparation and cleaning techniques, adhesive injection technique and dispenser training/maintenance, rebar dowel preparation and installation, and proof loading if required. 2. Each installer shall be re -qualified every 6 months for the duration of the project by the same qualifying procedure. D. Before installing mechanical anchors in the WORK, anchor installers shall be trained and qualified at the Site by the manufacturer's representative. Training and qualification for each installer shall include at least: 1. Hole drilling procedure, hole preparation and cleaning techniques, and torqueing. 2. Each installer shall be re -qualified every 6 months for the duration of the project by the same qualifying procedure. E. Defective anchors noted by the Special Inspector shall be replaced and re -installed by the CONTRACTOR without any additional compensation. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to job site in manufacturer's or distributor's packaging undamaged, complete with installation instructions. B. Protect and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent damage or deterioration. C. Anchoring adhesives shall be stored at temperatures prescribed by the manufacturer and must not be used beyond the expiration date. 1.6 SITE CONDITIONS A. Post -installed anchors shall be installed in concrete having a minimum age of 21 days at time of anchor installation. B. The anchor or fastener coating, plating, or steel type must provide suitable corrosion resistance for the environment in which the anchor or fastener is installed. Anchors, nuts, and washers in the locations listed below shall be fabricated from type 316 or 304 stainless steel: 1. buried locations 2. submerged locations 3. locations subject to seasonal or occasional flooding 4. inside hydraulic structures below the top of the structure STANTEC POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 05 19- 3 5. inside buried vaults, manholes, and structures that do not drain through a gravity sewer or to a sump with a pump 6. chemical handling areas 7. inside trenches, containment walls, and curbed areas 8. locations indicated or designated by the ENGINEER to be provided with stainless steel anchors. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 ADHESIVE ANCHORS A. General 1. The adhesive anchor system shall consist of: 1) adhesive product; and 2) threaded rod or reinforcing bar insert. The complete system shall be compatible as required by the adhesive manufacturer. 2. Adhesives shall be injectable, two -component, cartridge -type systems dispensed and mixed through a static mixing nozzle supplied by the manufacturer. 3. The evaluation report issued by ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES shall state the acceptability of the adhesive anchor for the intended purpose and location. 4. Adhesive anchors shall be permitted when regular ambient temperatures are consistent with manufacturer's recommendation for long and short term temperatures. 5. Adhesive anchors shall not be used where anchors are subject to vibration or fire. 6. Adhesive anchors shall not be used in overhead applications. 7. Where required, adhesive shall be capable of being used in submerged applications once cured. B. Adhesive Anchors in Concrete 1. Threaded rod inserts shall meet the requirements of Section05 50 00- Miscellaneous Metalwork. 2. Reinforcing dowel inserts shall meet the material requirements of Section 03 21 00 — Reinforcement Steel and 03 31 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3. Adhesive for use in concrete adhesive anchors shall be certified for use in cracked concrete applications in accordance with ICC -ES AC 308. 4. Where not detailed on the drawings, adhesive anchors shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318 as amended by the specific design provisions of ICC -ES AC 308. 5. Adhesive anchors shall have an evaluation report issued by ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES and shall have been tested and qualified for performance in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance ICC -ES AC308 to resist static, wind, and earthquake (Seismic Design Categories A through F). STANTEC POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 05 19- 4 6. Adhesive anchors for concrete shall be Pure110+ by Powers Fasteners, HIT -RE 500 V3 by Hilti or SET -XP by Simpson Strong -Tie, or equal. 2.2 EXPANSION ANCHORS A. General 1. Expansion anchors are post -installed torque -controlled mechanical expansion anchors used to resist structural loads. 2. Expansion anchors shall be an imperial sized, threaded stud with an integral cone expander, expansion clip, nut and washer. 3. Lead caulking anchors will not be permitted. 4. Non -embedded buried or submerged anchors shall be fabricated from stainless steel. 5. The evaluation report issued by ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES shall state the acceptability of the expansion anchor for the intended purpose and location. 6. Anchors subjected to dynamic or vibratory loading shall be suitable for the intended loading and location as indicated in the manufacturer's technical product data. B. Expansion Anchors for Concrete 1. Anchors shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318, which requires post -installed mechanical anchors to be qualified according to ACI 355.2. 2. Anchors shall have an evaluation report issued by ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES and have been tested and qualified for performance in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance with ACI 355.2 and ICC -ES AC193. 3. Expansion anchors shall be Strong -Bolt 2 by Simpson Strong -Tie, Kwik -Bolt TZ by Hilti, Power -Stud+ SD1 by Powers Fasteners, or equal. 2.3 SCREW ANCHORS A. General 1. Screw anchors used in exterior and corrosive environments shall be fabricated from stainless steel. 2. The evaluation report issued by ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES shall state the acceptability of the screw anchor for the intended purpose and location. 3. Anchors subjected to dynamic or vibratory loading shall be suitable for the intended loading and location as indicated in the manufacturer's technical product data. B. Screw Anchors for Concrete 1. Anchors shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318 as amended by the specific design provisions of ICC -ES AC193. 2. Anchors shall have an evaluation report issued by ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES and have been tested and qualified for performance in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance with ICC -ES AC193. STANTEC POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 05 19- 5 3. Screw anchors for concrete shall be Titen HD by Simpson Strong -Tie, Kwik HUS -EZ (KH -EZ) by Hilti, or equal. III2.4 UNDERCUT ANCHORS A. General 1. Undercut anchors are post -installed mechanical anchors that require pre -drilling and a special undercut notch configuration cut into the concrete before installation. 2. Self -undercutting anchors are post -installed torque -controlled mechanical anchors that cut their own undercut notch by application of a setting torque that forces a sleeve over a cone. 3. The evaluation report issued by ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES shall state the acceptability of the undercut anchor for the intended purpose and location. 4. Anchors subjected to dynamic or vibratory loading shall be suitable for the intended loading and location as indicated in the manufacturer's technical product data. 5. Undercut anchors used in exterior and corrosive environments shall be fabricated from stainless steel. B. Undercut Anchors for Concrete 1. Anchors shall be designed in accordance with ACI 318 as amended by the specific design provisions of ICC -ES AC193. 2. Anchors shall have an evaluation report issued by ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES and have been tested and qualified for performance in cracked and uncracked concrete in accordance with ACI 355.2 and ICC -ES AC193. 3. Undercut anchors for concrete shall be HDA by Hilti, Atomic+ by Powers Fasteners, or equal. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Post -installed anchors shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, the ICC -ES or IAPMO-UES report, and project specific design requirements indicated on the Contract Documents or in the design calculations provided by the CONTRACTOR per Section 1.3.D. B. Where holes are drilled in concrete, holes shall be accurately and squarely drilled, and the holes shall be cleaned in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Post -installed anchors shall not be installed until the concrete has reached the required 21 days or per manufacturer's requirements, whichever is longer. D. Acceptable installation and performance temperature ranges shall be verified with manufacturer's literature prior to installation. Minimum substrate temperatures shall be maintained during the full curing period as required by the manufacturer. E. Adhesive anchors shall not be loaded until the adhesive has reached its indicated strength in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. STANTEC POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 05 19- 6 F. The CONTRACTOR shall identify the position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes. Care shall be exercised in drilling to avoid damaging existing reinforcing or embedded items. The location of drilled holes shall be adjusted to avoid drilling through or cutting any existing reinforcing bars or embedded items. Notify the ENGINEER if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Take precautions as necessary to avoid damaging prestressing tendons, electrical and communications conduit, and piping. G. Core drilling of holes is not allowed. H. Identification of reinforcing steel and/or embedded items, relocation of drilled holes and adjustments or modifications to anchored or fastened items shall be considered part of the WORK and shall be provided at no additional cost to the OWNER. I. All abandoned drilled holes shall be repaired in accordance with Section 03 01 30 Concrete Repair and Rehabilitation at no additional cost to the OWNER. END OF SECTION STANTEC POST -INSTALLED ANCHORS IN CONCRETE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 05 19- 7 SECTION 05 50 00 — MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide miscellaneous metalwork and appurtenances, complete and in place, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications MIL -G-18015 A (3) (Ships) Aluminum Planks. (6063-T6) MIL -PRF -907F Antiseize Thread Compound, High Temperature B. Codes OSHA 1927.10 Fixed Ladders C. Commercial Standards AA-M32C22A41 Aluminum Assn. AASHTO HS -20 Truck Loading AISC Manual of Steel Construction • AISI Design of Light Gauge, Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members ASTM A 36 Carbon Structural Steel ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings • ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless ASTM A 123 Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A 193 Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service ASTM A 194 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure and High Temperature Service ASTM A 307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength ASTM A 325 Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 1 ASTM A 500 Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes ASTM A 992 Steel for Structural Shapes for Use in Building Framing ASTM F 1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55 and 105-ksi Yield Strength ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel ANSI/AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code - Aluminum ANSI/AWS QC1 Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings 1. Shop Drawings shall conform to AISC recommendations and specifications, and shall show holes, and the like, as may be required for other parts of the WORK. 2. Shop Drawings shall include complete details of members and connections, anchor bolt layouts, schedules for fabrication procedures, and diagrams for the sequence of erection. C. Grating 1. Submit layout drawings for grating, showing the direction of span, type and depth of grating, size and shape of grating panels, seat angle details, and details of grating hold down fasteners. 2. Submit load and deflection tables for each style and depth of grating used. D. Anchor Submittals 1. For post installed anchors in concrete other than powder -drive pins or impact anchors, refer to Section 05 05 19 — Post Installed Anchors in Concrete. 2. For powder -drive pins or impact anchors, complete structural calculations and anchorage details shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor for all anchors and anchor groups that are shown but not completely detailed (type, size, location, spacing and embedment) on the Contract Documents. Calculations and anchorage details shall be signed and stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state in which the project is located. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Weld procedures and welder qualifications shall be available in the CONTRACTOR's field office for review. STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 2 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • A. Steel • • Wide Flange Shapes ASTM A 992 Shapes, Plates, Bars ASTM A 36 Pipe, Pipe Columns, Bollards ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B standard weight unless indicated otherwise HSS ASTM A 500 Grade B B. Corrosion Protection 1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricated steel metalwork which will be used in a corrosive environment and/or will be submerged in water or wastewater shall be coated in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating, and shall not be galvanized prior to coating. 2. Other miscellaneous steel metalwork shall be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. C. Stainless Steel 1. Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel metalwork and bolts shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel. D. Aluminum 1. Unless otherwise indicated, aluminum metalwork shall be fabricated from Alloy 6061- T6. 2. Aluminum in contact with concrete, masonry, wood, porous materials, or dissimilar metals shall have contact surfaces coated in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating. E. Cast Iron 1. Unless otherwise indicated, iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 48, Class 50B, or better. 2.2 METAL STAIRS A. Metal Stairs 1. Metal stairs shall be composed of steel or aluminum stringers and supports, shall be fabricated in accordance with the standard practice of the National Association of Ornamental Metal Manufacturers, and shall be as indicated. 2. Steel stair members shall be hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 3 2.3 GRATING STAIR TREADS A. Grating stair treads shall be designed to support a live load of 100 psf or a concentrated load at mid -span of 300 pounds, whichever creates the higher stress. B. The maximum deflection due to the uniform live load shall be as required for metal grating, below. C. Grating stair treads shall be provided with an integral non -slip nosing. 2.4 SAFETY STAIR NOSINGS A. Safety stair nosing shall be provided on concrete stairs and other locations as indicated. B. The nosing shall be 3 inches wide and fabricated from extruded aluminum with cast -in abrasive strips and integral extruded anchors. C. The color of the cast abrasive shall be as selected by the ENGINEER from among the manufacturer's standard colors. D. The nosing shall be Amstep Products Style 231-A, Grating Pacific XRS-3, Robertson Grating Products Type 9511, or equal. 2.5 METAL GRATING A. General 1. Metal grating shall be of the indicated design, size, and type. 2. Grating shall be supported around an opening by support members. 3. Where grating is supported on concrete, unless otherwise indicated provide embedded support angles that match the grating material and are mitered and welded at their corners. 4. Banding a. The grating shall be completely banded at edges and cutouts. b. The banding material and cross-section shall be equivalent to the bearing bars. c. The banding shall be welded to each cut bearing bar. 5. The grating pieces shall be fastened to each support in 2 locations. 6. Where grating forms the landing at the top of a stairway, the edge of the grating that forms the top riser shall have an integral non -slip nosing with a width equal to that of the stairway. Nosing shall be painted safety yellow. 7. Where the grating depth is not indicated, provide grating within allowable stress levels and which shall not exceed a deflection of 1/4 inch or the span divided by 180, whichever is less. 8. Design Loading STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 4 a. For standard duty plank and safety grating, the loading to be used for determining stresses and deflections shall be the uniform live load of the adjacent floor or 100 psf, whichever is greater, or a concentrated load of 1000 pounds. b. For heavy duty grating, the loading used for determining stresses and deflections shall be in accordance with AASHTO HS -20. B. Material 1. Except where indicated otherwise, bar grating shall be fabricated entirely of: a. aluminum 1) Bearing and Banding Bars: Alloy 6061-T6 2) Cross Bars: Alloy 6063-T5 C. Standard -Duty Grating 1. No single piece of grating shall weigh more than 80 pounds, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Standard duty grating shall be composed of serrated bar grating. 3. Cross bars shall be welded or mechanically locked tightly into position such that there is no movement between the bearing and cross bars. D. Safety Grating 1111 1. Safety grating shall be fabricated from sheet metal punched into an open serrated diamond pattern and be formed into plank sections. • 2. The open diamond shapes shall be approximately 1-7/8 inches by 11/16 -inch in size. 3. Safety grating shall be Grip Strut by Metal Products Division, United States Gypsum Company, Deck Span by IKG Industries, or equal. 2.6 CHECKERED PLATE A. Checkered plate shall be provided with a pattern of raised lugs on one face, and shall be smooth on the opposite face. B. Lugs 1. Lugs shall be a minimum of one inch in length and raised a maximum of 1/2 inch above the surface. 2. The lugs shall be located in a pattern in which the Tugs are oriented at 90 degrees from the adjacent lugs in 2 orthogonal directions. 3. The rows of Tugs shall be oriented at 45 degrees from the edges of the plates. C. Where no material is indicated, the plates shall be fabricated from aluminum. STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 5 D. Unless indicated otherwise, the minimum plate thickness shall be as required to limit deflection resulting from a live load of 100 psf to 1/4 inch, or the span divided by 240, whichever is less. 2.7 HATCHES A. Where access hatches are mounted on a floor slab (including top slabs that are not covered with a roofing membrane) or on a concrete curb, the hatch shall be flush -type as indicated. B. Hatches shall be fabricated from aluminum 5086 H34, 6063-T5 or 6061-T6, unless otherwise indicated. C. Hatch hardware shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel, and shall be of the gutter -type. D. The design live load shall be 300 psf, unless indicated otherwise. E. Configuration 1. Hatch opening sizes, number and swing direction of door leaves, and locations shall be as indicated. 2. Indicated sizes are for the clear opening. 3. Where the number of leaves is not indicated, openings larger than 42 inches in either direction shall be provided with double -leaf doors. 4. Unless indicated otherwise, hinges shall be located on the longer dimension side. 5. Unless indicated otherwise, ladder hatches shall be a minimum of 30 inches wide by 36 inches long, with the ladder centered on the shorter dimension and the door hinge opposite the ladder. F. Door leaves shall be fabricated from a minimum of 1/4 -inch thick checkered -pattern plate. G. Channel frames shall be fabricated from a minimum 1/4 -inch material with an anchor flange around the perimeter. H. Hatches shall be provided with an automatic hold -open arm with release handle. I. Hatches shall be designed for easy opening from both inside and outside. J. Hatches shall be designed to be water -tight and shall be equipped with a joint gutter, a moat -type edge drain, and drain piping of the length and size necessary to remove the drain water from all dry spaces accessed by the hatch. K. A minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter drain connection shall be provided, located by the manufacturer. L. Submersible Pump Station Hatches 1. Hatches for submersible pump stations shall include a Unistrut, or equal, channel around the frame perimeter. STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 6 2. The face of the channel shall be flush with the face of the frame, and shall be compatible with the upper guide rail bracket of the submersible wastewater pump. M. Hatches shall be provided with a recessed hasp for a padlock covered by a hinged lid that is flush with the surface. N. Hatches shall be Bilco Type J or JD, Babcock -Davis Type B -FGA, or equal. O. Fall Protection Grating 1. Unless indicated otherwise, fall protection grating shall be provided on floor hatches. 2.8 IRON CASTINGS A. General 1. Iron castings shall be of uniform quality, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage, distortion, or other defects. 2. The castings shall be smooth and well cleaned by shotblasting. 3. Covers and grates shall fit together evenly, such that the cover fits flush with the surrounding finished surface and such that the cover does not rock or rattle when a loading is applied. 4. Round covers and frames shall be provided with machined bearing surfaces. B. Covers and grates with matching frames shall be designed to support the following loadings: 1. Where located within a structure, the design loading shall match that required for the adjacent floor area, or, if no floor loading is indicated, a minimum of 300 pounds per square foot. 2. Exterior covers and grates shall be designed for AASHTO HS -20 loading unless indicated otherwise. 2.9 MANHOLE RUNGS A. Rungs shall meet ASTM C 478 - Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections and the following requirements: 1. Rungs shall be spaced not Tess than 10 inches apart nor more than 14 inches apart, as measured between centerlines of the rungs. 2. Rungs shall be parallel, level, and uniformly spaced. 3. The rungs shall be shaped such that a person's foot cannot slide off the end of the rung. 4. Rungs shall be surfaced to prevent injury from punctures or lacerations, and to prevent snagging of clothing. 5. The minimum perpendicular clearance between rungs and any obstruction behind the ladder shall be 6 inches. STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 7 6. The minimum width of rungs shall be 14 inches. B. Submit certified test results in accordance with ASTM C 497 - Standard Test Methods for Concrete Pipe, Manhole Sections, or Tile, Section 10, for the following loads: 1. The horizontal pull-out load shall be 400 pounds. 2. The vertical load shall be 800 pounds. C. Material 1. Rungs shall be fabricated from co -polymer polypropylene that encapsulates a minimum 1/2 -inch grade 60 steel reinforcing rod. 2. The co -polymer polypropylene shall meet ASTM D 4101, Type PP200B33430. 2.10 BOLTS AND ANCHORS A. Standard Service (Non -Corrosive Application) 1. Bolts, anchor rods, anchor bolts, washers, and nuts shall be fabricated from steel as indicated. 2. Threads on galvanized bolts, rods and nuts shall be formed with suitable taps and dies such that they retain their normal clearance after hot -dip galvanizing. 3. Except as otherwise indicated, steel for bolt material, anchor rods, anchor bolts, and cap screws shall be in accordance with the following requirements: a. Structural Connections: ASTM A 307, Grade A or B, hot -dip galvanized b. Headed Anchor Rods and Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, hot -dip or mechanically galvanized with Grade A matching nuts c. High -Strength Bolts, where indicated: ASTM A 3125 d. Pipe and Equipment Flange Bolts: ASTM A 193, Grade B-7 B. Corrosive Service 1. Bolts, anchor rods, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers in the locations listed below shall be fabricated from stainless steel as indicated. a. buried locations b. submerged locations c. locations subject to seasonal or occasional flooding d. inside hydraulic structures below the top of the structure e. inside buried vaults, manholes, and structures that do not drain through a gravity sewer or to a sump with a pump f. chemical handling areas STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 8 g. inside trenches, containment walls, and curbed areas h. locations indicated or designated by the ENGINEER to be provided with stainless steel bolts C. Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel bolts, nuts, anchor rods, and washers shall be fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel, Class 2, conforming to ASTM A 193 for bolts and to ASTM A 194 for nuts. D. Coating 1. Threads on stainless steel bolts and rods shall be protected with an antiseize lubricant suitable for submerged stainless steel bolts, meeting government specification MIL - A -907E. 2. Buried bolts in poorly drained soil shall be coated the same as the buried pipe. 3. Antiseize lubricant shall be classified as acceptable for potable water use by the NSF. 4. Antiseize lubricant shall be "PURE WHITE" by Anti -Seize Technology, Franklin Park, IL, 60131, AS -470 by Dixon Ticonderoga Company, Lakehurst, NJ, 08733, or equal. E. Bolt Requirements 1. The bolt and nut material shall be free -cutting steel. 2. The nuts shall be capable of developing the full strength of the bolts. 3. Threads shall be Coarse Thread Series conforming to the requirements of the American Standard for Screw Threads. 4. Bolts and cap screws shall have hexagon heads and nuts shall be Heavy Hexagon Series. 5. Bolts and nuts shall be installed with washers fabricated from material matching the base material of bolts, except that hardened washers for high-strength bolts shall conform to the requirements of the AISC Specification. 6. Lock washers fabricated from material matching the bolts shall be installed where indicated. 7. The length of each bolt shall be such that the bolt extends at least 1/8 inch beyond the outside face of the nut before tightening, except for anchor bolts which shall be flush with the face of the nut before tightening. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Fabrication and Erection: Except as otherwise indicated, the fabrication and erection of structural steel shall conform to the requirements of the American Institute of Steel Construction "Manual of Steel Construction." B. Aluminum Railings STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 9 1. Aluminum railing fabrication and installation shall be performed by craftsmen experienced in the fabrication of architectural metalwork. 2. Exposed surfaces shall be free from defects or other surface blemishes. 3. Dimensions and conditions shall be verified in the field. 4. Joints, junctions, miters, and butting sections shall be precision fitted with no gaps occurring between sections, and with surfaces flush and aligned. 5. Electrolysis protection of materials shall be provided. C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a 1/2 -inch drain line to the nearest floor drain for floor hatches. 3.2 WELDING A. Method 1. Welding shall be performed by the metal -arc method or gas -shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. 2. The qualification of the welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards. B. Quality 1. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported, and restrained in order to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. 2. Weld reinforcement shall be as indicated by the AWS Code. 3. Upon completion of welding, remove weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments. 4. Welds shall be repaired in order to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours and dimensions. 5. Sharp corners of material that is to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32 inch on the flat. 3.3 GALVANIZING A. Structural steel plates shapes, bars, and fabricated assemblies required to be galvanized shall, after the steel has been thoroughly cleaned of rust and scale, be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 123. B. Any galvanized part that becomes warped during the galvanizing operation shall be straightened. C. Bolts, anchor rods, anchor bolts, nuts, and similar threaded fasteners, after being properly cleaned, shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A 153. D. Field Repairs STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 10 1. Field repairs to damaged galvanizing shall be performed by preparing the surface and applying a coating. 2. Surface preparation shall consist of removing oil, grease, soil, and soluble material by cleaning with water and detergent (SSPC SP1) followed by brush-off blast cleaning (SSPC SP7) over an area extending at least 4 inches into the undamaged area. 3. The coating shall be applied to at least 3 mils dry film thickness, and shall be Zinc - Clad XI by Sherwin-Williams, Galvax by Alvin Products, Galvite by ZRC Worldwide, or equal. END OF SECTION STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 50 00 - 11 SECTION 05 52 00 - ALUMINUM RAILINGS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide component aluminum railing WORK, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Include railing layouts, post locations, and spacings, gate locations, removable railing sections, connectors, construction details, manufacturer's engineering data, installation instructions, and product data. C. Calculations: Engineering structural calculations for railings, handrail brackets, brackets, support flanges, and fasteners or anchors. D. Samples: T -connection, Color samples. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESIGN AND STRUCTURAL PERFORMANCE OF RAILING COMPONENTS A. General: All railings and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. B. Code Requirements: Railings, guardrails, and handrails shall conform to the code requirements for FBC. Railings, guardrails, and handrails, when part of a means of egress as defined by the governing codes, shall conform to the requirements of the most stringent of the codes or reference standards. C. Loading Conditions: Railings and handrail brackets shall be designed for the two non - simultaneous loading conditions without exceeding the allowable working stress of the material and without permanent deformation. 1. A 200 pound concentrated load applied to any point in any direction. 2. A 50 pound per linear foot loading applied perpendicular to the top rail. D. The allowable working stress shall be 60 percent of the material yield stress for materials that are more than 3 -inches from a weld and 40 percent of the yield stress for all materials within 3 -inches of any weld. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Rail Section: Railings and handrails shall be round pipe design railing system unless otherwise indicated. B. Rail Material: Aluminum shall be U.S. Alloy 6061 or 6063, T-5 or T-6. Aluminum pipe rail shall be not Tess than 1-1/2 inch diameter, Schedule 40 pipe. STANTEC ALUMINUM RAILINGS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 52 00 - 1 C. Isolation from Concrete: Electrolysis protective material shall be in accordance with Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating. D. Sleeves: Sleeves shall be formed with removable plastic inserts, PVC, or styrofoam blocks. Sleeves for removable posts shall be of steel, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Galvanizing of steel sleeves shall be done after fabrication to prevent raw steel from being exposed to the elements. E. Fasteners: Fasteners, screws, and bolts shall be concealed and shall be of stainless steel or aluminum. Handrail bracket fasteners and fasteners over water basins shall be of stainless steel. F. Brackets: Handrail brackets shall be aluminum with a finish that matches the handrail or railing of which they are a part. G. Kickplates: Kickplates shall be extruded (match railing system) aluminum of not less than 4 -inches in height. Kickplates for picket railings shall be a special extrusion if a snap -in - centered type kickplate is not standard with the railing manufacturer. Kickplates for pipe railing shall be a channel section for strength. H. Grout: Non -shrink grout for handrail posts shall consist of an inorganic, non-metallic, premixed grout in accordance with Section 03 60 00 -Grouting with a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. 2.3 FINISHES A. Pipe Railing System: Pipe railing system including handrails, railings, tube caps, and other miscellaneous parts of rails shall be provided with an Architectural Class I, 0.7 -mil clear anodized finish, AA -M12 C22 -A41 conforming to MIL -A -8625C, Type III, Class 1, with 0.0020 -inch minimum coating thickness. 2.4 SUB -ASSEMBLIES A. Height Requirements: Top of upper railing shall be 42 -inches above the working surface. Kickplates shall be installed not more than 1/4 -inch off the working surface and shall be provided where indicated and/or required by codes or Reference Standards. B. Round Sections: Round tube railings shall be side mounted unless otherwise indicated. Posts shall be not less than 1-1/2 inch diameter, Schedule 40 pipe. The posts shall be evenly spaced at not less than 4 -feet nor more than 5 -feet on centers. Field conditions may require some adjustment of spacing. Top rails and railings shall be not less than 1- 1/2 inch OD pipe. Rails may be type with bottom enclosures. Bottom rails shall be not less than 1-1/2 inch OD pipe or 1-7/8 inch diameter extrusion with bottom enclosures. The top railings shall be as long as possible and the post shall not project through the top rails. Kickplate of picket rails shall be a specially extruded, snap -in bottom rail enclosure with kickplate or special extruded centered kickplate that is screw applied to bottom of the bottom rail. C. Guardrails: Guardrails shall be a 2 rail system with equal open spaces between rails (and kickplate when required) with no open space larger than 21 -inches as required by FBC. Whenever the spacing requirements are indicated to be OSHA - based instead of FBC - based, the open spaces between rails may be 12 -inches. STANTEC ALUMINUM RAILINGS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 52 00 - 2 2.5 MANUFACTURERS, OR EQUAL A. Round Pipe Railings 1. "C -V Pipe Rail" by CraneVeyor Corp. 2. "Wesrail" by Moultrie Manufacturing Co. B. Rectangular Tube and Square Picket Railings 1. "Balustrade" (or Picket) by ATR Technologies, Inc. 2. "Railtec 400" vertical bar railing by CraneVeyor Corp. C. Round Tube and Round Picket Railings 1. Oval -Tube Railing "1J" (with bottom fillers) by ATR Technologies, Inc. 2. "Baluster Railing", by CraneVeyor Corp. 3. "Wesrail" by Moultrie Manufacturing Co. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Manufactured materials shall be delivered in original, unbroken packages, containers, or bundles bearing the label of the manufacturer. B. Storage: All materials shall be carefully stored in a manner that will prevent damage and in an area that is protected from the elements. 3.2 COMPONENT SYSTEMS A. Unless otherwise indicated, aluminum handrails and railings shall be component systems, installed complete and ready for use with all anchors, attachments, balusters, brackets, caps, fasteners, gates, posts, sleeves, trim, and all other related items required or necessary for the complete installation. 3.3 CRAFTSMANSHIP A. WORK shall be performed by craftsmen experienced in the fabrication of architectural metalwork. Exposed surfaces shall be free from defects or other surface blemishes. Dimensions and conditions shall be verified in the field in advance. Joints, junctions, miters, and butting sections shall be precision -fitted, with no gaps occurring between sections, and all surfaces shall be flush and aligned and without sharp edges. 3.4 ALIGNMENT A. Extruded, case, molded, or bent work shall be straight with true edges. Railings and handrails shall be provided with continuous top rails, without post projections or other obstructions. STANTEC ALUMINUM RAILINGS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 52 00 - 3 3.5 EXPANSION/CONTRACTION A. Railings shall provide expansion joints in the railing at all expansion joints in the structure. In addition exterior railing systems shall provide for 1/4 -inch expansion and contraction per 20 linear feet of railing, and interior railing systems shall provide for 1/8 -inch expansion or contraction per 20 linear feet of railing. Expansion joints shall be carefully aligned and without sharp edges. 3.6 FASTENER FINISH A. Stainless steel fasteners shall be painted to match adjacent aluminum finishes. 3.7 RAILING CONTINUITY AND END TREATMENT A. Handrails and railings shall be designed to form a continuous run system with elbow turns and bends that do not have interferences with hand movement. Handrails shall be continuous for the full length of the stairs and landings. The handrails shall extend not less than 12 -inches beyond the top and bottom risers. Whenever possible, the extension shall be at least 18 -inches for the possible use by handicapped people. The ends of handrails shall be returned to wall or shall be terminated in newel posts or safety terminals. Newel posts and safety terminals may be used only when approved by the ENGINEER. 3.8 GATES AND REMOVABLE SECTIONS A. Gates shall be provided with self-closing hinges and self-closing latch bolts. Removable handrail sections shall be provided where indicated. The gate and removable railing hardware's color shall match that of the railing system of which it is a part. B. Aluminum items in contact with concrete or steel or embedded in concrete shall be provided with an electrolysis protective material. The protective material shall be applied to the aluminum surface that will be in contact with the dissimilar material. C. Handrail posts installed into sleeves shall be provided with weep holes between 1/2 -inch and 1/4 -inch above the finish deck for condensation drainage. END OF SECTION STANTEC ALUMINUM RAILINGS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 05 52 00 - 4 SECTION 08 91 19 - FIXED LOUVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed, extruded -aluminum louvers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 10 73 00 "Protective Covers" for louvers in Protective Cover frame. 1.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED -ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Drainable -Blade Louver: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. Air Balance Inc.; a Mestek company. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a Mestek company. c. Architectural Louvers; Harray, LLC. d. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. e. Carnes Company, Inc. f. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. g. Greenheck Fan Corporation. h. Industrial Louvers, Inc. i. Louvers & Dampers; a division of Mestek, Inc. j. Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc. k. NCA Manufacturing, Inc. I. Pottorff. m. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC. n. United Enertech. o. Vent Products Co., Inc. 3. Louver Depth: 6 inches. 4. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 5. Mullion Type: Exposed. 6. Louver Performance Ratings: STANTEC FIXED LOUVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 08 91 19 - 1 • SECTION 08 91 19 - FIXED LOUVERS a. Free Area: Not less than 9.6 sq. ft. for 48 -inch- wide by 48 -inch- high louver. b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 1050 fpm. 7. AMCA 550 Seal: Mark units with AMCA 550 Certified Ratings Seal. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish. C. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. D. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions. 1. Use hex -head or Phillips pan -head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot -dip -galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 5. For color -finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers. 1.5 FABRICATION A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field -bolted assembly with close -fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates. 1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade - spacing pattern unless horizontal mullions are indicated. 2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated. E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. STANTEC FIXED LOUVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 08 91 19 - 2 SECTION 08 91 19 - FIXED LOUVERS F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches o.c., whichever is less. 1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close -fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. 2. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered and welded blades and with fully recessed mullions at corners. G. Provide extended sills for recessed louvers. H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 1.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. High -Performance Organic Finish: Four -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. 2.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. STANTEC FIXED LOUVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 08 91 19 - 3 • SECTION 08 91 19 - FIXED LOUVERS B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation. 2.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory -applied finish coating. END OF SECTION 08 91 19 STANTEC FIXED LOUVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 08 91 19 - 4 SECTION 09 96 00 - PROTECTIVE COATING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide protective coatings, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Definitions 1. The term "paint," "coatings," or "finishes" as used herein, shall include surface treatments, emulsions, enamels, paints, epoxy resins, and other protective coatings, excepting galvanizing or anodizing, whether used as a pretreatment, primer, intermediate coat, or finish coat. 2. The term "DFT" means minimum dry film thickness, without any negative tolerance. C. The following surfaces shall not be coated: 1. Concrete, unless required by items on the concrete coating schedule below or the Drawings. 2. Stainless steel 3. Machined surfaces 4. Grease fittings 5. Glass 6. Equipment nameplates 7. Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces, unless specifically indicated to be coated. 8. Platform gratings, stair treads, door thresholds, and other walk surfaces, unless specifically indicated to be coated. D. The coating system schedules summarize the surfaces to be coated, the required surface preparation, and the coating systems to be applied. Coating notes on the Drawings are used to show or extend the limits of coating schedules, to show exceptions to the schedules, or to clarify or show details for application of the coating systems. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section III, paragraph 6.11 of the City Specifications. B. Submittals shall include the following information and be submitted at least 30 Days prior to commencing protective coating WORK: 1. Materials List: Eight copies of a coating materials list showing the manufacturer and the product number, keyed to the coating systems herein. The list shall be submitted prior to or at the time of submitting samples. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 1 2. Manufacturer's Information: For each coating system to be used, the following data: a. Manufacturer's data sheet for each product proposed, including statements on the suitability of the material for the intended use. b. Technical and performance information that demonstrates compliance with the system performance and material requirements. c. Paint manufacturer's instructions and recommendations on surface preparation and application. d. Colors available for each product (where applicable). e. Compatibility of shop and field applied coatings (where applicable). f. Material Safety Data Sheet for each product proposed. C. Samples 1. Samples of paint, finishes, and other coating materials shall be submitted on 8-1/2 inch by 11 -inch sheet metal. Each sheet shall be completely coated over its entire surface with one protective coating material, type, and color. 2. Two sets of color samples to match each color selected by the ENGINEER from the manufacturer's standard color sheets. If custom mixed colors are indicated, the color samples shall be made using color formulations prepared to match the color samples furnished by the ENGINEER. The color formula shall be shown on the back of each color sample. 3. One 5 pound sample of each abrasive proposed to be used for surface preparation for submerged and severe service coating systems. D. Experience Requirements of the Field Applicator: 1. Three references which verify that the coating CONTRACTOR has demonstrated successful application of the specified coating system in the past 3 years. Provide the size (area of coating), time of completion, name, the owner's address and telephone number for each installation referenced. 2. A written statement from the CONTRACTOR stating that they are qualified and experienced in the application of the specified coating systems. The letter shall state the manufacturer and model number of mixing, heating, and pumping equipment to be used to apply the specified coating systems. 3. A written statement from the manufacturer certifying that the coating CONTRACTOR's onsite foreman and each applicator performing WORK on the project has been trained and approved to apply the selected coating system. 4. CONTRACTOR shall provide SSPC QP 1 Certification or the manufacturer's certification of the applicator for the specified coating system. E. Experience Requirements of the Shop Applicator STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 2 1. NACE Coating Inspector Program certification documents for the person responsible for Quality Assurance/Quality Control at the facility. This person will be responsible for submitting inspection reports to the OWNER. 2. A copy of a typical Quality Assurance/Quality Control inspection report containing items listed in 3.18 of this Specification. 3. Three references which verify that the shop painting facility has demonstrated successful application of the specified coating systems in the past 3 years. Provide the structure name and size (area of coating), time of completion, the owner's name, address, and telephone number for each installation referenced. 4. The manufacturer shall provide written certification that the shop painting facility's supervisor and each applicator performing Work on the project have been trained and approved by the manufacturer to apply the selected coating system. 5. The manufacturer shall state whether or not it has verified that the CONTRACTOR is going to use the proper mixing, coating application, heating, and environmental control equipment for the specified coating products. Only heated plural component equipment shall be used for the 100% solids coating application. Equipment shall be capable of performing a ratio test. 6. The Shop Coating Applicator shall provide SSPC QP 3 Certification or the coating manufacturer's certification of the applicator for selected coating system. 1.3 SPECIAL CORRECTION OF DEFECTS REQUIREMENTS A. Inspection: An inspection may be conducted during the eleventh month following completion of coating WORK. The CONTRACTOR and a representative of the coating material manufacturer shall attend this inspection. Defective WORK shall be repaired in accordance with these specifications and to the satisfaction of the OWNER. The OWNER may, by written notice to the CONTRACTOR, reschedule the inspection to another date within the one year correction period or may cancel the inspection altogether. The CONTRACTOR is not relieved of its responsibilities to correct defects, whether or not the inspection is conducted. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Suitability: The CONTRACTOR shall use suitable coating materials as recommended by the manufacturer. Materials shall comply with Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) limits applicable at the Site. B. Material Sources: Where manufacturers and product numbers are listed, it is to show the type and quality of coatings that are required. If a named product does not comply with VOC limits in effect at the time of Bid opening, that product will not be accepted, and the CONTRACTOR shall propose a substitution product of equal quality that does comply. Proposed substitute materials will be considered as indicated below. Coating materials shall be materials that have a record of satisfactory performance in industrial plants, manufacturing facilities, and water and wastewater treatment plants. C. Compatibility: In any coating system only compatible materials from a single manufacturer shall be used in the WORK. Particular attention shall be directed to compatibility of STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 3 primers and finish coats. If necessary, a barrier coat shall be applied between existing prime coat and subsequent field coats to ensure compatibility. D. Containers: Coating materials shall be sealed in containers that plainly show the designated name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, date of manufacture, and name of manufacturer, all of which shall be plainly legible at the time of use. E. Colors: Colors and shades of colors of coatings shall be as indicated or selected by the ENGINEER. Each coat shall be of a slightly different shade to facilitate inspection of surface coverage of each coat. Finish colors shall be as selected from the manufacturer's standard color samples by the ENGINEER F. Substitute or "Or -Equal" Products 1. To establish equality the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory documentation from the manufacturer of the proposed substitute or "or -equal" product that the material meets the indicated requirements and is equivalent or better in the following properties: a. Minimum and maximum recoat times b. Minimum and maximum cure time for immersion c. Abrasion resistance per ASTM D4060 using CS17 Wheel d. Maximum and minimum dry film thickness per coat e. Compatibility with other coatings f. Suitability for the intended service g. Resistance to chemical attack h. Temperature limitations during application and in service i. Type and quality of recommended undercoats and topcoats j. Ease of application k. Ease of repairing damaged areas I. Stability of colors 2. Protective coating materials shall be standard products produced by recognized manufacturers who are regularly engaged in production of such materials for essentially identical service conditions. When requested, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with the names of not less than 10 successful applications of the proposed manufacturer's products that comply with these requirements. 3. If a proposed substitution requires changes in the WORK, the CONTRACTOR shall bear such costs involved as part of the WORK. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 4 2.2 INDUSTRIAL COATING SYSTEMS A. System 5 - Inorganic Zinc/Epoxy/Polyurethane 1. Material Prime Coat Inorganic zinc silicate, water or solvent based, 2 component zinc content in dry film 83 percent, minimum VOC Content, max 325 grams per liter Demonstrated suitable for Ferrous metal, providing superior corrosion, chemical, and abrasion resistance, recommended for use as primer under epoxy Intermediate Coat 2 component epoxy, high build, recommended by manufacturer for application over inorganic zinc primer VOC Content, max 276 grams per liter Demonstrated suitable for Outstanding chemical, corrosion, and abrasion resistance Finish Coat 2 component aliphatic or acrylic polyurethane VOC Content, max 315 grams per liter Demonstrated suitable for Superior color and gloss retention, resistance to chemical fumes and severe weathering, abrasion resistance 2. Application and manufacturers Surface preparation for primer SSPC SP 6 Anchor profile for primer per manufacturer STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 5 Prime Coat (DFT = 2 - 4 mils) Intermediate Coat (DFT = 3 - 5 mils) Finish Coat (DFT = 2 - 4 mils) Total System DFT PPG- Dimetcote 9HS or Dimetcote 21-5 Amercoat 385 Amercoat 450H 7 - 13 mils Carboline Carbozinc 11 HS or 11 WB Carboguard 890 Carbothane 134HG Devoe Cathacote 302H Devran 224V Devthane 379H Tnemec Tneme- Zinc 94H20 Tnemec Series L69 Tnemec Series 750 UVX Sherwin Williams Zinc Clad II Plus S W Macropoxy 646 S W Hi -Solids Polyurethane STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 6 B. System 8 - Epoxy, Equipment 1. Materials Primer Type 2 component epoxy, recoatable up to one year Demonstrated suitable for Rust inhibitive, outstanding chemical, abrasion, and weathering resistance, resistance to splash, washdown, and condensation. Immersion capability is not required VOC content, max 330 Finish Type 2 component epoxy, available in many colors Demonstrated suitable for Outstanding chemical, abrasion, and weathering resistance, resistance to splash, washdown, and condensation. Immersion capability is not required VOC content, max 330 2. Application and manufacturers Prime Coat (DFT =4to6 mils) FINISH COAT (DFT =3TO4 MILS) TOTAL SYSTEM DFT PPG-Amerlock 400 Amerlock 400 7 to 10 mils Tnemec Series L69 Tnemec Series L69 Devoe Devran 224V Devran 224V Carboline Carboguard 888 Carboguard 888 Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 S W Macropoxy 646 STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 7 • • • C. System 108 - Polyurethane, Concrete 1. Materials Filler -sealer type epoxy material with portland cement and aggregate Primer type Phenolicamine or polyamidoamine epoxy VOC content, g/L max 250 Finish type aromatic elastomeric polyurethane Demonstrated suitable for concrete and concrete block masonry, long term immersion in water and wastewater and service where subject to splash and spill of water and wastewater treatment chemicals VOC content, g/L max 250 Certification requirement, where coating will be in contact with potable water NSF 61 2. Application and manufacturers Filler -Sealer Primer DFT = 3 - 7 -mils Finish Coat DFT = 100 - 125 -mils, 75 mils for potable water Tnemec MortarClad 218 Tnemec Pota-Pox L140 (potable water) Epoxoprime 201 (wastewater) Elasto-Shield 406 (max 75 mils for potable water) PPG-Amerlock 400/BF Amerlock 400/2 Amerlock 490 Sherwin Williams Steel Seam FT 910 S -W Dura -Plate 235 S -W Sherflex (Max 100 mils for potable water) International Ceilcote 400 Corocrete Polibrid 670-S Polybrid 705 2.3 SPECIAL COATING SYSTEMS A. System 205 - Polyethylene Encasement: Application of polyethylene encasement shall be in accordance with ANSI/AVWVA C105 using Method C. B. System 208 - Aluminum Metal Isolation 1. Material STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 8 Type high build polyamide epoxy with chemical and abrasion resistance Demonstrated suitable for concrete and aluminum substrates, to isolate aluminum from contact with concrete and the resulting chemical degradation VOC content, max 250 2. Application and manufacturers Coating (DFT = 16 - 20 mils) PPG- Sigma, Novoguard 840 Sherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Tnemec Epoxoline Series L69 Carboline 890 Devoe Bar -Rust 231 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. The CONTRACTOR shall require the protective coating manufacturer to furnish a qualified technical representative to visit the Site for technical support as may be necessary to resolve field problems. 3.2 WORKMANSHIP A. Skilled craftsmen and experienced supervision shall be used on coating WORK. B. Coating shall be done in a workmanlike manner so as to produce an even film of uniform thickness. Edges, corners, crevices, and joints shall receive special attention to insure thorough surface preparation. The finished surfaces shall be free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush marks, and variations in color, texture, and finish. The hiding shall be so complete that the addition of another coat would not increase the hiding. Special attention shall be given so that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and similar areas receive a film thickness equivalent to adjacent areas, and installations shall be protected by the use of drop cloths or other precautionary measures. C. Damage to other surfaces resulting from the WORK shall be cleaned, repaired, and refinished to original condition. 3.3 STORAGE, MIXING, AND THINNING OF MATERIALS A. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Unless otherwise indicated, the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations and instructions for thinning, mixing, handling, applying, and protecting its coating materials, for preparation of surfaces for coating, and for other procedures relative to coating shall be strictly observed. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 9 B. Coating materials shall be used within the manufacturer's recommended shelf life. C. Storage and Mixing: Coating materials shall be stored under the conditions recommended by the Product Data Sheets, and shall be thoroughly stirred, strained, and kept at a uniform consistency during application. Coatings from different manufacturers shall not be mixed together. 3.4 PREPARATION FOR COATING A. General: Surfaces to receive protective coatings shall be prepared as indicated prior to application of coatings. The CONTRACTOR shall examine surfaces to be coated and shall correct surface defects before application of any coating material. Marred or abraded spots on shop -primed and on factory -finished surfaces shall receive touch-up restoration prior to any field coating application. Surfaces to be coated shall be dry and free of visible dust. B. Protection of Surfaces Not to be Coated: Surfaces that are not to receive protective coatings shall be protected during surface preparation, cleaning, and coating operations. C. Hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not to be painted shall be removed, masked, or otherwise protected. Drop cloths shall be provided to prevent coating materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. The working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be protected from damage during surface preparation and coating operations. Openings in motors shall be masked to prevent entry of coating or other materials. D. Care shall be exercised not to damage adjacent WORK during blasting operations. Spraying shall be conducted under carefully controlled conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible for and shall promptly repair any and all damage to adjacent WORK or adjoining property occurring from blasting or coating operations. E. Protection of Painted Surfaces: Cleaning and coating shall be coordinated so that dust and other contaminants from the preparation process will not fall on wet, newly -coated surfaces. 3.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. No coating work shall be performed under the following conditions: 1. Surface or ambient temperatures exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum or minimum allowable. 2. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 3. Damp or humid conditions, where the relative humidity is above the manufacturer's maximum allowable. 4. Substrate and ambient temperatures are less than 5°F above the dew point and are decreasing. Dew point shall be measured by use of an instrument such as a Sling Psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychrometric tables. Elcometer 319 Dew Point meter or equal may also be used. 5. Ambient temperature that is expected to drop below 50°F or less than 5°F above the dew point within 8 hours after application of coating. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 10 3.6 SURFACE PREPARATION STANDARDS A. The following referenced surface preparation specifications of the Steel Structures Painting Council shall form a part of this specification: 1. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC SP 1): Removal of oil, grease, soil, salts, and other soluble contaminants by cleaning with solvent, vapor, alkali, emulsion, or steam. 2. Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC SP 2): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by hand chipping, scraping, sanding, and wire brushing. 3. Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC SP 3): Removal of loose rust, loose mill scale, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter, by power tool chipping, descaling, sanding, wire brushing, and grinding. 4. White Metal Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP 5/NACE 1): Removal of all visible rust, oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, paint, oxides, corrosion products and foreign matter by blast cleaning. 5. Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP 6/NACE 3): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square inch of surface area. 6. Brush -Off Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP 7/NACE 4): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint. 7. Near -White Blast Cleaning (SSPC SP 10/NACE 2): Removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter, except that staining shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of each square inch of surface area. 8. Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal (SSPC 11) When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale, rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in the lower portion of pits if the original surface is pitted. The surface profile shall not be less than 1 mil (25 microns). 9. Surface Preparation of Concrete (SSPC-SP 13/NACE 6): Removal of protrusions, laitance and efflorescence, existing coatings, form -release agents, and surface contamination by detergent or steam cleaning, abrasive blasting, water jetting, or impact or power tool methods as appropriate for the condition of the surface and the requirements of the coating system. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 11 3.7 FERROUS METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (UNGALVANIZED) A. The minimum abrasive blasting surface preparation shall be as indicated in the coating system schedules included at the end of this Section. Where there is a conflict between these requirements and the coating manufacturer's printed recommendations for the intended service, the higher degree of cleaning shall apply. B. The Shop Painting Facility shall use a minimum blast material mixture of 75% grit and 25% shot material to achieve the proper surface profile. C. The Field Coating Applicator shall abrasive blast the shop coated surfaces per SSPC SP 7/NACE 4. The previously shop -painted surfaces shall be abraded prior to the application of the final coats. Special attention shall be given to uncoated steel weld joints, coating holdbacks, and bare metal. D. Grease, oil, and welding fluxes shall be removed by wiping with MEK or naphtha cleaning or with trisodium phosphate detergent per SSPC SP 1. E. All sharp edges shall be rounded or chamfered and all burrs, rust, scale, welding slag, and spatter shall be removed and the surface prepared by SSPC SP 2 hand tool cleaning, and SSPC SP 3 power tool cleaning. F. The Contractor shall test the surfaces for soluble salts with the use of Chlor*Test as manufactured by Chlor*Rid International or approved equivalent. Any blasted surfaces shall be tested and shall have a maximum concentration of 5 micrograms per square centimeter (pg/cm2). A test shall be conducted for every 100 square feet (ft2) of surface area to be coated at locations determined by the Inspector. G. If the soluble salt test indicates chloride concentrations greater than those outlined in these Specifications, the Contractor shall use Chlor*Rid, as manufactured by Chlor*Rid International, in the water source during Water Cleaning to remove the salts from the substrate. A substrate's surface preparation will be accepted once the soluble salt concentration is below the amounts outlined in these Specifications. H. The type and size of abrasive shall be selected to produce a surface profile that meets the coating manufacturer's recommendation for the particular coating and service conditions.Abrasive shall not be reused unless an automated blasting system is used for surfaces that will be in non -submerged service. For automated blasting systems, clean oil -free abrasives shall be maintained. The abrasive mix shall include at least 50 percent grit. I. The CONTRACTOR shall comply with the applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations for blast cleaning. J. Compressed air for air blast cleaning shall be supplied at adequate pressure from well- maintained compressors equipped with oil and moisture separators that remove at least 95 percent of the contaminants. K. Surfaces shall be cleaned of dust and residual particles of the cleaning operation by dry air blast cleaning, vacuuming, or another approved method prior to painting. L. Enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem shall be vacuum -cleaned and wiped with a tack cloth. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 12 M. Damaged or defective coating shall be removed by the blast cleaning to meet the clean surface requirements before recoating. N. If the required abrasive blast cleaning will damage adjacent WORK, the area to be cleaned is less than 100 square feet, and the coated surface will not be submerged in service, then SSPC SP 2 or SSPC SP 3 may be used. O. Shop -applied coatings of unknown composition shall be completely removed before the indicated coatings are applied. Valves, castings, ductile or cast iron pipe, and fabricated pipe or equipment shall be examined for the presence of shop -applied temporary coatings. Temporary coatings shall be completely removed by solvent cleaning per SSPC SP 1 before the abrasive blast cleaning has been started. P. Shop primed equipment shall be solvent -cleaned in the field before finish coats are applied. 3.8 FERROUS METAL SURFACE PREPARATION (GALVANIZED) A. Galvanized ferrous metal shall be alkaline cleaned per SSPC SP 1 to remove oil, grease, and other contaminants detrimental to adhesion of the protective coating system, followed by brush off blast cleaning per SSPC SP 7/NACE 4. B. Any high spots, sharp protrusions, and rough edges, such as the metal drip line, shall be smoothed to avoid paint film gaps in the areas of the high spots. Surfaces shall be hand tool cleaned per SSPC SP 2 and power tool cleaned per SSPC SP 3. C. Pretreatment coatings of surfaces shall be in accordance with the printed recommendations of the coating manufacturer. Galvanized metals may be cleaned with suitable organic solvent such as a rust inhibitor or aqueous alkaline solution per ASTM D6386. D. The surfaces of galvanized steel exposed to chemical splashing or within a wastewater head space shall be abraded per SSPC SP 11 or SP 7 prior to coating. 3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE PREPARATION A. Surface preparation shall not begin until at least 30 Days after the concrete has been placed. B. At the discretion of the Inspector, the Contractor shall test the surfaces for soluble salts with the use of Chlor*Test as manufactured by Chlor*Rid International or approved equivalent. Any surfaces shall be tested and shall have a maximum concentration of 5 micrograms per square centimeter (pg/cm2). A test shall be conducted for every 100 square feet (ft2) of surface area to be coated at locations determined by the Inspector. C. If the soluble salt test indicates chloride concentrations greater than those outlined in these Specifications, the Contractor shall use Chlor*Rid, as manufactured by Chlor*Rid International, in the water source during Water Cleaning to remove the salts from the substrate. A substrate's surface preparation will be accepted once the soluble salt concentration is below the amounts outlined in these Specifications. D. In accordance with ASTM D4262, test to determine the pH of the concrete surface after the surface has been thoroughly blasted and cleaned. If the pH is outside the range recommended by the coating manufacturer, then the surface must be neutralized by removing concrete until the surface pH of 7 or greater is obtained prior to any coating STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 13 application. One pH test shall be performed every 200 square feet, or less, and at locations determined by the Inspector. E. The Contractor shall test for capillary moisture in accordance with ASTM D4263. Moisture tests shall be taken every 200 square feet or less and at locations determined by the Inspector. If capillary moisture is present, the coating manufacturer shall be consulted to determine primer requirements and special coating application criteria. F. For below grade structures with surface areas greater than 2,000 square feet, the Contractor shall install three anhydrous calcium chloride test kits on bare concrete to measure the Moisture Vapor Transmission Rate (MVTR) on a flat horizontal surface. Testing and calculations shall be performed according to ASTM F1869. The MVTR shall be less than 3 lbs per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours. If the MVTR is greater than 3 lbs per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours, the Contractor shall apply a concrete sealant to reduce the MVTR through the concrete. The test kits shall be undisturbed for a minimum of 60 hours. G. Surface Voids: Bugholes, honeycomb, or other surface voids greater than 1/4 inch in depth or 1/4 inch in diameter shall be filled in with a resurfacing mortar prior to the application of any primer or finish coat. H. Holes or other joint defects in masonry shall be filled with mortar and repainted. All voids and cracks shall be repaired as specified. Loose or spatter mortar shall be removed by scraping and chipping. Masonry surfaces shall be cleaned with clear water by washing and scrubbing to remove foreign and deleterious substances. Muriatic acid shall not be used. After cleaning, masonry surfaces shall be sealed or filled with a sealer or block filler compatible with the specified primer. II) I. Coating Pipe Penetrations: A 1/4 -inch wide by 3/8 -inch deep saw cut shall be made around the circumference of the pipe as it penetrates the concrete. Prior to the coating application, the saw cut shall be dried and vacuumed to remove all dust and residue. • J. Coating Floor/Wall Joints: A 1/4 -inch wide by 3/8 -inch deep saw cut shall be made on the vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces around the perimeter of the floor. The saw cut shall be 2 inches from the joint on both sides. Prior to the coating application, the saw cut shall be dried and vacuumed to remove all dust and residue. K. All oil, grease, and form release and curing compounds shall be removed by detergent cleaning per SSPC-SP 1 before abrasive blast cleaning. L. New concrete and deteriorated concrete surfaces to be coated shall be abrasive blast cleaned to remove existing coatings, laitance, and deteriorated concrete, and to roughen the surface equivalent to 80 Grit sandpaper or ICRI No. 310.2 Guideline for Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings, and Polymer Overlays Concrete Surface Profile No. 4. M. Surfaces shall be clean and as recommended by the coating manufacturer before coating is started. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 14 3.10 SHOP COATING REQUIREMENTS A. Unless otherwise indicated, items of equipment or parts of equipment which are not submerged in service shall be shop -primed and then finish -coated in the field after installation with the indicated or selected color. The methods, materials, application equipment, and other details of shop painting shall comply with this Section. If the shop primer requires top coating within a specific period of time, the equipment shall be finish - coated in the shop and then be touched up after installation. B. Items of equipment or parts and surfaces of equipment which are submerged or inside an enclosed hydraulic structure when in service, with the exception of pumps and valves, shall have surface preparation and coating performed in the field. C. Shop primed surfaces which are to be incorporated in the work shall be prepared in the field by cleaning all surfaces as necessary in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and SP 2. Damaged shop coating shall be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning, and recoated with the primer specified. D. For every 500 square feet, or less, of steel surface blasted, the surface profile shall be tested with the use of Press -o -Film as manufactured by Testex, or other RP0287 approved equal, at locations to be determined by the Inspector. The replica tape thickness shall be measured using a dial micrometer manufactured by Testex, or other ASTM D4417 Type C approved equal. For each test area, one replica tape test shall be performed. For each test area, the three replica tape thickness values shall be recorded and must be within 10% of the coating manufacturer's recommended profile. If the surface profile does not meet the manufacturer's recommended profile, two additional tests will be performed within a 12 -inch diameter of the initial test. If the values are not satisfactory, the Contractor shall reblast the affected areas. E. The interior surfaces of steel water reservoirs, except for Paragraph A surfaces, shall have surface preparation and coating WORK performed in the field. F. For certain pieces of equipment it may be undesirable or impractical to apply finish coatings in the field. Such equipment may include engine generator sets, equipment such as electrical control panels, switchgear or main control boards, submerged parts of pumps, ferrous metal passages in valves, or other items where it is not possible to obtain the indicated quality in the field. Such equipment shall be primed and finish -coated in the shop and touched up in the field with the identical material after installation. The CONTRACTOR shall require the manufacturer of each such piece of equipment to certify as part of its Shop Drawings that the surface preparation is in accordance with these specifications. The coating material data sheet shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings for the equipment. G. For certain small pieces of equipment the manufacturer may have a standard coating system that is suitable for the intended service conditions. In such cases, the final determination of suitability will be made during review of the Shop Drawing submittals. Equipment of this type generally includes only indoor equipment such as instruments, small compressors, and chemical metering pumps. H. Shop -painted surfaces shall be protected during shipment and handling by suitable provisions including padding, blocking, and the use of canvas or nylon slings. Primed surfaces shall not be exposed to the weather for more than 2 months before being top coated or less time if recommended by the coating manufacturer. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 15 I. Damage to shop -applied coatings shall be repaired in accordance with this Section and the coating manufacturer's printed instructions. • J. The CONTRACTOR shall make certain that the shop primers and field topcoats are compatible and meet the requirements of this Section. Copies of applicable coating manufacturer's data sheets shall be submitted with equipment Shop Drawings. • • 3.11 APPLICATION OF COATINGS A. The application of protective coatings to steel substrates shall be in accordance with SSPC PA1 - Paint Application Specification No. 1. B. Cleaned surfaces and each coat shall be inspected prior to applying each succeeding coat. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule such inspection with the ENGINEER in advance. C. Blast cleaned ferrous metal surfaces shall be painted before any rusting or other deterioration of the surface occurs. Blast cleaning shall be limited to only those surfaces that can be coated in the same day. D. Coatings shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and this Section, whichever has the most stringent requirements. E. Special attention shall be given to edges, angles, weld seams, flanges, nuts and bolts, and other places where insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present. CONTRACTOR shall use an independent stripe coat per SSPC PA Guide 11 for these areas. Particular care shall be used to ensure that the specified coverage is secured on the edges and corners of all surfaces. F. Special attention shall be given to materials that will be joined so closely that proper surface preparation and application are not possible. Such contact surfaces shall be coated prior to assembly or installation. G. Finish coats, including touch-up and damage repair coats shall be applied in a manner that will present a uniform texture and color matched appearance. H. Coatings shall not be applied under the following conditions: 1. Temperatures exceeding the manufacturer's recommended maximum and minimum allowable. 2. Concrete surfaces will be in direct sunlight during application or within 3 hours after application. 3. Dust or smoke laden atmosphere. 4. Damp or humid weather. 5. Substrate or air temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point. 6. Air temperature is expected to drop below 40 degrees F or less than 5 degrees F above the dew point within 8 hours after application of coating. 7. Wind conditions are not calm. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 16 I. Dew point shall be determined by use of a sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Dept. of Commerce, Weather Bureau psychometric tables. J. Unburied steel piping shall be abrasive blast cleaned and primed before installation. K. Finish coats shall be applied after concrete, masonry, and equipment installation is complete, and the working areas are clean and dust free. 3.12 CURING OF COATINGS A. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain curing conditions in accordance with the conditions recommended by the coating material manufacturer or by this Section, whichever is the most stringent, prior to placing the completed coating system into service. B. In the case of enclosed areas, forced air ventilation, using heated air if necessary, may be required until the coatings have fully cured. C. Forced Air Ventilation of Enclosed Hydraulic Structures: Forced air ventilation is required for the application and curing of coatings on the interior surfaces of steel reservoirs and enclosed hydraulic structures. During application and curing periods, continuously exhaust air from a manhole in the lowest shell ring, or in the case of an enclosed hydraulic structure, from the lowest level of the structure using portable ducting. After interior coating operations have been completed, provide a final curing period for a minimum of 10 Days, during which the forced ventilation system shall operate continuously. For additional requirements, refer to the specific coating system requirements in Part 2 above. 3.13 SHOP AND FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER a minimum of 3 Days advance notice of the start of any field surface preparation or coating application, and a minimum of 7 Days advance notice of the start of any surface preparation activity in the shop. B. Such WORK shall be performed only in the presence of the ENGINEER, unless the ENGINEER has granted prior approval to perform such WORK in its absence. C. Inspection by the ENGINEER, or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the WORK, shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of its responsibility to perform the WORK in accordance with these Specifications. D. Scaffolding shall be erected and moved to locations where requested by the ENGINEER to facilitate inspection. Additional illumination shall be furnished on areas to be inspected. E. Inspection Devices: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish inspection devices in good working condition for the detection of holidays and measurement of dry film thicknesses of coatings. Dry -film thickness gauges shall be made available for the ENGINEER's use while coating is being done, until final acceptance of such coatings. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of a trained operator of the holiday detection devices until the final acceptance of such coatings. Holiday detection devices shall be operated only in the presence of the ENGINEER. F. Holiday Testing: The CONTRACTOR shall test for continuity all coated ferrous surfaces inside a steel reservoir, other surfaces that will be submerged in water or other liquids, surfaces that are enclosed in a vapor space in such structures, and surfaces coated with STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 17 any of the submerged and severe service coating systems. Areas that contain discontinuities shall be marked and repaired or recoated in accordance with the coating manufacturer's printed instructions and then be retested. 1. Coatings with thickness exceeding 20 -mils total DFT: Pulse -type holiday detector such as Tinker & Rasor Model AP -W, D.E. Stearns Co. Model 14/20, or equal shall be used. The unit shall be adjusted to operate at the voltage required to cause a spark jump across an air gap equal to twice the required coating thickness. 2. Coatings with thickness of 20 -mils or less total DFT: Tinker & Rasor Model M1 non- destructive type holiday detector, K -D Bird Dog, or equal shall be used. The unit shall operate at less than 75 volts. For thicknesses between 10- and 20 -mils, a non-sudsing type wetting agent, such as Kodak Photo -Flo or equal, shall be added to the water prior to wetting the detector sponge. G. Film Thickness Testing: On ferrous metals, the dry film coating thickness shall be measured in accordance with the SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 2 using a magnetic type dry film thickness gauge such as Mikrotest Model FM, Elcometer Model 111/1 EZ, or equal. Each coat shall be tested for the correct thickness. No measurements shall be made until at least 8 hours after application of the coating. On non-ferrous metals and other substrates, the coating thicknesses shall be measured at the time of application using a wet film gauge. H. Surface Preparation: Confirm proper surface profile with Testex Press -O -Film replica tape in accordance with NAGE RP0287-02. 3.14 Coating System Schedule, Ferrous Metal - Not Galvanized 3.15 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE, NON-FERROUS METAL, PLASTIC, FIBER GLASS A. Where isolated non-ferrous parts are associated with equipment or piping, the CONTRACTOR shall use the coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings, frames or hatches. Only primers recommended by the coating manufacturer shall be used. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 18 Item Surface Prep. System No. FM -1 All surfaces indoors and outdoors, exposed or covered, except those included below. Near white metal blast cleaning SSPC SP 10/NACE 2 (5) inorganic zinc/epoxy/polyurethane FM -16 Surfaces of indoor equipment, not submerged Commercial blast cleaning SSPC SP 6/NACE 3 (8) epoxy, equipment FM -19 Buried pipe couplings, valves, and flanged joints (where piping is ductile or cast iron, not tape -coated), including factory -coated surfaces. As specified by reference specification (205) polyethylene encasement 3.15 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE, NON-FERROUS METAL, PLASTIC, FIBER GLASS A. Where isolated non-ferrous parts are associated with equipment or piping, the CONTRACTOR shall use the coating system for the adjacent connected surfaces. Do not coat handrails, gratings, frames or hatches. Only primers recommended by the coating manufacturer shall be used. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 18 3.16 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE -CONCRETE Item Surface Prep. System No. NFS-3 Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, or with any other metal except galvanized ferrous metal. Solvent cleaned SSPC (208) aluminum metal isolation 3.16 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE -CONCRETE END OF SECTION STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 19 Item Surface Prep. System No. C-1 All surfaces indoors and outdoors, where indicated. Per paragraph 3.9 (108) polyurethane, concrete END OF SECTION STANTEC PROTECTIVE COATING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 09 96 00 - 19 • • SECTION 10 73 00 - PROTECTIVE COVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre -Fabricated, Custom Designed Fixed Protective Canopies and Covers 1. Design scope includes but is not limited to the following. a. Overhead canopies. B. The extent of aluminum canopy cover is shown on the drawings and as specified herein. 1.3 DEFINITION A. Extruded Aluminum Canopy Cover shall consist entirely of extruded aluminum sections (roll -formed not acceptable). System shall consist of heli -arc welded, one- piece rigid structural bents (column and beam assemblies), decking, fascia, accessory items and hardware to provide a complete system. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength. 2. ASTM A792 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 percent Aluminum - Zinc Alloy -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 3. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 4. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 5. ASTM E2950 - Standard Specification for Metal Canopy Systems. B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures. • C. American Welding Society (AWS): STANTEC PROTECTIVE COVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 10 73 00 - 1 SECTION 10 73 00 - PROTECTIVE COVERS 1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. D. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association 1. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Typical installation methods. 5. Include information for factory finish, accessories and other required components. 6. Include color charts for finish indicating manufacturer's standard colors available for selection. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit detailed drawings, layout of canopy cover system, bent locations (identify drain columns and wet bents), all mechanical joint locations with complete details, connections, jointing and accessories. Include details of concrete footings and bent anchorage. D. Calculations: 1. Provide signed and sealed structural calculations for the proposed walkway cover, by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida, who professes his discipline to be structural engineering. E. Verification Samples: Samples of Aluminum finishes for roof panels and all support structures will be provided as needed. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with a minimum five years documented experience. 1. Designer Qualifications: Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in State in which Project is located. a. Comply with applicable code for submission of design calculations, reviewed shop and erection drawings, and as required for acquiring permits. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 10 73 00 - 2 • • • SECTION 10 73 00 - PROTECTIVE COVERS b. Cooperate with regulatory agency or authorities having jurisdiction, and provide data as requested. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum three years documented experience with projects of similar scope and complexity. C. Source Limitations: Provide each type of product from a single manufacturing source to ensure uniformity. D. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to insure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments within specified tolerations wherever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay work. E. Shop Assembly: Pre -assemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re -assembly and coordinated installation. F. Coordination: Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections which interface with covered canopy system. (sidewalks, curbs, building fascias, etc.). 1.7 PRE -INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Convene a conference approximately two weeks before scheduled commencement of the Work. Attendees shall include Architect, Contractor and trades involved. Agenda shall include schedule, responsibilities, critical path items and approvals. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site ready for installation whenever possible. B. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. C. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's recommended limits. 1.10 WARRANTIES A. Manufacturer's standard limited warranty. Correct defective work within a three-year period after Date of Substantial Completion. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 10 73 00 - 3 SECTION 10 73 00 - PROTECTIVE COVERS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Ballew's Aluminum Products, Inc. 2. Dittmer Architectural Aluminum. 3. Peachtree Protective Covers. 4. Perfection Architectural Systems, LLC. 2.2 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Pre -Engineered Metal Protective Covers. 1. Standards compliance: Pre-engineered system complying with ASTM E2950 and in accordance with ASCE 7. a. Loading: As indicated on Drawings and in compliance with local authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Thermal Movement: No buckling, joint seal failure, fastener failure, or component failure. a. Ambient Temperature Range: Up to 120 degrees F (49 degrees C) b. Surface Temperature Range: Up to 180 degrees F (82 degrees C) 3. Shop fabricate to the greatest extent possible; disassemble if necessary for shipping. a. Complete system ready for erection at project site. b. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. B. Material: 1. Smooth aluminum: a. Extrusions: Meeting requirements of ASTM B221, all aluminum extrusions shall be alloy 6063 heat treated to a T-6 temper. b. Sheets: Meeting requirements of ASTM 8209, alloy 3105-H28 or 3004- H34. 2. Sealants: Single component clear 100 percent silicone. 3. Accessories: Flashings, brackets, and other items as necessary for complete system. 4. Fasteners: Non-structural: a. Deck Screws (rivets not permitted): Type 18-8 non-magnetic stainless STANTEC PROTECTIVE COVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 10 73 00 - 4 • SECTION 10 73 00 - PROTECTIVE COVERS steel sealed with a neoprene "0" ring beneath 5/8" outside dimension, conical washer. b. Fascia Rivets: Size 3/16" by 1/2" grip range aluminum rivets with aluminum mandrel. c. Bolts: All bolts, nuts and washers to be 18-8 non-magnetic stainless steel. C. Anchorage Devices, Clips and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type, compatible with materials being secured, of size and spacing sufficient to resist indicated loads. 1. Above roof deck, utilize fasteners with neoprene washers. 2. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307 or ASTM A572. 3. Provide nuts and washers as required for column leveling and plumbing. D. Concealed Gutters and Downspouts: Aluminum with baked enamel finish, color to match canopy covering, manufacturer's recommended size for canopy specified. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Comply with indicated profiles, dimensional requirements, and structural requirements. B. Use sections true to details with clean, straight sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture, free from defects impairing strength and durability. • C. All welding to be done by heli -arc process. • D. Bents shall consist of shop welded one-piece units. When size of bents do not permit shipment as a welded unit, concealed mechanical joints may be used. E. Mechanical joints shall consist of stainless steel bolts with a minimum of two (2) bolts per fastening. Bolts and nuts shall be installed in a concealed manner utilizing '/2" thick by 11/2" aluminum bolt bars welded to structural members. All such mechanical joints must be detailed on shop drawings showing all locations. F. Roof Deck: Extruded aluminum shapes, interlocking self -flashing sections. Shop fabricate to lengths and panel widths required for field assembly. Depth of sections to comply with structural requirements. Provide shop induced camber in deck units with spans greater than 16'-0" to offset dead load deflections. Internal dams are to be used at non -draining ends of deck. G. Exposed rivets used to fasten bottom of fascia to deck to have finish to match fascia. 2.4 FINISHES A. Factory Applied Polyester Paint Finish: Comply with AAMA 2605, chemically cleaned, conversion coated primer, followed by factory applied baked polyester enamel coating (PVDF). 1. Color: As selected by Architect. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 10 73 00 - 5 SECTION 10 73 00 - PROTECTIVE COVERS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly constructed and prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions approved submittals and in proper relationship with adjacent construction. 1. Install members plumb and square, free from warp or twist, securely anchored to substrates with appropriate fasteners and accessories. 2. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with adjacent work. 3. Ensure joints are hairline tight and surfaces flush with adjacent components. B. Install roof deck sections, accessories and related flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide roof slope for rain drainage without ponding water. Align and anchor roof deck units to structural support frames. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Inspection: Coordinate field inspection in accordance with appropriate sections in Division 01. B. Manufacturer's Services: Coordinate manufacturer's services in accordance with appropriate sections in Division 01. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Damaged Units: Replace roof deck panels and other components of the work which have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful minor repair. B. Cleaning: Remove protective coverings at time in project construction sequence which will afford greatest protection of work. Clean finished surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. STANTEC PROTECTIVE COVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 10 73 00 - 6 • • • SECTION 10 73 00 - PROTECTIVE COVERS C. Protection: Advise Contractor of protection and surveillance procedures, as required to ensure that work of this section will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 10 73 00 STANTEC PROTECTIVE COVERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 10 73 00 - 7 SECTION 26 00 00 — ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide the electrical WORK, complete and operable, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all Sections in Division 26, except as otherwise indicated. C. The WORK of this Section is required for operation of electrically -driven equipment provided under Specifications in other Divisions. D. The CONTRACTOR'S attention is directed to the requirement for proper coordination of the WORK of this Section with the WORK of equipment Specifications, the WORK of instrumentation Sections, and the WORK of Section 26 05 10 — Electric Motors. E. Concrete, excavation, backfill, and steel reinforcement required for encasement, installation, or construction of the WORK of the various Sections of Division 26 is included as a part of the WORK under the respective Sections, including duct banks, manholes, handholes, equipment housekeeping pads, and light pole bases. F. Equipment supports and foundations shall be in conformance with the requirements of Section 46 01 00 — Equipment General Provisions. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS NEC (NFPA 70) National Electrical Code: 2017 Edition NETA International Electrical Testing Association NEMA 250 Enclosure for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum) A. Electrical equipment shall be listed by and shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the local code enforcement agency having jurisdiction. B. Installation of electrical equipment and materials shall comply with OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926, as applicable), state building standards, and applicable local codes and regulations. C. Where the requirements of the specifications conflict with UL, NEMA, NFPA, or other applicable standards, the more stringent requirements shall govern. 1.3 SIGNAGE AND MARKINGS A. Identification 1. Provide danger, caution, and warning signs and equipment identification markings in accordance with applicable federal, state, OSHA, and NEC requirements. B. Local Disconnect Switches STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -1 1. Legibly mark each local disconnect switch for motors and equipment in order to indicate its purpose, unless the purpose is indicated by the location and arrangement. • C. Warning Signs 1. 600 Volts Nominal, or Less a. Mark entrances to rooms and other guarded locations that contain live parts with conspicuous signs prohibiting unqualified persons from entering. D. Isolating Switches 1. Provide isolating switches not interlocked with an approved circuit -interrupting device with a sign warning against opening them under load. • • 1.4 PUBLIC UTILITIES REQUIREMENTS A. Contact the serving utility and verify compliance with requirements before construction. B. Coordinate schedules and payments for WORK by utilities. C. Where conduits and conductors in the WORK are indicated to be larger, heavier schedule, or have greater protective coating than utility requirements, provide the larger size, heavier schedule, or greater protection. D. Provide electrical service as indicated and as required by the serving utility. E. Verify and provide service conduits, fittings, transformer pad, grounding devices, and service wires not provided by the serving utility. F. Verify with the utility the exact location of each service point and type of service, and pay charges levied by the serving utilities as part of the WORK. 1.5 PERMITS AND INSPECTION A. Obtain permits and pay inspection fees according to the General Conditions. B. Pay connection and turn -on service charges required by the utility company. 1.6 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. 2. Custom -prepare Shop Drawings. 3. Drawings or data indicating "optional" or "as required" equipment will not be accepted. 4. Cross out options not proposed or delete from the Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -2 1. complete material lists stating manufacturer and brand name of each item or class of material. 2. Shop Drawings for grounding WORK not specifically indicated 3. front, side, rear elevations, and top views with dimensional data 4. location of conduit entrances and access plates 5. component data 6. connection diagrams, terminal numbers, internal wiring diagrams, conductor size, and cable numbers 7. method of anchoring, seismic requirements, weight 8. types of materials and finish 9. nameplates 10. temperature limitations, as applicable 11. voltage requirement, phase, and current, as applicable 12. front and rear access requirements 13. test reports 14. grounding requirements C. Catalog Cuts 1. Submit catalog cuts or photocopies of applicable pages of bulletins or brochures for mass produced, non -custom manufactured material. 2. Stamp the catalog data sheets in order to indicate the Project name, applicable Specifications Section and Paragraph, model number, and options. D. Materials and Equipment Schedules 1. Within 30 Days of the commencement date in the Notice to Proceed, deliver to the ENGINEER a complete list of materials, equipment, apparatus, and fixtures that are proposed for use. 2. Include in the list the type, size, name of manufacturers, catalog number, and such other information as required to identify the item. E. Technical Manuals 1. Submit complete information in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. 2. As -Built Drawings STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -3 a. Prepare as -built drawings, showing invert and top elevations and routing of duct banks and concealed below -grade electrical installations. b. Furnish the drawings to the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. 1.7 AREA DESIGNATIONS A. General 1. Designations for raceway system enclosures shall comply with the requirements of Section 26 05 33 — Electrical Raceway Systems. 2. Designations for electrical WORK specifically indicated in other Sections shall comply with the requirements of those Sections unless indicated otherwise. 3. Designations for other electrical WORK not included in the above Paragraphs shall be as follows: AREA NEMA ENCLOSURE CLASSIFICATION 1 3R 7 9 12 Notes Exterior X 4. Designations for electrical WORK not included in the above Paragraphs shall be NEMA 4X. 5. Installations in hazardous locations shall conform strictly to the requirements of the indicated Class, Group, and Division. B. Material Requirements 1. Construct NEMA 4X enclosures of Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, except in chlorine and HFS areas where non-metallic enclosures shall be provided. 2. Do not coat NEMA 4X enclosures. 3. Construct NEMA 7 enclosures of cast aluminum where used with aluminum conduit, and of cast iron when used with galvanized steel conduit. 4. Do not coat NEMA 7 and 9 enclosures. 5. Construct NEMA 1, 3R, and 12 enclosures of steel, and prime and coat with ANSI 61 light grey paint. 1.8 TESTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for factory and field tests indicated in Division 26, as required by the ENGINEER, and as required by other authorities having jurisdiction. B. Furnish necessary testing equipment. STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -4 C. Pay the costs of the tests, including replacement parts and labor, due to damage resulting from damaged equipment or from testing and correction of a faulty installation. D. Reporting 1. Where test reporting is indicated, submit proof -of -design test reports for mass- produced equipment with the Shop Drawings. 2. Submit factory performance test reports for custom -manufactured equipment for approval prior to shipment. 3. Submit field test reports for review prior to Substantial Completion. E. Remove and replace equipment or material that fails a test, or, if the ENGINEER approves, repair and retested for compliance. F. Corrections to equipment or materials with a factory warranty shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be performed in a manner that does not void the warranty. 1.9 DEMOLITION AND RELATED WORK A. General 1. Perform electrical demolition WORK as indicated. 2. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that demolition WORK may also be indicated on non -electrical Drawings. 3. Coordinate with all trades regarding electrical de-energization, disconnection, and removal, and the overall sequence of construction. B. Electrical Requirements for Removed Equipment 1. Remove all equipment, conduit and wiring as indicated on the drawings. C. Items to be returned to the OWNER: 1. Lift Station Control Panel 2. Antenna D. Removed materials and equipment not indicated to be returned to the OWNER shall, upon removal, become the CONTRACTOR'S property and shall be disposed of off- Site. E. Place materials indicated to be returned to the OWNER in boxes, with the contents clearly marked, and store at a location determined by the ENGINEER. 1 10 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCING A. General 1. Because the continuance of the existing lift station operation during construction fo the new lift station is critical, the CONTRACTOR shall carefully examine the WORK to be provided in, on, or adjacent to existing equipment. STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -5 2. Schedule the WORK, subject to OWNER's approval, to minimize required shutdown time. 3. Submit a written sequencing request, including the sequence and duration of activities to be performed during lift sation shutdown. 4. Switching, safety tagging, and the like, as required for lift station shutdown or to isolate existing equipment, shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR. 5. In no case shall the CONTRACTOR begin any WORK in, on, or adjacent to existing equipment without written authorization from the ENGINEER. B. Existing Utilities 1. Exercise extreme caution when digging trenches to not damage existing underground utilities. 2. The cost of repairs of damages caused during construction shall be included as a part of the WORK. C. Field Verifications 1. Visit the Site before submitting a Bid to become better acquainted with the WORK of this Contract. 2. The lack of knowledge will not be accepted as justification for extra compensation to perform the WORK. • PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Provide equipment and materials that are new and are the products of experienced and reputable manufacturers in the industry. B. Provide equipment and materials listed by UL and bearing the UL label, where UL requirements apply. C. Provide similar items in the WORK as products of the same manufacturer. D. Provide equipment and materials of industrial grade standard of construction. • E. Where a NEMA enclosure type is indicated in a non -hazardous location, use that type of enclosure despite the fact that certain modifications such as cutouts for control devices may negate the NEMA rating. F. On devices indicated to display dates, display the year as 4 digits. G. Temperature Ratings of Equipment Terminations 1. Provide terminations and Tugs rated for use with 75 -degree C conductors. 2. Wire sizes in the Contract Documents are based on NEC ampacity tables using the 75 -degree C ratings. STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -6 2.2 MOUNTING HARDWARE A. Miscellaneous Hardware 1. Provide nuts, bolts, and washers constructed of stainless steel. 2. Struts a. Construct struts for mounting of conduits and equipment of 304 stainless steel. b. Where contact with concrete or dissimilar metals may cause galvanic corrosion, use suitable non-metallic insulators in order to prevent such corrosion. c. Strut Manufacturer, or Equal: Unistrut; B -Line 3. End Caps a. Provide plastic protective end caps for all exposed strut ends. b. End Caps Manufacturer, or Equal: Unistrut, Model P2860 4. Anchors a. Provide stainless steel expansion anchors for attaching equipment to concrete walls, floors, and ceilings. b. Wood plugs will not be accepted. c. Anchor Manufacturer, or Equal: "Power -Bolt" or "Power -Stud" as manufactured by Power Fasteners, Inc.; similar by Star. 2.3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates 1. Fabricate nameplates from white -letter, black -face laminated plastic engraving stock, such as Formica Type ES -1 or equal. 2. Securely fasten each nameplate, using fasteners constructed of brass, cadmium - plated steel, or stainless steel, and screwed into inserts or tapped holes as required. 3. Provide engraved characters of the block style, with no characters smaller than 1/8 inch top to bottom. B. Conductor and Equipment Identification 1. Provide imprinted plastic -coated cloth marking devices, such as manufactured by Brady, Thomas & Betts, or equal. 2. Alternatively, provide heat -shrunk plastic tubing, imprinted split -sleeve markers cemented in place. STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -7 • • • PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Incidentals 1. Provide materials and incidentals required for a complete and operable system, even if not required explicitly by the Contract Documents. 2. Typical incidentals are terminal lugs not furnished with vendor -supplied equipment, compression connectors for cables, splices, junction and terminal boxes, and control wiring required by vendor -furnished equipment to connect with other equipment indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Field Control of Location and Arrangement 1. The Drawings diagrammatically indicate the desired location and arrangement of outlets, conduit runs, equipment, and other items. 2. Exact locations shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR in the field, based on the physical size and arrangement of equipment, finished elevations, and other obstructions. 3. Follow the locations on the Drawings, however, as closely as possible. 4. Conduits a. Provide exposed or encased routings as indicated. b. Arrange conduits encased in a slab as to not impede concrete flow. 5. Placement a. Locate luminaires, switches, convenience outlets, and similar items within finished rooms as indicated. b. Where exact locations are not indicated, such locations will be determined by the ENGINEER. c. If equipment is installed without instruction and must be moved, the cost of moving shall be included as part of the WORK. d. Slightly adjust luminaire locations in order to avoid obstructions and to minimize shadows. 6. Circuits a. Wherever conduits and wiring for lighting and receptacles are not indicated, it shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to provide lighting and receptacle - related conduits and wiring as required, based on the actual installed fixture layout and the circuit designations as indicated. b. Provide No. 12 AWG minimum wiring, and 3/4 -inch minimum conduits (exposed) and one -inch minimum conduits (encased). STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -8 c. Where circuits are combined in the same raceway, derate conductor ampacities in accordance with NEC requirements. 7. Workmanship a. Install materials and equipment in strict accordance with the printed recommendations of the manufacturer, and using workers skilled in the WORK. b. Coordinate installation in the field with other trades in order to avoid interferences. 8. Protection of Equipment and Materials a. Fully protect materials and equipment against damage from any cause. b. Cover materials and equipment, both in storage and during construction, in such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred, or splattered with water, foam, plaster, or paint. c. Keep moving parts clean and dry. d. Replace or refinish damaged materials or equipment, including faceplates of panels and switchboard sections, as part of the WORK. C. Provide incoming utility power equipment in conformance with the utility's requirements. 3.2 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING A. Floor -supported equipment and raceways shall be anchored in place by methods that will meet seismic requirements in the area where the Project is located. Refer to Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage for support and anchorage requirements. B. Provide leveling channels anchored to the floor for MCC's, switchgear and other floor - supported electrical equipment. C. Manufacturer's Recommendations 1. Anchoring methods and leveling criteria in the printed recommendations of the equipment manufacturers are a part of the WORK of this Contract. 2. Submit such recommendations as Shop Drawings as indicated. 3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide nameplates for panelboards, control and instrumentation panels, starters, switches, and pushbutton stations. B. In addition to nameplates, equip control devices with standard collar -type legend plates. C. Identify control devices within enclosures as indicated and similar to the subparagraph above. D. Provide suitable inscribed finish plates for toggle switches that control Toads out of sight of switches and for multi -switch locations of more than 2 switches. STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -9 E. Use equipment names and tag numbers, where indicated, on nameplates. F. Provide typewritten circuit directories for panelboards, that accurately reflect the outlets connected to each circuit. G. Terminal Blocks 1. Label termination points on terminal blocks by identifiers on the blocks. 2. Provide identifiers that have been preprinted by the terminal manufacturer or custom - printed. 3. Hand -lettered markers will not be accepted. H. Provide arc -flash labels for all distribution equipment, stand-alone disconnects, starters, and VFDs. Fill in all values as required by NFPA 70E, and as calculated as part of the Protective Device Study. Verify that all settings as prescribed by the approved Protective Device Study have been implemented in the field. 3.4 CLEANING A. Before final acceptance, thoroughly clean the electrical WORK of cement, plaster, and other materials. B. Remove temporary tags, markings, stickers, and the like. C. Remove oil and grease spots with a non-flammable cleaning solvent by carefully wiping and scraping cracks and corners. D. Apply touch-up paint to scratches on panels and cabinets. E. Vacuum clean electrical cabinets and enclosures. Do not use compressed air to clean cabinets. F. Clean luminaires inside and out. Replace failed lamps. G. Properly dispose cleaning debris and refuse off-site. END OF SECTION STANTEC ELECTRICAL WORK, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 00 00 -10 SECTION 26 0519 - WIRE AND CABLING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide wire and cable, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. In the event that motors provided are larger horsepower than the motors indicated, raceways, conductors, starters, overload elements, and branch circuit protectors shall be revised as necessary to control and protect the increased motor horsepower in accordance with Section 26 05 10 — Electric Motors. Revisions are part of the WORK of this Section. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit Shop Drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals and 26 00 00— Electrical Work, General. Submit cable test results in accordance with this Section. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all cables from damage at all times. B. Cable ends shall be protected from water entry in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures. Cable ends shall not be left open in manholes or other locations subject to submergence. If the cable ends become submerged prior to splicing or termination, the cables shall be replaced in their entirety. C. Cables shall be pulled into raceways in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Under no circumstances shall cable pulling tensions exceed the manufacturer's written instructions. D. Pulling tensions on raceway cables shall be within the limits recommended by the cable manufacturer. Wire pulling lubricant, where needed, shall be UL approved. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Conductors, include grounding conductors, shall be stranded copper. Aluminum conductor and/or solid conductor wire and cable will not be permitted. Insulation shall bear the UL label, the manufacturer's trademark, and identify the type, voltage, and conductor size. Conductors except flexible cords and cables, fixture wires, and conductors that form an integral part of equipment such as motors and controllers shall conform to the requirements of Article 310 of the National Electric Code, latest edition, for current carrying capacity. Flexible cords and cables shall conform to Article 400, and fixture wires shall conform to Article 402. Wiring shall have wire markers at each end. B. Low Voltage Power and Lighting Wire 1. Wire rated for 600 volts in duct or conduit for power and lighting circuits shall be single conductor, Class B Type XHHW or XHHW-2 cross-linked polyethylene conforming to UL -44 - UL Standard for Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables. THHN/THWN wire STANTEC WIRE AND CABLING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 19 - 1 shall not be permitted to be used for any power or control wiring in this project, except as specifically permitted within control panels per Section 40 95 13 — Control Panels. 2. Conductors for feeders as defined in Article 100 of the NEC shall be sized to prevent a voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, heating, and lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, and where the maximum total voltage drop on both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest connected load does not exceed 5 percent. 3. 3. Conductors for branch circuits as defined in Article 100 of the NEC shall be sized to prevent voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest connected load or combinations of such loads and where the maximum total voltage drop on both feeders and branch circuits to the farthest connected load does not exceed 5 percent. 4. Wiring for 600 volt class power and lighting shall be as manufactured by Okonite, General Cable, Southwire, or equal. C. Low Voltage Control Wire 1. Low voltage control wire in duct or conduit shall be the same type as power and lighting wire indicated above. 2. Control wiring shall be No.14 AWG. 3. Control wires inside panels and cabinets shall be machine tool grade type MTW, UL approved, rated for 90 degrees C at dry locations, and be as manufactured by American, General Cable, or equal. D. Instrumentation Cable 1. Instrumentation cable shall be rated at 300 volts, minimum. 2. Individual conductors shall be No. 16 AWG stranded, tinned copper. Insulation shall be color coded polyethylene: black -clear for 2 conductor cable and black -red -clear for 3 conductor cable. 3. Instrumentation cables shall be composed of the individual conductors, an aluminum polyester foil shield, a No. 18 or larger AWG stranded, tinned copper drain wire, and a PVC outer jacket with a thickness of 0.047 -inches. 4. Single pair, No. 16 AWG, twisted, shielded cable shall be Belden Part No. 8719, similar by General Cable, or equal. 5. Single triad, No. 16 AWG, twisted, shielded cable shall be Belden Part No. 8618, similar by General Cable, or equal. E. Cable Splices and Terminations 1. Where cable lugs are required for power cable terminations, utilize compression lugs — 3M Scotchlok 30000 and 31100 Series, Penn Union HBBLU and BLU, Burndy Hylug, or equal. Utilize compression tools as recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure type, twist -on connectors (wire nuts) will not be acceptable. 411 2. Pre -insulated fork tongue lugs shall be Thomas & Betts, Burndy, or equal. STANTEC WIRE AND CABLING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 19 - 2 3. General purpose insulating tape shall be Scotch No. 33, Plymouth Slip -knot, or equal. High temperature tape shall be polyvinyl as manufactured by Plymouth, 3M, or equal. 4. Labels for coding 600 volt wiring shall be computer printable or pre-printed, self - laminating, self -sticking, as manufactured by W.H. Brady, 3M, or equal. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, terminate and test all power, control, and instrumentation conductors. B. The CONTRACTOR shall, as a minimum, provide the number of control wires listed in the conduit schedule or on the Contract Drawings. Excess wires shall be treated as spares for future use. C. Conductors shall not be pulled into any raceway until raceway has been cleared of moisture and debris. D. Instrumentation wire shall not be run in the same raceway with power and control wiring except where specifically indicated. E. Wire in panels, cabinets, and wireways shall be neatly grouped using nylon tie straps, and shall be neatly fanned out to terminals. 3.2 FIELD ASSEMBLY A. General 1. Wire taps and splices shall be properly taped and insulated according to their respective classes. 2. In general, there shall be no cable splices in underground manholes or pullboxes. If splices are necessary, the cables shall be spliced using submersible cable splices, suitable for continuous submergence. Splices in underground manholes and pullboxes may be made only with the approval of the ENGINEER. 3. Stranded conductors shall be terminated directly on equipment box lugs making sure that conductor strands are confined within lug. Use forked -tongue lugs where equipment box lugs have not been provided. 4. Excess control and instrumentation wires shall be long enough to terminate at any terminal block in the enclosure, be properly taped, be identified with origin, and be neatly coiled. B. Control Wire and Cable 1. Control conductors shall be spliced or terminated only at the locations indicated and only on terminal strips or terminal lugs of vendor furnished equipment. 2. In motor control centers, and control panels, control wire and spare wire shall be terminated to terminal strips. STANTEC WIRE AND CABLING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 19 - 3 3. The CONTRACTOR shall provide as a minimum the number of control wires listed in the conduit schedule or as indicated in the Contract Documents. Excess wires shall be treated as spares. C. Instrumentation Wire and Cable 1. Shielded instrumentation cables shall be grounded at one end only, preferably the receiving end on a 4 - 20 mA system. 2. Two and 3 conductor shielded cables installed in conduit runs which exceed available standard cable lengths may be spliced in pullboxes with the prior approval of the ENGINEER. Such cable runs shall have only one splice per conductor. D. Power Wire and Cable 1. 120/208 -volt, 120/240 -volt, and 480/277 -volt branch circuit conductors may be spliced in suitable fittings at locations determined by the CONTRACTOR. Cables rated above 2,000 volts shall be spliced or terminated only at equipment terminals indicated. 2. Splices to motor leads in motor terminal boxes shall be wrapped with mastic material to form a mold and then shall be taped with a minimum of 2 layers of varnished cambric tape overtaped with a minimum of 2 layers of high temperature tape. E. Cable Identification 1. General: Wire and cable shall be identified for proper control of circuits and equipment and to reduce maintenance effort. Identification shall be installed at every termination point. 2. Identification Numbers: The CONTRACTOR shall assign to each control and instrumentation wire and cable a unique identification number. Numbers shall be assigned to conductors having common terminals and shall be shown on "as built" drawings. Identification numbers shall appear within 3 -inches of conductor terminals. "Control and Instrumentation Conductors" shall be defined as any conductor used for control, interlock, alarm, annunciator, or signal purposes. a. Multiconductor cable shall be assigned a number which shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and at stub -up locations beneath free-standing equipment. It is expected that the cable number shall form a part of the individual wire number. Individual control conductors and instrumentation cable shall be identified at pull points as described above. The instrumentation cable numbers shall incorporate the loop numbers assigned in the Contract Documents. b. 120/208 -volt system feeder cables and branch circuit conductors shall be color coded as follows: Phase A - black, Phase B - red, Phase C - blue, and Neutral - white. The 480/277 -volt system conductors shall be color coded as follows: Phase A - Brown, Phase B - Orange, Phase C - Yellow, and Neutral - Gray. Branch circuit switch shall be yellow. Insulated ground wire shall be green, and neutral shall be gray. Color coding and phasing shall be consistent throughout the Site, but bars at panelboards, switchboards, and motor control centers shall be connected Phase A -B -C, top to bottom, or left to right, facing connecting lugs. Color coding tape shall be used where colored insulation is not available. Colored identification tape may be used on conductors between the local disconnect and the Toad, where permitted by the NEC. Any phase changes necessary for proper rotation shall be made at the driven equipment where STANTEC WIRE AND CABLING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 19 - 4 colored insulation is used. Phase changes may be made on the Toad side of the local disconnect, where phase colors are identified using tape. c. General purpose AC control cable shall be red. General purpose DC control cable shall be blue. d. Spare cable shall be terminated on terminal screws and shall be identified with a unique number as well as with destination. e. Terminal strips shall be identified by computer printable, cloth, self -sticking marker strips attached under the terminal strip. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Cable Assembly and Testing: Cable assembly and testing shall comply with applicable requirements of ICEA Publication No. S-95-658/NEMA WC70 - Ethylene -Propylene - Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy. Factory test results shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals, prior to shipment of cable. The following field tests shall be the minimum requirements: 1. Insulation resistance testing, using a DC megohmeter, shall be performed on cables operating at more than 2,000 volts to ground. Time -resistance readings shall be taken and recorded at intervals of 30 seconds and one minute. Time -resistance voltage levels shall be per the cable manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Power cable rated at 600 volts shall be tested for insulation resistance between phases and from each phase to a ground using a megohmeter. 3. Field testing shall be done after cable is installed in the raceways. 4. Field megger testing may be performed by the CONTRACTOR or a NETA-certified test organization. When tested by the CONTRACTOR, submit test equipment calibration sheets prior to performing any field testing. Test results shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review and acceptance. 5. Cables failing the tests shall be replaced with a new cable or be repaired. Repair methods shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer and shall be performed by persons certified by the industry. B. Continuity Test: Control and instrumentation cable shall be tested for continuity, polarity, undesirable ground, and origination. Such tests shall be performed after installation and prior to placing cable in service. END OF SECTION STANTEC WIRE AND CABLING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 19 - 5 • • • SECTION 26 05 26 — GROUNDING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide the electrical grounding system, complete and operable, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General apply to this Section. C. Single Manufacturer 1. Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals and Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. 1. Include with each submittal a copy of this specification section, with addenda updates included, and all referenced and applicable sections included, with each paragraph check -marked to indicate specification compliance or marked to indicate requested deviations from specification requirements. Check marks ('1) shall denote full compliance with a paragraph as a whole. If deviations from the specifications are indicated, and therefore requested by the CONTRACTOR, each deviation shall be underlined and denoted by a number in the margin to the right of the identified paragraph, referenced to a detailed written explanation of the reasons for requesting the deviation. The ENGINEER shall be the final authority for determining acceptability of requested deviations. The remaining portions of the paragraph not underlined will signify compliance on the part of the CONTRACTOR with the specifications. Failure to include a copy of the marked -up specification sections, along with justification(s) for any requested deviations to the specification requirements, with the submittal shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the entire submittal with no further consideration. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit manufacturer's product information for connectors, clamps, and all grounding system components, showing compliance with the requirements of this Section. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Components of the grounding electrode system shall be manufactured in accordance with UL 467 - Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment, and shall conform to the applicable requirements of National Electrical Code Article 250 and local codes. B. Grounding System 1. Grounding loop conductors shall be bare annealed copper conductors. 2. Conductors shall be No. 4/0 unless indicated otherwise. STANTEC GROUNDING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 26 - 1 3. Ground Rods a. Unless indicated otherwise, provide ground rods minimum of 3/4 inch in diameter, 10 feet long, and with a uniform covering of electrolytic copper metallically bonded to a rigid steel core. b. Provide corrosion -resistant copper -to -steel bond. c. The rods shall conform to UL 467. d. The rods shall be of the sectional type, joined by threaded copper alloy couplings. 4. Make buried, concrete -encased, or otherwise inaccessible cable -to -cable and cable - to -ground rod connections using exothermic welds by Cadweld, Thermoweld, or equal. 5. Exposed Connectors a. Exposed grounding connectors shall be of the compression type (connector -to - cable), constructed of high -copper alloy, and manufactured specifically for the particular grounding application. b. The connectors shall be Burndy, O.Z. Gedney, or equal. 6. Use grounding clamps to bond each separately -derived system to the grounding electrode conductors. 7. Equipment Grounding Circuit Conductors a. The conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the Toad circuit conductors. b. The minimum size shall be as indicated. Where not indicated, sizes shall conform to Table 250.122 of the National Electrical Code. c. Metallic conduit systems shall have an equipment grounding wires as well as being equipment grounding conductors themselves. 8. Grounding Materials Manufacturer, or Equal a. Copperweld b. Thermoweld c. Burndy d. Thomas and Betts e. OZ Gedney STANTEC GROUNDING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 26 - 2 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION • A. Provide a separate grounding conductor, securely grounded in each raceway independent of raceway material. • • B. Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect at motor box. Provide a supplemental ground connection for motor shaft grounding rings, where applicable. C. Do not use bolts for securing the motor box to the frame or the cover for grounding connectors. D. Sizes shall be as indicated on the Conduit Schedule and in accordance with NEC Article 250. E. Route the conductors inside the raceway. F. Provide a grounding -type bushing for secondary feeder conduits that originate from the secondary section of each MCC section, switchboard, or panelboard. G. Individually bond the raceway to the ground bus in the secondary section. H. Provide a green insulated wire as grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box grounding screw, and, for grounding type devices, to the equipment grounding conductor. I. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for parallel feeders. Connect the parallel ground conductors together at each end of the parallel run, as required by the NEC. J. Interconnect the secondary switchgear MCC or panelboard neutral bus to the ground bus in the secondary switchgear compartment only at the service entrance point. For wye connected, 3 phase, separately derived systems with 3 wire distribution, connect the transformer neutral to the grounding electrode system at the transformer. Connections shall be in accordance with the NEC. K. Provide the duct bank ground system as indicated, including trenching, splices, ground rods, and connections to equipment and structures. L. Measure ground impedance in accordance with IEEE STD 81 after installation but before connecting the electrode to the remaining grounding system. Provide additional grounding system testing in accordance with Section 26 01 26 — Electrical Tests. M. Low Voltage Grounded System (600V or less) 1. A low -voltage grounded system is defined as a system where the local power supply is a transformer, with the transformer secondary grounded. 2. Grounding system connections for a premises -wired system supplied by a grounded AC service shall be provided with a grounding electrode connector connected to the grounded service conductor at each service, in accordance with the NEC. 3. The grounded circuit conductor shall not be used for grounding non -current -carrying parts of equipment, raceways, and other enclosures except where specifically listed and permitted by the NEC. STANTEC GROUNDING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 26 - 3 N. Ground Rods 1. Provide ground rods at the indicated locations. 2. A single electrode that does not have resistance -to -ground of 5 ohms or less shall be augmented by additional electrodes to obtain this value. 3. Take the resistance -to -ground measurement during dry weather, a minimum of 48 hours after a rainfall. 4. Rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length. O. Instrumentation Shield Grounding 1. Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its shield grounded at one end only unless the approved Shop Drawings indicate that the shield will be grounded at both ends. 2. The grounding point shall be at the control panel or at the receiving end of the signal carried by the cable. 3. The termination of the shield drain wire shall be on its own terminal screw. 4. Jumper together the terminal screws, using manufactured terminal block jumpers or a No. 14 green insulated conductor. 5. Connect the ground bus via a green No. 12 conductor to the main ground bus for the panel. END OF SECTION STANTEC GROUNDING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 26 - 4 SECTION 26 05 33 - ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide electrical raceway systems, complete and in place, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. • • B. In the event that individual equipment Toads provided are larger than indicated in the Contract Documents, revise raceways, conductors, starters, overload elements, and branch circuit protectors as necessary in order to control and protect the increased connected load in conformance to NEC requirements as part of the WORK. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals, and Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit complete catalog cuts of raceways, fittings, boxes, supports, and mounting hardware, marked where applicable to show proposed materials and finishes. 2. As -Built Drawings a. Prepare as -built drawings of encased concealed and exposed raceways, ducts, raceways, junction boxes, pull boxes, and electrical and instrumentation equipment. b. Furnish the drawings to the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Pull and junction boxes, fittings, and other indicated enclosures that are dedicated to the raceway system shall comply with the requirements of this Section. 2.2 CONDUIT A. Rigid Aluminum (RAL) Conduits 1. Provide rigid aluminum conduit manufactured from 6063 alloy, temper T-1. 2. Provide rigid aluminum conduit manufactured in accordance with NEMA C80.5 — Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit, and UL -6A — Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass and Stainless Steel. 3. Manufacturer, or Equal a. V.A.W. of America b. Alcoa STANTEC ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 33 - 1 B. PVC Rigid Non -Metallic Conduit 1. Provide rigid non-metallic conduit manufactured from Schedule 40 PVC, as indicated, and sunlight -resistant. 2. Provide rigid non-metallic conduit manufactured in accordance with NEMA TC -2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit, and UL -651 - Standard for Rigid Non-metallic Conduit. 3. Manufacturer, or Equal a. Carlon b. Cantex C. Liquid -Tight Flexible Conduit 1. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit constructed of a flexible galvanized metal core with a sunlight -resistant thermoplastic outer jacket. 2. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit manufactured in accordance with the requirements of UL -360 - Steel Conduits, Liquid -Tight Flexible. 3. Manufacturer, or Equal a. Anaconda, Sealtite b. Electriflex, Liquatite D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) or Intermediate conduit (IMC) will not be accepted. 2.3 FITTINGS AND BOXES A. General 1. For use with metallic conduit, provide cast and malleable iron fittings of the threaded type with 5 full threads. 2. Fittings and Boxes a. Provide fittings and boxes with neoprene gaskets and non-magnetic stainless steel screws. b. Attach covers by means of holes tapped into the body of the fitting. c. Covers for fittings attached by means of clips or clamps will not be accepted. 3. Provide boxes larger than standard cast or malleable types manufactured of Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel, NEMA 4X. 4. Terminations a. In outdoor areas, terminate conduit in rain -tight hubs as manufactured by Myers, O.Z. Gedney, Appleton, or equal. STANTEC ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 33 - 2 b. In other than outdoor areas, provide sealed locknuts and bushings. 5. Hazardous Locations a. In hazardous locations, provide conduit, fittings, and boxes suitable for the indicated Class and Division. b. Provide conduits terminated in NEMA 7 boxes with a male bushing, Adalet Type PEM, or equal, inside the box. B. Cast Aluminum Fittings and Boxes 1. Provide cast aluminum boxes and fittings with less than 0.40 percent copper content, and use with aluminum conduit. 2. Manufacturer, or Equal a. O.Z. Gedney b. Appleton c. Crouse -Hinds PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Run wiring in raceway unless indicated otherwise. B. Install raceways between equipment as indicated. C. Provide raceway systems that are electrically and mechanically complete before conductors are installed. D. Bends and Offsets 1. Provide bends and offsets that are smooth and symmetrical, and accomplished with tools designed for this purpose. 2. Provide factory elbows wherever possible. E. Routing 1. Where raceway routings are indicated, follow those routings to the extent possible. 2. Where raceways are indicated but routing is not indicated, such as home runs or on conduit developments and schedules, raceway routing shall be the CONTRACTOR's choice and provided in strict accordance with the NEC as well as customary installation practice. 3. Provide the raceway encased, exposed, concealed, or under -floor as indicated. 4. Adjust routings in order to avoid obstructions. F. Coordination STANTEC ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 33 - 3 1. Coordinate between trades prior to installing the raceways. 2. The lack of such coordination shall not be justification for extra compensation, and any costs for removal and re -installation to resolve conflicts shall be part of the Contract Price. G. Wherever contact with concrete or dissimilar metals can produce galvanic corrosion of equipment, provide a means of suitable insulation in order to prevent such corrosion. 3.2 CONDUIT A. Provide exposed conduit manufactured of rigid aluminum. B. For conduit containing only grounding system bonding conductors, provide Schedule 80 PVC conduit. C. Power conduit encased in concrete shall be constructed of Schedule 40 PVC. D. Analog control or instrumentation conduit shall be aluminum. E. Concrete Encasement 1. Where PVC conduit is stubbed up from a concrete encasement, provide a PVC - coated RGS elbow. 2. The conduit shall emerge from the concrete in a direction perpendicular to the surface whenever possible. F. Size 1. Provide exposed conduit of 3/4 -inch minimum trade size. 2. Provide encased conduit of one -inch minimum trade size. G. Install supports at distances required by the NEC. H. Concrete cover for conduit and fittings shall not be less than 1-1/2 inches for concrete exposed to earth or weather, or less than 3/4 inch for concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with the ground. I. Penetrations 1. Provide conduit passing through walls or floors with plastic sleeves. 2. Perform core drilling in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. 3. Conduits passing through a slab, wall, or beam shall not significantly impair the strength of the construction. J. Place the conduit such that cutting, bending, or displacing reinforcement from its proper location will not be required. K. Coat threads with a conductive lubricant before assembly. STANTEC ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 33 - 4 L. Joints 1. Provide joints that are tight, thoroughly grounded, secure, and free of obstructions in the pipe. 2. Adequately ream the conduit in order to prevent damage to the wires and cables inside. 3. Use strap -wrenches and vises to install the conduit, in order to prevent wrench marks on the conduit. 4. Replace conduit with wrench marks. M. Slope 1. Wherever possible, slope the conduit runs to drain at one or both ends of the run. 2. Wherever conduit enters a substructure below grade, slope the conduit in order to drain water away from the structure. 3. Take extreme care in order to avoid pockets or depressions in the conduit. N. Connections 1. Make connections to motors and other equipment subject to vibration by using liquid - tight flexible conduit not exceeding 3 feet in length. 2. Provide equipment subject to vibration that is normally provided with wiring leads with a cast junction box for the make-up of connections. O. Provide conduit seal fittings in hazardous classified locations, in strict accordance with the NEC. P. Provide conduit, fittings, and boxes required in hazardous classified areas that are suitably rated for the area, and provide in strict accordance with NEC requirements. Q. Duct sealant shall be foam duct sealant such as Polywater FST or approved equal. Provide duct sealant where required by NEC Article 300.7. R. Identification of Conduits 1. Identify conduits at ends and at pulling points. 2. Identification shall be the unique conduit number assigned in the Contract Documents. 3. Other than 120 VAC panelboard circuits, if a conduit has not been assigned a unique number in the Contract Documents, assign a unique number following the numbering scheme used in the Contract Documents. 4. Assign a unique number to 120 VAC panelboard circuits, similar to the cable numbering scheme used in the Contract Documents. 5. Provide conduit identification by a stamped or engraved non -corroding metal tag attached to the conduit bushing. STANTEC ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 33 - 5 6. Provide an engraved phenolic nameplate in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General, or a computer printed self-adhesive label attached to the equipment or enclosure inside which the conduit terminates. 7. Markings with a pen or paint will not be accepted. S. Identification of Pullboxes and Junction Boxes 1. Identify pullboxes and junction boxes. 2. Identification shall be the unique conduit number assigned in the Contract Documents, or if not assigned a unique number the CONTRACTOR shall assign one following the numbering scheme used in the Contract Documents. 3. Provide box identification by a stamped or engraved non -corroding metal tag or an engraved phenolic nameplate, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General, and attached to the box or enclosure. 4. Markings with a pen or paint will not be accepted. T. Provide conduit for data cables in accordance with the equipment manufacturer's recommendations, especially regarding separation from low- and medium -voltage power raceways. END OF SECTION STANTEC ELECTRICAL RACEWAY SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 33 - 6 SECTION 26 05 36 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide wiring devices, complete and operable, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General apply to this Section. C. Single Manufacturer • • 1. Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit complete catalog cuts of switches, receptacles, enclosures, covers and appurtenances, marked to clearly identify the proposed materials. 2. Submit documentation showing that the proposed materials comply with the requirements of NEC and U.L. 3. Submit documentation of the manufacturer's qualifications. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Devices shall carry the U.L. label and shall be designed for use with stranded copper conductors. B. Color 1. General purpose duplex receptacles and toggle switch handles shall be Brown everywhere except unless otherwise indicated. 2. Special purpose receptacles shall have a body color as indicated. C. Receptacles and switches shall be of specification grade and shall conform to NEMA WD - 1, Federal Specifications W -C -596E and W -S -896E, respectively. 2.2 LIGHTING SWITCHES A. Toggle switches shall be AC only type switch. 1. 20A, 120/277V, Single, Double, 3 -Way and 4 -Way, Respectively STANTEC WIRING DEVICES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 36 -1 a. Leviton: 1221-2, 1222-2, 1223-2, 1224-2 b. Hubbell: HBL1221, HBL1222, HBL1223, HBL1224 c. Pass and Seymour: PS20AC1, PS20AC2, PS20AC3, PS20AC4 d. Or Equal 2.3 GENERAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLES A. Duplex receptacles shall be of the polarized 3 -wire type for use with a 3 -wire cord with grounded lead, and one designated stud shall be permanently grounded to the conduit system in accordance with NEC article 406.4. B. Receptacles shall be NEMA Configuration #5-20R: duplex receptacle rated 125V, 20A a. Leviton: #5362 b. Hubbell: #HBL5362 c. Pass and Seymour: #5362A d. Or Equal C. Receptacles for damp/wet locations shall be weather -resistant with extra duty, in -use listed covers in accordance with NEC Article 406.8. D. GFCIs 1. Ground -fault circuit -interrupting receptacles (GFCIs) shall be installed at the indicated locations and as required by the NEC. 2. GFCIs shall be duplex receptacles, of specification grade, and tripping at 5 mA. 3. GFCI ratings shall be 125V, 20 amperes, NEMA WD -1, Configuration 5-20R, and capable of interrupting 5,000 amperes without damage. 4. GFCIs shall be weather resistant -listed in accordance with NEC Article 406.8. 5. Feed -through -type GFCIs serving standard receptacles will not be permitted. a. Leviton: G5362 -WT b. Hubbel: GFR5362SG c. Or Equal 2.4 ENCLOSURES AND COVERS A. Surface -mounted switches and receptacles shall be housed in FS or FD -type weatherproof conduit fittings. B. Switch and receptacle covers on surface -mounted boxes shall be constructed of die-cast copper -free aluminum. 1. Appleton: FSK 2. Crouse -Hinds: DS185 and WLRD-1 3. Hubbell Killark: FZ and FC 4. Or Equal C. Wet Locations STANTEC WIRING DEVICES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 36 -2 1. Receptacles in wet locations shall be provided with a hinged non-metallic Clear cover/enclosure marked "Suitable for Wet Locations when in use" and "UL Listed." II 2. Provide a gasket between the enclosure and the mounting surface, and between the hinged cover and mounting plate/base. a. Appleton: WCIU b. Crouse -Hinds: TP74 c. Hubbell TayMac: Extra Duty d. Or Equal • • 2.5 NAMEPLATES A. Provide nameplates or equivalent markings on the switch enclosures to indicate the ON and OFF positions of each switch. B. Nameplates shall meet the requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Perform WORK in accordance with the requirements of the NEC. 3.2 CONNECTION A. Rigidly attach wiring devices in accordance with the NEC and as indicated, avoiding interference with other equipment. B. Securely fasten nameplates using screws, bolts, or rivets centered under or on the device, unless otherwise indicated. C. Nameplates shall meet the requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General, and shall consist of a red plate with white letters a minimum of 1/4 inch tall. 3.3 GROUNDING A. Devices, including switches and receptacles, shall be grounded in accordance with NEC, Article 250, and Section 26 05 26 — Grounding. B. Switches and associated metal plates shall be grounded through the switch mounting yoke, outlet box, and raceway system. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. Provide checkout, field, and functional testing of wiring devices in accordance with Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. B. Test each receptacle for polarity and ground integrity, using a standard receptacle tester. END OF SECTION STANTEC WIRING DEVICES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 36 -3 SECTION 26 05 73 — PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform the indicated short circuit and protective device studies for the electrical power system in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The WORK of this Section shall include protection studies for motors with solid state overload and overcurrent protection devices. C. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to obtain the information required from the electric utility and appropriate vendors. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. Short circuit studies, protective device evaluation studies, arc -flash hazard analysis studies, and protective device coordination studies shall be performed by a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in short circuit and protective device coordination services for a period of at least 15 years. B. The indicated studies shall be signed by the professional electrical engineer, registered in the State of Florida, responsible for the studies. C. The studies shall utilize computer programs with proven reliability and accuracy for performing 3-phase fault -duty calculations. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. The indicated studies shall be submitted and approved by the ENGINEER prior to final approval of the distribution equipment Shop Drawings and release of equipment for manufacture. B. An initial short circuit study shall be submitted and reviewed before the ENGINEER will approve the Shop Drawings for medium -voltage switchgear, transformers, or 480 -volt distribution equipment. C. Submit an initial protective device coordination study shall be submitted with 90 days after the approval of the initial short circuit study. D. The short circuit, arc -flash hazard analysis, and protective device coordination studies shall be updated prior to Project Substantial Completion; utilize characteristics of as - installed equipment and materials. E. The adequacy of the equipment "withstand" and interruption ratings shall be approved by the ENGINEER. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES A. The motor control center manufacturer shall furnish the services of a qualified field engineer and necessary tools and equipment in order to test, calibrate, and adjust the protective relays and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended in the power system coordination study. STANTEC PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 73 - 1 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION • 3.1 GENERAL A. The studies shall include development of single -line and impedance diagrams of the power system. B. The diagrams shall identify components considered in the study and the ratings of power devices, including transformers, circuit breakers, relays, fuses, busses, and cables. C. The resistances and reactances of cables shall be identified in the impedance diagram. D. The studies shall contain written data from the electric utility company regarding maximum available short circuit current, voltage, and X/R ratio of the utility power system. E. The studies shall include every protective device and feeder included within the WORK. F. The first upstream overcurrent device outside the WORK shall be used as a fixed reference. G. The studies shall include all portions of the electrical distribution system for normal and standby power sources down to and including the 480 -volt distribution system. 3.2 SHORT CIRCUIT STUDY A. The short circuit study shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program, and shall be in accordance with the following Standards: • • ANSI/IEEE 141 Recommended Practice for Electrical Power Distribution for Industrial Plants ANSI/IEEE 242 ANSI/IEEE C 37.010 ANSI/IEEE C 37.13 Recommended Practice for Protection, and Coordination of Industrial, and Commercial Power Systems Application Guide for AC High -Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis Low -Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers Used in Enclosures 3.3 PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY A. A protective device evaluation study shall be performed in order to determine the adequacy of circuit breakers, molded case switches, and fuses. B. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment due to prospective short-circuit currents shall be promptly brought to the attention of the ENGINEER. C. Do not utilize series -rated circuit breakers to meet short circuit requirements for this project. D. Devices shall be fully rated to withstand available fault currents. STANTEC PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 73 - 2 3.4 PROTECTIVE DEVICE EVALUATION STUDY A. A protective device coordination study shall be performed in order to develop the necessary calculations to select power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of associated current transformers, and low -voltage breaker trip characteristics and settings. B. Any problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment due to prospective short-circuit currents shall be promptly brought to the ENGINEER's attention. 3.5 TIME/CURRENT COORDINATION CURVES A. As a minimum, the time/current coordination curves for the power distribution system shall include the following items plotted on 5 -cycle log -log graph paper: 1. time/current curves for each protective relay, circuit breaker, or fuse demonstrating graphically that the settings will provide protection and selectivity within industry standards 2. Each curve shall be identified, and tap and time dial settings shall be specified. 3. Provide individual curves for each feeder unless identical to others. 4. Selectivity a. Time/current curves for each device shall be positioned to provide the maximum selectivity to minimize system disturbances during fault clearing. b. Where selectivity cannot be achieved, the ENGINEER shall be notified as to the cause. c. Recommendations shall be included for alternate methods that would improve selectivity. 5. time/current curves and points for cable and equipment damage. 6. circuit interrupting device operating and interrupting times 7. Indicate maximum fault values on the graph. 8. sketch of bus and breaker arrangement 9. magnetizing inrush points of transformers 10. thermal limits of dry -type and liquid -insulated transformers (ANSI damage curve) 11. Every restriction of the ANSI and National Electrical Code shall be followed, and proper coordination intervals and separation of characteristics curves shall be maintained. 3.6 ARC FLASH STUDY A. An arc flash study shall be performed with the aid of a digital computer program in order to determine the "Arc Flash Protection Boundary" and "Personal Protective Equipment" STANTEC PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 73 - 3 (PPE) levels for applicable electrical distribution equipment, stand-alone disconnects, starters, and VFDs in the power distribution system. B. The arc flash study shall be performed in conjunction with short circuit calculations and protective device coordination. C. The arc flash study shall be in accordance with the latest version of the following Standards: 1. NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces 2. IEEE 1584 IEEE guide for performing Arc Flash Hazard Calculations 3. OSHA (29 CFR PART 1910) Occupational Safety and Health Standards for General Industry 4. ANSI Z535.4 Product Safety Signs and Labels D. The recommended values for the "Arc Flash Protection Boundary" and PPE levels, based on the arc flash study results, shall be tabulated in the study. E. Labeling 1. The digital computer program shall provide the "Arc Flash Protection Boundary" and PPE values in a format that can be directly printed on to labels. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide these labels in accordance with Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. 3.7 FINAL SUMMARY REPORT A. Summarize the results of the indicated power system studies in a final report. B. The report shall include the following items: 1. single -line diagram 2. impedance diagram 3. tabulation of all protective devices identified on the single line diagram 4. time/current coordination curves 5. specific recommendations, if any 6. test instrumentation, condition, and connections, as applicable, for each study 7. computerized fault current calculations 8. any suggested changes to the protection scheme or equipment selection that will result in improved system reliability and safety 9. recommendations to minimize the arc flash energy STANTEC PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 73 - 4 C. The report shall include information concerning the computer program used for the study, as well as a general discussion of the procedure, items, and data considered in the preparation of the study. D. Submit 4 bound copies of the report to the ENGINEER. 3.8 PROTECTIVE DEVICE TESTING, CALIBRATION, AND ADJUSTMENT A. Test, calibrate, and adjust the protective relays and circuit breaker trip devices in accordance with the recommendations in the power system coordination study. B. Calibrate the MCPs as in accordance with the recommendations in the power system study. C. Adjustments shall be made prior to energizing any electrical equipment. END OF SECTION STANTEC PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDIES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 05 73 - 5 SECTION 2612 16 — PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide panelboards and general purpose dry -type transformers, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Single Manufacturer: Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization of appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Contractor Submittals and Section 26 00 00 - Electrical Work, General. B. Shop Drawings 1. Transformers a. Dimension drawings b. Technical certification sheets c. Drawing of conduit entry/exit locations d. Transformer ratings, including: 1) Voltage 2) Continuous current 3) Basic impulse level for equipment over 600 volts 4) KVA e. Descriptive bulletins f. Product sheets 2. Panelboards a. Breaker layout drawings with dimensions and nameplate designations b. Component list c. Drawings of conduit entry/exit locations d. Assembly ratings including: 1) Short circuit rating PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE STANTEC DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 12 16 - 1 2) Voltage 3) Continuous current e. Cable terminal sizes f. Descriptive bulletins g. Product sheets h. Installation information i. Seismic certification and equipment anchorage details PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Transformers 1. The transformers shall be dry -type, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of ANSI and NEMA. 2. Transformers shall be UL -listed and bear the UL label. B. Panelboards 1. Panelboards shall be dead front factory assembled. Panelboards shall comply with NEMA PB-1-Panelboards, as well as the provisions of UL 50 - Safety Enclosures for Electrical Equipment and UL 67 - Safety Panelboards. Panelboards used for service equipment shall be UL labeled for such use. Lighting panelboards shall be rated for 120/208 volt, 3 phase operation or 120/240 volt for single phase operation as indicated. Power panelboards shall be rated for 480 volts, 3 phase, 3 wire operation, unless indicated otherwise. 2. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly, including circuit breakers. 2.2 TRANSFORMERS A. Ratings 1. KVA and voltage ratings shall be as indicated. 2. Transformers shall be designed for continuous operation at rated kVA, for 24 hours a day, 365 days a year operation, with normal life expectancy as defined in ANSI C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry Type Distribution and Power Transformers 3. Transformer sound levels shall not exceed the following ANSI and NEMA levels for self -cooled ratings: LUpto9kVA 40 dB PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS PAGE 26 12 16 - 2 STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT • • • 10 to 50 kVA 45 dB 51 to 150 kVA 50 dB B. Construction 1. Insulation Systems a. Transformers shall be insulated as follows: 1) 2 kVA and smaller: 150 deg C insulation system based upon 80 deg C rise. 2) 3 to 15 kVA: 185 deg C insulation system based upon 115 deg C rise. 3) 15 kVA and larger: 220 deg C insulation system based upon 150 deg C rise. b. Required performance shall be obtained without exceeding the above indicated temperature rise in a 40 deg C maximum ambient. c. Insulation materials shall be flame-retardant and shall not support combustion as defined in ASTM D 635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Self -Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 2. Transformer windings shall be copper. 3. Transformers shall have four 2-1/2 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below 480 volts. 4. Transformer shall include vibration dampeners between the core and the enclosure to minimize and isolate sound transmission. C. Manufacturers: General Electric, Eaton, Schneider Electric/Square D Company, or equal. 2.3 PANELBOARDS A. Ratings 1. Panelboards rated 240 VAC or less shall have short circuit ratings not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical or as indicated by the Short Circuit Study, whichever is greater. 2. Panelboards rated 480 VAC shall have short circuit ratings not less than 65,000 amperes RMS symmetrical or as indicated by the Protective Device Study, whichever is greater. 3. Pane!boards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating. Series ratings are not acceptable. B. Construction PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE STANTEC DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 12 16 - 3 1. Lighting and power distribution panels shall have tin-plated copper bus bars. 2. Breakers shall be one, 2, or 3 pole as indicated, with ampere trip ratings as required by the equipment. Breakers shall be quick -make and quick -break, inverse time trip characteristics, to trip free on overload or short circuit, and to indicate trip condition by the handle position. 3. The panels shall have hinged doors with combination catch and latch. The front panels shall be so arranged that when the plates are removed, the gutters, terminals and wiring will be exposed and accessible. The doors shall have inner doors within the plates to have only the breaker operating mechanism exposed when they are opened. Live conductors and terminals shall be concealed behind the plates. 4. Panelboards shall be rated for the intended voltage. 5. Circuit breakers shall be interchangeable and capable of being operated in any position as well as being removable from the front of the panelboard without disturbing adjacent units. No plug-in circuit breakers will be acceptable. 6. Lighting and power distribution panels which are not part of a motor control center shall be constructed in accordance with Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. Panels shall have the necessary barriers, supports, and liberal wiring gutters. Trim screws shall be stainless steel. Panelboard parts of metal other than copper, aluminum, or stainless steel shall be cadmium plated. 7. Panelboards shall be UL listed except for special enclosures which are not available with UL listing. 8. Panelboards shall be suitable for use as service entrance where indicated. C. Manufacturers: General Electric, Eaton, Schneider Electric/Square D Company, or equal PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. WORK of this Section shall be installed as indicated in Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS AND GENERAL PURPOSE STANTEC DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 12 16 - 4 SECTION 26 29 00 — LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PART 1 -- GENERAL ID1.1 THE SUMMARY • • A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide motor control centers (MCCs), complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General, apply to the WORK of this Section. C. In the event that provided motors are of greater horsepower than the indicated motors, revise the raceways, conductors, starters, overload elements, and branch circuit protectors as necessary in order to control and protect the increased motor horsepower in accordance with Section 26 05 10 — Electric Motors. D. Single Manufacturer 1. The MCCs shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to standardize appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services. 2. This requirement, however, does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of overall responsibility for the WORK. E. Coordination 1. The equipment provided under this Section shall operate the electric motor driver with the driven equipment as indicated under other equipment Sections. 2. The MCC manufacturer shall be provided with the following information, at a minimum: a. Section 46 01 00 — Equipment General Provisions b. relevant Division 41 and Division 23 Sections for each piece of equipment driven by the MCC c. Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General d. Section 26 05 10 — Electric Motors e. Section 26 05 15 — Local Control Panels And Miscellaneous Electrical Devices f. Section 26 01 26 — Electrical Tests g. the Electrical Contract Drawings 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. B. Furnish the following equipment information in the Shop Drawings: STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-1 1. NEMA rating and color of enclosure 2. horizontal and vertical bus ampacities, voltage rating, interrupting capacity, and materials of construction 3. ground bus size and material of construction 4. conduit entrance provisions 5. main incoming line entry provision (top or bottom) 6. control unit nameplate schedule 7. circuit breaker types, frames, and settings 8. starter NEMA sizes, auxiliary contact provisions, and coil voltage 9. relays, timers, pilot devices, control transformer VA and fuse sizes 10. MCC Ladder Diagrams a. Furnish custom elementary schematic ladder diagrams for each compartment. b. The ladder diagrams shall include remote devices. c. Submittals not meeting these requirements will not be reviewed further and will be returned to the CONTRACTOR. 11. short circuit rating of the complete assembly 12. replacement parts lists and operation and maintenance procedures 13. time -current curves for protective devices 14. factory test data certifying compliance with requirements of similar equipment from the same manufacturer C. Furnish an Owner's Manual, including: 1. manufacturer's two-year warranty 2. field test report D. Furnish the Manufacturer's Service Representative's resume, including the following documentation: 1. copy of the proposed representative's Factory Training Certificate 2. number of years experience servicing the manufacturer's MCCs and VFDs 3. a statement that the individual is authorized to inspect, test and perform field service and repairs E. Spare Parts List STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-2 1. Furnish spare parts information for parts required by this Section as well any other spare parts recommended by the MCC manufacturer. F. Startup and Testing Report 1. Within 15 days after completion of startup and testing, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a report for the MCC. 2. The report shall contain the following documentation: a. the device name, serial number, rating, and complete model number of each MCC b. a complete listing of all tests performed and the results of each test c. a complete listing of all circuit breaker and overload settings, fuse ratings, settings, setpoints and configuration information for VFDs and equipment or devices with adjustable settings d. documentation for training that was provided to the OWNER's personnel, including topics covered, instructor's name and contact information, and a list of attendees PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The manufacturer of the low -voltage motor control center shall also manufacture at least the following: 1. molded case circuit breakers, up to and including 225 ampere frame size 2. disconnect switches 3. magnetic motor starters 4. control and timing relays rated at 600 volts AC 5. pushbuttons, lights and selector switches, including remote mounted control stations 6. meters, including ammeter, voltmeter, and solid-state metering devices B. Single Manufacturer 1. Devices of the same type shall be products of the same manufacturer. 2. This requirement applies to control devices, custom -fabricated equipment, and insofar as practical to equipment manufactured on a production basis. C. Lighting transformers and panelboards shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 12 16 — Panelboards and General Purpose Dry -Type Transformers. D. Motor control centers shall conform to the standards for NEMA Class IIS, Type B diagrams and wiring. STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-3 E. MCC Schedule MCC DESIGNATION LOCATION MCC-LS16 Equipment platform 2.2 DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS A. The motor control centers shall be 600 -volt class and suitable for operation on a 3-phase, 60 -Hz system. B. The system operating voltage and number of wires shall be as indicated. C. Power 1. The motor control center shall receive power from a 3-phase, wye-connected 480 - volt transformer with a grounded neutral. 2. Power distribution from the MCC shall be 480 -volt, 3-phase, 3 -wire. 3. The MCC shall include provision for termination of an incoming neutral conductor in conformance to NEC requirements for service entrance. D. Enclosure 1. The enclosure shall be of NEMA Type 3R. 2. Compartment doors shall be interlocked with compartment circuit breakers, fitted with a maintenance override. 3. Latches for panelboard compartments shall have butterfly heads or another hand operable method that does not require tools to operate. 4. The bottom shall be closed to prevent ingress of insects. E. Size and Arrangement 1. Motor control centers shall be configured as mechanical groupings of control center units, assembled into a lineup of control center sections. 2. Each control section shall be nominally 90 inches tall by a minimum of 20 inches deep. 3. MCCs shall be designed to not exceed the indicated spatial requirements, including spaces, spares, and future compartments. 4. MCCs shall be subject to rejection if they exceed the indicated lengths, where allotted space is critical. STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-4 5. Equipment within the MCC may be rearranged at the discretion of the manufacturer, providing that the MCC includes the spares, space, and future provisions as indicated, and that panelboards are at the top of their sections. 6. Switches and circuit breakers used as switches shall be located such that the center of the grip of the operating handle of the switch or circuit breaker, when in its highest position, will not be more than 6 feet, 7 inches above the floor, unless provided with a handle extension acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. F. Components 1. Busses a. Provide a continuous copper ground bus, full width of the motor control center line-up. b. Horizontal Busses 1) The main horizontal bus shall be of tin-plated copper, and located within an isolated compartment. 2) The bus shall be rated for 600 amperes minimum, but in no case Tess than the main lug or main breaker frame size. c. Vertical Busses 1) The vertical bus in each section shall consist of a single tin-plated copper conductor per phase, with a current capacity of not Tess than 300 amps. 2) The vertical bus shall be completely isolated and insulated, and shall extend the full height of the section wherever possible. d. Power buses shall be braced to withstand 65,000 amperes, minimum. 2. Wireways a. Provide a separate vertical wireway adjacent to each vertical unit, covered by a hinged door. b. Each individual unit compartment shall be provided with a side barrier to permit pulling wire in the vertical wireway without disturbing adjacent unit components. c. Full height (72 -inch) compartments or sections are not required to have a separate wireway. G. Cabinets 1. Structural members shall be fabricated of not Tess than 12 -gauge steel, and side and top panels and doors shall be fabricated of not less than 14 -gauge steel. 2. Spaces designated as SPACE or BLANK shall include blank hinged doors and vertical bus bars. STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-5 3. Control units inside compartments shall be clearly identified with tags or stencil markings. 4. Identification a. Each control unit, including spares, spaces and blanks, lights, and devices shall be identified by an engraved nameplate. b. Identification shall include the indicated circuit number. c. Each motor control center shall be fitted with the manufacturer's nameplate which shall include the NEMA Standard electric rating and other pertinent data, including manufacturer, sales order number, date of manufacture, and place of manufacture. 5. Fans, heat exchangers, transformers, capacitors, junction boxes, and other devices shall not be mounted on the outside of the motor control center enclosure. 6. Protective Coating a. The finish for motor control center shall be light grey: ANSI 61 or 49. b. The panels shall be coated with 2 coats of primer inside and out, and 2 coats of enamel finish. c. External colors other than ANSI 61 or 49 will not be accepted. 2.3 MAIN AND FEEDER CIRCUIT BREAKERS (480 V) A. Circuit breakers having a frame size of 150 amperes or less shall be molded -case type with thermal magnetic non -interchangeable, trip -free, sealed trip units. B. Circuit breakers with a frame size of 225 amperes to 1,200 amperes shall be molded case with RMS sensing electronic trip elements with the following adjustments: 1. long-time setting (by changing the unit) 2. long-time delay 3. short -time setting 4. short -time delay 5. instantaneous setting 6. ground -fault setting 7. ground -fault delay C. The interrupting capacity of the main and feeder branch circuit breakers shall be a minimum of 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. D. Service disconnects rated 1000 amps or greater shall provide for ground fault protection of the equipment. STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-6 E. Circuit breaker disconnect operators shall be capable of accommodating 3 padlocks for locking in the OPEN position. F. Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts shall be furnished where indicated. G. Where two main breakers are shown, they shall be provided with key interlock to prevent simultaneous closing of the breaekrs. 2.4 MOTOR STARTERS A. Motor starters shall be mounted in standard motor control center assemblies, arranged as indicated. B. Components 1. Each motor starter unit shall consist of a combination magnetic contactor and short circuit protective device, mounted in a completely enclosed cubicle. 2. The short circuit protective device shall be an instantaneous, magnetic only circuit breaker: Cutler -Hammer Type HMCP, G.E. Mag -Break Motor Circuit Protector, or equal. 3. Circuit breakers provided as part of a motor starter unit shall be capable of being padlocked in the OPEN position. 4. Resetting of thermal overload elements shall be possible with the unit door closed. 5. Provide 3-phase overload trip units to suit the full load current of the equipment installed, and the trip unit shall be adjusted as required for power factor correction capacitors. C. Magnetic Starters 1. Magnetic starters shall have auxiliary contacts as indicated, including N -O and N -C contacts as indicated, plus one each spare N -O and N -C contact. 2. The combination motor starters shall be drawout-type for Size 5 and below. 3. The fixed -type unit assembly shall be constructed such that it can be easily removed from its panel after disconnecting the wires to the terminal block and withdrawing from the primary bus. 4. Removal of a unit assembly shall be possible without rear access and without disturbing any other unit in the motor control center. D. Control Power Transformer 1. Each starter unit shall have its own control power transformer, with a 115 -volt grounded secondary. 2. Provide one secondary fuse and 2 primary fuses. 3. Control power transformers shall be sized to accommodate the indicated control devices. STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-7 4. Local control devices shall be mounted independently of the cover door. 5. Starters shall have a local red RUN indicator, and a green OFF indicator to indicate the presence of control power when the motor is not energized. 6. Starters shall be provided with elapsed time meters, HAND -OFF -AUTO selector switches, and other devices as indicated. 7. Cubicle control wires shall be terminated at a pull -apart disconnecting terminal block located at the cubicle. E. Identification 1. The motor control center manufacturer shall be responsible for identifying each control wire within each motor starter unit with wrap-around permanent plastic markers. 2. Each control wire shall be identified at both ends. F. Full -Voltage Starters 1. Full -voltage motor starter units shall be NEMA Size 1 or larger. 2. Each combination starter shall be rated for a minimum 65,000 RMS symmetrical amperes. G. NEMA Ratings 1. Motor starters shall be designed to NEMA ratings. 2. Starters designed to IEC ratings or with dual IEC/NEMA ratings will not be accepted, either as part of an MCC, as remote starters, or as part of an equipment package. 2.5 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH A. Automatic transfer switches shall be 3 -pole open type with amp rating as indicated. 2.6 CONTROL DEVICES A. Control devices shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 15 — Local Control Stations and Miscellaneous Electrical Devices. B. Metering 1. Provide solid-state metering where indicated. 2. Include CTs and PTs of ratios as indicated or as recommended by the MCC manufacturer. 3. The CT leads shall terminate on shorting type terminal blocks, and the shorting bar shall be grounded to the MCC ground bus. 4. Solid-state metering shall be G.E. "PQM", Cutler -Hammer "DP -4000," Square D "Power -Logic," or equal. STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-8 2.7 FACTORY TESTS A. Provide the manufacturer's standard electrical and mechanical production tests and inspections for motor control centers and their components. B. The tests shall include electrical continuity check, dielectric tests for each circuit, and inspection for proper functioning of components including controls, protective devices, metering, and alarm devices. 2.8 SPARE PARTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the following for each MCC: 1. Unit Control Transformer: one of each size furnished in magnetic starters installed 2. Bezels: 3 of each color installed for pilot indicators 3. Panel Lamps: one dozen of each type (form, voltage and current rating) installed 4. Control Fuses: one dozen of each type (form, voltage and current rating) installed 5. Relays: one of each type and size installed B. Spare parts shall be identified by MCC number, type, size, and manufacturer. 2.9 MCC MANUFACTURER, OR EQUAL A. Cutler -Hammer "2100" Series B. General Electric "8000 Line" C. Square D, Model 6 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall install motor control centers in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions. B. Conduit installation shall be coordinated with the manufacturer's as -fabricated drawings such that conduit stub -ups are within the area allotted for conduit. C. Conduit shall be stubbed up in the section that contains the devices to which conductors are terminated. 3.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. If stored at the Site, motor control centers shall be stored in a clean, dry space. B. Factory wrapping shall be maintained or an additional heavy plastic cover shall be provided to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. The storage space shall be heated or the MCC space heaters shall be energized. STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-9 D. Motor control centers shall be handled carefully to avoid damage to motor control center components, enclosure, and finish. E. Damage shall be repaired before installation. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. General 1. An authorized Service Representative of the manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 3 Work Days in order to provide the services listed below. 2. For the purpose of this paragraph, a Work Day is defined as an 8 -hour period, excluding travel time. 3. The service representative's resume shall be approved by the ENGINEER before training is scheduled. B. Inspection, Startup, Field Adjustment 1. The Service Representative shall supervise the following items, and shall certify that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, and readied for operation: a. installation of the equipment b. inspection, checking, and adjusting of the equipment c. startup and field testing for proper operation d. performance of repairs to correct any discrepancies or problems revealed during startup and testing e. performance of field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with the indicated requirements f. Preparation and submittal of a report covering startup and testing, including a listing of equipment settings and parameters at the end of startup and testing. 3.4 INSTALLATION a. Motor control centers shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. B. After leveling and shimming, the CONTRACTOR shall anchor motor control centers to the equipment platform. C. The CONTRACTOR shall: 1. torque bus bar bolts to manufacturer's recommendations, and tighten sheet metal and structure assembly bolts; 2. adjust motor circuit protector (MCP) devices to the instantaneous trip setting position recommended for the actual horsepower and full load amps of the motor; STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-10 3. verify that overload devices are proper for equipment installed; 4. make necessary changes in overload devices as required for motors having power factor correcting capacitors; 5. touch up scratches after the equipment has been installed; 6. verify that nameplate, and other identification is accurate; and 7. provide high-voltage switchboard matting in front of the MCC, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. 3.5 FIELD TESTS A. Provide a visual and mechanical inspection after installation, as follows: 1. Inspect for physical damage, proper anchorage, and grounding. 2. Verify that the ratings of the thermal overload heaters match the motor full -load current nameplate data. 3. Check tightness of bolted connections. B. Electrical Tests 1. Insulation Tests a. Measure the insulation resistance of each bus section phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground for one minute. b. The test voltage and minimum acceptable resistance shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. c. Measure the insulation resistance of each starter section phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground with the starter contacts closed and the protective device open. d. The test voltage and minimum acceptable resistance shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. e. Measure the insulation resistance of each control circuit with respect to ground. 2. Verify the proper operation of control logic in each mode of control. END OF SECTION STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT LOW -VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS PAGE 26 29 00-11 SECTION 26 29 23 — VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. General 1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide variable frequency drive (VFD) units, complete and operable, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. It is the intent of this Section to require complete, reliable, and fully tested variable frequency drive systems suitable for attended or unattended operation. B. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General, apply to the WORK of this Section. C. Single Manufacturer 1. Like products shall be the end product of one manufacturer in order to standardize appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's services. 2. This requirement, however, does not relieve the CONTRACTOR of overall responsibility for the WORK. D. Coordination 1. Equipment provided under this Section shall operate the electric motor driver and the driven equipment as indicated under other equipment specification Sections. 2. The CONTRACTOR'S attention is specifically directed to the need for proper coordination of the WORK under this Section and the WORK under the equipment Section with the WORK under Section 26 29 00 — Electric Motors. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals, except that Shop Drawing information for the drives shall be submitted as part of the information for the driven equipment. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following information: 1. Equipment Information a. name of drive manufacturer b. type and model c. assembly drawing and nomenclature d. maximum heat dissipation capacity in kW 2. conduit entrance provisions 3. circuit breaker type, frames, and settings STANTEC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 29 23 - 1 4. information related to relays, timers, pilot devices, control transformer VA, dV/dT devices, line reactors and fuse sizes, including catalog cuts 5. Ladder Diagram a. Submit the system schematic ladder diagram and interconnection diagrams. b. The schematic ladder diagram shall include remote devices. c. The ladder diagram shall incorporate the control logic on the corresponding elementary schematic as indicated. d. Submittals with drawings not meeting this requirement will not be reviewed further and will be returned to the CONTRACTOR stamped "REJECTED." 6. factory test data certifying compliance of similar equipment from the same manufacturer with requirements of this Section C. The Technical Manual shall include the following documentation: 1. manufacturer's 2 -year warranty 2. harmonic analysis report 3. field test report 4. programming procedure and program settings D. Spare Parts List 1. Submit information for parts required by this Section plus any other spare parts recommended by the controller manufacturer. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a total of 3 variable frequency drives. B. Equipment to be operated through variable frequency drives shall include the following: Quantity Equipment HP Constant or Variable Torque (C/V) RPM Bypass (Y/N) Enclosure Type 3 Lift Pumps 110 V 1800 N 3R 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General STANTEC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 29 23 - 2 1. The power supply shall be an adjustable frequency inverter designed to convert incoming 3-phase, 480 -volt, 60 -Hertz power to a DC voltage and then to adjustable frequency AC by use of a 3-phase inverter. 2. Current -source inverters will not be accepted. 3. Inverters shall be sized to match the KVA and inrush characteristics of the motors actually provided. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for matching the controller to the load (variable torque or constant torque) as well as the speed and current of the actual motor being controlled. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall provide "clean power" 18 -pulse VFDs. 6. The VFDs shall be in NEMA 3R enclosures with exhaust fans and a sun shield. The enclosures shall be painted white. 7. The HMI shall be installed behind a dead front door or with a cover such that it is protected from damage due to exposure to direct sunlight. B. Inverter 1. The inverter shall be of a voltage -source design, producing a pulse -width -modulated type output. 2. Six -step and current -source inverters will not be accepted. 3. Motors a. Inverters shall be provided with 460 -volt, 3-phase, 60 -Hertz, squirrel -cage high - efficiency inverter duty induction motors. b. Motors shall be capable of operating over the range of 50-100 percent of base speed without derating or requiring any motor modifications. 4. Inverters shall be capable of delivering the nameplate horsepower exclusive of service factor without the need for mandatory thermostats or feedback tachometers. 5. The VFD shall vary both the AC voltage and frequency simultaneously in order to operate the motor at required speeds. C. The minimum VFD inverter efficiency shall be 95 percent at 100 percent speed and load, and 85 percent efficiency at 50 percent speed and load. D. Power Outage 1. The VFD shall shut down in an orderly manner when a power outage occurs on one or more phases. 2. Upon restoration of power and a START signal, the motor shall restart and run at the speed corresponding to the current process input signal. E. The VFD shall be provided with the following features: STANTEC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 29 23 - 3 1. inrush current adjustment between 50 and 110 percent of motor full load current (factory set at 100 percent) 2. overload capability at 110 percent for 60 seconds for variable torque Toads and 150 IIIpercent for constant torque Toads. • • 3. adjustable acceleration and deceleration 4. input signal of 4 - 20 mA from process 5. output speed signal of 4 - 20 mA; Signals other than 4 - 20 mA will not be accepted. 6. Upon Toss of input signal, the VFD shall operate at a preset speed. 7. a minimum of 2 selectable frequency jump points in order to avoid critical resonance frequency of the driven system. 8. additional devices and functions as indicated 9. Ethernet TCP/IP I/O communications to transmit VFD data to/from a plant PLC -based control system F. The VFD shall be provided with, as a minimum, the following protection features: 1. input line protection with metal oxide varistor (MOV) and RC network 2. protection against single phasing 3. instantaneous overcurrent protection 4. electronic overcurrent protection 5. ground fault protection 6. overtemperature protection for electronics 7. protection against internal faults 8. ability to start into rotating motor (forward or reverse rotation) 9. additional protection and control as indicated and as required by the motor and driven equipment G. The VFD shall be designed and constructed to satisfactorily operate within the following service conditions. 1. Elevation a. elevation to 3300 feet 2. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C 3. Humidity: 0 to 95 percent, non -condensing 4. AC Line -Voltage Variation: plus 10 percent to minus 10 percent STANTEC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 29 23 - 4 5. AC Line -Frequency Variation: plus and minus 2 Hertz H. Electrical equipment provided in addition to the adjustable frequency inverter for each drive shall include: 1. 2 -1/2 -percent (minimum) line reactor integral to the drive enclosure. 2. Provide a dV/dT filter device at the motor or VFD output per the manufacturer's recommendation. Devices, if necessary, shall be mounted within the VFD enclosure. 3. fused 480 -to -120 -volt control transformer to provide system control power for the logic and pilot lamps. 4. Provide an input circuit breaker. I. Inverter Signal Circuits 1. The inverter signal circuits shall be isolated from the power circuits and shall be designed to accept an isolated 4-20 mA signal in the automatic mode of operation. 2. The inverter shall follow the setting of a remote or local potentiometer control while in the manual mode. 3. Refer to the Elementary Schematic indicated on the Drawings for speed control and START/STOP methods. 4. Access to set-up and protective adjustments shall be protected by key -lockout. 5. The following operator monitoring and control devices for the inverter shall be provided on the face of the VFD enclosure, either as discrete devices or as part of a multi -function microprocessor -based keypad access device: a. AUTO/HAND selection from a remote logic relay or switch b. While in AUTO, the inverter shall operate from the remote 4-20 mA input, where applicable, and while in HAND control shall operate from a local or remote manually operated speed potentiometer; speed pot ratings shall be coordinated with the supplier of the Local Control Station. c. speed indicator calibrated in percent speed d. inverter fault trip pilot Tight and output alarm contacts e. trip reset pushbutton f. RUN and OFF indicating lights g. Provide other controls and readouts normally furnished as standard equipment, or as otherwise indicated on the Elementary Schematics indicated on the Drawings. J. Properly identified screw type terminal boards shall be provided for interconnection to remote controls and instrumentation K. Auxiliary Devices STANTEC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 29 23 - 5 1. Pushbuttons, selector switches, and pilot lights shall be the heavy-duty, oil -tight type, sized to 30 -mm. Miniature style devices are not acceptable. Devices shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Eaton Electrical, Square D, or equal. Illa. Lens colors shall be red for "run," green for "stopped," and amber for alarm. • • b. Pilot lights shall be full voltage, push -to -test, LED cluster type. 2. Relays shall be 3 PDT with 10 amp contacts, plug-in type with indicating light, rectangular blades and provided with sockets for screw-type termination and hold- down clips. Relays shall be as manufactured by Square D, Potter Brumfield, or equal. 3. Time delay relays shall be combination on delay and off delay (selectable) with adjustable timing ranges. Provide socket with screw terminal connections and retaining strap. Time delay relays shall be Square D, ATC, Eaton Electrical, or equal. 4. Elapsed time meters shall be non-resettable type, read to a maximum of 99999.9 hours and shall be as manufactured by General Electric, Eaton Electrical, or equal. 2.3 HARMONIC ANALYSIS FOR DRIVES A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform a harmonic study of the facilities included in this Project. B. The following assumptions shall be utilized for the harmonic analysis: 1. The distribution system is a "general" system as classified by IEEE 519 under low voltage systems. 2. Assume 90 percent of total plant operating load is motor load and 10 percent is resistive. 3. Assume a 70 percent plant diversity factor (i.e., 70 percent of the total plant load is operating), with motors other than VFDs operating at 90 percent of their nameplate horsepower. 4. Assume two(2) of the three(3) VFDs are operating. 5. Report a. Results of the harmonic analysis shall be submitted prior to VFD shipment. b. Excessive harmonic distortion shall be specifically denoted. c. Corrective measures shall be submitted for action by the ENGINEER. 2.4 SPARE PARTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the spare parts listed below, suitably packaged and labeled with the corresponding equipment number. B. Modified Parts STANTEC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 29 23 - 6 1. At any time prior to Substantial Completion, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing about any manufacturer's modification of spare part numbers, interchangeabilities, or model changes. 2. If the ENGINEER determines that the modified parts no longer apply to the equipment provided, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish other applicable parts as part of the WORK. C. The following spare parts shall be furnished: 1. Provide one set of spare power fuses of each form, voltage, and current rating. 2. Provide 10 spare control and power fuses of each type and rating. 3. Provide 10 panel lamps of each type (form, voltage, and current rating). 4. Provide one of each type of circuit board, as applicable: a. control board b. power board c. diode bridge d. transistor module 5. Provide one of each size and type power diode and transistor. 6. Provide one set of any special tools required for maintenance of the VFD units 2.5 Manufacturers, no equal A. Yaskawa PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. General 1. An authorized service representative of the manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 2 Days to furnish the services listed below. 2. For the purpose of this Paragraph, a Day is defined as an 8 -hour period excluding travel time. B. The authorized service representative shall supervise the following and shall certify that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, and readied for operation: 1. installation of the equipment 2. inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment 3. startup and field testing for proper operation STANTEC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 29 23 - 7 4. performing field adjustments such that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements C. Instruction of OWNER's Personnel 1. The authorized representative shall instruct the OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step-by-step troubleshooting with test equipment. 2. The instruction shall be specific to the VFD models provided. 3. Training shall be scheduled a minimum of 3 weeks in advance of the first session. 4. Training shall include individual sessions for 4 shifts of plant personnel. 5. Proposed training materials shall be submitted for review, and comments shall be incorporated. 6. Training materials shall remain with the trainees. 7. The OWNER may videotape the training for later use with the OWNER's personnel. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conduit stub -ups for interconnected cables and remote cables shall be located and terminated in accordance with the drive manufacturer's recommendations. B. Programming 1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform programming of drive parameters required for proper operation of the VFDs included in this project. 2. Submit records of programming data in the equipment Technical Manual, including setup and protective settings. 3.3 FIELD TESTING A. Testing, checkout, and startup of the VFD equipment in the field shall be performed under the technical direction of the manufacturer's service engineer. B. Under no circumstances shall any portion of the drive system be energized without authorization from the manufacturer's representative. C. Verify proper operation of control logic in every mode of control. D. Harmonic Analysis 1. The CONTRACTOR shall test the completed installation for actual harmonic distortion at the point of common coupling. 2. Harmonic analysis shall be performed in accordance with IEEE 519 - Harmonic Control and Reactive Compensation of Static Power Converters at unit full load using a harmonic analyzer by Fluke, or equal STANTEC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 29 23 - 8 3. Tests shall demonstrate that the harmonic voltage and current distortion levels at the point of common coupling do not exceed a magnitude of 5 percent of the fundamental, with the maximum number of drives, as permitted by the process, in operation and in conformance with the applicable requirements of IEEE -519. 4. Provide a report that shall include the following: a. expected harmonic voltage (THD) through the 35th harmonic, calculated with isolation transformers b. actual RMS value and measured percentage of the THD in the field c. suggested corrective action(s) where measured harmonics exceed the limits specified herein END OF SECTION STANTEC VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE UNITS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 29 23 - 9 SECTION 26 32 13 - STANDBY POWER GENERATION PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY • • A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide an natural gas engine -driven standby electrical generating system, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordination of interface with other equipment and for any special construction necessary to complete the WORK of this Section in an acceptable manner. C. The supplier of the generator set shall also be the manufacturer of the engine for the generator system; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for the WORK of this Section. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Materials shall conform with applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code (NEC), and any other State or Municipal codes which apply. Generator system shall meet applicable standards and codes, including IEEE, NEMA, ANSI, OSHA, and UL. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 -Contractor Submittals. B. Shop Drawings 1. Detailed, dimensioned Shop Drawings and data demonstrating adherence to the requirements of these specifications shall be submitted and approved before fabrication, shipment, or other WORK under this Section begins. 2. Certified custom drawings and custom wiring diagrams of each component in the system and a master wiring diagram showing the entire system on one sheet. This diagram shall include all AC and DC power control connections between the generator, engine, batteries, and circuit breakers and shall be a custom drawing for this specific installation. A master drawing of the engine/generator set shall also be provided, showing general dimensions, bill of materials, location and size of all connections for fuel, cooling, exhaust, direct current connections, conduit locations, and connections for control and power wiring. Include wire and terminal numbers for all diagrams. Furnish KW output curves, fuel consumption curves, and certified air emission data sheets. 3. Outline drawings and connection diagrams shall be complete enough to enable the installation to be designed completely, and connection diagrams shall give both internal and external connections. Include foundation loading and clearances. 4. Ten copies of complete and detailed instructions for the operation, lubrication, and maintenance of equipment in the system. The manuals shall be furnished after final approval of Shop and working drawings but prior to shipment of equipment. Manuals shall be complete with wiring diagrams, lubrication schedules and recommended lubricants, drawings, cuts, parts lists, and other necessary data. All parts shall be numbered or otherwise clearly identified to facilitate ordering of replacements. STANDBY POWER STANTEC GENERATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 32 13 - 1 Stantec Document Classification: Stantec Internal Descriptions of all operational control devices and their functions shall also be included. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The engine/generator shall be the product of a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and production of similar engine/generator sets for a minimum of 10 years. B. The supplier shall maintain a local parts and 24-hour service facility within the State of Florida. The supplier shall have factory trained and authorized service representatives to furnish necessary installation, test, and start-up supervision as well as operation and maintenance training necessary for final approval and acceptance. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Provide one new natural gas -powered electric generator set, in an outdoor, waterproof, sound attenuated enclosure. The engine generator shall have a nominal standby rating of 250KW, 312KVA, 0.8 power factor, 480 volts, three phase, four wire, grounded neutral, 60 Hertz. The equipment package shall include in general, and as applicable, engine and generator on a common vibration isolating base, with auxiliaries, accessories, and controls, including intake filters, discharge silencer, turbocharger, heat exchangers, foundation bolts, isolators, piping, flexible couplings, supports, complete exhaust piping, ring, and silencer, insulation, control panels, lubrication system, water jacket heaters, cooling system, batteries and battery rack, battery charger, spare parts, and all materials necessary to permit installation, testing and placing the system in successful operation. B. Provide one 450 amp circuit breaker located in the generator enclosure. C. The generator -set, enclosure, and accessories shall be assembled and shipped to the Site as a complete, coordinated package, ready for installation. The engine generator base, cooling system, etc, shall be factory painted before installation in the enclosure. 2.2 SYSTEM OPERATION A. The system shall operate as follows: 1. Automatic Control a. A maintained remote contact closure from the automatic transfer switch shall cause the generator -set to start and run. b. When the remote startup contact opens, the engine shall continue to operate for an adjustable cool -down time (typically 5 to 30 minutes). 2. Local Control: The generator -set shall be capable of manual initiation or stopping from the locally mounted generator control panel. The local generator control panel shall be provided as part of this Contract. 3. Emergency Stop Control: An emergency stop pushbutton shall be provided at the generator control panel that shall cause the unit to stop without any delay. STANDBY POWER STANTEC GENERATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 32 13 - 2 Stantec Document Classification: Stantec Internal 2.3 ENGINE A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a complete natural gas engine -powered standby electrical generating system of the type and capacity indicated. B. The natural gas engine shall be mounted on a common base with the generator and the direct connected radiator and shall be rated for standby service, continuously for the duration of the electric power interruption, with engine jacket water cooled by means of a direct mounted water -to -air radiator under SAE conditions at 85 degrees F, 1500 feet above sea level. It should be noted that this is the rating of the engine. The minimum generator rating shall be 250 KW. C. The natural gas engine shall be four-cycle, turbocharged, aftercooled, 1800 rpm. The generator -set shall be Caterpillar, Cummins, MTU, or equal. D. The engine shall have a dry type air cleaner with service indicator, full pressure positive pump lubrication with full -flow oil filters, thermostatic regulated oil cooling system, and crankcase drain with valving to be able to drain the crankcase oil without reaching under the engine. E. The engine shall also be equipped with two 120 volt, thermostatically controlled jacket water heaters. Power shall be derived from a suitably -rated dry -type transformer and panelboard, also provided as part of the generating system, and including facilities to provide power to the battery charger, fuel oil transfer pumps if required, and other generator -related facilities. F. The natural gas engine shall perform as indicated when operating with a fuel supply pressure of lin of H2O. G. The engine shall be equipped with an electric 24 volt dc starting system of sufficient capacity to crank at a speed which will start the engine under conditions indicated. Include a charging alternator. The starting pinion shall disengage automatically when the engine starts. The starting system shall include relays for fully automatic operation from a remote signal. H. The engine shall be provided with a speed control, Woodward Type 2301 and electronic governor, Woodward Type EG -3P, or equal. 2.4 BATTERIES AND BATTERY CHARGER A. Provide a lead -acid storage battery with sufficient capacity for three 30 second cranking cycles, allowing 10 seconds between cycles. Submit calculations verifying adequate capacity. The battery shall be on a plastic rack as close as practical to the starter motor. The CONTRACTOR shall provide vented, nonmetallic protective covers or red and black plastic or rubber boots covering all terminals to protect against an accidental short circuit as might be caused by laying a metallic object on the battery. Metallic racks and covers are not acceptable. B. A unit -mounted battery charger for 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz input shall be provided. The battery charger shall be voltage regulated, with separate float and equalize charge voltage adjustment having a 10 amp rating. The battery charger shall include alarm relays to sense high and low dc voltage, zero current, and ac power failure, with individual output contacts wired to terminal strips for tie into remote alarms. Also, provide an ac "on" indicating pilot LED light and dc voltmeter and ammeter and annunciator. The battery charger shall be LaMarche Model A46, or equal. STANDBY POWER STANTEC GENERATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 32 13 - 3 Stantec Document Classification: Stantec Internal 2.5 EXHAUST SYSTEM A. The engine shall be provided with an exhaust system consisting of flexible connection, exhaust silencer, steel piping, fittings, stainless steel hardware and supports, brackets, and rain collar. B. The flexible connection shall be of the stainless steel bellows type with flanged ends. Flexible elements shall be stainless steel suitable for exhaust temperatures recommended by the engine manufacturer. The flexible connection shall be suitable for vibration isolation and for relieving stress caused by thermal expansion. C. The exhaust silencer shall be a critical grade manufactured by Maxim, or equal. D. The silencer shall be mounted and supported horizontally inside the generator enclosure. E. Exhaust piping shall be pitched upward from the engine and be provided with sufficient drains to eliminate condensation and rain water. Exhaust piping shall be welded steel pipe. Elbows shall be welding type, standard wall. Flanges shall be welding slip-on type, 125 pound, either forged or plate steel. Exhaust piping shall be supported independently of the silencer. The silencer and exhaust piping shall be insulated with a minimum of 2- 1/2 inches of calcium silicate with a stainless steel jacket and shall be supported as required. The weight of the exhaust and silencer shall not be supported by the engine. 2.6 COOLING SYSTEM A. The engine shall be equipped with a cooling system having sufficient capacity to effectively cool the engine when delivering full rated horsepower at the conditions stated above. A radiator and engine -driven fan of a type and capacity recommended by the engine manufacturer shall be included. B. The radiator shall be sized in accordance with the engine manufacturer's recommendation for use with 50 percent aqueous ethylene glycol. Air flow shall be controlled by a power inlet damper and a gravity discharge damper, both provided as part of the walk-in outdoor enclosure. Design ambient air temperature shall be 100 degrees F at sea level. C. The engine shall have an engine -driven, gear driven centrifugal type water circulating pump for circulating water through the cooling system. 2.7 GENERATOR A. The generator shall be nominally rated 250KW at .8 PF, 480 V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 4 wire wye and shall be a brushless design with solid state permanent magnet generator (PMG) exciter. Other excitation methods are not acceptable. The voltage regulator shall be solid state, generator mounted. Provide radio -interference suppression meeting commercial standards. B. If a line to neutral short circuit occurs, the generator shall be capable of supporting 300 percent rated current for 10 seconds without externally mounted devices. C. Voltage Regulation Tolerance: Plus or minus 1 percent of any present value over the 3 phase load range. Instantaneous voltage dip or rise, when measured with an oscilloscope, shall not exceed 25 percent upon full load application or rejection, and shall return to preset value within 0.5 seconds. STANDBY POWER STANTEC GENERATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 32 13 - 4 Stantec Document Classification: Stantec Internal D. Waveform: Deviation factor of output voltage shall not exceed 5 percent and the value of any individual harmonic shall not exceed 2 percent of the fundamental when operating with an unbalanced load. E. Temperature Rise: Temperature rise of any component shall not exceed the rise permitted by NEMA standards. The voltage regulator shall be adjustable minus 25 percent to plus 10 percent. F. Bearing: Double sealed ball bearing, lubricated for life. 2.8 LOCAL DISCONNECT CIRCUIT BREAKER A. A 450 ampere molded case circuit breaker with shunt trip shall be provided, mounted in a NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure located at the generator. 2.9 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. The engine and generator shall be mounted on a common system base and shall be provided with vibration isolators of number and size as recommended by the engine supplier to support the engine, generator, radiator, and base. The isolation mountings shall consist of steel or cast iron top and bottom housings incorporating steel springs or "donut" style isolators, located between the genset and the base, and shall be provided with built-in leveling bolts and built-in resilient chocks to control isolation and withstand lateral forces in all directions. B. The vibration isolators shall be Korfund Dynamics Corporation Series L, or equal. 2.10 LUBRICATION AND COOLING FLUIDS A. The supplier shall furnish the engine fully charged with lubricating oil and grease as specified by the manufacturer for continuous service. The cooling system shall be furnished with a full charge of 50 percent ethylene glycol. 2.11 GENERATOR SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL A. The engine shall be provided with an integrally mounted instrument and control panel, vibration isolated, NEMA 12 compliant, dead front, constructed of 14 -gauge steel and containing at least the following equipment: Coolant temperature gauge Oil pressure gauge Four position selector switches marked for "auto," "manual," "stop," and "stop/reset." Automatic starting controls (2 wire start/stop) Coolant level pre -alarm Coolant temperature pre -alarms (low and high) Fuel pressure pre -alarm Low dc voltage alarm to indicate loss of charge on battery STANTEC LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT Stantec Document Classification: Stantec Internal STANDBY POWER GENERATION PAGE 263213-5 Electrical contacts and "push to test" pilot lights for shutting down the engine on low oil pressure, high oil temperature, overcrank, high coolant temperature, and overspeed condition Individual electrical contacts for remote indication of any pre -alarm or alarm condition Running Time Meter (Non Resettable) Emergency stop switch Voltmeter and switch, ammeter and switch, frequency meter B. Wiring 1. Signal wiring shall be segregated from power wiring and be arranged neatly to facilitate tracing of circuits. 2. Plastic wiring wraps shall be used to bundle wires, except within wiring ducts. The bundles shall be securely fastened to the steel structure at suitable intervals not exceeding 12 -inches in length. No open space hanging of wires will be permitted. Flexible stranded copper wiring shall be used throughout. No solid conductor wire shall be permitted. 3. Terminal blocks shall be provided for interconnections between remote devices and local control panel wiring. The terminal blocks shall be factory assembled on a mounting channel, and the channel shall be bolted to the inside of the panel. The terminals shall have a continuous marking strip using the nomenclature on the schematic diagrams. No more than 2 wires shall be terminated at any one terminal. Wire terminals shall have sleeve wire markers properly marked to match the schematic diagrams. 2.12 GENERATOR ENCLOSURE A. Generator Enclosure 1. A weatherproof, sound attenuated, type enclosure shall be provided to house the engine/generator and accessories. The following standards and codes shall be met at a minimum: a. NEPA 70 (National Electric Code) b. NFPA 30 c. NFPA 37 d. NFPA 110 e. UL 142 f. API 620 B. The enclosure shall be constructed with an aluminum diamond plate finished floor for mounting on a concrete pad. The enclosure shall conform to the following design criteria, STANDBY POWER STANTEC GENERATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 32 13 - 6 Stantec Document Classification: Stantec Internal and be constructed as manufactured by Pritchard -Brown (Div. of Enviro Industries), or equal. Rigidity wind test equal to 190 MPH, or as required by ASCE-7 Roof load equal to 50 lbs. per sq. ft. Rain test equal to 4 -inches per hour Enclosure certified to meet BOCA base building and mechanical codes Impact Resistant certified to meet FBC 1626.2 C. Test data on similar construction by the manufacturer shall be available to the ENGINEER upon request. D. Enclosure shall consist of a roof, 2 side walls and 2 end walls, of stressed skin, semi- monocoque construction, sized as required to meet dimensional, sound attenuation, and code requirements for the actual generator provided. E. The system shall include a cooling and combustion air inlet silencer section, an equipment enclosure section, and a cooling air discharge silencer section. It shall be designed to reduce source noise by an estimated average 25 dB(A) as measured at a distance of 7 - meters from the enclosure. The enclosure shall also be bird- and rodent -proof with all openings screened. F. Roof and walls shall be of one-piece semi-monocoque construction. Framing members shall be aluminum or aluminized steel. Skin material shall be minimum thickness 0.040 - inch, prepainted to match the project canopy color, aluminum (roof shall be mill finish) or minimum thickness 18 -gauge aluminized steel. Other materials of construction may be acceptable; however, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish data verifying that the proposed system is equivalent or better than that indicated. Skin panels shall be hard -riveted to framing members on 3 -inch centers maximum. Pop rivets and bolts are not acceptable fasteners to attach exterior skin to framing. Roof assembly shall be cambered to aid in rain runoff. G. Insulation in walls and roof shall be semi-rigid, thermo acoustic, thickness as required to meet the noise criteria. Lining shall be perforated mill finish aluminum. Self-adhesive foam and loose or batt -type insulating materials will not be accepted. H. Lifting provisions shall be provided at the enclosure base, with capacity suitable for rigging the entire assembly. Quality assurance procedures of the manufacturer shall include regular testing of the lift devices. I. A minimum of 4 maintenance access doors shall be provided. Doors shall consist of an extruded frame with skin material matching enclosure. Doors shall be fully gasketed to form a weathertight perimeter seal and be padlockable. Hinges shall be stainless steel, and lock mechanisms shall be 3 point. J. Air handling shall be as follows: Air shall enter the enclosure through a removable hood. Motor -operated dampers shall be provided, wired to be spring operated to open upon engine startup. Radiator discharge shall be through a gravity -operated damper and into STANDBY POWER STANTEC GENERATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 32 13 - 7 Stantec Document Classification: Stantec Internal a hood. The system shall not exceed 0.5 -inch wg total external static pressure to ensure adequate airflow for cooling and combustion. K. A bolt -in-place removable end wall panel shall be provided for maintenance and/or equipment installation. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel. L. The exhaust silencer shall be installed inside the enclosure. A bird screen shall be installed on exhaust outlet. M. Total enclosure dimensions shall be no more than 218"L x 66"W x 112"H. 2.13 SPARE PARTS A. Four sets of the following spare parts shall be furnished: 1. Air filters 2. Oil filters PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 START-UP ASSISTANCE AND TRAINING A. The manufacturer's representative shall furnish on -Site start-up assistance and shall inspect the installation prior to start-up to verify that equipment is installed in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. B. Upon completion of startup and after acceptance by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall completely fill the fuel tank. C. In addition, the manufacturer's representative shall provide on -Site training for operation and maintenance of all equipment included in this Section. D. The following times shall be included, as a minimum, for the above tasks. A Day is defined as 8 hours on -Site, exclusive of meals and travel. Each task shall be considered a separate trip to the site. Dates and times for the trips shall be coordinated with the OWNER. 1. Inspection of the installation: 2 Days 2. Startup assistance: 2 Days 3. Operation and Maintenance Training: One Day END OF SECTION STANDBY POWER STANTEC GENERATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 32 13 - 8 Stantec Document Classification: Stantec Internal SECTION 26 43 00 - SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install surge protective devices (SPD). • • B. SPDs furnished under this Section shall be ANSI/UL 1449 Type 2 integrating both surge suppression and high -frequency noise filtering suitable for use on low -voltage distribution systems. C. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General, apply to the WORK of this Section 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Reference Standards: 1. ANSI/UL 1449, Fourth Edition, Safety Surge Protective Devices 2. IEEE C62.41.1, Guide on the Surge Environment in Low -Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 3. IEEE C62.45, Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connect to Low -Voltage (1000V and Less) AC Power Circuits 4. UL 1283, Safety Electromagnetic Interference Filters 5. NFPA 70, National Electric Code 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Electrical and mechanical drawings for each type of unit, showing electrical ratings, dimensions, mounting provisions, connection details, and layout diagrams. C. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer's technical information, including catalog information. 2. Manufacturer's technical specifications with assembly and component ratings. D. Certifications: Certification that SPD devices comply with standards referenced in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: STANTEC SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 43 00 -1 1. Manufacturer: Shall have at least five (5) years' experience manufacturing and servicing products substantially similar to those required and shall be able to submit documentation of at least 5 installations in satisfactory operation for at least five (5) years each. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all products included in this Section regardless of component manufacturer from a single SPD manufacturer. 2. SPD manufacturer shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. Components shall be suitable for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into overall assembly by SPD manufacturer. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. SPD shall be modular, high-energy, parallel design with fast -acting transient voltage suppression using metal oxide varistors. Equipment shall provide noise attenuation with electromagnetic interference filter. B. SPD shall be suitable for operation under the following environmental conditions: 1. Relative Humidity: Zero to 95%, non -condensing 2. Frequency: 47 to 63 Hz 3. Temperature: Zero to 149°F 4. SPD operating voltage shall be suitable for the associated SPD location(s). 5. SPD shall be suitable for internal and external mounting. SPD shall be factory - mounted and integrated into distribution equipment specified under the following Sections: a. Section 26 00 00 — Electrical Work, General b. Section 26 15 20 — Pump Station Control Panels Switchgear C. SPD shall include a surge suppression path for each mode as required for the system configuration. Each mode shall be individually fused and equipped with thermal cutouts. SPD short-circuit current rating shall be 200 kA. Protection modes shall include, to the extent applicable, the following: 1. Line -to -line 2. Line -to -neutral 3. Line -to -ground 4. Neutral -to -ground STANTEC SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 43 00 -2 D. SPD shall include electromagnetic interference/radio frequency interference (EMI/RFI) noise rejection filter with attenuation up to 30 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz. E. SPDs and components in the operating path shall have maximum continuous operating voltage greater than 115% of nominal system operating voltage. F. ANSI/UL 1449 minimum withstand rating shall be 20 kA per pole, and ANSI/UL 1449 voltage protection rating for SPD shall not exceed the following: Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 L-N,L-G, N -G 800 1200 L -L 1200 2000 G. SPD surge capacity based upon IEEE C62.41 location category shall, as a minimum, be the following: Category Application Per Phase Per Mode C Service entrance 240 kA 120 kA B High exposure locations (distribution equipment) 160 kA 80 kA A Branch locations 120 kA 60 kA H. Provide SPD equipped with the following accessories: 1. Surge counter with display for indicating the number of surges detected. 2. LED indicators for monitoring device status. 3. Audible alarm and silence switch for indicating an inoperative condition. 4. Dry contacts, "form C", for remote annunciation of unit status. I. Source Quality Control: Perform manufacturer's standard factory tests on equipment. Tests shall be in accordance with ANSI/UL 1449. J. Manufacturers: General Electric, Eaton, Schneider Electric/Square D Company, or equal. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install SPD in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions and the Contract Documents. B. Where an SPD cannot be installed integral with the equipment to which it is connected, conductor length between suppressor and connection point shall be as short and as straight as possible. END OF SECTION STANTEC SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES (SPD) LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 43 00 -3 Ah, SECTION 26 50 00 - LIGHTING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide luminaires and accessories, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Codes NFPA 70 National Electric Code NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum) International Building Code (IBC) Earthquake Requirements UL -595 Standard for Safety Marine -Type Electric Lighting Fixtures UL -844 Standard for Safety Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified Locations) UL -924 Standard for Safety Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment ANSI C82.1 Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts ANSI C84.4 Specifications for High -Intensity -Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple SupplyType) Standards of the Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish the following product information in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 — Contractor Submittals. B. Furnish the following information: 1. Exterior Luminaires a. catalog data sheets and photos b. luminaire finish and metal gauge c. lens material, pattern, and thickness d. IES lighting classification and isolux diagram e. fastening details to wall or pole STANTEC LIGHTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 50 00 -1 f. ballast type, location, and method of fastening g. for light poles: wind loading; complete dimensions; and finish 2. Lamps a. voltages b. colors c. approximate life (in hours) d. approximate initial lumens e. lumen maintenance curve f. lamp type and base 3. Ballasts a. type b. wiring diagram c. nominal watts and input watts d. input voltage and power factor e. starting current, line current, and restrike current values f. sound rating g. temperature rating h. efficiency ratings i. low-temperature characteristics j. emergency ballasts rating and capacity data 4. Photocells a. voltage and power consumption b. capacity c. contacts and time delay d. operating levels e. enclosure type and dimensions f. temperature range STANTEC LIGHTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 50 00 -2 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. General 1. Additional WORK requirements are indicated in the Luminaire Schedule on the Drawings. B. Provide minimum 18 AWG wire leads. C. Exterior Installations 1. Installations shall be UL -labeled as "Suitable for Wet Locations." 2. Provide removable and prewired ballasts. 3. When factory -installed photocells are provided, the entire assembly shall be UL - labeled. 2.2 LAMPS A. All lamps shall be LED as indicated on Luminaire Schedule 2.3 LIGHTING CONTROL A. Photocell 1. Photo Control: automatic ON-OFF switch 2. Housing: self-contained; die-cast aluminum; unaffected by moisture, vibration, or temperature changes 3. Settings: ON at dusk; OFF at dawn 4. Provide a time delay feature in order to prevent false switching. 5. field -adjustable to control operating levels 6. Manufacturer, or Equal a. Tork b. Paragon 2.4 POLES A. Rating (with luminaire): 125 -mph steady winds without incurred damage B. Material: concrete C. one-piece stationary type STANTEC LIGHTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 50 00 -3 • • • PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 LUMINAIRES A. General 1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Provide necessary accessories. 3. Provide structural reinforcements to the concrete pole bases as required to safely mount the luminaire. 4. Install the luminaire plumb and level. 3.2 LAMPS A. Within each luminaire, provide the number and type for which the luminaire is designed, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 LIGHTING CONTROL A. Outdoor Luminaires 1. The photocells shall switch lights ON at dusk and OFF at dawn. 3.4 CLEAN-UP A. Remove labels and other markings, except the UL listing mark. B. Wipe the luminaires inside and out in order to remove construction dust. C. Clean the luminaire plastic lenses with an antistatic cleaner only. D. Touch up painted surfaces of the luminaires and the poles with matching paint provided by the manufacturer. E. Replace defective lamps at the Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION STANTEC LIGHTING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 26 50 00 -4 SECTION 31 05 16.13 - RECYCLED CONCRETE AGGREGATE AND BANK RUN SHELL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The following are covered in this Section: 1. Recycled concrete aggregate. 2. Bank run shell 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Florida Department of Transportation Florida Method of Test (FM): 1. FM 1-T 180 - Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 10 -Ib. (4.54kg) Rammer and an 18 -in. (457mm) Drop. 2. FM 5-515 - Limerock Baring Ratio (LBR). 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Submit FDOT certified pile number, pile location, project name, and manufacturer contact information. 2. Submit gradation analysis, limerock bearing ratio test data, and modified proctor density for material sampled from the proposed sources. The tests shall have been performed by a Florida -licensed commercial testing laboratory. The tests shall have been performed within 30 days of the submittal of the test results. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Any material delivered to the project that, in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer, appears to contain excessive deleterious material, roots, clay balls, lumps, or construction debris, shall be immediately removed from the project, and new material furnished that meets the requirements of the specifications. 1.5 EQUIPMENT A. The aggregate shall be spread using a device that strikes off the aggregate uniformly to laying thickness and is capable of producing an even distribution of the aggregate. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 RECYCLED CONCRETE AGGREGATE A. Composition: Recycled concrete aggregate (RCA) shall consist of concrete material derived from the crushing of hard portland cement concrete. RCA shall be asbestos free and shall not contain deleterious substances such as cherty or other extremely hard pieces; lumps, ball, or pockets of sand or clay size material; organic matter; loose sand; STANTEC RECYCLED CONCRETE AGGREGATE AND BANK RUN SHELL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 05 16.13 - 1 loose, free shells, corals, or skeletal remains of marine invertebrates retained on a No. 4 sieve; or water sensitive clay materials. In addition, the following limits shall not be exceeded: 1. Bituminous Concrete: 1% by weight 2. Bricks: 1% by weight 3. Glass and Ceramics: 1% by weight 4. Wood and other organic substances: 0.1% by weight 5. Reinforcing steel and welded wire fabric: 0.1% by weight 6. Plaster and gypsum board: 0.1% by weight B. Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR): Individual results no less than 100. C. Gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 2 inch 100 3/4 inch 65 to 95 3/8 inch 40 to 85 No. 4 25 to 65 No. 10 20 to 50 No. 50 5 to 30 No. 200 0 to 10 2.2 BANK RUN SHELL A. Composition: Shell materials shall consist of naturally occurring "dry land" deposits formed essentially of broken mollusk shell, corals, and the skeletal remains of other marine invertebrates. Live or steamed shell or man-made deposits as a by-product of the shellfish industry shall not be permitted. Material shall be reasonably free from lumps of clay, organic matter, and other undesirable materials. B. Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR): Average results per lot no less than 100; individual results no less than 90. C. Gradation: STANTEC RECYCLED CONCRETE AGGREGATE AND BANK RUN SHELL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 05 16.13 - 2 Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 3 1/2 inch 97 to 100 No. 4 Oto 80 No. 200 0 to 20 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 PLACING AGGREGATE A. Spreading Aggregate: 1. Subgrade Preparation: Prior to constructing the aggregate, the subgrade shall be compacted as specified, cleaned of all foreign substances, and shall be inspected by the Engineer. Ruts or soft, yielding spots shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No aggregate materials shall be placed on a muddy or saturated subgrade. 2. Method of Spreading: The aggregate shall be spread uniformly, with equipment as specified in Part 1. All segregated areas of fine or coarse aggregate shall be removed and replaced with properly graded aggregate. 3. Number of Courses: When the specified compacted thickness of the base is greater than six inches, the base shall be constructed in two courses. The thickness of the first course shall be approximately one-half the total thickness of the finished base, or enough additional to bear the weight of the construction equipment without disturbing the subgrade. a. When vibratory or approved types of special compacting equipment are to be used, approval may be given for increasing the permissible thickness of layers, provided the ability of such equipment to achieve specified compaction is demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Compacting and Finishing Aggregate: 1. Single Course: After the spreading is completed, the entire surface shall be scarified and then shaped so as to produce the required grade and cross section after compaction, and shall be free of laminations and segregated material. 2. Multiple Courses: The lower course shall be cleaned of foreign material, bladed, and brought to a surface cross section approximately parallel to that of the finished base. Prior to the spreading of any materials for a subsequent course, density tests for the previously placed course shall be made and it shall be determined that the required compaction has been obtained. After the spreading of the materials for upper course is completed, the surface shall be finished and shaped so as to produce the required grade and cross section after compaction, and shall be free of laminations and areas of segregated material. 3. Finishing: The surface of the compacted aggregate base shall be finished to the grades and cross-sections shown on the Drawings by blading or with automated equipment especially designed and approved by the Engineer for this purpose, and STANTEC RECYCLED CONCRETE AGGREGATE AND BANK RUN SHELL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 05 16.13 - 3 rolled to a smooth finish. In no case shall thin layers of fine materials be added to the top layer of the aggregate in order to meet the required elevation. When additional material is needed to obtain required grade, the surface shall be scarified for a distance of 100 feet in each direction from the deficient area, sufficient material added, and recompacted. 4. Moisture Content: When the material does not have the proper moisture content to produce the required density, wetting or drying will be required. When water is added, it shall be uniformly mixed to the full depth of the course that is being compacted. Wetting or drying operations shall involve manipulation, as a unit, or the entire width and depth of the course which is being compacted. 5. Compaction: As soon as proper conditions of moisture are attained, subgrade and RCA shall be uniformly compacted to a density of not less than 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by FM 1-T 180. 6. Density Tests: Compaction density tests shall be made at a spacing not to exceed 50 linear feet and on each 6 -inch compacted layer. 7. If reworking of any areas is necessary to obtain the true grade and cross section, the compacting operations for such areas shall be completed prior to making the density tests on the finished base. C. Finished Grades: Field survey shall be performed to measure finished grades. Measurements shall be taken at each location where an elevation is called out on the Drawings. Where the actual elevation is more than 0.1 foot lower than the elevation on the Drawings or more than 0.2 foot higher than the elevation on the Drawings, the Contractor shall correct such areas in accordance with the requirements of the Section. END OF SECTION STANTEC RECYCLED CONCRETE AGGREGATE AND BANK RUN SHELL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 05 16.13 - 4 SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Requirements for clearing of all areas within the Contract limits and other areas shown, including Work designated in permits and other agreements. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Clearing: Clearing shall consist of removing and disposing of trees, shrubs, brush, limbs, sticks, down timber, decaying wood, vegetative growth, rubbish, and debris. Clearing operations shall be conducted in such a manner as to protect trees, shrubs, vegetative growth, fencing, structures, and installations that are not designated for removal, and to provide for the safety of employees and others. B. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of the complete removal of all stumps, roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter, matted roots, brush, timber, logs, and any other organic or metallic debris remaining after clearing which is not suitable for site grading or foundation purposes, resting on, under, or protruding through the surface of the ground to a minimum depth of 18 inches below the subgrade. C. Stripping: Stripping shall consist of the removal and disposal of all organics, sod, topsoil, grass and grass roots, and other objectionable material remaining after clearing and grubbing from the areas designated to be stripped. Grass and grass roots in areas to be excavated or filled upon shall be stripped to a minimum depth of 4 inches. In areas so designated, topsoil shall be stockpiled and protected until it is placed as specified. Any topsoil remaining after all work is in place, shall be stockpiled on site as shown on the Drawings and/or directed by the Engineer and Owner. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Trees and Shrubbery: Existing trees, shrubbery, and other vegetative material may not be shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall inspect the Site as to the nature, location, size, and extent of vegetative material to be removed or preserved, as specified herein. The Contractactor shall preserve, in place, trees that are not specifically designated to be removed as shown on the Drawings and/or directed by the Engineer and Owner. 3.2 TREE REMOVAL A. Tree Removal Within Property Limits: Remove trees and shrubs within the limits indicated. Removal of trees and shrubs outside of the clearing limits on the Drawings shall not be removed without prior approval by the Owner. 1. Remove trees and shrubs in a manner to avoid damage to trees and shrubs designated to remain. STANTEC SITE CLEARING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 10 00 - 1 2. Grub and remove tree stumps and shrubs felled to an off-site disposal site. Fill depressions created by such removal with material suitable for backfill. B. Tree Removal Outside Property Limits: Do not cut or damage trees outside the Owner's property unless shown to be removed or unless written permission has been obtained from the property owner. Furnish PDF copies of the written permission before removal operations commence. 3.3 TREES AND SHRUBS TO BE SAVED A. Protection: Protect trees and shrubs within the right of way, the Owner's property, and temporary easements that are to remain from defacement, injury, and destruction. 1. Work within the limits of the tree drip line with extreme care using either hand tools or equipment that will not cause damage to trees. a. Do not disturb or cut roots unnecessarily. Do not cut roots 1-1/2 inches and larger unless approved. b. Immediately backfill around tree roots after completion of construction in the vicinity of trees. c. Do not operate any wheeled or tracked equipment within drip line. 2. Protect vegetation from damage caused by emissions from engine -powered equipment. 3. During working operations, protect the trunk, foliage, and root system of all trees to be saved with boards or other guards placed as shown and as required to prevent damage, injury, and defacement. a. Do not pile excavated materials within the drip line or adjacent to the trunk of trees. b. Do not allow runoff to accumulate around trunk of trees. c. Do not fasten or attach ropes, cables, or guy wires to trees without permission. When such permission is granted, protect the tree before making fastening or attachments by providing burlap wrapping and softwood cleats. d. The use of axes or climbing spurs for trimming will not be permitted. e. Provide climbing ropes during trimming. 4. Remove shrubs to be saved, taking a sufficient earth ball with the roots to maintain the shrub. a. Temporarily replant if required and replace at the completion of construction in a condition equaling that which existed prior to removal. b. Replace in kind if the transplant fails. 5. Have any tree and shrub repair performed by a tree surgeon properly licensed by IIIthe State of Florida and within 24 hours after damage occurred. STANTEC SITE CLEARING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 10 00 - 2 3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Clearing: Clear all items specified to the limits shown and remove cleared and grubbed materials from the site. 1. Do not start earthwork operations in areas where clearing and grubbing is not complete, except that stumps and large roots may be removed concurrent with excavation. 2. All erosion control and sediment protection best management practices shall be installed prior to commencing clearing. B. Grubbing: Clear and grub areas to be excavated, areas receiving Tess than 3 feet of fill, and areas upon which structures are to be constructed. 1. Remove stumps and root mats in these areas to a depth of not Tess than 18 inches below the subgrade of sloped surfaces. 2. Fill all depressions made by the removal of stumps or roots with material suitable for backfill. C. Limited Clearing: Clear areas receiving more than 3 feet of fill by cutting trees and shrubs as close as practical to the existing ground. Grubbing will not be required. D. Dispose of all material and debris from the clearing and grubbing operation by hauling such material and debris away to an approved dump. The cost of disposal (including hauling) of cleared and grubbed material and debris shall be considered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor; the cost of which shall be included in the prices bid for the various classes of work. 3.5 TOPSOIL A. Stripping: Strip existing topsoil from areas that will be excavated or graded prior to commencement of excavating or grading and place in well -drained stockpiles in approved locations. 3.6 PRESERVATION OF DEVELOPED PRIVATE PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall exercise extreme care to avoid unnecessary disturbance of developed private property along the route of the construction. Trees, shrubbery, gardens, lawns, and other landscaping, which in the opinion of the Engineer must be removed, shall be replaced and replanted to restore the construction easement to the condition existing prior to construction. B. All soil preservation procedures and replanting operations shall be under the supervision of a nursery representative experienced in such operations. C. Improvements to the land such as fences, walls, outbuildings, and other structures which of necessity must be removed shall be replaced with equal quality materials and workmanship. D. Clean up the construction Site across developed private property directly after construction is completed upon approval of the Engineer. STANTEC SITE CLEARING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 10 00 - 3 E. Any commercial signs disturbed or removed shall be restored to their original condition within 24 hours. END OF SECTION STANTEC SITE CLEARING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 10 00 - 4 SECTION 31 23 16 - EXCAVATION PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for performing open cut excavations to the widths and depths necessary for constructing structures, pipelines, and conduits including excavation of any material necessary for any purpose pertinent to the construction of the Work. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Earth: Earth includes all materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, do not require blasting, barring, wedging, or special impact tools for their removal from their original beds, and removal of which can be completed using standard excavating equipment. Specifically excluded are all ledge and bedrock and boulders or pieces of masonry larger than one cubic yard in volume. B. Rock: Rock includes all materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, require blasting, barring, wedging and/or special impact tools such as jack hammers, sledges, chisels, or similar devices specifically designed for use in cutting or breaking rock for removal from their original beds and which have compressive strengths in their natural undisturbed state in excess of 300 psi. Boulders or masonry larger than one cubic yard in volume are classed as rock excavation. 1.3 SITE CONDITIONS A. Geotechnical Investigation: A geotechnical investigation and report prepared by Arehna Engineer Inc. and is included for reference by the Contractor. The geotechnical investigation report may be examined for whatever value it may be considered to be worth. However, this information is not guaranteed as to its accuracy or completeness. B. Actual Conditions: The Contractor shall make any geotechnical investigations deemed necessary to determine actual site conditions. C. Underground Utilities: The Contractor shall locate and identify all existing underground utilities within the area of excavations prior to the commencement of Work. D. Quality and Quantity: Make any other investigations and determinations necessary to determine the quality and quantities of earth and rock and the methods to be used to excavate these materials. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Clearing: Clear open cut excavation sites of obstructions preparatory to excavation. Clear in accordance with Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing, includes removal and disposal of vegetation, trees, stumps, roots, and bushes, except those to be protected during trench excavation. STANTEC EXCAVATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 16 - 1 B. Banks: Shore or slope banks to the angle of repose to prevent slides or cave-ins in accordance with the Contract Documents and OSHA requirements. C. Safety: Whenever an excavation site or trench is left unattended by the Contractor or when an area is not within 100 feet of observation by the Contractor, the excavation site or trench shall be filled and/or, at the Owner's discretion, protected by other means to prevent accidental or unauthorized entry. Such protection shall include barricades and other protection devices requested by the Engineer or Owner, including temporary fencing, snow fencing, or barricades. Such safety items shall not relieve the Contractor of any site safety requirements or liabilities established by federal, state, and local laws and agencies, including OSHA, but is intended as additional safety measures to protect the general public. D. During excavation and any site work, stormwater pollution prevention measures shall be taken to ensure that water quality criteria are not violated in the receiving water body and all state and local regulatory requirements are met. 3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Excavation Size: Provide excavations of sufficient size and only of sufficient size to permit the Work to be economically and properly constructed in the manner and of the size specified. B. Excavation Shape: Shape and dimension the bottom of the excavation in earth or rock to the shape and dimensions of the underside of the structure or drainage blanket wherever the nature of the excavated material permits. C. Compaction: Before placing foundation slabs, footings or backfill, proof roll the bottom of the excavations to detect soft spots. 1. For accessible areas, proof roll with a ten -wheel tandem axle dump truck loaded to at least 15 tons or similarly loaded construction equipment. 2. For small areas, proof roll with a smooth -faced steel roller filled with water or sand, or compact with a mechanical tamper. 3. Make one complete coverage, with overlap, of the area. 4. Overexcavate soft zones and replace with compacted select fill. 3.3 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Preparation: Properly brace and protect trees, shrubs, poles, and other structures that are to be preserved. Unless shown or specified otherwise, preserve all trees and Targe shrubs. Hold damage to the root structure to a minimum. Small shrubs may be preserved or replaced with equivalent specimens. B. Adequate Space: Keep the width of trenches to a minimum; however, provide adequate space for workers to place, joint, and backfill the pipe properly. C. Depth: Excavate trenches to a depth of 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe or the bottom of encasement for electrical ducts, unless otherwise shown, specified or directed, so that bedding material can be placed in the bottom of the trench and shaped to provide a continuous, firm bearing for duct encasement, pipe barrels and bells. STANTEC EXCAVATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 16 - 2 D. Unstable or Unsuitable Materials: If unstable or unsuitable material is exposed at the level of the bottom of the trench excavation, excavate the material in accordance with the subsection headed "Authorized Additional Excavation." 1. Material shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to the depth required to reach suitable foundation material. 2. When in the judgment of the Engineer the unstable or unsuitable material extends to an excessive depth, the Engineer may advise, in writing, the need for stabilization of the trench bottom with additional select fill material, crushed stone, washed shell, or gravel mat or the need to provide firm support for the pipe or electrical duct by other suitable methods. 3. Crushed stone, washed shell, and gravel shall be as specified in Section 31 23 23.13 - Backfill. 4. Payment for such trench stabilization will be made under the appropriate Contract Items or where no such items exist, as a change in the Work. E. Length of Excavation: Keep the open excavated trench preceding the pipe or conduit laying operation and the unfilled trench, with pipe or conduit in place, to a minimum length that causes the least disturbance (not to exceed to total length of pipe or conduit to be laid within the current work day). Provide ladders for a means of exit from the trench as required by applicable safety and health regulations. F. Excavated Material: Excavated material to be used for backfill shall be neatly deposited at the sides of the trenches where space is available. Where stockpiling of excavated material is required, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the sites to be used and shall maintain his operations to provide for natural drainage and not present an unsightly appearance. G. Water: Allow no water to rise in the trench excavation until sufficient backfill has been placed to prevent pipe or duct flotation. 3.4 SHORT TUNNEL EXCAVATION A. (Not Used) 3.5 EXCAVATION FOR JACKING AND AUGERING A. (Not Used) 3.6 ROCK EXCAVATION A. Rock Excavation: Excavate rock within the boundary lines and grades as shown, specified, or required. 1. Rock removed from the excavation becomes the property of the Contractor. Transport and dispose of excavated rock at an off-site disposal location. Obtain the off-site disposal location. 2. Remove all shattered rock and loose pieces. B. Structure Depths: For cast in place structures, excavate the rock only to the bottom of the structure, foundation slab, or drainage blanket. STANTEC EXCAVATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 16 - 3 C. Trench Width: Maintain a minimum clear width of the trench at the level of the top of the pipe of the outside diameter of the pipe barrel plus 4 feet, unless otherwise approved. D. Trench Depth: For trench excavation in which pipelines or electrical ducts are to be placed, excavate the rock to a minimum depth of 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe or duct encasement. Provide a cushion of sand or suitable crushed rock. Refill the excavated space with pipe bedding material in accordance with Section 31 23 23.13 - Backfill. Include placing, compacting, and shaping pipe bedding material in the appropriate Contract Items. E. Manhole Depths: For manhole excavation, excavate the rock to a minimum depth of 8 inches below the bottom of the manhole base for pipelines 24 inches in diameter and larger and 6 inches below the bottom manhole base for pipelines less than 24 inches in diameter. Refill the excavated space with pipe bedding material in accordance with Section 31 23 23.13 - Backfill. Include placing, compacting and shaping pipe bedding material for manhole bases in the appropriate Contract Items. F. Over -excavated Space: Refill the excavated space in rock below structures, pipelines, conduits, and manholes that exceeds the specified depths with 2,500 psi concrete, crushed stone, washed shell, or other material as directed. Include refilling of over excavated space in rock as part of the rock excavation. G. Other Requirements: Follow, where applicable, the requirements of the subsections on "Trench Excavation" and "Structure Excavation". H. Payment: Rock excavation, including placing, compacting, and shaping of the select fill material, will be paid for under the appropriate Contract Items or where no such items exist, as a change in the Work. I. Blasting: Blasting shall not be permitted without prior approval by the Owner. 3.7 FINISHED EXCAVATION A. Finish: Provide a reasonably smooth finished surface for all excavations, which is uniformly compacted and free from irregular surface changes. B. Finish Methods: Provide a degree of finish which is ordinarily obtainable from blade - grade operations, except as otherwise specified in Section 31 23 23.13 - Backfill. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Traffic and Erosion: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and from erosion. B. Repair: Repair any settlement or washing away that may occur from any cause, prior to acceptance. Re-establish grades to the required elevations and slopes. C. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to acquaint himself with all existing conditions and to locate all structures and utilities along the proposed utility alignment in order to avoid conflicts. Where actual conflicts are unavoidable, work shall be coordinated with the facility owner and performed so as to cause as little interference as possible with the service rendered by the facility disturbed. Facilities or structures damaged in the prosecution of the work shall be repaired and/or replaced immediately, in conformance with current standard practices of the industry, or according to the direction of the owner of such facility, at the Contractor's expense. STANTEC EXCAVATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 16 - 4 D. Other Requirements: Conduct all Work in accordance with the environmental protection requirements of the Contract Documents, permits, and all other applicable laws and regulations. 3.9 AUTHORIZED ADDITIONAL EXCAVATION A. Additional Excavation: Carry the excavation to such additional depth and width as authorized in writing, for the following reasons: 1. In case the materials encountered at the elevations shown are not suitable. 2. In case it is found desirable or necessary to go to an additional depth, or to an additional depth and width. B. Refill Materials: Refill such excavated space with either authorized 2,500 psi concrete or compacted select fill material, in compliance with the applicable provisions of Section 31 23 23.13 - Backfill. C. Compaction: Compact fill materials to avoid future settlement. As a minimum, unless otherwise specified or directed, backfill layers shall not exceed 6 inches in thickness for the full trench width and compaction shall equal 95% (min.) of the maximum dry density, or 98% (min.) of the maximum dry density if under paved area of roadway, as determined by the Modified Proctor Compaction Test (ASTM D1557). Compaction density tests shall be made at all such backfill areas with spacing not to exceed 100 linear feet of trench excavation and on each 6 -inch compacted layer. D. Payment: Additional earth excavations so authorized and concrete or select fill materials authorized for filling such additional excavation and compaction of select fill materials will be paid for under the appropriate Contract Items or where no such items exist, as a change in the Work. 3.10 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Stability: Refill any excavation carried beyond or below the lines and grades shown, except as specified in the subsection headed "Authorized Additional Excavation," with such material and in such manner as may be approved in order to provide for the stability of the various structures. B. Refill Materials: Refill spaces beneath all manholes, structures, pipelines, or conduits excavated without authority with 2,500 psi concrete or compacted select fill material, as approved. C. Payment: Refill for unauthorized excavation will not be measured and no payment will be made therefor. 3.11 SEGREGATION, STORAGE, AND DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL A. Stockpiling Suitable Materials: Stockpile topsoil suitable for final grading and landscaping and excavated material suitable for backfilling or embankments separately on the site in approved locations. B. Stockpile Locations: Store excavated and other material a sufficient distance away from the edge of any excavation to prevent its falling or sliding back into the excavation and to prevent collapse of the wall of the excavation. Provide not less than 2 feet clear space between the top of any stockpile and other material and the edge of any excavation. STANTEC EXCAVATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 16 - 5 C. Excess Materials: Contractor shall be responsible to transport and dispose of surplus excavated material and excavated material unsuitable for backfilling or embankments at an off site disposal location secured by the Contractor. 3.12 REMOVAL OF WATER A. Comply with the requirements of Section 31 23 19 — Dewatering. END OF SECTION STANTEC EXCAVATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 16 - 6 SECTION 31 23 19 - DEWATERING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall dewater trench and structure excavations in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The Contractor shall secure all necessary permits to complete the requirements of the Specifications. 1.2 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dewatering shall include all necessary control and disposal of groundwater on a continual basis during construction. B. Dewatering shall include the lowering of the groundwater table to relieve any hydrostatic head that could cause a decrease in the stability of the excavated subgrade. It shall also include the intercepting of seepage which could otherwise emerge from the slope or sides of excavations which could cause a decrease in the stability of the excavated subgrade or the slopes or sides of the excavations. 1.3 ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS A. The use of "quiet" pumping methodologies will be required for all overnight pumping in order to minimize noise and disruption to neighbors. B. The Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain any dewatering system required to lower and control groundwater levels and groundwater hydrostatic pressure during the construction of the Work as required by this Section and the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility and expense for the adequacy of the dewatering system with no additional time for performance. C. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of water resulting from dewatering and provide siltation settling basins for all discharges from dewatering systems. Submit plan of settling basins and discharge facilities for review by the Owner prior to dewatering system installation. D. All construction dewatering shall be contained onsite and allowed to infiltrate the soil unless FDEP permitting is obtained for offsite discharge. All dewatering effluent shall be routed to a temporary sediment sump prior to discharge to wetlands, other surface waters, or offsite. E. If it is necessary to discharge dewatering effluent off site, then coverage under the Florida Department of Environment Protection (FDEP) "Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from any Non -Contaminated Site Activity" must be obtained by the Contractor. Should contamination in excess of the thresholds for Generic Permitting be found in the required sampling, an "Individual Permit for Wastewater Discharge" is required. The Contractor shall bear all responsibility and cost for obtaining the applicable permit for discharge of de -watering effluent and for complying with the permit conditions. F. The Contractor shall remove dewatering systems and equipment when no longer required. STANTEC DEWATERING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 19 - 1 • • • PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 DEWATERING EQUIPMENT A. Engines for dewatering equipment shall be equipped with sound attenuating devices and shall not exceed the maximum permissible sound levels defined in the City of Clearwater Noise Ordinance (Section 3-1508 - Noise). PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The dewatering system shall be capable of developing an excavated subgrade relieved of any hydrostatic pressure that could cause a decrease in the stability of the excavated subgrade and which will provide the necessary groundwater control for the proper performance required for completion of the Work. B. The dewatering system shall not cause damage to newly constructed or existing properties, buildings, utilities, and other work due to the loss of support from incompletely drained soils or from removal of soil particles resulting from the dewatering system operation. C. Dewatering facilities shall be located where they will not cause interference with work performed by others. D. If the dewatering system utilized by the Contractor causes or threatens to cause damage to new or existing facilities, the dewatering system shall be modified at no additional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair all damage caused by the dewatering system operation at no additional cost to the Owner and at no additional time for performance. E. Dispose of subsurface water collected in a manner that conforms to all applicable local and state ordinances, statutes, and laws. F. Maintain continual and complete effectiveness of the dewatering system operation to provide a firm, stable, excavated subgrade at all times as required for proper performance of the Work. G. Provide dewatering necessary to maintain the groundwater table below the level of backfill as it is being placed. 3.2 JOB CONDITIONS A. Erosion Control: Provide adequate protection from erosion from any of the dewatering operations utilized during the course of the construction. Any damage, disruption, or interference to newly constructed Work or existing properties, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or other Work resulting directly or indirectly from dewatering operations conducted under this Contract shall be remedied by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. B. Treatment of Dewatering Operations Discharges: Provide such additional treatment devices as may be required to meet the provisions of the Contract. This may include the construction of sumps and/or settling basins, stone riprap, silt fences, or other requirements. The treatment devices shall be later removed and/or filled in with STANTEC DEWATERING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 19 - 2 acceptable backfill material and restored to original conditions once they are no longer needed, at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.3 REMOVAL OF WATER A. Water Removal: At all times during the excavation period and until completion and acceptance of the Work at final inspection, provide ample means and equipment with which to remove promptly and dispose of properly all water entering any excavation or other parts of the Work. B. Dry Excavations: Keep the excavation dry. C. Water Contact: Allow no water to rise over or come in contact with masonry and concrete until the concrete and mortar have attained a set and, in any event, not sooner than 12 hours after placing the masonry or concrete. D. Discharge of Water: Dispose of water pumped or drained from the Work in a safe and suitable manner without damage to adjacent property or streets or to other work under construction. E. Protection: Provide adequate protection for water discharged onto streets. Protect the street surface at the point of discharge. F. Sanitary Sewers: Discharge no water into sanitary sewers. G. Storm Sewers: Discharge no water containing settleable solids into storm sewers. H. Repair: Promptly repair any and all damage caused by dewatering the Work. END OF SECTION STANTEC DEWATERING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 19 - 3 PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY • • SECTION 31 23 23.13 - BACKFILL A. General Requirements: 1. Backfill all excavation to the original surface of the ground or to such other grades as may be shown or required. For areas to be covered by topsoil, leave or stop backfill 12 inches below the finished grade or as shown. 2. Obtain approval for the time elapsing before backfilling against masonry structures. 3. Remove from all backfill, any compressible, putrescible, or destructible rubbish and refuse and all lumber and braces from the excavated space before backfilling is started. Leave sheeting and bracing in place or remove as the Work progresses. B. Equipment Limitations: Do not permit construction equipment used to backfill to travel against and over cast -in place concrete structures until the specified concrete strength has been obtained, as verified by concrete test cylinders. In special cases where conditions warrant, the above restriction may be modified providing the concrete has gained sufficient strength, as determined from test cylinders, to satisfy design requirements for the removal of forms and the application of Toad. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Codes and standards referred to in this Section are: 1. ASTM International: a. ASTM D1557 — Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)) b. ASTM D1556 — Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method. c. ASTM D2922 — Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil -Aggregate in Place By Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKFILL MATERIAL - GENERAL A. General: Backfill with sound materials, free from waste, organic matter, rubbish, boggy, or other unsuitable materials. B. General Materials Requirements: Conform materials used for backfilling to the requirements specified. Follow common fill requirements whenever drainage or select fill is not specified. Determine and obtain the approval of the appropriate test method where more than one compaction test method is specified. C. Frozen Materials: Do not use frozen material for backfilling. STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 1 2.2 DRAINAGE FILL A. Materials for Drainage Fill: Use clean gravel, crushed stone, or other suitable material conforming to the gradation specified for drainage fill. Clay and fine particles are unacceptable in drainage fill. Provide drainage fill of a grade between the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 1 1/2 inch 100 1 inch 95 to 100 1/2 inch 40 to 65 No. 4 5 to 15 No. 16 Oto 4 2.3 SELECT FILL A. Materials for Select Fill: Use clean gravel, crushed stone, washed shell, or other granular or similar material as approved which can be readily and thoroughly compacted to 95 percent (min.) of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 1. Allowed Materials: Grade select fill between the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 2 inch 100 1 1/2 inch 90 to 100 1 inch 75 to 95 1/2 inch 45 to 70 No. 4 25 to 50 No. 10 15 to 40 No. 200 5 to 15 2. Unallowed Materials: Very fine sand, uniformly graded sands and gravels, sand and silt, soft earth, or other materials that have a tendency to flow under pressure when wet are unacceptable as select fill. 2.4 COMMON FILL A. Materials for Common Fill: Material from on site excavation may be used as common fill provided that it can be readily compacted to 90 percent (min.) of the maximum dry density of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557, and does not contain unsuitable material. Select fill may be used as common fill at no change in the Contract Price. STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 2 B. Granular Materials On -Site: Granular on-site material, which is fairly well graded between the following limits may be used as granular common fill: Sieve Size Percent Passing by Weight 3 inch 100 No. 10 50 to 100 No. 60 20 to 90 No. 200 0 to 20 C. Cohesive Materials On -Site: Cohesive site material may be used as common fill. 1. The gradation requirements do not apply to cohesive common fill. 2. Use material having a liquid limit less than or equal to 40 and a plasticity index less than or equal to 20. D. Material Approval: All material used as common fill is subject to approval. If there is insufficient on-site material, import whatever additional off-site material is required which conforms to the specifications and at no additional cost. 2.5 BEDDING AND BACKFILL A. The following materials shall be used for pipe bedding and backfill: Trench Section Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) Soil Group Bedding and Embedment SW, SP, or any soil beginning with one of these symbols with no more than 12% passing a #200 sieve Pipe Zone Above Embedment SW, or SP; GW, GP, or any soil beginning with one of these symbols with greater than 12% passing a #200 sieve; or CL, ML, or any soil beginning with one of these symbols, with 30% or greater retained on a #200 sieve Trench Zone SW, or SP; GW, GP, or any soil beginning with one of these symbols with greater than 12% passing a #200 sieve; or CL, ML, or any soil beginning with one of these symbols, with 30% or greater retained on a #200 sieve Final Backfill Common Fill 1. Pipe Zone Backfill: The maximum partizle size for materials used in the pipe zone (i.e., bedding, embedment, and pipe zone above embedment) shall be 1% inches STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 3 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 BORROW A. Should there be insufficient material from the excavations to meet the requirements for fill material, borrow shall be obtained from pits secured and tested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Copies of all test results shall be submitted to the Engineer. 3.2 ELECTRICAL DUCT AND PRECAST MANHOLE BEDDING A. Bedding Compaction: Bed all electrical ducts and precast manholes in well graded, compacted, select fill conforming to the requirements except as otherwise shown, specified, or required. Extend electrical duct bedding a minimum of 6 inches below the bottom of the duct encasement for the full trench width. Compact bedding thickness no Tess than 6 inches for precast concrete manhole bases. B. Concrete Work Mats: Cast cast in place manhole bases and other foundations for structures against a 2,500 psi concrete work mat in clean and dry excavations, unless otherwise shown, specified or required. C. Bedding Placement: Place select fill used for bedding beneath electrical ducts and precast manhole bases, in uniform layers not greater than 9 inches in loose thickness. Thoroughly compact in place with suitable mechanical or pneumatic tools to not less than 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557. D. Use of Select Fill: Bed existing underground structures, tunnels, conduits and pipes crossing the excavation with compacted select fill material. Place bedding material under and around each existing underground structure, tunnel, conduit, or pipe and extend underneath and on each side to a distance equal to the depth of the trench below the structure, tunnel, conduit, or pipe. 3.3 BACKFILL A. General: 1. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. 2. Backfill shall not be placed around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand the Toads imposed. 3. Backfill around water -retaining structures shall not be placed until the structures have been tested, and the structures shall be full of water while backfill is being placed. B. Except for drainrock materials being placed in over -excavated areas or trenches, backfill shall be placed after water is removed from the excavation and the trench sidewalls and bottom have been dried to a moisture content suitable for compaction. C. Pre -Placement Conditions: 1. Immediately prior to placement of backfill materials, the bottoms and sidewalls of trenches and structure excavations shall have any loose, sloughing, or caving soil and rock materials removed. STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 4 2. Trench sidewalls shall consist of excavated surfaces that are in a relatively undisturbed condition before placement of backfill materials. D. Layering: 1. Backfill materials shall be placed and spread evenly in layers. 2. When compaction is achieved using mechanical equipment, the layers shall be evenly spread such that when compacted each layer shall not exceed 6 inches in thickness. E. During spreading, each layer shall be thoroughly mixed as necessary in order to promote uniformity of material in each layer. F. Moisture Content: 1. Where the backfill material moisture content is below the optimum moisture content, water shall be added before or during spreading until the proper moisture content is achieved. 2. Where the backfill material moisture content is too high to permit the indicated degree of compaction, the material shall be dried until the moisture content is satisfactory. 3.4 STRUCTURE BACKFILL A. Use of Select Fill: Use select fill underneath all structures, and adjacent to structures where pipes, connections, electrical ducts and structural foundations are to be located within this fill. Use select fill beneath all pavements, walkways, and railroad tracks, and extend to the bottom of pavement base course or ballast. 1. Place backfill in uniform layers not greater than 8 inches in loose thickness and thoroughly compact in place with suitable approved mechanical or pneumatic equipment. B. Compact backfill to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 Modified Proctor. C. Use of Clay: In unpaved areas adjacent to structures for the top 1 foot of fill directly under lawn subgrades use clay backfill placed in 6 -inch lifts. Compact clay backfill to not less than 90 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 Modified Proctor. 1. Use clay having a liquid limit less than or equal to 40 and a plasticity index less than or equal to 20. 3.5 EARTH EMBANKMENTS A. Use of Cohesive Materials: Make all earth embankments of approved cohesive common fill material. 1. Place fill in uniform layers not greater than 10 inches in loose thickness. Compact in place with suitable approved mechanical equipment. STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 5 2. Compact earth embankments to not less than 90 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557 Modified Proctor 3. Do not use cohesionless, granular material as earth embankment backfill, unless otherwise shown or required. 3.6 COMPACTION EQUIPMENT A. Equipment and Methods: Carry out all compaction with suitable approved equipment and methods. 1. Compact clay and other cohesive material with sheepsfoot rollers or similar equipment where practicable. Use handheld pneumatic tampers elsewhere for compaction of cohesive fill material. 2. Compact low cohesive soils with pneumatic -tire rollers or large vibratory equipment where practicable. Use small vibratory equipment elsewhere for compaction of cohesionless fill material. 3. Do not use heavy compaction equipment over pipelines or other structures, unless the depth of fill is sufficient to adequately distribute the Toad. 3.7 PIPELINE AND UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. General: 1. Unless otherwise indicated or ordered, excavation for pipelines and utilities shall be open -cut trenches with minimum widths as indicated. B. Trench Bottom: 1. Except where pipe bedding is required, the bottom of the trench shall be excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe. 2. Excavations for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required. 3. Where pipe bedding is required, the bottom of the trench shall be excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe bedding. C. Open Trenches: 1. The maximum amount of open trench permitted in any one location shall be 500 feet or the length necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed in a single day, whichever is greater. 2. Trenches shall be fully backfilled at the end of each day or, in lieu thereof, shall be covered by heavy steel plates adequately braced and capable of supporting vehicular traffic in those locations where it is impractical to backfill at the end of each day. 3. These requirements for backfilling or use of steel plate will be waived in cases where the trench is located further than 100 feet from any traveled roadway or occupied structure; in such cases, however, barricades and warning lights meeting appropriate safety requirements shall be provided and maintained. STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 6 D. Embankments, Fills, and Structural Backfills: 1. Where pipelines are to be installed in embankments, fills, or structure backfills, the fill shall be constructed to a level at least one foot above the top of the pipe before the trench is excavated. 2. Upon completion of the embankment or structural backfill, a trench conforming to the appropriate detail may be excavated and the pipe may be installed. E. Trench Shield: 1. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation operations, the trench width shall be wider than the shield such that the shield is free to be lifted and then moved horizontally without binding against the trench sidewalls and causing sloughing or caving of the trench walls. 2. If the trench walls cave or slough, the trench shall be excavated as an open excavation with sloped sidewalls or with trench shoring, as indicated and as required by the pipe structural design. 3. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation, pipe installation, and backfill operations, the shield shall be moved by lifting the shield free of the trench bottom or backfill and then moving the shield horizontally. 4. The Contractor shall not drag trench shields along the trench causing damage or displacement to the trench sidewalls, the pipe, or the bedding and backfill. F. Placing and Spreading of Backfill Materials: 1. Each layer of coarse granular backfill materials with less than 10 percent passing the No. 4 sieve shall be compacted by means of at least 2 passes from a vibratory compactor that is capable of achieving the required density in 2 passes and that is acceptable to the Engineer. 2. Where such materials are used for pipe zone backfill, vibratory compaction shall be used at vertical intervals of the lesser of: a. one-half the diameter of the pipe; or b. 24 inches, measured in the uncompacted state. 3. In addition, these materials shall be subjected to vibratory compaction at the springline of the pipe and the top of the pipe zone backfill, regardless of whether that dimension is less than 24 inches or not. 4. Each layer of backfill material with greater than 10 percent passing the No. 4 sieve shall be compacted using mechanical compactors suitable for the Work. 5. The material shall be placed and compacted under the haunch of the pipe and up each side evenly so as not to move the pipe during the placement of the backfill. 6. The material shall be placed in lifts that will not exceed 6 inches when compacted to the required density. G. Mechanical Compaction: STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 7 1. Backfill around and over pipelines that is mechanically compacted shall be compacted using light, hand -operated vibratory compactors and rollers that do not damage the pipe. 2. After completion of at least 2 feet of compacted backfill over the top of pipeline, compaction equipment weighing no more than 8,000 pounds may be used to complete the trench backfill. H. Pipe And Utility Trench Backfill: 1. Pipe Zone Backfill: a. Definitions: 1) The pipe zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross- section lying between a plane below the bottom surface of the pipe and a plane at a point above the top surface of the pipe as indicated. 2) The bedding is defined as that portion of pipe zone backfill material between the trench subgrade and the bottom of the pipe. 3) The embedment is defined as that portion of the pipe zone backfill material between the bedding and a level line as indicated. b. Final Trim: 1) After compacting the bedding, the Contractor shall perform a final trim using a stringline for establishing grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with the bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe. 2) Excavation for pipe bells and welding shall be made as required. c. The pipe zone shall be backfilled with the indicated backfill material. d. Pipe zone backfill materials shall be manually spread evenly around the pipe, maintaining the same height on both sides of the pipe such that when compacted the pipe zone backfill will provide uniform bearing and side support. e. The Contractor shall exercise care in order to prevent damage to the pipeline coating, cathodic bonds, and the pipe itself during the installation and backfill operations. 2. Trench Zone Backfil: a. After the pipe zone backfill has been placed, backfilling of the trench zone may proceed. b. The trench zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section Tying as indicated between a plane above the top surface of the pipe and a plane at a point 18 inches below the finished surface grade, or if the trench is under pavement, 18 inches below the roadway subgrade. 3. Final Backfill: STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 8 a. Final backfill is defined as backfill in the trench cross-sectional area within 18 inches of finished grade, or if the trench is under pavement, backfill within 18 inches of the roadway subgrade. I. Trench Shield: 1. If a moveable trench shield is used during backfill operations, the shield shall be lifted to a location above each layer of backfill material prior to compaction of the layer. 2. The Contractor shall not displace the pipe or backfill while the shield is being moved. J. Compaction Requirements: Location or Use of Fill or Backfill Percentage of Maximum Dry Density (Per ASTM D1557) Pipe embedment backfill 95 Pipe bedding and over -excavated zones under bedding 95 Pipe zone backfill portion above embedment 95 Trench zone backfill, beneath paved areas and structures or within 3 feet horizontally of structures 95 Trench zone backfill, not beneath paved areas and more than 3 feet horizontally of structures 90 Final backfill, beneath paved areas or structures and within 3 feet horizontally of paved areas or structures 95 Final backfill, more than 3 feet horizontally from paved areas or structures. 90 3.8 FIELD TESTING A. General: Field soils testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory at the Contractor's expense. B. Density: STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 9 1. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum density, the maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with Method C of ASTM D1557. 2. Field density in-place tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM D2922, or by such other means acceptable to the Engineer. C. Remediation: 1. In case the test of the fill or backfill shows non-compliance with the required density, the Contractor shall accomplish such remedy as may be required to ensure compliance. 2. Subsequent testing to show compliance shall be by a testing laboratory selected by the Owner and paid by the Contractor. 3.9 FINISH GRADING A. Final Contours: Perform finish grading in accordance with the completed contour elevations and grades shown and blend into conformation with remaining natural ground surfaces. 1. Leave all finished grading surfaces smooth and firm to drain. 2. Bring finish grades to elevations within plus or minus 0.10 foot of elevations or contours shown. B. Surface Drainage: Perform grading outside of building or structure lines in a manner to prevent accumulation of water within the area. Where necessary or where shown, extend finish grading to ensure that water will be carried to drainage ditches, and the site area left smooth and free from depressions holding water. 3.10 RESPONSIBILITY FOR AFTER SETTLEMENT A. After Settlement Responsibility: The Contractor shall be responsible for correcting any depression that develops in backfilled areas from settlement within one year after the date of Final Completion. Provide as needed, backfill material, pavement base replacement, permanent pavement, sidewalk, curb and driveway repair or replacement, and lawn replacement, and perform the necessary reconditioning and restoration work to bring such depressed areas to proper grade as approved. END OF SECTION STANTEC BACKFILL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 23 23.13 - 10 SECTION 31 40 00 — SHORING, SHEETING, AND BRACING PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. This Section includes work required for protection of an excavation or structure through shoring, sheeting, and bracing. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to retain qualified design services for the systems described in this Section. C. All sheeting and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be completed with strict adherence to OSHA Regulations and all federal and state regulations applying to the design and construction of soring, sheeting, and bracing. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Submit complete design calculations and working drawings of proposed shoring, sheeting and bracing which have been prepared, signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer experienced in Structural Engineering and registered in the State of Florida, before starting excavation for jacking pits and structures. Use the soil pressure diagram shown for shoring, sheeting and bracing design. The Engineer's review of calculations and working drawings will be limited to confirming that the design was prepared by a licensed professional engineer and that the soil pressure diagram shown was used. III1.3 REFERENCES • A. Commerce Department, National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). NBS Building Science Series, Publication Number 27. "Recommended Technical Provisions for Construction Practice in Shoring and Sloping Trenches and Excavations." 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Work shall be accordance with the US Department of Labor Safety and Health Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational Safety Act of 1970 (PL 91 596) and under Section 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (PL 91 54), and the Florida Trench Safety Act. The Contractor shall also observe 29 CFR 1910.46 OSHA's regulation for Confined Space Entry. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND MATERIALS A. Material Recommendations: 1. Use manufacturers and materials for shoring, sheeting and bracing as recommended by the Licensed Professional Engineer who designed the shoring, sheeting, and bracing. STANTEC SHORING, SHEETING, AND BRACING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 40 00 - 1 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 SHORING, SHEETING, AND BRACING INSTALATION A. General: Provide safe working conditions, to prevent shifting of material, to prevent damage to structures or other work, to avoid delay to the work, all in accordance with applicable safety and health regulations. Properly shore, sheet, and brace all excavations which are not cut back to the proper slope and where shown. Meet the general trenching requirements of the applicable safety and health regulations for the minimum shoring, sheeting and bracing for trench excavations. 1. The Contractor shall be soley responsibility for the design, methods of installation, and adequacy of the shoring, sheeting, and bracing. B. Arrange shoring, sheeting, and bracing so as not to place any strain on portions of completed work until the general construction has proceeded far enough to provide ample strength. C. If the Engineer is of the opinion that at any point the shoring, sheeting, or bracing are inadequate or unsuited for the purpose, resubmission of design calculations and working drawings for that point may be ordered, taking into consideration the observed field conditions. If the new calculations show the need for additional shoring, sheeting, and bracing, it should be installed immediately. D. Monitoring: Periodically monitor horizontal and vertical deflections of sheeting. Submit these measurements for review. E. Accurately locate all underground utilities and take the required measures necessary to protect them from damage. All underground utilities shall be kept in service at all times. F. Sheeting Depth: In general drive or place sheeting for pipelines to a depth at elevation equal to the top of the pipe as approved. 1. If it is necessary to drive sheeting below that elevation in order to obtain a dry trench or satisfactory working conditions, cut the sheeting off at the top of the pipe and leave in place sheeting below the top of the pipe. 2. Cut off sheeting not designated as "Sheeting Left in Place". The cut ends of sheeting left adjacent to the pipe will be paid for as "Sheeting Left in Place." 3. Do not cut the sheeting until backfill has been placed and compacted to the top of the pipe. G. Sheeting Removal: In general, remove sheeting and bracing above the top of the pipe as the excavation is refilled in a manner to avoid the caving in of the bank or disturbance to adjacent areas or structures. Sheeting shall be removed as backfilling progresses so that the sides are always supported or when removal would not endanager the construction of adjacent structures. When required to eliminate excessive trench width or other damages, shoring or bracing shall be left in place and the top cut off at an elevation 2.5 feet below finished grade, unless otherwise directed. 1. Carefully fill voids left by the withdrawal of the sheeting by jetting, ramming or otherwise. No separate payment will be made for filling of such voids. STANTEC SHORING, SHEETING, AND BRACING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 40 00 - 2 H. Permission for Removal: Obtain permission before the removal of any shoring, sheeting, or bracing. Retain the responsibility for injury to structures or to other property or persons from failure to leave such shoring, sheeting and bracing in place even though permission for removal has been obtained. I. Preload internal braces to 50 percent of the design loads. J. Proof test tie backs to 133 percent of the design loads and lock off tie backs at 75 percent of the design loads. 3.2 SHEETING LEFT IN PLACE FOR PROTECTION A. Ordered Left in Place: In addition to sheeting specified or shown to be left in place, the Engineer may order, in writing, any or all other shoring, sheeting, or bracing to be left in place for the purpose of preventing injury to the structures, pipelines, or to other property or to persons. 1. Cutoff sheeting left in place at the elevation shown or ordered, but, in general, at least 2.5 feet below the final ground surface. 2. Drive up tight any bracing remaining in place. B. Right to Order: Do not construe the right to order shoring, sheeting, and bracing left in place as creating any obligation to issue such orders. C. Payment: Shoring, sheeting and bracing left in place, by written order, will be paid for under the appropriate Contract Items or where no such items exist, as changes in the work. END OF SECTION STANTEC SHORING, SHEETING, AND BRACING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 31 40 00 - 3 SECTION 32 31 13 - CHAIN LINK FENCING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide polymer coated galvanized steel chain Zink fencing and gates and appurtenant Work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Single Manufacturer: Chain Zink fencing, gates, accessories, fittings, and fastenings shall be products of a single manufacturer. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. ASME B36.10M — Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A780 — Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized Coatings 2. ASTM F552 — Standard Terminology Relating to Chain -Link Fencing 3. ASTM F626 — Standard Specification for Fence Fittings 4. ASTM F668 — Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Polyolefin, and Other Polymer -Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric 5. ASTM F900 — Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates 6. ASTM F934 — Standard Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer -Coated Chain Link Fence Materials 7. ASTM F1043 — Standard Specification for Strength and Protective Coatings on Steel Industrial Fence Framework 8. ASTM F1083 — Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures 9. ASTM F1664 — Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) and Other Conforming Organic Polymer -Coated Steel Tension Wire Used with Chain -Link Fence 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Furnish submittals in accordance Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Manufacturer's technical data, product specifications, standard details, certified product test results, installation instructions, and general recommendations. STANTEC CHAIN LINK FENCING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 31 13 - 1 2. Site plan layout of fencing, gates, and accessories. Drawings shall show fence height; post layout, including sizes and sections; post setting and bracing configuration; details of gates and corner construction; and other accessories that may be necessary. 1.4 DESIGN A. Provide fencing of the chain-link type with diamond mesh woven wire fabric. Height shall be as shown in the Drawings. B. Provide green color coated steel fabric, support, and fittings. Color coat all accessories except hinges and latches to match the fence. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 CHAIN LINK FABRIC A. Provide polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coated steel chain link fence fabric complying with ASTM F668. Fence fabric shall be 9 gauge steel wire, 2 -inch mesh, with top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed. Wire coating shall be Class 2a per ASTM F668. Color of coating shall be green per ASTM F934. 2.2 STEEL FENCE FRAMEWORK A. Round Steel Pipe and Rail: ASTM F1043 Group IA Heavy Industrial Fence Framework, schedule 40 galvanized per ASTM F1083, high strength grade (50,000 psi minimum yield). Exterior and interior shall have hot dipped zinc coating with no less than 1.8 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. 1. Line Posts: 3.50 -inch outside diameter, 7.58 Ib/ft. 2. End, Corner, and Pull Posts: 4.50 -inch outside diameter, 10.8 Ib/ft. 3. Brace Rails: 1.66 -inch outside diameter, 2.27 Ib/ft. B. Polymer Coating: PVC coating fused and adhered to the exterior zinc coating of the framework. PVC coating shall have a minimum thickness of 10 mils per ASTM F1043. Color to match fabric (green per ASTM F934). 2.3 TENSION WIRE A. Polymer Coated Steel Tension Wire: 7 gauge wire complying to ASTM F1664. Wire gauge specified is the core wire gauge. 1. Material Coating: Class 2a, extruded and adhered. Match color to that of the chain Zink fence fabric. 2.4 FITTINGS A. Tension and Brace Bands: Galvanized pressed steel complying with ASTM F626, minimum steel thickness of 12 gauge, minimum width of 3/4 inch and minimum zinc coating of 1.20 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. STANTEC CHAIN LINK FENCING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 31 13 - 2 B. Terminal and Line Post Caps and Brace Ends: In compliance with ASTM F626, pressed steel galvanized after fabrication, minimum zinc coating of 1.20 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. C. Truss Rod Assembly: In compliance with ASTM F626, 3/8 inch diameter steel truss rod with pressed steel tightener, minimum zinc coating of 1.20 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. Assembly shall be capable of withstanding a tension of 2,000 lbs. D. Tension Bars: In compliance with ASTM F626. Galvanized steel, one-piece, length 2 inches Tess than the fabric height minimum zinc coating of 1.20 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. Bars for 2 -inch mesh shall have a minimum cross section of 1% inches by 3/4 inch. E. Polymer Coated Color Fittings: In compliance with ASTM F626. Polymer coating minimum thickness 0.006 inch, maximum thickness of 0.015 inch, fused and adhered to zinc coated fittings. Match color to that of the chain link fence fabric. 2.5 TIE WIRE AND HOG RINGS A. Tie Wire: Per ASTM F626, 9 gauge galvanized steel preformed power -fastened wire ties. Minimum zinc coating of 1.20 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. B. Hog Rings: Per ASTM F626, 9 gauge galvanized steel. Minimum zinc coating of 1.20 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. C. Polymer Coating: Match color to that of the chain link fence fabric. 2.6 SWING GATES A. Gates shall be fabricated in accordance with the Drawings and ASTM F900. Gate frame members shall be round tubular steel, 1.90 -inch outside diameter, 2.28 Ib/ft. Frame member shall be spaced no more than 8 feet apart vertically and horizontally. Interior bracing shall be round tubular steel, but need not be the same size as frame members. Adjustable truss rod assemblies shall be provided on gates 5 feet wide or wider. B. Polymer -Coated Steel Frames: In accordance with ASTM F1043. Shall match adjoining fence framework. Welded joints on polymer -coated steel gate frames shall be coated in accordance with ASTM A780. The painted areas shall then be top -coated to match the frame color. C. Chain Link Gate Fabric: Shall be as specified for adjoining fence. D. Gate Accessories: 1. Gate Hinges: Hinges shall be pressed steel or malleable iron. The hinge shall be designed to permit the gate to swing a full 180 degrees (90 degrees in and 90 degrees out). 2. Double Gate Latch: The latch shall have a drop rod or plunger bar arranged to engage the gate stop. Locking devices shall be constructed so that the center drop rod or plunger bar cannot be raised when the gate is locked. The latching devices shall have a provision for a padlock. 3. Gate Stop: Gate stop shall be provided for all double gates and shall be suitable for setting in concrete for the center drop rod or plunger. STANTEC CHAIN LINK FENCING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 31 13 - 3 4. Keepers: Keepers shall be provided for each gate leaf over 5 feet wide. Gate keepers shall consist of a mechanical device for securing the free end of the gate in when the full -open position. III2.7 RELATED ITEMS A. Concrete: Comply with applicable Sections of Division 03 — Concrete. B. Nuts, Bolts, and Screws: Steel, minimum size 3/8 -inch diameter, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Prior to commencing installation, the Contractor shall require the Installer to inspect all areas and conditions within which Work of this Section will be performed. Dimensions and clearances shall be verified. Final grading shall be completed and all earth, brush, or other obstructions which interfere with the proper alignment and construction of fencing shall be removed. 3.2 FRAMEWORK INSTALLATION A. Posts: Line posts shall be installed at intervals not exceeding the maximum spacing indicated on the Drawings. Posts shall be set plumb in concrete footings in accordance with ASTM F567 and the Drawings. B. Terminal posts shall be braced and trussed. The horizontal brace rail and diagonal truss rod shall be installed in accordance with ASTM F567. 1. Terminal posts shall be installed where changes in fence lines equal or exceed 15 degrees, measured horizontally. C. Excavation: Holes for posts shall be drilled or hand excavated to the diameters and spacings indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. D. Concrete: 1. Concrete for footings may be placed without forms, providing the ground is firm enough to permit excavation to neat line dimensions. Prior to placing concrete, the earth around the hole shall be thoroughly moistened. 2. Encasement concrete for footings shall be placed immediately after mixing in a manner such that there will be no concentration of the Targe aggregates. The concrete shall be consolidated by tamping or vibrating. 3. Concrete footings shall have a neat appearance and shall be extended 2 inches above grade and troweled to a crown to shed water. 4. A minimum of 7 days shall elapse after placing the concrete footings before the fence fabric or barbed wire is fastened to the posts. E. Tension Wire: Continuous tension wire shall be installed at the top and bottom of the fence fabric as indicated on the Drawings. Tension wire shall be stretched taunt, independently and prior to the fabric, between terminal posts and shall be secured to the STANTEC CHAIN LINK FENCING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 31 13 - 4 terminal posts using brace bands. Tension wire shall be secured to each line post with a tie wire. 3.3 CHAIN LINK FABRIC INSTALLATION A. Chain link fabric shall be fastened on the outside of the framework. B. Attach fabric to the terminal post by threading the tension bar through the fabric. Secure the tension bar to the posts with tension bands and carriage bolts. C. Stretch chain Zink fabric taunt and free of sag between terminal posts. Secure fabric to line posts with tie wires wrapped 360 degrees around the posts. Twist the two wire ends together with three full turns per ASTM F567. Secure the fabric to the tension wire with hog rings. Excess wire shall be cut off and bent over to prevent injury. 3.4 GATE INSTALLATION A. Swing Gates: Installation of swing gates and gate posts shall be in compliance with ASTM F567. Gates shall swing inward and outward. 3.5 NUTS AND BOLTS A. Bolts: Carriage bolts used for fittings shall be installed with the head on the secure side of the fence. All bolts shall be peened over to prevent the removal of the nut. END OF SECTION STANTEC CHAIN LINK FENCING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 31 13 - 5 • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the Underground Sprinkler System work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, except as for items specifically indicated as "NIC ITEMS". B. The completed and proper construction of the landscape irrigation system in- cluding, but not limited to: 1. All piping, including mains, laterals, fittings, sleeves, connections, tees, ris- ers, clamps, and swing joints. 2. All control, gate, globe, pressure reducing, quick coupling and other valves; including valve boxes, markers, connections, operators and other accesso- ries. 3. Connection to automatic control system as shown on plans, including con- trol wiring low voltage connections and electrical and communication wire connections, conduit, and coordination of 120V electrical. 4. All rotating and stationary spray and bubbler sprinkler heads; including proper nozzles as called for herein and shown on the plans and all other appurtenances and accessories for proper operations. 5. Connection of piping to the supply sources as shown on the plans. 6. All excavation, site work, relocation or replacement of utilities, backfill, compaction and restoration of all disturbed areas. 7. The contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete and operable system for the irrigation of all areas to be landscaped on the project site. The plans and these specifications are intended to include all items obvi- ously necessary and requisite for the proper irrigation of the project. This in no way relieves the contractor of his responsibility to furnish any additional labor, materials and equipment required for a proper system. 8. The contractor shall be responsible for adjusting head location, type and size, and any other system components to comply with the requirements of landscaping as actually intended. Such adjustments shall be made at no cost to the Owner except for, when authorized in writing, such adjustments which will be compensated at an agreed upon price. 9. The contractor shall supply, deliver, store, and protect all equipment and materials including pipe and fittings, sprinkler heads, valves, controllers, wire, and all other component parts necessary for the installation of a fully automatic irrigation system as indicated in the plans and specifications. Adequate security of materials on site shall be provided by the contractor at all times at his expense. C. Explanation of Drawings: 1. Due to the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fit- tings, sleeves, etc. which may be required. The contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all of the work and STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 1 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION plan his work accordingly, furnishing such offsets, fittings, and sleeves as may be required to meet such conditions. 2. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, underground utilities, plantings, and architec- tural features. Deviations shall be brought to the Landscape Architect's at- tention. 3. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. 4. The contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been known in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect. In the event that notification is not per- formed, the contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision nec- essary. 5. Explanation of Drawings: Conflicts between the plans, notes, details or specifications shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Land- scape Architect. These discrepancies or conflicts shall be interpreted by the Landscape Architect and his decision shall be final in all cases. Should the contractor fail to notify the Landscape Architect of the conflict(s) and by so, take advantage of the said discrepancy, the Contractor shall be held re- sponsible for making any and all changes as directed by the Landscape Ar- chitect with no compensation for extra labor, material or equipment. 6. The contractor shall prior to trenching, verify the location of all underground utilities as are commonly encountered underground. He shall take proper precaution not to damage or disturb said improvements. 7. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, the labor furnished by the con- tractor is incompetent, unskilled, or unreliable, his equipment inadequate, improper or unsafe, or if the contractor shall fail to continuously and dili- gently execute the construction, the Landscape Architect or Owner shall, in writing, instruct the contractor to remove all such causes of noncompliance and the contractor shall promptly comply. 8. The contractor shall be responsible for full and complete coverage of all ir- rigation areas. The Landscape Architect shall be notified of any necessary adjustments to the irrigation system. Any revisions to the irrigation system must be submitted and answered in written form, along with any change in contract price. D. On -Site Conditions: 1. Inspection of the Site: The contractor shall acquaint himself with all on-site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the drawings be found during ex- cavations, the contractor shall promptly notify the Owner for instructions as to further action. Failure to do so will make the contractor liable for any and all damage thereto arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on the drawings. 2. Protection of Property: The contractor shall be responsible for the preserva- tion and protection of all site conditions to remain from damage due to this STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 2 • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION work. In the event damage does occur, all damage shall be completely re- paired to its original condition at no additional cost to the Owner.3. Trenching: All trenching or other work under the leaf canopy of any and all trees shall be done by hand or by other methods so that no branches are damaged in any way. Trenching around existing plant material shall be done by hand so as to minimize root disturbance. Building, walks, walls, and other property shall be protected from damage. Open ditches left exposed shall be flagged and barricaded by the contractor by approved means. The contractor shall re- store disturbed areas to their original condition. 4. Protection and Repair of Underground Utilities: The contractor shall be re- sponsible for requesting the proper utility company to stake the exact loca- tion of any underground lines including but not limited to electric, gas, tele- phone, water and cable. The contractor shall take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. In the event damage does occur, all damage shall be completely repaired to its original condition, at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Private Utilities: The contractor shall request the Owner, in writing, to locate any private utilities (i.e., electrical service to outside lighting) before pro- ceeding with any excavation. If, after such requests and necessary staking, private utilities, which were not staked, are encountered and damaged by the contractor, they shall be repaired by the Owner at no cost to the con- tractor. If the contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired at the contractor's expense. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 32 9200 - Turf and Grasses B. Section 32 9300 - Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers C. Section 32 9301 - Landscape Preparation and Soil Mixes D. Section 32 9303 - Landscape Fine Grading E. Section 32 9305 - Landscape Maintenance 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irriga- tion subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, main line, system pressure, etc. as is indicated for this project. The contractor shall submit for the Owner's review and approval resumes of all irri- gation superintendents and foreman designated to perform the irrigation work and a list of five (5) projects with references with which he or she was involved; those projects must be of similar size and scope as this project. If the contrac- tor elects to use a subcontractor for this portion of the work, the sub -contractor shall have been in operation for a minimum of five (5) years, and licensed to work in the State of Florida. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject the proposed subcontractor or its designated personnel in whole or in part based on the information provided. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 3 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED, SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply including Sarasota County and City of Sarasota, Florida Building Code Appendix F, and policy / procedures for watering cross connec- tions, backflow prevention devices and reclaim water. C. The contractor shall be responsible for constructing the system in complete ac- cordance with all local codes, ordinances and laws. Any modifications made to conform to said codes, laws and ordinances shall be completed at the contrac- tor's expense with no additional compensation allowed. D. Protection of Existing Plants and Site Conditions: The contractor shall take necessary precautions to protect site conditions to remain. Should damages be incurred, this contractor shall repair the damage to its original condition at his own expense. Any disruption, destruction or disturbance of any existing plant, tree, shrub, or turf, or any structure shall be completely restored to the satisfac- tion of the Owner and his representatives, solely at the contractor's expense. E. Permits and Fees: Obtain all permits and pay required fees to any governmen- tal agency having jurisdiction over the work. Inspections required by local ordi- nances during the course of construction shall be arranged as required. On completion of the work, satisfactory evidence shall be furnished to Landscape Architect to show that all work has been installed in accordance with the ordi- nances and code requirements. F. Approval: Wherever the terms "approve", "approval", or "approved" are used in the specifications, they shall mean the approval of the Owner or Owner's Rep- resentative in writing. G. The Owner reserves the right to substitute, add or delete any material or work as the work progresses. Adjustment to the contract price shall be negotiated if deemed necessary by the Owner or Owner's Representative and shall be cred- ited or deducted to the contract sum according to the unit prices provided in this proposal. H. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to reject material or work, which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at contractor's expense. I. Final Acceptance: Final acceptance of the work may be obtained from the Owner upon the satisfactory completion of all work. Acceptance by the Land- scape Architect and/or Owner in no way removes the contractor of his respon- sibility to make further repairs, corrections and adjustments to eliminate any de- ficiencies which may later be discovered. J. Guarantee: All work shall be guaranteed for one year from date of acceptance against all defects in material, equipment and workmanship to the satisfaction STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 4 • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION of the Owner. Repairs, if required, shall be done promptly at no cost to the Owner. 1. The guarantee shall also cover repair of damage to any part of the premis- es resulting from leaks or other defects in material. The contractor shall not be responsible for work damaged by others. Repairs, if required, shall be done promptly. The guarantee shall state the name of the Owner, provide full guarantee terms, effective and termination date, name and license number of contractor providing guarantee, address and telephone number. It shall be signed by the chief executive of the contractor and notarized. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the contractor of his liability un- der the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee. 2. If, within (10) days after mailing of written notice by the Owner to the con- tractor requesting repairs or replacement resulting from a breach of warran- ty, the contractor shall neglect to make or undertake with due diligence to make the same, the Owner may make such repairs at the contractor's ex- pense; provided, however, that in the case of emergency where, in the judgment of the Owner, delay would cause serious loss or damage, repairs or replacement may be made without notice being sent to the contractor and contractor shall pay the cost thereof. K. The contractor shall provide full coverage in all irrigated areas and shall be re- sponsible for additional heads and components as required, installed at his own cost. L. Contractor shall make necessary adjustments in the layout as may be required to connect to existing stub outs, should such stubs not be located exactly as shown, and as may be required to work around existing work at no increase in cost to the Owner. M. On -Site Observation: At any time during the installation of the irrigation system by the contractor, the Owner or Landscape Architect may visit the site to ob- serve work underway. Upon request, the contractor shall be required to uncov- er specified work as directed by the Owner or Landscape Architect without compensation. Should the material, workmanship or method of installation not meet the standards specified herein, the contractor shall replace the work at his own expense. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications: Contractor shall be fully qualified to perform all required irrigation work. B. Work Schedule: Within 14 days after award of the contract, the contractor shall submit to the Owner a work schedule. C. Within 14 days after the award of the contract, the contractor shall provide cut sheets of all products specified or required for use necessary to provide the en- tire system outlined in the specifications. The cut sheets shall list manufacturer's STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 5 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION name, catalog name and catalog number as well as size, type and illustration of product to be supplied. The information shall be supplied to the Owner and Owner's Representative for approvals. Only when the Owner approves the con- tractor's supplied information shall the contractor begin construction and installa- tion of submitted items. D. All submittals shall be coordinated into one submittal and complied into a "note book" format with removable binder. Name of project, date and each product required shall be clearly highlighted on each separate product information cut sheet and labeled for each products intended use. Five separate copies of full submittal are required and shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Each pipe type and size (main, lateral, other). 2. Each wire type (electrical, communication, with color -coding). 3. Each controller and required components and accessories. 4. Each sprinkler type. 5. Each valve type/size (electric, coupler, gate, etc. 6. Each valve box type. 7. PVC cement and primer. 8. Backflow preventer. 9. List of personnel with qualifications. 10. Schedule of work. 11. As -built drawings with three (3) copies each of to scale hard copy plans and three (3) copies digital files on CD's (upon completion). 12. Maintenance Manual (upon completion). E. "As -Built" Irrigation Drawings: 1. Prepare an "As -Built" drawing in AutoCAD which shall show horizontal and vertical deviations from the bid documents made during construction affect- ing but not limited to the mainline pipe, controller locations, remote control valves, gate valves, quick -coupling valves and all sprinkler heads. Draw- ings shall indicate and show approved substitutions of size, material and manufacturer's name and catalog number. All piping shall be dimensioned and drawn to scale. Remote control valves and isolation valves shall have (2) measurements from fixed objects. All zone valves shall be labeled with accurate G.P.M. to establish correct flow zone data to be inserted into irri- gation program. Indicate control wire paths diagrammatically. 2. Store "As -Built" drawings apart from documents used for construction. 3. Maintain drawings in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record document for construction purposes. 4. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Landscape Archi- tect or Owner's Representative. 5. Label each document "AS -BUILT" in neat, large, printed letters or by rubber stamp. 6. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not con- ceal any work until required information is recorded. 7. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction and installation, in- cluding: a. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurte- nances referenced to permanent surface improvements. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 6 • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION b. Field changes of dimensions and detail. c. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. d. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 8. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark each Section to Record changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 9. Prior to contract closeout, the contractor shall deliver the complete set of red line drawings fully updated and containing the information outlined above to the Landscape Architect for review. Additionally, the contractor shall furnish three (3) to scale hard copies of "as -built" drawings and three (3) copies digitally in AutoCAD on CD's. These drawings shall be delivered to the Landscape Architect prior to his review for Substantial Completion of the work. 10. As -Built drawings shall be kept updated weekly and shall be reviewed by Owner or Owner's Representative during the course of the work. If during the course of the work the record documents are found substantially incor- rect or substantially behind the progress of the work, the Owner shall have the right to hold progress payments until said documents are brought to an acceptable level of completeness. 11. Accompany submittal of Record Documents with transmittal letter in dupli- cate, containing: a. Date b. Project title and number c. Contractor's name and address d. Title and number of each As -Built e. Signature of contractor or his authorized representative F. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Landscape Architect/Owner Representative within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone num- ber, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s). 2. Catalog and parts sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Owner's maintenance personnel with written and "hands-on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Land- scape Architect at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. General: All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect con- dition. After award of the contract and prior to beginning of work, the contractor STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 7 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION shall submit for approval to the Landscape Architect a complete list of materials that he proposes to install as outlined above in Section 1.03 Submittals. Quan- tities of materials and equipment need not be included. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, in- stalled, and tested in accordance with these specifications. Unless otherwise stated on the plans, all pipe fittings shall be capable of withstanding a sus- tained pressure of at least 125 PSI B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Schedule 40, Solvent Weld shall be used on all system pressurized main lines upstream of remote control zone valves. Pipe shall conform to ASTM D1785, Type 1 Grade 1. C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Class 200, SDR -21, Solvent Weld shall be used on all system lines down stream of remote control zone valves. Pipe shall con- form to ASTM D2241. D. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, etc. required shall be Polyvinyl Chlo- ride (PVC Pipe, Schedule 80). E. All pipe extensions for varied height shrub risers, PVC pipe sleeves under paved areas and any pipe direct buried under pavement shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Class 200, SDR -21. 2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All PVC fittings shall be Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM 2466. Fittings shall be of domestic manufacture. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. B. For Fittings on main line piping 3 in. and larger and 2 in. and larger under pav- ing: a. All bends, reducers, plugs and the opposite side of tee branches shall be bell -end ductile iron fittings for PVC pipe. b. Fittings shall be manufactured of ductile iron, grade 70-55-05 in accord with ASTM A536-84(2004). Fittings shall have deep bell push -on joints with gaskets meeting ASTM F477 -02e1. Fittings shall be HARCO DEEP BELL by The Harrington Corp. of Lynchburg, VA, Tel: (804) 845-7094, or Owner -approved equivalent 2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 8 • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Solvent weld cement shall be Plasti-Weld 303 with primer Plasti-Weld 903 Pur- ple Primer. C. All solvent weld joints must be primed (joints shall conform to ASTM D2855). 2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC Connections shall be made up using Teflon tape (no Teflon pipe dope allowed). B. All connections between mainline pipe fittings and automatic or manual control valves shall be made using Schedule 80 threaded fittings and nipples. 2.6 SWING JOINTS A. Swing joints from main lines to quick coupler valves shall be a triple PVC SCH. 80 swing joint, 315 PSI pressure rated. 2.7 FLEX PIPE A. 1/2" PVC (IPS) Spiral reinforced flex pi je. a minimum of 30" length of flex, to be used for (Black) whips on rotors and Pop -ups 2.8 PIPE AND WIRE SLEEVES A. Sleeves to be installed: 1. The contractor shall install irrigation system pipe and wire sleeves conform- ing to the following: a All pipe sleeves shall be of the size indicated on the drawings. If pipe sleeve sizes are not indicated on the drawings, the pipe sleeves shall have an inside diameter of at least 2" greater than the outside diameter of the pipe or wire bundle it is to hold. b. All pipe sleeves shall extend a minimum of 24" beyond the edges of pavement. c. All pipe sleeves less than or equal to 3" shall be schedule 40 PVC, pipe sleeves greater than 3" shall be PVC Class 200. d. All irrigation system wires shall be sleeved separately from main or lat- eral lines. e. All pipe sleeves shall be installed at the minimum depth specified for main lines, lateral lines, and electric wire. f. Contractor shall coordinate all pipe sleeve locations and depths prior to initiating installation of the irrigation system. 2.9 SPRINKLER HEADS STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 9 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION A. Pop-up Spray Heads: as designated on the drawings. B. Shrub Spray Heads: mounted above the mature height of the plant material. 2.10 CONTROLLERS: A. The irrigation system controller shall be as indicated on the plans. B. All controllers shall be equipped with a rain sensor device as indicated on the plans. C. All controllers to be properly grounded. 2.11 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valves shall be as indicated on the plan B. All valve solenoids shall be spliced to control wires with waterproof wire con- nectors. 2.12 VALVE BOXES A. For all gate valves and electric remote control valves and drip valve assembles, use Carson with T cover heavy duty plastic valve boxes (11.5" x 17" x 12"-18" deep). Use purple lids for non -potable water and green lids for potable water. Install as detailed on the drawings. C. For control wiring splices and gate valves use an Carson with T cover 10" round box and lid. Install as detailed on the drawings. D. Valve boxes shall be installed flush with finished grade as detailed on the draw- ings (except in beds, where they shall be installed 3" above finished grade to allow for mulch). Contractor shall assure percolation beneath the valve box by approved methods. Install gravel at all valve boxes as detailed. 2.13 IRRIGATION CONTROL WIRE A. All electrical control wire shall be Hunter ID1 wire two conductor, solid core, twisted, color -coded ed and blue, direct burial PE jacket 14 AWF/1.6 mm dia. copper wires. Suitable up to 5000 feet. or ID2 wire, or Hunter ID2 wire, two conductor, solid core, twisted, color coded red and blue, direct burial PE jacket 12 AWG/2.05 mm dia. Copper wires. Suitable up to 7500 feet. 1. Provide Dual S surge arrestors at the end of every two path and at intervals of 1000 feet or every twelfth decoder. 2. The final decoder in any wire run is to be grounded per manufacturers rec- ommendations and specifications. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 10 • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION 3. All wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M DBR/Y-6 water- proof wire connectors. All wire connections and wire splices shall occur in valve boxes. 2.14 GATE VALVES A. Gate valves shall be Resilient Seat type by Muller with wheel handle bronze body (ASTM A126, Class B), threaded joints, rising stem. 2.15 QUICK COUPLER VALVES A. Quick coupler valves shall be per the plan. Contractor will supply one (1) RainBird #33K Series quick coupler key and one (1) swivel hose ELL to the Owner for each 2 quick coupling valves installed. Quick couplers shall be located as specified on plans. All quick coupler valves shall be installed inside valve boxes and staked as detailed on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Layout of Mains and Laterals: Layout sprinkler mainlines and perform line ad- justments and site modifications to laterals prior to excavation. B. Coordinate all installation with landscape planting work, especially fine grading, and soil preparation for planting areas. C. Coordinate and cooperate with all other contractors to enable the work to pro- ceed as rapidly and efficiently as possible. D. Layout of Sprinkler Heads: Stake sprinkler head locations and check for uni- formity of coverage and correctness of pattern. E. Controller, Gate Valve, and Valve Location: Locate to assure ease of access for maintenance and that no physical interference with other elements of the project exist. F. Furnish temporary support, adequate protection and maintenance of all under- ground and surface utilities, structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work. G. Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during excavation, contractor shall promptly notify the Owner for instructions as to further actions. Failure to do so will make con- tractor liable for any and all damage thereto rising from his operations subse- quent to discovery of such utilities not shown in plan. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 11 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION H. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility struc- tures such as conduit, ducts, pipe branch connections to sewer mains, main drains, water services, etc., the obstruction shall be permanently supported, re- located, removed or reconstructed by the contractor in cooperation with the Owner of such utility. No deviation from the required line or grade shall be made without the written direction of the Owner's Representative. 3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall stake out the location of each run of pipe, sprinkler heads, and valves prior to trenching. B. Excavation shall be unclassified and shall include all materials whatsoever en- countered in the excavation of trenches for pipe installation. The trench shall be of sufficient width and depth for installation of the pipe as indicated herein. The contractor shall cause minimum disturbances to all existing conditions wherever possible; the contractor shall bore under existing pavement and sidewalks rather than cut and restore. No pavement shall be cut without the Owner's Representative's permission. C. Pipe shall be delivered and stored on the job site, out of direct sun light, with suitable protection against any damage to pipe and fittings. D. Trenches shall be made wide enough to allow a minimum of 4 inches between parallel pipe lines. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. No lateral line shall be made of sufficient depths to provide the minimum cover from finish grade as follows: 1. 20" minimum cover over main lines. 2. 18" minimum cover over control wires from controller to valves. 3. 12" minimum cover over lateral lines to heads. 4. Maintain all warning signs, shoring, barricades, flares and red lanterns as required by the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety and any local ordinances and codes. 5. Contractor shall install all mainlines with tracking wire / tape firmly attached throughout project. Leave 18" of excess cable at terminal ends in 6" round valve boxes. 6. All mainlines shall have 12" of backfill placed over first then a continuous length of Owner supplied identification tape placed by the Contractor prior to placing the remainder of the backfill over all pressurized mainlines. E. The pipe and fittings shall be carefully inspected before installation in the trench. All rocks over 2" diameter and unsuitable bearing material shall be re- moved from trench in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommenda- tions. 1. Solvent welded joints shall be made only on clean, dry, square cut, smooth pipe sections. The fittings shall be "dry" tested for proper size before sol- STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 12 • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION vent is applied. The assembly shall proceed in strict accordance with rec- ommended procedures furnished by the manufacturer. 2. Solvent welded pipe sections shall be "snaked" from side to side in the trench to prevent joint rupture due to thermal contraction. 3. Pipe openings shall be plugged during construction to prevent entrance of foreign materials. F. Backfill shall be carefully placed to avoid pipe dislocation. Backfill material shall be free of rocks, stumps, roots and other unsuitable material. In plant- ing areas, the top six inches (6") shall be suitable planting soil. Backfill shall be placed in six inch (6") lifts and shall be thoroughly compacted by mechani- cal tamping except in planting areas where planting soil is used. Backfill un- der pavement or sidewalks shall be compacted to 98% of maximum A.A.S.H.O. T-180 density. The surface of backfilled trenches shall be even with the surrounding ground surface. Plant locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and pipe locations. The contractor shall coordinate the routing of lines and final head locations with the placement of specimen trees and shrubs. 3.3 SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for the exact location of all sprinkler heads, ac- knowledging that the plans are schematic in nature. The contractor shall ac- cordingly place all sprinkler heads, adjust all nozzles, spray patterns, and make whatever other adjustments that may be required to give the landscaped areas full, complete and proper coverage and distribution, and to meet all manufac- turer's requirements. The contractor shall make all such adjustments and addi- tions solely at his expense. B. Sprinkler heads located along curbs and edges of paving shall be installed 6" from back of curb or paving; except along roadways without curbs, sprinkler heads shall be located 18" from edge of pavement. C. Sprinkler heads shall be installed as designated on the drawings. The top of all sprinkler heads shall be flush with finish grade or top of curb. * Where cars will overhang a curb move heads in from curb to clear car overhang. * D. All sprinkler head risers above finished grade shall be staked with as per draw- ing and painted with exterior alkyd enamel paint flat black. Contractor shall provide sample of paint to the Landscape Architect prior to installation. Use black UV approved wire ties only. E. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the minimum indicated on the drawings (un- less directed by the Landscape Architect). In no case shall the spacing exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer. F. Before sprinkler heads are set, the contractor shall flush the lines thoroughly to ensure there is no foreign matter in the lines. All flushing shall be accom- STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 13 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION plished to the satisfaction of a WDI representative or the Landscape Architect prior to installation of irrigation heads. 3.4 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for installing all automatic controllers located on the plans and details for the complete and proper automatic operation of the ir- rigation system. All such work shall be coordinated with the building and site contractors. Electric control valves shall be connected to controller in a clock- wise sequence to correspond with station settings noted on the plans beginning with Stations 1, 2, 3, etc. Electric source shall be provided by others. Contrac- tor shall be responsible for all connections, grounding, hook-ups, materials, la- bor, etc. for complete automatic operation according to all applicable codes. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Owner prior to installa- tion. B. All controllers shall be equipped with proper grounding. Grounding of 5 OHMS or less is required. If grounding rods will not give the 5 OHMS or less, 150' of bare #6 wire will be installed 8" to 12" depth into an irrigated area. This wire will be connected to the ground rod by a brass, single piece clamp. Wire used to connect equipment to grounding rod shall be one (1) size larger than largest wire used on the irrigation system (at same location), and connected with a brass, single piece clamp. 3.5 CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION A. Install control wires at least 18" below finish grade and lay to the side of the main line. Provide a minimum of 24" of looped wire slack at valves and snake wires in trench to allow for contraction of wires. Tie color -coded wires in bun- dles at 10' intervals. The wire shall be laid in the trench prior to the installation of the pipe. The wire must be beneath mainline pipe. B. All underground wire splices shall be made at electric valves in valve boxes, using waterproof connectors per manufacturer's instructions. C. All wire passing under existing or future paving or construction shall be en- cased in Schedule 40 PVC conduit extending at least 12" beyond edges of pav- ing and stabilized for construction. Any wire in plant beds shall be placed in 3/4" Class 160 PVC 18" minimum burial if the wire is not run with the mainline. Installation procedures shall conform to all local codes. 3.6 VALVE AND VALVE BOX INSTALLATION A. Gate Valves: Install as located and detailed on the drawings. B. Quick Coupling Valves: Shall be installed on main line pipe as indicated on the drawings. The connection between the main line and quick coupler valve shall be with a threaded Schedule 80 PVC pipe and a triple swing joint. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 14 • • • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION C. Electric Control Valves: Shall be installed in specified valve boxes at the depth specified on the drawings. The valve box shall have 6" layer of 3/4" pea gravel installed below the bottom of the valve. The valve shall be connected to the main line with Schedule 80 PVC extensions as necessary to ensure valve is properly positioned in the valve box as shown in the details. Electric control valves shall be installed where shown and grouped together where practical (NO MORE THAN 2 ITEMS PER SEVICE TEE). The contractor shall place no closer than 3 feet from edges of sidewalks walk edges, buildings and walls and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb along roadways or centerline of swales. The contractor shall adjust the valve to provide flow rate or rated oper- ating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. D. In the event that the valve box does not extend to the base of the electric con- trol valve because of specific field conditions or complications as verified and approved by the Owner prior to installation, the contractor shall provide and in- stall valve box extension(s) as manufactured by Carson. E. Install valve boxes in turf areas where possible. 3.7 PAINT A. Exterior enamel, flat black, shall be used on aboveground PVC risers and other designated irrigation equipment. Contractor shall provide paint sample prior to execution of painting. 3.8 TESTING A. The contractor shall notify Landscape Architect and Owner seventy-two (72) hours in advance of testing. B. Prior to backfilling of mainline fittings, contractor shall fill the main line piping with water, in the presence of the Owner/Architect, taking care to purge the air from it by operating all the sprinkler control valves one or more times and/or such other means as may be necessary. Maintain Static Line Pressure in the Main Line system for two (2) hours without interruption. When this has been accomplished and while the pressure in the system is still at Static Line Pres- sure, leakage testing shall be performed in accordance with AWWA Standard C-600 (i.e., length of mainline (x) diameter of pipe in inches (x) square root of average test pressure divided by the constant of 133,200 (=) allowable leakage of pipe plus number of valves tested against (x) diameter of pipe in inches (x) constant 0.0078 (=) allowable leakage of valves for total of gallons per hours). 1. Mainline line formula "Q" : S x D x the square root of P divided by 133,200 = allowable leakage in gallons per hour. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 15 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION 2. Valve Formula "V" = 0.0078 x V x D= allowable leakage in gallons per hour. D = Diameter pipe (inches) S = Length pipe (feet) P = Average test pressure (PSI) V = Number of valves tested against (EA) 3. Pressure readings shall be noted and make up water usage shall be rec- orded. Should the rate of makeup water usage indicate significant leakage, the source of such leakage shall be found and corrected and the system then re -tested until the Owner/Landscape Architect is satisfied that the sys- tem is reasonably sound. 4. Lateral line testing shall be conducted during the operating testing of the system by checking visually the ground surface until no leaks in this portion of the system are evident. Leaks shall be repaired or paid for by the con- tractor at any time they appear during the warranty period. C. Adjustment and Coverage of System: Coordinate pressure testing with adjust- ments and coverage test of system so both may occur at the same time. The contractor shall balance and adjust the various components of the system so that the overall operation of the system is most efficient. This includes a syn- chronization of the controllers, adjustments to pressure regulators, pressure re- lief valves, part circle sprinkler heads, and individual station adjustments of the controllers. D. All items of construction and operation of the irrigation system are subject to the inspection and testing by the Landscape Architect and other representa- tives of the Owner. Any item may be rejected because of non-compliance with the plans and specifications, non -suitability, poor materials, inadequate work- manship or improper assembly or other causes which would prevent the sys- tem from functioning properly, or which in the Landscape Architect's opinion would be detrimental to the longevity of the irrigation system, or which would necessitate excessive manual labor and maintenance. E. The contractor shall fully comply with the schedule of testing and inspection, as well as any other tests or inspections that may be ordered by the Landscape Architect or other authorized representative of the Owner. All labor, materials, and equipment required for said tests and inspections shall be furnished at the sole expense of the contractor. Work stoppages for testing, inspection and re- placement or repair of any inadequate item shall not add to the allocated time of completion. F. All repairs, replacements, adjustments and reconstruction required to pass said inspections and tests shall be at the contractor's sole expense. G. Contractor shall be responsible for the full and proper maintenance of the irri- gation including but not limited to adjustments, repairs, integration with the master control system, etc. Contractor's responsibility for maintenance (exclu- STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 16 • • • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION sive of replacements or repairs within the guarantee/warranty period) shall ter- minate on the date of Substantial Completion for the entire project or designat- ed portion thereof as declared by the Landscape Architect according to the conditions of the contract, provided the contractor has provided the Landscape Architect with irrigation 'as -built' drawings, red line drawings, CAD files, and three (3) copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified under Paragraph 1.05 of this section. H. Test of all grounding systems shall measure 5 OHMS or less when measured with vibra sound equipment. All testing to be at contractor's expense, by neu- tral company, with OHMs readings for each grounding field given to Owner at completion. I. Final inspection shall be made when the complete system is in place, operable, and all repairs, additions, adjustments and other work is complete. At such time, the contractor shall adequately demonstrate the proper operation of the system, shall show the system's complete conformance with the plans and specifications, and demonstrate that the irrigation system gives proper and ad- equate coverage of all landscaped areas. J. Final acceptance by the Landscape Architect and/or Owner in no way removes the contractor of his responsibility to make further repairs, corrections and ad- justments to eliminate any deficiencies which may later be discovered (includes moving or adding additional sprinklers if needed). Moreover, the contractor shall fully honor the one (1) year warranty outlined herein. 3.9 WARRANTY A. The contractor shall fully warrant the landscape irrigation system for a period of one (1) year after the written final acceptance and will receive a written confir- mation from the Landscape Architect that the warranty period is in effect. B. During the warranty period, the contractor will enforce all manufacturers and suppliers warranties as if made by the contractor himself. Any malfunctions, deficiencies, breaks, damages, disrepair, or other disorder due to materials, workmanship, or installation by the contractor and his suppliers shall be imme- diately and properly corrected to the proper order as directed by the Owner and/or Landscape Architect. C. Any damages caused by system malfunction shall be the responsibility of the contractor who shall make full and immediate restoration for said damages. END OF SECTION 32 84 00 STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 17 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the Underground Sprinkler System work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, except as for items specifically indicated as "NIC ITEMS". B. The completed and proper construction of the landscape irrigation system in- cluding, but not limited to: 1. All piping, including mains, laterals, fittings, sleeves, connections, tees, ris- ers, clamps, and swing joints. 2. All control, gate, globe, pressure reducing, quick coupling and other valves; including valve boxes, markers, connections, operators and other accesso- ries. 3. Connection to automatic control system as shown on plans, including con- trol wiring low voltage connections and electrical and communication wire connections, conduit, and coordination of 120V electrical. 4. All rotating and stationary spray and bubbler sprinkler heads; including proper nozzles as called for herein and shown on the plans and all other appurtenances and accessories for proper operations. 5. Connection of piping to the supply sources as shown on the plans. 6. All excavation, site work, relocation or replacement of utilities, backfill, compaction and restoration of all disturbed areas. 7. The contractor shall be responsible for providing a complete and operable system for the irrigation of all areas to be landscaped on the project site. The plans and these specifications are intended to include all items obvi- ously necessary and requisite for the proper irrigation of the project. This in no way relieves the contractor of his responsibility to furnish any additional labor, materials and equipment required for a proper system. 8. The contractor shall be responsible for adjusting head location, type and size, and any other system components to comply with the requirements of landscaping as actually intended. Such adjustments shall be made at no cost to the Owner except for, when authorized in writing, such adjustments which will be compensated at an agreed upon price. 9. The contractor shall supply, deliver, store, and protect all equipment and materials including pipe and fittings, sprinkler heads, valves, controllers, wire, and all other component parts necessary for the installation of a fully automatic irrigation system as indicated in the plans and specifications. Adequate security of materials on site shall be provided by the contractor at all times at his expense. C. Explanation of Drawings: 1. Due to the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fit- tings, sleeves, etc. which may be required. The contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all of the work and STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 1 • • • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION plan his work accordingly, furnishing such offsets, fittings, and sleeves as may be required to meet such conditions. 2. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, underground utilities, plantings, and architec- tural features. Deviations shall be brought to the Landscape Architect's at- tention. 3. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. 4. The contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been known in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect. In the event that notification is not per- formed, the contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision nec- essary. 5. Explanation of Drawings: Conflicts between the plans, notes, details or specifications shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Land- scape Architect. These discrepancies or conflicts shall be interpreted by the Landscape Architect and his decision shall be final in all cases. Should the contractor fail to notify the Landscape Architect of the conflict(s) and by so, take advantage of the said discrepancy, the Contractor shall be held re- sponsible for making any and all changes as directed by the Landscape Ar- chitect with no compensation for extra labor, material or equipment. 6. The contractor shall prior to trenching, verify the location of all underground utilities as are commonly encountered underground. He shall take proper precaution not to damage or disturb said improvements. 7. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, the labor furnished by the con- tractor is incompetent, unskilled, or unreliable, his equipment inadequate, improper or unsafe, or if the contractor shall fail to continuously and dili- gently execute the construction, the Landscape Architect or Owner shall, in writing, instruct the contractor to remove all such causes of noncompliance and the contractor shall promptly comply. 8. The contractor shall be responsible for full and complete coverage of all ir- rigation areas. The Landscape Architect shall be notified of any necessary adjustments to the irrigation system. Any revisions to the irrigation system must be submitted and answered in written form, along with any change in contract price. D. On -Site Conditions: 1. Inspection of the Site: The contractor shall acquaint himself with all on-site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the drawings be found during ex- cavations, the contractor shall promptly notify the Owner for instructions as to further action. Failure to do so will make the contractor liable for any and all damage thereto arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on the drawings. 2. Protection of Property: The contractor shall be responsible for the preserva- tion and protection of all site conditions to remain from damage due to this STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 2 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION work. In the event damage does occur, all damage shall be completely re- paired to its original condition at no additional cost to the Owner.3. Trenching: All trenching or other work under the leaf canopy of any and all trees shall be done by hand or by other methods so that no branches are damaged in any way. Trenching around existing plant material shall be done by hand so as to minimize root disturbance. Building, walks, walls, and other property shall be protected from damage. Open ditches left exposed shall be flagged and barricaded by the contractor by approved means. The contractor shall re- store disturbed areas to their original condition. 4. Protection and Repair of Underground Utilities: The contractor shall be re- sponsible for requesting the proper utility company to stake the exact loca- tion of any underground lines including but not limited to electric, gas, tele- phone, water and cable. The contractor shall take whatever precautions are necessary to protect these underground lines from damage. In the event damage does occur, all damage shall be completely repaired to its original condition, at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. Private Utilities: The contractor shall request the Owner, in writing, to locate any private utilities (i.e., electrical service to outside lighting) before pro- ceeding with any excavation. If, after such requests and necessary staking, private utilities, which were not staked, are encountered and damaged by the contractor, they shall be repaired by the Owner at no cost to the con- tractor. If the contractor damages staked or located utilities, they shall be repaired at the contractor's expense. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 32 9200 - Turf and Grasses B. Section 32 9300 - Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers C. Section 32 9301 - Landscape Preparation and Soil Mixes D. Section 32 9303 - Landscape Fine Grading E. Section 32 9305 - Landscape Maintenance 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irriga- tion subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, main line, system pressure, etc. as is indicated for this project. The contractor shall submit for the Owner's review and approval resumes of all irri- gation superintendents and foreman designated to perform the irrigation work and a list of five (5) projects with references with which he or she was involved; those projects must be of similar size and scope as this project. If the contrac- tor elects to use a subcontractor for this portion of the work, the sub -contractor shall have been in operation for a minimum of five (5) years, and licensed to work in the State of Florida. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject the proposed subcontractor or its designated personnel in whole or in part based on the information provided. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 3 • • • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED, SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply including Sarasota County and City of Sarasota, Florida Building Code Appendix F, and policy / procedures for watering cross connec- tions, backflow prevention devices and reclaim water. C. The contractor shall be responsible for constructing the system in complete ac- cordance with all local codes, ordinances and laws. Any modifications made to conform to said codes, laws and ordinances shall be completed at the contrac- tor's expense with no additional compensation allowed. D. Protection of Existing Plants and Site Conditions: The contractor shall take necessary precautions to protect site conditions to remain. Should damages be incurred, this contractor shall repair the damage to its original condition at his own expense. Any disruption, destruction or disturbance of any existing plant, tree, shrub, or turf, or any structure shall be completely restored to the satisfac- tion of the Owner and his representatives, solely at the contractor's expense. E. Permits and Fees: Obtain all permits and pay required fees to any governmen- tal agency having jurisdiction over the work. Inspections required by local ordi- nances during the course of construction shall be arranged as required. On completion of the work, satisfactory evidence shall be furnished to Landscape Architect to show that all work has been installed in accordance with the ordi- nances and code requirements. F. Approval: Wherever the terms "approve", "approval", or "approved" are used in the specifications, they shall mean the approval of the Owner or Owner's Rep- resentative in writing. G. The Owner reserves the right to substitute, add or delete any material or work as the work progresses. Adjustment to the contract price shall be negotiated if deemed necessary by the Owner or Owner's Representative and shall be cred- ited or deducted to the contract sum according to the unit prices provided in this proposal. H. The Owner or Owner's Representative reserves the right to reject material or work, which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at contractor's expense. I. Final Acceptance: Final acceptance of the work may be obtained from the Owner upon the satisfactory completion of all work. Acceptance by the Land- scape Architect and/or Owner in no way removes the contractor of his respon- sibility to make further repairs, corrections and adjustments to eliminate any de- ficiencies which may later be discovered. J. Guarantee: All work shall be guaranteed for one year from date of acceptance against all defects in material, equipment and workmanship to the satisfaction STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 4 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION of the Owner. Repairs, if required, shall be done promptly at no cost to the Owner. 1. The guarantee shall also cover repair of damage to any part of the premis- es resulting from Teaks or other defects in material. The contractor shall not be responsible for work damaged by others. Repairs, if required, shall be done promptly. The guarantee shall state the name of the Owner, provide full guarantee terms, effective and termination date, name and license number of contractor providing guarantee, address and telephone number. It shall be signed by the chief executive of the contractor and notarized. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the contractor of his liability un- der the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee. 2. If, within (10) days after mailing of written notice by the Owner to the con- tractor requesting repairs or replacement resulting from a breach of warran- ty, the contractor shall neglect to make or undertake with due diligence to make the same, the Owner may make such repairs at the contractor's ex- pense; provided, however, that in the case of emergency where, in the judgment of the Owner, delay would cause serious loss or damage, repairs or replacement may be made without notice being sent to the contractor and contractor shall pay the cost thereof. K. The contractor shall provide full coverage in all irrigated areas and shall be re- sponsible for additional heads and components as required, installed at his own cost. L. Contractor shall make necessary adjustments in the layout as may be required to connect to existing stub outs, should such stubs not be located exactly as shown, and as may be required to work around existing work at no increase in cost to the Owner. M. On -Site Observation: At any time during the installation of the irrigation system by the contractor, the Owner or Landscape Architect may visit the site to ob- serve work underway. Upon request, the contractor shall be required to uncov- er specified work as directed by the Owner or Landscape Architect without compensation. Should the material, workmanship or method of installation not meet the standards specified herein, the contractor shall replace the work at his own expense. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Qualifications: Contractor shall be fully qualified to perform all required irrigation work. B. Work Schedule: Within 14 days after award of the contract, the contractor shall submit to the Owner a work schedule. C. Within 14 days after the award of the contract, the contractor shall provide cut sheets of all products specified or required for use necessary to provide the en- tire system outlined in the specifications. The cut sheets shall list manufacturer's STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 5 • • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION name, catalog name and catalog number as well as size, type and illustration of product to be supplied. The information shall be supplied to the Owner and Owner's Representative for approvals. Only when the Owner approves the con- tractor's supplied information shall the contractor begin construction and installa- tion of submitted items. D. All submittals shall be coordinated into one submittal and complied into a "note book" format with removable binder. Name of project, date and each product required shall be clearly highlighted on each separate product information cut sheet and labeled for each products intended use. Five separate copies of full submittal are required and shall include but not limited to the following: 1. Each pipe type and size (main, lateral, other). 2. Each wire type (electrical, communication, with color -coding). 3. Each controller and required components and accessories. 4. Each sprinkler type. 5. Each valve type/size (electric, coupler, gate, etc. 6. Each valve box type. 7. PVC cement and primer. 8. Backflow preventer. 9. List of personnel with qualifications. 10. Schedule of work. 11. As -built drawings with three (3) copies each of to scale hard copy plans and three (3) copies digital files on CD's (upon completion). 12. Maintenance Manual (upon completion). E. "As -Built" Irrigation Drawings: 1. Prepare an "As -Built" drawing in AutoCAD which shall show horizontal and vertical deviations from the bid documents made during construction affect- ing but not limited to the mainline pipe, controller locations, remote control valves, gate valves, quick -coupling valves and all sprinkler heads. Draw- ings shall indicate and show approved substitutions of size, material and manufacturer's name and catalog number. All piping shall be dimensioned and drawn to scale. Remote control valves and isolation valves shall have (2) measurements from fixed objects. All zone valves shall be labeled with accurate G.P.M. to establish correct flow zone data to be inserted into irri- gation program. Indicate control wire paths diagrammatically. 2. Store "As -Built" drawings apart from documents used for construction. 3. Maintain drawings in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record document for construction purposes. 4. Make documents available at all times for inspection by Landscape Archi- tect or Owner's Representative. 5. Label each document "AS -BUILT" in neat, large, printed letters or by rubber stamp. 6. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not con- ceal any work until required information is recorded. 7. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction and installation, in- cluding: a. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurte- nances referenced to permanent surface improvements. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 6 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION b. Field changes of dimensions and detail. c. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. d. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 8. Specifications and Addenda: Legibly mark each Section to Record changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 9. Prior to contract closeout, the contractor shall deliver the complete set of red line drawings fully updated and containing the information outlined above to the Landscape Architect for review. Additionally, the contractor shall furnish three (3) to scale hard copies of "as -built" drawings and three (3) copies digitally in AutoCAD on CD's. These drawings shall be delivered to the Landscape Architect prior to his review for Substantial Completion of the work. 10. As -Built drawings shall be kept updated weekly and shall be reviewed by Owner or Owner's Representative during the course of the work. If during the course of the work the record documents are found substantially incor- rect or substantially behind the progress of the work, the Owner shall have the right to hold progress payments until said documents are brought to an acceptable level of completeness. 11. Accompany submittal of Record Documents with transmittal letter in dupli- cate, containing: a. Date b. Project title and number c. Contractor's name and address d. Title and number of each As -Built e. Signature of contractor or his authorized representative F. Operations and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Landscape Architect/Owner Representative within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone num- ber, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s). 2. Catalog and parts sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Owner's maintenance personnel with written and "hands-on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Land- scape Architect at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. General: All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect con- dition. After award of the contract and prior to beginning of work, the contractor STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 7 • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION shall submit for approval to the Landscape Architect a complete list of materials that he proposes to install as outlined above in Section 1.03 Submittals. Quan- tities of materials and equipment need not be included. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, in- stalled, and tested in accordance with these specifications. Unless otherwise stated on the plans, all pipe fittings shall be capable of withstanding a sus- tained pressure of at least 125 PSI B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Schedule 40, Solvent Weld shall be used on all system pressurized main lines upstream of remote control zone valves. Pipe shall conform to ASTM D1785, Type 1 Grade 1. C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe Class 200, SDR -21, Solvent Weld shall be used on all system lines down stream of remote control zone valves. Pipe shall con- form to ASTM D2241. D. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, etc. required shall be Polyvinyl Chlo- ride (PVC Pipe, Schedule 80). E. All pipe extensions for varied height shrub risers, PVC pipe sleeves under paved areas and any pipe direct buried under pavement shall be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Class 200, SDR -21. 2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All PVC fittings shall be Schedule 40 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) conforming to ASTM D1784 and ASTM 2466. Fittings shall be of domestic manufacture. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. B. For Fittings on main line piping 3 in. and larger and 2 in. and larger under pav- ing: a. All bends, reducers, plugs and the opposite side of tee branches shall be bell -end ductile iron fittings for PVC pipe. b. Fittings shall be manufactured of ductile iron, grade 70-55-05 in accord with ASTM A536-84(2004). Fittings shall have deep bell push -on joints with gaskets meeting ASTM F477 -02e1. Fittings shall be HARCO DEEP BELL by The Harrington Corp. of Lynchburg, VA, Tel: (804) 845-7094, or Owner -approved equivalent 2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 8 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Solvent weld cement shall be Plasti-Weld 303 with primer Plasti-Weld 903 Pur- ple Primer. C. All solvent weld joints must be primed (joints shall conform to ASTM D2855). 2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC Connections shall be made up using Teflon tape (no Teflon pipe dope allowed). B. All connections between mainline pipe fittings and automatic or manual control valves shall be made using Schedule 80 threaded fittings and nipples. 2.6 SWING JOINTS A. Swing joints from main lines to quick coupler valves shall be a triple PVC SCH. 80 swing joint, 315 PSI pressure rated. 2.7 FLEX PIPE A. 1/2" PVC (IPS) Spiral reinforced flex pipe: a minimum of 30" length of flex, to be used for (Black) whips on rotors and Pop -ups 2.8 PIPE AND WIRE SLEEVES A. Sleeves to be installed: 1. The contractor shall install irrigation system pipe and wire sleeves conform- ing to the following: a All pipe sleeves shall be of the size indicated on the drawings. If pipe sleeve sizes are not indicated on the drawings, the pipe sleeves shall have an inside diameter of at least 2" greater than the outside diameter of the pipe or wire bundle it is to hold. b. All pipe sleeves shall extend a minimum of 24" beyond the edges of pavement. c. All pipe sleeves less than or equal to 3" shall be schedule 40 PVC, pipe sleeves greater than 3" shall be PVC Class 200. d. All irrigation system wires shall be sleeved separately from main or lat- eral lines. e. All pipe sleeves shall be installed at the minimum depth specified for main lines, lateral lines, and electric wire. f. Contractor shall coordinate all pipe sleeve locations and depths prior to initiating installation of the irrigation system. 2.9 SPRINKLER HEADS STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 9 • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION A. Pop-up Spray Heads: as designated on the drawings. B. Shrub Spray Heads: mounted above the mature height of the plant material. 2.10 CONTROLLERS: A. The irrigation system controller shall be as indicated on the plans. B. All controllers shall be equipped with a rain sensor device as indicated on the plans. C. All controllers to be properly grounded. 2.11 ELECTRIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valves shall be as indicated on the plan B. All valve solenoids shall be spliced to control wires with waterproof wire con- nectors. 2.12 VALVE BOXES A. For all gate valves and electric remote control valves and drip valve assembles, use Carson with T cover heavy duty plastic valve boxes (11.5" x 17" x 12"-18" deep). Use purple lids for non -potable water and green lids for potable water. Install as detailed on the drawings. C. For control wiring splices and gate valves use an Carson with T cover 10" round box and lid. Install as detailed on the drawings. D. Valve boxes shall be installed flush with finished grade as detailed on the draw- ings (except in beds, where they shall be installed 3" above finished grade to allow for mulch). Contractor shall assure percolation beneath the valve box by approved methods. Install gravel at all valve boxes as detailed. 2.13 IRRIGATION CONTROL WIRE A. All electrical control wire shall be Hunter ID1 wire two conductor, solid core, twisted, color -coded ed and blue, direct burial PE jacket 14 AWF/1.6 mm dia. copper wires. Suitable up to 5000 feet. or ID2 wire, or Hunter ID2 wire, two conductor, solid core, twisted, color coded red and blue, direct burial PE jacket 12 AWG/2.05 mm dia. Copper wires. Suitable up to 7500 feet. 1. Provide Dual S surge arrestors at the end of every two path and at intervals of 1000 feet or every twelfth decoder. 2. The final decoder in any wire run is to be grounded per manufacturers rec- ommendations and specifications. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 10 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION 3. All wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M DBR/Y-6 water- proof wire connectors. All wire connections and wire splices shall occur in valve boxes. 2.14 GATE VALVES A. Gate valves shall be Resilient Seat type by Muller with wheel handle bronze body (ASTM A126, Class B), threaded joints, rising stem. 2.15 QUICK COUPLER VALVES A. Quick coupler valves shall be per the plan. Contractor will supply one (1) RainBird #33K Series quick coupler key and one (1) swivel hose ELL to the Owner for each 2 quick coupling valves installed. Quick couplers shall be located as specified on plans. All quick coupler valves shall be installed inside valve boxes and staked as detailed on the drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Layout of Mains and Laterals: Layout sprinkler mainlines and perform line ad- justments and site modifications to laterals prior to excavation. B. Coordinate all installation with landscape planting work, especially fine grading, and soil preparation for planting areas. C. Coordinate and cooperate with all other contractors to enable the work to pro- ceed as rapidly and efficiently as possible. D. Layout of Sprinkler Heads: Stake sprinkler head locations and check for uni- formity of coverage and correctness of pattern. E. Controller, Gate Valve, and Valve Location: Locate to assure ease of access for maintenance and that no physical interference with other elements of the project exist. F. Furnish temporary support, adequate protection and maintenance of all under- ground and surface utilities, structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the work. G. Contractor shall acquaint himself with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found during excavation, contractor shall promptly notify the Owner for instructions as to further actions. Failure to do so will make con- tractor liable for any and all damage thereto rising from his operations subse- quent to discovery of such utilities not shown in plan. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 11 • • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION H. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility struc- tures such as conduit, ducts, pipe branch connections to sewer mains, main drains, water services, etc., the obstruction shall be permanently supported, re- located, removed or reconstructed by the contractor in cooperation with the Owner of such utility. No deviation from the required line or grade shall be made without the written direction of the Owner's Representative. 3.2 PIPE INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall stake out the location of each run of pipe, sprinkler heads, and valves prior to trenching. B. Excavation shall be unclassified and shall include all materials whatsoever en- countered in the excavation of trenches for pipe installation. The trench shall be of sufficient width and depth for installation of the pipe as indicated herein. The contractor shall cause minimum disturbances to all existing conditions wherever possible; the contractor shall bore under existing pavement and sidewalks rather than cut and restore. No pavement shall be cut without the Owner's Representative's permission. C. Pipe shall be delivered and stored on the job site, out of direct sun light, with suitable protection against any damage to pipe and fittings. D. Trenches shall be made wide enough to allow a minimum of 4 inches between parallel pipe lines. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over one another. No lateral line shall be made of sufficient depths to provide the minimum cover from finish grade as follows: 1. 20" minimum cover over main lines. 2. 18" minimum cover over control wires from controller to valves. 3. 12" minimum cover over lateral lines to heads. 4. Maintain all warning signs, shoring, barricades, flares and red lanterns as required by the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety and any local ordinances and codes. 5. Contractor shall install all mainlines with tracking wire / tape firmly attached throughout project. Leave 18" of excess cable at terminal ends in 6" round valve boxes. 6. All mainlines shall have 12" of backfill placed over first then a continuous length of Owner supplied identification tape placed by the Contractor prior to placing the remainder of the backfill over all pressurized mainlines. E. The pipe and fittings shall be carefully inspected before installation in the trench. All rocks over 2" diameter and unsuitable bearing material shall be re- moved from trench in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommenda- tions. 1. Solvent welded joints shall be made only on clean, dry, square cut, smooth pipe sections. The fittings shall be "dry" tested for proper size before sol- STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 12 32 84 00 - 12 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION vent is applied. The assembly shall proceed in strict accordance with rec- ommended procedures furnished by the manufacturer. 2. Solvent welded pipe sections shall be "snaked" from side to side in the trench to prevent joint rupture due to thermal contraction. 3. Pipe openings shall be plugged during construction to prevent entrance of foreign materials. F. Backfill shall be carefully placed to avoid pipe dislocation. Backfill material shall be free of rocks, stumps, roots and other unsuitable material. In plant- ing areas, the top six inches (6") shall be suitable planting soil. Backfill shall be placed in six inch (6") lifts and shall be thoroughly compacted by mechani- cal tamping except in planting areas where planting soil is used. Backfill un- der pavement or sidewalks shall be compacted to 98% of maximum A.A.S.H.O. T-180 density. The surface of backfilled trenches shall be even with the surrounding ground surface. Plant locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and pipe locations. The contractor shall coordinate the routing of lines and final head locations with the placement of specimen trees and shrubs. 3.3 SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for the exact location of all sprinkler heads, ac- knowledging that the plans are schematic in nature. The contractor shall ac- cordingly place all sprinkler heads, adjust all nozzles, spray patterns, and make whatever other adjustments that may be required to give the landscaped areas full, complete and proper coverage and distribution, and to meet all manufac- turer's requirements. The contractor shall make all such adjustments and addi- tions solely at his expense. B. Sprinkler heads located along curbs and edges of paving shall be installed 6" from back of curb or paving; except along roadways without curbs, sprinkler heads shall be located 18" from edge of pavement. C. Sprinkler heads shall be installed as designated on the drawings. The top of all sprinkler heads shall be flush with finish grade or top of curb. * Where cars will overhang a curb move heads in from curb to clear car overhang. * D. All sprinkler head risers above finished grade shall be staked with as per draw- ing and painted with exterior alkyd enamel paint flat black. Contractor shall provide sample of paint to the Landscape Architect prior to installation. Use black UV approved wire ties only. E. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the minimum indicated on the drawings (un- less directed by the Landscape Architect). In no case shall the spacing exceed the maximum recommended by the manufacturer. F. Before sprinkler heads are set, the contractor shall flush the lines thoroughly to ensure there is no foreign matter in the lines. All flushing shall be accom- STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 13 • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION plished to the satisfaction of a WDI representative or the Landscape Architect prior to installation of irrigation heads. 3.4 CONTROLLER INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall be responsible for installing all automatic controllers located on the plans and details for the complete and proper automatic operation of the ir- rigation system. All such work shall be coordinated with the building and site contractors. Electric control valves shall be connected to controller in a clock- wise sequence to correspond with station settings noted on the plans beginning with Stations 1, 2, 3, etc. Electric source shall be provided by others. Contrac- tor shall be responsible for all connections, grounding, hook-ups, materials, la- bor, etc. for complete automatic operation according to all applicable codes. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Owner prior to installa- tion. B. All controllers shall be equipped with proper grounding. Grounding of 5 OHMS or less is required. If grounding rods will not give the 5 OHMS or less, 150' of bare #6 wire will be installed 8" to 12" depth into an irrigated area. This wire will be connected to the ground rod by a brass, single piece clamp. Wire used to connect equipment to grounding rod shall be one (1) size larger than largest wire used on the irrigation system (at same location), and connected with a brass, single piece clamp. 3.5 CONTROL WIRE INSTALLATION • A. Install control wires at least 18" below finish grade and lay to the side of the main line. Provide a minimum of 24" of looped wire slack at valves and snake wires in trench to allow for contraction of wires. Tie color -coded wires in bun- dles at 10' intervals. The wire shall be laid in the trench prior to the installation of the pipe. The wire must be beneath mainline pipe. • B. All underground wire splices shall be made at electric valves in valve boxes, using waterproof connectors per manufacturer's instructions. C. All wire passing under existing or future paving or construction shall be en- cased in Schedule 40 PVC conduit extending at least 12" beyond edges of pav- ing and stabilized for construction. Any wire in plant beds shall be placed in 3/4" Class 160 PVC 18" minimum burial if the wire is not run with the mainline. Installation procedures shall conform to all local codes. 3.6 VALVE AND VALVE BOX INSTALLATION A. Gate Valves: Install as located and detailed on the drawings. B. Quick Coupling Valves: Shall be installed on main line pipe as indicated on the drawings. The connection between the main line and quick coupler valve shall be with a threaded Schedule 80 PVC pipe and a triple swing joint. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 14 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION C. Electric Control Valves: Shall be installed in specified valve boxes at the depth specified on the drawings. The valve box shall have 6" layer of 3/4" pea gravel installed below the bottom of the valve. The valve shall be connected to the main line with Schedule 80 PVC extensions as necessary to ensure valve is properly positioned in the valve box as shown in the details. Electric control valves shall be installed where shown and grouped together where practical (NO MORE THAN 2 ITEMS PER SEVICE TEE). The contractor shall place no closer than 3 feet from edges of sidewalks walk edges, buildings and walls and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb along roadways or centerline of swales. The contractor shall adjust the valve to provide flow rate or rated oper- ating pressure required for each sprinkler circuit. D. In the event that the valve box does not extend to the base of the electric con- trol valve because of specific field conditions or complications as verified and approved by the Owner prior to installation, the contractor shall provide and in- stall valve box extension(s) as manufactured by Carson. E. Install valve boxes in turf areas where possible. 3.7 PAINT A. Exterior enamel, flat black, shall be used on aboveground PVC risers and other designated irrigation equipment. Contractor shall provide paint sample prior to execution of painting. 3.8 TESTING A. The contractor shall notify Landscape Architect and Owner seventy-two (72) hours in advance of testing. B. Prior to backfilling of mainline fittings, contractor shall fill the main line piping with water, in the presence of the Owner/Architect, taking care to purge the air from it by operating all the sprinkler control valves one or more times and/or such other means as may be necessary. Maintain Static Line Pressure in the Main Line system for two (2) hours without interruption. When this has been accomplished and while the pressure in the system is still at Static Line Pres- sure, leakage testing shall be performed in accordance with AWWA Standard C-600 (i.e., length of mainline (x) diameter of pipe in inches (x) square root of average test pressure divided by the constant of 133,200 (=) allowable leakage of pipe plus number of valves tested against (x) diameter of pipe in inches (x) constant 0.0078 (=) allowable leakage of valves for total of gallons per hours). 1. Mainline line formula "Q" : S x D x the square root of P divided by 133,200 = allowable leakage in gallons per hour. STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 15 • • • • • • SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION 2. Valve Formula "V" = 0.0078 x V x D = allowable leakage in gallons per hour. D = Diameter pipe (inches) S = Length pipe (feet) P = Average test pressure (PSI) V = Number of valves tested against (EA) 3. Pressure readings shall be noted and make up water usage shall be rec- orded. Should the rate of makeup water usage indicate significant leakage, the source of such leakage shall be found and corrected and the system then re -tested until the Owner/Landscape Architect is satisfied that the sys- tem is reasonably sound. 4. Lateral line testing shall be conducted during the operating testing of the system by checking visually the ground surface until no leaks in this portion of the system are evident. Leaks shall be repaired or paid for by the con- tractor at any time they appear during the warranty period. C. Adjustment and Coverage of System: Coordinate pressure testing with adjust- ments and coverage test of system so both may occur at the same time. The contractor shall balance and adjust the various components of the system so that the overall operation of the system is most efficient. This includes a syn- chronization of the controllers, adjustments to pressure regulators, pressure re- lief valves, part circle sprinkler heads, and individual station adjustments of the controllers. D. All items of construction and operation of the irrigation system are subject to the inspection and testing by the Landscape Architect and other representa- tives of the Owner. Any item may be rejected because of non-compliance with the plans and specifications, non -suitability, poor materials, inadequate work- manship or improper assembly or other causes which would prevent the sys- tem from functioning properly, or which in the Landscape Architect's opinion would be detrimental to the longevity of the irrigation system, or which would necessitate excessive manual labor and maintenance. E. The contractor shall fully comply with the schedule of testing and inspection, as well as any other tests or inspections that may be ordered by the Landscape Architect or other authorized representative of the Owner. All labor, materials, and equipment required for said tests and inspections shall be furnished at the sole expense of the contractor. Work stoppages for testing, inspection and re- placement or repair of any inadequate item shall not add to the allocated time of completion. F. All repairs, replacements, adjustments and reconstruction required to pass said inspections and tests shall be at the contractor's sole expense. G. Contractor shall be responsible for the full and proper maintenance of the irri- gation including but not limited to adjustments, repairs, integration with the master control system, etc. Contractor's responsibility for maintenance (exclu- STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 84 00 - 16 SECTION 32 84 00 — PLANTING IRRIGATION sive of replacements or repairs within the guarantee/warranty period) shall ter- minate on the date of Substantial Completion for the entire project or designat- ed portion thereof as declared by the Landscape Architect according to the conditions of the contract, provided the contractor has provided the Landscape Architect with irrigation 'as -built' drawings, red line drawings, CAD files, and three (3) copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified under Paragraph 1.05 of this section. H. Test of all grounding systems shall measure 5 OHMS or less when measured with vibra sound equipment. All testing to be at contractor's expense, by neu- tral company, with OHMs readings for each grounding field given to Owner at completion. I. Final inspection shall be made when the complete system is in place, operable, and all repairs, additions, adjustments and other work is complete. At such time, the contractor shall adequately demonstrate the proper operation of the system, shall show the system's complete conformance with the plans and specifications, and demonstrate that the irrigation system gives proper and ad- equate coverage of all landscaped areas. J. Final acceptance by the Landscape Architect and/or Owner in no way removes the contractor of his responsibility to make further repairs, corrections and ad- justments to eliminate any deficiencies which may later be discovered (includes moving or adding additional sprinklers if needed). Moreover, the contractor shall fully honor the one (1) year warranty outlined herein. 3.9 WARRANTY A. The contractor shall fully warrant the landscape irrigation system for a period of one (1) year after the written final acceptance and will receive a written confir- mation from the Landscape Architect that the warranty period is in effect. B. During the warranty period, the contractor will enforce all manufacturers and suppliers warranties as if made by the contractor himself. Any malfunctions, deficiencies, breaks, damages, disrepair, or other disorder due to materials, workmanship, or installation by the contractor and his suppliers shall be imme- diately and properly corrected to the proper order as directed by the Owner and/or Landscape Architect. C. Any damages caused by system malfunction shall be the responsibility of the contractor who shall make full and immediate restoration for said damages. END OF SECTION 32 84 00 STANTEC PLANTING IRRIGATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 17 32 84 00 - 17 • • • • • SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. All applicable provisions of the Bidding and Contract Requirements, and Divi- sion 1 - General Requirements shall govern the work under this section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the Lawns and Grass work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, except as for Items specifically indicated as "NIC ITEMS". 1.3 RELATED WORK: A. Section 32 8400 — Planting Irrigation B. Section 32 9300 — Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers C. Section 32 9301 — Landscape Preparation and Soil Mixes D. Section 32 9303 — Landscape Fine Grading E. Section 32 9305 — Landscape Maintenance 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Standards: Federal Specifications (FS) 0-F-241 c (1), Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial. B. Testing Agency: Independent testing Laboratory. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Conform to the requirements of the Department of Agriculture. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Certificates: 1. Grower's Certification: a. Grass species and location of field and date, which sod is cut. b. Compliance with State and Federal quarantine restrictions. 2. Manufacturer's certification of fertilizer and herbicide composition. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: A. Deliver sod on pallets. II TURF AND GRASSES TURF AND GRASSES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 00 - 1 SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES B. Protect root system from exposure to wind or sun. C. Protect sod against dehydration, contamination and heating during transpor- tation and delivery. D. Do not deliver more sod than can be installed within 24 hours. E. Keep stored sod moist and under shade or covered with moistened burlap. F. Do not pile sod more than 2 feet (2') deep. G. Do not tear, stretch or drop sod. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Begin installation of sod after preceding related work is accepted. B. Environmental Regulations: 1. Install sod during months acceptable to the Landscape Architect. 2. Do not install sod on saturated soil. C. Protection: Erect signs and barriers against vehicular traffic as approved by the Owner's Representative and Landscape Architect. 1.8 GUARANTEE: A. Guarantee sod for period of twelve (12) months after date of Substantial Completion. B. Replacement sod under this guarantee shall be guaranteed for twelve (12) months from the date of installation. C. Repair damage to other plants or construction work during sod replacement at no cost to the owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOD: A. Grass Species: 1. Stenotaphrum secundatum `Palmetto' (St. Augustine 'Palmetto' sod). 2. Zoysia 'Emerald'. 3. Cynodon dactylon `Latitude 36 Bermuda' sod. 4. Paspalum notatum Bahia Sod TURF AND GRASSES TURF AND GRASSES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 22 92 00 - 2 • • • SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES 5. American Sod Producers Association (ASAP) Grade: Nursery Grown or Approved "Florida Fancy", 98% weed -free. The sod shall not contain any broadleaf weeds. Sod shall be mature enough so that when grasped at one end, it can be picked up and handled without damage. B. Furnished in pads / Size as follows: 1. Length: 24 inches (24"), plus or minus 5%. 2. Width: 18 inches (18"), plus or minus 5%. 3. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (1-1/2"), excluding top growth and thatch. 4. Not stretched, broken or torn. C. Uniformly mowed height when harvested: 1.5 inches, (1.5"). D. Thatch: Maximum' inch (1/4"), uncompressed. E. Inspected and found free of diseases, nematodes, pests and pest larvae by entomologist of Department of Agriculture. F. Weeds: 1. Free of foreign grasses, torpedo grass, nut grass or other objectionable weeds. G. Uniform in color, leaf texture and density. II2.2 WATER: A. Free of substances harmful to plant growth. 2.3 FERTILIZER: A. FS O -F-241 c (1), Grade A or B. B. The chemical designation shall be 12-8-8, with at least 50% of the nitrogen from a non -water-soluble organic source. 2.4 HERBICIDES: A. As recommended by the Department of Agriculture. 2.5 STAKES: A. Softwood, % inch, (3/4"), diameter, 8 inch, (8") length. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: • TURF AND GRASSES TURF AND GRASSES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 00 - 3 SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES A. Verify that approved soil mix and/or soil amendments have been spread and thoroughly incorporated into the existing soil. B. Verify that the finish grades are to the elevations called for in the drawings. C. Water soil to a depth of twelve inches, (12"), forty-eight, (48), hours before sodding. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Till fertilizer into top two inches, (2"), of soil at a rate of 12 lbs./1000 square feet. B. Smooth area to be sodded to produce an even surface with no peaks or val- leys and free of all debris. C. Wet surface to a uniform depth of two to three inches, (2"-3"), or until upper surface is reasonably wet and compacted. D. Roll soil with a 100 Ib. Roller making one pass. 3.3 INSTALLATION: A. Transplant sod within forty-eight, (48), hours after harvesting. B. Begin sodding at bottom of slopes. C. Lay first row of sod in straight line with long dimension of pads parallel to slope contours. D. Butt together side and end joints. E. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows. F. Do not stretch or overlap sod. G. Peg sod on a slope ratio of 1 in 3 or greater with minimum of two stakes per square yard. Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for stabilizing sod at no additional cost to Owner. H. Water sod immediately after transplanting. I. Roll sod, except in pegged areas, with roller weighing not more than 150 lbs. Per foot of roller width. J. Water sod and soil to depth of six inches, (6"), within four hours after rolling. TURF AND GRASSES TURF AND GRASSES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 00 - 4 • • SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES K. Erect signs and barriers against vehicular and pedestrian traffic as approved by the Landscape Architect and Owner's Representative, immediately upon completion of each section of sod work. Once sod installation is complete, inspect and fortify all signs and barriers so that they will prevent any damage to sod throughout entire establishment period. 3.4 LAWN ESTABLISHMENT AND REQUIRED MAINTENANCE: A. Watering: 1. Keep sod moist during the first week after planting. 2. After first week, supplement rainfall to produce a total of two inches, (2"), per week for approved grow -in period. B. Mowing: 1. Maintain grass as required until final acceptance between one and a half inch and two and a half inch, (1.5" — 2.5"), height. 2. Do not cut off more than 40% of grass leaf in single mowing. 3. Remove grass clippings after mowing. C. Resod spots larger than one, (1), square foot, or longer than one, (1), lineal foot by four inches, (4"), wide, not having uniform stand of grass. D. Weed Eradication: Between second and third mowing or within 5 days of sod IIIinstallation, apply herbicide uniformly at manufacturer's recommended rate. E. Fertilizer: Apply fertilizer uniformly at manufacturer's recommended rate two, (2), days after sodding. F. Establishment period ninety, (90), days minimum after last laying of sod or until substantial completion acceptance by the Landscape Architect. 3.5 CLEANING A. Immediately clean spills from paved and finished surface areas. B. Remove debris and excess materials from the project site. C. Dispose of protective barricades and warning signs at termination of lawn es- tablishment. 3.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE: A. Inspection of all work shall be made upon written request of the Contractor. At that time, if all work is satisfactory, that will constitute Substantial Comple- tion. • TURF AND GRASSES TURF AND GRASSES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 00 - 5 SECTION 32 92 00 - TURF AND GRASSES B. Request shall be received by the Landscape Architect at least five, (5), days before anticipated date of inspection. C. Replace rejected sod areas with acceptable sod within two weeks after in- spection or as otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect or Owner's Representative. D. Substantial Completion of all sod work shall constitute the beginning of the guarantee period. E. Contractor's responsibility for landscape maintenance shall extend to the date of Substantial Completion as defined under the General Terms and Condi- tions. END OF SECTION 32 92 00 TURF AND GRASSES TURF AND GRASSES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 00 - 6 • • • PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 WORK INCLUDED • • SECTION 32 92 23 - SODDING A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, and services to complete the sodding work, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Federal Specifications (FS) O -F -241c (1), Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial. B. Testing Agency: Independent testing Laboratory. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Conform to the requirements of the Department of Agriculture. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: 1. Grower's Certification: a. Grass species and location of field and date, which sod is cut. b. Compliance with State and Federal quarantine restrictions. 2. Manufacturer's certification of fertilizer and herbicide composition 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING: A. Deliver sod on pallets. B. Protect root system from exposure to wind or sun. C. Protect sod against dehydration, contamination and heating during transportation and delivery. D. Do not deliver more sod than can be installed within 24 hours. E. Keep stored sod moist and under shade or covered with moistened burlap. F. Do not pile sod more than 2 feet (2') deep. G. Do not tear, stretch, or drop sod. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Begin installation of sod after preceding related work is accepted. B. Environmental Regulations: 1. Install sod during months acceptable to the Engineer. STANTEC SODDING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 23 - 1 2. Do not install sod on saturated soil. C. Protection: Erect signs and barriers against vehicular traffic as approved by the Owner's Representative and Engineer. 1.6 GUARANTEE: A. Guarantee sod for period of twelve (12) months after date of Substantial Completion. B. Replacement sod under this guarantee shall be guaranteed for twelve (12) months from the date of installation. C. Repair damage to other plants or construction work during sod replacement at no cost to the Owner. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOD A. Grass Species: 1. Stenotaphrum secundatum ProVista' (St. Augustine 'ProVista' sod). 2. Zoysia 'Emerald'. 3. Cynodon dactylon 'Tiff -way 419 Bermuda' sod. 4. Paspalum notatum Bahia Sod 5. American Sod Producers Association (ASAP) Grade: Nursery Grown or Approved "Florida Fancy", 98% weed -free. The sod shall not contain any broadleaf weeds. Sod shall be mature enough so that when grasped at one end, it can be picked up and handled without damage. B. Furnished in pads / Size as follows: 1. Length: 24 inches (24"), plus or minus 5%. 2. Width: 18 inches (18"), plus or minus 5%. 3. Thickness: 1-1/2 inches (1-1/2"), excluding top growth and thatch. 4. Not stretched, broken, or torn. C. Uniformly mowed height when harvested: 1.5 inches (1.5"). D. Thatch: Maximum % inch (1/4"), uncompressed. E. Inspected and found free of diseases, nematodes, pests, and pest larvae by entomologist of Department of Agriculture. F. Weeds: 1. Free of foreign grasses, torpedo grass, nut grass, or other objectionable weeds. STANTEC SODDING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 23 - 2 G. Uniform in color, leaf texture, and density 2.2 WATER IPA. Free of substances harmful to plant growth. • • 2.3 FERTILIZER A. FS O -F-241 c (1), Grade A or B. B. The chemical designation shall be 12-8-8, with at least 50% of the nitrogen from a non - water -soluble organic source 2.4 HERBICIDES A. As recommended by the Department of Agriculture. 2.5 STAKES A. Softwood, 3/4 inch (3/4") diameter, 8 inch (8") length. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that approved soil mix and/or soil amendments have been spread and thoroughly incorporated into the existing soil. B. Verify that the finish grades are to the elevations called for in the drawings. C. Water soil to a depth of twelve inches (12"), forty-eight (48) hours before sodding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Till fertilizer into top two inches (2") of soil at a rate of 12 lbs/1000 square feet. B. Smooth area to be sodded to produce an even surface with no peaks or valleys and free of all debris. C. Wet surface to a uniform depth of two to three inches (2"-3") or until upper surface is reasonably wet and compacted. D. Roll soil with a 100 -Ib roller making one pass. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Transplant sod within forty-eight (48) hours after harvesting. B. Begin sodding at bottom of slopes. C. Lay first row of sod in straight line with long dimension of pads parallel to slope con- tours. D. Butt together side and end joints. STANTEC SODDING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 23 - 3 E. Stagger end joints in adjacent rows. F. Do not stretch or overlap sod. G. Peg sod on a slope ratio of 1 in 3 or greater with minimum of two stakes per square yard. Contractor shall be responsible for stabilizing sod at no additional cost to Owner. H. Water sod immediately after transplanting. I. Roll sod, except in pegged areas, with roller weighing not more than 150 lbs per foot of roller width. J. Water sod and soil to depth of six inches (6") within four hours after rolling. K. Erect signs and barriers against vehicular and pedestrian traffic as approved by the Engineer and Owner's Representative, immediately upon completion of each section of sod work. Once sod installation is complete, inspect and fortify all signs and barriers so that they will prevent any damage to sod throughout entire establishment - period. 3.4 LAWN ESTABLISHMENT AND REQUIRED MAINTENANCE A. Watering: 1. Keep sod moist during the first week after planting. 2. After first week, supplement rainfall to produce a total of two inches (2") per week for approved grow -in period. B. Mowing: 1. Maintain grass as required until final acceptance between one and a half inch and two and a half inch (1.5"-2.5") height. 2. Do not cut off more than 40% of grass leaf in single mowing. 3. Remove grass clippings after mowing. C. Resod spots larger than one (1) square foot, or longer than one (1) lineal foot by four inches (4") wide, not having uniform stand of grass. D. Weed Eradication: Between second and third mowing or within 5 days of sod installation, apply herbicide uniformly at manufacturer's recommended rate. E. Fertilizer: Apply fertilizer uniformly at manufacturer's recommended rate two (2) days after sodding. F. Establishment period ninety (90) days minimum after last laying of sod or until substantial completion acceptance by the Engineer. 3.5 CLEANING A. Immediately clean spills from paved and finished surface areas. B. Remove debris and excess materials from the project site. STANTEC SODDING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 23 - 4 C. Dispose of protective barricades and warning signs at termination of lawn establishment. 3.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, INSPECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE A. Inspection of all work shall be made upon written request of the Contractor. At that time, if all work is satisfactory, that will constitute Substantial Completion. B. Request shall be received by the Engineer at least five (5) days before anticipated date of inspection. C. Replace rejected sod areas with acceptable sod within two weeks after inspection or as otherwise directed by the Engineer or Owner's Representative. D. Substantial Completion of all sod work shall constitute the beginning of the guarantee period. E. Contractor's responsibility for landscape maintenance shall extend to the date of Substantial Completion as defined under the General Terms and Conditions. END OF SECTION STANTEC SODDING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 32 92 23 - 5 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. All applicable provisions of the Bidding and Contract Requirements, and Division 1 - General Requirements shall govern the work under this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the Trees, Shrubs, and Groundcover and concrete planter waterproofing work, as indi- cated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, except as for items specifically indicated as "NIC ITEMS". 1.3 RELATED WORK: A. Section 32 8400 - Planting Irrigation B. Section 32 9200 - Turf and Grasses C. Section 32 9301 - Landscape Preparation and Soil Mixes D. Section 32 9303 - Landscape Fine Grading E. Section 32 9305 - Landscape Maintenance 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Inspection: 1. Furnish plant materials inspected by Department of Agriculture at the growing site and tagged or otherwise approved for delivery by Landscape Architect. 2. Inspection at growing site does not preclude right of rejection at project site. B. Furnish plant materials certified by Department of Agriculture to be free of harmful insects or apparent disease. Submit verification that all plant material is free of harm- ful insects and disease. C. All plant material shall meet or exceed the minimum grade of Florida No. 1 in ac- cordance with "Florida Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants, 2015, 5th Edition" published by the State of Florida Department of Agriculture. D. Plant material shall be shade or sun grown, and/or acclimatized depending on plant- ing location. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Certificate of inspection of plant material by State Authorities. STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 12 93 00 - 1 • SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS B. Test Reports: Analysis of samples from planting soil supply areas (i.e. signed original copy by testing laboratory only). If contractor elects to divide the project area into in- cremental substantial completion areas, soil samples and test reports shall be re- quired for each increment 14 days prior to beginning each increment. C. Maintenance Instruction: Prior to the end of the maintenance period, furnish three copies of written maintenance instructions to the Owner's Representative and Land- scape Architect for maintenance and care of installed plants throughout their full growing season. D. Grower's Certification: Requirements for root pruning and holding B & B stock at the nursery. E. Plant Samples: Three plants of each shrub, groundcover, or vine 7 gallon or less as specified for approval by the Landscape Architect and to be used as representative size, specification, and plant type for all plant materials to be installed. Any plant ma- terials that do not conform to the plans, specifications, or approved plant samples shall be rejected. F. Plant Photographs and Tagging: Contractor shall provide representative photograph of all plant materials specified over 7 gallon in size with a measuring rod included in the photograph. The Contractor shall also coordinate with the Owner's Representa- tive and Landscape Architect a tagging trip to cover all larger trees, palm and plant materials (this include for specimen trees and palms) at Contractor's cost. G. Project Schedule: Provide five (5) copies of a comprehensive project schedule indi- cating contractors proposed work and installation schedule. Schedule shall include breakdown for site preparation and grading, irrigation, trees/palms, shrubs, ground - covers, sod/seed, and final clean-up. Contractor shall also include project "mile- stones" for designated project areas within the total project area as required includ- ing substantial completion dates. H. All certificates, reports, and samples shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Landscape Architect a minimum of one week prior to the installation of any of the materials. Contractor shall not begin work until all submittals have been verified by the Landscape Architect. Submittals required but not limited to the following: 1. Existing soil analysis and sample 2. Prepared soil analysis and sample 3. Mulch sample 4. Erosion control fabric sample 5. Pre- and post -emergent herbicide 6. Weed eradication treatment for lawn grass 7. Fertilizers 8. Foliar spray fertilizer(s) 9. Sod certification(s) 10. Plant supplier certifications 11. Plant samples and/or photographs STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 2 93 00 - 2 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS 12. Drainage gravel and drainage mat samples 13. List of personnel, qualifications, and schedule 14. Guying methodologies 15. Leaf antidesiccant spray 16. Maintenance manual 17. Soil separator sample and product sheet 18. Fluid applied waterproofing 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Inventory: Verify that plant species, quantity, and quality of plants in Owner's nursery and/or holding area matches that on plant list and drawings. B. Preparation for delivery: 1. Prune head and/or roots of all trees only under direction of Landscape Architect, and as required to assure safe loading, shipment and handling without damaging the natural form and health of the plant. 2. Balled and Burlapped (B&B) plants: a. Dig and prepare for shipment in manner that will not damage roots, branches, shape, and future development after replanting. Oak trees shall be root pruned 30 days prior to digging and hardened off at the supplier's nursery under mist for 30 to 60 days. b. Wrap Ball with firm, natural balls of soil, per "Florida Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants". c. Ball firmly with burlap or strong cloth and tie: ANSI Z60.1. C. Delivery 1. Deliver soil conditioners (pesticides, herbicides, fumigants, and fertilizers) to site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trade name, trademark, and conformance to state law. Store in designated areas only. 2. Deliver planting soil mixes and mulch in bulk with manufacturer's guaranteed mix, name, and conformance to state law. Store in designated areas only. 3. Deliver plants with legible identification labels. a. Label trees, evergreens, containers of like shrubs, or groundcover plants. b. State correct plant name and size indicated on Plant List. c. Use durable waterproof labels with water-resistant ink, which will remain legi- ble for at least 60 days. 4. Protect all plant materials during transport/delivery with shade cloth or other ac- ceptable means to prevent wind burn. 5. Protect all plant material during delivery to prevent damage or desiccation to root ball or desiccation of crown and leaves. STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 3 • SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS 6. Mist periodically each day all tree/palm root balls and crowns/tops during deliv- ery, handling, and storing on site to ensure against drying. 7. Notify Landscape Architect and Owner of delivery schedule in advance so plant material may be inspected upon arrival at job site. 8. Remove unacceptable plant material immediately from job site. 9. Delivery of fluid applied membrane waterproofing shall be to the job site in sealed undamaged containers. Each container shall be identified with material name, date of manufacture and lot number. D. Storage: 1. Balled and burlapped plant stock: Deliver direct from nursery. 2. Bare root plant material: Deliver direct from supplier. 3. Protect roots of all plant material from drying or other possible injury with shade cloths, tarps or other means. Keep plant root ball and crown moist at all times. 4. Store plants in shade and protect from weather. Heel trees in a vertical position as required. Irrigate all stored plants as required. 5. Maintain and protect plant material not to be planted within four hours. Plant palms upon delivery. E. Handling: 1. Do not drop plants. 2. Do not pick up container or balled plants by stems or trunks. 3. Do not use chains or cables on any trees or palms. Handle using nylon straps, 2" width minimum. 1.7 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Planting Season: Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice. B. Locate all underground utilities and other non -readily visible structures prior to dig- ging. Utility drawings will be available at the job site or from Owner's Representative. Landscape Contractor shall repair all damage to underground utilities, and/or con- struction caused by utility damage, at no cost to the Owner. C. Verify that all existing trees to remain are properly identified and barricaded to pre- vent damage under this and future construction. Landscape Contractor shall be re- sponsible for maintaining adequate identification and barricading of all existing plant material to remain throughout the installation and required maintenance period. D. Install fluid applied waterproofing membrane materials in strict accordance with all safety and weather conditions required by manufacturers and applicable rules and regulations of local and other authorities having jurisdiction. 1.8 GUARANTEE: STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 4 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS A. Guarantee all shrub and groundcover, trees, and palms plant material for a period of 12 months after date of Substantial Completion (includes transplanted trees and palms). Replacement plants under this guarantee shall be replaced within (2) two weeks of rejection and guaranteed for (12) twelve months from date of installation. B. Repair damage to other plants, lawn or construction work during plant replacement at no additional cost to the Owner (this includes, but is not limited to, damage to curbs, walks, roads, fences, site furnishings, etc.). C. Complete installation of membrane waterproofing in concrete planters shall be guar- anteed jointly and severally, on a single document, by the manufacturer and applica- tor against defects of materials and workmanship, for a period of 5 years, starting at the date of substantial completion. 1.9 SCHEDULING: A. Coordinate work and installation as required with other contractors within the project area that may be in progress as required. B. Install trees, shrubs, and ground cover before lawns are installed. C. Notify Landscape Architect of anticipated installation date at least (2) two weeks in advance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLANT MATERIAL: A. Well -formed and shaped, true to type, and free from disease, insects, and defects such as knots, sun -scald, windburn, injuries, abrasion or disfigurement. B. True to botanical and common name and variety: American Joint Committee on Hor- ticultural Nomenclature, Standardized Plant Names, latest edition. C. Minimum grade of Florida No. 1 in accordance with "Florida Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants, 2025, 5th Edition" published by the State of Florida Department of Agriculture. All plants not listed in "Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants" pub- lished by the Division of Plant Industry, shall conform to a minimum grade of Florida No. 1 as to: STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 5 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS 1. Health and vitality 2. Condition of foliage 3. Root system 4. Freedom from pests and mechanical damage 5. Heavily branched and densely foliated according to the accepted normal shape 6. Freedom of low and/or tight "v" shaped crotches D. Nursery Grown: ANSI Z60.1-1969 1. Grown under climatic conditions similar to those in locality of project. 2. Container grown stock: a. Growing in container for minimum 30 days before delivery, with sufficient root system for container size. b. Not root -bound or with root systems hardened off. 3. Use only ground cover plants well established in removable containers, integral containers, or formed homogenous soil sections. 4. Trees, unless otherwise noted, shall be nursery/tree farm grown. Collected and Grow Bag trees will not be accepted. E. Minimum root ball sizes for all palms shall be as delineated within "Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants, Part II, Palms and Trees", published by the State of Florida Department of Agriculture. All Sabal palms shall be regenerated" palms with full root balls and full heads ("hurricane" cut palms are not acceptable). 2.2 PLANTING SOIL: A. Planting soil mixture for backfill around trees, palms, shrubs, and groundcover shall be as specified in Section 32 9301- Soil Preparation and Soil Mixes. 2.3 SOIL CONDITIONERS: A. Soil conditioners shall be as specified in Section 32 9301 - Soil Preparation and Soil Mixes for planting areas. 1. As a fertilizer supplement to Palms, a foliar spray shall be applied one (1) week after installation (excluding summer months) and repeat three (3) months after first application. The chemical designation shall be 20-20-20 with the primary plant nutrient sources derived from Urea, Ammonium Phosphate, and Potassium Nitrate. The following minor elements shall be included: 0.0500% MG 0.0500% Fe 0.0031% Mn 0.0025% Zn 0.0068% B 0.0036% CU 2. Apply foliar spray with a wetting agent. 3. Peter's General-purpose 20-20-20 liquid fertilizer or approved equal is accepta- ble. STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 6 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS B. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to supply and transport water to all landscape areas during construction until the irrigation system is installed. 2.4 TOP MULCH: A. Pine Straw Mulch, loose, substantially free of mineral waste materials and insects, and showing an acid reaction. B. Minimum organic matter by weight on an oven dry basis: 85%. C. Processed specifically for use as top mulch around plant beds. D. Pine straw shall be baled specifically for horticultural use, free of minerals (rocks), branches larger than 1/4" diameter, fire ants, and any other deleterious materials. 2.5 GUYING AND STAKING MATERIAL: A. Stakes for tree and palm support: 1 Construction grade lumber, pressure treated pine. 2. Vertical Stakes: Nominal 2"x4"x8' long pressure treated pine and pointed at one end. 3. Braces for Palm Trees: Nominal 2" x 4" x 8' long pressure treated pine and point- ed at one end. 4. Stakes: Nominal 2" x 4" x 3' long pressure treated pine, and pointed at one end. Number 4 (1/2" diameter x 3' long) rebar may be used in lieu of 2" x 4" lumber. 5. All above grade 2" x 4" stakes and braces shall be painted with one coat of Olympic Stain. Stain and color to be approved by the Landscape Architect. B. Guying Wires: Annealed, galvanized iron or galvanized steel 10 -gauge wire. Wire shall be flagged with white surveyor tape minimum 2 per guy wire; (one flag near ground level and one flag near the middle of the length of wire, above turnbuckle if used). C. Hose: 1. Type: New 1/2" diameter 2 -ply reinforced black rubber or plastic hose. 2. Minimum length: 6 Inches. D. Turnbuckles: 1. Turnbuckles are required. Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for keeping taut all guyed plant material and for keeping flagging in place. One turnbuckle per guy wire is required. 2. Method of tightening guy wires to be approved by Landscape Architect. 3. Guying to be tightened as needed, but always within one day of when found nec- essary. 2.6 SLOPE STABILIZATION: STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 7 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS • A. Landscape contractor shall be responsible to stabilize grades by approved methods where necessary. • • B. Contractor shall stabilize all sloped areas greater than 3 to 1 and areas to be found to be required to reduce surface erosion by the Owner's Representative with erosion control fabric. Contractor shall install erosion control fabric according to the manufac- turer's instructions. C. Refer to Section 32 9302 — Landscape Slope Protection. 2.7 SOIL SEPARATOR: A. The soil separator at gravel areas shall consist of a sheet of structure composed en- tirely of preferentially oriented isotactic polypropylene continuous filaments thermally bounded mostly at the crossover points and weighting 4.0 + 0.3 oz./yd. 1. "Typar" style 3341, by Dupont or approved equal. 2. Technical Data: Weight 4.0 oz./yd. ASTM D1910-64 (1975) Thickness 15 mils. ASTM D1777-64 (1975) Grab Tensile 135 Ib. ASTM D1682-64 (1975) Elongation to Bcab 62% ASTM D1682-64 (1975) Trapezoidal Tear 74 Ib. ASTM D2263-68 Puncture Strength 50 Ib. ASTM D751-73 Mullen Burst 200 psi ASTM D774-46 Abrasion Resistance 42 Ib. ASTM D1175-71 Specific Gravity .95 Equivalent Opening 70 to 100 U.S. Corps of Eng. ASTM size (EOS) std. Sieve D422-63 (1972) Flux 230 gal. /ft./min. EURM-100 Coefficient of H 0 2x10 cm/sec. EURM-100 3. Soil Separator Installation: a. Roll, size and overlap as required as indicated, and complete installation as per manufacture's standard printed specifications, inspections and recom- mendations. b. Contractor shall be responsible for securing top edges of soil separator by an approved method. 2.8 GRAVEL (For Pots /Planters or tree pits if required): A. Gravel shall be washed rock for landscape use and shall be of graduated sizes. B. Gravel shall be no smaller than (1/2") diameter nor larger than (1-1/2") diameter in any direction. STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 8 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS C. Gravel shall be installed as shown on drawings or to a minimum of 6" depth. D. Gravel shall be washed clean and contain no chemical elements harmful to plant growth. E. Contractor shall provide a representative sample of the Gravel for review and ap- proval by Landscape Architect and Owner. 2.9 LANDSCAPE DRAINAGE PIPE: A. Landscape drainage pipe where required (see plans for location) for added drainage needs at specific plant material shall be (4") diameter perforated PVC drainage by ADS or approved equal with filter cloth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Verify that final grades and drainage have been established prior to the beginning of the planting operation. B. Inspect trees, shrubs, and ground cover plants for injury, insect infestation, and trees and shrubs for proper pruning. C. Do not begin planting of trees until deficiencies are corrected, or plants replaced. 3.2 LOCATION / STAKING: A. Stake out locations for plants and outline of planting beds on ground. B. Do not begin excavation until stake out of plant locations and plant beds are ac- ceptable to the Landscape Architect. C. The location of all plant materials shall be field staked prior to installation for Land- scape Architect's approval. 3.3 PREPARATION: A. Pits and trenches: 1. Shape: a. Vertical sides and flat bottom. Tree/palm pits shall have mounded bottoms to improve drainage as detailed. b. Plant pits to be square or circular. 2. Size: a. For trees and palms: STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 9 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS 1) Depth: Minimum 2 ft. from finish grade and increased as necessary to ac- commodate planting ball or drainage and at least 6 " planting soil backfill below ball or roots and 6" of clean coarse sand for additional drainage. 2) Width or diameter: 2 ft. greater than diameter of planting ball (unless oth- erwise approved by Landscape Architect for special planting areas). b. For Shrubs and Groundcovers: (1) Depth: (a) 2 and 3- gallon plant material shall receive a minimum of 4" of plant- ing soil mixture beneath the root ball. (b) Plant materials sized 1 gallon or less, and/or less, and/or materials planted 24" o.c. or less shall receive a full 12" of amended planting soil mix tilled to a minimum depth of 12". Note: All annual beds shall receive a full 6" of amended planting soil mix tilled to a minimum depth of 6". Excess excavated soil may be evenly spread on site at the direction of the Owner's Representative. (c) For plants not requiring soil mix the entire bed shall be tilled by me- chanical means to a depth of 12". (2) Width or Diameter: (a) All 2- or 3 -gallon material shall be placed within a minimum 18" plant- ing hole, and backfilled with the specified planting soil mix. (b) All plant material sized 1 gallon or less, or material planted 24" o.c. or less shall receive complete bed amending. That is excavation of exist- ing soil to a minimum of 12 inches (Note: 6" for all annual beds) below finished soil elevation, backfilling with specified planting soil mix, and then tilling with all required amendments to a depth of not less than 12 inches (Note: 6" for all annual beds). All areas to be amended in such a manner shall be highlighted on contractor's record drawings. Ex- cess excavated soil may be evenly spread on site at the direction of the Owner's Representative. (3) Bring all beds and pits to smooth, even surface conforming to established grades after full settlement has occurred. NOTE: Amending of and quantities of planting soil mixes as outlined above contingent with existing soil conditions. B. Disposal of Excess Soil: 1. Use acceptable excess excavated topsoil to form watering berms around plants. 2. Dispose of additional excess soil at direction of Owner's Representative. 3. Dispose of unacceptable or unused excess soil in designated staging area as di- rected by the Owner's Representative. 4. All spoilage shall be deposited, spread and fine graded to a maximum 2" layer as directed by the Owner's Representative. C. Planting Beds: • STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 -10 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS 1. For planting beds with plants spaced 24" or less - backfill with 12" of specified and amended planting soil mixture to meet required finished grades. 2. Bring all beds to smooth, even surface conforming to established grades after full settlement has occurred. D. Test fill all tree pits with water before planting to assure that proper drainage and percolation is available. Pits, which are not adequately draining, shall be excavated to a depth sufficient for additional drainage and backfilling with gravel. No allowances will be made for lost plants due to improper drainage. Landscape Contractor shall replace with same species size and specification at no cost to Owner. 3.4 PLANTING: A. General: 1. Center plant in pit or trench. (Note: Place 6" of sand in tree/palm pits prior to set- ting plant materials or planting soil.) 2. Face for best effect, or as directed by Landscape Architect. 3. Set plant plumb and hold rigidly in position until soil has been tamped firmly around planting ball. 4. Use only planting soil backfill as specified herein before. 5. Place sufficient planting soil under plant to bring top of planting ball to finish grade (top of tree/palm root balls shall not be set below finished grade). Note re- quirements for Azaleas. 6. Backfill pit or trench with planting soil in 9 in. layers and water each layer thor- oughly to settle soil and work soil completely around roots and planting ball. • 7. After soil settles fill pit with planting soil, water and leave pit surface even with fin- ish grade. 8. Plant all shrubs spaced 30" o.c. or greater a minimum of 18" back of curb, walks, and/or paving. 9. Plant all shrubs spaced 24" o.c. or less a minimum of 12" from back of curb, walks, and/or paving. 10. Topsoil berm: a. Construct a topsoil berm 6" above finish grade forming a watering basin with a level bottom around each palm or tree. b. Size: 2 ft. greater than diameter of planting ball. Maintain 4' dia. grass circle around all trees in sod areas. c. Construct a topsoil berm 6" above finish grade for all planting beds on slopes as per planting details. d. Leave saucer for 3 months or as directed by Owner's Representative. At the end of 3 months regrade area and re -mulch planting circle (or planting bed) for all plantings. Remove excess from basin and clean area. Replace any damaged plant material or sod at no cost to Owner. B. Balled Plants (B&B) and (WB&B): STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS • STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 11 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS 1. Place in pit on planting soil backfill material/drainage gravel that has been hand - tamped prior to placing plant. 2. Place with burlap intact so location of ground line at top of ball is same as at nursery where grown. 3. Remove binding at top 1/2 of planting ball and lay top of burlap back 6". For wire balled trees, remove wire from the top 1/3 of the ball (12" min.) after the tree has been stabilized by partially backfilling the planting pit. 4. Do not pull wrapping from under planting ball. 5. Do not plant if planting ball is cracked, broken or showing evidence of voids be- fore or during planting process. Replace with plant of same species, size, and specification at no cost to Owner. C. Container -grown plants: 1. Can/Container removal: a. Cut cans on two sides with an acceptable can cutter. b. Do not injure planting ball. c. Do not cut cans with spade or ax. d. Do not cut sides on knockout cans. e. Carefully remove plants without injury or damage to planting. a. After removing plant. Superficially cut edge of roots with knife on three sides. NOTE: Root bound plants shall not be accepted. 2. Dig planting holes to size shown. 3. Hand place plants which are in containers less than one gallon in size. 4. Hand backfill and hand tamp leaving slight depression around bases of plants. 5. Do not cover top of root ball. 6. Azaleas shall be planted with root ball 2" above finished grade. Mound planting soil to top of root ball. 7. Water for settlement and replace required planting soil. 3.5 FERTILIZER APPLICATIONS: A. Apply granular fertilizer at time of planting and repeat 3 months from first application. Schedule time of fertilization with Owner or Landscape Architect to verify compliance of fertilization of plant materials. B. Apply granular fertilizer at following rates, to planting bed and saucer areas around each tree, palm and shrub: 1. Trees: a. Caliper 4 in. and larger: 2 Ib. per inch of caliper (i.e. 4" caliper equals 8 Ib. of fertilizer). b. Caliper under 4 in.: 1 Ib. per inch of caliper (i.e. 3" caliper equals 3 Ib. of ferti- lizer). 2. Shrubs (plants greater than 24" o.c.): 1/4 Ib. per plant. • STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 12 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS 3. Ground Cover Plants (plants 24" o.c. or less): 2 Ib. per 100 -sq. ft. of area. 4. Palms: 5 Ib. per palm. C. Broadcast under foliage canopy and incorporate into soil. D. Water immediately until root structure of plant is wet. Assure protection from fertilizer burn. E. Apply foliar nutrient spray to all Palm species (excluding Sabal palms) at time of planting and repeat three (3) months from first application. Do not apply foliar spays in summer months (i.e. June through August). Schedule fertilization with Landscape Architect. Drench palm leaves with foliar nutrient spray at the manufacturer's rec- ommended rate to all palm species. 3.6 WEED AND INSECT CONTROL: A. Apply post -emergent herbicide, "Roundup" as manufactured by Monsanto Corp. or approved equal, per manufacturer's rate and method of application to all landscape beds areas as necessary. B. Provide viable application of pre -emergent herbicide "Surflan" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations before mulching and again as necessary through- out required maintenance period to prevent weed seed germination. C. Contractor shall schedule application with Owner or Owner's Representative to verify compliance with specifications. D. The Landscape Contractor shall verify that the herbicide and application technique will not damage plant material prior to application, and shall replace, and/or repair damage to any plant injured by herbicide application at no cost to the Owner. E. Provide written certification that all plant materials including palms have been specif- ically treated for insect control. 3.7 TOP MULCHING: A. Top mulch planting pits, trenches, and areas within two (2) days after planting. B. Cover watering basin or bed evenly with two (2") inches compacted depth of top mulch material. C. All trees not in shrub or groundcover planting beds shall be top mulched with an even 2" layer of mulch. D. Water thoroughly, immediately after mulching. E. "Cut in" mulch/pine straw at plant bed/sod line. STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS • STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 13 • • SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS F. Hose down planting area with fine spray to wash leaves or plants at least twice a week or as required. G. Exclude mulch from annual beds. 3.8 GUYING AND STAKING OF TREES: A. Guy trees as shown on the drawings except where they are planted in special loca- tions where guying is not feasible. 1. Stake installation: a. Drive stakes perpendicularly. 3 ft. into ground at edge of root ball. Do not drive stake through soil separator or drainage gravel if present. Do not drive stakes through root ball. b. Number stakes as shown. 2. Tying and cross -bracing: a. For trees 3" or greater in caliper: (1) Stake and tie firmly with guy wire as shown. (2) Separate guy wire from bark by hose section. b. For trees under 3" in caliper: (1) Cross -brace between stakes. (2) Tie tree to cross -brace guy wire. (3) Separate guy wire from bark by hose section. B. Stake palm trees as shown in plan details. Contractor shall not deepen the burial of Sabal palmettos and Washingtonia robusta for stabilization in lieu of staking. The clear trunk height shall be required as specified on plans after installation. The Con- tractor shall be responsible for and guarantee the installation against toppling and be responsible for any and all damage incurred by toppling over of palms. C. Contractor shall leave all guying and staking in place and maintain in good repair un- til project is substantially complete. Ensure no guys or stakes occur in grassed areas. 3.9 PRUNING: A. Prune minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches, deadwood, and suckers. Pruning shall be done with regard to natural form of plant material or as di- rected by the Landscape Architect. 1. Prune trees and shrubs prior to delivery to site only under direction of Landscape Architect. (Note: Pruning is required for collected palms and trees per "Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part II, Palms and Trees" and Section 02481. 2. All Washingtonia robusta palms should have the palm frond skirts and boots left intact. Contractor shall use acceptable means to insure that skirts and boots re- main during digging, delivery, and planting installation. • STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 14 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS B. Paint cuts (1") one -inch diameter or larger made during pruning of any plant material with commercial grade sealant only under direction of Landscape Architect. C. Pruning cuts shall be monitored to ensure proper healing and to prevent in- sect/disease infestation. D. Landscape Contractor shall perform all specialized shearing and/or pruning as di- rected by Landscape Architect and as shown on the drawings at no additional cost to Owner. 3.10 MAINTENANCE: A. Begin daily maintenance immediately after each item is planted and continue until substantial completion of each designated portion of the project a defined in the General Terms and Conditions of the Contract. The Owner's responsibility for land- scape maintenance shall commence on the date each designated portion of the pro- ject is determined to be substantially complete. B. Maintain a healthy growing condition by pruning, watering, cultivating, weeding, mowing, mulching, tightening, and repairing of guys, resetting plants to proper grades or upright position, restoration of plant saucer, and furnishing and applying such sprays as necessary to keep planting free of insects and diseases. C. The root system of plants shall be watered by the contractor as often as conditions require at such intervals as will keep the surrounding soil in best condition for promo- tion of root growth and plant life. Supplemental hand watering above the irrigation system watering is the responsibility of the contractor until all plant materials are well established. D. Keep planting saucers and beds free of weeds, grass, and other undesired vegeta- tion growth. All areas must be 98% weed free upon final acceptance by Owner. E. Protect planting areas and plants against trespassing and damage of any kind for the duration of the maintenance period. F. Inspect plants at least once a week and perform maintenance promptly. Replace im- paired or dead plants promptly. Do not wait until near the end of the guarantee peri- od to make replacements of plants which have become unacceptable. G. Remove soil ridges and guying/staking from around watering basins when appropri- ate prior to substantial completion or maintain as directed by the Landscape Archi- tect/Owner's Representative until substantially complete. H. Water when soil moisture is below optimum level for best plant growth. Coordinate and adjust timing of irrigation system with irrigation contractor as plant materials es- tablish. Contractor shall note that the irrigation system is not designed to accommo- date establishment of trees and palms. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide • • STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS • STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 -15 • • SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS additional water as may be required above what is supplied by the irrigation system until all trees and palms are well established. I. Contractor shall be responsible to protect all cold sensitive approved plant materials stored or planted on-site by approved methods from cold or freeze damage as may be required. Contractor shall use approved horticultural practices typical for the Cen- tral Florida area and shall submit intended methods, schedules, and plans of protec- tion with required submittals for review and approval. In the event the Owner or Landscape Architect verifies that the materials protected by the Contractor are dam- aged during a cold period or freeze, the damaged materials shall be replaced (or not) by the Owner or at additional cost to the Owner. In the event the Owner or Land- scape Architect verifies that non -protected materials were damaged during a cold pe- riod or freeze, the damaged materials shall be replaced by the Contractor at no addi- tional cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall use reasonable measures to protect all cold sensitive plant materials. 3.11 CLEANING: A. Fill all pits/depressions in holding area and rough grade to meet surrounding eleva- tions. Remove any organic or other debris resulting from the plant relocation pro- cess. B. Sweep and wash all paved surfaces. C. Remove planting debris from project site and holding area. D. Remove soil conditioners, soil mixes, gravel, etc. from project site and holding area. 3.12 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION, INSPECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE: A. Inspection of the entire project or designated portions thereof shall be made upon written request of the Contractor. At that time, if all work is satisfactory and complete according to the conditions of the Contract, the Architect shall declare the work sub- stantially complete. B. Contractor's written request for review of the work or any designated portion thereof shall be received by the Landscape Architect at least five (5) days before anticipated date of inspection. C. Plants that have died or are in unhealthy or badly impaired condition on inspection shall be treated or replaced within 14 days at no additional cost to Owner. D. Replace rejected plants within two weeks of inspection. E. Substantial completion of the work for the entire project or designated portions thereof shall constitute the beginning of guarantee period. III STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 -16 SECTION 32 93 00 - TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS F. Contractor's responsibility for maintenance (exclusive of replacement within guaran- tee period) shall terminate on date the entire project or designated portion thereof is declared substantially complete by the Landscape Architect according to the condi- tions of the contract, provided the contractor has supplied the Landscape Architect with three (3) copies of written maintenance instructions as required under Para- graph 1.05 of this section. A complete maintenance manual shall contain information in sections on the following: 1. Weed Control/Eradication a. Turf b. Shrub areas 2. Pest/Insect Control a. Turf b. Trees c. Palms d. Shrubs 3. Fertilization a. Schedules b. Turf c. Trees d. Palms e. Shrubs f. Products/amounts or application rates g. Soil Testing 4. Mulching Requirements 5. Turf a. Mowing Requirements b. Trimming/Edging c. Soil Testing d. Watering Requirements e. Thatch Control f. Specifics for each type specified 6. Trees, Palms and Shrubs a. Pruning/Trimming b. Watering Requirements c. Soil Testing d. Specifics for each type specified END OF SECTION 32 93 00 • • STANTEC TREES, SHRUBS & GROUNDCOVERS • STATION 16 PIERCE ST. REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 00 - 17 SECTION 32 93 01 - LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED MATERIALS: A. All applicable provisions of the Bidding and Contract Requirements shall govern the work under this section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED: • • A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to complete the Soil Preparation and Soil Mixes work, as indicated on the drawings, as specified herein or both, excepts as for items specifically indicated as "NIC ITEMS". B. Including, but not limited to: 1. Topsoil (soil placed by others over the site) 2. Soil Conditioners 3. Prepared Planting Soil Mixes 4. Prepared top dressing soil mixes 1.3 RELATED WORK: A. Section 32 9200 - Turf and Grasses B. Section 32 9300 — Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers C. Section 32 9303 — Landscape Fine Grading 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Testing Agency: Independent testing laboratory B. Requirements or Regulatory Agencies: Conform to requirements of all City, County and State Agencies C. Reference Standards 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Test Reports: Test reports shall consist of pH range, major and minor element analy- sis, soluble salt concentrations, sand fraction analysis and testing laboratory STANTEC LANDSCAPE PREPARATION & SOIL MIXES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 01 -1 SECTION 32 93 01 - LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES recommendations as to suitability of soil for planting and drainage including re- quired adjustments to specified soil amendments and fertilizer applications. Re- ports shall be identified by project name, date, and soil mix type. Suggested test- ing laboratory: A &L Plains Laboratories (phone: 806.763.4278). 1. Results of topsoil (on-site existing soil) analysis (must be from a minimum of three locations on site). 2. Results of planting soil mixes analysis: One test required for each type of soil mix with and without specified fertilizer (note: pH ranges for plant type). 3. Results of Sand Analysis: One sand fraction analysis required. 4. Results of prepared top -dress soil mix. B. Certificates: 1. Manufacturer's certification and/or testing laboratory certification that con- tent of soil conditioners meet specification requirements. 2. Manufacturer's certificate of fertilizer's chemical composition including but not limited to percentage and derivation of nitrogen, phosphorus, potassi- um, and micro -nutrients. 3. Submit all certification to the Landscape Architect a minimum of one week prior to installation of any materials. C. Soil Samples: 1. Submit a one -pound sample of each soil mix specified. Soil samples with required test reports must be submitted by the Contractor to the Land- scape Architect a minimum of one week prior to installation beginning. Each sample must be clearly labeled as to contents. 2. Submit one -pound sample of each soil conditioner required to mix each prepared planting soil mix. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Contractor to make himself / herself familiar with the site and the required work to complete this section in accordance with the drawings and what is specified herein. B. Contractor shall be responsible for bringing all areas to finished grade as shown on drawings. Any changes, modifications, or disturbances to the fine grading shall be corrected by the responsible contractor. C. Protection: Protect and avoid any damage whatsoever to existing walks, pavements, curbs, utilities, plant material and any other existing work. D. Contractor shall be responsible for stabilizing all slopes and planting soil by approved methods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS STANTEC LANDSCAPE PREPARATION & SOIL MIXES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE32 93 01 - 2 • SECTION 32 93 01 - LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES 2.1 TOPSOIL (ON SITE EXISITNG SOIL): A. Topsoil source for planting shall be on site or by contractor where grading is required. A one foot (1') depth of clean / well drained approved topsoil blan- ket shall be spread out over the entire site planting areas by others. B. Topsoil shall be suitable for ornamental plant growth and free from hard clods, stiff clay, hardpan, gravel, subsoil, brush, large roots, refuse or other deleterious material, and of reasonable uniform quality. C. Mechanical analysis: Topsoil and soil mixture(s) shall meet these specifica- tions and the following mechanical analysis: Sieve Size: Percentage Passing By Dry Weight: inch 99-100 1/4 inch 97-99 No. 200 Tess than 7% NOTE: Materials larger than one inch shall be disposed of off the site or as directed by the landscape architect. Existing leaf litter and plant material shall be excluded from topsoil and soil mix. D. Maximum Soluble Salts: 300 PPM. • E. Contractor shall assure existing soils are free of any visible weeds including 'Torpedo' Grass. F. In the event topsoil on site does not meet the above requirements, topsoil meeting the requirements may be imported from off-site sources after the ap- proval by Landscape Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. Imported topsoil must meet or exceed the requirements for topsoil specified herein. 2.2 SOIL CONDITIONERS: A. Dolomite Limestone: Approved product, designated for agriculture use. B. Aluminum Sulfate: Manufacturer's standard commercial grade. C. Peat: Suitable for plant growth, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, and specifically pulverized for agricultural use. Peat shall be free of deleteri- ous materials that would be harmful to plant growth, shall be free or nema- todes shall be of uniform quality, and shall have a pH value between 5.5 and 6.5 (as determined in accordance with ASTM E70). Peat shall be sterilized to make free of all viable nut grass and other undesirable weeds. D. Pesticides: As recommended by applicable Agricultural Public Agencies. E. Herbicides: As recommended by applicable Public Agencies. STANTEC LANDSCAPE PREPARATION & SOIL MIXES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 01 - 3 SECTION 32 93 01 - LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES F. Soil Fumigants: As recommended by applicable Public Agencies. G. Fertilizers: Commercial grade fertilizer to comply with State of Florida Fertiliz- er laws. Chemical designation shall be as specified with at least 50% of the nitrogen derived from a non -water soluble organic source and all potash from triple super phosphate forms for all plantings (i.e. submit suppliers analysis affirming the above.) 1. The following minor elements shall be included: Zn, Mg, Mn, Cu, Fe, and B. a. Contractor shall adjust specified analysis of fertilizer with required mi- nor elements as required depending upon test results of existing soils, planting soil(s) and testing laboratory recommendations at no addi- tional cost to Owner. b. Federal Specifications O -F-241 Type 1, Grade A or B. c. The chemical designation for the granular fertilizer for all plantings shall be 12-8-8 (for pricing only) and for installation as recommended by testing laboratory. d. Contractor shall submit adjusted fertilizer analysis for plant type as may be required from soil analysis test results(i.e. soil, shrubs/groundcovers, trees, and palms). H. See Section 32 9300 - Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers for additional ferti- lizer requirements for Phoenix Palms. I. Water: Free of substances harmful to the growth of plants. Water shall also be free of staining agents as well as elements causing odors. J. Soil Sterilizers: As recommended by State and Local Agriculture Agencies. K. Sand: Clean, white, coarse-grained (0.5 mm or greater) builders sand, free of substances harmful to growth of plants. Beach sand shall not be used. L. Gravel: Clean (washed), and free from substances harmful to growth of plants. Gravel shall consist of 1/2" minimum diameter to 1-1/2" maximum di- ameter stones with 50% of the stones greater than 1" diameter. M. Supply complete information on all analysis/test methodologies and results; laboratory certifications, manufacturer specifications, and agency approvals to Landscape Architect prior to placement of soil conditioners. Landscape contractor shall make all modifications and improvements to soil and soil mixes deemed necessary by Landscape Architect to meet requirements here- in, and to ensure proper growing medium for all plant material without cost to Owner, prior to planting. 2.3 PLANTING SOIL MIXES: STANTEC LANDSCAPE PREPARATION & SOIL MIXES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 01 - 4 • SECTION 32 93 01 - LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES B. Planting soil mixture(s) shall be suitable for plant growth and free from hard clods, stiff clay, hardpan, gravel, brush, large roots, nematodes, weeds, re- fuse, or other deleterious material, and of reasonably uniform quality. C. Palms: Planting soil mixture to be placed as backfill around the root balls of all palms shall consist of a mixture of: 100% approved clean, coarse-grained builders sand NOTE: If required for at grade locations, bottom 6" of each planting pit shall be backfilled with approved clean gravel and one layer of soil sepa- rator fabric between gravel and soil for increased drainage percolation. Contractor shall be responsible to assure percolation of all planting pits. C. Shrubs and Groundcovers: Planting soil mixture to be placed as backfill around the root balls of all shrubs and groundcovers shall consist of a mixture of: 1/3 approved peat 2/3 approved clean, coarse-grained builders sand D. Trees: Planting soil mixture to be placed as backfill around the root balls of all trees shall consist of a mixture of: 1/3 approved peat • 2/3 approved clean, coarse-grained builders sand NOTE: For at grade locations, bottom 6" of each tree planting pit shall be backfilled with approved clean, coarse-grained builder's sand. If required, an additional 6"of each planting pit shall be backfilled with approved clean gravel and one layer of soil separator fabric between gravel and soil for increased drainage/percolation. Contractor shall be responsible to assure percolation of all planting pits. Gravel and soil separator shall be required for all magnolia trees. E. Annuals and Potted Plants (except for palms): The planting soil mix to be placed in planters shall be a thorough mix of: 40% peat 40% approved clean coarse builder sand (as specified) 10% fine milled composted bark 10% cypress wood chips 1.5 Ib. Micromax / CY's of soil mix Note: Contractor may elect to use an approved pre mixed and bagged soil mixture meeting or exceeding the above requirements for all roof top planters if present. STANTEC LANDSCAPE PREPARATION & SOIL MIXES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 01 - 5 SECTION 32 93 01 - LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES F. Provide certification that all planting soil mixtures are 99% free of all viable nut grass and other undesirable weed seeds. G. All planting soil mixes shall be thoroughly blended to form a uniform planting medium suitable for exceptional plant growth. H. Test pH of existing soil and planting soil mixtures by method acceptable to current industry standards. If pH is not between 5.5 and 6.5 add approved soil conditioner/additive to bring pH within that range. I. The planting soil mixture for all plant material specified which grow best in slightly acidic soil shall have a pH range between 4.5 and 5.5. In the event that these pH ranges cannot be achieved, the desired pH shall be achieved by applying fertilizer or Dolomitic limestone in quantities necessary to adjust the pH to the specified range. J. Supply complete information on all analysis/test methodologies and results; laboratory certifications, manufacturer specifications, and agency approvals to Landscape Architect prior to placement of soil mixtures. In addition, pro- vide Landscape Architect with thoroughly mixed sample of all soil mixes for approval prior to placement (note pH ranges). Landscape Contractor shall make all modifications and improvement to soil mixes deemed necessary by Landscape Architect to meet requirements herein, and to ensure proper growing medium for all plant material without cost to Owner, prior to planting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Examine areas to receive soil preparation to assure work of other trades has been completed. B. Verify that plants to remain undisturbed have been clearly identified and pro- tected from injury during construction. If not, identify and protect plants to re- main according to procedures set forth in Section 32 9300 — Landscape Trees, Shrubs and Groundcovers. C. Remove all construction materials and debris from all areas to be land- scaped, without additional expense to Owner, prior to subsoil preparation. D. Verify that all areas have been properly graded and that all planting areas have adequate surface drainage prior to planting. Verify that two foot (2') topsoil "blanket" has been placed by others prior to proceeding. E. Do not proceed with soil preparation or soil top dressing until all unsatisfacto- ry conditions are corrected. 3.2 SITE PREPARATION: STANTEC LANDSCAPE PREPARATION & SOIL MIXES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 01 - 6 SECTION 32 93 01 - LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES A. General: Within the entire area to be landscaped, sodded or seeded, as shown on the drawings, the contractor shall complete the following site top- soil preparation items to eradicate all existing weed and/or natural ground cover. Initiate site topsoil preparation as stated herein and coordinate all work with the existing underground sprinkler system and electrical lines. B. Post Emergence Herbicide: Apply "Roundup" as manufactured by Monsanto Corp. according to manufacturers recommended rate and specification within the limits of all areas specified on the plans to be landscaped. Protect existing plants from overspray. Contractor shall ensure total eradication of all existing weeds and/or natural groundcover of all areas to be landscaped within the project area prior to proceeding with site clearing and/or tillage. 1. Existing sod areas or seeded areas may be stripped as required by Con- tractor. Disposal of excess materials shall be the Contractor's responsibil- ity. C. After all areas have been treated with post emergence herbicide and its effec- tive period, as determined by the manufacturer has expired, the contractor shall thoroughly clear all remaining treated existing weeds and/or groundcov- er, stumps, stones larger than 2" in diameter, roots, cable, wire, and all other debris or materials that may hinder proper grading, tillage, planting or subse- quent maintenance operations by approved means. All cleared material shall be totally removed from the project site and properly disposed of off property. At the contractor's option and Owner's Representative's approval, and after all debris except the remaining treated weeds and/or groundcover noted above has been cleared from the project site, the contractor may till all land- scape areas to a depth of all least 6" by plowing, disking, harrowing, or other approved methods until the condition of the site topsoil is acceptable for land- scape planting in the Landscape Architect's opinion. When conditions are such, be reason of drought, excessive moisture, or other factors, that satis- factory results are not likely to be obtained, the work may be stopped by the contractor agency and shall be resumed only when directed. Undulations or irregularities in the surface that would interfere with further construction oper- ations or maintenance shall be leveled before the next specified operation. D. Grading: Upon completion of tilling the site topsoil as described above and deemed acceptable by the Owner's Representative, the contractor shall fine grade all areas to the previously -established existing grades. All areas shall be maintained in a true and even condition. All areas shall be positively drained to existing drainage structure and properly compacted to prevent the formation of depressions where water will stand. All undulations and irregular- ities in the surface resulting from tillage, grading or application of soil amendments shall be leveled prior to initiating landscape planting. E. Pre -Emergence Herbicide: Apply "Surflan" or approved equal to all areas to be landscaped according to the manufacturers recommended rate and speci- fication. Contractor shall be responsible to re -apply appropriate herbicide to STANTEC LANDSCAPE PREPARATION & SOIL MIXES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 01 - 7 SECTION 32 93 01 - LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES eradicate all remaining weeds and maintain a weed -free condition in all areas throughout all landscape planting operations. F. All herbicide and soil fumigant applications shall be completed by experi- enced personnel only, in strict accordance with applicable codes and regula- tions, and contained within the limits of areas to be landscaped. The contrac- tor shall be responsible to replace all existing landscape material present on the site with equal sized material that may be damaged while applying herbi- cide, including overspray or improper application of herbicide, at his own ex- pense. G. Acceptance: Upon completion of all site topsoil preparation, the contractor shall request acceptance from the Owner's Representative prior to initiating landscape planting as specified. 3.3 PERFORMANCE: A. Subsoil: Remove all debris, gravel, rocks, and other deleterious material over 2" in diameter, within 12" of surface in areas to receive topsoil mixture, from the project site. Fine grade subsoil including disking top 12" of existing soil to assure finish grades are achieved by adding the specified depth of topsoil mixture. 1. Upon approval of existing topsoil for use in planting soil mixes, contractor may excavate beds to receive planting soil conditioners and till in condi- tioners with the approved existing topsoil to depths as specified and/or detailed. B. Soil Mixtures: 1. Prior to installing planting soil, test tree pits and planting areas for perco- lation. If areas do not drain, it is the contractor's responsibility to assure percolation by approved means (i.e. addition of gravel or excavate deeper to break through hardpan soil etc.). 2. Remove rocks and other objects over 1" in diameter. 3. Smooth soil mixtures to three (3) inches below top of surrounding paving, wherever planting beds abut paved surfaces. 4. Do not compact planting soil mixture, but do wet -soak planting areas to assure proper settlement. Replace topsoil/planting soil mixture to speci- fied grade after watering, where necessary. 5. Smooth topsoil to two inches (2") below finish grade in areas to be sod- ded. Remove plant material not indicated as existing or to be relocated in order to adhere to sod lines. 6. Remove limerock or soil cement and or any other materials deleterious to plant growth and survivability in tree planter islands within paved parking or construction areas. Do not damage sub -base material for paved sur- faces. Assure percolation and then backfill with approved planting soil mix. 7. Excavate annual beds and replace soil with approved planting soil mix. STANTEC LANDSCAPE PREPARATION & SOIL MIXES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 01 - 8 SECTION 32 93 01 - LANDSCAPE PREPARATION AND SOIL MIXES 3.4 CLEAN-UP: A. Immediately clean up spills, soil and conditioners on paved and finished sur- face areas. B. Remove debris and excess materials from project site immediately. END OF SECTION 32 93 01 STANTEC LANDSCAPE PREPARATION & SOIL MIXES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 01 - 9 SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide equipment, materials, services, and do all work necessary to perform landscape maintenance to limits of work indicated on Drawings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a tentative schedule, description of methods, and equipment to be used. 1.3 MAINTENANCE PERIOD A. Maintenance shall commence at the completion of the construction contract with all punch list items signed -off and a letter of completion signed by Owner as indi- cated in Planting Specifications. B. Maintenance shall be a period "to be determined" by the Owner (select one that best suits the project schedule to be determined by the Owner): 1. Month-to-month (submit to Owner a month-to-month cost for a period of 12 months. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Comply with applicable requirements of the following standards. Where these standards conflict with other specified requirements, the most restrictive require- ments shall govern. 1. National Arborist Association, 3537 Stratford Rd. Wantagh, NY 11793 (NAA). 2. Standards as established by the Florida Department of Grade and Standards for Nursery Plants. 1.5 OWNER -REQUIRED INFORMATION FROM CONTRACTOR A. During the maintenance period, provide records to Owner regarding man-hours required per task, and cost to accomplish the work per task. B. Notify Owner of the intended work schedule sufficiently in advance to allow Own- er time to serve as field observer during the maintenance period. 1.6 SITE FAMILIARIZATION A. Carefully and closely inspect the area development within the Limit of Work Line to become familiar with site conditions. B. Meet and walk site at the initiation of the maintenance program to determine the condition at the time of all paved areas, planting areas (including roof top planting areas), and irrigation system included within the Limit of Work. • • STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE • LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 1 SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Trees, shrubs, and ground covers: 1. All materials shall be maintained in a healthy, vigorous, and robust condition at all times. Tree crowns shall exhibit a full head of foliage, leaves shall show no desiccation, and the color shall be consistent with the species. Trunks, bark, and outer skin shall have no "unhealed breaks" or scars, decay cavities, no indications of borer tunneling, or evidence of soft wood. 2. Materials shall not exhibit symptoms of attack by any manner of plant pest or fungus, either in the leaf structure, the bark of outer skin, at the base of the trunk, or in the root system. 3. Trees planted and staked or guyed with water basins shall have stakes and guys firm, with a full thickness of mulch (keep mulch away from trunk base) and water basins fully maintained. (Owner may direct removal of water ba- sins, during the maintenance period.) 4. Shrubs, hedges, and ground covers shall have a neat, healthy appearance, and shall be trimmed in a manner to preserve the natural character of the plants. Beds shall be free of weeds. 5. Hedges shall be trimmed as directed by Owner for height and width, general- ly wider at the bottom than the top. B. Grasses: Grasses shall exhibit a vigorous, healthy, uniformly green appearance, relatively free from insects, grubs, chinch bugs or other pests, free from an ex- cessive accumulation of thatch. 1. Native grasses: Confirm with Owner requirement for yearly trimming back of native grasses, this practice is not necessarily required unless required by Owner. C. Irrigation system: 1. Irrigation system shall be supplemented by hose as required. Contractor shall visit site, inspect the system, and confer with Owner regarding the sys- tem's capabilities. 2. Grass and shrubs shall not interfere with operation of the irrigation heads. 3. System shall operate automatically on the normal watering schedule as ap- proved by Owner. 4. System shall operate without breaks or interruptions in service. Malfunctions shall be promptly reported and repaired. D. Pavement: 1. Hardscape paving shall be free from clippings, edgings, or vegetative trim- mings caused by maintenance operations. 2. Vehicles shall be equipped with drip pans. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to paved surfaces caused by dripping from vehicles or dam- age to pavement. • • STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 2 SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE E. General cleanliness: 1. The entire area shall be maintained in a neat and clean condition at all times. There shall be no accumulation of debris or litter along roadways, shrubs, beds, building corners, steps, and other structures. 2. During leaf drop, there shall be no accumulation creating hazards or hard- ships for vehicular or pedestrian traffic. 1.8 MAINTENANCE TASK SCHEDULES A. Submit a report monthly, including photographs, to Owner which will cover ob- servations and conclusions made during the site walk. The report shall include maintenance task schedules adjusted by Contractor to cover all special condi- tions or problems at that time. The final acceptable schedules will be as ap- proved by Owner. B. Notify Owner of the intended work schedule sufficiently in advance to allow Own- er time to serve as field observer during the maintenance period. 1.9 MONTHLY SUMMARY REPORT A. Deliver to Owner a monthly summary report on the condition of the pavement ar- eas, grass areas, planting areas, and irrigation system. Include digital color pho- tographs for damaged items or damaged or dying plant materials. The format and headings shall be the same for each report. B. If it becomes necessary to revise maintenance task schedules based on chang- ing conditions or problems which arise, include revised schedules in the sum- mary report for approval by Owner. 1.10 SAMPLES AND APPROVALS A. Before ordering, if ordering materials for the site should become necessary, submit typical samples to Owner for selection and approval. Do not order mate- rials until approval by Owner has been obtained. Delivered materials shall close- ly match approved samples. B. Submit list of proposed equipment to be used in the Work. 1.11 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. 30 days prior to start of maintenance operations, provide a notebook and PDF copy to Owner of written maintenance instructions for all turf areas, planting are- as, and irrigation systems within the project area. All necessary information needed to maintain areas and systems shall be provided, including man-hours required per task and cost per task to accomplish the work including total area sq. ft. for all areas to be maintained. Submit three hard copies plus PDF of in- structions to Owner for approval. Owner may require resubmittals of mainte- nance instructions if it is determined that the information provided is not sufficient or adequate to allow for proper maintenance. • • STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE • LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 3 SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 1 12 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR IIIA. Demonstrate experience by principals in landscape maintenance as proprietor, partnership, or corporation. In addition, provide the name of the school or organ- ization from which their training and experience was obtained, and the address and period of time by dates from start to finish of training. Give names of com- panies, addresses, and written references. Maintenance Contractor shall be bondable and show evidence of financial stability satisfactory to Owner that it is in good financial position to carry on the work. Contractor shall be able to take on the maintenance and welfare of the Contract areas throughout the specified period. Such care and maintenance of the Contract area shall be supervised by Contractor. B. All applications of materials, including fertilizers, fungicides, insecticides, and herbicides, shall be applied by licensed applicators in a manner that will ensure maximum effectiveness of materials and minimal hazard to the public, property, and total ecological environment. All claims, lawsuits, or litigations arising direct- ly or indirectly from application or use of maintenance materials shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor. Types of materials and rates of application, where applicable, shall be consistent with recommendations of appropriate state and lo- cal governing agencies. • 1.13 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY A. Conform to provisions of Specifications in performing the work required. Make management recommendations to Owner which will enhance the appearance of the site. B. In performance of this Contract, require all employees to comply with instructions pertaining to conduct and property regulations issued by Owner. C. During the term of this agreement, maintain insurance coverage in amounts deemed by Owner to be mutually adequate. D. During the term of this agreement, comply with all pertinent federal, state, and lo- cal ordinances and regulations. E. Provide periodic inspections of the site when requested by Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Furnish and utilize adequately maintained equipment in sufficient quantity to properly carry out the work specified herein. Unless specific arrangements are made in advance with Owner, Contractor's maintenance equipment shall not be stored on-site. III STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 4 SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 2.2 PLANTS A. Replace plants, trees, shrubs, grasses, and vines that are dying or in poor condi- tion in accord with Owner's approved Contract Directive or deficiency notice. Submit to Owner a list of replacement materials, indicating botanical name, common name, size, and unit cost installed complete and in place. In addition, indicate if the material is under the Contract installation warranty period. Obtain Owner's approval and written authorization prior to all replacements. B. All replacement plant materials shall be planted in accord with Project installation Specifications. 2.3 MULCH A. At all times, maintain mulch to thickness indicated in the installation Specifica- tions. 2.4 GUYING AND STAKING MATERIALS A. In accord with original Specifications and installation details. 2.6 SOD A. Sod in accord with original Drawings and Specifications. PART 3.00 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROCEDURES - GENERAL A. The following procedures may be adjusted as required by monitor's observations and recommendations. 3.2 TRASH AND LITTER PICK-UP A. Complete trash and litter cleanup of all pavement, lawn, and planting areas within the limit of work shall be carried out a minimum of once daily and additionally as necessary to maintain the site in a clean, neat, and orderly condition. B. Complete trash and litter cleanup of all pavement, lawn, and planting areas and emptying of trash receptacles shall be carried out Monday through Friday of each week for duration of Contract. C. Trash receptacles shall be emptied twice per week minimum. D. Trash shall be legally disposed of off-site. • • STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE • LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 5 SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 3.3 PAVEMENT AREA CLEANING / SWEEPING • A. Pavement areas within the Limit of Work shall be swept clean of all dirt, litter, and other debris a minimum of once weekly and additionally as necessary to maintain a clean condition. Pavement areas shall be either mechanically broom swept or power vacuumed as approved by Owner. 1. Pavement areas shall be swept clean of all dirt, litter, and other debris Mon- day through Friday. 2. Wash paved areas away from landscape areas to avoid contaminating land- scape areas with cleaners and to avoid excessive water on the perimeter of the landscape area. 3.4 PAVED AREA WASHING A. Pavement areas within the Limit of Work shall be washed clean with water using hose or other means approved by Owner a minimum of once weekly and addi- tionally as necessary to maintain a clean condition. B. Owner may request yearly power washing of paved areas as an additional ser- vice. 3.5 DAMAGE INSPECTION A. Regularly inspect areas and report all vandalized and otherwise damaged mate- rials or conditions within the Limit of Work. • 3.6 GRASS MAINTENANCE A. Soil analysis: At start of the maintenance program, take soil tests in varying loca- tions within each of the grass areas to determine fertilizer requirements of the soils. The number and exact locations shall be subject to approval by Owner. Provide minimum one test for every 20,000 sq. ft. of landscape area. 1 For fertilizer requirements, take soil samples to a depth of 3 in. to 6 in. Take a thin, uniform slice off the straight side of a troweled or spaded V-shaped hole from top to bottom. Store each sample separately from every other sample. Spread out samples to dry on paper which is clean and free from contamination. Protect samples from contamination. After samples are col- lected, they shall be sent to Owner -approved agricultural testing laboratory. B. Watering: Watering of the lawn and planting areas by the landscape irrigation system shall be applied in accord with Owner -approved irrigation schedule. The Schedule shall provide an application rate of at least 1 in. of water every 5 to 7 days. Water shall be allowed to penetrate the soil to a depth of 6 in. 1 Contractor shall familiarize itself with the existing system, and shall inform Owner regarding malfunctions or imperfections within the system. The cost of repairs to the system shall be borne by Owner, unless the repair is directly attributable to negligence of Contractor. STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 6 SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 2. Water weak areas by hand and avoid excessive irrigation in other areas where soil conditions are wetter. Adjust flow rates and head placements as needed to give uniform precipitation. Alter system in areas of high or low water evapotranspiration rates to avoid overly dry or wet areas. Aerate as needed to avoid poor aeration or poor water infiltration. Maintain good soil moisture. C. Grass fertilization program: Furnish and apply commercial fertilizer at the rates recommended by the soil analysis approved by Owner. Provide for applications at the minimum rate of 5 Ib. for every 1000 sq. ft. each application. For estimating purposes provide applications three (3) times per year. D. Weed control: 1. If weeds occur, they shall first be identified and removed by hand (by the roots) first if appropriate or by the appropriate herbicide used to eradicate them. Apply herbicide in accord with manufacturer's instructions and rec- ommendations and as approved by Owner. Application shall be carried out by Contractor as recommended by manufacturer's instructions and approved by Owner. Generally hand removal is preferred to avoid over use of herbi- cides in public areas 2. Control weeds in selected areas where weeds are present. Timing on con- trol shall depend on type of weed (perennial or annual) and its characteris- tics. 3. Do not apply herbicides for weed control when the wind exceeds 5 mph. Use herbicides carefully, especially in areas adjacent to other planting. Do not apply herbicides in conjunction with lawn renovations and reseeding or over seeding. All weed control measures shall be placed under the immedi- ate supervision of Owner. 4. Herbicide applications for control of annual grassy weeds shall be made with pre -emergence herbicides in accord with label instructions. 5. Herbicide applications for control of existing broadleaf weeds shall be made in accord with label instructions. 6. Apply non-selective and/or pre -emergence herbicides to cracks in paved ar- eas as necessary for weed control. 7. Apply herbicides under the supervision of a Certified Pesticide Applicator, with prior approval from Owner. E. Disease and pest control: 1. Notify Owner of diseased or distressed grass areas, and submit diseased or distressed samples to Owner for testing. Apply insecticides and/or fungi- cides to grass areas only where necessary and as recommended by Owner. 2. Control insects, pests, and fungus by inspecting grass at periodic intervals for presence of grubs, chinch bugs, blight, rust, leaf spot and other patho- gens, verify identifications, and treat affected areas as required. Apply all controls under the direct supervision of Owner. F. Sod replacement: 1. If grass areas are at any time determined to be dead, in a state of damage, or decline to the point of requiring re -sodding, identify areas and report them to Owner. • • STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 41) LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 7 • SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 2. It shall then be the responsibility of Contractor to ensure that the area is re - sodded as soon as weather conditions permit. a. Carry out the replacement with the cost being borne by Owner, unless it has been determined to be from negligence on the part of Contractor. b. Replacement sod shall be of the same species as is existing. All sod- ding procedures shall be as approved by Owner. G. Mowing cycles: 1. Determine frequency and number of mowing cycles per year with Owner prior to starting maintenance services. Generally, less cycles are needed in the winter months. 3.7 PLANT MATERIAL MAINTENANCE A. Weeding and edging: 1. Mulched planting beds and individual mulched plant pits shall be neat in ap- pearance and maintained to the lines originally laid out. 2. Edging of grass around mulch shall be done as necessary to maintain a nat- ural appearance. Do not "over edge" bed lines causing wider and wider planting gaps between the shrubs/groundcovers and the grass bed lines. If this occurs over time the Contractor will be responsible to bear costs to re- place sod to original bed line layout as directed by the Owner. 3. Hand weeding of mulched planting beds and pits shall be done weekly to maintain control of weeds without the use of herbicides as much as possible. 4. Debris from weeding and edging shall be removed from site and disposed of properly by Contractor. B. Weed and pest control: 1. All plant materials shall be closely monitored for insect and disease prob- lems. Due to the nature of these problems, plants shall be inspected weekly. Insecticides shall be applied on a control basis under the supervision of a li- censed Certified Pesticide Applicator and approved by Owner for application around animal areas. 2. A weed spray or granular material for both pre -emergent and perennial weeds shall be applied in the early spring, to be followed by spot treatments in trouble areas. 3. Safety measures shall be employed to ensure that toxic substances are used in a responsible manner without adversely affecting plant materials and the general public. These measures include applying materials in accord with manufacturer's recommendations, alerting Owner regarding the timing, material, its toxicity, and its usage. C. Disease and pest control: 1. Provide all seasonal and required spraying and/or dusting of trees, shrubs, and ground covers. Spray materials and techniques shall be as recom- mended by the local agricultural extension service. 2. Show spraying dates on schedule submitted to Owner. D. Fertilization: 1. Prior to maintenance, obtain maintenance fertility recommendations from A & L Plains Laboratories (Tel: 806-763-4278), or approved equal. STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 8 SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 2. For estimating purposes, provide 4 Ib. of nitrogen per 1000 sq. ft. Nutro Coat Fertilizer 17-6-8 (360 -day formulation) application techniques in accord with standard horticultural practices three (3) times per year. E. Mulching: 1. Maintain a minimum depth of 2 in. of mulch as specified on original Drawings and Specifications over the entire surface of the plant beds and tree pits to maintain a neat and attractive appearance. Keep much 3"-6" away from tree trunks. The mulch shall be maintained throughout the growing season and new mulch shall be installed as required to keep a neat and attractive ap- pearance. 2. Spray or treat for borers, ants, or ground insects as required. All spraying shall be done under the immediate supervision of Owner. F. Pruning: 1. Pruning techniques shall be in accord with ANSI A300 standards and Own- er's direction. 2. Trees shall be pruned in late fall or during the winter months to remove dead, damaged, or diseased wood and to encourage new and healthy growth, to limb up, shape, or allow unobstructed views. Tropicals and sub- tropicals shall be pruned in the spring and summer. With young trees, the first few years will require minimum pruning, with time spent removing wood from lower portions of trees. Pruning shall occur when damage has oc- curred. a. All pruning cuts shall be made adjacent to bud or branch to reduce sucker growth. Cuts at the trunk of a tree shall be made in line with the "collar" where the branch meets the trunk -not parallel with the trunk. Tree branch collar shall not be damaged. b. Deciduous trees shall be pruned to maintain shape and clearance. Bro- ken branches or dead material shall be removed as necessary. Lower branches of trees shall be removed should they interfere with pedestrian or vehicular traffic as directed by Owner. c. Flowering trees shall be pruned only after blooming. Do not cut back Crape Myrtle trees — prune only as required seasonally to maintain healthy growth. d. Palms, tropicals, and sub-tropicals shall be pruned in late spring or summer. 3. Shrubs: a. The broadleaf evergreens shall be lightly pruned after flowering and be- fore the new growth matures and turns dark green. Prune to retain the natural character and shape of the plant using hand pruners, not hedge shears. b. Conifers shall be lightly pruned after the new growth has developed but before the new growth matures and turns dark green. Prune to retain the natural character and shape of the plant using hand pruners, not hedge shears. c. Deciduous shrubs shall be pruned after flowering, removing no more than 1/3 of the old wood. Prune to retain the natural character and shape of the plant using hand pruners, not hedge shears. Approval of pruning goal must be approved by Owner prior to the work. • • STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE • LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 -9 • SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE d. Rejuvenation and special pruning can occur at any time of the year, de- pending upon the specific type of shrub. e. Multi -stemmed upright shrubs shall be put on a 3- or 4 -year rotation once they have approached mature or desired size. In this manner 1/3 to 1/4 of the largest stems are removed to the ground each year. 4. Vines shall be pruned after the new growth has developed but before the new growth matures and turns dark green. Primarily only ends of vines will require pruning to keep vines from spreading into adjacent beds, paved are- as, protected areas, and to direct the vine in the desired direction and en- courage new growth. Pruning shall be performed to retain natural character of vines and to disguise pruning cuts on ends of vines. G. Tree guys and water basins: Tighten guy wires, reshape saucers, and refurbish mulch as required. Remove guys when tree root system is adequately estab- lished for the tree canopy and trunk to move without falling over in windy condi- tions. H. Dead and/or damaged plant material removal: Remove plant material (as re- quired throughout the year) that is dead, damaged beyond repair, or badly dis- eased when no appropriate treatment is likely to save it or return it to an appear- ance that is acceptable to Owner. I. Plant material replacement: Plants that are dead or not in satisfactory condition as determined by Owner, shall be removed from site. These plants and any plants missing shall be replaced as soon as conditions permit. All replacement shall be plants of the same variety and size as plants that were removed. Obtain Owner's approval for costs prior to installation. • 3.8 WATER EDGE MAINTENANCE A. All planted areas surrounding water edge with the Contract Limits shall be main- tained on a regular basis to maintain a neat well-groomed appearance. B. Perennial and shrub beds shall be kept free from weeds at all times. All perenni- als shall be dead headed after flowering. Perennials shall be fertilized in April with fertilizer in accord with approved agricultural soils report. C. Ornamental grasses along the water edge shall be cut back each spring as ap- proved by Owner. D. Algae and aquatic weed problems shall be monitored by Contractor. Contractor shall notify Owner at the first sign of problems and make recommendations ac- cordingly. E. Water edge maintenance shall include weekly removal of litter, fallen branches, leaves and debris, along that portion of the water edge within the Contract Limits. • STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 10 SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE 3.9 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM MAINTENANCE A. System familiarization: Contractor shall inspect irrigation system and become familiar with layout of the system, materials and equipment used, and services relating to it. This includes irrigation system as installed, all piping, valves, sprin- kler heads, access boxes, controls, drains, and appurtenances. B. Shop drawings: Contractor shall obtain a set of the complete shop drawings and "As Built" drawings from Owner. C. Operation and maintenance manual: At the start of the irrigation system mainte- nance program, Contractor shall obtain one copy of the "Operation and Mainte- nance Manual" from Owner. No substitution of irrigation equipment will be per- mitted unless approved by Owner in writing before substitution is made. D. System maintenance procedures: 1. Maintain irrigation system in optimum operating condition during entire maintenance period. Ensure that manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations are closely followed. 2. If at any time any item or part of the system is not functioning properly or is not as intended, bring the condition to the attention of Owner and record the problem in the semi-monthly summary report. All replacement parts, materi- als, and labor (except for defects in original parts, materials, and workman- ship which shall be the responsibility of others to replace and repair) shall be the responsibility of Contractor to provide and ensure that the necessary re- pairs or changes are made to bring the system to an operable and accepta- ble condition. Carry out the replacement with Owner and with the cost being borne by Owner, unless there has been negligence on the part of Contractor. 3. All replacement parts and irrigation pipe shall be by the same manufacturer or Owner -approved equal. 4. In all cases for repairs or changes, a reasonable time period shall be deter- mined during which the work can be accomplished. 5. Be responsible for the following items on a weekly basis: a. Check spray heads to ensure their proper operation and check for dam- age. Adjust head spray patterns if required to provide complete and ad- equate coverage of areas to be watered. b. Clean spray heads and trim grass around heads. c. Immediately repair all damage that may occur, after notifying Owner and noting the problem in the semi-monthly summary report. 6. Test entire irrigation system at the start of the maintenance period. a. Irrigation system shall be tested for satisfactory operation. Water shall be turned into each portion of irrigation line and maintained at full pres- sure. If unsatisfactory performance or leaks develop, this shall be de- scribed in the summary report, the condition corrected, and these testing procedures repeated until satisfactory operation is obtained. b. Check all heads to ensure their proper operation and coverage. c. Check all electrical and plumbing systems to ensure their proper opera- tion. d. Observe the operation for a complete day's cycle. • • STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 11 0 • • • SECTION 32 93 05 - LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE IRRIGATION SYSTEM MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE TASK IMPORTANCE FREQUENCY Spray head check X Weekly Spray head cleaning X Weekly Spray -head repairs 0 As necessary System testing X Monthly System repairs 0 As necessary X = Task is mandatory. 0 = Task done as needed (approval required by Owner). END OF SECTION 329305 STANTEC LANDSCAPE MAINTENANCE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20-0008 PAGE 32 93 05 - 12 SECTION 33 01 20 - MANHOLE REHABILITATION PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall provide manhole rehabilitation, modifications, and adjustments as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Submittal Procedures. B. Certificates: The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's certificates of conformance. C. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's drawings and data sheets for material to be supplied under this Section. Indicate sizes and types to be installed. 1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Upon delivery and before unloading, the Contractor shall inspect the materials for any damage incurred in transit and shall note such damage on the delivery ticket. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for and will decide how materials are unloaded. The Contractor shall follow manufacturer's recommendations. C. The Contractor shall follow manufacturer's recommendations for storing materials to minimize damage before installation. D. The Contractor shall follow manufacturer's standard procedures for handling materials. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 HYDRAULIC PLUG A. Quick -setting grout material for sealing leaks through manhole structures 2.2 MANHOLE CONNECTORS A. Connections to existing sanitary sewer manholes using PVC sewer main shall be made with a Trelleborg Kor-N-Seal pipe -to -manhole connector. 2.3 MANHOLE BENCHES A. Lean concrete with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 2,000 psi (min) at 28 days 2. Cement: Portland cement, Type V 3. Maximum Water to Cement Ratio: 0.60 by weight 4. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1 inch STANTEC MANHOLE REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 33 01 30 - 1 2.4 MANHOLE LINING A. Interior manhole coatings shall be Strong -Seal MS -2C, Raven 405, or SprayWall by Sprayroq. 2.5 MATERIALS FOR PIPE PENETRATION PATCHING A. Comply with applicable Sections of Division 03 — Concrete. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 CLEANING A. Prior to commencing work, remove loose dirt, grease, and debris from the floor and interior walls of manhole using high pressure water. 3.2 LEAKS AND REPAIRS A. Active leaks, if present, shall be sealed by application of hydraulic plug material. 3.3 MANHOLE CONNECTIONS A. New pipe penetrations into existing manholes shall be core drilled. Apply a protective epoxy coating to the core drilled concrete and the ends of any reinforcing steel exposed. A flexible Kor-N-Seal rubber boot shall be installed. B. All connections to manholes shall be water tight. C. Any new manhole cores/connections require a new lining. 3.4 PIPE PENETRATION REMOVAL AND PATCHING A. Existing pipe penetrations shall be removed by core drilling the pipe. B. Drill and grout rebar into the manhole walls as shown in the Drawings. Apply a cold joint waterstop around the perimeter of the core drilled opening. 3.5 MANHOLE INVERTS AND BENCHES A. Inverts shall be U-shaped and have a minimum depth of 1/2 pipe diameter. B. Benches shall be sloped and have smooth surfaces without defects that allow debris to accumulate. C. Comply with the requirements of Section 03 31 00 — Cast -in -Place Concrete. 3.6 MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION A. Clean manhole and remove debris. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. B. Repair minor defects in wall, benches, and inverts with repairing cement. C. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. STANTEC MANHOLE REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 33 01 30 - 2 D. Apply lining in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.7 MANHOLE FRAME AND COVER ADJUSTMENTS A. The Contractor shall remove, thoroughly clean by sandblasting, and properly store the existing manhole frame and cover for subsequent reinstallation. Any damage to the chimney caused by the removal of the existing manhole frame shall be repaired by the Contractor at his expense. B. If the manhole frame is to be raised, the correct size frame adjustment rings shall be installed to enable the frame and cover to be set to the proposed finish grade. Maximum grade adjustment shall be 12 inches. Sealing of "stacked" rings shall be in accordance with approved manufacturer's recommendations. The adjustment ring shall be custom manufactured to match the roadway cross slope, where required. C. For grade adjustments up to three inches (3"), the manhole cover may be raised to meet finish grade by installing a non-metallic composite polypropylene/fiberglass cover adjustment ring(s). The ring(s) shall be set in the existing manhole frame per the manufacturer's recommendations with the manhole cover set to finish grade. D. A manhole adjustment ring shall be installed between the manhole cone and the manhole frame. E. Secure the manhole frame and provide a water tight connection between the frame and the manhole cone using non -shrink grout. END OF SECTION STANTEC MANHOLE REHABILITATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 33 01 30 - 3 • SECTION 33 92 20 - DUCTILE IRON PIPING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide ductile iron pipe and appurtenant WORK, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS AWWA C104 Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water AWWA C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Pipe Systems AWWA C110 Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3 in through 48 in for Water AWWA C111 Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings AWWA C115 Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with Ductile -Iron or Gray -Iron Threaded Flanges AWWA C116 Protective Fusion -Bonded Epoxy Coatings for the Interior and Exterior Surfaces of Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings for Water Supply Service. AWWA C150 Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe AWWA C151 Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast for Water AWWA C153 Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings. for Water Service AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints ASTM C 150 Portland Cement 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals Procedures and the following supplemental requirements: B. Shop Drawings 1. Certified dimensional drawings of valves, fittings, and appurtenances. C. Certifications: Certified affidavit of compliance for pipe and other products or materials furnished under this Section and as specified in the referenced standards and the following supplemental requirements: 1. Physical and chemical properties. STANTEC DUCTILE IRON PIPING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB PAGE 33 92 20 - 1 2. Hydrostatic test reports. D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing and paying for sampling and testing as necessary for the certifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tests: Except as modified herein, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the referenced standards as applicable. B. The CONTRACTOR shall perform said material tests as part of the WORK. The ENGINEER shall have the right to witness testing conducted by the CONTRACTOR; provided, that the CONTRACTOR's schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the ENGINEER. C. In addition to those tests specifically required, the ENGINEER may request additional samples of any material including lining and coating samples for testing by the OWNER. The additional samples shall be furnished as a part of the WORK. D. Inspection: Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the provisions of the referenced standards, as supplemented by the requirements herein. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER in writing of the manufacturing starting date not less than 14 Days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture. E. During the manufacture of the pipe, the ENGINEER shall be given access to areas where manufacturing is in process and shall be permitted to make inspections necessary to confirm compliance with the Specifications. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE GENERAL A. Markings: The CONTRACTOR shall legibly mark specials 24 -inches diameter and larger in accordance with the laying schedule and marking diagram. Each fitting shall be marked at each end with top field centerline. B. Handling and Storage: The pipe shall be handled as a minimum at the 1/3 points by use of wide slings, padded cradles, or other devices designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe coating/exterior. The use of chains, hooks, or other equipment that might injure the pipe coating/exterior will not be permitted. Stockpiled pipe shall be supported on padded skids, sand or earth berms free of rock exceeding 3 -inches diameter, sand bags, or suitable means so that the coating will not be damaged. The pipe shall not be rolled and shall be secured to prevent accidental rolling C. Laying Lengths: Nominal pipe laying lengths shall be 20 -feet. D. Finish: The pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface crazing, and roughness. E. Closures and Correction Pieces: Closures and correction pieces shall be provided as required so that closures may be made due to different headings in the pipe laying operation and so that correction may be made to adjust the pipe laying to conform to pipe stationing on the Drawings. The locations of correction pieces and closure assemblies STANTEC DUCTILE IRON PIPING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB PAGE 33 92 20 - 2 • A. Fittings for ductile ironprequirements e shall conform to the of AWWA C153 or AWWA C110 and shall have a minimum pressure rating of 250 psi. Ductile iron fittings larger than 48 -inches shall conform to AWWA C153. are indicated. Any change in location or number of said items shall only be as accepted by the ENGINEER. 2.2 SPECIALS AND FITTINGS • • 2.3 DESIGN OF PIPE A. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked according to AWWA C150 and C 151 except where modified by this Section. B. Pipe Dimensions: The pipe shall be of the diameter and class indicated in the drawings. C. Fitting Dimensions: The fittings shall be of the diameter and class indicated in the drawings. D. Joint Design: Ductile iron pipe and fittings for buried pressure service shall be furnished with restrained joints, unless otherwise indicated. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for buried gravity service shall be furnished with mechanical joints or push -on joints as required, unless otherwise indicated. Above ground ductile iron pipe and fittings joints shall be as indicated. Flanged joints or grooved and shouldered joints shall be furnished where required. 1. Mechanical and push -on joints shall conform to AWWA C111. 2. Flanged joints shall conform to AWWA C115. Where threaded flanges are provided, the pipe wall thickness under the cut threads shall not be less than the calculated net thickness required for the pressure class of the pipe. 3. Restrained joints shall be Flex -Ring restrained joint by American Ductile Iron Pipe, TR FLEXrestrained joint by U.S. Pipe, or equal. 4. Joint restraining devices that impart point loads and/or wedging action on the pipe wall as a means of joint restraint shall not be allowed unless there are no other options for joint restraint available. Under such circumstances, the CONTRACTOR may propose such devices provided the following conditions are met and the request is made as a substitution: a. A formal request for substitution is submitted stating the locations where the devices are intended to be used and a statement from the device manufacturer and the pipe manufacturer that the proposed device is appropriate for the intended installation and is rated at least for the class of the pipe being supplied. b. A statement from the pipe manufacturer is provided accepting the use of the retaining devices and indicating that the use of such devices will in no way affect the warranty of the pipe and/or the performance of the pipe. c. The manufacturer of the device and the pipe manufacturer jointly provide instruction on the proper installation of the device to the personnel installing the units and provide certification to the OWNER that the installers are adequately STANTEC DUCTILE IRON PIPING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB PAGE 33 92 20 - 3 trained in the installation of the units and that warranties are in full affect for the project. d. The devices shall be MegaLug Model 1100 as manufactured by EBAA Iron or equal. 5. Grooved and Shouldered Joints shall meet the requirements of mechanical -type couplings in accordance with Section 43 10 50 — Piping, General and conform to AVWVA C606. E. For bell -and -spigot ends with rubber gaskets, the clearance between the bells and spigots shall be such that when combined with the gasket groove configuration and the gasket itself, will provide watertight joints under all operating conditions when properly installed. The CONTRACTOR shall require the pipe manufacturer to submit details complete with significant dimensions and tolerances and also to submit performance data indicating that the proposed joint has performed satisfactorily under similar conditions. In the absence of a history of field performance, the results of a test program shall be submitted. 2.4 EPDXY LINER A. Epoxy Lining for Shop Application: Except as otherwise provided herein, interior surfaces of all ductile iron pipe, fittings, and specials shall be cleaned lined in the sho with 40 mils of Induron Protecto 401 or American Ductile Iron Pipe Polybond Plus applied centrifugally and in conformance with AVWVA C-116. During the lining operation and thereafter, the pipe shall be maintained in a round condition by suitable bracing or strutting. The lining machines shall be of a type that has been used successfully for similar work. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If lining is damaged or found faulty at the Site, the damaged or unsatisfactory portions shall be replaced with lining conforming to these Specifications. 2.5 EXTERIOR PROTECTION OF PIPE A. Exterior Coating of Exposed Piping: The exterior surfaces of pipe which will be exposed to the atmosphere inside structures or above ground shall be thoroughly cleaned and then given a shop coat of rust -inhibitive primer conforming to the requirements of Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating. B. Exterior Coating of Buried Piping: The exterior coating shall be an asphaltic coating approximately 1 -mil thick. C. Polyethylene Sleeve: Sleeves shall conform to the requirements of AVWVA C105, CONTRACTOR's choice between tubular 8 -mil thick linear low-density film or 4 -mil thick high-density cross -laminated film. Color shall be white. STANTEC DUCTILE IRON PIPING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB PAGE 33 92 20 - 4 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE • A. The CONTRACTOR shall inspect each pipe and fitting prior to installation to insure that there are no damaged portions of the pipe. Pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced by the CONTRACTOR. • B. Before placement of pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign substance which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all times thereafter. For this purpose, the openings of pipes and fittings in the trench shall be closed during any interruption to the WORK. C. Pipe Laying: The pipe shall be installed in accordance with AWWA C600. D. Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding material. No blocking will be permitted, and the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the full length of the pipe. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of handling devices after the pipe is laid. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations and for application of coating on field joints. E. Each section of pipe 24 -inches diameter and larger shall be laid in the order and position shown on the laying schedule. Each section shall be laid to the line and grade, within approximately one -inch plus or minus. F. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the ENGINEER may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, by the use of bevel adapters, or by the use of additional fittings. However, in no case shall the deflection in the joint exceed 75 percent of the maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No joint shall be misfit any amount that will be detrimental to the strength and water tightness of the finished joint. G. Except for short runs that may be permitted by the ENGINEER, pipes shall be laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by the following pipe to prevent movement. Bends shall be properly installed as indicated. H. Cold Weather Protection: No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of the excavation before backfilling occurs. I. Pipe and Specials Protection: The openings of pipe and specials shall be protected with suitable bulkheads to prevent unauthorized access by persons, animals, water, or any undesirable substance. At all times, means shall be provided to prevent the pipe from floating. J. Pipe Cleanup: As pipe laying progresses, the CONTRACTOR shall keep the pipe interior free of debris. The CONTRACTOR shall completely clean the interior of the pipe of sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and any other debris following completion of pipe laying and shall perform any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed pipeline. STANTEC DUCTILE IRON PIPING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB PAGE 33 92 20 - 5 3.2 RUBBER GASKETED JOINTS A. Rubber Gasketed Joints: Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell end of the pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned, and a clean rubber gasket shall be placed in the bell groove. The spigot end of the pipe and the inside surface of the gasket shall be carefully cleaned and lubricated. The lubricant shall be suitable for lubricating the parts of the joint for assembly and be a compound listed as in compliance with NSF Standard 61. The lubricant shall be nontoxic, shall not support the growth of bacteria, and shall have no deleterious effects on the gasket material. The lubricant shall not impart taste or odor to water in the pipe. The spigot end of the pipe section shall then be inserted into the bell of the previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted. 3.3 POLYETHYLENE SLEEVE UNBONDED PROTECTION A. Buried ductile iron pipe shall be polyethylene encased in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C105, CONTRACTOR's choice between Method A or Method B. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPE APPURTENANCES A. Protection of Appurtenances: Where the joining pipe is dielectric -coated, buried appurtenances shall be coated in kind. Where pipe is encased in polyethylene sleeves, buried appurtenances shall be encased in polyethylene. B. Installation of Valves: Valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent any injury or damage to any part of the valve. Joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared prior to installation. The CONTRACTOR shall adjust stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to insure proper operation. C. Valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and in the location indicated. END OF SECTION STANTEC DUCTILE IRON PIPING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB PAGE 33 92 20 - 6 SECTION 33 95 43 - LARGE PVC NON -PRESSURE PIPE PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY • • A. The Contractor shall provide all 18- to 27 -inch underground PVC non -pressure pipe and appurtenant Work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM D1784 — Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds 2. ASTM D232 — Recommended Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer Pipe 3. ASTM F477 — Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe 4. ASTM F679 — Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large -Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 — Sub B. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings pipe, joints, bends, special fittings, and piping appurtenances. C. Certificates: The Contractor shall provide manufacturer's indicating conformance to the Contract Documents. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE mittal Procedures. and laying diagrams of all certificates for materials A. Testing: Materials testing shall be based upon applicable ASTM Test Methods and AWWA Standards referenced herein. Costs of such inspection and tests shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Mandrel Test: All large PVC gravity sewer pipe shall be tested for deflection and obstructions. The mandrel test shall be performed after backfilling and compacting but prior to final paving and prior to leakage testing. A rigid mandrel, with a circular cross section having a diameter at least 97 percent of the base inside diameter as defined in ASTM F679, shall be pulled through the pipe by hand. The minimum length of the circular portion of the mandrel shall be equal to the nominal diameter of the pipe. If the mandrel sticks in the pipe at any point the pipe shall be repaired and retested. C. Certificates: Manufacturer's notarized certificates of compliance shall be furnished by the Contractor. D. The pipe shall be subjected to the specified flattening resistance, impact resistance, and stiffness tests. STANTEC LARGE PVC NON -PRESSURE PIPE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 33 95 43 - 1 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. PVC pipe, in compliance with this Specification, shall be continuously and permanently marked with the manufacturer's name and code, pipe size, PVC minimum cell classification, pipe stiffness designation, and the designation ASTM F679. B. The manufacturer's code shall include the year, month, day, shift, plant and extruder of manufacture. This coding shall be done in conjunction with records to be held by the manufacturer for 2 years, covering quality control tests, raw material batch number, and other information deemed necessary by the manufacturer. 2.2 PIPE A. PVC pipe shall be joined by compression joints unless otherwise indicated, and shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Polyvinyl chloride pipe (PVC) shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F679. Material for PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D1784 for Class 12364-C or 12454-C as defined therein. Maximum filler content shall be 10 percent. 2. Rubber gaskets for compression type joints for PVC pipe and fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F477. 2.3 FITTINGS A. Fittings for PVC pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F679. The ring groove and gasket ring shall be compatible with PVC pipe ends. B. The minimum wall thickness of the fittings shall be not less than the minimum wall thickness of the equivalent size of pipe. 2.4 BEDDING MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise indicated, all material used for pipe bedding shall conform to the requirements for "Embedment Materials" as specified in ASTM D2321. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Laying, jointing, testing for defects, and for leakage shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer, and shall be subject to his approval before acceptance. Material found during the progress to have defects will be rejected and the Contractor shall promptly remove such defective materials from the Site. B. Installation shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2321 and to the supplementary requirements or modifications herein. Wherever the provisions of this Section and the requirements of ASTM D2321 are in conflict, the more stringent provision shall apply. C. The internal diameter of the pipe barrel shall not be reduced by more than 3 percent of its base diameter when measured after backfilling and compacting but prior to final paving. If this amount of allowable pipe deflection is exceeded, the Contractor shall uncover the pipe and shall improve the quality of the pipe zone backfill material and/or STANTEC LARGE PVC NON -PRESSURE PIPE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 33 95 43 - 2 compaction to the extent that the allowable pipe deflection is not exceeded. Excessive deflection shall be checked for by pulling a mandrel through the pipe, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. II3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL A. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 30 00 - Earthwork, and as required herein. B. The minimum depth of cover over the top of the pipe shall be 36 inches unless otherwise indicated. • • 3.3 LAYING PIPE A. The pipe shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D2321 and this Section and the pipe sections shall be closely jointed to form a smooth flow line. Immediately before placing each section of pipe in final position for jointing, the bedding for the pipe shall be checked for firmness and uniformity of surface. B. Proper implements, tools, and facilities as recommended by the pipe manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions shall be provided and used by the Contractor for safe and efficient execution of the Work. Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of derrick, ropes, or other suitable equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to pipe and fittings. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench. C. Cutting and machining of the pipe shall be accomplished in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's standard procedures for this operation. Pipe shall not be cut with a cold chisel, standard iron pipe cutter, or any other method that may fracture the pipe or will produce ragged, uneven edges. D. The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering into the trench. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be repaired or replaced. Foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of the pipe before lowering into position in the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean during and after laying. Openings in the pipeline shall be closed with watertight expandable type sewer plugs or PVC test plugs at the end of each day's operation or whenever the pipe openings are left unattended. The use of burlap, wood, or other similar temporary plugs will not be permitted. E. Adequate protection and maintenance of all underground and surface utility structures, drains, sewers, and other obstructions encountered in the progress of the Work shall be furnished by the Contractor at its own expense. F. Where the grade or alignment of the pipe is obstructed by existing utility structures such as conduits, ducts, pipes, branch connections to main sewers, or main drains, the obstruction shall be permanently supported, relocated, removed, or reconstructed by the Contractor in cooperation with owners of such utility structures. Unless otherwise indicated, this work shall be performed at the Contractor's expense. 3.4 HANDLING A. Handling of the PVC pipe shall be done with care to ensure that the pipe is not damaged in any manner during storage, transit, loading, unloading, and installation. STANTEC LARGE PVC NON -PRESSURE PIPE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 33 95 43 - 3 B. Pipe shall be inspected both prior to and after installation in the ditch and defective lengths shall be rejected and immediately removed from the working area. 3.5 FIELD JOINTING A. Each pipe compression type joint shall be joined with a lock -in rubber ring and a ring groove that is designed to resist displacement during pipe insertion. B. The ring and the ring seat inside the bell shall be wiped clean before the gasket is inserted. At this time a thin film of lubricant shall be applied to the exposed surface of the ring and to the outside of the clean pipe end. Lubricant other than that furnished with the pipe shall not be used. The end of the pipe shall be then forced into the ring to complete the joint. C. The pipe shall not be deflected either vertically or horizontally in excess of the printed recommendations of the manufacturer of the coupling. D. When pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed to prevent trench water from entering pipe. Adequate backfill shall be deposited on pipe to prevent floating of pipe. Any pipe that has floated shall be removed from the trench, cleaned, and relaid in an acceptable manner. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the trench conditions or weather are unsuitable for such work. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF BENDS, TEES, AND REDUCERS A. Fittings shall be installed utilizing standard installation procedures. Fittings shall be lowered into trench by means of rope, cable, chain, or other acceptable means without damage to the fittings. Cable, rope, or other devices used for lowering fitting into trench, shall be attached around exterior of fitting for handling. Under no circumstances shall the cable, rope, or other device be attached through the fitting's interior for handling. Fittings shall be carefully connected to pipe or other facility, and joint shall be checked to insure a sound and proper joint. 3.7 ANCHOR BLOCKS A. Anchor blocks shall be installed in accordance with the details indicated. 3.8 TESTING A. Field testing of gravity sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 01 74 20 - Gravity Pipeline Testing. END OF SECTION STANTEC LARGE PVC NON -PRESSURE PIPE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20-0008 PAGE 33 95 43 - 4 SECTION 40 05 00 - PIPING, GENERAL PART 1 --GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide piping systems indicated, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to piping in Divisions 33 and 40, and on the Drawings and as indicated in the Piping Schedule. C. The Drawings define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of support, pipe size, and pipe type. The Drawings are not pipe construction or fabrication drawings. The CONTRACTOR shall prepare pipe spooling and fabrication drawings and shall submit them to the ENGINEER for review. D. Where pipe layout details are not indicated on the Drawings, it is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to develop the details necessary to design and construct piping systems to accommodate the specific equipment provided, and to provide spacers, adapters, and connectors for a complete and functional system. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe, piping, pipe work, pipe system, piping system, or similar words, singular or plural shall mean and include, any type of pipes, tubes, fittings, valves, piping specialties, appurtenances, supports, restraints, anchors, coatings and linings and items related to piping. IIIB. Submerged piping, underwater piping or similar words, shall include any piping located • two feet above water surface in basins or tanks C. Potable water or similar words, shall mean and include any type of potable water or process water that be deemed potable after treatment processes. D. Corrosive service shall mean and include in locations listed below: a. Buried locations b. Submerged locations or submerged piping. c. Inside buried vaults, manholes, and structures that do not drain through a gravity sewer or to a sump with a pump. d. Chemical handling areas e. Inside trenches, containment walls, and curbed areas f. Locations indicated or designated in the contract documents. 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 —Submittal Proceduress. B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information: STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 1 1. Drawings: Layout drawings including necessary dimensions, details, pipe joints, fittings, specials, bolts and nuts, gaskets, valves, appurtenances, anchors, guides, and material lists. Pipe spooling and fabrication drawings shall indicate spacers, adapters, connectors, fittings, and pipe supports to accommodate the equipment and valves in a complete and functional system. 2. Welding Qualifications and Procedures 3. Pipe Supports: Submit pipe support fabrication drawings including calculations in accordance with Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Supports. 4. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals, and shall be specifically identified with the applicable style or series designation, and restraint system if applicable. 5. Thermoplastic Pipe Joints: Submit solvent cement manufacturer's catalog indicating that the recommended product is suitable for each fluid service application. 6. Gasket Material: Submit gasket manufacturer's catalog indicating that the recommended product is suitable for each fluid service application. 7. Seals and Seating Materials: Submit elastomer material and manufacturer's catalog indicating that the recommended product is suitable for each fluid service application. 8. Modular Seals for Pipe: Manufacturer's catalog sheet showing materials and installation procedures. 9. Expansion Joints: Submit detailed calculations and manufacturer's Shop Drawings of proposed expansion joints, piping layouts, and anchors and guides, including information on materials, temperature, and pressure ratings 10. Flexible Connectors: Submit pressure and thermal expansion calculations C. Samples 1. Performing and paying for sampling and testing as necessary for certifications are the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility. D. Certifications 1. Necessary certificates, test reports, and affidavits of compliance shall be obtained by the CONTRACTOR. 2. A certification from the pipe fabricator that each pipe will be manufactured subject to the fabricator's or a recognized Quality Control Program. An outline of the program shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review prior to the manufacture of any pipe. 1.4 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and undamaged condition and stored off the ground for protection against oxidation caused by ground contact. B. Defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new materials. STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 2 PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL • A. Extent of Work 1. Pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 33 and 40 and as indicated. • • 2. Materials in contact with potable water or process water that be deemed potable after treatment processes shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61. B. Piping Supports 1. Pipes shall be adequately supported, restrained, and anchored in accordance with Section 40 05 07 — Pipe Supports, and as indicated. 2. Piping support seismic and wind loads shall be sized in accordance with the design criteria as specified in Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage. C. Lining 1. Application, thickness, and curing of pipe lining shall be in accordance with the applicable Sections of Division 33, unless otherwise indicated. D. Coating 1. Application, thickness, and curing of coating on buried pipe shall be in accordance with the applicable Sections of Division 33 and Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pipes above ground or in structures shall be coated in accordance with Section 09 96 00 — Protective Coating. E. Pressure Rating 1. Piping systems shall be designed for the pressure as defined in respective pipe sections, or as indicated on the Piping Schedule, whichever is greater. F. Inspection 1. Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. 2. During the manufacture, the ENGINEER shall be given access to areas where manufacturing is in progress and shall be permitted to make inspections necessary to confirm compliance with requirements. G. Tests 1. Exceptwhere otherwise indicated, materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for performing material tests. H. Welding Requirements STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 3 1. Qualification of welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be in accordance with the provisions of AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9, whichever is applicable. I. Welder Qualifications 1. Welding shall be performed by skilled welders and welding operators who have adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. 2. Welders shall be qualified under the provisions of AWS D1.1 or the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section 9, whichever is applicable. 3. Machines and electrodes similar to those used in the WORK shall be used in qualification tests. 4. Qualification testing of welders and materials used during testing is part of the WORK. 2.2 PIPE FLANGES A. General 1. Flanges shall be provided with flat faces and shall be attached with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise indicated. 2. Flange faces shall be perpendicular to the axis of the adjoining pipe. 3. Flanges for miscellaneous small diameter pipes shall be in accordance with the standards indicated for those pipes. B. Pressure Ratings 1. 150 psig or less: Flanges shall conform to either AWWA C207 - Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service --Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In., Class D, or ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150. 2. 150 psig to 275 psig: Flanges shall conform to either AWWA C207 Class E or Class F, or ASME B16.5, Class 150. 3. 275 psig to 700 psig: Flanges shall conform to ASME B16.5, Class 300. 4. Selection Based on Test Pressure a. Do not expose AWWA flanges to test pressures greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. b. For higher test pressures, the next higher rated AWWA flange or an ANSI -rated flange shall be selected. C. Blind Flanges 1. Provide blind flanges in accordance with AWWA C207, or as indicated for miscellaneous small pipes. 2. Blind flanges for pipe diameters 12 inches and greater shall be provided with lifting eyes in the form of welded or threaded eye bolts. STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 4 D. Flange Coating 1. Machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated with a temporary rust -inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is completed. E. Flange Fasteners 1. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or indicated in the applicable Sections of Divisions 33 and 40, Bolts and nuts shall conform to the following requirements; a. Threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.1, Class 2, UNC for bolt diameters 1" and smaller and UN8 for bolt diameters greater than 1". b. Bolts shall have heavy hexagon heads and heavy hexagon nuts. Length of studs shall provide a projection of not less than 0.25 inch and no more than 0.5 inch through the nut when it is drawn tight. c. Thread studs on flange connections are not permitted except where space restrictions preclude the use of standard bolts and where approved by the ENGINEER. d. Through bolt holes shall be drilled in accordance with the applicable flange standard. e. All bolts fastening metallic flanges shall be provided with plain washers installed under the nut. Washer materials shall be of the same material as the bolt. If the through bolt holes are drilled larger than the applicable standard by 1/8 inch in diameter or more, bolts shall be also installed with a plain washer under the bolt head as well. f. All bolts fastening non-metallic flanges shall be provided with plain washers installed under both the bolt head and nut. g. Washer materials shall be of the same material as the bolt. h. Anti -seize compound shall be used on carbon steel fasteners, and shall be Husk - ITT, Husky 2000; or equal. i. Anti -galling compound used for stainless steel fasteners in LOX, nitrogen injection, oxygen, ozone process/off-gas/vent and ozone contactor maintenance air service shall be DuPont "Krytox"; or equal. Anti -galling compound used for stainless steel fasteners for other services shall be certified for potable water use and shall be Husk -ITT, Lube O'seal; Hercules, Real -Tuff; La Co, Slic-Tite; or equal. 2. Fastener Material Group Numbering System a. Flange fasteners shall conform to the following material standards and shall be categorized within the Fastener Material Schedule Groups as indicated: 1) Material Group C1 (Carbon steel): ASTM A307 Grade B bolts, ASTM A563 Grade B nuts with ASTM F436 washers STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 5 2) Material Group C2 (Carbon steel): ASTM A193 Grade B7 bolts, ASTM A194 Grade 2H nuts with ASTM F436 washers 3) Material Group S1 (316 SS): ASTM A193, Grade B8M bolts, ASTM A194 Grade 8M nuts with Type 316 SS plain washers. 4) Material Group S2 (304 SS): ASTM A193, Grade B8 bolts, ASTM A194 Grade 8F nuts with Type 304 SS plain washers. 5) Material Group S3 (Hastelloy C-276): ASTM F468 N10276 bolts ASTM F467 N10276 nuts with type Hastelloy plain washers. 3. Fastener Material Group Numbers used in Non -Corrosive Service Applications a. AWWA C115 ductile iron flanges - Material Group C1 b. AWWA C207 steel flanges - Material Group C2 c. ASME B31 group piping flanges — Material Group C2 d. Non-metallic pipe flanges - Material Group S1 e. Stainless steel pipe flanges and all others not listed above - Material Group S1 f. Where mating flanges are of different flange material standards and the specified Fastener Material Groups are in conflict, then fasteners of the higher grade shall be utilized unless otherwise indicated. For the purpose of this requirement, the Material Groups in order of decreasing grade shall be S1, C2, C1. Provide insulating flange sets for dissimilar metal flanged piping to electrically isolate the dissimilar piping. g. Where gaskets of Teflon or Viton-A are required, fasteners of Material Group C2 shall be utilized for all C1 flange standards. 4. Fastener Material Group Numbers used in Corrosive Service Applications a. All Flange fasteners shall be of Material Group S1 unless S2 and S3 are otherwise indicated on the drawings. F. Insulating Flanges 1. Insulated flanges shall be provided with bolt holes 1/4 -inch diameter greater than the bolt diameter. G. Insulating Flange Sets 1. In order to prevent corrosion, insulating flange sets shall be furnished on all piping connections where two dissimilar metals are to be connected. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and washers, and a steel washer. 2. For bolt diameters 1-1/2 inches or smaller, insulating sleeves and washers shall be one piece and shall be made of acetyl resin. STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 6 3. For bolt diameters larger than 1-1/2 inches, insulating sleeves and washers shall be 2 -piece and shall be made of polyethylene or phenolic material. 4. Insulating flange sets materials used for fluids other than general water and wastewater shall be made of materials compatible with the fluid services. 5. Insulating gaskets shall be full -face. H. Insulating Flange Manufacturer, or Equal 1. JM Red Devil, Type E 2. Fluid Sealing Products, Inc. 3. Enpro Industries, Inc. (GPT) I. Flange Gaskets 1. Gaskets for flanged joints used in general water and wastewater service shall be full faced type in accordancewith AWWAC207, suitable fortemperatures to 700 degrees F, a pH of one to 11, and pressures to 1000 psig. 2. Blind flanges shall be provided with gaskets covering the entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. 3. Ring gaskets will not be accepted unless otherwise indicated. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, flange gaskets up to 150 psi shall be EPDM sheet material, NSF 61 approved, Garlock, Style 98206-U (unbranded), or similar products from John Crane, or equal. 5. Unless otherwise indicated, flange gaskets up to 500 psi shall be aramid fiber with rubber binder material, NSF 61 approved, Garlock, Style 3760-U (unbranded), or similar products from John Crane, or equal. 6. Gaskets for flanged joints used in water with chloramines shall be Teflon material, NSF 61 approved, Garlock, Gylon Style 3505, or similar products from John Crane, or equal. 7. Gaskets for flanged joints used in water with ozone shall be Teflon material, NSF 61 approved, Garlock, Gylon, Style 3504, or similar products from John Crane, or equal. 8. Gaskets for flanged joints used in cryogenic oxygen (LOX and GOX) service shall be Teflon material, Garlock Gylon, Style 3502 and 3503 or similar products from John Crane, or equal. 9. Gaskets for flanged joints in PVC and CPVC piping used in general water and wastewater service shall be NSF 61 approved, full-faced, 1/8 -inch thick, and made of fluoroelastomer having a durometer hardness of 50 to 70. Gaskets for pipe sizes up to 24 -inch and 150 psi shall be Garlock Style XP or similar products from John Crane, or equal. STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 7 10. When the mating flange has a raised face, provide stainless steel flat ring gasket filler between the PVC flange and gasket and the adjacent flange. 11. Gaskets for flanged joints used in chemicals, hot air, ozone gas, solvents, hydrocarbons, steam, chlorine and other fluids shall be made of materials compatible with the service, pressure, and temperature. Consult gasket Manufacturer for recommended gasket material. 2.3 PIPE THREADS A. Pipe threads shall be in conformance with ASME B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch), and be made up with Teflon tape unless otherwise indicated. B. Unless otherwise indicated, use metal FNPT and plastic MNPT for threaded pipe connections between metal and plastic pipes. 2.4 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS A. General 1. Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be furnished for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic protection are involved. B. Materials 1. Threaded insulating connections shall be constructed of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate, polyethylene, or other non-conductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to suit the service and loading conditions. 2.5 MODULAR MECHANICAL SEALS FOR PIPING PENETRATIONS A. Where indicated and where required in order to prevent flow of water or air, the passages of piping through wall sleeves and cored openings shall be sealed with modular interlocking link mechanical closures. B. Individual links shall be constructed of EPDM rubber, be suitable for temperatures between minus 40 and plus 250 degrees F, and be shaped to fill the annular space between the outside of the pipe and the inside of the wall sleeve or cored opening. C. Assemble the links using Type 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe. D. Pressure plates under each bolt and nut shall be fabricated of a corrosion -resistant composite material. E. After the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tighten the bolts against the pressure plates to expand the rubber links and form the watertight seal. F. Sizing and installation of sleeves and assemblies shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. G. Modular Mechanical Seals Manufacturer, or Equal 1. EnPro Industries Company (GPT), Link -Seal STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 8 2. Proco Products, Inc., Pen -Seal 2.6 AIR AND GAS TRAPS • A. Air and gas pipes shall slope to low points and shall be provided with drip legs, shut-off valves, strainers, and traps. B. Pipe the traps to the nearest drain. C. Air and gas traps shall be not less than Class150 iron body float -type, with a copper or stainless steel float. D. Bracket, lever, and pins shall be constructed of stainless steel. E. Drain traps shall be provided with threaded connections. F. Air and Gas Traps Manufacturer, or Equal 1. Armstrong International, Inc. 2. Spirax Sarco, Inc. • • STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 9 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This section specifies the general installation requirements for piping, valves, and related items and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's technical data and printed instructions. Specific piping materials, systems, appurtenances, and related installation and testing requirements are specified in related sections of Divisions 01, 33, and 40, and as noted on the Drawings, Pipe and Valve Schedules. B. Piping shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner, properly aligned and cut from measurements taken at the Site to avoid interferences with structural members, architectural features, openings, and equipment. Exposed pipe shall afford maximum headroom and access to equipment, and where necessary piping shall be installed with sufficient slopes for venting or drainage of liquids and condensate to low points. C. CONTRACTOR shall obtain the assistance of the pipe manufacturer to instruct the pipe fitters in the correct installation and support of the piping system. Valves and flanges attached to the pipe shall be provided with adequate supports. D. Lined Piping Systems 1. The lining manufacturer shall take full responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. 2. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at threaded flanges shall be epoxy -coated in order to assure continuous protection. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall be free from defects. Prior to installation, each pipe length shall be carefully inspected, be flushed clean of any debris or dust, and be straightened if not true straight. Ends of threaded pipes shall be reamed and filed smooth. Groove ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from the pipe end to the groove. Fittings shall be equally cleaned before assembly. B. Supports and Anchors: Piping supports, thrust, and seismic restraints shall be provided where shown on the Drawing or where determined to be required in according to Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Supports. Where necessary to avoid stress on equipment or structural members, the pipe shall be anchored or harnessed. Expansion joints and guides shall compensate for pipe expansion due to temperature differences. Pipe shall be firmly supported with fabricated or commercial hangers or supports. C. Piping Joints: Pipe joints requirements shall conform to the applicable piping sections of Division 33 and Division 40. 1. Threaded Joints: Pipe threads shall be full and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than 3 threads shall remain exposed after installation. 2. Welded Joints: Welded joints shall conform to the specifications and recommendations of ASME B 31.1 - Power Piping. Welding shall be done by skilled and qualified welders. Pipe surface residues, oxides, and heat stains are to be removed from a field weld and the affected areas adjacent by the use of stainless steel wire brushes. For alloy and stainless steel pipe, the post welding surfaces shall be cleaned with a pickle agent such as nitric/hydrofluoric acid solutions or pickle paste STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 10 or equal, then complete removal of the agent by wash the surface thoroughly with clean water. 3. Flange Joints: Flanged joints shall be made with gaskets with bolts and nuts as specified. Care shall be taken not to over -torque the bolts, in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. 4. Fusion -Welded Joints: Fusion -welded joints shall be made with the manufacturers recommended equipment on clean, dry pipe ends. The joints shall be made up at the recommended ambient temperatures, to the pipe manufacturer's written recommendations. The pipe supplier shall be consulted to obtain machinery and expertise for the joining by fusion welded of pipe and fittings. No pipe or fittings shall be joined by fusion by any of the Contractor's personnel unless they are adequately trained and qualified in the techniques involved. Butt fusion joining shall yield a joint strength equal to or greater than the tensile strength of the pipe. Socket fusion, extrusion welding and hot gas welding shall not be used for field connections. 5. Brazed and Soldered Joints: Brazed and soldered joints shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and to the specifications and recommendations of ASME B 31.1 - Power Piping. Brazing shall be done by skilled and qualified welders. Prior to the application of flux, the ends of tubes shall be thoroughly dried and cleaned 6. Grooved Joints: Grooves for grooved couplings and fittings shall be made with specially designed grooving tools to the manufacturer's recommendations and conform toAWWA C 606 — Joints, Grooved and Shouldered Type. Grooves shall be clean and sharp without flaws, and the pipe ends shall be accurately cut at 90 degrees to the pipe axis. 7. Push On Joints: Push on joints and gasket installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and lubricants. Pipe ends shall be beveled to facilitate assembly. Lubricants shall be suitable for potable water service and shall be kept clean in closed containers. 8. Solvent -Welded Joints: Solvent -welded joints shall be made with fresh primer and solvent cement on clean, dry pipe ends. The primer and cement cans shall be kept closed at all times and the joints shall be made up at the recommended ambient temperatures, to the pipe or cement manufacturer's written recommendations. PVC socket connections shall be joined with PVC cement conforming to ASTM D2564 Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC). CPVC socket connections shall be joined with CPVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM F493. For chemical service applications, solvent cement shall be formulated and labeled for use on that chemical. 9. Adhesive Joints: Adhesive joints shall be made with freshly -mixed 2 -part epoxy on clean, dry pipe ends per pipe manufacturer recommendations. The joints shall be made up at the recommended ambient temperatures, to the pipe or adhesive manufacturer'swritten recommendations. Pipe ends shall be inserted to the full depth of the socket. D. Valves and Unions: Unless otherwise indicated, connections to fixtures, groups of fixtures and equipment shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union, unless the valve has flanged ends. Unions shall be provided at threaded valves, equipment, and other devices requiring occasional removal or disconnection. STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 11 E. Branch Connections: Branch connections in horizontal runs of air and gas piping shall be made from the top of the pipe, to avoid drainage of condensate into the equipment. Unless otherwise indicated for threaded pipe connections between metal and plastic pipes, use metal FNPTand plastic MNPT. 1. Pipe ends and joints of lined pipes at threaded flanges shall be epoxy -coated in order to assure continuous protection. F. Isolation Joints / Dielectric Protection: Provide electrically isolate connections between dissimilar metal piping connections. Electrical checks shall be made to assure no contact is made between dissimilar metal piping elements. 1. Use dielectric couplings specially designed for the prevention of galvanic reaction between dissimilar metals. 2. For flanged connections, use stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings, washers, and full -face flange gaskets. G. Core Drilling: Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing concrete, core drilling locations shall be determined by radiograph of concrete construction in order to avoid damage to embedded raceways and reinforcing bars. H. Coating: Exposed pipes shall be coated with a finish coat to the pipe manufacturer's standard protective coating, with the manufacturer's recommended prime coat and a finish coat in accordance with Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating. I. Low points in piping systems and driplegs in steam, gas, and air systems shall have drainage valves. J. Care shall be taken to insure that piping flanges, mechanical -type couplings, sleeve -type couplings, flexible connectors, and expansion joints are properly installed as follows: 1. Gasket surfaces shall be carefully cleaned and inspected prior to making up the connection. Gasket shall be centered properly on the contact surfaces. 2. Connections shall be installed to prevent inducing stress to the piping system or the equipment to which the piping is connected. 3. Contact surfaces for flanges, couplings, and piping ends shall be aligned parallel, concentric, and square to each axis at the piping connections. 4. Flange Bolts a. Flange bolts shall be initially hand -tightened with the piping connections properly aligned. b. Bolts shall be tightened with a torque wrench in a staggered sequence to the recommended torque for the applicable piping material per AWWA or manufacturer's recommendation. Care shall be taken to avoid over -torquing the bolts especially on plastic flanged joints. c. Harness, thrust restraint, and tie rod bolts used for sleeve couplings, flange coupling adapters, or flexible joints shall be tightened gradually and equally at diametrically opposite sides until snug, in order to prevent misalignment and to insure that all studs carry equal loads. STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 12 d. In order to prevent induced stress or misalignment, do not over -torque connections to adjoining pump or equipment. Flanges shall not be deformed nor cracked. 3.3 INSPECTION A. After completion of the WORK, cuttings, joining and wrapping materials, and other scattered debris shall be removed from the Site. The entire piping system shall be in a clean and functional condition. B. Inspection: Finished installations shall be carefully inspected for proper joints and supports, interferences, and damage to pipe, fittings, and coating. Temporary plugs and covers shall be removed from openings and floor drains. Defective WORK shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. 3.4 FIELD TESTING FOR PRESSURE PIPING A. Prior to enclosure or burying, piping systems shall be pressure tested as required in City of Clearwater Specifications, Section IV, paragraph 403-3.2. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish test equipment, labor, materials, and devices as part of the WORK. B. Leakage may be determined by Toss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures. C. Leaks shall be repaired, and the system shall be re -tested until no leaks are found. 3.5 FIELD TESTING FOR GRAVITY PIPING A. Prior to enclosure or burying, drains and vents shall be tested as required in City of Clearwater Specifications, Section IV, paragraph 403-3.1.. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish test equipment, labor, material, and devices as part of the WORK. Defective WORK shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the inspector, and the piping shall be re- tested until no Teaks are found. B. Leakage may be determined by Toss of pressure, soap solution, chemical indicator, or other positive and accurate method. Fixtures, devices, or other accessories which are to be connected to the lines and which would be damaged if subjected to the test pressure shall be disconnected and ends of the branch lines plugged or capped as required during the testing procedures. C. Testing and defective WORK shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER. END OF SECTION STANTEC PIPING, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 00 - 13 SECTION 40 05 07 - PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide pipe supports, hangers, guides, and anchors, complete and in place, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Where pipe support systems are not indicated on the Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall design and provide the supports in accordance with this Section. The absence of pipe supports and details on the contract drawings does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for sizing and providing the pipe supports. C. The provisions of this Section shall apply to piping in Divisions 33 and 40. D. The CONTRACTORshall provide supporting devices for supporting and restraining piping as indicated on the Drawings. Where pipe support devices and/or restraining details are not indicated on the Drawings, it is the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to develop the details necessary to support and restraint the piping for a complete and functional pipe support system. E. Piping support seismic and wind loads shall be sized in accordance with Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 —Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings which shall include the following information: a. Drawings of pipe supports, hangers, anchors, and guides. b. Pipe support schedule or layout indicating where the supports will be installed. c. Calculations for special supports and anchors, stamped and signed by a registered professional engineer in the state where the project is located. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Code Compliance 1. Piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly anchored and supported in order to prevent undue deflection, vibration, and dislocation due to seismic events, line pressures, pipe weight, fluid weight, liquid movement, thermal changes, vibration, and probable forces applied during construction as well as stresses on piping, equipment, and structures. STANTEC PIPE SUPPORTS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 07 - 1 2. Supports and parts thereof shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1 - Power Piping — Chapter II, Part 5 -Expansion, Flexibility, and Pipe Supporting Element and design the pipe supporting elements in accordancewith the rules of MSS SP -58 -Pipe Hangers and Supports — Materials, Design and Manufacture, except as supplemented or modified in this Section. 3. Supports for plumbing piping shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the applicable plumbing code or local administration requirements. B. Structural Members 1. Wherever possible, pipes shall be supported from structural members. 2. Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such supplementary members shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. 3. Supplementary members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Building Code and the American Institute of Steel Construction, and shall be as acceptable to the ENGINEER. C. Pipe Hangers 1. Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in operation, allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping and preventing excessive stress on equipment. 2. Hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection. 3. Hangers shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the supported pipe. 4. Hangers subject to shock, seismic disturbances, or thrust imposed by the actuation of safety valves shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. 5. Hanger rods shall be subjected to vertical loading only. D. Hangers Subject to Lateral or Axial Movement. 1. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement. 2. Where lateral or axial pipe movement is greater than 1/2 inch, or where the hanger rod deflection from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold -to -hot position of the pipe, the hanger rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. E. Spring -Type Hangers 1. Spring -type pipe hangers shall be provided for piping subject to vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar piping. 2. Spring -type hangers shall be sized per the manufacturer's printed recommendations IIIand for the loading conditions encountered. STANTEC PIPE SUPPORTS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 07 - 2 3. Variable spring supports shall be provided with means to limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to prevent overstressing of the spring, and with means to indicate the compression of the spring. 4. Supports shall be capable of accommodating at least 4 times the maximum travel due to thermal expansion. F. Thermal Expansion 1. Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a sufficient number of expansion loops or expansion joints shall be provided, together with the necessary rolling or sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints permitting the piping to expand and contract freely away from the anchored points. 2. Components shall be structurally suitable to withstand the imposed loads. G. Heat Transmission 1. Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be designed and insulated such that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure or to other equipment. H. Riser Supports 1. Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps and Tugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping. I. Freestanding Piping 1. Freestanding pipe connections to equipment such as chemical feeders and pumps shall be firmly attached to support frames fabricated from angles, channels, or 1 - beams anchored to the structure. 2. Exterior, freestanding overhead piping shall be supported on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, or with horizontal, welded steel angles, and U -bolts or clamps securing the pipes. J. Materials of Construction 1. Pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, shall be of steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Submerged supports, as well as piping, conduits, and equipment in hydraulic structures located two feet above water level, shall be supported with support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors constructed of Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Piping in chemical and corrosive service areas shall be supported with support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors constructed of Type 316 stainless steel or FRP, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Corrosive service areas are indicated in section 40 05 00 -1.2 Definitions - Corrosive Service. STANTEC PIPE SUPPORTS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 07 - 3 • • • K. Point Loads 1. Meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC, FRP, or other plastic pipes, shall be supported on both sides, according to manufacture's recommendations, in order to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. 2. In order to avoid point loads, the supports on PVC, FRP, or other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles or galvanized steel shields for general service and Type 316 stainless steel shields for chemical or corrosive areas. L. Concrete Anchors 1. Unless otherwise indicated, concrete anchors for pipe supports shall be according to the following table; consult the ENGINEER for any anchor applications not appearing on the table. 2. Anchor embedment shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 05 50 00 — Miscellaneous Metalwork. Pipe Support Application Type of Concrete Anchor New Concrete Use embedded concrete insert anchors on a grid pattern. Use Grinnell (Anvil International), Tolco, or equal. Existing Concrete Use non -shrink grouted anchors, expansion anchors, or epoxy anchors. Epoxy anchors are not permitted for vertical hanging applications or where sustained tension is exerted on the anchor. Exceptions: Expansion anchors and epoxy anchors are not permitted for pipe supports subject to vibrating loads. Epoxy anchors are not permitted where the concrete temperature is in excess of 100 degree F or higher than the limiting temperature recommended by the manufacturer. Vibratory Loads and Temperature Conditions High- Use non -shrink grouted anchors. M. Noise Reduction 1. In order to reduce the transmission of noise in piping systems, copper tubes in buildings and structures shall be wrapped with a 2 -inch wide strip of rubber fabric or similar suitable material at each pipe support, bracket, clip, or hanger. STANTEC PIPE SUPPORTS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 07 - 4 2.2 SUPPORT SPACING A. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall be spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending, and shear stresses in the piping, with special consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose concentrated loads. B. Where pipe spacing are indicated on the Drawings and are referenced to a Standard Detail, that requirement shall take preference over the general requirements of this section. C. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum indicated spans. Piping with grooved joint couplings, flexible joints, and bend fittings shall be balanced supported by a minimum of two pipe supports per pipe length, one at near each joint/fitting. D. For temperatures other than ambient temperatures or those listed, and for other piping materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacings shall be modified in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. E. Vertical supports shall be provided to prevent the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of loading effects. STANTEC PIPE SUPPORTS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 07 - 5 • • • F. Steel Pipe 1. Where support spacing is not indicated on the Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall use the spacing below. 2. Support Spacing for standard wall or heavier welded steel, stainless steel or alloy steel pipe. Nominal Pipe Diameter, Inches Maximum Span, ft (Water Service) Maximum Span, ft (Gas or Vacuum Service) 1/2 6 7 3/4 and 1 8 9 1-1/4 to 2 10 12 3 12 14 4 14 15 6 16 18 8 and 10 18 20 12 and 14 20 24 16 and 18 22 26 20 and greater 24 30 STANTEC PIPE SUPPORTS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 07 - 6 G. Ductile Iron Pipe 1. Install supports for ductile iron pipe in accordance with the recommendations of the Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA) Design of Ductile Iron Pipe on Supports. 2. As a minimum, where support spacing is not indicated on the Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall use the spacing indicated in the following schedule: Nominal Pipe Diameter, inches Support Configuration All diameters two supports per pipe length, with one of the two supports located at a joint H. Copper Tube 1. Where support spacing is not indicated on the Drawings, the CONTRACTOR shall use the spacing below: Nominal Tube Size, inches Support Spacing, feet Water Service Vapor Service 3/4 and smaller 5 5 1 6 8 1-1/2 to 2-1/2 8 10 3 10 14 4 12 16 5 13 18 6 14 20 8 16 23 STANTEC PIPE SUPPORTS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 07 - 7 • • • I. Schedule 80 PVC and CPVC Pipe Nominal Pipe Size, inches 100 °F and below 101 to 120 °F 121 to 140 °F 1 5 3.5 3 1-1/2 5.5 3.5 3.5 2 6 4 3.5 3 7 4.5 4 4 7.5 5 4.5 6 9 6 5 8 9.5 6.5 5.5 10 and larger 10 7 6 J. Other Pipe Materials 1. Support spacing for pipe constructed of other materials shall be based on design temperature and in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTS A. Stock Parts 1. Where not specifically indicated, designs that are generally accepted as exemplifying good engineering practice and using stock or production parts shall be utilized wherever possible. 2. Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best commercial quality, and designed and rated for the intended purpose. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Basic PSA, Inc. 2. Bergen -Paterson Pipe Supports Group 3. Grinnell 4. Power Piping Company 5. TOLCO (Eaton B -Line) STANTEC PIPE SUPPORTS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 07 - 8 2.4 COATING A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricated pipe supports other than stainless steel or non- ferrous supports shall be blast -cleaned after fabrication and hot -dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products and shall receive protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 099600 — Protective Coating. PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Pipe supports, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides, and inserts shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and per ANSI/MSS SP -58 Pipe Hangers and Supports- Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application and Installation. 2. Embedded concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be coordinated with the formwork. B. Appearance 1. Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned in order to produce an orderly, neat piping system. 2. Hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets. 3. Hangers shall be adjusted to line up groups of pipes at the proper slope for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or roofs as possible, and without interference with other WORK. 3.2 FIELD FABRICATION A. Quality Control 1. Field fabricated pipe hangers and supports shall be fabricated and installed by experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available. 2. Hangers and supports shall be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, or edges. END OF SECTION STANTEC PIPE SUPPORTS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 05 07 - 9 • • • SECTION 40 91 00 - PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide Process Control and Instrumentation Systems (PCIS) complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. For the purpose of this CONTRACT, PCIS is synonymous and interchangeable with supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) and distributed control system (DCS), where applicable. B. The requirements of this Section apply to every component of the PCIS unless indicated otherwise. C. Responsibilities 1. The CONTRACTOR, through the use of a System Integrator and qualified electrical and mechanical installers, shall be responsible to the OWNER for the implementation of the PCIS and the integration of the PCIS with other required instrumentation and control devices. 2. Due to the complexities associated with the interfacing of numerous control system devices, it is the intent of these specifications that the System Integrator will be responsible to the CONTRACTOR forthe integration of the PCIS with existing devices and devices provided under this and other Divisions with the objective of providing a completely integrated control system free of signal incompatibilities. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall request the OWNER to demonstrate that all existing equipment that is to be reused or interfaced with in this project works properly for the intended function. In the event the existing equipment does not work, the issue should be brought up in the preconstruction/ pre -submittal meeting(s). 4. As a minimum, the implementation of the PCIS by the CONTRACTOR shall include the following WORK: a. Integrate the PCIS with existing devices and systems provided under this and other Divisions. b. Prepare the required PCIS submittals c. Design and develop project -wide loop diagrams including those associated with equipment provided under other Divisions and Owner -furnished and existing equipment. d. Design and develop control panel drawings e. Field verify existing conditions f. Prepare factory and field test submittals STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 1 g. Prepare training plan h. Prepare spare parts submittal i. Procure hardware and software j. Configure and factory test the PCIS k. Bench calibrate instruments and verify calibration after installation I. Terminate communication cables inside RTU panel devices. m. Supervise and coordinate installation and termination of field signals, power, and utilities associated with the PCIS. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS and new and existing interfacing devices. n. Loop test in accordance with the loop diagrams. Validate and certify loops o. Oversee, document, and certify system commissioning p. Conduct system performance test q. Prepare technical manuals r. Conduct training classes s. Prepare PCIS as -built final construction drawings t. Prepare Hardware submittals u. Design, develop, and electronically draft loop drawings and control panel designs. v. Fabricate PLC panels w. Procure software licenses, install software. x. Participate in workshops for HMI programming standards, graphics development, and remote monitoring of operational data. y. Perform PLC programming and configuration of software components. z. Perform with OWNER and ENGINEER PLC -based control system Factory Acceptance Test. aa. Perform HMI programming and configuration of software components. bb. Furnish, install and configure the network components to communicate and operate as outlined in the contract documents. Certify System performance. cc. Furnish, install and configure all Process Control and Instrumentation System hardware depicted on the network block diagrams (and further detailed in the STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 2 • • • specifications, installation details, and panel details), ready for installation with IIIthe RTU programs and HMI control screens. • • dd. Furnish, install, and configure all instruments depicted on the process control and instrumentation diagrams (and further detailed in the specifications and installation details). ee. Repair or replace defective hardware provided under the contract. ff. Purchase, install and configure application software, ready for download of custom programs. gg. Provide configuration support and upgrades to address any software issues not directly attributable to the developed control programs or control screens. hh. Provide HMI remote access configuration. ii. Perform pre -testing and troubleshooting of all loops (and document the results of this testing). Perform corresponding loop drawing updates prior to witnessed loop testing. ii. Oversee, document, and certify loop testing. kk. Provide validation sheets for loop by loop commissioning. II. Provided on-site hardware and software support services during system commissioning. Respond time shall be a miximum of 24 hours after notification unless otherwise scheduled prepare OWN ER's manuals. mm. Provide training. nn. Prepare record drawings. 5. Any System Integrator responsibilities in addition to the list above are at the discretion of the CONTRACTOR and the PCIS Supplier. Additional requirements in this Section and throughout Division 40 that are stated to be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility may be performed by the PCIS Supplier if the CONTRACTOR and PCIS Supplier so agree. D. RELATED WORK AND REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1. All electrical work required under this section shall conform to the requirements of this Section and the applicable requirements of the Sections in Division 01, Division 26. 2. The SYSTEM INTEGRATOR shall warrant all hardware and software provided under this contract against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year. The system supplier shall warrant the telemetry software to be free of defects for as long as it is operational in the county. The function modules utilized in the remote terminal unit shall carry an additional two year return -to -factory warranty. The two year return -to -factory warranty shall also cover damage due to lightning. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 3 1.2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURE A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall develop a schedule of values based upon the payment milestones noted below for inclusion in the Measurement and Payment Section 01 29 00. B. Payment Milestones: This schedule lists the percentage of the lump sum price of Instrumentation which will be payable to the CONTRACTOR upon task completions. Payment shall be in accordance with the General Conditions. 1. Hardware Equipment Submittal approved 5 percent 2. Project -wide Loop Drawing Submittal approved 10 percent 3. Control Panel Engineering Submittals approved 5 percent 4. Final Technical Manual submitted 5 percent 5. Completion of testing and commissioning accepted 30 percent 6. Thirty -day performance test successfully completed 25 percent 7. Notice of acceptance issued 20 percent 1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these Specifications, all WORK specified herein shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the referenced documents to the extent that the requirements therein are not in conflictwith the provisions of this Section; provided, that where such documents have been adopted as a code or ordinance by the public agency having jurisdiction, such code or ordinance shall take precedence. B. Definitions 1. System Integrator: The System Integrator shall be Data Flow Systems, Inc of Melbourne, FL , Ohio assuming full responsibility through the CONTRACTOR to perform all engineering and to select, furnish, program, configure, integrate, supervise the installation and connections, test, calibrate, and place into operation all instrumentation, controls, communication hardware and software. The System Integrator shall specialize and have an experienced engineering and technical staff in the design, integration, and supply of systems similar to the one in these Contract Documents. The term "System Integrator" shall mean the same as "SCADA System Integrator" or "PCIS Integrator. C. The PCIS WORK shall conform to or exceed the applicable regulations, standards, specifications, and codes which are referenced in Section 014219 Reference Standards, and current as of the date of the final inspection for this Contract, including, but not limited to, those which are established by the following sources: 1. The International Society of Automation (ISA) STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 4 • • • • • • 2. National Electrical Code (NEC) 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 5. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 8. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA) 9. Local Power and Telephone Companies 10. Local Authorities having jurisdiction over the work 11. Federal Communication Commission (FCC) 12. Underwriter Laboratory (UL) D. Where the requirements set forth in these Specifications or on the Drawings are greater or more rigid than the mandatory requirements referenced above, the applicable Specifications or Drawings shall govern. E. In the case of conflict between any mandatory requirements and Specifications or Drawings, the mandatory requirement shall be followed in each case, but only after submitting such proposed changes to the ENGINEER for approval. F. Nothing contained in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings will be so construed to conflict with any national, state, municipal, or local laws or regulations governing the installation of work specified herein, and all such acts, ordinances, and regulations, including the National Electrical Code, are hereby incorporated and made a part of these Specifications. All such requirements will be satisfied by the CONTRACTOR at no additional expense to the OWNER. G. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other; what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, this shall be referred to the ENGINEER as soon as possible for resolution. Should a conflict exist between the Drawings, Specifications, and/or mandatory requirements (i.e., codes, ordinances, etc.), it will be assumed that the more expensive method has been estimated, unless such alternate has been agreed to prior to submission of bids. 1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Presubmittal Conference 1. The CONTRACTOR shall arrange and conduct a Presubmittal Conference within 30 Days after award of the Contract. The purpose of the Presubmittal Conference is to review and approve the manner in which the CONTRACTOR intends to carry out its STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 5 responsibilities for Shop Drawing submittal on the WORK to be provided under this Section. The CONTRACTOR, the System Integrator, and the ENGINEER shall attend. Both the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER may invite additional parties at their discretion. 2. Before preparing the submittals the CONTRACTOR shall meet with the OWNER and visit the project site(s) to obtain information and inventory regarding the existing conditions. Interface to existing equipment, control and monitoring circuits shall also be reviewed. During the inventory the CONTRACTOR shall determine the location of the new equipment that is part of this contract. Any major conflicts with the contract documents shall be brought to the ENGINEER's attention at the pre -submittal conference The CONTRACTOR shall also review the available as built drawings. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall allot one, 4 hour period for the pre -submittal conference. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall present the following for discussion at the pre -submittal conference: a. A list of equipment and materials required for the PCIS and the manufacturer's name and model number for each proposed item. b. A list of requests for clarifications (RFC) or information (RFI) to the contract documents along with a brief explanation of each. Resolution shall be subject to a separate formal submittal and review by the ENGINEER. c. An exact one-to-one sample of each type of submittal herein. d. A bar -chart type schedule for system -related activities from the Presubmittal Conference through start-up and training. Dates of submittals, design, fabrication, programming, factory testing, deliveries, installation, field testing, and training shall be shown. The schedule shall be subdivided to show activities relative to each major item or group of items when everything in a given group is on the same schedule. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall take minutes of the pre -submittal conference, including events, questions, and resolutions. Prior to adjournment, attendees must concurwith the accuracy of the minutes and sign accordingly. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide submittals in accordance with Section 01300 - Contractor Submittals and the additional submittal requirements specified in this Section, in Division 40, and the following: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the PCIS part of the WORK so that a complete instrumentation and control system will be provided and will be supported by accurate Shop Drawings and as -built drawings. 2. The submittals and their schedules shall be shall be in accordance with the requirements listed below: Any incomplete submittal will be rejected and returned without comments. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 6 • • • • • • 3. Interface between instruments, engines, starters, flowmeters and other equipment related to the PCIS shall be included in the shop drawing submittal. Interface between existing equipment, instruments and control panels shall also be included, 4. Exchange of Technical Information: During the period of preparation of these submittals, the CONTRACTOR shall authorize a direct, informal liaison with the ENGINEER for exchange of technical information. As a result of this liaison, certain minor refinements and revisions in the systems as indicated may be authorized informally by the ENGINEER, but will not alter the scope of WORK or cause increase or decrease in the Contract Price. During this informal exchange, no oral statement by the ENGINEER shall be construed to give approval of any component or method, nor shall any statement be construed to grant exception to or variation from these Contract Documents. 5. Symbols and Nomenclature: In these Contract Documents, systems, meters, instruments, and other elements are represented schematically, and are designated by symbols as derived from International Society of Automation Standard ISA S5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. The nomenclature and numbers designated herein and on the Drawings shall be employed exclusively throughout Shop Drawings, and similar materials. No other symbols, designations, or nomenclature unique to the manufacturer's standard methods shall replace those prescribed above, used herein, or on the Drawings. B. Shop Drawings Submittal Organization 1. Shop Drawings shall include the letter head or title block of the System Integrator. The title block shall include, as a minimum, the System Integrator's registered business name and address, project name, drawing name, revision level, and personnel responsible for the content of the drawing. 2. Organization of the Shop Drawing submittals shall be compatible with eventual submittals for later inclusion in the Technical Manual. Submittals not so organized will not be accepted. 3. Drawings that require more than one sheet due to space limitation or continuation in the subject of the drawings (e.g. loop diagrams, etc.) shall be given the same drawing number but with different sheet number (e.g. sheet 1 of x, sheet 2 of x, etc.). 4. Each submittal shall include a complete index appearing in the front of each bound submittal volume. Drawings and/or system groups shall be separated by labeled tags. The organization of the initial shop drawing submittal required above shall be compatible to eventual inclusion with the Technical Manuals submittal and shall include final alterations reflecting as -built conditions. 5. Interfaces between new and existing instruments, panels, and other equipment related to the PCIS shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal. C. Field Instrument Submittal STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 7 1. Submittal Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a complete field and process instrument submittal, all at one time, within 60 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed is given to the CONTRACTOR. 2. Submittal Contents: The submittal shall include a complete index which lists each device by tag number, type, and manufacturer in accordance with the specified data sheets provided in this CONTRACT. A separate manufacturer technical brochure or catalog sheet shall be included with each specified instrument data sheet. If, within a single system or loop, a single instrument is employed more than once, one manufacturer brochure or catalog sheet may cover multiple identical uses of that instrument in that system. Each manufacturer brochure or catalog sheet shall include a list of tag numbers forwhich it applies. System groups shall be separated by labeled tags. Special options and features which are furnished shall be identified. D. System Hardware Submittal: 1. Submittal Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a complete system hardware submittal, all at one time, within 90 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed is given to the CONTRACTOR. This submittal shall be submitted together with the submittal for the System Architecture, and Communication Diagrams submittal and the Project -Wide Wiring Diagrams and Panel Drawings submittal specified below. 2. Submittal Contents: a. The submittal shall be for the hardware specified under Sections 409510 — RTU -Based Control System Hardware and 409513 - Control Panels. b. The submittal shall include a complete index which lists each device by type, and manufacturer in accordance with the contract documents. A separate manufacturer technical data sheet or brochure shall be included for each hardware component. If, within a single system a single component is employed more than once, one manufacturer technical data sheet or brochure may cover multiple identical uses of that component in that system. Special options and features which are furnished shall be identified. c. The submittal shall include load calculations and size of the various UPS systems to demonstrate that the UPS is able to accommodate present and future load requirements, as well as overload capacity requirements. d. Spare Parts and Tools List: A list of spare parts and tools shall be submitted, covering items which are specified and furnished under this Contract. The list shall include the name, address, and phone number of manufacturer and manufacturer's local service representative of these parts. The list shall also include recommended spare parts and tools, quantities and prices from which the OWNER will select the "Additional Recommended Spare Parts and Tools". STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 8 • • • • • • E. System Software Submittal 1. Submittal Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a complete hardware submittal, all at one time, within 90 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed 2. Submittal Contents: a. This submittal shall be provided in a singular all inclusive submittal and be made separately from other PCIS submittals. b. The software submittal shall include but not be limited to: 1) Vendor documentation that supports that the specific functional requirements of the contract documents are met. Details shall include complete description of the standard (baseline) application Human Machine Interface (HMI) software programs, operating system and utility programs to be furnished, including modifications and explanation of how the specific functional requirement will be met. A cross reference between the specification and the software submittal shall be provided in order to provide the ENGINEER the ability to identify how each specified section or function is being met by the CONTRACTOR. 2) A functional design report of the implemented control functions using as a reference the strategies specified in Section 40 93 00 — Control Descriptions. The report shall include: a) Control narratives and their implementation, which describe all monitoring and control functions (e.g., commands, mission, anticipated action, etc.) on a loop by loop or site by site basis in the PLC. These narratives will be used for the operating instructions and inclusion in the Operations and Maintenance Manuals. b) Control narratives shall enumerate the signal point name, signal description, associated PLC number, associated graphic displays, system functions activated by the signal (i.e., interlocks, alarms, logs, etc.) c) A complete set of all available software algorithms with annotation of: 1) Individual coil register and variable description 2) Program, group of program, subroutine, and complete rung detail comments 3) Memory, coil, register, and variable usage mapping d) Copies of the configured RTU control software shall be provided in the technical manual together with a CD. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 9 F. Input and Output (I/O) Data List: 1. Submittal Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a complete I/O list(s), all at one time, within 90 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed is given to the CONTRACTOR. 2. Submittal Contents: a. The submittal shall include a complete listing of the PCIS I/O data base listing for each data point relevant parameters such as range, active state, contact orientation, limits, incremental limits, and I/O hardware address. The list shall be divided and grouped on a site by site basis and PLC assignment, and divided into type of I/O's (card type). The I/Os shall be identified by the location of the card (slot no.) and input/output point number. The I/O list shall be formatted in MS Excel. b. In addition to the active I/O's, the list shall also include the implemented spare I/O's and the available I/O's remaining on the I/O board. G System Architecture Diagrams 1. Submittal Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a complete set of system architecture diagram all at one time within 120 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed is given to the CONTRACTOR. This submittal shall be submitted together with the System Hardware submittal and the Project -Wide Wiring Diagrams and Panel Drawings submittal specified herein. 2. Submittal Contents: System Architecture Diagram: The CONTRACTOR shall develop and submit project -wide system architecture diagram, which present the system architecture, the network(s), and communications as applicable. The submittal shall include a set of drawings that presents the following as applicable: a. System architecture and network (copper and fiber optic) physical topology schematic, including, hardware nodes, network hardware, cabling converters, etc., and connections. H. Project -Wide Wiring Diagrams and Panel Drawings Submittal: 1. Submittal Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a complete set of project -wide wiring diagrams (PWWD) and panel drawings, all at one time within 120 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed is given to the CONTRACTOR. The PWWD and panel drawings shall be a singular complete hard copy bound package and accompanied with a PDF on a USB flash drive. This submittal shall be submitted together with the System Hardware submittal and the System Architecture Diagram submittal specified herein. 2. Submittal Contents: The PWWD and panel drawings shall be submitted as a single and comprehensive set of drawings. The submittal shall include a complete index in the front of each part of the submittal. The drawings shall be indexed by systems, sites, or process areas. Diagrams shall be tagged in a manner consistent with the Contract Documents and shall include the following: STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 10 • • • • • • a. Project -Wide Wiring Diagrams: The PWWD shall define and document the contents of each analog and discrete monitoring, alarming, hardware interlock, and control functions associated with equipment provided under Division 40 sections. The PWWD shall also cover equipment provided under sections in other Divisions, existing, and OWNER -furnished equipment. The PWWD shall also include both field and panel wiring diagrams. 1) Drawings showing definitive diagram for every analog and discrete instrumentation loop system. These diagrams shall show and identify each component in each loop or system using legend and symbols from the standards in the Contract Documents. The wiring diagrams shall be presented on an 11"x17" drawing with no more than 4 loops per drawing. 2) In general, loops shall be grouped and organized by RTU (if used) and the I/O cards within the RTU. Each I/O card shall be presented on a separate sheet(s) and on the right side of the drawing. The type of card, part number and its slot location shall be identified. Each I/O shall be identified as well as its location on the card and its address. Existing, spare, and future I/Os shall also be shown. Power supply wiring to the card/loops, wire colors, and terminal numbers shall be shown on the wiring diagrams. The I/O cards, the loops and any device in the loop shall be shown together. Each loop shall be complete, including the source/destination within new or existing panels, device(s) in the loop, or field junction boxes, field and RTU interface terminal blocks and wire numbers. 3) In addition wiring diagrams shall show the following details a) Functional name of each loop b) Reference name, drawing, and loop diagram numbers for any signal continuing off the wiring diagram sheet. c) VFD panel, circuit, and breaker numbers for power feeds to the loops and instrumentation. d) Wiring type, size and color e) Designation, and if applicable, terminal assignments associated with every manhole, pull box, junction box, conduit in which wiring is to be located, and panel through which the loop circuits pass. f) Vendor panel, instrument panel, conduit, junction boxes, equipment and SCADA terminations, termination identification wire numbers and colors, power circuits, and ground identifications. 4) Wiring diagrams shall be developed for loops in equipment vendor - supplied packages, equipment provided under Division 40, and OWNER - furnished equipment. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 11 b. Panel Wiring Diagrams: Panel wiring and/or piping diagrams shall be prepared in concert with the PWWD and shall include the following information: 1) Name of panel 2) Power distribution schematic diagrams associated with each panel or system (120VAC, 24VDC and other DC systems, control circuits). The schematic diagram shall show source of power for the panel (circuit breaker panel and breaker) and fuses. All power backup system distribution shall also be shown. 3) Schematic diagrams for control circuits in accordance with ANSI standards. The diagrams shall show complete details on the circuit interrelationship of all devices within and outside each Control Panel. Including primary measurement and control devices. 4) Communication diagram(s) for the equipment inside the panel. 5) The CONTRACTOR may request copies of as built drawings and data that the OWNER can provide that show existing conditions. Lack of such drawings shall not alleviate the contractual responsibility to ascertain and implement interfaces and modifications to existing equipment. 6) Surge protection and signal and safety grounding circuits 7) Wiring type and piping size and material 8) Terminal block numbers and wire numbers c. Panel Drawings: Panel drawings, including cabinet layout drawings, shall be prepared and submitted for each panel and shall include the following information: These drawings shall include enough other details to define exactly the style, the contents, and overall appearance of the panel assembly. 1) Name of Panel. 2) Panel Dimensions; front, side, and plan views and layout to scale. 3) Arrangement of internally and externally mounted instruments and equipment to scale. Note: Control panel layouts shown on the Contract Drawings are diagrammatic. 4) Location of terminal blocks, electrical devices, and conduit entry location(s). 5) Tag number or item number and functional name of items mounted in and on panel, or cabinet. 6) Nameplate legend which includes text, letter size, and colors to be used. 7) Complete and detailed Bills of Materials shall include all items within a panel and shall be presented on the panel layout drawing. The bill of STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 12 • • • • • • material list shall include quantity, description, manufacturer, and part number. 8) Panel mounting information, including conduit entrance location. 9) Assembly and construction drawings. These drawings shall include dimensions, identification of all components, construction material and gauge, surface preparation and finish data, panel door locks and hinge mechanism, nameplates, and the like. 10) The CONTRACTOR shall keep current a set of complete loop and schematic diagrams which shall include field and panel wiring, routing, mounting details, point to point digrams with cable, wire, and termination numbers. These drawings shall include every instrument element. One set of drawings electronically formatted in AutoCAD with client's current version and 2 hard copies shall be submitted after completion of Precommissioning tasks but prior to Performance Testing. Such drawings shall be submitted for review prior to acceptance of the completed WORK by the OWNER. I. Factory Test Procedure Submittal: 1. Submittal Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a comprehensive factory acceptance test (FAT) procedure complete within 180 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed is given to the CONTRACTOR, but not later than 60 calendar days prior to the Factory Acceptance Test date. 2. The Instrumentation Supplier shall prepare and submit a factory test procedure which incorporates test sequences, test forms, samples of database lists, a RTU testing block diagram, and an estimated test duration which comply with the requirements of the factory test specified herein. 3. Submittal Contents: a. The CONTRACTOR shall develop and submit a factory test procedures to show that the integrated system hardware and software is fully operational and in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. (Also see "Quality Assurance" paragraph in this Section. b. The FAT procedures shall include the following tests to be conducted: 1) Hardware review and inventory 2) Navigation and operator's commands 3) Database definition and configuration 4) Graphic displays and editing function 5) Monitoring and alarm features and functions STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 13 6) Network Communication and access from applicable network nodes 7) Remote access from laptops 8) RTU functionality — I/O processing 9) Site/facility RTU and HMI operation including pump control c. Procedure Format: The test procedure shall have a table of contents and each procedure shall be provided on a separate sheet or sheets. The following shall be provided for each procedure: 1) Test number 2) The purpose of the test 3) The procedure 4) The expected result 5) Space to indicate "Pass" and "Fail" and explanation 6) Space for sign -off Signature for the Contractor/System Integrator, the ENGINEER, the OWNER, and DATE 7) Space to provide comments and punch list items J. Startup and Commissioning Submittals 1. Submittal Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a proposed procedure to be followed during startup and commissioning of the PCIS and its components complete within 270 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed is given to the CONTRACTOR, but not later than 60 calendar days prior to the Factory Acceptance Test date. The CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed. 2. Preliminary Submittal: Outlines of the specific procedures and examples of proposed forms and checklists. 3. Detailed Submittal: After approval of the Preliminary Submittal, the CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed detailed procedures, forms, and checklists. This submittal shall include a statement of objectives with the test procedures. K. Training Plan and Training Manual Submittals: 1. Submittal Schedule: The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval a training plan and a training manual submittal complete and within 270 calendar days after the date of Notice to Proceed is given to the CONTRACTOR, but no later than 60 calendar days prior to start of the first training session. 2. Submittal Contents: The Training submittal shall consist of two parts: a. Training Plan, which shall include: STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 14 • • • • • • 1) Schedule of training courses including dates, durations, and locations of each class. Number of times each class will be offered, if applicable and the number of people expected in each class. 2) List of courses and lessons and who will conduct them 3) Resumes of the instructors who will actually conduct the training classes. The CONTRACTOR shall identify in the submittal the courses and lessons that will be performed by the equipment manufacturer. 4) List of material used for the training, which shall include the Technical Manuals for the PCIS. b. Training Manual 1) Training subjects' syllabus and associated lesson plans. The training subjects are listed in Part 3 "Execution "of this Section. If, in the opinion of the System Integrator, additional subjects that are not listed and are pertinent to the training and will benefit the OWN ER's staff, these subjects shall also be included in the training manuals and taught in the class. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Technical Manuals Submittal 1. Submittal Schedule: a. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval Technical Manuals for the PCIS: Initial set shall be submitted complete and within 270 days months after the date of Notice to Proceed is given to the CONTRACTOR. But at least 60 days prior to the starts of the OWNER'straining. b. Each set shall consist of one (1) or more volumes and provided in PDF on a USB flash drive. In addition, a hard copy of the technical manual shall be provided in bound standard size, 3 -ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic hard cover binders, suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not exceed 3 inches. 2. Submittal Contents: a. Information in the Technical Manual shall be based upon the approved Shop Drawing submittals as modified for conditions encountered in the field during the WORK. The Technical Manuals shall therefore contain the as -built drawings and information. b. The Technical Manuals shall include installation, connection, operating, calibration, set points (e.g., pressure, pump control, time delays, etc.) adjustment, test, troubleshooting, maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 15 c. The Manuals shall have the following material organized in volumes and divided by subject and tabs The Technical Manual shall have the following organization for each process (the number and the enumeration of the sections shall be project specific): 1) Section A - Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (as built copy) 2) Section B - System Architecture Block Diagram(s) 3) Section C - Wiring Diagrams. A separate set of drawings shall be provided for each system. Each set shall be arranged in a separate tab (drawings shall also be provided in PDF). 4) .Section D - Instrument Data Sheets and corresponding manufacturer's data sheet/catalog cuts/brochure that was used in the hardware submittal and the operation and maintenance/user manual. 5) Section E - Calibration Documentation 6) Section G - Loop, Commissioning and Performance Test Results d. System User Manual: Its purpose is to provide an operator a manual how to use the SCADA system hardware and software. The user manual shall be a separate binder and, as a minimum, shall include, but not limited to: 1) System Architecture Diagram with names and locations of major components 2) System access assignment procedures and security level assignment and their privileges and limitations 3) Navigation Bar/Buttons instructions (alarms, navigation buttons, maps, user name, login procedure, site summary, communication, etc.) 4) Menus 5) Procedures during system start-up, fail -over, and recovery from power loss 6) A list of the control screens with the display names and description. It shall also provide a summary of possible commands and operator inputs to these screens including set points. All control actions shall be included 7) Alarms: screen, maintenance, historical, messages, operator commands, etc. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the specified spare parts and tools. In addition, The ENGINEER and the OWNER will select from the priced list of "Additional Recommended Spare Parts" in the Hardware Equipment Submittal. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 16 • • • • • • these parts and will be paid for them from the corresponding allowance item in the Bid. The total price will not exceed the amount of the allowance item. B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a priced list of special tools required to calibrate and maintain the instrumentation provided from which the ENGINEER or the OWNER will select the needed tools. After approval the CONTRACTOR shall furnish tools on that list. The cost of these tools will be included in the allowance. 1.8 FIELD SITE CONDITIONS A. The PCIS shall be designed and constructed for satisfactory operation and long, low maintenance service under the following environmental conditions: 1. Strom Water Pump Station. B. Site Equipment: 1. Ambient temperature range: 32° through 104° F 2. Thermal shock: 1.0° (1.8° F) per minute maximum 3. Relative humidity: 95 percent maximum non -condensing 1.9 WARRANTY A. All parts, material labor, travel, subsistence, or other expenses incurred in providing services and service visits during the warranty period shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR under the guarantee specified in Division 01. Equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve their intended purpose shall be replaced by the CONTRACTOR to attain compliance, at no additional cost to the OWNER. B. Extended Period for Correction of Defects: The CONTRACTOR shall correct defects in the PCIS upon notification from the OWNER within 2 years from the date of Substantial Completion. Corrections shall be completed within 5 Days after notification. C. Software Upgrades: During the warranty period, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install at no additional cost to the OWNER any application software upgrades published applicable to OWNER's applications and compatible with OWNER's hardware and operating system. D. The CONTRACTOR warrants/guarantees the satisfactory performance of the equipment and materials under operating conditions for a period of two (2) years after the date of final acceptance of the entire RTU (i.e. completion of all contractual items including a successful full system -wide 21 day performance test as specified in Part 3). In the event that tests and inspections disclose latent defects or failure to meet the specified requirements, the Instrumentation Supplier upon notification by the OWNER shall proceed at once to correct or repair any such defects or non-conformance or to furnish, at the delivery point named in the Contract Documents, such new equipment or parts as may be necessary for conformity to the requirements, and shall receive no additional compensation therefore. In case of any required repairs or other corrective or remedial work covered under warranty, the warranties on all such corrections, repairs, new STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 17 equipment, or parts shall be extended for an additional 24 months from the date of final acceptance or 12 months from the date of completion of any such corrections, repairs, new equipment, or parts, whichever date is later. If the OWNER performs repair, the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for all costs incurred in the removal of the defective material and installation of the replacement. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Code and Regulatory Compliance: PCIS WORK shall conform to or exceed the applicable requirements of the National Electrical Code. Conflicts between the requirements of the contract documents and any codes or referenced standards. B. Current Technology: Meters, Instruments, and other components shall be the most recent firld proven models marketed by their manufacturer at the time of submittal of the Shop Drawings unless otherwise required to match existing equipment. C. Standard and Current Technology: All PCIS hardware, software, materials, and equipment furnished under this contract shall be new, free from defects, and shall be standard products and technology produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturer of these products. Meters, instruments, and other components shall be the most recent field -proven models marketed by their manufacturers at the time of submittal of the Shop Drawings unless otherwise required to match existing equipment. D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a Substitute Item Request Form in case of discontinued or upgraded product or other cases where changing technology requires changes in equipment or software. E. Adverse Environmental Impact: No component of an instrumentation system shall contain liquid mercury. F. Hardware Commonality and Modularity: Instruments which utilize a common measurement principle shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. Panel mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class, and shall be from a single manufacturer. All equipment shall be of modular design to facilitate interchangeability of parts to assure ease of servicing and expandability. G. Instrument and Loop Power: Power requirements and input/output connections for components shall be verified. Power for transmitted signals shall, in general, originate in and be supplied by the control panel devices. The use of "2 wire" transmitters is preferred, and use of "4 wire" transmitters shall be minimized. Individual loop or redundant power supplies shall be provided as specified and/or as required by the manufacturers instrument load characteristics to ensure sufficient power to each loop component. Power supplies shall be mounted within control panels or in the field at the point of application. H. Loop Isolators and Converters: The CONTRACTOR is responsible to resolve any signal level incompatibilities where required. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 18 • • • • • • I. Signal Levels: Analog measurements and control signals shall be as indicated herein, and unless otherwise indicated, shall vary in direct linear proportion to the measured variable. Electrical signals outside control panels shall be 4 to 20 milliamperes DC except as indicated. Signals within enclosures may be 1 to 5 volts DC. Electric signals shall be electrically or optically isolated from other signals J. Environmental Suitability: Indoor and Outdoor control panels and instrument enclosures shall be suitable for opration in the ambient conditions associated with the locations designated in the Contract Documents. Heating, cooling and dehumidifying dev ices shall be provide in order to maintain instrumentation devices 20 percent within the minimums and maximums of their rated enviormental operating ranges. The CONTRACTOR shall provide power wiring for these devices. Enclosures suitable for the enviorment shall be furnished. Instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be suitable for use in the partivular hazardous or classified location in which it is to be installed. K. Alternative Equipment and Methods: Equipment or methods requiring redesign of any project details are not acceptable without prior written approval of the ENGINEER through the "or equal" process of the Bid Forms. Any proposal for approval of alternative equipment or methods shall include evidence of improved performance, operational advantage, and maintenance enhancement over the equipment or method indicated, or shall include evidence that an indicated component is not available. L. Control Power Supplies: Control panels shall be provided with redundant power supplies which are configured in a fault-tolerant manner to prevent interruption of service upon failure and interruption of service necessitated by the replacement of a power supply. Power supplies shall have an excess rated capacity of 40 percent. The failure of a power supply shall be annunciated at the control panel and repeated to the SCADA system. M. Alternative Equipment and Methods: Equipment or methods requiring redesign of any project details are not acceptable without prior written approval of the ENGINEER through the "or equal" process of Section 013300 - Submittal Procedures 2.2 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. The ENGINEER will select the required spare parts from the priced list of spare parts in the Hardware Equipment Submittal, and the CONTRACTOR shall furnish them. The CONTRACTOR will be paid from the corresponding allowance item in the Bid, and the total price will not exceed the amount of the allowance item. B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish a priced list of special tools required to calibrate and maintain the instrumentation provided. After approval the CONTRACTOR shall furnish tools on that list. C. In addition to the CONTRACTOR proposed special tools, the spare parts shall be furnished to permit convenient and quick service restoration upon failure of a particular unit and shall include the following: One set of spare parts for each pump station. 1. One electronic magnetic flowmeter calibration device per manufacturer of flow meters. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 19 2. One portable instrument calibrator current simulator with charger and carrying case (RIS 4500, Fluke 709H, or equal). 3. One spare pressure gauge of each type and range supplied. 4. One spare level transmitter of each type and range supplied. 5. One spare magnetic flowmeter of each type and range supplied. 6. Four spare of each fuse type supplied. 7. Four spare of each pilot light type supplied. 8. Four spare of each relay or timer type and coil voltage supplied. 9. One spare of each 24VDC power supply type supplied. 10. One spare of each panel UPS type supplied. 11. One spare of each I/O module supplied. 12. One spare of each type communication module. 13. One spare of each RTU rack power supply supplied. 14. One spare of each TVSS type supplied. 15. One spare of each type isolator supplied. 16. One TAC Pack Telemetry Control Unit (TCU). Use as part of comms check during FAT check. 17. One power supply with battery. 18. One spare seal failure relay. 19. One s+pare Intrinsically safe isolator (Class I, Group D, Division 1) 20. One spare float. The spare parts shall be packed in a manner suitable for long-term storage and shall be adequately protected against corrosion, humidty, and temperature. D. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall warrant all hardware and software provided under this contract against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of two year. The system supplier shall warrant the telemetry software to be free of defects for as long as it is operational in the country. The function modules utilized in the remote terminal units shall carry an additional two year return -to -factory warranty. The two year return -to - factory warranty shall also cover damage due to lightning. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 20 • • • • • PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Shipping: After completion of shop assembly, factory test, and approval, the tested PCIS equipment, cabinets, panels, and computer hardware shall be packed in protective crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust, and moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene coverings. The equipment shall then be skid -mounted for final transport. Lifting rings shall be provided for moving without removing protective covering. Boxed weight shall be shown on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing, and handling at the Site. B. Special Instructions: Special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and installation required by the manufacturer shall be securely attached to each piece of equipment prior to packaging and shipment. C. Tagging: A permanent stainless steel or other non -corrosive material tag marked with the instrument or equipment tag number shall be provided on each piece of equipment in the PCIS. Identification shall be prominently displayed on the outside of the package. D. Storage: It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to assure proper handling and on-site storage of instrumentation and control equipment in accordance with the System Integrator's recommendations. All equipment and materials delivered to the jobsite shall be stored in a location which will not interfere with the operations of other contractors or the OWNER. Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Storage and handling will be performed in manners which will afford maximum protection to the equipment and materials. E. Equipment shall be stored in dry shelters, including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately protected against mechanical damage. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR. If any apparatus has been subject to possible damage by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through tests as directed by the ENGINEER. If such tests reveal defects, the equipment shall be replaced. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. All systems and instrumentation, including instrumentation furnished under other Divisions, shall be installed, connected calibrated, tested, started, and placed into operation in accordance with CONTRACT documents under Div ision 40 and the manufacturers' instructions. The installation shall be coordinated with the ENGINEER and the OWNER. This shall include final integration in concert with equipment specified and provided by others. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall employ installers who are skilled and experienced in the installation and connection of all PCIS equipment. III 3. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish the services of an on-site engineer to supervise and coordinate installation, adjustment, testing, and start-up of the PCIS. The engineer STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 21 shall be present during the total period required to affect a complete operating system. A team of engineering personnel (2) shall be at the site for 80 hours to check equipment, perform the tests indicated in this Section, and furnish startup services. 4. Equipment Locations: The monitoring and control system configurations indicated in the contract documents are diagrammatic. The locations of equipment are approximate unless dimensioned. The exact locations and routing of wiring and cables shall be governed by structural conditions and physical interferences and by the location of electrical terminations on equipment. Equipment shall be located and installed so that it will be readily accessible for operation and maintenance. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in approximated locations and arrangements, or when the OWNER exercises the right to require changes in location of equipment which do not impact material quantities or cause material rework, the CONTRACTOR shall make such changes without additional cost to the OWNER. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall review the existing site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all wiring and cables. 6. The Contract Documents identify conduits and instruments required to make a complete PCIS. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing any reasonable additional or different type connections as required by parts of the PCIS' specific installation requirements, or as practical. B. Conduit, Cables, and Field Wiring 1. Conduits, process equipment control wiring, 4 to 20 mA signal circuits, signal wiring to field instruments and to control panels, PLC input and output wiring, and other field wiring and cables shall be provided under Division 26 and without delay to the WORK of Division 40. 2. SCADAand PLC equipment cables, communication networks shall be provided under Division 40, but the installation in the field shall be under Division 26. 3. Terminations and wire identification inside PCIS equipment and panels furnished under this or any other Division shall be provided under Division 40. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall supervise and coordinate installation and termination and identification of field signals, power, and utilities associated with the PCIS. Resolve signal, power, or functional incompatibilities between the PCIS and new and existing interfacing devices. 5. Instrumentation Tie -Downs: Instruments, control panels, and equipment shall be anchored by methods that comply with seismic requirements applicable to the Site. 6. Ancillary Devices: The Contract Documents show necessary conduit and instruments required to make a complete instrumentation system. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing any additional or different type connections as required by the instruments and specific installation requirements. Such additions and such changes, including the proposed method of installation, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 22 • • • • • approval prior to commencing that WORK. Such changes shall not be a basis of claims for extra WORK or delay. C. Installation and Connections: 1. Instruments, control panels, and equipment shall be anchored by methods that comply with seismic requirements applicable to the Site. Appropriate mounting stands and bracket materials and workmanship shall be provided and shall comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. The Contract Documents show necessary conduit and instruments required to make a complete instrumentation. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing any additional or different type connections as required by the instruments and specific installation requirements. Such additions and such changes, including the proposed method of installation, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to commencing that WORK. Such changes shall not be a basis of claims for extra WORK or delay. 3. Conduits and/or raceways in building interior locations shall be surface mounted on walls or ceilings wherever possible and run perpendicular and parallel to building lines. Conduits shall not be routed on floors in areas subject to foot traffic. In exterior locations conduit shall be routed below grade. 4. Wires and cables shall be arranged in a neat manner and securely supported in cable groups and connected from terminal to terminal without splices unless specifically approved by the ENGINEER. Wiring shall be protected from sharp edges and corners. 5. Communication cables and signal and low voltage wiring shall be run in a separate conduits from power and 120 -volt control wiring. 6. Field wiring shall terminate at terminal blocks in the control panel. Field wiring shall not be wired directly to equipment in the control panel except communication and specialty cables that must be wired directly to their respective equipment. 7. Power and signal wires shall be terminated with crimped type lugs. 8. Wires shall be marked clearly with an identification wire number labels that are of a permanent nature. Computer system equipment cables shall be identified and marked for their location at each end of the cable. Computers and peripheral equipment connections/ports shall also be identified as to what cable is connected to its port location. 9. Connectors shall be, as a minimum, watertight. 10. Flexible cables shall be installed in flexible conduits. The lengths shall be sufficient to withdraw the element for periodic maintenance. 11. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the correctness of each installation, including polarity of electric power and signal connections. The CONTRACTOR shall certify in writing STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 23 all discrepancies have been corrected for each loop or system checked out. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall make sure process connections are free of leaks. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General: 1. Devices provided under Division 40 shall be initially calibrated by the manufacturer at the manufacturer's facility prior to shipment. Following installation, the devices shall be field calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended procedures to verify operational readiness and ability to meet the indicated functional and tolerance requirements. 2. Each instrument shall be field tested, inspected, and adjusted to the indicated performance requirement in accordance its manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Any instrument which fails to meet any contract requirement, or, in the absence of a contract requirement, any published manufacturer performance specification for functional and operational parameters, shall be repaired or replaced, at the discretion of the ENGINEER. B. Calibration Points: During bench and field calibration each instrument shall be calibrated at least at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span using test instruments to simulate inputs and outputs. The test instruments shall have accuracies traceable to National Institute of Standards and Testing. C. Bench Calibration: Instruments that have been bench -calibrated by the manufacturer shall be verified in the field after installation to determine whether any of the calibrations are in need of adjustment. D. Field Calibration: Instruments which were not bench -calibrated shall be calibrated in the field to insure proper operation in accordance with the instrument loop diagrams or specification data sheets. E. Calibration Sheets: Each instrument calibration sheet shall provide the following information and a space for sign -off on individual items and on the completed unit: 1. Project name 2. Loop number and site or process name and number 3. Tag number 4. Manufacturer 5. Model number 6. Serial number 7. Calibration range 8. Calibration data: Input, output, and error at 0 percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent of span STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 24 • • • • • • 9. Switch setting, contact action, and dead -band for discrete elements 10. Space for comments 11. Space for sign -off by System Integrator and when applicable by the manufacturer and date 12. Test equipment used and associated serial numbers F. Calibration Tags: A calibration and testing tag shall be attached to each piece of equipment or system at a location determined by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall have the System Integrator sign the calibration sheet when calibration is complete. The ENGINEER will sign the calibration sheet when the calibration and testing has been accepted. G. Loop Testing: The Contractor shall test newly installed and modified loops for continuity and functionality. The up-to-date wiring diagrams shall be used as reference. The ENGINEER and/or the OWNER shall witness the loop testing. CONTRACTOR to test loops, and demonstrates functioning loop to the ENGINEER and OWNER after testing is com plete. H. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of scheduled tests minimum of 30 calendar days prior to the estimated completion date of installation and wiring of the PCIS. After the ENGINEER's review of the submitted loop diagrams for correctness and compliance with the specifications, loop testing shall proceed. The loop testing shall be witnessed by the ENGINEER and/or the OWNER. I. Interlocks: Hardware and software interlocks between the instrumentation and the motor control circuits, control circuits of variable -speed controllers, and packaged equipment controls shall be checked to the maximum extent possible.. J. Loop Validation: 1. Control loops shall be checked under simulated operating conditions by impressing input signals at the primary control elements and observing appropriate responses of the respective control and monitoring elements, final control elements, and the HMI displays associated with the SCADA. Actual signals shall be used wherever available. Following any necessary corrections, the loops shall be retested. 2. Accuracy tolerances for each analog network are defined as the root -mean -square (RMS) summation of individual component accuracy requirements. Individual component accuracy requirements shall be as indicated by contract requirements or by published manufacturer accuracy specifications, whenever contract accuracy requirements are not indicated. Each analog loop shall be tested by applying simulated analog or discrete inputs to the first element of an analog loop. For loops which incorporate analog elements, simulated sensor inputs corresponding to 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span shall be applied, and the resulting element outputs monitored to verify compliance to calculated RMS summation accuracy tolerance requirements. Continuously variable analog inputs shall be applied to verify the proper operation and setting of discrete devices. Provisional settings shall be made on controllers and alarms during analog loop tests. Analog loop test data, including STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 25 calculated RMS summation system accuracy tolerance, shall be documented by the CONTRACTOR on the loop validation sheets. The validation sheets shall be included in the O&M Manuals. K. Loop Validation and Certification Sheets: 1. Loop Validation: The CONTRACTOR shall prepare loop validation sheets for each loop covering each active instrumentation and control device except simple hand switches and lights. Loop validation sheets shall form the basis for operational tests and documentation. Each loop validation sheet shall cite the following information and shall provide spaces for sign -off on individual items and on the complete loop by the System Integrator: a. Project name b. Loop number c. Tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number for each element d. Installation bulletin number e. Specification sheet number f. Loop description number g. Adjustment check h. Space for comments i. Space for loop sign -off by the System Integrator and date j. Space for ENGINEER witness signature and date 2. Loop Certification: A certified copy of each loop test validation sheet signed by the System Integrator, the ENGINEER or the ENGINEER's representative as a witness, with test data entered, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER together with a clear and unequivocal statement that the loops have been tested and the instrumentation in the loop has been successfully calibrated, inspected, and tested. L. Manufacturer's Services 1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide jobsite visits and services of a manufacturer's technical field representative for supervision of the following: a. Oversee installation: Supervise installation and connection of all instruments, elements, and components of every system, including connection of instrument signals to primary measurement elements and to final control elements such as VFD, motor starters, pumps, valves, and engines . b. Verify installation of installed instrument. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 26 • • • • • c. Verify that installed instrument and software meet manufacturer's recommendations d. Certify installation and reconfirm manufacturer's accuracy statement e. Oversee loop testing, prepare loop validation sheets, and certify loop testing f. Certify when testing is completed. g. Training the OWNER's personnel h. Perform bench calibration. i. Prepare pre -commissioning validation sheets, oversee pre-commissioning,and certify when pre -commissioning is completed. j. Manufacturer's services shall be furnished for the following equipment: 1) Magnetic Flowmeter — 4 hours. 2) Level Transmitter — 4 hours. 3) RTU hardware and Software — 5 days. 3.4 PRE -COMMISSIONING A. General: 1. Pre -commissioning is basically the demonstration of proper operation of every part in the PCIS with process equipment operating over full operating ranges under conditions as closely resembling actual operating conditions as possible. All systems shall be exercised through field operational tests, as a complete PCIS in accordance with the approved test procedures and in the presence of the ENGINEER and/or the OWNER. 2. Pre -commissioning shall commence after completion and acceptance of continuity tests, calibration tests and loop tests, and inspections have demonstrated that the instrumentation and control system complies with contract requirements. 3. Pre -commissioning Procedures and Documentation: Pre -commissioning and test activities shall follow detailed test procedures and check lists accepted by the ENGINEER. Test data shall be acquired using equipment as required and shall be recorded on test forms accepted by the ENGINEER, which include calculated tolerance limits for each step. Completion of system pre -commissioning and test activities shall be documented by a certified report, including test forms with test data entered, delivered to the ENGINEER with a clear and unequivocal statement that system pre -commissioning and test requirements have been satisfied. The result of the testing shall also include a punch list developed by the ENGINEER. 4. The burden of proof of conformance of the system to specified functions and • performance is on the CONTRACTOR. Tests that fail to demonstrate the required STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 27 operation shall be repeated in their entirety or continued after corrective action has been completed at the discretion of the ENGINEER. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall supply necessary test equipment and technical personnel if called upon to prove accuracy and/or performance, at no separate additional cost to the OWNER, wherever the OWNER or ENGINEER has reasonable doubt or evidence of malfunction or poor performance appears. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the scheduling of tests among all parties involved so that the tests may proceed without delays or disruption by uncompleted work. Field operational and functional testing must be successfully completed prior to the start of the 30 -day final acceptance test. B. Operational Validation: 1. Where feasible, system pre -commissioning activities shall include the use of the actual process to establish service conditions that simulate, to the greatest extent possible, normal final control element operating conditions in terms of applied process loads, operating ranges, and environmental conditions. Final control elements, PLCs, control panels, and ancillary equipment shall be tested under startup and steady state operating conditions to verify that proper and stable control is achieved using VFD and local field mounted control circuits. Hardwired and software control circuit interlocks and alarms shall be operational. 2. The control of final control elements and ancillary equipment shall be tested using both manual and automatic (where provided) control circuits. The stable steady state operation of final control elements running under the control of process controllers shall be assured by adjusting the controllers as required to eliminate oscillatory final control element operation. The transient stability of final control elements operating under the control of controllers shall be verified by applying control signal disturbances, monitoring the amplitude and decay rate of control parameter oscillations (if any), and making necessary controller adjustments as required to eliminate excessive oscillatory amplitudes and decay rates. 3. Pre -commissioning shall also include the testing of remote sites to verify compliance with all functional requirements and communication specified. The testing shall include manual and automatic control modes, fail-safe and backup control modes, and PLC interlocks and control strategies provided by the System Integrator. C. Loop and Equipment Tuning: Controllers incorporating proportional, integral and/or derivative control circuits shall be optimally tuned, experimentally, by applying control signal disturbances and adjusting the gain, reset, or rate settings as required to achieve a proper response. Measured final control element variable position/speed set point settings shall be compared to measured final control element position/speed values at 0, 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of span and the results checked against indicated accuracy tolerances. D. Pre -commissioning Validation Sheets: Pre -commissioning shall be documented on test forms as follows: 1. The validation form, which shall include: STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 28 • • • a. Project name b. Loop number c. Loop and function description d. Tag number, description, manufacturer, and data sheet number for each component. e. Pre -Commissioning Certification - A statement certifying that the contract requirements have been met. It shall also include a listing of instrumentation and control system maintenance and repair activities conducted during the pre - commissioning testing. Acceptance of the instrumentation and control system testing must be provided in writing by the ENGINEER before the performance testing may begin. Final acceptance of the control system shall be based upon plant completion as stated in the General Conditions. f. Space for sign -off and date by the CONTRACTOR, the System Integrator, and the ENGINEER. 3.5 COMMISSIONING A. Commissioning is the verification that the complete WORK functions on an extended basis are in full conformance with the Contract requirements. B. As part of the commissioning, the entire PCIS shall operate continuously without failure for 30 consecutive days without failure (see test details below). 3.6 STARTUP OPERATION A. General: Startup is defined as testing, demonstrations, and other activities as required to achieve Substantial Completion. Pre -commissioning and commissioning activities, manufacturer's services, certifications of readiness for testing, and troubleshooting, checkout, and shakedown activities must be completed before startup activities begin. B. When all equipment and systems have been assessed by the CONTRACTOR to have been successfully carried through complete operational and functional tests with not less than a minimum of simulation, and the ENGINEER concurs in this assessment, system startup by the OWNER'S operating personnel can follow. C. Each facility, process, or site startup shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures. D. Scheduling of startup shall be coordinated by the CONTRACTOR among all parties involved so that the tests may proceed without delays or disruption by uncompleted work. System startup and training and instruction of the OWNER's personnel must be completed a minimum of seven (7) days prior to the final acceptance test. 1. Troubleshooting and Corrections STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 29 a. The Contractor shall participate in all start-up activities. If problems occur, the CONTRACTOR and the System Integrator shall jointly participate in the diagnosis wiring, control interface, hardware and software problems and correct deficiencies. The Contractor shall be responsible and bear all expenses to diagnose and correct all the deficienciesfor work and equipment furnished under this CONTRACT. b. If a problem is found to be a result of the CONTRACTOR's workmanship or equipment and work furnished under this CONTRACT, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible and bear the expenses for correcting the deficiencies. 3.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE TEST (COMMISSIONING) A. After the pre -commissioning, functional tests and startup have been completed, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a report/letter states that CONTRACT requirements have been met and the PCIS is ready for the Final Acceptance Test. B. The entire PCIS shall go through a final 30 -day acceptance test. For the purpose of this CONTRACT, the terms "Final Acceptance Test" and "Final Performance Test" are synonymous and are used interchangeably. The 30 -day test must be successfully completed prior to the date of and as a condition to substantial completion of the entire project WORK. During the testing period, all system functions shall be exercised, and any system interruption and accompanying component, subsystem, software, or program failure shall be logged for cause of failure, as well as time of occurrence and duration of each failure. C. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish support staff as required to operate the system and to satisfy the repair or replacement requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall also provide a competently programmer on call during all normal working days and hours from the start of the acceptance test until final acceptance of the system. The on-call programmers shall be ready to respond within two hours of the notification of the problem. D. Testing: The entire PCIS shall be tested and shall include, but not limited to, the field instrumentation, control and PLC panels and PLC programs, application SCADA software, graphics and trends, reports, and the control and monitoring functions. Each system function, e.g., status report -backs, alarms, logs, and displays shall be exercised several times at a minimum, and in a manner which approximates "normal" system operation. At least two displays and reports shall be generated during the test. E. Failure During Testing: Failure of the system during the testing shall be considered as indicating that part of the PCIS does meet the requirements of the specifications and corrective action shall be required before restarting the acceptance test. F. Failures shall be classified as either major or minor as follows, and it is at the discretion of the ENGINEER how to classify the failure: 1. Minor Failure: A minor failure would be a small and non-critical component failure which can be corrected by the OWN ER's operators. This occurrence shall be logged, but shall not be reason enough for stopping the test and shall not be grounds for non-acceptance or —restart, provided that the function(s) can be provided by backup STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 30 • • • • • • equipment and repairs can be made and equipment returned to service within one (1) working day. However, should the same or similar component failure occur repeatedly, this may be considered as grounds for non-acceptance and termination of the test. 2. Major Failure: A major failure shall be considered to have occurred when a major component of the PCIS, subsystem, communication, or program fault causes a halt in operation of the system and/or when a technician's work is required to make a repair or to re-initiate operation of the system. A major failure shall cause termination of the acceptance test. When the causes of a major failure have been corrected, a new acceptance test shall be started. G. Technician Report: Each time a technician is required to respond to a malfunction in the PCIS he/she must complete a report which shall include details concerning the nature of the complaint or malfunction and the resulting repair action required and taken. If a malfunction occurs which clears itself or which the operator on duty is able to correct, no report shall be required (logged as specified above). Each report shall be submitted within 24 hours to the ENGINEER or its representative, and the OWNER. 3.8 SERVICE A. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall offer full factory support of the installed system through the use of factory employees. Service representatives who are not direct employees of the SYSTEM SUPPLIER, or who are not specifically trained in the service of radio telemetry systems shall be unacceptable. The customer shall have 24-hour per day access to service personnel through the use of text messaging The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall keep a fully -configured replacement CPU at their premises at all times. This unit shall be made available as a temporary replacement in the event of the system computer failure. Supplier must be able to install replacement computer within 24 hours of notification failure. This emergency spare computer shall be offered at no charge during the warranty period and shall be offered for only transportation and labor charges after the warranty has expired. The Owner agrees to take all necessary steps to assure prompt repair of the failed. 3.9 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Training: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall train the OWNER'S personnel on the PCIS operation, maintenance, calibration, and repair of equipment provided under this Contract. The training shall be by qualified instructors. The training courses shall be given on-site to a minimum of four (4) people of the OWNER's personnel. All instruction, tools and training material shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR. 2. These courses shall be designed to provide the operations, maintenance and supervisory personnel with training in routine and preventive maintenance of all the PCIS including instrumentation, communication, RTUs software, and HMI. The training course shall include instruction on the use of all maintenance equipment and special tools provided under the contract. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 31 3. Instructions: The training shall be performed by qualified instructors. The training shall be performed by qualified representatives of the equipment manufacturers and shall be specific to each piece of equipment. 4. Training Manuals and Material: The CONTRACTOR shall use the approved Training syllabus and Training Manuals to develop training material. The training material shall be designed to provide the operations, maintenance and supervisory personnel with training in routine operation procedures, and preventive maintenance and troubleshooting of the PCIS, RTUs and the computer monitoring and control systems. 5. Schedule: Training shall be performed on-site during the calibration, loop and functional testing of the PCIS prior to the 30 -day Final Acceptance Test. The training sessions shall be scheduled a minimum of 3 weeks in advance of when the courses are to be initiated. The ENGINEER will review the course outline for suitability and provide commentsthat shall be incorporated. Due to availability and scheduling of the OWNER's staff, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the OWNER the schedule of the classes. The OWNER reserves the right to videotape the training sessions for later use. Due to possible limited availability of the OWNER's staff, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the number of identical courses/sessions of each of the following training courses as indicated, each up to four (4) people of the OWNER's staff. 6. Training Subjects, Duration, and Agenda: The training shall include operation and maintenance procedures, troubleshooting with necessary test equipment, and changing set points, and calibration for that specific piece of equipment. During the course, hands-on experience with the system equipment shall be provided. Maintenance classes shall stress troubleshooting, repair, calibration, and other technical aspects of the PCIS and the RTUs. Operator classes shall stress operational theory and use of the PCIS and the RTUs. a. Field Instruments 1) Duration — an average of two (2) hours per each type of instrument 2) Subjects - installation, setup, configuration, maintenance, calibration, and troubleshooting: a) Level measuring device and transmitter b) Flow measuring device and transmitter 7. RTU: The training of the following subject shall be performed by the CONTRACTOR and the RTU manufacturer as noted: Maintenance classes shall stress troubleshooting, repair, calibration, and other technical aspects of the RTU. Operator classes shall stress operational theory and use of the RTUs. a. Duration — 24 instruction hours or a minimum of 8 -hours per class of RTU training. b. Subjects: STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 32 • • • • • • 1) RTU System Hardware and Programming Software - General Familiarity — by the RTU Manufacture. 2) RTU programming I/O, ladder logic, registers, etc. (process/site specific) — by the CONTRACTOR 3) Project specific operation and communication — by the CONTRACTOR 4) Project specific RTU program troubleshooting — by the CONTRACTOR 5) RTU Hardware- Troubleshooting and Repair of RTUs by the RTU manufacturer or by the CONTRACTOR if approved by the ENGINEER 8. HMI Development a. Duration 1) 8 hours for maintenance programmer 2) 8 hours for development training system b. Subjects 1) HMI configuration. 2) Trend generation 3) Operator training 4) Programmer training 5) HMI graphics with emphasis on making changes and additions to reports and displays method to be used for scheduling and changing the scheduling of reports. 6) Data base programming, adding or deleting analog and digital points adding future data base points. linking data base points to screen displays 7) The CONTRACTOR shall provide two (2) identical courses/sessions of development system training. Each development training system training course shall be 16 hours for graphic displays. 8) Integrating future RTUs into the SCADA system 9) Historical backup and maintenance. 10) Diagnostics, troubleshooting, and related procedures 9. Communication System and Network a. Duration — 8 hours STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 33 b. Subjects — 1) RTU communication hardware 2) Network equipment and maintenance 3) Communication protocols 4) Communication failure diagnosis/troubleshooting and repair 3.10 CRITERIA FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. For the purpose of this Section and all Division 40, the following conditions shall be fulfilled before the WORK is considered substantially complete: 1. Submittals have been completed and approved. 2. The PCIS has been calibrated; loop tested, pre -commissioned, commissioned, and the startup completed. 3. The OWNER'straining has been performed. 4. Spare parts and expendable supplies and test equipment have been delivered to the OWNER. 5. The Final Acceptance Test has been successfully completed. 6. As built drawings in both hard copy and electronic format have been submitted. The as built drawings shall also include annotation of the RTU ladder logic program by providing a descriptive label for all relays and function blocks and functional description of each rung. 7. Revisions to the Technical Manuals that may have resulted from the field tests have been made and reviewed. 8. Debris associated with installation of instrumentation has been removed. 9. Probes, elements, sample lines, transmitters, tubing, and enclosures have been cleaned and are in like -new condition. END OF SECTION STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION SYSTEMS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 00 - 34 • • • • SECTION 40 91 02 — FLOW MEASURING PART 1— GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide in-line liquid flow measuring systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Section 40 91 00 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. B. Applicable Sections in Division 40 — Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems. C. Division 26 — Electrical. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 40 91 00 — Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 MAGNETIC FLOW MEASURING SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: The Magnetic flow meter manufacturer and model flow meters shall be as follows and or equal: 1. Endress+Hauser Promag W 400 2. Sperling TigerMag EP 3. Or Approved Equal B. Description: Magnetic flowmeter systems shall be the low frequency electromagnetic induction type that produces a DC pulsed signal directly proportional to and linear with the liquid flow rate. C. Performance/Design Criteria: Magneticflowmetersystem shall be suitable for the intended service and shall be based on the conductivity properties and solid content of the process fluid, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Magnetic flowmeter system shall be capable of measuring fluid velocities in the range measuring fluid velocities in the range of 0.04 and 39 ft. /sec. in both forward and reverse flow in all sensor sizes. 2. Accuracy: The flow metering system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide at least 0.5 percent of flow rate. 3. Power consumption shall be as indicated. D. Materials / Components: The magnetic flow metering system shall include a metering IIItube, transmitter, and signal cable and flowmeter grounding rings. STANTEC FLOW MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 02 - 1 1. Metering Sensor/Tube: a. The metering sensor shall employ a pulsed DC technique to drive flux -producing coils. Sensors using high pulsed DC signals shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for the required service application. b. The metering tube sizes shall be available from at least 1 -inch to 48 -inch line size. It shall be sized in accordance with the installation application and the intended service and as recommended by the manufacturer. c. The metering sensor shall have potted leads. d. Metering Sensor/Tube 1) Flanged Connections: The flanges' size, style, type and construction material shall be in accordance with the required installation and the intended service application and as recommended by the manufacturer. Pressure ratings shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 405000 — Piping, General and as recommended by the manufacturerforthe intended service. The metering tube body for the wafer (flangeless) type meter shall be constructed of stainless steel wafer type painted with epoxy paint. 2) A minimum of two (2) electrodes shall be provided. The electrodes' material shall be suitable for the required service as recommended by the manufacturer. A reference electrode shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer for the required installation application. 3) Meter Body and Lining material shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation for the intended service 4) Meter housing shall be rated for NEMA 6P (IP68) (limited depth) and shall be offered with certified ratings for different hazardous locations as specified in the data sheet. It shall be able to operate between -20 to 140 Degrees F (-29 to 60 degrees C). 5) Meter tube shall have epoxy protective coating meeting requirements of Section 09 96 00 — Protective Coating 6) Grounding rings shall be provided and designed to protect and shield the liner's edge interfacefrom abrasion at the meter end. Grounding rings shall conform to the manufacturer's bore and material recommendation for the intended service. Grounding shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations. The wafer flow meter system shall utilize two (2) grounding rings for a system ground. Grounding ring material and installation shall conform to the manufacturer's requirements. 2. Transmitter/Converter a. The transmitte and /converter shall be capable of being mounted remotely as indicated. Mounting hardware shall be provided. b. The transmitter and /converter shall be rated for NEMA 6P (IP68) and Class 1, Division 2. It shall be able to operate in ambient temperatures of -20 to 140 degrees F (-29 to 60 degrees C). STANTEC FLOW MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 02 - 2 c. The transmitter shall convert the DC pulse signal from the metering tube to a linear 4 to 20 mA DC signal into a minimum of 700 ohms. The 4-20 mADCsignal shall comply with HART protocol. Output signal shall be continuously adjustable over the full scale. Other digital outputs options shall be available. d. The transmitter shall have an LCD displays for flow rate, percent of span, totalization, operator configuration interface, and diagnostic information. e. The transmitter shall have an adjustable integral low flow cutoff and zero return. f. The transmitter shall perform self -diagnostics and automatic data checking and activate a switch closure output when a transmitter fault is detected. g. The transmitter shall have six digit LCD displays for flow rate, percent of span, and totalization h. The transmitter shall have an operator interface with keypad which responds to English text entry i. The transmitter shall have automatic range change j. The transmitter shall be capable of measuring flow in both directions k. The transmitter shall have programmable parameters including meter size, full scale Q, magnetic field frequency, primary constant, time constant I. The transmitter shall have data retention without auxiliary power from main source or battery m. The transmitter shall have protected terminals and fuses in a separate compartment which isolates field connection from electronics n. The transmitter power supply shall be 120 Vac powered for all transmitters o. The transmitter shall have ambient temperature operating limits of -20 to 140 degrees F (-29 to 60 degrees C) p. The transmitter shall have thermostatically -controller heater as required q. The transmitter shall have a relay contact for meter failure. 3. Cables a. Remote transmitter configuration shall be provided with the required lengths and types of electrodes and coil drive cables as recommended by the manufacturer for the required installation application. Maximum distance of transmitter from the metering tube shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Calibration: Each flow metering system shall be hydraulically calibrated at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technologies. The calibration procedure shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/NCSL Z 540-1 Calibration. A real- time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least 30 Days prior to shipment to the site. STANTEC FLOW MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 02 - 3 PART 3— EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In-line liquid flow measuring systems shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop -tested, pre -commissioned, and performance tested in accordance with Section 40 9 100 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. Manufacturer's service, supervision, and training shall also be in accordance with Section 40 91 00 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. END OF SECTION STANTEC FLOW MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 02 - 4 • • This page was intentionally left blank. STANTEC FLOW MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 02 - 5 SECTION 40 91 06 - LEVEL MEASURING PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide level measuring systems, complete and operable in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Section 40 91 00 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. B. Applicable Sections in Division 40 — Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems. C. Division 26 — Electrical. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 40 91 00 — Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 NON -CONTACTING RADAR TYPE LEVEL MEASUREMENT A. Manufacturers: Non -contact radar type level measuring systems shall be Endress and Hauser FMR60, or Approved Equal. B. Description: Radar type level measuring systems shall employ time domain reflectometry (TDR) , utilizing impulses of electromagnetic energy transmitted from the antenna at the tank top down to the liquid level. When the pulse reaches the liquid surface, which has a higher dielectric constant than air, part of the energy is reflected back to the transmitter. The time difference between the transmitted and reflected pulse is proportional to the distance to the liquid surface, from which liquid level and/or volume is calculated. C. Performance / Design Criteria: 1. Transmitter: a. Power input to the transmitter shall be 24 Vdc. The transmitter shall provide an isolated, 4 - 20 mADC output signal, linearly proportional to level and shall be compatible with digital HART protocol. The unit shall have a local LCD display for configuration and monitoring. Transmitter operating temperature shall be -40 to 175 degrees F. b. Resolution of plus or minus 0.04 -inch. D. Materials / Components: 1. Transmitter: a. Transmitter housing material shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended service. Transmitter shall have FM approval for Class 1, Division 1, Groups A -D. STANTEC LEVEL MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 06 - 1 2. Antenna and Cone shape material shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended service. 3. Transmitter and antenna shall be provided with all the mounting hardware. Mounting type and material shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended service . PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Level measuring systems shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop -tested, pre - commissioned, and performance tested in accordance with Section 40 91 00 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. Manufacturer's service, supervision, and training shall also be in accordance with Section 40 91 00 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. END OF SECTION STANTEC LEVEL MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 06 - 2 SECTION 40 91 07 - LEVEL DETECTION PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide level detection switches, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Section 40 91 00 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. B. Applicable Sections in Division 40 — Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems. C. Division 26 — Electrical. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 40 91 00 — Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 TIPPING FLOAT LEVEL SWITCHES A. Tipping float level switches shall consist of a switch, a moving float, and a connecting cable that is anchored at the midpoint of a differential band. As the level rises and falls the float rights itself or inverts causing switching actions. The cable anchoring point shall be protected by strain relief. The hermetically sealed switches shall be SPDT with a minimum rating of 10 Amps at 120 VAC. B. Levels shall be sensed by polypropylene weighted floats. The floats shall be heavy-duty type, with hermitically sealed non -mercury switches inside. Weights shall be 20 ounces minimum. The floats shall be secured at the top of the wetwell via a stainless steel wall mount bracket designed specifically for float installation. C. Manufacturer shall be B/W 7000 Series, MAGNETROL T10, or equal. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Level detection switches shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop -tested, pre - commissioned, and performance tested in accordance with Section 40 91 00 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. Manufacturer's service, supervision, and training shall also be in accordance with Section 40 91 00 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. B. Levels shall be sensed by polypropylene weighted floats. The floats shall be heavy-duty type, with hermeticially sealed non-mecury switches inside. Weights shall be 20 ounces minimum. The floats shall be sectured at the top of the wetwell via a stainless steel wall mount bracket designed specifically for float installation. END OF SECTION STANTEC LEVEL DETECTION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 07 - 1 • • • STANTEC LEVEL DETECTION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 07 - 1 SECTION 40 91 08 - PRESSURE MEASURING PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide pressure measuring systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS A. Section 40 91 00 - Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. B. Applicable Sections in Division 40 — Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems. C. Division 26 — Electrical. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIVE SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be provided in accordance with the requirements specified in Section 40 91 00 — Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Manufacturers: Shall be Ashcroft 1279, or Equal. B. Performance / Design Criteria: Gauge Protection: Gauges shall be protected with the appropriate components as indicated. C. Materials / Components: 1. Pressure gauges shall be 2 inches, with white laminated dials and black graduations, and have either a shatterproof glass or acrylic window. The gauges' shall be bottom connected 2. Sensing element shall be bourdon tube with welded, stress -relieved joints. Sensing element material shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Gauges shall have an accuracy of plus and minus 1/2 -percent of full scale. 3. Body material shall be 316 Stainless Steel. 4. Gauge shall be liquid -filled. 5. Gauges shall be provided with a 316 stainless steel pulsation dampener (snubber), unless otherwise noted. The pulsating dampener shall absorb system pressure pulses. 6. Provide the gauges with a blowout disc, and encase in phenolic, steel, or cast iron. STANTEC PRESSURE MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 08 - 1 • • • • • • 7. The measuring element shall be a stainless steel bourdon tube with welded, stress - relieved joints. 8. Provide the socket with wrench flats. 9. Provide a rotary- geared movement and construct of stainless steel. 10. Calibrate the gauges to read in applicable units. 11. Provide an accuracy of plus and minus 1/2 -percent range to 150 percent of the working pressure of the pipe or vessel to which the gauge is connected. 2.2 DIAPHRAGM SEALS FOR PRESSURE MEASURING SYSTEMS A. Manufacturers: 1. For sewage, sludge, liquids containing solids, and pulsating flow applications: Ashcroft Model 100 or 101, U.S. Gauge (Ametek) SG, Marshalltown Series 225- 01, or equal. B. Description: Operating Principles The diaphragm seal shall attach to the inlet connection of a pressure instrument in order to isolate its measuring element from the process fluid due to incompatibility and/or high process fluid temperature. The space between the diaphragm and the pressure element shall be completely filled with a suitable liquid. Displacement of the liquid fill in the pressure element through the movement of the diaphragm shall transmit process pressure changes directly to a gauge, transmitter, switch, or other pressure instrument. C. Materials / Components: 1. Diaphragm seals shall consist of bottom housing, lower ring, diaphragm capsule, fill screw, flushing connection, and a top housing. 2. The bottom housing shall be removable in order to permit servicing. Bottom housing material shall be compatible with the process liquid as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated in the data sheet. 3. Asa minimum, top housing and bolts shall be 316 stainless steel, oras recommended by the manufacturer for the intended service and installation application and as indicated in the data sheet. 4. Diaphragm capsule material shall be compatible with the process liquid as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated in the data sheet. 5. The diaphragm seal shall be factory -assemble to the corresponding pressure instrument and factory -filled. The space between the diaphragm and the pressure element shall be completely filled with a suitable liquid as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended service and installation application and as indicated in the data sheet. STANTEC PRESSURE MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 08 - 2 6. Material of exposed surfaces, housings, and diaphragm shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the intended service and installation application and as indicated in the data sheet. 7. The seal shall be provided with a ring, flushing port connection, and fill/bleed connection. 8. The diaphragm seal shall be shipped a tag reading "Do not disassemble for installation. PART 3 --EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pressure measuring systems shall be handled, installed, calibrated, loop -tested, pre - commissioned, and performance tested in accordance with Section 17100 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. Manufacturer's service, supervision, and training shall also be in accordance with Section 40 91 00 Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. END OF SECTION STANTEC PRESSURE MEASURING LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 91 08 - 3 • • • • • • SECTION 40 93 00 — PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS LIFT STATION A. Reference Drawing(s): 1-602 B. Description: The pumping station is located within the wetwell. The pumps are submersible type mixed flow pump suspended on a rail system. The pumps are equipped with Variable Speed Drives that start and stop the pumps based on signals received from the control system. The pumps operate in a lead -lag -standby configuration. The tank control is based upon level within the tank. LIT -400 monitors the level within the tank and is backed up by float switches. LIT -400 provides monitoring and control of well level. C. Lift Station Pump VFD Control Panels (stand-alone): 1. The Pump VFD Control Panel includes the following operator devices for Stormwater Pump operation: a. Pump VFD Control Panel Hand -Off -Auto 3 -position maintained selector switch. b. Pump VFD Control Panel Run indicator light. c. Pump VFD Control Panel VFD Fail alarm indicator light. d. Pump VFD Control Panel Seal Fail alarm indicator light. e. Pump VFD Control Panel Motor High Temperature alarm indicator light. f. Pump VFD Control Panel Power On indicator light. g. Pump VFD Control Panel Low Flow or Check Valve Fail alarm indicator light 2. Each Pump is supplied with a stand-alone Variable Frequency Drive located near the Pump Local Control Panel for Pump control. Each VFD includes the following operator devices for Pump operation: a. Pump VFD Operator Interface (01). Each OI has the following control and display functions: 1) Pump Auto -Manual selection. 2) Pump Start selection. 3) Pump Stop selection. 4) Pump VFD Reset selection. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 93 00 -1 5) Pump Motor Current indication. 6) Pump VFD fault indication 7) Pump Speed Indication 8) Pump Speed Control D. Local Manual Control: Note: The Local Manual Control Mode shall be used for maintenance and troubleshooting purposes only. The Pumps are designed to operate normally in the Local Automatic Control Mode. 1. The Pump VFD Control Panel Hand -Off -Auto selector switch Hand Mode enables the pushbuttons located on the VFD Panel and disables control from the plant SCADA system. 2. Place the Hand -Off -Auto selector switch in the Hand position. 3. Depress the PUMP VFD Control Panel 01 Start button and the Pump will start and run until the operator depresses the Stop button, the Auto -Manual selector switch is placed in the Auto Mode, or an Pump fault/shutdown condition occurs. 4. Depress the Stop pushbutton and the Pump will stop. E. Local Automatic Control: Note: The Local Automatic Control Mode shall be used for normal operating conditions. 1. The Pump VFD Control Panel Hand -Off -Auto selector switch Auto Mode disables the pushbuttons located on the VFD Control Panel and enables control from the RTU system. 2. Place the Pump VFD Control Panel Hand -Off -Auto selector switch to the Auto position. 3. At the RTU Panel OIT control station place the Auto -Manual Control Mode graphic object to the Auto Mode. Note: Unless a Pump is out of service, all Pumps shall be placed in the Auto Mode via the Hand -Off -Auto selector switch at their Pump VFD Control Panel and in the Auto Mode from the graphic object at the RTU Panel OIT control station for proper control in the Local Automatic Control Mode. 4. At the LCP OIT select either two of three pumps as Duty pump. The pump not chosen will be the Standby pump. The duty changeover of pumps shall be by the operator. If the Duty pump fails the standby pump shall assume the Duty position. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 93 00 -2 • • • • • • 5. A level transmitter, installed in the wet well, provides the level feedback for Pump control in the Local Automatic Control Mode. In the event that the level transmitter fails, a low-level switch is installed in the wet well to stop the Pumps from running dry and a high-level switch is installed for control purpose turning them on. 6. Programmed level setpoints will start and stop the Pumps in the Local Automatic Control Mode, as described below: Note: All setpoint actions are on an adjustable time delay (1 — 60 seconds, initially set to 15 seconds) to allow for temporary fluctuations in the wet well. If level falls below a low-level setpoint, or if level rises above a high-level setpoint but does not stay below or above that setpoint for the duration of the time delay, the time delay is reset and the action will not occur. Note: All control setpoints shall be operator -adjustable, with the exception of the alarmed setpoints. Once the plant is in operation the control setpoints can be adjusted to allow for smoother Pump operation based on typical flow conditions. F. Level Setpoint Table. Setpoint (feet eleveation) Rising Level Falling Level Alarm -10.78 Lead Pump off Low Level Alarm -10.78 Lag Pump off Low Level Alarm -8.78 Lead pump on -7.58 Lag pump on High Level Alarm 5 28 High -High Level Alarm G. OIT Manual Control: Note: The OIT Manual Control Mode shall be used for maintenance and troubleshooting purposes only. The Pumps are designed to operate normally in the Local Automatic Control Mode. 1. The Pump VFD Control Panel Hand -Off -Auto selector switch Auto Mode disables the pushbuttons located on the Pump VFD Control Panel and enables control from the local RTU OIT. 2. Place the Pump VFD Control Panel Hand -Off -Auto selector switch to the Auto position. 3. At the RTU Panel OIT control station place the Auto -Manual Control Mode graphic object to the Manual Mode. 4. Depress the Start -Stop graphic object at the RTU Panel OIT control station while the Pump is off (as indicated at the OIT) and it will start and run until the Start -Stop graphic STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 93 00 -3 object is depressed again, the Pump VFD Control Panel Hand -Off -Auto selector switch is placed in the Hand Mode, or a Pump fault/shutdown condition occurs. 5. Depress the Start -Stop graphic object at a RTU OIT control station while the Pump is running (as indicated at the OIT) and it will stop. H. Remote Automatic Control: 1. There are no Remote Automatic controls required for the Pumps. I. Pump Alarms. 1. The following Pump alarms will shut down its associated Pump, send an alarm signal to OIT/SCADA, and require a reset at the Pump VFD Control Panel after the fault is cleared. a. Pump High Motor Temperature. b. Pump Leak. c. Pump VFD Fail. d. Pump Low Flow 2. The following Pump alarms will send an alarm signal to SCADA, but will not shut down the Pumps (outside of the normal control method) or require a reset: a. Wet Well High -High Level. STANTEC PROCESS CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 93 00 -4 • • • • • • SECTION 40 9510 — RTU -BASED HARDWARE PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. The CONTRACTOR, through the use of the System Integrator or Instrumentation Supplier, and qualified electrical installers shall provide the RTU -based control system (RTU) complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract B. Instrumentation Supplier: It is the intent of these specifications to have the Instrumentation Supplier singularly responsible for selecting, configuring, and verifying correct operation of compatible hardware and software to provide a functional RTU and to provide future support of all RTU hardware and software. 1. In order to preserve this focused responsibility, the Instrumentation Supplier shall be the integrator of all hardware and all database, data acquisition, control, display, and all other system software. 2. Additionally, the Instrumentation Supplier shall be responsible for the application programming of the RTU and GUI software per the Control Descriptions and other Sections of the Specifications. C. Minimum Instrumentation Supplier Scope: The exact contractual relationship and scope definition shall be established exclusively between the CONTRACTOR and the Instrumentation Supplier. It is the intent of these specifications that the Instrumentation Supplier, under the direction of the CONTRACTOR, shall assume full responsibility for the following, as a minimum: 1. Procurement of all hardware and software required to conf orm to these specifications. 2. Design and submit RTU hardware, software, and spare parts submittals. 3. Design and submit RTU on-site training. 4. Perform all required RTU tests, adjustments, and calibrations. 5. Furnish qualified labor to supervise RTU installation and to perform start-up activities. 6. Furnish qualified certified instructors to provide RTU instruction and training. 7. Furnish all required RTU tools, test equipment, spare parts, supplies, operations and maintenance manuals, reproducible record drawings, and program listings as specified herein. 8. RTU application programming D. RTU Configuration: The RTU shall consist of a RTU, modules, and all required equipment and peripherals as shown on the contract drawings , and as described in these specifications, and as required to meet the functional intent of the specifications. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 1 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: RTU submittals shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 409100. RTU submittals shall, however, be made separately from other process control and instrumentation system submittals. B. Hardware Submittals: The RTU hardware submittal shall be a single submittal which includes at least the following: 1. A complete index appearing in the front of each bound submittal volume. System groups shall be separated by labeled tags. 2. Complete grounding requirements for the entire RTU including any requirements for RTU communication networks. 3. Requirements for physical separation between RTU components and 120 volt, 24 volt elements. 4. Battery load calculations to show that the backup capacity and runtime meet the specified requirements. 5. A complete set of RTU diagrams which depict: a. All RTU, modules , and communication links. b. All cables required to support the communication requirements. A separate diagram shall be submitted for each component fully annotated with conduit size and number associated with the power source. 6. Data sheets shall be included for each RTU component together with a technical product brochure or bulletin. These data sheets shall show the component name as used within the Contract Documents, the manufacturer's model number or other identifying product designation, the project tag number, the project system of which it is a part, the Site to which it applies, the input and output characteristics, the requirements for electric power, the ambient operating condition requirements, and details on materials of construction. 7. Complete and detailed bills of materials: A bill of material list, including quantity, description, manufacturer, and part number, shall be submitted for each component of the RTU system. Bills of material shall include all items within an enclosure. 8. Site-specific arrangement and construction drawings for all equipment cabinets, including dimensions identification of all components, preparation and finish data, nameplates, and the like. Drawings shall be scaled and show the position of the equipment on its intended installation location. Drawings must show a scaled representation of the placement of all equipment and its spatial relationship to all other equipment located in the abutting and adjoining areas. All acquired access and clearances associated with the equipment must be shown with a statement of compliance to manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and other applicable codes. 9. Calibration, adjustment, and test details for all RTU components. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 2 • • • • C. Technical Manuals: General requirements for Technical Manuals are as described in Section 409100. The following items shall also be included in the RTU manual: • • 1. A documented RTU program listing including the I/O list and housing configuration for each RTU, a memory usage report for each RTU, and I/O list for each RTU. 2. Operation and maintenance manuals for the RTU, and all other RTU hardware. D. System Test Procedures 1. System test procedures shall be developed by the Instrumentation Supplier in accordance with the requirements for system testing indicated below, and shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for review. An approved submittal shall be required prior to the commencement of system testing. 2. Procedures shall be prepared for each process system. The procedures shall be in narrative form, and shall sequentially describe the operational steps to be followed in verifying the correct operation of each process system, including all features described in the control descriptions contained in Specification Section 409300. All equipment, including the RTU system and its various displays, which function together to form a complete process system shall be tested together, (including interlocks between devices controlled by the RTU). 1.3 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The CONTRACTOR and Instrumentation Supplier shall arrange for visits by, and services of, technical field representatives of the RTU and GUI software manufacturers for installation certification, system testing, training, and start-up. These services shall be part of the WORK. 1.4 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. All equipment and materials delivered to the Site shall be stored in a location which shall not interfere with the operations of the OWNER's personnel or interfere with construction. Storage and handling shall be performed in a manner which shall afford maxinum protection to the equipment and materials. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to assure proper handling and on-site storage. 1.5 SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. Special warranty requirements shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 409100. The following additional warranty requirements apply specifically to the RTU. B. The complete RTU (and associated software) included therein shall be guaranteed to meet or exceed the design requirements set forth in the Contract Documents. C. Equipment, software, and materials which do not achieve design requirements after installation shall be replaced or modified by the Instrumentation Supplier to attain compliance. The cost for doing so shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility. Following replacement or modification, the CONTRACTOR shall retest the system and perform any STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 3 additional procedures needed to place the complete RTU in satisfactory operation and attain design compliance approval from the ENGINEER. D. The CONTRACTOR warrants the materials and workmanship used for the RTU equipment and materials and further guarantees the materials and workmanship used for any equipment and materials produced and furnished hereunder as a part of the Work to be as required and agreed upon, free from injurious defects, and in all respects satisfactory for the service required. PART 2 --PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The requirements of Section 409100 apply to this Section. B. All materials and all RTU equipment furnished under this Contract shall be new, free from defects, of first quality, and produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of these products. C. Hardware Commonality: Where there is more than one item of similar equipment being furnished all such similar equipment shall be the product of a singular manufacturer. D. RTU Growth Provisions: 1. In addition to satisfying the functional requirements of these specifications, all RTU equipment and resources including RTU memory requirements GUI software, , data base, hard disks, storage devices, etc., shall be provided to accommodate a twofold expansion in the number of I/O points shown on the drawings. 2. All equipment and resources, including RTU I/O modules and implementation services, shall be provided such that at least 25 percent project growth can be implemented into the RTU without any additional cost to the OWNER. The I/O points included in the 25 percent project growth requirement shall be termed "implemented spare I/O". The 25 percent implemented spare I/O is 25 percent of the total project I/O and may be implemented in any one or more I/O racks at the direction of the OWNER at any time throughout the duration of the project until the beginning of factory testing. Subsequent to factory testing the unused implemented I/O, if any, shall be delivered to the OWNER as spare I/O. 3. The entire RTU being furnished shall be capable of being modularly expanded to accommodate a twofold increase in process display requirements and manual input requirements. 4. All equipment and resources shall be able to modularly accept any anticipated future expansion without the need to replace or retire any RTU component or resource. 2.2 RTU ENCLOSURES 1. Each RTU and its corresponding I/O modules, power supply module(s), communication interface devices and peripheral equipment shall be mounted inside STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 4 • • • • • • a suitable enclosure. All I/O wiring from the field to the I/O modules shall be terminated on terminal blocks in the enclosure. 2. RTU enclosures shall be provided in accordance and meet the electrical requirements of Section 409513 — Control Panels. 2.3 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) A. Provide and install line interactive UPSswhere indicated. B. Each UPS shall maintain 150% power to its loads for a minimum of 30 minutes. The equipment submittal shall include sizing calculations which support the unit selected. C. Provide a relay output card 2.4 REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT (RTU) A. The Contractor shall coordinate tower and antenna requirements with DFS. A complete radio survey shall be conducted by DFS to verify antenna requirements. B. The RTU shall be housed in the RTU panel. C. These specifications are intended to cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery, complete installation and field testing of all equipment and appurtenances for the complete RTU system herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in the Specifications or not. This includes all discrete and analog signal isolation necessary for interfacing with the Owner's existing telemetry system. D. For all units there shall be furnished and installed all necessary and desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned in these specifications or not. This installation shall include field-testing of the entire installation and instruction of the regular operating personnel in the care, operation, and maintenance of all equipment. E. The RTU shall include a backup battery with 2 -hour reserve. 2.5 TELEMETRY CONTROL UNIT The Telemetry Control Unit (TCU) shall be a microprocessor -based multi -pump controller device. The TCU shall provide local automatic control as specified. All configurable operation parameters and alarms shall be selectable from the operator interface via a menu selection. Special programming will be provided by DFS for the VFD control application. The TCU shall incorporate an integrated Radio Transceiver compatible with the owner's existing frequency. As a minimum the TCU shall have the following features and functions: A. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) - The TCU shall incorporate a large 4 -line x 20 -character LCD, in conjunction with a 12 -button keypad, to provide an interface for configuring, viewing and resetting alarms, and analyzing status information. The contrast of the LCD shall be controlled by an onboard temperature sensor to ensure that the LCD screen is easy to read in both high and low temperature conditions. The LCD shall provide the elapsed runtime of each pump, the average runtime of each pump, the flow of each pump, the flow of the station and the time of day. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 5 B. 12 -Button Keypad - The TCU shall incorporate a 12 -button keypad to page through its menu items, scroll through configuration options, and enter numeric data. The keypad shall include the numbers 0-9, scrolling keys (up, down, left and right), an ENTER key, and an ESC (escape) key. Some buttons shall offer dual functionality. The decimal point and the escape function (Esc) shall share the same button. The number two and the up scrolling function shall share the same button. The function of the button shall be dependent on the unit's mode. C. The TCU shall be programmed for automated level control utilizing 3 VFDs and analog (4- 20 ma) level transducer. D. Integrated LED for visual pump on/off status of each pump. Pump run status shall be reported back to the remote SCADA and recorded with +/-2 second accuracy. E. Remote control capability from the remote SCADA that shall provide individual pump override control and disable, station disable, alarm disable and alarm silence. F. Pump alternation shall be an integral function with automated alternation around non- operational pump(s), out -of -service pump(s) or pump(s) in OFF position . Alternation will operate based on the number of pumps configured (1, 2 or 3). G. Integrated Power Supply. The power supply shall be surge protected. Power consumption shall not exceed 20 Watts. The power supply shall provide a battery backed, isolated 24 VDC bias voltage source. The 24 VDC bias voltage source shall be utilized to monitor the high well float so as to make sure the alarm is detected and reported during commercial power outages. The power supply shall keep the backup battery at a float charge. H. All inputs and outputs shall be optically or magnetically isolated and surge suppressed. Input protection shall include M.O.V., Transorb, and Opto-isolation. Analog Inputs shall provide 12 -bit accuracy and capable of accepting 4-20mA @ 250 ohm or 1-5V @ 100K ohm signals. Discrete inputs shall be capable of accepting 10-30V AC/DC and 31-600V AC/DC with voltage reducers/resistors. Discrete outputs shall provide 120/240 VAC control and include at least (4) solid state and (2) contact closure outputs. At least one digital pulse input shall be provided. I. RS -232 service port shall provide local access to all the functions of the TCU. The service port shall provide local monitoring of the radio communications link with the remote SCADA. The service port shall provide an automatic antenna alignment function. J. A RS -485 serial connection shall be provided and utilized to connect to the RIO -128 as required for additional I/O to meet the control and monitoring requirements. K. Ambient operating temperature shall be -10 to 60 degreesC (14 to 140 degrees F). The upper temperature limit is 50 degreesC (122 degreesF) when using a backup battery. TCU shall be UL Listed and surge tested for EMI Susceptibility to IEC 61000-4-5 Surge Immunity Tests. L. All signal and power wiring shall be connected to the TCU through removable terminal connectors. The TCU shall be easily removed / replaced by disconnecting the wire STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 6 • • • • • • terminal connectors. The use of tools or re -wiring shall not be required to removed/replace the TCU. 2.6 RADIO TRANSCEIVER The Radio Transceiver shall be an integral component of the TCU and shall not require a separate power supply of power source. The radio transceiver shall communicate with the owner's existing remote SCADA. Integrator is responsible for coordination with Owner on what frequency to use. As a minimum, the Radio Transceiver shall have the following features: A. Surge protected radio power B. On board communications and functional firmware C. Watchdog Timer D. On board voltage regulation and radio power supply control E. Access via the RTU's RS -232 service port F. Utilize LEDs on TCU for transmit data and receive data indication G. Test mode switch for radio service. H. Radio current, receiver sensitivity and operating temperature are monitored for system diagnostics. 2.7 RAIL I/O DEVICE (RIO -128) The RIO -128 shall be DIN -rail mountable I/O device and meet the following requirements: A. Perform as an I/O component and include the following: 1. 8051 -class micro controller 2. Minimum of 64K of Flash ROM 3. Minimum of 1 KofRAM 4. Capability to scan in 8 digital and 8 analog inputs 5. Capability to control 8 digital and 8 analog outputs 6. Power consumption of less than 12 watts 7. Configuration button B. The RIO -128 shall have a total I/O count of (Vendor to Check) points. The points shall consist of the following: STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 7 1. Eight (8) digital monitor points 2. Eight (8) digital control points 3. Eight (8) analog monitor points 4. Eight (8) analog control points C. I/O shall have the following characteristics: 1. All I/O shall be non -isolated. 2. Each analog input and output shall have 12 -bit resolution. 3. All analog points shall be capable of being used as digital I/O when not required as analog I/O. 4. Analog inputs and outputs shall be 0-5 V. Analog inputs may be converted to 4-20 mA externally though the use of an external 249 ohm .02% resistor. 5. Analog inputs and outputs shall be processed at a rate of 10 -samples -per -second. 6. Analog outputs shall have an overall accuracy of +/- 1% of full scale. 7. Digital inputs shall be closure -to -ground for on and biased with the 10-15 VDC raw power through an onboard 5.6 Kohm resistor. 8. Digital inputs shall be processed at a rate of 120 -samples -per -second with 100 mSec de -bouncing for on/off status. 9. Digital inputs shall be sampled at the raw 120 sample rate for pulse input accumulation. The maximum input pulse rate shall be 30 Hz. 10. Digital outputs shall be open collector with current capability to drive 12 or 24 VDC, 80 mA constant duty, 300mA in -rush current, ice cube -type relays. D. Two part screw termination 8 -pin connectors capable of handling up to 16 gauge wire. E. Compatible with 35mm symmetrical or 32mm asymmetrical DIN -rail. F. 10-15 VDC powered by separate power supply. G. Moisture -free environment operation within a temperature range of 14-140 degrees F (-10-60 degrees C). H. One RS -485 serial interface. This RS -485 shall be used for connection to the TCU and shall communicate with the TCU via Modbus ASCII protocol. I. Removable address strap to enable the RIO -128 to be exchanged with another (spare) without requiring readdressing either device. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 8 • • • • J. The RIO -128 shall have a learn mode that enables it to automatically determine and learn communication parameters (e.g., baud rate, parity, stop bits, and protocol) when the Configuration button is held down on power up. K. The RIO -128 shall be supplied with a din -rail mountable power supply. The Power Supply shall be DR -120-12 as manufactured by Mean Well. L. Analog Inputs / Outputs connected to the RIO -128 shall have an Isolated DC to DC Transmitter. The Isolated DC to DC Transmitter shall be Model API -4380 -G -D -U as manufactured by Absolute Process Instruments, Inc. M. Discrete Inputs / Outputs connected to the RIO -128 shall be external relay Isolated with dry -contact. Relay shall be model AAE201 as manufactured by AA Electric with NDS -8 octal base 2.8 REMOTE SCADA (EXISTING) A. The remote SCADA shall be modified to incorporate a new HMI graphical screen for this station. The graphical screen shall be consistent with existing pump station screens. B. The existing Map Overview graphical screen shall be modified to include a link for this new station. 2.9 PERIPHERAL DEVICES • A. General: Peripheral devices shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR as detailed in this section and as shown and/or specified on the I&C contract drawings. Firmware modules, where applicable, shall be of the latest revision. If the specified model has been, or is currently scheduled to be discontinued by the manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish (with the approval of the ENGINEER) the manufacturer recommended replacement model of equal or better functionality, performance and reliability. • B. Configuration: The RTU cabinets shall be setup as unique IP addresses according to the Plant standards. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule a coordination meeting with the OWNER and the ENGINEER to finalize configuration specifics and password protection. C. A coaxial surge protector model IS-B50LN-C2 as manufactured by Polyphaser shall be supplied with the RTU. 2.10 LOCAL AREA NETWORK HARDWARE A. Description: 1. Network devices shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR as detailed in this section and as shown and/or specified on the I&C Contract drawings. Firmware modules, where applicable shall be installed. The network devices shall be of the latest revision. If the specified model has been, or is currently scheduled to be discontinued by the manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish (with the approval of the ENGINEER)the manufacturer recommended replacement model of equal or better functionality, performance and reliability. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 9 2. The CONTRACTOR shall also be responsible for configuring new network hardware, verifying the firmware, adding communication modules (and other network hardware components as specified) and configuring the network modules to ensure successful working integration with the control system communication network per the contract requirements. PART 3 -- STANDARD PROGRAMMING 3.1 STANDARD STRATEGY The TCU shall include special programming developed by DFS for the VFD control application. The operator interface referenced herein is the TCU integrated LCD & Keypad. The pumps can be manually controlled locally at TCU in both automatic and manual operations by using the Hand -Off -Auto selector switches on the TCU, or remotely if the local H -O -A selector on the TCU is in Auto via SCADA. Using the "Automatic" scenario, up to 3 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) pumps are controlled to manage the process. The standard TCU program Ver. 1.5 shall be customized to operationally control VFDs. A. The TCU shall provide the Control Strategy defined below. 1. General Operation Principles a. When placed in the "Hand" position, the pumps are started and the speed manually controlled using the buttons on the key pad of the TCU. b. In the "Auto" control mode, the pumps are controlled by the automatic algorithm. The "Lead" VFD pump operates first, followed by the Lag 1 and Lag 2 pumps. Pump staging is controlled by one of two methods and pump speed is control by one of two methods, all depending on the configuration of the TCU. Details of these operations are described later in this narrative. When in Auto the pump may also be manually overridden to start, or be disabled via the telemetry system. When a pump is manually overridden to start the pump's speed command will be set to the predetermined speed as set in the TCU. Any pump operating, including any pump operating under the automatic algorithm will also be brought to this speed. The details of the VFD TCU's operation are outlined below. B. Process Controller The VFD TCU is capable of two basic modes of process control, Fixed Set Point and Variable Level Control. C. Fixed Set Point Controller 1. The aim of the Fixed Set Point Controller is to match the Process control Variable (PV) to the Process Set Point (Process Setpt). In a lift station application it would maintain a fixed level in the Wet Well, in doing so it will basically match the effluent flow to the lift stations influent flow. So in this case the controller would operate from the wet well transducer that controls the pumps staging (PV from Analog 1 input (C1), VFD PV Xducer 1 in the Menu). STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 10 • • • • • 2. The Fixed Set Point Controller can also operate using the AUX (C2) analog input as the PV (configured by the VFD PV setting in the TCU's VFD menu). An example of this usage would be providing control of a constant Flow requirement (PV com ing in from a flow meter on Analog 2 (C2), VFD PV AUX ) that would match the effluent flaw rate of the pumps to the Process Setpt, keep in mind pump staging would still come from the XDUCER 1 (C1). A summary for this scenario would be, the pumps would be turned on and off by the wet well level (Xducer 1 (C1)), and once running would maintain a specific flow rate set point using a PV from (AUX (C2)). 3. To achieve either of the above applications the VFDTCU will vary the pump speed between the MIN and MAX SPD set points to maintain the PV as defined by the operator adjustable Process Setpt point using a PID algorithm. The PID algorithm may be tuned by adjusting the P, I, and D set points. D. Variable Level Controller 1. Variable Level Control allows the well level to travel up and down between the LEAD OFF and LAG ON or LAG2 ON setting, the pump speed control is Proportional to the level. Only Analog 1 input (Xducer 1 (C1)) can be used in this controller and VFD PV setting has no effect. 2. When a single pump is running the speed control output to the pump is scaled so MIN SPD is outputted when the PV is equal to the LEAD OFF set point and MAX SPD is outputted when the PV is at the LAG ON set point. 3. When more than one pump is running the speed control output to the pumps are scaled so MIN SPD is outputted when the PV is equal to the LEAD OFF set point and MAX SPD is outputted when the PV is at the LAG ON2 set point. E. VFD Speed Control 1. When in automatic the VFD speed control output will be limited by the operator defined MIN and MAX SPD set points. The MIN and MAX SPD set points are applicable during both automatic and manual operation. While operating under the automation programming all pumps will operate at the same speed once ramping is complete, with two exceptions: If any pump is placed into Hand locally at the TCU or if Pump 3 Lag is Enabled. If any pump is placed into HAND at the TCU all pump will operate at the Ovrd Sped Set speed, and if PMP 3 LAG is Enabled Pump 3 will operate at the OVRD SPED SET speed. 2. Ramp Speed defines the acceleration of a pump when a VFD is initially called to run. It will gradually increase speed from 0% to the desired control output in increments defined by the RAMP SPD set point until the pump's speed equals the process control output speed. Once the VFD ramp speed has met the control output the ramp speed function is disabled. Ramp speed is applicable during automatic operation and when placing a pump in HAND. F. Pump Staging Controller • The VFD TCU is capable of two modes of pump staging controls, Level (XDUCER 1 (C1)) and Speed. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10- 11 G. Level When LEVEL mode is selected the pumps will be staged on and off using their LEAD, LAG and LAG2 ON and OFF set points that correspond to XDUCER 1 (C1). H. Speed When SPEED mode is selected the VFDTCU will stage pumps on using their LEAD, LAG and LAG2 ON Level set points using XDUCER 1 (C1). Staging off the pumps will use a Speed set point (Spd Setpt in the TCU's VFD menu options) in conjunction with the ON set points and the Min Run Timer value. Operation will be in the following manner. The basic staging off operation will begin when the speed command to the pumps is at or below the Spd Setpt. However, two additional criteria must also be met; first the PV from XDUCER 1 (C1) must be below the LEAD, LAG or LAG2 ON set point for the pump being staged off, and the Timer from the preceding pump being staged off must have timed out. The Min Run Timer value is used in the staging timer during the stop process when this method is used. The Min Run Timer value is configurable in the TCU's menu. I. Additional Alternation Modifiers The standard alternation scheme may be modified in with VFDTCU additional options. J. LAG 2 Pump Standby The LAG2 STDBY option, when enabled, the Lag 2 position pump will be handled as a stand by pump and will only be called in the event the Lead or Lag pumps fault. It is not recommended and this option should not be used with regular TCU Alternation modifiers. K. Pump 3 LAG only The PMP 3 LAG option, when enabled, Pump 3 will always be called to run in the Lag position, and the speed of the Pump 3 will be fixed at the Ovrd Sped Set. This option cannot be used with regular TCU Alternation modifiers. The LAG2 STDBY option and PMP3 LAG options may be used together. L. Alternation by Time Alternation is typically triggered when the Lead pump is called to Run. The VFD TCU is also capable of triggering the alternation using a HOUR ALT set point. When used pump alternation will occur on the hour that is programmed into the set point and Lead Pump run trigger is disabled. When the set point is set to 24 the HOUR ALT function is disabled. M. Fixed Pump Rotation When fixed Pump order is desired set the ALTERNATE option to "None", and ensure the VFD TCU alternation modifiers are disabled, and select the lead pump using the LEAD STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 12 • • • option (1, 2, or 3). During this mode the pump assigned to the lead position will always be called to run as Lead. Lag and Lag2 will follow in order. For example, with the LEAD option set to 2; Lead will call Pump 2, Lag will call Pump 3, and Lag2 will call Pump 1. N. Manual VFD Control When a pump is placed into the HAND position or Overridden in Auto via telemetry, the pump will be called to run at a fixed speed determined by the operator defined OVRD SPD SET set point. Once called to run the pump speed may be adjusted up by using the 1 key (+1%) and 2 key (+5%) and down using the 7 key (-1%) and 8 key (-5%). Any change made to the manual pump speed will be stored in the OVRD SPD SET set point. O. Float Backup Mode The float backup mode in the VFD TCU operates differently from the regular TCU depending on the configurations. If the High Float is ENABLED it will call all pumps when actuated and the speed command to all pumps will be set at the Ovrd Spd Set. If the Low Float is DISABLED the VFD TCU will run the pumps until the High Float is not longer actuated and the Minimum Run Timer has expired, this operation is similar to a standard TCU operation. If the Low Float is ENABLED the TCU will maintain pumping operation until the Low Float is tripped, and the Minimum Run Timer has expired. P. VFD TCU Set points All set points residing in the TCU will have default factory set points when shipped. New set points values can be entered locally at the TCU via the LCD screen, or remotely from the remote SCADA via the PLC/TCU editor, default or custom screens if configured. The new values will be retained in the TCU in the event of a power cycle. PART 4 -- EXECUTION 4.1 INSTALLATION A. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize personnel to accomplish, or supervise the physical installation of all elements, components, accessories, or assemblies which it provides. The CONTRACTOR shall employ installers who are skilled and experienced in the installation and connection of all elements, components, accessories, and assemblies it provides. B. All components of the RTU including all communication cabling shall be the installation responsibility of the CONTRACTOR unless specifically noted otherwise. The installation of the communication network shall be the complete installation responsibility of the CONTRACTOR including all cables, connectors, transceivers, and any required electrical grounds. Grounding shall be shown on submittal drawings. After installation of the RTU is completed, the installation shall be inspected jointly by the CONTRACTOR and the Equipment Manufacturer's representatives. Any problems shall be corrected, and when both are satisfied with the installation, a written certification of the installation shall be delivered to the ENGINEER. The certification shall state that all RTU communication and I/O modules, system grounds, communication network, and all other components of the RTU System have been inspected and are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 13 4.2 FACTORY TEST A. General: Prior to the delivery and installation of the RTU at the Site, but after the procurement, assembly, and configuration of all components, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct a factory test. This test shall be witnessed by representatives of the OWNER and the ENGINEER. The factory test is intended to be a complete RTU. The factory test shall demonstrate the functionality and performance of specified features of the RTU. The test shall include verification of RTU, and plus communication devices I/O points along with their respective status and/or control displays. Each display shall be checked. A complete system checklist shall be available during the test for recording results of selected points. B. Test Setup: The RTU system as shown on the I&C contract drawings shall be assembled and interconnected on the CONTRACTOR's factory floor. Note that any exceptions to communicate segments must be approved by the ENGINEER prior to the FAT. The interconnection shall include communication cable segments for the RTU network to simulate as closely as possible the eventual Site installation. The RTU and communication devices shall be loaded with their applicable software packages and configuration programming. RTU input and output modules shall be installed in their assigned housings and wired to field termination points in the enclosures. The CONTRACTOR shall have a complete, up to date set of wiring drawings, a RTU tag list, a database list, and a listing of displays for review throughout the test. C. Provide hardware to test the wireless link with the main station for the RTU panel test. Use the spare radio furnished as part of the contract during this factory test. Data transfer between RTU and simulated "base" station can then be confirmed. D. CONTRACTOR shall schedule the factory test after receiving approval of the factory test procedures submittal. The System or Instrumentation Supplier shall provide the CONTRACTOR with written notice of the start and expected duration of the factory test at least 30 Days prior to the start of the test. 1. Test Procedure: The factory test shall be conducted in accordancewith the previously submitted and approved test procedures. The test procedures shall include written descriptions of how individual tests shall be performed and shall incorporate testing the following features as a minimum. All testing shall be completed in one continuous factory test which may extend over several continuous days if necessary. 2. Communication: Verify project network components are able to communicate over the control system network using the contract required protocols and mediums as detailed on the System Architecture. Verification that an alarm is generated upon loss of communication with any RTU component. 3. Alarm handling: Verification of alarm logging, summary display, lights, and the ability to disable alarms. Silencing and acknowledging of alarms shall also be tested. Refer to the Control Descriptions for any additional specified features. 4. Display Screens: Verification of all points on each display screen, and the ability to call up displays via point and click targets or function keys. The ability to print out a display screen shall also be tested. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 14 • • • • • • 5. Control Displays: The ability to enter new setpoints, vary control modes, and adjust control parameters shall be demonstrated. The lack of ability to change these items without the correct security level shall also be demonstrated. Confirmation of changes shall be obtained by checking appropriate RTU tags. 6. Power Failure: External power to enclosures shall be turned off and back on in order to test the operation of the UPS units. E. Test Report: The CONTRACTOR shall record the results of all factory testing on preapproved test forms which the OWN ER's and ENGINEER's representatives shall sign. A copy of the completed test forms and a report certifying the results shall be provided to the ENGINEER within 10 days of completing the test. F. Rework and Retest: If the RTU does not operate as required, the CONTRACTOR shall make whatever corrections are necessary, and the failed part of the tests shall be repeated. If, in the opinion of ENGINEER's representative, the changes made by the CONTRACTOR for such a correction are sufficient in kind or scope to effect parts of system operation already tested, then the effected parts shall be retested also. If a reliable determination of the effect of changes made by the CONTRACTOR cannot be made, then the ENGINEER's representative may require that all operations be retested. The CONTRACTOR shall bear all of its own costs for the factory test, including any required retesting. G. All of the ENGINEER'S (2 persons) and OWNER'S (4 persons) travel and per diem costs and factory retesting shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. 4.3 CALIBRATION, TESTING, AND INSTALLATION A. Calibration: All analog inputs and outputs of the RTU shall have their calibration checked at a minimum of 4 points to verify consistency with the balance of the analog loop. This calibration check shall be done in conjunction with the analog loop tests in Section 409100. Displays and RTU tags shall both be verified for correctness. B. Testing: After the RTU installation has been certified and the analog points have been calibrated, the RTU shall be tested to verify that all discrete inputs and outputs of both the RTU system and the system are correct. All points shall be checked "end to end." For example, valve status inputs shall be checked by pump start output shall be checked by using it to start the pump. Simulated testing shall be allowed only when no practical alternative exists. Displays shall be verified for correctness at the same time. An I/O checklist shall be used to record test results and a copy provided to the ENGINEER upon com pletion. C. System Testing: When the RTU installation has been certified and analog loop calibration and discrete I/O testing have been completed, system testing shall be performed in accordance with the approved test procedures. System testing shall operate the various process systems of the treatment plant to verify compliance with all functional requirements specified, including the automatic control modes and RTU interlocks described in the control strategies contained in Section 409300. Tests which fail to demonstrate the required operation shall be repeated in their entirety or continued after corrective action has been completed at the discretion of the ENGINEER. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 15 D. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a system testing completion report when each process system and all aspects of the configuration software have been successfully tested as described herein. The report shall note any problems encountered and what action was required to correct them. It shall include a clear and unequivocal statement that the process systems have has been thoroughly tested and are complete and functional in accordance with all specification requirements. E. System Start -Up Test: The CONTRACTOR shall provide start-up support to include the Instrumentation Supplier's personnel, electrical personnel, and the RTU system manufacturer's representative as required during the testing period to produce a fully operational system. This support shall be provided as part of the WORK. F. Performance Test 1. Subsequent to the system and plant start-up testing of operation the CONTRACTOR shall conduct a successful 30 Day final acceptance test for the RTU. In the test, the entire RTU shall be continuously operated and maintained (i.e., seven (7) days per week, 24 hours per day) during the test period with zero downtime resulting from system failures. If a system failure occurs, the 30 Day test shall be considered a failure and not acceptable. The CONTRACTOR shall repeat the 30 Day test. The RTU system shall be acceptable only after all equipment and software has satisfied the performance test requirements. 2. Downtime resulting from the following shall be considered system failures: a. If a component or software failure cannot be repaired/replaced within two (2) hours. b. Downtime of any component (exclusive of I/O) whose failure results in the inability of the Operator to monitor and manipulate control loops from the associated interface using standard procedures. c. Downtime in excess of two (2) hours resulting from any I/O component failure. d. Downtime resulting from concurrent failure of two (2) or more I/O components in a single RTU. e. Downtime of any component/peripheral associated with the communication network if the failed component is not repaired or replaced within 8 hours. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a final performance test completion report which shall state that all contract requirements have been met and which shall include (1) a listing of all RTU equipment maintenance/repair activities conducted during testing and (2) a listing of all components which were unable to operate successfully. Final acceptance, in writing, of the RTU system shall be provided by the ENGINEER if the results of all of the performance tests are acceptable. 4. After acceptance of all required performance tests, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for furnishing the spare parts/tools on site at an inventory level the CONTRACTOR determines is sufficient. All spare parts/tools stored on-site shall become the property of the OWNER upon completion of the guarantee period. The STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10- 16 • • • CONTRACTOR shall guarantee that the completed system shall perform all of the IIIdata acquisition, control, and reporting functions as indicated. • • 5. The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee that the completed system shall perform all of the data acquisition, control, and reporting functions as indicated. 4.4 TRAINING A. Instruction: The CONTRACTOR shall provide training for the purpose of familiarizing the OWNER's maintenance and operating with the use, maintenance, calibration, and repair of all components of the RTU. B. The training shall be scheduled concurrent with the calibration, equipment testing, and process system testing phases of the project. C. The training shall be performed by qualified representatives of the CONTRACTOR or the Manufacturer as noted in the table below. Training shall be specifically tailored to this project and reflect the RTU system installation and configuration. The table below summarizes training hours required, which shall be furnished as part of the WORK. All training shall be conducted at the Site unless another location is approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Training Classes Required Maintenance and Operator's Class, hours Conducted by RTU System Hardware/Software General Familiarity 6 CONTRACTOR RTU Hardware: Troubleshooting and Repair of RTU/OIT Troubleshooting and Repair of remote SCADA & Communications 4 4 Manufacturer Manufacturer RTU programming - I/O, ladder logic, tags, etc. 12 Manufacturer RTU software - capabilities, limitations, symbol libraries, how to develop or modify the configuration 8 Manufacturer D. Each training class shall be a minimum of four (4) hours in duration. Separate classes shall be conducted for the OWNER's maintenance and operating personnel at the OWN ER's discretion. Maintenance classes shall stress troubleshooting, repair, calibration, and other technical aspects of the RTU. Operator classes shall stress operational theory and use of the RTU. Each of the training classes listed above for operational shall be conducted twice during separate weeks to allow for scheduling of OWNER personnel. STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10- 17 E. The training classes shall be scheduled a minimum of three (3) weeks in advance of when they are to be given. Proposed training material, including a resume for the proposed instructor(s) (indicating previous instructional experience) and a detailed outline of each lesson shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least 30 Days in advance of when the lesson is to be given. The ENGINEER will review the submitted data for suitability and provide comments that shall be incorporated into the course. Final materials will be provided at least two weeks in advance of the training sessions. F. Within 10 days after the completion of each class the CONTRACTOR shall present to the ENGINEER the following: 1. A list of all OWNER personnel that attended the class. 2. An evaluation of OWNER personnel that attended the class via written testing or equivalent evaluation. G. A copy of the hard copy text utilized during the class with all notes, diagrams, and comments. This documentation shall be contained in the Training Manual. H. Directed Training: After completion of all RTU training specified above, the CONTRACTOR shall provide directed training for up to six (6) persons to be selected by the OWNER. This training shall be conducted by the individual most familiar with the configuration of this project and who was significantly involved in performing this configuration. Training sessions shall be conducted with a minimum of three (3) of the selected six (6) personnel at a time. I. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 60 hours of off -Site (within 150 miles) directed training for each selected group of personnel at no separate additional cost to the OWNER. This training shall be conducted up to three (3) separate sessions which shall be scheduled with OWNER a minimum of three (3) weeks in advance. Minimum training session shall be four (4) hours. J. The OWNER reserves the right to digitally record any or all portions of training performed for future usage by the OWNER's staff. K. The CONTRACTOR shall provide one day services of a RTU factory representative to certify the RTU system. L. The CONTRACTOR shall provide 5 days services of a trained RTU/OIT programmer to make modifications to the process logic after substantial completion. 4.5 SOFTWARE LICENSE AND REGISTRATION A. All software provided shall be installed and used within the terms of the software manufacturer's license agreement. All software purchased by the CONTRACTOR shall be registered to the CONTRACTOR during the construction phase of this project. During that time, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing and incorporating minor software package updates issued by the software manufacturer. For example, if version 3.1 of a program is purchased, and version 3.2 and 3.3 were released prior to project completion, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for incorporating these later versions STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10 - 18 • • • • into the final project. The CONTRACTOR would not be responsible for incorporating major software revisions such as the release of a version 4.0 or 4.1. • • B. Prior to substantial completion of this project, the CONTRACTOR shall re -register all provided software packages to the OWNER and provide the ENGINEER and OWNER with written confirmation of having done so. 4.6 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warrant all hardware and software provided under this contract against all defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year. The TAC Pack TCU and RIO -128 shall carry an additional 2 -year return -to -factory warranty. The TCU warranty shall also cover damage due to lightning. B. The system supplier shall warrant the telemetry software to be free of defects for as long as it is operational in the county. The SYSTEM SUPPLIER shall also provide free updates to this software for the life of the system. The function modules utilized in the remote terminal units shall carry an additional two year return -to -factory warranty. The two year return -to -factory warranty shall also cover damage due to lightning. 4.7 SERVICE A. The manufacturer shall offer full factory support of the installed system through the use of factory employees. Service representatives who are not direct employees of the manufacturer, or who are not specifically trained in the service of the owner's existing SCADA System shall be unacceptable. The customer shall have 24 hour per day access to service personnel through the use of a text messager. B. The system supplier shall keep a fully -configured replacement CPU at their premises at all times. This unit shall be made available as a temporary replacement in the event of the system computer failure. Supplier must be able to install replacement computer within 24 hours of notification of failure. This emergency spare computer shall be offered at no charge during the warranty period and shall be offered for only transportation and labor charges after the warranty has expired. The Owner agrees to take all necessary step to assure prompt repair of the failed. C. Furnish the services of a manufacturer's representative onsite during start-up. 4.8 SPARES A. One TCU, RIO -128 and Power Supply utilized in the remote terminal unit (RTU) shall be supplied. END OF SECTION STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10- 19 • This page was intentionally left blank. • • STANTEC RTU -BASED HARDWARE LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 10- 20 • • • SECTION 40 9513 — CONTROL PANELS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide the Pump Local Control Panel (LCP) and the DFS Remote Telemetry Unit (RTU) cabinet, complete and operable, in accordance with the CONTRACT Documents. The Pump Local Control Panel (LCP) is supplied under Division 26. The DFS Remote Telemetry Cabinet Unit RTU is supplied under Division 40. B. Reference the DFS RTU panel and pump local control panel layout drawings Bill of Material for panel hardware requirements. C. The requirements of Section 40 91 00 — Process Control and Instrumentation apply to this Section. D. The requirements of Section 40 95 10 — RTU -Based Hardware apply to this section. E. The provisions of this Section apply to local control panels provided in equipment systems specified in other sections unless indicated otherwise in those sections. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01300 — Contractor Submittals. B. Control Panel Engineering Submittal: The CONTRACTOR shall submit a Control Panel Engineering Submittal (CPES) in hard and electronic copy for each control panel and enclosure provided under Division 40. The CPES shall completely define and document the construction, finish, layout, power circuits, signal and safety grounding circuits, fuses, circuit breakers, signal circuits, internally -mounted device and SCADA system components, faceplate -mounted device components, internal panel arrangements, and external panel arrangements. Panel drawings shall, as a minimum, be "B" size with data sheets and manufacturer specification sheets being "A" size. The submittal shall be submitted as a singular complete bound volume or multi -volume package and shall have the following contents: 1. A complete index shall appear in the front of each bound volume. Drawings and data sheets associated with a panel shall be grouped together with the panels being indexed by systems or process areas. Panel tagging and nameplate nomenclature shall be consistent with the requirements of the CONTRACT Documents. 2. Schematic/elementary diagrams shall depict control devices and circuits and their functions. 3. Wiring/connection diagrams shall locate and identify electrical devices, terminals, and interconnecting wiring. These diagrams shall show interconnecting wiring by lines, designate terminal assignments, and show the physical location of electrical and control devices. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 1 4. Scale construction drawings which define and quantify the type and gauge of steel to be used for panel fabrication, the ASTM grade to be used for structural shapes and straps, panel door locks and hinge mechanisms, type of bolts and bolt locations for section joining and anchoring, details and proposed locations for "UNISTRUT' members, stiffener materials and locations, electrical terminal box and outlet locations, electrical access locations, print pocket locations, writing board locations, and lifting lug material and locations. 5. Scaled physical arrangement drawings drawn to scale which define and quantify the physical groupings comprising control panel sections, auxiliary panels, subpanels, and racks. Cutout locations with nameplate identifications shall be shown. 6. The detailed panel design shall include cabinet sizing for SCADA Growth Provisions and thermal management requirements. The panel drawings in the CONTRACT Documents serve as the general arrangement of hardware, the CONTRACTOR is responsible for final panel size to accommodate all the required hardware, spare hardware and future space requirements as defined in Section 409510 — RTU -Based Control Systems Hardware. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the housekeeping pads are properly sized to accommodate the final panel size. 7. Front of panel layouts for control panels. 8. All panel heat rise calculations shall be submitted for approved before panel construction begins 9. A bill of material which enumerates devices associated with the control panel. 10. Catalog cuts with model numbers, sizes, options, etc. shall be submitted for the enclosure and ALL components mounted on or inside the enclosure. 11. NOTE: Submittals that do not meet the requirements of Section 409100 — Process Control and Instrumentation to identify all components, model number, sizes, ranges, ratings, options, spare parts, etc. with a red arrow, high -lighted text or other acceptable identifying method will be rejected without an ENGINEER review. C. Control Panel Record Documentation: On successful completion of site acceptance test, the CONTRACTOR shall provide all "As -Built" documentation and drawings in hard and electronic copy. All final and field mark-ups shall be incorporated electronically. Hand- written revisions are not acceptable. Final documentation must include the following: 1. Index. 2. Wiring diagrams including all wire and terminal numbers. 3. Wiring schedules and interconnection diagrams. 4. Panel layouts. 5. Parts list or bill of materials showing tag number or identifier, quantity, make, model number, and description for panel and all components and devices. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 2 • • • • • 6. Installation drawings. 7. Installation, operation and maintenance manuals. 8. All information, including panel weight, power supply requirements, etc. necessary for installation of the control panel(s). 9. Test and completion certificates. 10. Operating characteristics of fuses and circuit breakers (manufacturer's technical data sheets). 11. Size and weight of all shipping containers. D. The CONTRACTOR shall correct defects in accordance with Section 40 91 00 Instrumentation and Control Systems, warranty paragraph 1.9. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Control panels shall be housed in 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosures powder coated white unless otherwise defined under this section. Control panels shall be freestanding, single access, single door enclosure as indicated on the drawings. Internal control components shall be mounted on an internal back -panel or side -panel as required. Provide all electrical components and devices, support hardware, fasteners, and interconnecting wiring as required for a complete and operational. B. Environmental Suitability: Indoor and outdoor control panels and instrument enclosures shall be suitable for operation in the ambient conditions associated with the locations designated in the CONTRACT Documents. Heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices shall be provided in order to maintain instrumentation devices 20 percent within the minimums and maximums of their rated environmental operating ranges. The CONTRACTOR shall provide power wiring for these devices. Enclosures suitable for the environment shall be provided. Instrumentation in hazardous areas shall be suitable for use in the particular hazardous or classified location in which it is to be installed. C. The control panel controls shall be 24 VDC or 120 VAC as indicated on the CONTRACT Documents. Where the electrical power supply to the control panel is 240 VAC single phase or 480 VAC 3 phase, the control panel shall be provided with a control transformer. Control conductors shall be provided in accordance with the indicated requirements. D. The control panel shall be the source of power for devices interconnected with the control panel. Equipment associated with the control panel shall be ready for service after connection of conductors to equipment, controls, and control panel. E. Where the electrical power supply to the control panel is 240 VAC single phase or 480 VAC 3 phase, the main feeder disconnect shall have a door -mounted handle with a defeat mechanism unless otherwise indicated. • F. Each source of foreign voltage shall be isolated by providing disconnecting or pull -apart STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 3 terminal blocks or a disconnect operable from the control panel front. Each control panel shall be provided with identified terminal strips for the connection of external conductors. The CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient terminal blocks to connect 25 percent additional conductors for future use. G. All RTU I/O spares shall be fully pre -wired from the I/O terminations to the panel side of interposing terminals. (The other side of the interposing terminals is reserved for field terminations). H. Control panel mounted devices shall be mounted a minimum of 3 -feet above finished floor elevation. I. Locate and install all devices and components so that connections can be easily made and so that there is ample room for servicing or replacing each item. J. Adequately support and restrain all devices and components mounted on or within the panel to prevent any movement. K. Provide sub -panels for installation of all terminals, fuses and other internally mounted components. L. Panel shall be equipped with door(s) for front of panel opening and as indicated on the CONTRACT Documents. 25 percent spare space requirement also applies to the front of panel. M. All vendor -supplied Vendor Control Panels (VCP) shall conform to all of the requirements of this specification. N. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the detailed layout and design of the panels in accordance with standard practice and techniques and local and national codes and requirements. The actual layout shall be subject to approval by ENGINEER. O. Panel shall be UL approved and meet applicable UL standards including, but not limited to, UL 508 Standard for Industrial Control Equipment, UL508A (Standard for Industrial Control Panels), UL 698 (Standard for Industrial Control Equipment for Hazardous (Classified) Locations, UL 698A Standard for Industrial Control Panels Relating to Hazardous (Classified) Locations. P. Panel shall meet applicable sections of the latest edition of the NEC including, but not limited to, Article 409 Industrial Control Panels. Provide calculation and/or method for determining short-circuits current rating. Q. All panels, materials and equipment shall be new and shall be built in an Underwriters Laboratory (UL) approved panel shop and bear the UL label. 2.2 PANEL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Panels shall be powder -coated white 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X for process areas. 1. Mounting sub -panels to be 12 gage 316 stainless steel. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 4 • • • • • • 2. Oil -resistant, seamless door gasket. 3. All panel penetrations shall be sealed and maintain the NEMA panel rating. 4. Any panel or door mounted devices (e.g., pushbutton, OIT) or instruments shall have a NEMA 4X or 12 rating. B. Floor -mount panels shall be minimum 12 -gauge for all surfaces. 1. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 2. Remove corrosion, burrs, sharp edges, and mill scale. 3. No holes or knockouts unless otherwise specified. 4. Removable heavy gauge continuous stainless steel door hinges. 5. Rolled flanges around three sides of door and all sides of enclosure opening to exclude liquids and contaminants. 6. Overlapping doors or removable center post. 7. Body stiffeners and panel supports as required. 8. Data pocket mounted inside panel on door(s). 9. Ground studs in body of enclosure. 10. Bonding provision on doors. 11. Lifting eyes, as required. 12. Bottom 12 inches of panels shall be free of all devices, including terminal strips, to provide ease of installation and testing. 13. No device mounted on a surface or door of the panel shall be mounted less than 36 inches above the operating floor level unless otherwise specified. C. Frame or wall -mounted panels shall be minimum 14 -gauge for all surfaces. 1. Seams continuously welded and ground smooth. 2. Remove corrosion, burrs, sharp edges, and mill scale. 3. No holes or knockouts unless otherwise specified. 4. Removable heavy gauge continuous stainless steel door hinges. 5. External wall -mounting brackets. 6. Rolled flanges around three sides of door and all sides of enclosure opening to exclude liquids and contaminants. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 5 7. Stainless steel quick release screws and clamps on three sides of each door. 8. Hasp and staple for padlocking. 9. Data pocket mounted inside panel on door(s). 10. Oil -resistant, seamless foam -in-place door gasket. 11. Ground studs in body of enclosure. 12. Bonding provision on doors. 2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL A. For control panels located in non -environmentally controlled areas, provide 120 VAC thermostatically controlled strip heaters inside panels, as required to maintain panel temperature 10°F above ambient to prevent condensation within panel. B. Provide heat calculations for each panel or enclosure to verify that there is sufficient dissipation of generated heat to maintain interior panel temperature and humidity within 20% of the maximum and minimum operating parameters of all panel components. 2.4 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Power Source and Internal Power Distribution 1. Panel power supply voltage, breaker size (in amps), power panel identification, and circuit number shall be shown on the Drawings. 2. The panels shall be provided with an internal 120 VAC power distribution with separate circuit breakers, sized as required, to distribute power. Provide circuit breakers for 24 VDC instruments with no more than three devices on a single circuit Provide 20% spare (minimum of five) installed breakers or fused terminations for each type and voltage level, and provide space for 25% more (in addition to the 20% spare installed). 3. All Instruments shall be powered from RTU control panels. All 120 VAC instrument power circuits shall be protected by separate fused terminal blocks. B. When DC power and/or low voltage AC power is required, provide, install, and wire the necessary power supplies and transformers in the panel. For example, all panels shall have a 24 VDC power supply wired to power analog signals that are not otherwise powered. C. Accessories 1. 120 VAC, 20 A, duplex, grounding type receptacles, one for UPS outlet if required and one for convenience. 2. 120 VAC LED light fixture with shielding and filtering to minimize EMI. Lamp wattage (minimum 20 W) and number of fixtures suitable for sufficient illumination of entire panel. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 6 • • • • • • 3. One 120 VAC, 20A door switch for panel light fixture(s), mounted in a metal outlet box with a metal cover. Locate in an area easily accessible from access door. 4. The light fixture(s) and duplex receptacle shall have its own circuit breaker wired to separate terminals for separate 120 VAC service. D. Wiring and Termination 1. All wiring to panel connections from field instruments, devices, and other panels shall be terminated at master- numbered terminal strips, unless otherwise specified. 2. Splicing of conductors or cables is not permitted. 3. Provide copper ground bar for all panel equipment. a. Ground the ground bus at a common signal ground point in accordance with the 1) National Electric Code requirements. b. Single Point Ground for Each Loop: 1) Locate at dc power supply for loop. 2) Use to ground wire shields for loop. 3) Group and connect shields in the following locations: c. At terminal blocks, identify as such. 1) Ground terminal block rails to ground bus. 4. Shields: Shields to be connected to panel isolated ground bus. The isolated ground bus shall be attached to building steel. 5. Neutrals/Returns: Neutral/returns shall be attached to terminal blocks which are connected to the parallel neutral bus. The panel neutral bus is connected to the UPS. 6. Panels with control items or operating switches or devices mounted on panel door shall have ground bonding jumper. 7. Internal wiring shall be Type MTW, stranded copper wire with thermoplastic insulation rated for 600 V at 90 C for single conductors, color coded and labeled with wire identification. 8. For internal panel DC signal wiring, use shielded, minimum No. 16 AWG. For DC field signal wiring, terminal strips shall be capable of handling minimum No. 12 AWG wiring. 9. For internal panel AC power wiring, use minimum No. 14 AWG. For AC signal and control wiring, use minimum No. 16 AWG. For wiring carrying more than 15 amps, use sizes required by the NEC. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 7 10. Separate and shield DC signal wiring from power and control wiring by a minimum of 12 inches. Design to avoid DC and power/control wiring from crossing each other. If a crossing cannot be avoided, then the crossing shall be at right angles. See Table 2.4 – Separation Distances. 11. Group or bundle parallel runs of wire using covered wire -way. Maximum bundle size to be 1 inch. Wire -way shall have 50 percent spare design capacity. 12. Install wire wire -way along horizontal or vertical routes to present a neat appearance. Angled runs are not acceptable. 13. Mount wire wire -way parallel to terminal strips. Provide adequate spacing, with a 4" minimum, in order to read wire identification tag without opening wire trough or moving any wires or panel components. 14. Rear panel -mounted (sub -plate) equipment such as loop power supplies, receptacles, surge protection devices, media converters, etc. shall be mounted on standard DIN rail. 15. Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or other movement. 16. All wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed from any one device, power will not be disrupted to any other device. 17. Provide and install spare terminal blocks in accordance with Section 409510 2.1.D - RTUs Growth Provisions. Provide a separate terminal for grounding each shielded cable. 18. Use separate 5/16 -inch diameter copper grounding studs for instrument signal cable shields and AC power. 19. Where wires pass through panel walls, provide suitable bushings to prevent cutting or abrading of insulation. Penetrations to be sealed according to panel NEMA rating and environmental requirements. 20. Conduit entry shall be made in bottom of control panels furnished under Division 40. Conduit entries in the side or top of control panels are not acceptable. Reference 26110 - Electrical Raceway Systems for conduit and conduit fitting requirements. 21. Provide complete wiring diagram showing "as built" circuitry. All revisions must be done in CAD—no hand-written revisions allowed. Diagram shall be enclosed in transparent plastic and placed in easily accessible pocket built into panel door. 22. Control panels shall comply with applicable requirements of Division 26 Electrical Specifications. 23. Signal and Control Circuit Wiring. a. Wire Insulation Colors: Conductors supplying 120 VAC power on the line side of a disconnecting switch shall have a black insulation for the ungrounded conductor. Grounded circuit conductors shall have white insulation. Insulation STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 8 • • • • • • for ungrounded 120 VAC control circuit conductors shall be red. Wires energized by a voltage source external to the control panel shall have yellow insulation. Insulation for DC conductors shall be blue. b. Wire Marking: Wire numbers shall be marked using white numbered wire markers made from plastic -coated cloth, or shall be heat shrink plastic. c. Flexible conduit is not acceptable except when specifically approved by the ENGINEER in writing. d. Conduit fittings shall be Crouse Hinds cast fittings or equal. e. Splicing of wires will only be allowed in junction boxes. Splices shall be either soldered or pressure crimped type. f. For case grounding, panels shall be provided with a 1/4 -inch by one -inch copper ground bus complete with solderless connector for one 4 AWG bare stranded copper cable. The copper cable shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR and be connected to a system ground loop. E. Low -Voltage Power Distribution Terminal Blocks 1. Provide copper power distribution blocks for low -voltage circuits sized to meet application. Provide clear plastic covers for terminal blocks to prevent incidental contact with terminals. F. Circuit breakers 1. Shall be installed as disconnects for external power feeds for control circuits from outside the enclosure and branch circuits within the enclosure. G. 24 Vdc redundant loop power supplies shall be provided. They shall be configured in a fault-tolerant manner to prevent interruption of service upon failure and interruption of service necessitated by the replacement of a power supply. Power supplies shall have an excess rated capacity of 40 percent. The failure of a power supply shall be input to the SCADA system. H. Terminal Blocks 1. Terminate all field wiring and internal panel wiring at screw type, feed -through, finger safe terminal blocks. Provide gray terminal blocks unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings. Adjust catalog number for wire sizes used. 2. Terminal blocks shall be UUCSA approved with a 300 volt rating. 3. Mount non-fused terminal blocks on high-rise DIN rail. 4. Heavy-duty end anchors shall be provided on both ends of all terminal strips to firmly anchor the terminal blocks to the mounting rail and insulating end barriers shall be provided on one end of the terminal strip, as necessary. 5. No more than two wires shall be terminated at any single screw. Provide Phoenix STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 9 Contact jumpers as required to join adjacent terminal blocks for additional wiring connection points. 6. All terminal blocks shall be labeled with alpha or numeric identifiers on each block. Identifiers shall be pre-printed snap -in marker cards. 7. Provide a separate terminal block for landing each analog signal cable shield. 8. Provide separate terminal strips with minimum physical separation for DC signal and AC power wiring. Maintain minimum physical separation between signal and power wiring. See Table 2.4 — Separation Distances. TABLE 2.4 - SEPARATION DISTANCES Voltage Current Minimum Distance Between AC Power Wiring and Signal Wiring 0 to 125 volts 0 to 10 amps 12 inches 125 to 250 volts 1 to 50 amps 15 inches 250 to 480 volts 0 to 200 amps 18 inches I. Fused Terminal Blocks 1. Provide screw type, fused terminal blocks for all wiring powered from within panels or enclosures or to devices located outside the panel or enclosure. Provide black terminal blocks unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings. 2. Fused terminal blocks shall be UUCSA approved with a minimum 300 volt rating. 3. Mount fused terminal blocks on high-rise DIN rail. 4. Heavy-duty end anchors shall be provided on both ends of all terminal strips to firmly anchor the terminal blocks to the mounting rail and insulating end barriers shall be provided on one end of the terminal strip, as necessary. 5. No more than two wires shall be terminated at any single screw. Provide jumpers as required to join adjacent terminal blocks for additional wiring connection points. 6. All terminal blocks shall be labeled with alpha or numeric identifiers on each block. Identifiers shall be pre-printed snap -in marker cards. 7. Provide separate terminal strips with minimum physical separation for DC signal and AC power wiring. Maintain minimum physical separation between signal and power wiring. See Table 2.4 — Separation Distances. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 10 • • • • • 8. Provide fuses (sized as required) and fuse pullers for all fused terminal blocks. 9. Provide 20 percent spare fused terminal blocks mounted on the rail(s). Wire all spares from I/O card termination arms to the fused terminal blocks. J. EMI / RFI Protection 1. Construction and design techniques shall be used to minimize EMI / RFI. Use shielding, physical separation, filters, ferrite beads, or other methods to insure no interference to or from electrical or battery-operated components or devices. K. Surge Protection 1. General: Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic instrumentation system from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. The protection systems shall be such that the protection level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge withstand level, and be maintenance free and self -restoring. Instruments shall be housed in suitable me- tallic cases, properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall be con- nected to a good earth ground and where practical each ground wire run individually and insulated from each other. These protectors shall be mounted within the in- strument enclosure or a separate junction box (compatible with the area designation) coupled to the enclosure. 2. Provide formal lightning and surge protection devices for all signal lines, communication networks, and power feeds for SCADA equipment. For signal lines, communication networks, and power feeds to control panels, RTU panels and SCADA equipment, provide formal lightning and surge protection devices for all lines that originate or are routed outside a building on any part of the existing or proposed circuits, either in buried or exposed raceways. 3. Lightning and surge protection devices shall be standard manufactured products comprising multi-component networks or hybrid circuits. The units shall incorporate gas filled discharge tubes, metal oxide varistors, and/or Zener diodes providing full protection from line to line and from line to ground. Units shall be DIN -rail mounted, rated for a minimum 25kA maximum surge current and voltage suitable for the type of circuit being protected. Reaction time shall be on the order of nanoseconds. 4. For AC power lines use minimum 25kA surge protection and RFI filtering. L. Intrinsically Safe Relays for float switches shall be 24V AC, Diversified Electronics Cat# ISO-24-AFA. M. Intrinsically Safe Barriers for shall be Phoenix Contact 2865340.. 2.5 CONTROL/TIMING RELAYS A. Type: General purpose, plug-in type rated for continuous duty. 1. All relay and timer sockets shall be mounted on standard DIN rail. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 11 B. Performance and Construction Requirements: 1. Coil Voltage: 120 VAC or 24 VDC, as required. 2. Contact Configuration: Minimum DPDTwith at least one spare contact. If 4PDT relay is required, see Item 4, below. 3. Contact Material and Rating: a. General Use: Silver or silver cadmium oxide contacts rated for 10 amps minimum (DPDT) at 120 VAC. b. Low Power Switching: Fine silver, gold flashed contacts specifically designed for low power switching, rated for 2 amps minimum at 30 VDC. 4. Mounting: 8 -Pin or 11 -pin octal base plug-in sockets for sub -panel mounting on standard DIN rail. Sockets shall have screw terminals for wiring connections which shall accept a minimum of two#14 AWG wires. (Four pole relays as in paragraph #4, below, shall be supplied with a matching blade -style socket.) 5. Cover: Clear plastic dust cover. 6. Finger -safe terminals. 7. Indication: LED indicator light. 8. Accessories: Hold-down spring or clip. 9. Accessories: MOV for DC voltage coil and MOVs for contacts, as required. 10. Accessories: MOV or Zener diode for AC voltage coil, MOVsfor contacts, as required. 11. Approvals: UL recognized. 12. Manufacturer and Model: a. Tyco / Potter & Brumfield KRPA Series. b. Allen-Bradley 700 -HA Series c. Magnecraft / Struthers -Dunn 750 Full -featured Series d. Phoenix Contact PLC relay part no. 2966197 e. Or approved equal. 13. The following relays come with blade -style terminals a. IDEC RH4B Series. b. Magnecraft / Struthers -Dunn 782XDX Full -featured Series. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 12 • • • • • c. Allen-Bradley 700-HC2 Series. d. Square D 8501 RS Series. e. Or approved equal. 14. Type: Programmable, multi -function, multi -range plug-in type time delay relay providing delay -on -make, delay -on -break and interval operation. Time shall be adjusted with a thumbwheel or digital display and not a rotary knob. 15. Construction Features: a. Time range: 0.1 seconds or less to 9990 hours or more. b. Digital setting accuracy: Five percent or better. 16. Contacts: a. Type: DPDT b. Rating: 10 Amp minimum 17. Housing: Plug-in design with dust and moisture -resistant molded plastic case. 18. Power input: 24 to 240 V AC or DC. 19. Operating Temperature: -10° C to +55° C. 20. Unit shall have LEDs or LCD to show timing status. 21. Finger -safe terminals. 22. Hold-down clips. 23. Suppression diode or current snubber, as required 24. Approvals: UL recognized. 25. Manufacturer and Model a. Magnecraft TDRPRO 5100 Series b. Tyco / Potter & Brumfield CNT-35-96 c. Or approved equal. 2.6 PANEL -MOUNTED OPERATORS AND PILOT LIGHTS A. Pushbuttons — General Purpose Areas 1. 30 mm NEMA 4X/13 watertight & oil tight. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 13 2. Non -illuminated. 3. Momentary contact unless otherwise specified. 4. 1 N.O & 1 N.C. contact unless otherwise specified. 5. Standard aluminum, grey legend plate unless otherwise specified. 6. Nameplate, white letters on black; text as specified. 7. Reference Table 2.6-1 for operator color requirements. 8. Manufacturer and Model a. Allen-Bradley 800H Series b. Or approved equal TABLE 2.6-1 OPERATOR COLOR Function Style Operator Color Start Flush Green Stop Extended Red Emergency Stop Mushroom Red All Other Functions* Flush Black c. Unless otherwise specified. B. Pilot Lights — General Purpose Areas 1. 30 mm NEMA4X/13 watertight and oil tight. 2. Full voltage, LED lamp, push -to -test. 3. Voltage to match application. 4. Standard aluminum, grey legend plate unless otherwise specified. 5. Nameplate, black letters on white, text as specified. 6. Reference Table 2.6-2 for lens color requirements. 7. Manufacturer and Model (Refer to Table 2-1): a. Allen-Bradley 800H Series b. Or approved equal TABLE 2.6-2 LENS COLOR STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13- 14 • • • • • • Function Color Examples Power White Panel power on, control power on Status Blue In remote, In calibration Alarm or Fault Amber VFD fault, low level, high pressure Energized Red Motor or pump running, valve open De -Energized Green Motor or pump stopped, valve closed C. Selector Switches — General Purpose Areas 1. 30 mm NEMA4X/13 watertight and oil tight. 2. Non -illuminated. 3. Number of positions to suit application. 4. Maintained or spring return to suit application. 5. 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. contacts unless otherwise specified. 6. Standard knob lever with black knob and white insert unless otherwise specified. 7. Standard aluminum, grey legend plate unless otherwise specified. 8. Nameplate, black letters on white, text as specified. 9. Manufacturer and Model: a. Allen-Bradley 800H Series b. Or approved equal 2.7 ALARM SYSTEM A. The pump local control panel shall include a vapor -proof red light mounted on the exterior of the cabinet as shown on the drawings for alarm visual indication and a weatherproof horn mounted on the exterior of the cabinet. The alarm Tight and horn shall be prewired to the DataFlow RTU to operate on alarm conditions via signals from both the RTU and associated cabinet relays. An alarm silence push button labeled "Alarm Silence" shall be mounted on the outside of the enclosure and shall be wired to the DataFlow RTU which will silence the horn under all conditions, and automatically reset when the alarm condition is corrected. The alarm system shall be manually reset. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 15 NOTE: Alarm light to be designed and positioned to provide unobstructed access for changing light bulb. 1. Convenience Receptacle: The pump local control panel shall have GFI (ground fault interrupter) type convenience receptacle mounted on the inner door to provide plug-in 120V power with ground fault protection. 2.8 OPERATING CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS: A. All operating controls and instruments shall be securely mounted on the control compartment door. All controls and instruments shall be clearly labeled to indicate function. B. Indicator lamps shall be mounted in oil -tight modules, as manufactured by Allen-Bradley, Square D or approved equal. Lamp modules shall be equipped to operate at 120 volt input. Lamps shall be easily replaceable from the front of the control compartment door without removing lamp module from its mounted position. Control and installation schematics are shown on the drawings. 2.9 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for identification of panels and its components. Nameplates shall be 3/32 -inch thick laminated phenolic type with white matte finish and black letter engraving. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel face with two stainless steel self -tapping screws. 1. Panel identification nameplates to have 1/2 -inch high letter engravings. 2. Panel -mounted component (i.e., control devices, indicating lights, selector switches, instruments, etc.) identification nameplates to have 3/16 -inch high letter engravings. Include legend plates for items like push buttons, pilot lights and selector switches to show indication or position function (e.g., ON or HAND -OFF -AUTO). 3. Nameplate engravings shall include the instrument or equipment tag number and descriptive title as shown and specified. B. Tag all front of panel -mounted components and internally -mounted components in accordance with the following requirements: 1. Tag numbers shall be as defined in the CONTRACT Documents, drawings, data sheet, or specifications and as provided herein by the ENGINEER. 2. The identifying tag number shall be permanently etched or embossed onto a stainless steel tag securely fastened to the device housing. 3. Where neither of the above fastenings can be accomplished, tags shall be permanently attached to the device by a circle of 1/16 -inch diameter stainless steel wire rope. 4. Identification tags shall be installed so that numbers are easily visible to service personnel. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 16 • • • • 5. Front of panel mounted components shall have the tag attached to rear of device (in addition to the front of panel nameplate). C. Label internally mounted components and devices (e.g., power supplies, power distribution blocks), mounting rails (e.g., forterminal blocks), etc. with phenolic nameplates attached with self -tapping stainless steel screws or adhesive or with other approved method. Attach to mounting plate or panel surface near the device in a manner that makes identification unambiguous. Manufacturer -provided identification means are acceptable if approved by the ENGINEER. D. Tagging of the following items shall be accomplished with the use of machine -generated adhesive plastic labels by W.H. Brady, or equal. 1. Tag all electrical devices (circuit breakers, relays, timers, etc.) mounted within control panels and enclosures. Do not cover model numbers or other text or indicating lights. 2. Numerically tag individual terminals or terminal blocks (pre-printed push -on plastic labels from vendor may be used). 3. Color code and numerically tag wiring at each end according to drawings or other documents, as applicable. 2.10 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS A. Control panel spare parts shall be furnished in accordancewith Section 409100 — Process 1111 Control and Instrumentation Systems. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Preparation for Shipment and Shipping 1. Panels shall be crated for shipment using a heavy framework and skids. Panel sections shall be cushioned to protect the finish of the instruments and panel during shipment. Instruments that are shipped with the panel shall have suitable shipping stops and cushioning material installed to protect parts that could be damaged due to mechanical shock. Each separate panel unit shall be provided with removable lifting Tugs to facilitate handling. 2. Shipments shall be by air ride van unless otherwise indicated. 3. Control panel testing and inspection shall be performed prior to shipping. 4. Control panels shall be installed in accordance with Section 260000 — Electrical Work, General and the General Electrical Standard Details. 3.2 CONTROL PANEL SIGNAL AND CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING • A. Wiring Installation: Wires shall be run in plastic wireways except (1) field wiring, (2) wiring between mating blocks in adjacent sections, (3) wiring from components on a swing out STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 17 panel to components on a part of the fixed structure, and (4) wiring to panel -mounted components. Wiring run from components on a swing out panel to other components on a fixed panel shall be made up in tied bundles. These bundles shall be tied with nylon wire ties and shall be secured to panels at both sides of the hinge loop so that conductors are not strained at the terminals. B. Wiring run to control devices on the front panels shall be tied together at short intervals with nylon wire ties and be secured to the inside face of the panel using adhesive mounts. C. Wiring to rear terminals on panel -mount instruments shall be in plastic wireways secured to horizontal brackets above or below the instruments in about the same plane as the rear of the instruments. D. Shop Drawings shall show conformance to the above wiring installation requirements. E. Wire Marking: Each signal, control, alarm, and indicating circuit conductor connected to a given electrical point shall be designated by a single unique number which shall be shown on Shop Drawings. These numbers shall be marked on conductors at every terminal and each end. Each wire number shall be solid, machine pre-printed. No hand- written labels or pieced from single/or double digit tags are permitted. These markers shall be heat, oil, water and solvent resistant, vinyl self -laminating, self-adhesive wrap type labels. All wire labels shall be clearly visible and not hidden by wire duct or other components in enclosure. 3.3 CALIBRATION, TESTING, AND INSTRUCTION A. General: Calibration, testing, and instruction shall be performed in accordance with Section 409100 - Process Control and Instrumentation. B. Inspection and Testing 1. All panels, and cabinets shall be inspected by the CONTRACTOR. Inspection shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. Nameplates, warning labels, and tags including correct spelling, color and size of labeling and characters. b. Enclosure flatness, finish, and color. c. Proper operation of doors, catches, and locks. d. Wire types, sizes, and colors. e. Proper wiring layout, practices and grounding. f. All electrical circuits checked for continuity. g. Terminal block contact ratings and numbers. h. Terminal block, fuse, breaker, & other required installed spares. i. General arrangement and space allocation. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 18 • j. AC/DC power checks. k. Power faiVrestart tests. I. Diagnostic checks. m. All electrical circuits energized simultaneously and continuously for 48 hours without failures. n. All alarm circuits connected to simulated alarm contacts to verify operation. o. All interlock and shutdown circuits checked for operability and proper function by means of simulated contact. p. All input/output devices and components shall be tested to verify operability and basic calibration. q. Simulate operation of electronic control and receiving instruments and circuits. r. Test demonstrating that all specified equipment functional capabilities are working properly. s. Verify that communication between units is working properly. t. Any other test required to place the panel in an operating state. u. Compliance with specifications, standards, and codes. 2. The ENGINEER reserves the right to inspect the work -in -progress at any time during the construction or testing of the panels. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER when: a. Panels are furnished with components and wiring is 25% complete. b. Panels are complete and CONTRACTOR tested. 3. The ENGINEER shall have the right to request any additional tests that are deemed necessary to prove the operation of the panel(s) or adherence to the specification, standards, or codes. 4. Witnessing by the ENGINEER of any tests and inspections at the CONTRACTOR's premises (or elsewhere) shall not imply acceptance of responsibility for any faults or failings subsequently found. 5. All problems or discrepancies must be corrected and required retesting completed before final approval for shipment is given by the ENGINEER. 6. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to furnish necessary testing devices and sufficient manpower to perform the tests required by the ENGINEER. III 7. Field Testing: Each control panel shall be tested again for functional operation in the field after the connection of external conductors and prior to equipment startup. STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 19 C. Factory Acceptance Test 1. In the case of RTU and network equipment enclosures, testing at the CONTRACTOR's facility will be required. Refer also to the requirements of Specification Section 409510 — RTU -Based Control Systems Hardware. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall be required to write test plans, if required, and perform the testing. If required, CONTRACTOR shall also perform and document testing prescribed by ENGINEER and to document testing on ENGINEER -provided forms. Testing to be witnessed by the ENGINEER. 3. Copies of all test plans and results, certificates, etc. shall be provided to the ENGINEER. D. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to furnish all necessary testing devices which must have a current, valid certificate of calibration. Calibration records must be produced to the ENGINEER on request. E. Inspection Control panels per plans: Interior of panels clean and dry: Does liquid level ever drop below top of pump: All connections tight: Check level controls for proper operation (transducer): Check emergency float operation: Check alarms/Does alarm signal transmit overSCADA: Electrical Comments: See pump startup report by pump manufacturer for detailed pump information END OF SECTION STANTEC CONTROL PANELS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 13 - 20 • • • • SECTION 40 9515 - CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTATION PART 1 --GENERAL 1.1 THE REQUIREMENT A. General: The CONTRACTOR shall provide control panel instrumentation, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 40 91 00 - Process Control and Instrumentation apply to the WORK of this Section. C. The requirements of Section 40 95 13 - Control Panels apply to the WORK of this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. General: Submittals shall be included within the submittals of Section 409513 - Control Panels. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Power Supplies: Power supplies shall conform with the requirements of Section 40 91 00 — Process Control and Instrumentation. 1111 2.2 INDICATORS • A. Indicators, Digital Process: Digital process indicators shall be self-contained instruments that display process signals directly in engineering units. The unit shall be suitable for panel mounting and shall utilize a 3-1/2 digit LED display of no less than 0.5 - inch height. The input signal to the digital process indicator shall be 4 — 20 mA DC or 1-5 VDC as indicated. The input sample rate of the unit shall be a minimum of 2 per second. The unit shall have an auto -zeroing feature and shall have provisions for field adjustable scaling and offset. Accuracy shall be plus and minus 1 least significant digit. Input power to the digital indicator shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. B. Digital process indicators shall be as manufactured by Precision Digital PD603, Acromag, or equal. 2.3 FUNCTION MODULES A. Current Alarm Trips: Current alarm trips shall be single or dual type as indicated. Units shall accept voltage or current input signals. Dead bands shall be factory set at 1 percent of full span for dual trips and adjustable over 100 percent of span for single trips. Alarm trips shall be equipped with 10 A DPDT contacts. Alarm trips shall include setpoint dials scaled 0 - 100 percent for each trip point. Single alarm trips shall include a dead band adjustment dial scaled 0-100 percent. B. Alarm trips shall be Moore Industries Model DCA, or Phoenix Contact equivalent. STANTEC CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 15 - 1 2.4 CONVERTERS A. Resistance/Current Signal Converter: The signal converters shall accept potentiometer signals and produce a voltage or current signal output in linear proportion to the input signal. Output span and zero shall be adjustable and accuracy shall be plus and minus 0.1 percent of span. The unit shall be DIN rail mounted. Power input shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hz. B. The signal converters shall be Phoenix Contact or approved equal. 2.5 CURRENT ISOLATOR A. General: The isolating unit shall be DIN rail mounted, 24 VDC externally powered. No loop powered isolators will be allowed. Provide fused power supply as required. Unit shall accept a 4 to 20 mADC input signal and deliver an equal but electrically isolated 4 to 20 mADC output. Isolators shall provide three-way isolation and be a single channel configuration only. Isolator power shall be provided by a Phoenix Contract Model #Mini - SL -PTB -SP. B. Power shall be connected via the DIN rail bus connector and include a 2 -amp fuse for protection. 1. Mark each isolator with loop tag number. 2. All PLC analog I/O shall be furnished with current isolation. C. Required Features: 1. Repeatability: One percent of span. 2. Ambient Temperature Range: -25°F to +185°F. 3. Linearity: ±One percent of full scale. D. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following. 1. Phoenix Contact MINI MCR -SL -I -I. 2. Or approved equal. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Control panel instrumentation shall be executed in accordance with Section 40 91 00 — Process Control and Instrumentation. END OF SECTION STANTEC CONTROL PANEL INSTRUMENTATION LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB. 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 40 95 15 - 2 • • • SECTION 43 20 00 - PUMPS, GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide pumps and pumping appurtenances, complete and operable, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. • • B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to pumps and pumping equipment throughout the Contract Documents, except where otherwise indicated. C. The requirements of Section 46 01 00 — Equipment General Provisions, apply to this Section. D. Unit Responsibility 1. The pump manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing the pumps, motors, and VFDs as one package and for the coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of the WORK of each specific pump Section. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance with the requirements of each specific pump Section. E. Single Manufacturer 1. Where 2 or more pump systems of the same type or size are required, provide pumps produced by the same manufacturer. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section III, paragraph 6.11 of the City Specifications. B. Shop Drawings 1. Submit pump name, identification number, and specification Section number. 2. Performance Information a. Submit performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, NPSHr3 required, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pumps. Submit efficiency curves of motors and VFDs. b. Require the equipment manufacturer to indicate the head, capacity, required horsepower, pump efficiency, and NPSHr corresponding to each flow condition indicated in the respective performance requirement paragraph of each individual pump specification section. Indicate on the pump curve the Allowable Operating Region (AOR), Preferred Operation Region (POR), and minimum submergence required at maximum flow for vertical and submersible pumps. c. Submit performance curves at intervals no greater than 100 RPM from the specified minimum speed to maximum speed for each centrifugal pump equipped with a variable speed drive. STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 1 3. Operating Range a. Require the manufacturer to indicate the limits on the performance curves recommended for stable operation without surge, cavitation, or excessive vibration. 4. Submit assembly and installation drawings, including shaft size, seal, coupling, bearings, anchor bolt plan, part nomenclature, material list, outline dimensions, and shipping weights. 5. Where lead containing materials are used for drinking water service pumps submit a calculation to demonstrate that the weighted average of lead content of wetted components do not exceed 0.25% to meet the requirement of the Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act. 6. Submit data, in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 10 — Electric Motors, for the electric motor proposed for each pump. 7. Submit an elevation drawing of the proposed local control panel, showing panel - mounted devices, details of enclosure type, a single -line diagram of power distribution, current draw of the panel, and a list of terminals required to receive inputs or to transmit outputs from the local control panel. 8. Submit a wiring diagram of field connections, with identification of terminations between local control panels, junction terminal boxes, and equipment items. 9. Submit a complete electrical schematic diagram. C. Rotodynamics and Structural Analyses 1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform and submit torsional, lateral, and structural analyses in reference to the latest edition of API 610 and as amended by these Specification for the following pumps: a. Pumps with constant speed drives of 500 horsepower and greater. b. Pumps with variable speed drives of 100 horsepower and greater. c. Pumps with engine drives, gear drives and extended shafts with universal joints. 2. Rotodynamics and Structural Analyses: An experienced specialist from the manufacturer or a highly qualified third party engineer, such as Engineering Dynamics, Mechanical Solutions, or equal, approved in writing by the ENGINEER, shall perform a complete torsional, lateral and structural vibration analysis for each distinct motor, driven equipment, and variable frequency drive system: a. These analyses shall demonstrate that in no case shall the maximum stress on any component exceed the endurance limits of the motor -flywheel -coupling - driven equipment train materials of construction. Calculation of shaft deflection in the vicinity of the seal journal shall be submitted. b. Submit calculations of torsional and lateral rotodynamics analysis for the VFD, motor with flywheel, couplings, drive shaft and pump as complete assembled system. The analysis report shall include the specific items as follows: STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 2 1) Critical Speed Analyses. The undamped torsional natural frequencies of the complete drive train shall be at least 25 percent above or 25 percent below any possible steady state excitation frequency within the specified operating range from minimum to maximum continuous speed. If torsional frequencies fall within the margin specified, the pump manufacturer shall provide remedial measures to correct the deficiency to meet the requirement. If the margin cannot be avoided by any possible remedial measures, a finite element analysis of the rotating assembly shall be prepared to determine the endurance stress factor of safety of the shaft material. 2) Endurance Fatigue Stress Factor of Safety. Shafts shall be designed to carry the steady state and transient loads suitable for unlimited number of load applications. In the event that the critical vibration frequency falls within the operating range of the equipment and the frequencies cannot be absolutely avoided by any means or methods, submit a stress analysis. Where shafts are subjected to fatigue stresses, such as frequent start and stop cycles, the mean stress shall be determined by using the modified Goodman Diagram. The maximum torsional stress shall not exceed the endurance stress limit of the shaft material with a minimum factor of safety of 2. If a keyway is cut into the shaft, the endurance limit of the shaft material shall be reduced by using the appropriate stress concentration factor for fillets cut into the shaft, shoulder, and/or the keyseat. 3) The CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed report of the analysis: a) A description of the method used to calculate the natural frequencies. b) A diagram of the mass elastic system. c) A table of the mass moment and torsional stiffness of each element of the mass elastic system. d) Campbell Diagram. e) A mode shape diagram with peak stresses shown for each resonant frequency. f) This analysis shall identify the dry and wet lateral critical(s), plus the torsional critical(s) speeds. c. Structural analysis of shaft, baseplate, bearing support frame, natural frequency analysis of pump structure, motor and supporting structure shall be prepared. Certifications shall be submitted to the effect that the equipment and equipment supports including anchor bolts comply with seismic and wind design criteria in Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage. 3. This WORK shall be performed prior to fabrication of the machinery, and it is subject to review by the ENGINEER. No fabrication shall be started until the ENGINEER has approved the analyses. STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 3 D. Technical Manual 1. Submit a Technical Manual containing the required information indicated in Section III, paragraph 6.11 of the City Specifications. E. Spare Parts List 1. Submit a spare parts list containing the required information indicated in Section IV, paragraph 406 of the City Specifications. F. Factory Test Data 1. For pumps that shall be factory witness tested, submit factory test plan showing piping diameter sizes and lengths, locations of valves and instruments that will be used during testing as part of shop drawing submittal. 2. For pumps that shall be factory witness tested, submit current calibration certificates of test instruments prior to testing. 3. Submit signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each pump system which requires factory testing. 4. Submit these data before shipment of equipment. G. Certifications 1. Submit the manufacturer's certification of proper installation. 2. Submit the CONTRACTOR's certification of satisfactory field testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Compliance with the requirements of the specific pump Sections may necessitate modifications to the manufacturer's standard equipment. B. Performance Curves 1. Provide centrifugal pumps with a continuously rising pump curve, or with a pump curve that does not cross the system curve within the pump curve's "dip region." 2. Unless otherwise indicated, the required shaft horsepower for the entire pump assembly at any point on the performance curve shall not exceed the rated horsepower of the motor or engine or encroach on the service factor. 3. For VFD driven pumps, the rated horsepower of the selected motor shall be 110 percent of the maximum brake horsepower required by the pump. C. Compatibility 1. Provide entirely compatible components of each pump system provided under the specific pump Sections. STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 4 2. In each unit of pumping equipment, incorporate basic mechanisms, couplings, electric motors or engine drives, variable speed controls, necessary mountings, and appurtenances. D. Balancing 1. Unless otherwise specified the rotating assembly shall be dynamically balanced to ISO 1940 G6.3. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Provide materials suitable for the intended application. B. For materials not indicated, provide high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended, and conforming to the following requirements: 1. For drinking water service, use materials with weighted average of lead content of wetted components not to exceed 0.25% to meet the requirement of the Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act. 2. Bowls and Casings a. Provide cast iron pump casings constructed of close -grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, Class 30, or equal. Unless otherwise indicated on the specific pump sections, cast iron -fitted pumps shall be epoxy lined and coated for better efficiency. 3. Impellers a. Where individual pump sections indicate cast iron impellers, such impellers shall be epoxy coated and constructed of close -grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, Class 30, or equal. b. Where individual pump sections indicate stainless steel impellers, such impellers shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. c. Where individual pump sections indicate bronze impellers, or where the impeller material is not otherwise specified, such impellers shall be constructed of zero - lead aluminum bronze conforming to ASTM B 148 — Standard Specification for Aluminum -Bronze Sand Castings, or zero -lead, zincless nickel aluminum bronze ASTM —B 148-C95800. 4. Provide pump shafts constructed of Type 416 or 316 stainless steel. 5. Provide anti -friction bearings or zero -lead bronze bearings. Bronze bearings shall be Bismuth Tin Bronze ASTM B 584 C89835, or equal. 6. All elastomeric materials such as gaskets, seals, O -rings in contact with water with chloramine and ozone shall be Teflon, Viton-A or other materials compatible with the fluid service. Test certificate from a material testing laboratory to provide proof of test shall be made available to the ENGINEER if requested. 7. Miscellaneous stainless steel parts shall be of Type 316. STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 5 8. Provide anchor bolts, washers, and nuts in standard service (non -corrosive application) of galvanized steel in accordance with the requirements of Section 05 50 00 — Miscellaneous Metalwork. 9. Provide anchor bolts, washers, and nuts in corrosive service of stainless steel in accordance with Section 05 50 00 — Miscellaneous Metalwork. C. Materials in contact with potable water shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61. Test certificate from a material testing laboratory to provide proof of test shall be made available to the ENGINEER if requested 2.3 PUMP COMPONENTS - GENERAL A. Flanges and Bolts 1. Provide suction and discharge flanges conforming to ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, or ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings dimensions. Pressure class shall be suitable for the application or as otherwise recommended by the pump manufacturer. 2. Provide flange bolts in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 05 00 — Piping, General. 3. Flange gaskets shall be in accordance with Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General 2.4 PUMP APPURTENANCES A. Nameplates 1. Equip each pump with a stainless steel nameplate indicating serial number(s), rated head and flow, impeller size, pump speed, and manufacturer's name and model number. B. Solenoid Valves 1. Require the pump manufacturer to provide solenoid valves on the water or oil lubrication lines and on cooling water lines. 2. Provide solenoid valve electrical ratings compatible with the motor control voltage. C. Gauges 1. Except for sample pumps, sump pumps, and hot water circulating pumps, equip pumps with pressure gauges installed at the pump discharge lines. 2. Provide pump suction lines with compound gauges. 3. Located gauges in a representative location, where not subject to shock or vibrations, in order to achieve true and accurate readings. 4. Where subject to shock or vibrations, wall -mount the gauges or attach the gauges to galvanized channel floor stands and connect by means of flexible connectors. STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 6 5. Provide pressure and compound gauges in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 91 08 — Pressure Measuring. • 2.5 FACTORY TESTING A. Conduct the following tests on each indicated pump system: 1. Motors a. Test electric motors in accordance with the requirements of Section 26 05 10 — Electric Motors. b. Furnish test results to the pump manufacturer prior to the pump test. 2. Variable Frequency Drives a. Test variable frequency drives in accordance with the requirements of Division 26 — Variable Speed Drives section. b. Furnish test results to the pump manufacturer prior to the pump test. 3. Certified Factory Non -witnessed Test • • a. Perform factory non -witnessed tests on centrifugal pumps with drives up to and including 125 hp in accordance with the ANSI/HI 11-6, Rotodynamic Pumps for Hydraulic Performance Acceptance Test. b. For pumps with drives smaller than 15 hp, sump pumps, and sample pumps, pumps shall meet hydraulic acceptance criteria Grade "2U" unless otherwise indicated. Such tests shall, at a minimum, consist of the following: 1) Hydrostatic test; 2) Performance test at guaranteed design point or duty point documenting head, flow, bhp, and efficiency results. 3) Unless otherwise indicated, it is not required to test NPSHr in the factory. Instead, manufacturer shall submit the published NPSHr curve in accordance with the requirements of this specification section. 4) Additional tests as indicated in the specific pump specification sections. c. For pumps with drives 15 hp and larger shall meet hydraulic acceptance criteria Grade "1U" unless otherwise indicated. Such tests shall, at a minimum, consist of the following: 1) Hydrostatic test; 2) Performance Test: a) Conduct performance testing at maximum speed, obtain a minimum of 5 hydraulic test readings between shutoff head and 25 percent beyond the maximum indicated capacity, and record on data sheets as defined by the Hydraulic Institute Standards; STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 7 b) For variable speed driven pumps, test each pump between maximum and minimum speed at intervals no greater than 100 RPM; c) Submit pump curves showing head, flow, bhp, NPSHr and efficiency results. The manufacturer's certification shall be visible on each submitted curve; 3) Mechanical testing shall be limited to observation during the hydraulic performance test for any abnormal bearing temperature and pump vibration. Any deficiencies shall be corrected by the manufacturer. 4) NPSHr3 a) Perform a net positive suction head required test (NPSHr3), if required by the specific pump Section. b) Acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with ANSI/HI 11-6 c) If not required by the specific pump Section, submit the published manufacturer -calculated NPSHr3 curve. 5) Additional tests as indicated in the specific pump specification sections. d. Perform tests using the completely assembled project pump, motor, and VFD system (if equipped with variable speed drive). Calibrated factory motor may be used in lieu of project motor subject to approval of the ENGINEER. e. Testing of prototype models will not be accepted. f. Submit certification signed by a senior official of the pump manufacturer that the required pump shaft horsepower did not exceed the rated motor horsepower of 1.0 service rating at any point on the curve. g. No equipment shall be shipped until the test data have been approved by the ENGINEER. 4. Acceptance a. In the event of failure of any pump to meet any of the requirements, make necessary modifications, repairs, or replacements in order to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, and re -test the pump until found satisfactory. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment 1. Where required by the specific pump Section, furnish an authorized service representative of the manufacturer at the Site continuously to supervise the following items and to certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation: STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 8 a. installation of the equipment; b. inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment; c. startup and field testing for proper operation; and d. Performance of field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with the indicated requirements. B. Instruction of OWNER's Personnel 1. Where required by the individual pump Section, furnish an authorized training representative of the manufacturer at the Site for the number of Days indicated in the specific pump Section, to instruct the OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step-by-step troubleshooting with necessary test equipment. 2. Furnish instruction specific to the model of equipment provided. 3. Qualifications a. Furnish a representative with at least 2 years' experience in training. b. Submit a resume for the representative. 4. Schedule the training a minimum of 3 weeks in advance of the first session. 5. Lesson Plan Review a. Submit the proposed training material and a detailed outline of each lesson for review. b. Incorporate review comments into the material. 6. The trainees will keep the training materials. 7. The OWNER may videotape the training for later use with the OWNER's personnel. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install pumping equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Alignment 1. Field-test the equipment in order to verify proper alignment and freedom from binding, scraping, shaft run out, or other defects. 2. Measure the pump drive shafts just prior to assembly in order to ensure correct alignment without forcing. 3. Ensure that the equipment is secure in position and neat in appearance. STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 9 C. Lubricants 1. Provide the necessary oil and grease for initial operation. 3.3 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Coat materials and equipment in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 96 00 — Protective Coating. 3.4 FIELD TESTS A. Field-test each pump system after installation simulating all of the operational scenarios as specified in order to demonstrate: 1. satisfactory operation without excessive noise and vibration; 2. no material loss caused by cavitation; 3. no overheating of bearings; and, 4. Meet indicated head, flow, and efficiency at the design point. B. Conduct the following field testing: 1 Startup, check, and operate the pump system over its entire speed range. 2. If the pump is driven by a variable speed drive, test the pump and motor at 100 -RPM increments. 3. If the pump is driven by constant speed, test the pump and motor at the maximum RPM. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, vibration shall be within the amplitude limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute standards at a minimum of 4 pumping conditions defined by the ENGINEER. 5. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and pump discharge head for at least 4 pumping conditions at each pump rotational speed, at 100 -RPM increments if equipped with a variable speed drive or at maximum RPM if equipped with a constant speed drive. 6. Check each power lead to the motor for proper current balance. 7. Bearing Temperatures a. Determine bearing temperatures by a contact -type thermometer. b. Precede this test with a run time sufficient to stabilize bearing temperatures, unless an insufficient liquid volume is available to furnish such a run time. 8. Ensure that electrical and instrumentation tests conform to the requirements of the Section under which that equipment is specified. C. Witnessing STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 10 1. Field testing will be witnessed by the ENGINEER. 2. Furnish 3 Days advance notice of field testing. IIID. If the pumping system fails to meet the indicated requirements, modify or replace the pump and re -test as indicated above until it satisfies the indicated requirements. • • E. Certification 1. After each pumping system has satisfied the requirements, certify in writing that it has been satisfactorily tested and that final adjustments have been performed. 2. Certification shall include the date of the field tests, a listing of persons present during the tests, and the test data. F. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for costs of field tests, including related services of the manufacturer's representative, except for power and water, which the OWNER will bear. G. If available, the OWNER'S operating personnel will provide assistance in field testing. END OF SECTION STANTEC PUMPS, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 20 00 - 11 SECTION 43 25 06 - SUBMERSIBLE SOLIDS -HANDLING PUMPS PART 1 -- PRODUCTS 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide submersible solids -handling pumps and appurtenant WORK, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 43 20 00 - Pumps, General apply to this Section. C. The Supplier shall examine the Site conditions, intended application, and operation of the pump system and recommend the pump that will best satisfy the indicated requirements. 1.2 EXTENDED PERIOD FOR CORRECTION OF DEFECTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall correct defects in the pumping system upon notification from the OWNER within 5 years from the date of Substantial Completion. Corrections shall be completed within 5 Days after notification. PART 2 -- GENERAL 2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION A. Identification: Equipment Number TBD Quantity 4 (3 installed units, 1 shelf spare) B. Operating Conditions: Duty Intermittent Ambient environment Wetwell Ambient temperature, °F 50 — 100 Ambient relative humidity, % 100 Fluid service Wastewater Fluid temperature, °F 60 to 90 pH range 6 to 8.5 Fluid specific gravity 1.0 Project site elevation, ft asl 12.0 Minimum NPSH available, ft 33.8 STANTEC SUBMERSIBLE SOLIDS -HANDLING PUMPS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 22 89 - 1 C. Performance Requirements: Maximum shutoff head, ft 135 Single pump design flow capacity, gpm 1,776 Two pumps design flow capacity, gpm 3,552 Design flow head, ft 105 Single pump secondary flow capacity, gpm 3,786 Two pumps secondary flow capacity, gpm 7,572 Secondary flow head, ft 75.7 Minimum system head, ft 33 Minimum required capacity, gpm 1,150 Maximum flow NPSH required, ft absolute 17 Maximum pump speed, rpm 1,200 Maximum motor size, hp 110 D. Pump Dimensions: Min. size suction, in 10 Min size discharge flange, in 10 Discharge flange rating, ANSI 125 2.2 PUMP REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Each pump shall be capable of continuous operation at full load with a water level of 24 -inches above the invert of the wet pit, without cavitation or overheating of the motor. 2. Each pump, with its cable and appurtenances, shall be able to withstand continuous submergence to a maximum depth of 65 -feet, whether running or off, without leakage. 3. Each pump shall be able to operate for short periods on dry conditions without causing any damage to any part of the unit. B. Construction: Construction of submersible solids -handling pumps shall conform to the following requirements: STANTEC SUBMERSIBLE SOLIDS -HANDLING PUMPS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 22 89 - 2 Connections Machined metal -to -metal quick disconnect type, for withdrawal of unit from above without disconnecting pipe. When lowered into place, the pump shall automatically connect and lock into the discharge pipe, allowing for zero leakage at all anticipated pump heads. Pump Design Single stage, centrifugal type, close -coupled to sealed or submersible electric motor, for operation in dry or wet pit, without external cooling. Impeller Maximum 3 -port non -clog type with replaceable wear rings on impeller and in casing, to handle raw unscreened sewage, solids, and fibrous materials. Bearings Permanently -lubricated, heavy-duty axial and radial ball or roller bearings top and bottom, with a minimum L-10 life of 50,000 hours, at continuous, maximum load and speed, supported by detailed calculations, to be submitted with the Shop Drawings. Seals Dual mechanical tandem, one stationary and one revolving shaft seals with individual springs, tungsten carbide or silicon carbide ring, each not requiring any maintenance, and capable of withstanding 1.5 times pump shutoff head. The seals shall be oil lubricated, with moisture detector probes, alarm, and test circuits. Oil Chamber To supply oil for lubrication and cooling of the shaft seals. Support Cast duckfoot bend or discharge elbow with machined face, anchored to sump floor. Cables Include necessary cables for power connection, moisture detection, and overload protection, sheathed, coded, and suitable for submersible pumps, and of sufficient length for direct connection to the terminal boxes indicated. Cables shall be connected to the pumps and tested at the factory. Lifting Devices Type 316 stainless steel guide rails with brackets and stainless steel lifting system of sufficient operating length, or with a stainless steel guide cable system with hooks and tension device, all rated at least 5 times the weight of the pump and motor. STANTEC SUBMERSIBLE SOLIDS -HANDLING PUMPS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 22 89 - 3 C. Materials Pump, volute, oil casing, sliding bracket, motor frame cast iron ASTM A-48, Class 35B Impeller ASTM A-532 (Alloy III A) 25% chrome cast iron, statically and dynamically balanced Pump shaft Type 420 stainless steel, or 1045 carbon steel with Type 420 stainless steel sleeve Exposed bolts, nuts, washers Type 316 stainless steel Mechanical seals Independently operating tandem tungsten - carbide or silicon carbide and carbon rings with stainless steel springs Wear rings Type 304 or 416 stainless steel and nitrile rubber with steel insert, with a Brinnell hardness of 300 on impeller and 350 on case 2.3 MOTOR A. The pump motor shall be a NEMA B design, induction type with a squirrel cage rotor, shell type design, housed in an air filled, watertight chamber. B. Insulation: The pump motors shall be designed for continuous duty in hazardous locations. The stator and stator leads shall be moisture -resistant, triple varnished and insulated according to Class F, capable of withstanding a temperature rise of up to 155 degrees C. The allowable temperature rise of the motor at full load condition shall not exceed 80 degrees C. C. The motor shall be inverter duty rated in accordance with NEMA MG1, Part 31. D. Stator: The motor stator shall be mounted in an air-filled, watertight casing and shall not be fixed in place by externally -mounted screws which may cause leakage in the motor. E. Motor Rating: Motors shall have service factors of 1.10 or greater. For motors driven by variable frequency drives, motor horsepower shall be the greater of: 1. Non -overloading conditions throughout the pump curve. 2. 1.15 times the horsepower required by the pump at maximum indicated flow. F. Junction Box: The motor shall have a junction box capable of being sealed completely from the stator casing to prevent leakage through the junction box into the stator housing should a motor cable be damaged or have some other means to prevent leakage into the junction box under any condition. G. Cable Entry: The cable entry water seal design shall be such that it precludes specific torque requirements to ensure a watertight and submersible seal. It shall permit no entry of water into any high voltage area even if the cable is severed below the water level. STANTEC SUBMERSIBLE SOLIDS -HANDLING PUMPS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 22 89 - 4 H. The cable entry seal design shall preclude specific torque requirements to insure a watertight and submersible seal. The cable entry shall consist of dual cylindrical elastomer grommets, flanked by washers, all having a close tolerance fit against the cable outside diameter and the entry inside diameter. The grommets shall be compressed by the cable entry unit, thus providing a strain relief function. The assembly shall provide ease of changing the cable when necessary using the same entry seal. The cable entry junction chamber and motor shall be sealed from each other, which shall isolate the stator housing from foreign material gaining access through the pump top. Epoxies, silicones, or other secondary sealing systems shall not be considered equal. I. Cooling System: Each pump shall be sufficiently cooled by submergence in the pumped media. J. Motor Protection: Each pump motor stator shall incorporate three thermal switches, one per stator phase winding and be connected in series, to monitor the temperature of the motor. Should the thermal switches open, the motor shall stop and activate an alarm. A float switch shall be installed in the seal leakage chamber and will activate if leakage into the chamber reaches 50% chamber capacity, signaling the need to schedule an inspection. These sensors shall be used in conjunction with and supplemented by external motor over -current protection located at the control panel. 2.4 PUMP CONTROLS A. Pumps shall be controlled in accordance with Section 40 90 10 - Control Strategies. 2.5 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish spare parts for each pump as indicated. 1. One set of seals 2. Two sets of spare gaskets and O -rings including hydraulic sealing flange gasket 3. Manufacturer specified impeller pullers 4. Manufacturer specified wrenches for breakdown of pumps STANTEC SUBMERSIBLE SOLIDS -HANDLING PUMPS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 22 89 - 5 2.6 FACTORY TESTING AND SHIPMENT A. In addition to the factory tests in Section 43 20 00, the following procedures shall be included with the factory test prior to shipment: 1. Verification of the pump characteristic curves by testing at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full flow and recording the measured head and motor current for each flow. 2. Verification of cavitation -free service and absence of motor overheating during conditions simulating the actual operating conditions after installation, whether submerged, semi -submerged, or dry. 3. Pump seals shall be designed for complete water tightness at 65 -feet submergence for 30 minutes and data on factory testing and quality control shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. 4. Parts shall be properly lubricated and protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur even during a prolonged delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the pumps are ready for operation. 5. Finished ferrous surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. 6. The finished surfaces of exposed flanges shall be protected by strong wooden blind flanges. 7. Each pump shall be properly crated to protect against damage during shipment. III2.7 MANUFACTURERS A. Flygt Corporation PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION • A. In addition to the requirements of Section 43 20 00, the CONTRACTOR shall ensure that anchor bolts are set only after the discharge piping has been properly installed, to ensure exact fit with embedded piping components. 3.2 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The service representative of the manufacturer shall be present continuously at the Site to furnish the services required by Section 43 20 00 — Pumps, General. B. Instruction of OWNER'S Personnel: The training representative of the manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 2 Days to furnish the services required by Section 43 20 00 — Pumps, General. C. For the purposes of this paragraph, a Day is defined as an 8 hour period at the Site, excluding travel time. END OF SECTION STANTEC SUBMERSIBLE SOLIDS -HANDLING PUMPS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 22 89 - 6 SECTION 43 30 00 - VALVES, GENERAL PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide valves, actuators, and appurtenances, complete and operable, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 46 01 00 — Equipment General Provisions, apply to the WORK of this Section. C. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve actuators except where otherwise indicated. D. Valves and actuators in particular locations may require a combination of units, sensors, limit switches, and controls, as indicated. E. Support 1. Where a valve is to be supported by means other than the piping to which it is attached, obtain from the valve manufacturer a design for its support and foundation that satisfies the criteria in Section 46 01 00 — Equipment General Provisions. 2. Submit the support design, including drawings and calculations sealed by an engineer, with the Shop Drawings. F. Unit Responsibility 1. The CONTRACTOR shall assign a single manufacturer to be responsible for the supply, coordination of design, assembly, testing, and furnishing of each valve; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance with the requirements of each valve Section. G. Single Manufacturer 1. Where 2 or more valves of the same type and size are required, the valves shall be furnished by the same manufacturer. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section III, paragraph 6.11 of the City Specifications. B. Furnish the following information on Shop Drawings: 1. valve name, size, Cv factor, pressure rating, identification number (if any), and specification section number; 2. complete information on the valve actuator, hydraulic power units (HPU), pneumatic air supply system including size, manufacturer, model number, limit switches, and mounting; 3. cavitation limits for control valves; STANTEC VALVES, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 00 - 1 4. assembly drawings showing part nomenclature, materials, dimensions, weights, and relationships of valve handles, hand wheels, position indicators, limit switches, integral control systems, needle valves, and control systems; 5. data in accordance with Section 26 05 10 — Electric Motors, for electric motor - actuated valves; 6. complete wiring diagrams and control system schematics; and, 7. A valve -labeling schedule, listing the valves to be furnished with stainless steel tags, indicating in each case the valve location and the proposed wording for the label. C. Furnish a technical manual containing the required information for each valve, as indicated. D. Furnish a spare parts list, containing the required information for each valve assembly, as indicated. E. Factory Test Data 1. Where indicated, submit signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each valve requiring certification, before shipping the valve. 2. Furnish a certification of quality and test results for factory -applied coatings. F. Field Test Data 1. Submit signed, dated, and certified field test data for each valve. III PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. General 1. Provide valves and gates of new and current manufacture. 2. Provide valves 6 -inch and larger with actuators with position indicators. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valve actuators in accordance with Section 43 30 12 — Valve and Gate Actuators. B. Protective Coating • 1. Coat the exterior surfaces of valves and the wet interior surfaces of ferrous valves of sizes 2 -inch and larger in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 96 00 — Protective Coating. 2. The valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that the required coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturing plant prior to shipment, in accordance with the indicated requirements. 3. Do not coat the machined flange faces of valves except where such flanges are not adjoining a mating flange as shown in the Contract Documents. Apply rust inhibitor coating on machined surfaces of the flange prior to shipment. STANTEC VALVES, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 00 - 2 C. Valve Labeling 1. Except when such requirement is waived by the ENGINEER in writing, provide a label on shut-off valves and control valves except for hose bibbs and chlorine cylinder valves. 2. Furnish a label composed of 1/16 -inch stainless steel, a minimum of 2 inches by 4 inches in size, as indicated in Section 40 05 02 — Piping Identification Systems, and permanently attached to the valve or on the wall adjacent to the valve as directed by the ENGINEER. D. Valve Testing 1. As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the reference standards, test valves 3 inches in diameter and smaller in accordance with the manufacturer's standard procedure. 2. Factory -test valves 4 inches in diameter and larger as follows: a. Hydrostatic Testing 1) Subject valve bodies to an internal hydrostatic pressure equivalent to twice the water -rated pressure of the valve. 2) Metallic valves rating pressures shall be based at 100 degrees F. 3) Plastic valves rating pressures shall be based at 73 degrees F, or at a higher temperature according to material type. 4) During the hydrostatic test, there shall be no visible leakage through the valve body, end joints, or shaft seals, nor shall parts of the valve be permanently deformed. 5) Allow test duration of at least 10 minutes, in order to allow visual examination for leakage. b. Seat Testing 1) Test the valves for leaks in the closed position, with the pressure differential across the seat equal to the water rated pressure of the valve. 2) Provide test duration of at least 10 minutes, in order to allow visual examination for leakage. 3) The leakage rate shall be the more stringent of the following: a) As recommended by the reference standard for that type of valve; or b) Leakage past the closed valve not to exceed one fluid ounce per hour per inch diameter for metal seated valves, and drop -tight for resilient seated valves. STANTEC VALVES, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 00 - 3 c. Performance Testing 1) Shop -operate the valves from the fully -closed to the fully -open position, and reverse under no -flow conditions in order to demonstrate that the valve assembly operates properly. E. Certification 1. Prior to shipment of valves with sizes larger than 12 -inches in diameter, submit certified, notarized copies of the hydrostatic factory tests, showing compliance with the applicable standards of AWWA, ANSI, or ASTM. F. Valve Markings 1. Permanently mark valve bodies in accordance with MSS SP25 - Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General 1. Provide materials suitable for the intended application. 2. Provide materials in contact with potable water listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61. 3. Ensure that materials not indicated are of high-grade standard commercial quality, free from defects and imperfections that might affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valve and actuator bodies conforming to the following requirements: a. Cast Iron: Close -grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, Class 30, or to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings b. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, or to ASTM A 395 - Ferritic Ductile Iron Pressure -Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures c. Steel: ASTM A 216 - Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for High -Temperature Service, or to ASTM A 515 - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Intermediate- and Higher -Temperature Service d. Bronze: ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, and valve stems not subject to dezincification shall conform to ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. Bronze materials in contact with potable water service shall be free of lead content meeting the Lead Reduction Act. e. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve and operator bodies and trim shall conform to ASTM A 351 - Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High -Temperature Service, Grade CF8M, or shall be Type 316 stainless steel STANTEC VALVES, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 00 - 4 f. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform to CeII Classification 12454 g. CPVC: Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform to CeII Classification 23447 h. NSF Standard 61: Materials shall be listed for use in contact with potable water. i. Elastomeric materials used for seat, seals and O -rings shall be compatible with temperature, pressures and fluid or gas service. 1) Elastomeric materials for water with chloramines shall be Teflon or Viton- A. 2) Elastomeric materials for water with dissolved ozone residual shall be Teflon suitable for ozone service. 3) Elastomeric materials for oxygen (LOX or GOX) shall be Teflon specially manufactured and packaged suitable for oxygen service. 2.3 VALVE CONSTRUCTION A. Bodies 1. Provide valve bodies that are cast, molded (in the case of plastic valves), forged, or welded, of the materials indicated, and with smooth interior passages. 2. Provide wall thicknesses uniform and in agreement with the applicable standards for each type of valve, without casting defects, pinholes, and other defects that could weaken the body. 3. Perform welds on welded bodies by certified welders and ground welds smooth. 4. Provide valve ends as indicated, and rated for the maximum temperature and pressure to which the valve will be subjected. B. Valve End Connections 1. Unless otherwise indicated, valves 2-1/2 inches in diameter and smaller may be provided with threaded end connections. 2. Provide valves 3 inches in diameter and larger with flanged end connections. 3. Flanges, bolts and gaskets shall be as specified in Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General. C. Bonnets 1. Connect valve bonnets to the body by clamping, screwing, or flanging. 2. Provide bonnets of the same material, temperature, and pressure rating as the body. 3. Make provisions for the stem seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, and yokes. STANTEC VALVES, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 00 - 5 • D. Stems 1. Provide valve stems of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best commercially -available material for the specific service, with adjustable stem packing, O -rings, chevron V -type packing, or other suitable seal. Bronze materials in contact with potable water shall be NSF 61 approved and free of lead. Elastomeric materials shall be compatible with fluid service. 2. Where subject to dezincification, bronze valve stems shall conform to ASTM B 62. 3. Where dezincification is not a problem, bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 may be used, except that the zinc content shall not exceed 16 percent. E. Stem Guides 1. Provide stem guides spaced with an L/R ratio not to exceed 200:1. Submit calculations for L/R ratios and guide spacing to the ENGINEER for review. 2. Stem guides shall have slotted holes and shall be adjustable in two directions. 3. Construct submerged stem guides from Type 304 316stainless steel. F. Internal Parts 1. Provide internal parts and valve trim as indicated for each individual valve. 2. Where not indicated, construct valve trim from Type 316 stainless steel or other material best -suited for the intended service. G. Nuts and Bolts 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports in accordance with the requirements of Section 05 50 00 — Miscellaneous Metalwork and Section 40 05 00 — Piping, General. 2.4 Torque Tubes A. Submerged or buried valves with a remote gearbox and actuator shall be supplied with a torque tube to transfer torque from the actuator to the valve. Torque tubes shall be directly connected to the valve and the floor stand and gear actuator. Each torque tube and floor stand shall be sized to operate under the maximum service conditions for the valve. Unless otherwise indicated, torque tubes shall be made of schedule 40, steel pipe with epoxy coating suitable for the fluid service. Each submerged valve, torque tube, floor stand and actuator shall be pre -assembled and "matched marked" in the manufacturer's shop to ensure proper fit when assembled in field. STANTEC VALVES, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 00 - 6 2.5 Extension Shaft Stem A. Valves mounted in dry areas with gearbox attached to the valve and with remote actuator shall be supplied with an extension shaft stem with universal joint attached to the gear and actuator. All components shall be sized to operate under the maximum service conditions for the valve. Unless otherwise indicated, shaft stem and universal joints shall be made of carbon steel with epoxy coating suitable for the fluid service. Each valve, shaft stem, floor stand and actuator shall be pre -assembled and "matched marked" in the manufacturer's shop to ensure proper fit when assembled in field. 2.6 VALVE ACTUATORS A. Valve actuators shall be as indicated and as specified in Section 43 30 12 — Valve and Gate Actuators 2.7 VALVE ACCESSORIES A. Provide valves complete with the accessories required to provide a functional system. 2.8 SPARE PARTS A. Furnish the required spare parts, suitably packaged and labeled with the valve name, location, and identification number. B. Furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for the spare parts of each valve. C. Spare parts are intended for use by the OWNER, after expiration of the correction of defects period. 2.9 MANUFACTURERS A. Valve manufacturers shall have a successful record of not Tess than 5 years in the manufacture of the indicated valves. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION AND TRIAL OPERATION A. General 1. Install valves, actuating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. 2. Adequately brace gates in order to prevent warpage and bending under the intended use. 3. Firmly support valves in order to avoid undue stresses on the pipe. B. Access 1. Install valves in a manner to provide easy access for actuation, removal, and maintenance, and to avoid interference between valve actuators and structural members, handrails, and other equipment. STANTEC VALVES, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 00 - 7 C. Valve Accessories 1. Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are indicated, properly assemble and install such items such that systems are compatible and operating properly. 2. Clearly note the relationship between interrelated items on Shop Drawing submittals. D. Trial Operation 1. After installation, schedule trial operation witnessed by the ENGINEER and the OWNER representative. 2. All valves shall be cleaned thoroughly of all foreign materials and final adjustments made. The valves shall then be operated through one complete cycle from a fully closed position to a fully open position and back to a fully closed position to verify that the assembly is functional. 3. For control valves that operate in multiple operating scenarios, the CONTRACTOR shall simulate all operational scenarios including the hydraulic power units, pilot control system or pneumatic air supply system to demonstrate compliance to the specifications. 4. A field leakage test meeting the maximum allowable specified requirement shall be conducted. 5. Test certificate shall be signed by the valve manufacturer and the CONTRACTOR and shall be submitted to the ENGINEER. END OF SECTION STANTEC VALVES, GENERAL LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 00 - 8 SECTION 43 30 12 - VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. Provide valve and gate actuators and appurtenances, complete and operable, as indicated in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Section apply to valves and gates except where otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. C. Unit Responsibility 1. Make the valve or gate manufacturer responsible for the coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of actuators on the valves and gates; however, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to the OWNER for compliance of the valves, gates, and actuators with the Contract Documents. D. Where 2 or more valve or gate actuators of the same type or size are required, the actuators shall be produced by the same manufacturer. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section III, paragraph 6.11 of the City Specifications and Section 43 30 00 — Valves, General. B. Submit Shop Drawing information for actuators with the valve and gate submittals as a complete package. C. Submit calculations showing dynamic seating and unseating torques versus the output torque of the actuator. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Unless otherwise indicated, provide shut-off and throttling valves and externally actuated valves and gates with manual or power actuators. B. Provide actuators complete and operable with mounting hardware, motors, gears, controls, wiring, solenoids, hand wheels, levers, chains, and extensions, as applicable. C. Provide actuators with torque ratings equal to or greater than required for valve seating and dynamic torques, whichever is greater, and capable of holding the valve in any intermediate position between fully -open and fully -closed without creeping or fluttering. D. Identify wires of motor -driven actuators by unique numbers. STANTEC VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 12 - 1 E. Manufacturers 1. Where indicated, certain valves and gates may be provided with actuators manufactured by the valve or gate manufacturer. 2. Where actuators are furnished by different manufacturers, coordinate the selection to result in the fewest number of manufacturers possible. F. Materials 1. Provide actuators of current models, of the best commercial quality materials, and liberally sized for the required torque. 2. Provide materials suitable for the environment in which the valve or gate is to be installed. G. Actuator Mounting and Position Indicators 1. Securely mount actuators by means of brackets or hardware specially designed and sized for this purpose and of ample strength. 2. Cast the word "OPEN" on each valve or actuator, with an arrow indicating the direction to open in the counter -clockwise direction. 3. Equip gear and power actuators with position indicators. 4. Where possible, locate manual actuators between 48 and 60 inches above the floor or the permanent working platform. H. Standards 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where applicable, provide actuators in accordance with AWWA C 542 - Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates. I. Functionality 1. Coordinate electric, pneumatic, and hydraulic actuators with the power requirements of Division 26 — Electrical, and instrumentation equipment as indicated in Section 40 91 00 — Process Control and Instrumentation Systems. J. Provide fasteners in accordance with the requirements of Section 05 50 00 — Miscellaneous Metalwork. K. Provide coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 96 00 — Protective Coating. 2.2 MANUAL ACTUATORS A. General 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves and gates with manual actuators. 2. Provide valves in sizes up to and including 4 inches with direct -acting lever or hand wheel actuators of the manufacturer's best standard design. STANTEC VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 12 - 2 3. Provide valves and gates larger than 4 -inch with gear -assisted manual actuators, with an operating pull of maximum 60 pounds on the rim of the hand wheel. 4. Provide buried and submerged gear -assisted valves, gates, gear -assisted valves for pressures higher than 250 psig, valves 30 inches in diameter and larger, and where indicated, with worm gear actuators, hermetically -sealed water -tight and grease - packed. 5. Valves 6 -inch to 24 -inch diameter may be provided with traveling -nut actuators, worm gear actuators, spur or bevel gear actuators, as appropriate for each valve. B. Buried Valves 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide buried valves with extension stems to grade, with square nuts or floor stands, position indicators, and cast-iron or steel pipe extensions with valve boxes, covers, and operating keys. 2. Where indicated, provide buried valves in cast-iron, concrete, or similar valve boxes with covers of ample size in order to allow operation of the valve actuators. 3. Permanently label the valve box covers as required by OWNER. 4. Provide wrench -nuts in compliance with AWWA C 500 - Metal -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service. C. Floor Boxes 1. Provide hot -dipped galvanized cast iron or steel floor boxes and covers to fit the slab thickness, for operating nuts in or below concrete slabs. 2. For operating nuts in the concrete slab, provide a bronze -bushed cover. D. Tee Wrenches 1. Furnish buried valves with floor boxes with 2 operating keys or one key per 10 valves, whichever is greater. 2. Size the tee wrenches such that the tee handle will be 2 to 4 feet above ground, and to fit the operating nuts. E. Manual Worm Gear Actuator 1. Provide an actuator consisting of a single- or double -reduction gear unit contained in a weatherproof cast iron or steel body with cover, and a minimum 12 -inch diameter handwheel. 2. Provide the actuator to be capable of a 90 -degree rotation, and equip the actuator with travel stops capable of limiting the valve opening and closing. 3. Provide the actuator with spur or helical gears and worm gearing. 4. Provide a self-locking gear ratio in order to prevent "back -driving." 5. Construct the spur or helical gears of hardened alloy steel, and the worm gear of alloy bronze. STANTEC VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 12 - 3 6. Construct the worm gear shaft and the hand wheel shaft from 17-4 PH or similar stainless steel. 7. Accurately cut gearing with hobbing machines. 8. Use ball or roller bearings throughout. 9. Provide the output shaft end with a spline in order to allow adjustable alignment. 10. Actuator output gear changes shall be mechanically possible by simply changing the exposed or helical gearset ratio without further disassembly of the actuator. 11. Design gearing for a 100 percent overload. 12. The entire gear assembly shall be sealed weatherproof. F. Design and rate buried gear actuators for buried service, provide with a stainless steel input shaft, and double -seal on shaft and top cap. G. Traveling -Nut Actuator 1. Provide the actuator with a traveling -nut and screw (Scotch yoke), contained in a weatherproof cast iron or steel housing with a spur gear and a minimum 12 -inch diameter hand wheel. 2. The screw shall run in 2 end bearings, and provide a self-locking actuator in order to maintain the valve position under any flow condition. 3. Construct the screw and gear from hardened alloy steel or stainless steel, and the construct the nut and bushings from alloy bronze. 4. The bearings and gear shall be grease -lubricated by means of nipples. 5. Design gearing for a 100 percent overload. PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. Field Adjustments 1. The adjustment of actuator controls and limit switches in the field for the required function shall be performed by field representatives of the manufacturers of valves or gates with pneumatic, hydraulic, or electric actuators. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install valve and gate actuators and accessories in accordance with the requirements of Section 43 30 00 — Valves, General. B. Locate the actuators to be readily accessible for operation and maintenance without obstructing walkways. III C. Do not mount actuators where shock or vibrations will impair their operation, and do not attach the support systems to handrails, process piping, or mechanical equipment. STANTEC VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 12 - 4 3.3 INSPECTION, STARTUP, AND FIELD ADJUSTMENT A. Furnish an authorized representative of the manufacturer who shall visit the Site and witness the following: 1. Installation of the equipment, for not less than 2 Days; 2. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment, for not less than one Day. 3. Startup and field-testing for proper operation, for not less than one Day. B. Instruction of OWNER's Personnel 1. The authorized service representative shall visit the Site for not Tess than 2Days in order to instruct the OWNER'S personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step-by-step troubleshooting procedures with necessary test equipment. END OF SECTION STANTEC VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 12 - 5 SECTION 43 30 16 - CHECK VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL • 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide check valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 43 30 00 - Valves, General apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 43 30 00 — Valves, General. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 SWING CHECK VALVES (3 -INCHES AND LARGER) • • A. General: Swing check valves for water, sewage, sludge, and general service shall be of the outside lever and spring or weight type, in accordance with AWWA C 508 - Swing - Check Valves for Waterworks Service, 2 -in. through 24 -in. NPS, unless otherwise indicated, with full -opening passages, designed for a water -working pressure of 150 psi. Units shall have a flanged cover piece to provide access to the disc. Where indicated, swing check valves shall be provided with position indicators rated for Class 1, Division 2.. B. Body: The valve body and cover shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with flanged ends conforming to ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800, or be mechanical joint ends, as indicated. C. Disc: The valve disc shall be of cast iron, ductile iron, or bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. D. Seat and Rings: The valve seat and rings shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 584 or B 148 - Aluminum -Bronze Castings or of Buna-N. E. Hinge Pin: The hinge pin shall be of bronze or stainless steel. F. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corp.) 2. Kennedy Valve 3. Mueller Company 4. Stockham Valves and Fittings 5. Golden Anderson STANTEC CHECK VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 16 - 1 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 43 30 00 - Valves, General. END OF SECTION STANTEC CHECK VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 16 - 2 • • • SECTION 43 30 18 - BALL VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide ball valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 43 30 00 - Valves, General apply to this Section. C. The requirements of Section 43 30 12 - Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 43 30 00 - Valves, General. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL BALL VALVES (4 -INCHES AND SMALLER) A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, general purpose metal ball valves in sizes up to 4 - inches shall have actuators in accordance with Section 43 30 12 - Valve and Gate Actuators. B. Body: Ball valves up to and including 1-1/2 inches in size shall have bronze or carbon steel 2 or 3 piece bodies with screwed ends for a pressure rating of not less than 600 psi WOG. Valves 2 -inches to 4 -inches in size shall have bronze or carbon steel 2 or 3 piece bodies with flanged ends for a pressure rating of ANSI 125 psi or 150 psi unless otherwise indicated. C. Balls: The balls shall be solid chrome -plated brass or bronze, or stainless steel, with standard port (single reduction) or full port openings. D. Stems: The valve stems shall be of the blow-out proof design, of bronze, stainless steel, or other acceptable construction, with reinforced teflon seal. E. Seats: The valve seats shall be of teflon or Buna-N, for bi-directional service and easy replacement. F. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Conbraco Industries, Inc. (Apollo) 2. ITT Engineered Valves 3. Neles-Jamesbury, Inc. 4. Watts Regulator 5. Worcester Controls STANTEC BALL VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 18 - 1 2.2 PLASTIC BALL VALVES A. General: Plastic ball valves for corrosive fluids shall be made of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), polypropylene (PP), or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific application. Valves shall have manual actuators in accordance with Section 43 30 12 - Valve and Gate Actuators, unless otherwise indicated. B. Construction: Plastic ball valves shall have union ends or flanged ends to mate with ANSI B 16.5, class 150 flanges for easy removal. The balls shall have full size ports and teflon seats. Body seals, union 0 -ring seals, and stem seals shall be in accordance with the corrosion resistance requirements of Section 46 30 00 — Chemical Feeding Equipment, General. External (without entering into the wetted area) seat packing adjustment is preferred. Metal reinforced stems to prevent accidental breakage are preferred. Ball valves for sodium hypochlorite solution service shall be drilled through the ball or body per valve manufacturer recommendation to relieve offgas and equalize pressure across the valve. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non -shock pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F for PVC and CPVC, with decreasing ratings for higher temperatures and other plastics. C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. ASAHI-America 2. George Fischer, Inc. 3. NIBCO Inc., (Chemtrol) 4. Plast -O -Matic Valves, Inc. 5. Spears Mfg. Co. 6. Watts Regulator PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with Section 43 30 00 — Valves, General. Care shall be taken that valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve. END OF SECTION STANTEC BALL VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 18 - 2 • • • SECTION 43 30 24 - PLUG VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide plug valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 43 30 00- Valves, General apply to this Section. C. The requirements of Section 43 30 12- Valves and Gate Actuators apply to this Section. D. Plug valves shall have undergone a proof -of -design test to demonstrate that the valve components operate at the service flow, pressure, temperature, and fluid conditions, free from binding, excessive noise, and premature failures. Proof -of -design test results shall be available to the ENGINEER on request. The proof -of -design test shall be conducted in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWWA C517- Resilient -Seated Cast -Iron Eccentric Plug Valves. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 43 30 00 - Valves, General PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES (1/2 -inch to 72 -inches) A. Construction: Eccentric plug valves shall be of the non -lubricated, eccentric plug design with cast iron bodies conforming to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with ANSI 125 Ib. flanged ends for valves 3 -inches and larger, and screwed or flanged ends for smaller sizes. The plugs and shafts shall be of cast iron or ductile iron conforming to ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, and the plugs shall be lined with a resilient coating, best suited for the specific service. The body shall be Tined with a suitable elastomer, where required for a special service, or it shall be epoxy -lined in accordance with Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating. The seats shall be of nickel or stainless steel welded to the body. Top and bottom shaft bearings shall be of permanently lubricated stainless steel or Teflon coated stainless steel. Grit seals of Teflon, Nylatron, or similar suitable material shall be at the top and bottom plug journals. Valves up to and including 20 -inches in size shall have an unobstructed port area of not less than 80 percent of full pipe area, and not less than 70 percent for larger valves. Eccentric plug valves shall have a pressure rating of not less than 150 psi WOG, for bubble -tight shut-off in the standard flow direction, and 25 psi WOG in the reverse flow direction. When equipped with worm gear actuator, the pressure rating shall be 150 psi WOG in both directions. The stem seal shall consist of field adjustable packing, replaceable without removal of the actuator, or of self-adjusting U -cup packing. B. Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, eccentric plug valves 3 -inches and smaller shall have operating levers; larger valves shall have worm -gear actuators. Valve actuators shall be in accordance with Section 43 30 12 - Valves and Gate Actuators. STANTEC PLUG VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 24 - 1 C. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. DeZurik Corporation 2. Clow Valve Company 3. Pratt Valve 4. Victaulic PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Plug valves shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and the applicable provisions of Section 43 30 00 - Valves, General. B. Eccentric Plug Valves: Unless otherwise directed, the following rules shall be observed for the installation of eccentric plug valves on sewage, sludge, or other liquid systems containing solids, silt, or fine sand: 1. The valves shall be positioned with the stem in the horizontal direction. 2. In horizontal pipelines, the plug shall swing upwards when opening, to permit flushing out of solids. 3. The orientation of the valve shall prevent the valve body from filling up with solids when closed; however, where the pressure differential through the valve exceeds 25 psi, the higher pressure for valves without worm gear, electric, or air operators shall be through the valve to force the plug against the seat. 4. Valves which may be closed for extended periods (stand-by, bypass, or drain lines) and valves with reversed flow (higher pressure on downstream side, forcing the plug away from its seat), shall be equipped with worm gear operators for the full range of sizes. 5. For special applications or when in doubt, consult with the manufacturer prior to installation. END OF SECTION STANTEC PLUG VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 24 - 2 • SECTION 43 30 52 - MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PART 1 -- GENERAL 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide miscellaneous valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. The requirements of Section 43 30 00 - Valves, General, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 43 30 00 - Valves, General. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 AIR -VACUUM AND AIR -RELEASE VALVES A. Air and Vacuum Valves: Air and vacuum valves shall be capable of venting large quantities of air while pipelines are being filled, and allowing air to re-enter while pipelines are being drained. They shall be of the size indicated, with flanged or screwed ends to match piping. Bodies shall be of high-strength cast iron. The float, seat, and moving parts shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. Seat washers and gaskets shall be of a material insuring water tightness with a minimum of maintenance. Valves shall be designed for minimum 150 psi water -working pressure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Air -Release Valves: Air -release valves shall vent accumulating air while system is in service under pressure and be of the size indicated. Valves shall meet the same general requirements as indicated for air and vacuum valves except that the vacuum feature will not be required. Valves shall be designed for a minimum water -working pressure of 150 psi, unless otherwise indicated. C. Combination Air Valves: Combination air valves shall combine the characteristics of air and vacuum valves and air release valves by exhausting accumulated air in systems under pressure and releasing or re -admitting large quantities of air while a system is being filled or drained, respectively. Valves shall have the same general requirements as indicated for air and vacuum valves. D. Sewage Air Release Valves: Sewage air release valves shall vent accumulating gases during system operation. Valves shall have long float stems and bodies to minimize clogging. The same general requirements shall apply as indicated for air and vacuum valves. Each sewage air release valve shall be furnished with the following backwash accessories, fully assembled on the valve: 1. Inlet shut-off valve. 2. Blow -off valve. 3. Clear water inlet valve. 4. Rubber supply hose. 5. Quick disconnect couplings. STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 52-1 E. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corporation) 2. Crispin - Multiplex Manufacturing Company 3. GA Industries 4. Val -Matic (Valve and Manufacturing Corporation) 2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTER VALVES A. General 1. Provide backflow preventers that work on the reduced pressure principle. 2. Provide drain lines with air gaps. 3. The backflow preventer valves shall be in accordance with AWWA C511 — Reduced - Pressure Principle Backflow Prevention Assembly. B. Construction 1. The preventers shall consist of 2 spring-loaded check valves, an automatic differential pressure relief valve, drain valves, and shut-off valves. 2. The body material shall be bronze or cast iron, for a working pressure of not less than 150 psig, with bronze or stainless steel trim. C. Maintenance Access 1. Provide separate access covers for the check valves and the relief valve. 2. Provide top -entry access to check valve components. D. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. Cla-Val Company 2. Febco (CMB Industries) 3. Watts, ACV 4. Wilkins Regulator Division (Zurn Industries) STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 52-2 2.3 CORPORATION STOPS A. Unless otherwise indicated, corporation stops shall be made of solid brass for key operation, with screwed ends with corporation thread or iron pipe thread, as required. B. Manufacturer, or Equal 1. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. 2. James Jones Company (Watts, ACV) 3. Mueller Company 2.4 SOLENOID VALVES A. Solenoid valves shall be of the size, type, and class indicated and shall be designed for not less than 150 psi water -working pressure. Valves for water, air, or gas service shall have brass or bronze body with screwed ends, stainless steel trim and spring, Teflon or other resilient seals with material best suited for the temperature and fluid handled. Unless otherwise indicated, for chemicals and corrosive fluids, solenoid valves with PVC, CPVC, polypropylene (PP), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), or Teflon materials of construction, suitable for the specific application shall be provided. Enclosures shall be NEMA rated in accordance with the area designations of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical Work, General. Coil ratings shall be for continuous duty. For electrical characteristics see the electrical Drawings or Specifications. B. Manufacturers, or Equal 1. For general duty a. Automatic Switch Co. (ASCO), Model RED HAT b. Skinner Valve (Parker Hannifin Corporation) c. Magnatrol Valve Corporation d. J. D. Gould Co. 2. Plastic valves for corrosive fluids a. +GF+ Plastic Systems, Inc. b. Spears Mfg. Co. STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 52-3 PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Backflow preventers shall be installed in potable water lines where required by applicable codes or regulations, wherever there is any danger of contamination, and where indicated. B. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations. C. Backflow preventers, as well as air and vacuum release valves, shall have piped outlets to the nearest acceptable drain, firmly -supported, and installed in such a way as to avoid splashing and wetting of floors and obstruction of traffic. END OF SECTION STANTEC MISCELLANEOUS VALVES LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 43 30 52-4 SECTION 46 01 00 - EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 -- GENERAL III 1.1 THE SUMMARY A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide equipment and appurtenant WORK, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents. • • B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to equipment throughout the Contract except where otherwise indicated. C. All component and support systems of the equipment shall be designed and manufactured to withstand all forces such as internal or external, static, wind, dynamic and seismic loads (wind and seismic in accordance with Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage) in order for the equipment to last throughout its expected life without premature failure. If the project is located in a seismically active zone as specified in Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage, the manufacturer shall submit a certification signed and stamped by a registered engineer stating that the equipment was designed and manufactured to withstand all the loads specified in this paragraph. Submit a copy of that analysis for review by the ENGINEER. D. Equipment Arrangement: Unless specifically indicated otherwise, the arrangement of equipment indicated is based upon information available from manufacturers at the time of design and is not intended to show exact dimensions particular to a specific manufacturer. Some aspects of the Drawings are diagrammatic and some features of the illustrated equipment arrangement may require revision by the CONTRACTOR to meet the actual equipment requirements proposed by the CONTRACTOR. Structural supports, foundations, piping and valve connections, and electrical and instrumentation connections indicated may have to be altered by the CONTRACTOR to accommodate the equipment provided. No additional payment will be made to the CONTRACTOR for such revisions and alterations. Substantiating calculations and drawings shall be submitted prior to beginning the fabrication of equipment. 1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS A. Equipment shall be in accordance with the following standards, as applicable and as indicated in each equipment specification: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 4. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 5. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE). 6. American Welding Society (AWS). 7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). 8. Federal Specifications (FS). STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 1 9. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 10. Manufacturer's published recommendations and specifications. 11. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 12. Hydraulic Institute (HI) 13. General Industry Safety Orders (GISO). B. The following standards are referenced in this Section: ASME B16.1 Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel, Nickel Alloy and other Special Alloys ASME B46.1 Surface Texture ANSI S12.6 Method for the Measurement of the Real -Ear Attenuation of Hearing Protectors ASME B1.20.1 General Purpose Pipe Threads (Inch) ASME B31.1 Power Piping ASME B31.3 Process Piping AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. (100 mm through 3,600 mm) AWWA D100 Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage ASTM A 48 Gray Iron Castings ASTM A 108 Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold -Finished, Standard Quality 1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section III, paragraph 6.11 of the City Specificatoins. B. Shop Drawings: Furnish complete drawings and technical information for equipment, piping, valves, and controls. Where indicated or required by the ENGINEER, Shop Drawings shall include clear, concise calculations showing equipment anchorage forces and the capacities of the anchorage elements proposed by the CONTRACTOR. C. Spare Parts List: The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from the manufacturer and submit as part of Shop Drawings a list of suggested spare parts for each piece of equipment. CONTRACTOR shall also furnish the name, address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 2 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Costs: Responsibility shall be the CONTRACTOR'S for performing and paying the costs of inspection, startup, testing, adjustment, and instruction services performed by factory representatives. The OWNER will pay for costs of power and water. If available, the OWNER'S operating personnel will provide assistance in the field testing. B. Inspection: The CONTRACTOR shall inform the local authorities, such as building and plumbing inspectors, fire marshal, OSHA inspectors, and others, to witness required tests for piping, plumbing, fire protection systems, pressure vessels, safety systems, cranes, and related items to obtain required permits and certificates, and shall pay inspection fees. C. Quality and Tolerances: Tolerances and clearances shall be as shown on the Shop Drawings and shall be closely adhered to. 1. Machine WORK shall be of high-grade workmanship and finish, with due consideration to the special nature or function of the parts. Members without machined or milled ends and which are to be framed to other steel parts of the structure may have a variation in the detailed length of not greater than 1/16 -inch for members 30 -feet or less in length, and not greater than 1/8 -inch for members over 30 -feet in length. 2. Castings shall be homogeneous and free from non-metallic inclusions and defects. Surfaces of castings which are not machined shall be cleaned to remove foundry irregularities. Casting defects not exceeding 12.5 percent of the total thickness and where defects will not affect the strength and serviceability of the casting may be repaired by approved welding procedures. The ENGINEER shall be notified of larger defects. No repair welding of such defects shall be carried out without the ENGINEER'S written approval. If the removal of metal for repair reduces the stress resisting cross-section of the casting by more than 25 percent or to such an extent that the computed stress in the remaining metal exceeds the allowable stress by more than 25 percent, then the casting may be rejected. Costs of casting new material shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility as part of the WORK. 3. Materials shall meet the physical and mechanical properties in accordance with the reference standards. D. Machine Finish: The type of finish shall be the most suitable for the application as recommended by the equipment manufacturer in micro -inches in accordance with ANSI B46.1. In the absence of manufacturer's recommendations, the following surface finishes shall be used: 1. Surface roughness not greater than 63 micro -inches shall be required for surfaces in sliding contact. 2. Surface roughness not greater than 250 micro -inches shall be required for surfaces in contact where a tight joint is not required. 3. Rough finish not greater than 500 micro -inches shall be required for other machined surfaces. 4. Contact surfaces of shafts and stems which pass through stuffing boxes and contact surfaces of bearings shall be finished to not greater than 32 micro -inches. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 3 E. Manufacturer's Experience: Equipment manufacturer shall have a record of proven experience of at least 5 years of successful, troublefree operation in similar applications and size equal or larger than the equipment in this Contract. Where indicated in each individual equipment specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall submit this experience record to the ENGINEER for approval. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Noise Level: When the equipment is in operation, no single piece of equipment shall exceed the OSHA noise level requirement of 105 dBA for one hour exposure per day. B. High Noise Level Location: The CONTRACTOR shall provide one personal hearing protection station at each location defined as follows: 1. Outdoor Location: Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items that produce noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2 hour exposure. Where such equipment is separated by a distance of more than 20 -feet, measured between edges of footings, the area for each group of equipment shall be provided with a separate hearing protection station. 2. Indoor Location a. Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items located within a single room not normally occupied, that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for a 2 hour exposure. b. Any single equipment item or any group of equipment items located within a single room normally occupied by workers that produces noise exceeding OSHA noise level requirements for an 8 hour exposure. C. Personal Hearing Protection: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish 3 pairs of high attenuation hearing protectors in the original unopened packaging. The ear protectors shall be capable of meeting the requirements of ANSI S12.6 and shall produce a noise level reduction of 25 dBA at a frequency of 500 Hz. The hearing protectors shall have fluid filled ear cushions and an adjustable, padded headband. The protectors shall be stored in a weatherproof, labeled, steel cabinet, provided at an approved location near the noise producing equipment. D. Drive Trains and Service Factors: Service factors shall be applied in the selection or design of mechanical power transmission components. Components of drive train assemblies between the prime mover and the driven equipment shall be designed and rated to deliver the maximum peak or starting torque (whichever is the greatest), speed, and horsepower. Applicable service factors shall be considered, such as mechanical (type of prime mover), load class, start frequency, ventilation, ambient temperature, and fan factors. Drive train components include couplings, shafts, gears and gear drives, drive chains, sprockets, and V -belt drives. Unless otherwise indicated, the following load classifications shall apply in determining service factors: STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 4 E. Type of Equipment Service Factor Load Classification Blowers Internal Combustion Engine Uniform centrifugal or vane 1.0 Uniform lobe 1.25 Moderate Shock Centrifugal Fans 1.0 Uniform Reciprocating Air Compressors multi -cylinder 2.0 Heavy Shock single -cylinder 2.0 Heavy Shock Pumps centrifugal or rotary 1.0 Uniform reciprocating 1.8 Moderate Shock progressing cavity 1.0 Uniform Mixers constant density 1.0 Uniform variable density 1.25 Moderate Shock rapid mixer 1.25 Moderate Shock flocculator 1.25 Moderate Shock sludge mixer surface 2.5 Moderate Shock aerator 2.5 Heavy Shock Clarifiers 1.0 Uniform Sludge Thickeners 1.25 Moderate Shock Vacuum Filters 1.25 Moderate Shock Dewatering Screws 1.25 Moderate Shock Grit Handling Equipment 1.25 Moderate Shock Mechanical Bar Screens 1.0 Uniform Scum Breakers 1.25 Moderate Shock Cranes or Hoists 1.25 Moderate Shock F. Mechanical Service Factors STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 5 Mechanical Service Factors Electric Motor Internal Combustion Engine Uniform 1.25 1.50 Moderate Shock 1.50 1.75 Heavy Shock 2.00 2.25 STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 5 G. For thermal rating adjustments such as start frequency, ambient temperature, and hourly duty cycle factor, ventilation factor, and fan factor, refer to gear manufacturer sizing information. H. For service factors of electric motors, see Section 26 05 10 - Electric Motors. I. Where load classifications are not indicated, the equipment manufacturer's recommendations for service factors shall be utilized. J. Welding: Unless otherwise indicated, welding shall conform to the following: 1. Latest revision of AWWA D100. 2. Latest revision of AWWA C206. 3. Composite fabricated steel assemblies that are to be erected or installed inside a hydraulic structure, including any fixed or movable structural components of mechanical equipment, shall have continuous seal welds to prevent corrosion of hard -to -coat metallic surfaces. 4. Welding shall be by the metal -arc method or gas -shielded arc method as described in the American Welding Society's "Welding Handbook" as supplemented by other pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with the AWS Standards. 5. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped, supported, and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld reinforcement shall be as specified by the AWS code. Upon completion of welding, weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance with uniform weld contours and dimensions. Sharp corners of material that are to be painted or coated shall be ground to a minimum of 1/32 -inch on the flat. K. Protective Coating: Equipment shall be painted or coated in accordance with Section 09 96 00 - Protective Coating, unless otherwise indicated. Non-ferrous metal and corrosion -resisting steel surfaces shall be coated with grease or lubricating oil. Coated surfaces shall be protected from abrasion or other damage during handling, testing, storing, assembly, and shipping. L. Potable Water Contact: Materials immersed in or exposed to potable water shall be made of materials or coated compliant with NSF Standard 61. Bronze alloy materials in contact with potable water shall be constructed of zero -lead materials or materials whose lead content do not exceed the weighted average criteria as required by the Lead Reduction Act. Equipment manufacturer shall submit to the ENGINEER a certification of compliance with the requirement of NSF Standard 61 and the Lead Reduction Act. M. Protection of Equipment: Machined and coated surfaces shall be protected by rust inhibitor material prior to shipment. Equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise protected from damage and moisture during shipment, handling, and storage. Equipment shall be protected from exposure to corrosive fumes and shall be kept thoroughly dry. Equipment with anti -friction bearings or sleeve bearings shall be protected from being damaged due to jarring motion during shipment. Pumps, motors, drives, electrical equipment, and other equipment having anti -friction or sleeve bearings shall be stored in weathertight storage facilities prior to installation. For extended storage periods, plastic equipment wrappers should be avoided to prevent accumulation of condensate in gears and bearings. In addition, motor space heaters shall be STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 6 energized and shafts shall be rotated per manufacturer's recommendation. Equipment delivered to the Site with rust or corroded parts shall be rejected. If equipment develops defects during storage, it shall be disassembled, cleaned, recoated, or otherwise corrected to restore it to original condition. N. Identification of Equipment Items 1. At the time of shipping, each item of equipment shall have a legible identifying mark corresponding to the equipment number in the Contract Documents for the particular item. 2. After installation, each item of equipment shall be given permanent identification. a. Pumps, compressors, and blowers of 150 horsepower or less shall receive acrylic plastic nametags. b. Pumps, compressors, and blowers larger than 150 horsepower shall receive stainless steel plate nametags. O. Vibration Isolators: Air compressors, blowers, engines, inline fans shall be provided with restrained spring -type vibration isolators or pads per manufacturer's written recommendations. Vibration isolations shall be provided with seismic restraint. P. Equipment Maximum Allowable Vibration Level: Unless otherwise indicated, maximum allowable vibration level shall be in accordance with the acceptance criteria recommended by the reference Standard for that particular type of equipment Q. Shop Fabrication: Shop fabrication shall be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Shop Drawings. R. Controls: Equipment and system controls shall be in accordance with Division 40 - Instrumentation. 2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND FOUNDATIONS A. Equipment Supports: Equipment components and supports, anchors, and seismic restrainers shall be adequately designed for static, dynamic, wind, and seismic loads. The design horizontal seismic force shall be the greatest of the following design criteria: 1. Design Criteria noted in Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage. B. Submit design calculations for equipment supports, anchors, and seismic restrainers signed and sealed by an engineer registered in the State wherein the project is to be built. Calculations shall account for forces and distribution of forces on supporting structures resulting from normal operation, normal operation plus seismic loadings, and normal operation plus wind loadings in accordance with Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage. 1. Wall -mounted equipment weighing more than 250 pounds or which is within 18 - inches above the floor shall be provided with fabricated steel supports. Pedestals shall be of welded steel. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet or is enclosed with removable sides, the pedestal shall match the supported equipment in appearance and dimensions. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 7 2. Seismic requirements: Freestanding and wall -hung equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that satisfy Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage. Calculations shall be performed and signed and stamped for equipment weighing more that 400 pounds. Calculations shall analyze lateral and overturning forces and shall include a factor of safety against overturning equal to 1.5. Calculations shall include the distribution of forces imposed on the supporting structure and anchors, verifying that each anchor can develop the required resistance forces. 3. Wind requirements: Exterior freestanding equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that satisfy Section 01 33 17 — Structural Design, Support and Anchorage. Calculations shall be performed and signed and stamped, analyzing lateral and overturning forces and shall include a factor of safety against overturning equal to 1.5. Calculations shall include the distribution of forces imposed on the supporting structure and anchors, verifying that each anchor can develop the required resistance forces. 4. Anchors: Anchor bolts shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00 - Miscellaneous Metalwork. CONTRACTOR shall determine the size, type, capacity, location, and other placement requirements of anchorage elements. Anchoring methods and leveling criteria in the manufacturer's literature shall be followed. Submit methods and criteria with the Shop Drawings. 5. Equipment Foundations: Unless otherwise indicated, mechanical equipment, tanks, control cabinets, enclosures, and related equipment shall be mounted on minimum 3.5 -inch high concrete bases. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, pumps, blowers, compressors and engine driven equipment shall be provided with a concrete foundation with a total weight equal to at least five times the weight of the equipment. Concrete foundations shall be isolated from the building floor in order to prevent transfer of vibration from the equipment to the building structure. The CONTRACTOR through the equipment manufacturer shall verify the size and weight of equipment foundation to insure compatibility with equipment. 6. Equipment Grout: Mechanical equipment installed on top of concrete foundations or bases shall be provided with non -shrink concrete or epoxy grout as indicated and as specified in Section 03 60 00 - Grouting. Grout shall be applied between the base plate and the concrete foundation or base in accordance with the grout manufacturer's recommendation. Grout shall be free of void space. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 8 2.3 COUPLINGS A. Mechanical couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment. Flexible couplings shall be provided between the driver and the driven equipment to accommodate slight angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, end float, and to cushion shock loads. Unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the equipment manufacturer, coupling type shall be furnished with the respective equipment as follows: Equipment Type Coupling Type Horizontal and end suction pumps Gear or flexible spring Vertical turbine pumps 3 piece spacer for solid shaft or double nut for hollow shaft Vertical nonclog pumps, close coupled Flexible disc pack Screw pumps Flexible spring, gear coupling, fluid coupling Vertical nonclog pumps with extended shaft Flexible disc pack or Universal joint with carbon fiber composite shaft and steady bearing support(s) Belt conveyors Gear coupling for fractional to 7.5 horsepower, Silicone filled fluid coupling for 10 hp and larger Sludge collector Gear coupling or jaw clutch Engine driven pumps Universal joint type or elastomeric flexible type Single stage centrifugal blowers Flexible disc pack Air compressors Gear or flexible disc pack B. Each coupling size shall be determined based on the rated horsepower of the motor, speed of the shaft, and the load classification service factor. The CONTRACTOR shall have the equipment manufacturer select or recommend the size and type of coupling required to suit each specific application. C. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may occur, 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided. D. Taper -Lock or equal bushings may be used to provide for easy installation and removal of shafts of various diameters. 2.4 SHAFTING A. General: Equipment manufacturer shall be responsible for designing and manufacturing shafting to carry all Toads applied to the shaft. Shafting shall be continuous between bearings and shall be sized to transmit the power required. Keyways shall be accurately cut in line. Shafting shall not be turned down at the ends to accommodate bearings or sprockets whose bore is Tess than the diameter of the shaft. Shafts shall rotate in the end bearings and shall be turned and polished, straight, and true. B. Design Criteria: Shafts shall be designed to carry the steady state and transient loads suitable for unlimited number of load applications. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 9 C. Materials: Shafting materials shall be compatible with the type of service and Toad transmitted. Environmental elements such as corrosive gases, moisture, and fluids shall be taken into consideration. Materials shall be as indicated unless furnished as part of an equipment assembly. 1. Low carbon cold -rolled steel shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1018. 2. Medium carbon cold -rolled shafting shall conform to ASTM A 108, Grade 1045. 3. Other grades of carbon steel alloys shall be suitable for service and load. 4. Corrosion -resistant shafting shall be stainless steel or Monel, whichever is most suitable for the intended service. D. Differential Settlement: Where differential settlement between the driver and the driven equipment may occur, a shaft of sufficient length with 2 sets of universal type couplings shall be provided. 2.5 GEARS AND GEAR DRIVES A. Unless otherwise indicated, gears shall be of the spur, helical, or spiral -bevel type, designed and manufactured in accordance with AGMA Standards, with a service factor suitable for Toad class, mechanical service and thermal rating adjustment, a minimum L- 10 bearing life of 60,000 hours, and a minimum efficiency of 94 percent. Peak torque, starting torque, and shaft overhung load shall be checked when selecting the gear reducer. Worm gears shall not be used unless specifically approved by the ENGINEER. B. Gear speed reducers or increasers shall be of the enclosed type, oil- or grease - lubricated and fully sealed, with a breather to allow air to escape but keep dust and dirt out. The casing shall be of cast iron, ductile iron, or heavy-duty steel construction with lifting lugs and an inspection cover for each gear train. An oil level sight glass and an oil flow indicator shall be provided, located for easy reading. C. Gears and gear drives that are part of an equipment assembly shall be shipped fully assembled for field installation. D. Material selections shall be selected by the manufacturer, provided the above AGMA values are met. Input and output shafts shall be adequately designed for the service and load requirements. Gears shall be computer -matched for minimum tolerance variation. The output shaft shall have 2 positive seals to prevent oil leakage. E. Oil level and drain locations shall be easily accessible. Oil coolers or heat exchangers with required appurtenances shall be provided when necessary. F. Where gear drive input or output shafts from one manufacturer connect to couplings or sprockets from a different manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR shall have the gear drive manufacturer furnish a matching key taped to the shaft for shipment. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 10 2.6 DRIVE CHAINS A. Power drive chains shall be commercial type roller chains meeting ASME Standards. B. A chain take-up or tightener shall be provided in every chain drive arrangement to provide easy adjustment. C. A minimum of one connecting or coupler link shall be provided in each length of roller chain. D. Chain and attachments shall be of the manufacturer's best standard material and be suitable for the process fluid. 2.7 SPROCKETS A. General: Sprockets shall be used in conjunction with chain drives and chain -type material handling equipment. B. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, materials shall be as follows: 1. Sprockets with 25 teeth or less, normally used as a driver, shall be made of medium carbon steel in the 0.40 to 0.45 percent carbon range. 2. Type A and B sprockets with 26 teeth or more, normally used as driven sprockets, shall be made of minimum 0.20 percent carbon steel. 3. Large diameter sprockets with Type C hub shall be made of cast iron conforming to ASTM A 48, Class 30. C. Sprockets shall be accurately machined to ASME Standards. Sprockets shall have deep hardness penetration in tooth sections. D. Finish bored sprockets shall be furnished complete with keyseat and set screws. E. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sprockets shall be of the split type or shall be furnished with Taper -Lock bushings as required. F. Idler sprockets shall be provided with brass or Babbitt bushings, complete with oil hole and axial or circumferential grooving with stainless steel tubing and grease fitting extended to an accessible location. Steel collars with set screws may be provided in both sides of the hub. 2.8 V -BELT DRIVES A. V -belts and sheaves shall be of the best commercial grade and shall conform to ASME, MPTA, and RMA Standards. B. Unless otherwise indicated, sheaves shall be machined from the finest quality gray cast iron. C. Sheaves shall be statically balanced. In some applications where vibration is a problem, sheaves shall be dynamically balanced. Sheaves operating at belt speeds exceeding 6,500 fpm may be required to be of special materials and construction. D. To facilitate installation and disassembly, sheaves shall be provided complete with Taper -Lock or QD bushings as required. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 11 E. Finish bored sheaves shall be complete with keyseat and set screws. F. Sliding motor bases shall be provided to adjust the tension of V -belts. 2.9 DRIVE GUARDS A. Power transmission trains, prime movers, machines, shaft extensions, and moving machine parts shall be guarded to conform to the Division of Industrial Safety General Industrial Safety Orders latest edition. OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29CFR1910). The guards shall be constructed of minimum 10 -gauge expanded, flattened steel with smooth edges and corners, galvanized after fabrication, and securely fastened. Where required for lubrication or maintenance, guards shall have hinged and latched access doors. 2.10 BEARINGS A. General: Bearings shall conform to the standards of the American Bearing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (ABMA). B. To assure satisfactory bearing application, fitting practice, mounting, lubrication, sealing, static rating, housing strength, and lubrication shall be considered in bearing selection. C. Re-lubricatable type bearings shall be equipped with hydraulic grease fitting in an accessible location and shall have sufficient grease capacity in the bearing chamber. D. Lubricated -for -life bearings shall be factory -lubricated with the manufacturer's recommended grease to insure maximum bearing life and best performance. E. Anti -Friction Type Bearing Life: Except where otherwise indicated, bearings shall have a minimum L-10 life expectancy of 5 years or 20,000 hours, whichever occurs first. Where so indicated, bearings shall have a minimum rated L-10 life expectancy corresponding to the type of service, as follows: Type of Service Design Life, years L-10 Design Life, hours (whichever comes first) 8 -hour shift 10 20,000 16 -hour shift 10 40,000 Continuous 10 60,000 F. Bearing housings shall be of cast iron or steel and bearing mounting arrangement shall be as indicated or as recommended in the published standards of the manufacturer. Split -type housings may be used to facilitate installation, inspection, and disassembly. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 12 G. Sleeve Type Bearings: Sleeve -type bearings shall have a cast iron or ductile iron housing and Babbitt or bronze liner. Bearing housing shall be bolted and doweled to the lower casing half. These housings shall be provided with cast iron caps bolted in place and the bearing end caps shall be bored to receive the bearing shells. Sleeve bearings shall be designed on the basis of the maximum allowable Toad permitted by the bearing manufacturer. If the sleeve bearing is connected to an equipment shaft with a coupling, the coupling transmitted thrust will be assumed to be the maximum motor or equipment thrust. Lubricant, lubrication system, and cooling system shall be as recommended by the bearing manufacturer. In accordance with the Lead Reduction Act, sleeve bearings containing lead material exposed to drinking water shall not be acceptable. H. Plate Thrust Bearings: Thrust bearings shall be the Kingsbury Type, designed and manufactured to maintain the shaft in the fixed axial position without undue heating or the necessity of adjustment or attention. Bearings shall be oil lubricated to suit the manufacturer's standard method of lubrication for the specific bearing. If bearing cooling is required, manufacturer shall provide heat exchangers, incluging necessary intrumentation and controls, piping, filters, and valves. 2.11 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Guides: Pipe connections to equipment shall be supported, anchored, and guided to avoid stresses and loads on equipment flanges and equipment. Supports and hangers shall be in accordance with Section 43 10 52 - Pipe Supports. B. Flanges and Pipe Threads: Flanges on equipment and appurtenances shall conform to ASME B16.1, Class 125, or B16.5, Class 150, unless otherwise indicated. Pipe threads shall be in accordance with ASME B1.20.1 and Section 43 10 50 - Piping, General. C. Flexible Connectors: Flexible connectors shall be installed in piping connections to engines, blowers, compressors, and other vibrating equipment and in piping systems. in accordance with the requirements of Section 43 10 50 — Piping, General. Flexible connectors shall be harnessed or otherwise anchored to prevent separation of the pipe where required by the installation. D. Insulating Connections: Insulating bushings, unions, couplings, or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used in accordance with the requirements of the specifications. 2.12 GASKETS AND PACKINGS A. Gaskets and packings shall be in accordance with the requirements of the specifications. Gaskets and packings in contact with drinking water shall be NSF 61 approved. Elastomeric materials in contact with water with chloramines, or water with ozone residual shall be made of Teflon or Viton-A, or equal. B. Packing around valve stems and reciprocating shafts shall be of compressible material, compatible with the fluid being used. Chevron -type "V" packing shall be Garlock No. 432, John Crane Everseal, or equal. C. Packing around rotating shafts (other than valve stems) shall be "O" rings, stuffing boxes, or mechanical seals, as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the ENGINEER., in accordance with Section 43 20 00 - Pumps, General. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 13 2.13 NAMEPLATES A. Equipment nameplates of stainless steel shall be engraved or stamped and fastened to the equipment in an accessible location with No. 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins. Nameplates shall contain the manufacturer's name, model, serial number, size, characteristics, and appropriate data describing the machine performance ratings. 2.14 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS A. Tools: The CONTRACTOR shall furnish one complete set of special wrenches and other special tools necessary for the assembly, adjustment, and dismantling of the equipment. Tools shall be of best quality hardened steel forgings with bright finish. Wrench heads shall have work faces dressed to fit nuts. Tools shall be suitable for professional work and manufactured by Snap On, Crescent, Stanley, or equal. The set of tools shall be neatly mounted in a labeled toolbox of suitable design provided with a hinged cover. B. Spare parts shall be furnished as indicated in the individual equipment sections. Spare parts shall be suitably packaged in a metal box and labeled with equipment numbers by means of stainless steel or solid plastic nametags attached to the box. 2.15 EQUIPMENT LUBRICANTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide lubricants for equipment during shipping, storage, and prior to testing, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Lubricants that could come in contact with potable water shall be food grade lubricants. After successful initial testing, final testing, and satisfactory completion startup testing per Section 01 79 00 — Demonstration and Training, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct one complete lubricant change on equipment. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the proper disposal of used lubricants. The OWNER will then be responsible for subsequent lubricant changes STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 14 • • • PART 3 -- EXECUTION 3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER A. Installation Supervision, Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: An authorized, experienced, and competent service representative of the manufacturer shall visit the Site to perform the following: 1. Supervision of the installation of the equipment 2. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment and approving its installation 3. Startup and field testing for proper operation, efficiency, and capacity 4. Performing field adjustments during the test period to ensure that the equipment installation and operation comply with requirements 5. Certify in writing that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and readied for operation. 6. Unless otherwise indicated, factory representative shall be present at the job site for the following number of days: a. Half a day per equipment for smaller than 500 horsepower. b. One day per equipment for 500 horsepower and larger. B. Owner Staff Training 1. Owner staff training shall be in accordance with Section 01 79 00 — Demonstration and Training. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, a minimum of one day of training shall be provided for each type of equipment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Alignment: Equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment. 3.3 PACKAGED EQUIPMENT A. When any system is furnished as pre-packaged equipment, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate space and structural requirements, clearances, utility connections, signals, and outputs with Subcontractors to avoid later change orders. B. If the packaged system has any additional features (as safety interlocks, etc.) other than required by the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall coordinate such features with the ENGINEER and provide material and labor necessary for a complete installation as required by the manufacturer. STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 15 3.4 FIELD ASSEMBLY A. Studs, cap screws, bolt and nuts used in field assembly shall be coated with Never Seize compound or equal. 3.5 WELDING A. Welds shall be cleaned of weld -slag, splatter, etc. to provide a smooth surface. 3.6 FIELD TESTS A. Where indicated by the individual equipment sections, equipment shall be field tested after installation to demonstrate satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, or overheating of bearings or motor. B. The following field testing shall be conducted: 1. Start equipment, check, and operate the equipment over its entire operating range. Vibration level shall be within the amplitude limits as indicated or as recommended by the reference applicable standards. 2. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, capacity, vibration, and bearing temperatures. 3. Operate equipment indicated in Section 01 79 00 — Demonstration and Training. C. The ENGINEER shall witness field-testing. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER of the test schedule 3 Days in advance. D. In the event that any equipment fails to meet the test requirements, the equipment shall be modified and retested until it satisfies the requirement. END OF SECTION STANTEC EQUIPMENT GENERAL PROVISIONS LIFT STATION 16 PIERCE ST REHAB 20 -0008 -UT PAGE 46 01 00 - 16 • APPENDIX FORMS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Table of Contents VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY FORM 1 GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT 2 • • APPENDIX i Updated 12/3/2020 APPENDIX — FORMS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY FORM PER FLORIDA STATUTE 448.095, CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS MUST REGISTER WITH AND USE THE E -VERIFY SYSTEM TO VERIFY THE WORK AUTHORIZATION STATUS OF ALL NEWLY HIRED EMPLOYEES. THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID/PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The Contractor and its Subcontractors are aware of the requirements of Florida Statute 448.095. 2. The Contractor and its Subcontractors are registered with and using the E -Verify system to verify the work authorization status of newly hired employees. 3. The Contractor will not enter into a contract with any Subcontractor unless each party to the contract registers with and uses the E -Verify system. 4. The Subcontractor will provide the Contractor with an affidavit stating that the Subcontractor does not employ, contract with, or subcontract with unauthorized alien. 5. The Contractor must maintain a copy of such affidavit. 6. The City may terminate this Contract on the good faith belief that the Contractor or its Subcontractors knowingly violated Florida Statutes 448.09(1) or 448.095(2)(c). 7. If this Contract is terminated pursuant to Florida Statute 448.095(2)(c), the Contractor may not be awarded a public contract for at least 1 year after the date on which this Contract was terminated. 8. The Contractor is liable for any additional cost incurred by the City as a result of the termination of this Contract. STATE OF COUNTY OF Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity/Corporation • The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me by means of D physical presence or 0 online notarization on, this day of , 20 , by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation/entity), personally known , or produced (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take an oath. Notary Public Printed Name My Commission Expires: NOTARY SEAL ABOVE • APPENDIX 1 Updated 12/3/2020 APPENDIX — FORMS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION • GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT • • APPENDIX 2 Updated 12/3/2020 A AREHNA Engineering, Inc. REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION CLEARWATER LIFT STATION 16 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA AREHNA PROJECT NO. B-20-137 February 23, 2021 Prepared For: Stantec 777 Harbor Island Boulevard, Suite 600 Tampa, Florida 33602 Prepared By: AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 West Lemon Street Tampa, Florida 33609 • • • AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 West Lemon Street Tampa, Florida 33609 Ph 813.944.3464 1 Fax 813.944.4959 February 23, 2021 Jarah Parke, PE Stantec 777 Harbor Island Boulevard, Suite 600 Tampa, Florida 33602 E-mail: Jarah.Parke@Stantec.com Direct Line: (813) 204-3324 Subject: Dear Mr. Parke, Report of Geotechnical Exploration Clearwater Lift Station 16 Clearwater, Florida AREHNA Project B-20-137 AREHNA Engineering, Inc. (AREHNA) is pleased to submit this report of our geotechnical exploration for the proposed project. Services were conducted in general accordance with AREHNA Proposal B.Prop-20-129 dated October 27, 2020. This report presents our understanding of the project, outlines our exploratory procedures, documents the field • data obtained and includes our recommendations for the lift station design. • AREHNA appreciates the opportunity to have assisted on this project. Should you have any questions with regards to this report, or if we can be of any further assistance, please contact this office. Best Regards, AREHNA ENGINEERING, INC. FLORIDA BOARD OF PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERS CERTIFICATE OF AUTHORIZATION No. 28410 This item has been digitally signed and sealed by: Kirk Eastman, P.E. Geotechnical Engineer Florida Registration 50733 On the date adjacent to the seal. Printed copies of this document are not considered signed and sealed and the signature must be verified on any electronic copies. Distribution: 1 — Addressee - Electronic 1 — File ``111111111///1' `\ M• E'4et. �,, vscEN$F • • -* STATE OF i '. .0.1. • // We,, NA%. �?\' No. 50733 * * Joseph Baldauff, El Geotechnical Professional An Tao, PE Geotechnical Engineer Florida Registration 88520 www.arehna.com Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page • 1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION AND SCOPE OF WORK 1 1.1 Site Description and Project Characteristics 1 1.2 Scope of Work 1 2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING 3 2.1 Field Exploration 3 2.2 Laboratory Testing 3 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS 4 3.1 USGS Topographic Data 4 3.2 USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service Data 4 3.3 Subsurface Conditions 4 3.4 Groundwater Conditions 5 3.5 Estimated Seasonal High Groundwater Level 5 3.6 Percolation/Exfiltration Test Results 5 3.7 Environmental Classification 5 4.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS 6 4.1 General 6 4.2 Lift Station Design 6 4.3 Settlement 7 4.4 Earth Pressure Parameters 7 5.0 GENERAL SITE PREPARATION 8 5.1 General 8 5.2 On -Site Soil Suitability 8 5.3 Horizontal Directional Drilling 8 5.4 Excavation and Backfill 10 5.5 Dewatering 10 5.6 Pipeline Bedding 11 5.7 General Construction Monitoring and Testing Guidelines 11 5.8 Lift Station Construction 11 6.0 BASIS FOR RECOMMENDATIONS 12 i(Page A • • • • • Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 LIST OF APPENDICES APPENDIX A USGS and USDA Vicinity Maps Boring Location Plan Soil Boring Profiles Percolation/Exfiltration Test Results Percolation/Exfiltration Test Data Sheet APPENDIX B Laboratory Test Results — Table 1 Recommended Soil Parameters Field and Laboratory Procedures iii Page A Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, 8-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 1.0 PROJECT INFORMATION AND SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 Site Description and Project Characteristics The project is located within Clearwater Park and is just south of Pierce street, West of Osceola Street, and east and south of Drew Street in Clearwater, Florida. The project consists of replacing the existing lift station and force main. Based on site plans provided by Stantec, the proposed 12' diameter, cylindrical, cast -in- place (CIP) lift station has a planned depth of 25' deep, with a calculated maximum load of 2.5 ksf. The lift station will be constructed on a 12'x12' concrete slab on the surface. Based on the provided plans, AREHNA also assumed 12" thick concrete walls and pads for the proposed lift station. The force main will be replaced utilizing either Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) or open -cut installation methods. Recommendations for both HDD and open -cut installation methods will be provided in this report, as requested by Stantec. 1.2 Scope of Work The purpose of our geotechnical study was to obtain information on the general subsurface conditions at the proposed project site. The subsurface materials encountered were evaluated with respect to the available project characteristics. In this regard, engineering assessments for the following items were formulated: • Identification of the existing ground water levels and estimated normal seasonal high ground water fluctuations. • General site preparation recommendations including the suitability of existing soils for structural fill. • General location and description of potentially deleterious materials encountered in the borings, which may have impact on the proposed construction. • Allowable bearing capacity and settlement for the lift station. • Soil parameters for use in HDD software and temporary sheeting and shoring for the lift station construction. • Hydraulic conductivity based on results of the percolation test. The following services were performed to achieve the above -outlined objectives: • Requested utility location services from Sunshine811. • Performed three Standard Penetration Test (SPT) borings to depths of 30 to 35 feet near the vicinity of the proposed lift station and force main. Samples were collected, and Standard Penetration Test resistances measured continuously for the top ten feet, and at approximate intervals of five feet thereafter. The upper four feet was manual hand augered when possible to avoid any potential conflict with unmarked underground utilities. • Performed one percolation test to a depth of 15 feet below existing ground surface. 1'Page A • • Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 • Visually classified and stratified soil samples in the laboratory using the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) and conducted a laboratory testing program, including natural moisture content, Atterberg limits, and single sieve gradation (-#200) testing on selected samples. • Reported the results of the field exploration and engineering analysis. The results of the subsurface exploration are presented in this report, signed and sealed by a professional engineer specializing in geotechnical engineering. 2IPage A Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 2.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING 2.1 Field Exploration Our scope included three Standard Penetration Test (SPT) borings extending to depths of 30 to 35 feet below the existing ground surface. The SPT borings were performed with the use of a Power Drill Rig using Bentonite "Mud" drilling procedures. Samples were collected and Standard Penetration Test resistances were measured at approximate intervals of two feet for the top ten feet and at approximate intervals of five feet thereafter. The upper four feet was manual hand augered when possible to avoid any potential conflict with unmarked underground utilities. The soil sampling was performed in general accordance with ASTM Test Designation D-1586, entitled "Penetration Test and Split -Barrel Sampling of Soils." Groundwater levels, if encountered, were measured in the boreholes at the time of the field exploration. Representative portions of the soil samples were sealed in glass jars, labeled and transferred to AREHNA's laboratory for appropriate classification. Sheet 2 in the Appendix A provides a boring location site plan showing the relationship of existing features to the SPT boring. The boring location plan was approved by Stantec prior to drilling. SPT borings were located in the field by measuring from existing features and using GPS Coordinates. Upon the completion of the borings, Stantec provided the boring elevation data based on the GPS coordinates of the borings. One Constant Head percolation/exfiltration test was performed to a depth of approximately 15 feet below the existing ground surface. The percolation test was performed with a 3 -inch diameter perforated PVC pipe installed in an approximately 9 -inch diameter hole pre -drilled to a depth of 15 feet below existing ground surface. The borehole was then filled with water and the water level maintained at the surface. Once the inflow stabilized or came into equilibrium with the outflow rate or seepage, the amount of water added fora period of 10 minutes was recorded and the percolation/exfiltration rate calculated. The SFWMD percolation/exfiltration test location and results are shown in Appendix A. 2.2 Laboratory Testing Laboratory testing consisting of natural moisture content, Atterberg limits, and single sieve (#200) gradation were performed on a representative soil samples. The results of the laboratory testing are presented on Table 1 in Appendix B and on Sheet 3 in Appendix A. 3IPage A • Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida 3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS February 23rd, 2021 3.1 USGS Topographic Data The topographic survey map published by the United States Geological Survey was reviewed for ground surface features at the proposed project location (Sheet 1, Appendix A). Based on this review, the natural ground surface elevation at the project site is approximately +5 to +15 feet. 3.2 USDA Natural Resources Conservation Service Data The United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) survey for Pinellas County indicates that the soils at the project site consist of the following soil unit: Soil Unit Number Soil Name Depth Below Natural Grade to High Water Table (feet) 16 Matlacha and St. Augustine soils and Urban Land 2.0 — 3.0 30 Urban land, 0 to 2 percent slopes The soil survey also indicates that the average annual precipitation is 40 to 68 inches. The soils encountered in our borings are consistent with the soil unit described above. The USDA Soil Survey map for the project site is attached in Sheet 1 in Appendix A. 3.3 Subsurface Conditions A pictorial representation of the subsurface conditions encountered in the borings is shown on the Boring Profiles, Sheet 3 in Appendix A. This profile and the following soil conditions highlight the general subsurface stratification. Soil conditions may vary between, and away from, boring locations. In general the following subsurface conditions were encountered: Depth (feet) Elevation (feet NAVD 88) Material Description 0 10 6.7 -3.3 Very loose to medium dense SAND with varying amounts of fines (SP & SP -SM). Note, SPT -01 encountered building debris and fill material from 4 to 10 feet. 10 20 -3.3 -13.3 Very soft to very stiff SILT (MH), very loose to medium dense clayey SAND (SC) and firm CLAY (CL). SPT -02 encountered medium hard weathered limestone starting at EL -8.3 ft NAVD 88. 20 35 -13.3 -28.3 Soft to very dense LIMESTONE to highly weathered LIMESTONE. 4iPage Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2027 3.4 Groundwater Conditions The groundwater level was encountered at depths of 4 to 12 feet below the existing ground surface in two of the SPT borings and Percolation test performed. The groundwater table was not apparent in boring SPT - 01 (i.e., GNA, Groundwater Not Apparent). The addition of drilling fluid makes it difficult to obtain accurate groundwater measurements when drilling fluid is introduced prior to encountering the groundwater table. Fluctuation in ground water levels should be expected due to seasonal climatic changes, construction activity, rainfall variations, surface water runoff, tidal factors, and other site-specific factors. Since ground water level variations are anticipated, design drawings and specifications should accommodate such possibilities and construction planning should assume that variations will occur. 3.5 Estimated Seasonal High Groundwater Level The seasonal high groundwater table is the highest average depth of soil saturation during the wet season in a normal year (South Florida Water Management District, SFWMD, Volume IV). The procedures for estimating SHWT include an examination of county soil surveys and field verification by observation and identification of indicators within the soil profile. Based on the mapping performed by the USDA, soils information obtained from the site, and our experience in the area, we estimate that the normal seasonal high groundwater level will be encountered at a depth of approximately 3.5 feet below the existing ground surface. It should be noted that this area may become inundated after severe storm events. 3.6 Percolation/Exfiltration Test Results The calculated coefficient of Hydraulic conductivity was obtained in accordance with the Constant Head Open Hole Test Method. The following table summarizes the calculated hydraulic conductivity coefficient: Test No. k, Hydraulic Conductivity (cfs/ ft2 - ft of Head) PERC-01 2.9E-04 A safety factor may need to be applied to allow for geological uncertainties. The percolation/ exfiltration Field Data Sheets along with a table including the test results are presented in Appendix A of this report. 3.7 Environmental Classification Based on USDA Soil Survey of Pinellas County, the project sites environmental classification is highly aggressive for steel and concrete. 5'Page A • • • Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 4.0 DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS 4.1 General Our geotechnical evaluation is based upon the field data obtained during this geotechnical exploration and previous experience in the project vicinity. If the final structure location is significantly different from those described or if the subsurface conditions during construction are different from those revealed by our boring, we should be notified immediately so that we might review our recommendations presented in this report. Soft to very hard limestone was encountered from 20 to 35 feet below existing grades (EL. -8 to -24 feet) in the three borings performed. We understand the proposed bottom of the wet well is 25 feet below existing grades and will likely encounter this limestone formation which may require the use of pneumatic or hydraulic equipment designed for removal of hard rock. The designer may consider designing the lift station to be constructed above the limestone formation to avoid the removal of hard rock. We understand from the plans provided by Stantec, that HDD is also planned to an elevation of EL -15 feet NAVD 88, in order to install a new force main. Any HDD operations performed below EL -8.3 NAVD 88 will likely encounter this limestone formation and may require the use of pneumatic or hydraulic equipment designed for removal of hard rock. The designer may consider alternate forms of force main installation, such as shallow, open -cut methods to avoid this limestone formation. After complete removal of all existing topsoil, roots, debris, and other deleterious materials from beneath the lift station and to a minimum of five feet beyond the development perimeter, the area should be sheeted. Our recommended site preparation is presented in Section 5.0, General Site Preparation. 4.2 Lift Station Design Based on the site plan provided by Stantec, dated August 4, 2020, the proposed lift station will be constructed on a 12' x 12' concrete pad extending 25' below the existing ground surface. The expected load is approximately 3,000 psf. We anticipate the proposed lift station will be installed in a sheeted excavation with a concrete plug placed at the bottom of the lift station structure. The lift station should be designed to resist hydrostatic lateral and uplift pressure and earth pressures. An allowable gross bearing pressure of 3,000 psf should be available only for the lift station at SPT -02, using the site preparation recommended in Section 5.0, General Site Preparation. To achieve a bearing capacity of 3,000 psf for the lift station near the vicinity of SPT -02 we recommend over -excavating to EL -20 feet and replacing it with suitable fill compacted to 95% of a Standard Proctor or placing a lean concrete mix. The modulus of subgrade reaction, k is 9.2 pci for SPT -01 and 92.5 pci for SPT -02. The lift station area should be sheeted to properly retain the soil and groundwater. 6'Page A Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 4.3 Settlement The immediate settlement of the lift station supported on limestone should occur rapidly during construction as dead loads are imposed on the bottom slab of the lift station. Provided that the recommended subsurface preparation operations are properly performed, the total settlements of the lift station should not exceed 1 inch, with differential settlements on the order of 50 percent of the total settlements. 4.4 Earth Pressure Parameters The tables presenting the recommended lateral earth pressure parameters for use in HDD design software, lift station design and temporary shoring are shown in Appendix B. Soil parameters for each encountered soil layer are shown within the tables. Parameters for sand backfill are also provided in the tables. The soil parameters should be used accordingly in the design. The earth pressure coefficient values represent ultimate conditions. Since the deflection necessary to mobilize the ultimate passive resistance may be more than can be tolerated, an appropriate factor of safety should be applied for design. The values assume smooth, formed concrete against granular soil, without appreciable cohesion, compacted to the specification outlined in this report. The tabulated parameters assume adequate drainage is provided to help prevent the build-up of excess hydrostatic pressures. 7IPage A Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 5.0 GENERAL SITE PREPARATION III 5.1 General • • Prior to constructing the lift station, the complete removal of all existing topsoil, roots, debris, and other deleterious materials from beneath the lift station and to a minimum of five feet beyond the development perimeter should be performed. The lift station area should then be sheeted. The HDD installation operation is the responsibility of the specialty contractor (i.e. the selection of HDD equipment and operation procedures are the choices of the specialty contractor). We have provided general guidelines for HDD operation below. We have also provided general recommendations for open cut, force main installation, at the request of Stantec. Our general installation recommendations have been based on the site conditions encountered during our geotechnical investigation. AREHNA should be notified is the site conditions are different then stated in this report, so we may modify or amend our recommendations. 5.2 On -Site Soil Suitability The borings indicate that sandy soils classified as SP and SP -SM based on the Unified Soil Classification System are present at the site at varying depths of up to 10 feet and are suitable for use as backfill material. Plastic clayey sand (SC) was encountered at approximate depths between 10 to 20 feet below existing ground surface are not suitable for use as backfill. The cohesive soils (MH) encountered at depths of approximately 10 to 15 feet and clay (CL) at depths of 15 to 20 feet, respectively, in borings SPT -01 and SPT -03, are not suitable for use as backfill. Further, debris laden soils encountered at depths of 4 to 10 feet below the existing ground surface in boring SPT -01 are unsuitable for use as fill and should be removed. Suitable structural fill materials should consist of fine to medium sand with less than 12 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and be free of rubble, organics, clay, debris, and other unsuitable material. Any off-site materials used as fill should be approved by AREHNA prior to acquisition. 5.3 Horizontal Directional Drilling Based on the SPT borings performed, the subsurface materials generally consist of very loose to medium dense fine sands (SP, SP -SM, SC). Very soft to very stiff silt (MH) was encountered at depths of approximately 10 to 15 feet and firm clay (CL) was encountered at depths of approximately 15 to 20 feet, respectively, in borings SPT -01 and SPT -03. The encountered sandy soils have a potential for caving. The limestone formation was generally encountered in the borings at a depth of 20 feet below the existing ground surface. HDD that is planned to extend to 20 feet below the existing ground surface will likely encounter this limestone formation and may require the use of pneumatic or hydraulic equipment designed for the removal of hard rock. It should also be noted that SPT -01 encountered various building material debris from 4 to 10 feet below the ground surface. Some layers in this range of depths experienced debris content of greater than 50%. Contractors should anticipate difficult boring conditions in this area. 8IPage A Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 Drilling Fluid - Drilling fluid should be used during drilling and back -reaming operations. Due to the sandy soils encountered during our investigation it is recommended that the drilling fluid be composed of clean water and bentonite. Other appropriate additives should be added at the discretion of the specialty contractor. The drilling fluid should be mixed thoroughly and be absent of any clumps or clods. Further, the drilling fluid should not be recycled and should be hauled off the site. Heaving Potential - The soils encountered in our investigation have a low heaving potential. However, heaving may occur when attempting to back -ream too large of a hole. To minimize heaving, reaming process should be completed leaving the bored hole at full design diameter during pullback. The pullback barrel reamer should be no larger than the design bored diameter. The pullback rate should minimize overcutting of the borehole so that excessive voids are reduced and post installation settlement may be minimized. Monitoring — The drilling and installation operations should be monitored continuously by experienced personnel trained in all aspects of directional drilling process. These procedures include accurate monitoring and control system to track the progress and exact location of the drilling head at all times. The drilling operator should maintain record on drilling fluid pumping rates, pressures, viscosity and density, etc. throughout the entire course of drilling activities. Horizontal and vertical adjustments should be made throughout the procedure so that the drilling profile matches the planned profile. The specific weight of the drilling fluid should be adjusted throughout the process to maintain hydrological stability. Jetting pressures should be limited to avoid drilling fluid release during drilling. However, should release of drilling fluid in the project area occur, operations should stop immediately and measures should be taken to contain release. Generic measures may include the following: • If release is detected, the drilling crew should take immediate corrective action to contain the release and to prevent migration offsite. • Pits and/or berms should be constructed around the borehole entry point to contain drilling fluid and return. • Containment equipment, including earth moving equipment, portable pumps, hand tools, sandbags, hay bales, silt fencing, lumber, and vacuum trucks, should be stored and readily available at the drilling site. • Any drilling seepage should be removed using a vacuum truck and then transported to an approved disposal site. 9IPage A Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 III5.4 Excavation and Backfill Excavations, whether they be utility trenches, basement excavations, or footing excavations, should be constructed in accordance with the new OSHA guidelines. The contractor is solely responsible for designing and constructing stable, temporary excavations and should shore, slope, or bench the sides of the excavations as required to maintain stability of both the excavation sides and bottom. The contractor's responsible person, as defined in 29 CFR, Part 1926, should evaluate the soil exposed in the excavations as part of the contractor's safety procedures. In no case should slope height, slope inclination, or excavation depth, including utility trench excavation depth, exceed those specified in all local, state, and federal safety -regulations. • • The soils encountered are consistent with OSHA Class C soils and will not stand vertically in an open excavation below the groundwater level. Soil should not be stockpiled adjacent to excavations unless the stockpile has been included in the analyses of the excavation stability. Excavations below the groundwater level will likely require a combination of sanded wellpoints and pumping from filtered sumps. Any and all excavations should be backfilled with compacted fill. Fill should generally consist of dry fine sand with less than 12 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and be free of rubble, organics, clay, debris and other unsuitable material. Fill should be tested and approved prior to acquisition. Approved sand fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12 inches in thickness and should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D-1557). Prior to beginning compaction, soil moisture contents should be adjusted in order to facilitate proper compaction. A moisture content within 2 percentage points of the optimum indicated by the Modified Proctor Test (ASTM D-1557) is recommended prior to compaction of the fill. 5.5 Dewatering Construction activities should be accomplished in the "dry" with ground water levels maintained at least 1 foot below the deepest portion of any excavation. The groundwater level was encountered at depths of approximately 4 to 12 feet in two of the SPT borings and the Percolation test performed. Therefore, depending on the time of year construction is performed, dewatering may be required for excavations deeper than 4 feet. Dewatering can be accomplished using a sanded wellpoint system supplemented by a gravel bottom layer and pumping from a sump. Actual dewatering means and methods should be the responsibility of the contractor. Groundwater fluctuations will likely occur due to seasonal variations, tidal factors, runoff, and other factors and should be considered when planning earthwork activities. The impact of runoff from adjacent properties, nearby water bodies, and other site-specific conditions which may affect groundwater recharge are beyond the scope of this exploration and should be considered when planning and designing a dewatering system. 10 [Page A Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 5.6 Pipeline Bedding For the open -cut pipe installation, we recommend the pipeline be supported on a bedding layer consisting of at least 6 inches of granular soils meeting the previous requirements for structural fill. Any utilities 3 feet or greater in diameter should be supported on at least 12 inches of structural fill/granular soils. The bedding layer should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the Modified Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D- 1557). 5.7 General Construction Monitoring and Testing Guidelines Prior to initiating compaction operations, we recommend that representative samples of the structural fill material to be used and acceptable exposed in-place soils be collected and tested to determine their compaction and classification characteristics. The maximum dry density, optimum moisture content, gradation and plasticity characteristics should be determined. These tests are needed for compaction quality control of the structural fill and existing soils and to determine if the fill material is acceptable. A representative number of in-place field density testes should be performed in the compacted existing soils and in each lift of structural fill or backfill to confirm that the required degree of compaction has been obtained. We recommend that at least one density test be performed for every lift of backfill and for every 100 lineal feet of trench. 5.8 Lift Station Construction We recommend that steel sheet piles be placed. After excavation inside the sheets to the desired depth without dewatering, tremie methods should be used to form a concrete plug that will resist uplift pressures. After the concrete tremie plug has hardened, the inside of the lift station should be dewatered and the required lift station equipment installed. Soft to very hard limestone was encountered from 20 to 35 feet below existing grades (EL. -8 to -24 feet) in the three borings performed. We understand the proposed bottom of the wet well is 25 feet below existing grades and will likely encounter this limestone formation which may require the use of pneumatic or hydraulic equipment designed for removal of hard rock. The designer may consider designing the lift station to be constructed above the limestone formation to avoid the removal of hard rock. We understand from the plans provided by Stantec, that HDD is also planned to an elevation of EL -15 feet NAVD 88, in order to install a new force main. Any HDD operations performed below EL -8.3 NAVD 88 will likely encounter this limestone formation and may require the use of pneumatic or hydraulic equipment designed for removal of hard rock. The designer may consider alternate forms of force main installation, such as shallow, open - cut methods to avoid this limestone formation. 111Page A • • • Clearwater Lift Station 16 AREHNA Project No, B-20-137 Clearwater, Florida February 23rd, 2021 6.0 BASIS FOR RECOMMENDATIONS The evaluations and recommendations submitted in this report are based upon the data obtained from the soil borings performed at the locations indicated. Regardless of the thoroughness of a geotechnical exploration, there is always a possibility that conditions between borings will be different from those at specific boring locations and that conditions will not be as anticipated by the designers or contractors. In addition, the construction process itself may alter soil conditions. AREHNA is not responsible for the conclusions, opinions or recommendations made by others based on the data presented in this report. The assessment of site environmental conditions or the presence of contaminants in the soil, rock, surface water or groundwater of the site was beyond the scope of this exploration. Any statements in this report regarding odors, staining of soils, or other unusual conditions observed are strictly for the information of Stantec. This report was prepared exclusively for Stantec by AREHNA. The quality of information, conclusions and estimates contained herein is consistent with the level of effort involved in AREHNA's services and based on: i) information available at the time of preparation, ii) data supplied by outside sources and iii) the assumptions, conditions and qualifications set forth in this report. This report is intended to be used by Stantec only. Any other use of, or reliance on, this report by any third party is at that party's sole risk. 12IPage A APPENDIX A USDA and USGS Vicinity Maps Boring Location Plan Soil Boring Profiles Percolation/Exfiltration Test Results Percolation/Exfiltration Test Data Sheet • • • • • • USDA SOIL SURVEY MAP SITE LOCATION REFERENCE: USDA SOIL SURVEY OF PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA TOWNSHIP: 29 S RANGE: 15 E SECTION: 16 0 600 2000 Feet USGS TOPOGRAPHIC MAP SITE LOCATION ti' ri47241. lin tai Ill , twr kir„,,,fe';,, f NI , Pi ., : Esm +� ,,N,4111 `omam ` tl ` iiLet . Clearrreter :. 4 _] I • VII 1W^tmI ;� $Ike,um .-1 ,, atilt h I t r7����1�1ir_ ��O�r - .iff M tri � Ue 1...'9L✓iimR r i�F ����almiati ,resin. �_ , 11 a �. 6 aus^t ' . , ,;ke01e .hI lli, 111 111 b 1 um l Ionia c-7 ;i+i 4 ®l l, �� .t fir afar., 11.11:.!V,tiii i+i r ,; > �, m III l► ,oi dw= :0:601/P3,..intoleriajit'.666„:, x =' "' arre Ilismatailli./ anon! row gin ml MI li ! 7C7it a,. .. ins homakV REFERENCE: "CLEARWATER, FLORIDA" USGS QUADRANGLE MAP TOWNSHIP: 29 S RANGE: 15 E SECTION: 16 0 600 2000 Feet REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTIONS APPROVED PREPARED BY. AREHNAEngir.neering,Inc. Phon• 813.9611.164 I 813.944.4959 Certif.. of Autharivotion No. 3.10 USDA & USGS VICINITY MAPS NAME DATE PROJECT NAME PROJECT NO. SHEET NO. DESIGNED BY: KE 1212020 DRAWN BY: DG 12/2020 CHECKED BY: KE 12/2020 SUPERVISED BY: Kirk M. Eastman, P.E. CLEARWATER LIFT STATION 16 PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA B-20-137 1 \%W►t t ♦ \ENV REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTIONS APPROVED PREPARED BY'. AREHNA Engineering,lnc. 5012 West Lemon Street, 33609 ...flute of Authorization Ho. 2.110 SPT -01 04 PERC-01 A m O e t[ v.d� BORING LOCATION PLAN 0 200 Feet LEGEND • APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF SPT BORING (g) APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF PERCOLATION TEST NAME DATE PROJECT NAME PROJECT NO. SHEET NO. DESIGNED BY: KE DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: DO KE 12/2020 12/2020 1212020 SUPERVISED BY: Kirk M. Eastman, P.E. CLEARWATER LIFT STATION 16 PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA B-20-137 2 • • • • • • ELEVATION IN FEET, NAVD 88 15 10 5 0 5 -10 -15 -20 -25 -200=67 NMC=83 LL=147 P1=68 SPT -01 ELEV. 12.0' 12/23/20 N GNA HA HA 9 18 10 23 50/1 1 50/3 DARK GRAY FINE SAND WITH SILT AND FEW SHELLS, LIMEROCK, AND CLAY POCKETS (SP -SM) [FILL] DARK GRAY FINE SAND WITH SILT, LITTLE CLAY POCKETS AND FEW SHELL (SP -SM) [FILL] MEDIUM DENSE GRAY FINE SAND WITH SOME DEBRIS, ASPHALT, LIMEROCK AND BRICK (SP) [FILL] MEDIUM DENSE DARK GRAY FINE SAND WITH SILT AND MOSTLY CONCRETE DEBRIS (SP -SM) [FILL] MEDIUM DENSE DARK BROWN FINE SAND WITH SILT AND FEW BRICK (SP -SM) VERY STIFF GRAY SILT (MH) MEDIUM DENSE GRAY CLAYEY SAND (SC) NO RECOVERY (ASSUMED VERY HARD TO SOFT LIMESTONE) VERY HARD LIGHT BROWN WEATHERED LIMESTONE BORING TERMINATED AT ELEVATION -23.0 FEET LATITUDE: N 27.9638639 LONGITUDE: W 82.8030452 Soil Profile Notes: 1. The profiles depicted are of a generalized nature to highlight the major subsurface stratification features and material characteristics. The soil profiles include soil description, stratifications and penetration resistances. The stratifications shown on the boring profiles represent the conditions only at the actual boring location. Variations may occur and should be expected between boring locations. The stratifications represent the approximate boundary between subsurface materials and the actual transition may be gradual. 2. Groundwater levels generally fluctuate during periods of prolonged drought and extended rainfall and may be affected by man-made influences. In addition, a seasonal effect will also occur in which higher groundwater levels or temporary perched conditions are normally recorded in rainy seasons. 3. The Boring Locations Presented are Approximate and Based on Hand Held GPS with an Accuracy of +/- 10 Feet. 4. The limestone formation was generally encountered in the borings at a depth of 20 feet below the existing ground surface. HDD and other excavations that are planned to extend 20 feet below the existing ground surface will likely encounter this limestone formation and may require the use of pneumatic or hydraulic equipment designed for the removal of hard rock. SPT -02 ELEV. 6.7' 12/28/20 4.5" ASPHALT AND 3.5" SHELL BASE LIGHT GRAY FINE SAND WITH FEW SHELL AND CLAY POCKETS (SP) LOOSE GRAY FINE SAND WITH SILT AND TRACE TO FEW SHELL (SP -SM) MEDIUM DENSE GRAY FINE SAND WITH TRACE SHELL (SP) LOOSE GRAY CLAYEY SAND (SC) MEDIUM HARD LIGHT BROWN HIGHLY WEATHERED LIMESTONE HARD TO VERY HARD LIGHT BROWN SANDY LIMESTONE AND HIGHLY WEATHERED LIMESTONE BORING TERMINATED AT ELEVATION -23.3 FEET LATITUDE: N 27.965995 LONGITUDE: W 82.803551 PAVEMENT FILL FINE SAND (SP/SP-SM) CLAYEY SAND (SC) IMM IMM LEGEND CLAY (CL/CH) SILT (MH) WEATHERED LIMESTONE LIMESTONE SP UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (ASTM D 2488) GROUP SYMBOL AS DETERMINED BY VISUAL REVIEW AND/OR LABORATORY TESTING SPT -03 ELEV. 6.4' 12/28/20 -200=20 NMC=27 LL=36 P1=18 LOOSE LIGHT GRAY FINE SAND WITH FEW SHELL (SP) VERY LOOSE TO LOOSE GRAY FINE SAND WITH SILT AND TRACE SHELL (SP -SW VERY LOOSE GRAY CLAYEY SAND (SC) FIRM GRAY CLAY (CL) VERY HARD LIGHT BROWN SANDY LIMESTONE BORING TERMINATED AT ELEVATION -23.6 FEET LATITUDE: N 27.967565 LONGITUDE: W 82.803261 GROUNDWATER TABLE AT THE TIME OF DRILLING GNA GROUNDWATER TABLE NOT APPARENT N SPT N -VALUE IN BLOWS/FOOT FOR 12 INCHES OF PENETRATION HA HAND AUGERED TO AVOID UTILITY CONFLICTS AND SAFETY REASONS WH FELL UNDER WEIGHT OF ROD AND HAMMER 50/4 NUMBER OF BLOWS FOR 4 INCHES OF PENETRATION -200 FINES PASSING THE #200 STANDARD SIEVE (%) NMC NATURAL MOISTURE CONTENT (%) LL LIQUID LIMIT (%) PI PLASTICITY INDEX (%) 15 10 5 0 -5 -10 -15 -20 -25 ELEVATION IN FEET, NAVD 88 REVISIONS NO. AUTOMATIC HAMMER GRANULAR MATERIALS. RELATIVE DENSITY SPT N -VALUE (BLOWS/FT.) VERY LOOSE LOOSE MEDIUM DENSE DENSE VERY DENSE LESS THAN 3 3 to 8 81024 24 to 40 GREATER THAN 40 SILTS AND CLAYS SPT N -VALUE CONSISTENCY (BLOWS/FT.) VERY SOFT LESS THAN 1 SOFT FIRM 11o3 3106 STIFF VERY STIFF 6 to 12 12 to 24 HARD GREATER THAN 24 LIMESTONE OPT N -VALUE CONSISTENCY (BLOWS/FT.) SOFT LESS THAN 17 MEDIUM HARD 17 to 41 42 t0 50/6" VERY HARD GREATER THAN 50/6" ELEVATION IN FEET, NAVD 88 REVISIONS NO. DATE DESCRIPTIONS APPROVED PREPARED BY: A AREHNA''.. Engineering,Inc. S012 West lemop, Street, Tampa, R33E09 Phone $19 944 1464 fax Bla 944 49S9 Cert.ficate of Authorleation 28410 SOIL BORING PROFILES NAME DATE PROJECT NAME PROJECT NO. SHEET NO. DESIGNED BY: KE 121203 DRAWN BY: DG 12/2020 CHECKED BY: KE 12/2020 SUPERVISED BY: Klrk M. Eastman, P.E. CLEARWATER LIFT STATION 16 PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA B-20-137 3 AREHNA PROJECT NO. B-20-137 SUMMARY OF EXFILTRATION/ PERCOLATION TEST RESULTS OPEN HOLE CONSTANT HEAD TEST Project Name: CLEARWATER LIFT STATION 16 Date Performed December 23, 2020 Test No. Depth to Grd. Water (ft) Depth to Water during testing (ft) (H2) (ft) Borehole Depth (ft) Casing/ Borehole Diameter (inches) Rate of Flow k, Hydraulic Conductivity (cfs/ft^2-ft. Head): (gpm) (cfs) PERC-01 12.0 5.0 7.0 15 9.0 25.00 0.05570 2.9E-04 AREHNA Engineering, Inc. • • • SFWMD PERCOLATION TEST — CONSTANT HEAD Percolation Test No. PERC-01 Date: 12/23/2020 Project Name: Clearwater Lift Station 16 Project No.: B-20-137 FPID No.: - Driller: J. West Prepared by/ Date: JB / 12/29/2020 Checked by/ Date: AT / 12/4/2020 BOREHOLE GEOMETRY Borehole Casing Borehole Diameter: Diameter: Depth: 9 (inches) Solid Casing Depth: Perforated Casing Depth: Groundwater Depth: (measured from ground 0 (feet) to 0 (feet) 3 (inches) 0 (feet) to 15 (feet) 15 (feet) 12 (feet) surface) PERCOLATION TEST DATA Flushing Period: 10 minutes Groundwater Depth (measured from ground during testing: 5 (feet) surface) TEST RESULTS ' Time (minutes) Meter Reading Time (minutes) Meter Reading Meter Reading (Gallons) Gallons (Accumulated) Meter Reading (Gallons) Gallons (Accumulated) Initial Reading 0 0 8 25 200 1 25 25 9 25 225 2 25 50 10 23 248 3 25 75 11 4 25 100 12 5 25 125 13 6 25 150 14 7 25 175 15 BORING INFORMATION Sample No. Depth (feet) Soil/Rock Description From To 1 0 4 Dark Gray Fine SAND with Silt (SP -SM) 2 4 6 Gray Fine SAND (SP) 3 6 10 Dark Brown/Gray Fine SAND with Silt (SP -SM) 0 4 10 15 Gray SILT (MH) APPENDIX B Laboratory Test Results — Table 1 Recommended Soil Parameters Field and Laboratory Procedures • • • TABLE 1 SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS CLEARWATER LIFT STATION 16 CLEARWATER, FLORIDA AREHNA PROJECT B-20-137 Boring No. Sample Depth (feet) USCS Classification Sieve Analysis (% Passing) Atterberg Limits Natural Moisture Content (A) #200 LL PL PI SPT -01 13.5 - 15.0 MH 67 147 79 68 83 SPT -03 13.5 - 15.0 SC 20 36 18 18 27 • • AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 West Lemon Street Tampa, FL 33609 Project Name: Clearwater Lift Station 16 Project Number: B-20-137 Boring Number: SPT -01 RECOMMENDED WALL SOIL PARAMETERS No. Approx. Depth (feet) Approx. Elevation (NAVD 88) (feet) USCS Soil Type Total Unit Weight (pcf) Submerged Unit Weight (pcf) Internal Friction (deg) Cohesion, Su (psf) Adhesion (psf) Friction Ratio Angle of Wall Friction (Degrees) Earth Pressure Coefficients S/c S Active Passive (Kp) At Rest (Ko) Shear Modulus G (ksi) Steel Concrete Steel Concrete (Ka) 1 10 2 SP -SM 112 49.6 32 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 16.0 16 0.31 3.25 0.47 1.0 2 15 -3 MH 115 52.6 28 0 N/A 0.5 0.47 14.0 13 0.36 2.80 0.53 2.8 3 20 -8 SC 120 57.6 35 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 18.0 18 0.27 3.69 0.43 4.1 4 25 -13 LS 125 62.6 40 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 20.0 20 0.22 4.60 0.36 491.6 5 30 -18 LS 125 62.6 33 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 17.0 17 0.29 3.39 0.46 4.6 6 35 -23 LS 125 62.6 40 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 20.0 20 0.22 4.60 0.36 437.7 7 8 9 BACKFILL: SAND FILL 105 42.6 30 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 15.0 15 0.33 3.00 0.50 0.4 Notes: (1) The tabulated values assume smooth, formed concrete or concrete sheet piling against granular fill, without appreciable cohesion, compacted to the specifications outlined in the Standard Specifications. In addition, friction ratio for steel interface is also provided. The angle of wall friction was determined using Table 3-2 (after Allen, Duncan, and Snacio 1988) of EM 1110-2-2504, prepared by the US Army Corps of Engineers. (2) The above earth pressure coefficient values represent ultimate conditions. Therefore, appropriate factor of safety should be applied for design. (3) If passive pressures are determined using Coulomb Method, the wall friction should to be reduced and not exceed more than 1/3 the soil friction angle (Reference: FHWA NHA-07-071, page 3-21). (4) Compacted fill placed above the existing grade behind the retaining wall. (5) Rock with N (manual) less or equal to 10 modelled as cohesionless (SP). (6) Rock with N (manual) between 11 to 25 was modelled as cohesionless (GW). • • • AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 West Lemon Street Tampa, FL 33609 Project Name: Clearwater Lift Station 16 Project Number: B-20-137 Boring Number: SPT -02 • • RECOMMENDED WALL SOIL PARAMETERS No. Approx. Depth (feet) Approx. Elevation (NAVD 88) (feet) USCS Soil Type Total Unit Weight (pcf) Submerged Unit Weight (pcf) Internal Friction iliSu (deg) Cohesion, (psf) Adhesion (psf) Friction Ratio Angle of Wall Friction (Degrees) Earth Pressure Coefficients 8/4 S Active Passive (Kp) At Rest (Ko) Shear Modulus G (ksi) Steel Concrete Steel Concrete (Ka) 1 10 -3.3 SP -SM 112 49.6 32 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 16.0 16 0.31 3.25 0.47 1.0 2 15 -8.3 SC 102 39.6 29 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 15.0 15 0.35 2.88 0.52 0.7 3 20 -13.3 LS 125 62.6 39 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 20.0 20 0.23 4.40 0.37 0.7 4 30 -23.3 LS 125 62.6 40 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 20.0 20 0.22 4.60 0.36 3.4 5 6 7 8 9 BACKFILL: SAND FILL 105 42.6 30 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 15.0 15 0.33 3.00 0.50 0.4 Notes: (1) The tabulated values assume smooth, formed concrete or concrete sheet piling against granular fill, without appreciable cohesion, compacted to the specifications outlined in the Standard Specifications. In addition, friction ratio for steel interface is also provided. The angle of wall friction was determined using Table 3-2 (after Allen, Duncan, and Snacio 1988) of EM 1110-2-2504, prepared by the US Army Corps of Engineers. (2) The above earth pressure coefficient values represent ultimate conditions. Therefore, appropriate factor of safety should be applied for design. (3) If passive pressures are determined using Coulomb Method, the wall friction should to be reduced and not exceed more than 1/3 the soil friction angle (Reference: FHWA NHA-07-071, (4) Compacted fill placed above the existing grade behind the retaining wall. (5) Rock with N (manual) less or equal to 10 modelled as cohesionless (SP). (6) Rock with N (manual) between 11 to 25 was modelled as cohesionless (GW). 60 50 AREHNA Engineering, Inc. 5012 West Lemon Street Tampa, FL 33609 Project Name: Clearwater Lift Station 16 Project Number: B-20-137 Boring Number: SPT -03 RECOMMENDED WALL SOIL PARAMETERS No. Approx. Depth (feet) Approx. Elevation (NAVD 88) (feet) USCS Soil Type Total Unit Weight (pcf) Submerged Unit Weight (pcf) Internal Friction (deg) Cohesion, Su (psf) Adhesion (psf) Friction Ratio Angle of Wall Friction (Degrees) Earth Pressure Coefficients 6/O S Active Passive (Kp) At Rest (Ko) Shear Modulus G (ksi) Steel Concrete Steel Concrete (Ka) 1 10 -3.6 SP -SM 102 39.6 29 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 15.0 15 0.35 2.88 0.52 0.3 2 15 -8.6 SC 102 39.6 28 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 14.0 14 0.36 2.77 0.53 0.0 3 20 -13.6 CL 120 57.6 0 650 554 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.2 4 30 -23.6 LS 125 62.6 40 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 20.0 20 0.22 4.60 0.36 3.4 5 6 7 8 9 BACKFILL: SAND FILL 105 42.6 30 0 N/A 0.5 0.5 15.0 15 0.33 3.00 0.50 0.4 Notes: (1) The tabulated values assume smooth, formed concrete or concrete sheet piling against granular fill, without appreciable cohesion, compacted to the specifications outlined in the Standard Specifications. In addition, friction ratio for steel interface is also provided. The angle of wall friction was determined using Table 3-2 (after Allen, Duncan, and Snacio 1988) of EM 1110-2-2504, prepared by the US Army Corps of Engineers. (2) The above earth pressure coefficient values represent ultimate conditions. Therefore, appropriate factor of safety should be applied for design. (3) If passive pressures are determined using Coulomb Method, the wall friction should to be reduced and not exceed more than 1/3 the soil friction angle (Reference: FHWA NHA-07-071, page 3-21). (4) Compacted fill placed above the existing grade behind the retaining wall. (5) Rock with N (manual) less or equal to 10 modelled as cohesionless (SP). (6) Rock with N (manual) between 11 to 25 was modelled as cohesionless (GW). • • • • • FIELD PROCEDURES Standard Penetration Test (SPT) Borings The SPT borings are performed in general accordance with ASTM D-1586, "Penetration Test and Split -Barrel Sampling of Soils." A rotary drilling process is used and bentonite drilling fluid is circulated in the boreholes to stabilize the sides and flush the cuttings. At regular intervals, the drilling tools are removed and soil samples are obtained with a standard 2 -feet long, 2 -inch diameter split -tube sampler. The sampler is first seated 6 inches and then driven an additional foot with blows of a 140 -pound hammer falling under its own weight a distance of 30 inches. The number of hammer blows required to drive the sampler the final foot is designated the "Penetration Resistance." The penetration resistance, when properly interpreted, is an index to the soil strength and density. Constant Head Percolation/Exfiltration Test Constant Head percolation/exfiltration tests are performed in accordance with the South Florida Water Management District (SFWMD) "Usual Open -Hole" constant head method. After drilling to the desired depth, the 3 -inch casing is driven into the soil. Water is added during the testing (10 minutes) to maintain a constant head. Water measurements are recorded every minute during the test. A LABORATORY PROCEDURES Water Content The water content is the ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the weight of water in a given mass of soil to the weight of the solid particles. This test is conducted in general accordance with FM 1-T265. Atterberg Limits (Plasticity) A soil's Plasticity Index (PI) is the numerical difference between the Liquid Limit (LL) and the Plastic limit (PL). The LL is the moisture content at which the soil will flow as a heavy viscous fluid and is determined in general accordance with ASTM D-4318. The PL is the moisture content at which the soil begins to crumble when rolled into a small thread and is also determined in general accordance with FM 1-T 90. Fines Content In this test, the sample is dried and then washed over a No. 200 mesh sieve. The percentage of soil by weight passing the sieve is the percentage of fines or portion of the sample in the silt and clay size range. This test is conducted in general accordance with ASTM D-1140. A • • s • • SECTION V - Contract Documents Bond No.: 313671X PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (I) This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections (2) and (10). Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, "Before commencing the work or before recommencing the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified copy of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the contractor has complied with this paragraph." CONTRACTOR TLC Diversified, Inc. 2719 17th Street East Palmetto FL 34221 941 722-0621 SURETY OWNER Westfield Insurance Company P. O. Box 5001 Westfield Center, OH 44251 330-887-0101 City of Clearwater Public Works 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 (727) 562-4750 PROJECT NAME: Lift Station 16 Pierce St. Project PROJECT NO.: 20 -0008 -UT PROJECT DESCRIPTION: The WORK of this Contract comprises the construction of a new wastewater lift station to replace the existing LS -16 facilities. In general, the WORK includes: 1. Demolition of the existing LS -16 facilities. This includes the existing wetwell, valve vaults, concrete slab, valves, piping, conduits/cables, electrical/control panels, light fixtures, instrumentation/control equipment, fencing, etc. as shown in the Contract Documents. 2. Site civil work associated with the WORK, including site preparation grading, erosion control, excavation and backfill materials. Modifications to manholes and bypass pumping as shown in the Contract Documents as well as restoration work of pervious and impervious areas affected by the construction activities. 3. Installation of a new 15 -ft diameter, cast in place wetwell with three submersible, solids handling pumps, inclusive of all accessories and appurtenances as shown in the Contract Documents. The wetwell rim shall be installed at elevation 15.0 -ft. this includes commissioning and start up services including individual equipment startup and testing; piping system testing; providing the services of manufacturer field technician and representatives to provide services for installation, startup, and training; coordination with the OWNER, ENGINEER, other CONTRACTORS, and regulatory agencies. SECTION V Page 1 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 SECTION V — Contract Documents 4. Furnish and install cable, conduits, light fixtures, electrical panels, transformer(s), automatic transfer switch, lightning protection system and equipment (including new natural gas backup generator), flow meter, pressure gauge, level transducers, floats, telemetry control units (TCU), and control panels shown in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall also perform a short circuit and coordination study as part to the WORK. Electrical panels shall be installed at elevation 17.0 -ft. The existing communications antenna should also be relocated as part of this work. 5. Furnish and install elevated structures, retaining walls and platforms to service and maintain the wetwell, electrical, control and instrumentation equipment as shown in the Contract Documents. 6. Protection, removal, replacement and overall improvements of landscape features at the site. This includes furnish and installation of irrigation system, trees, plants and shrubs as shown in the Contract Documents 7. Furnish and install extruded aluminum protective cover, inclusive of fixed, extruded aluminum louvers and structural elements as show in the Contract Documents. The structural components of the protective cover shall be coordinate such as it will be supported from structural platform components, but not be integral to these components. This Item is item is classified as a BID ALTERNATE. • The WORK is located at the immediately East of the existing LS -16 facilities, approximately 600 - ft West of the intersection of S Osceola Ave and Pierce St., across from the public parking lot located in 220 Pierce St.in Clearwater, FL. BY THIS BOND, We, TLC Diversified, Inc , as Contractor, and Westfield Insurance Company, a corporation, as Surety, are bound to the City of Clearwater, Florida, herein called Owner, in the sum of $7,933,000, for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Contractor: 1. Performs the contract dated , between Contractor and Owner for construction of Lift Station 16 Pierce St the contract documents being made a part of this bond by reference (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Proposal, Contract, Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions, Plans, Technical Specifications and Appendix, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for), at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and 2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Contractor with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Contractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and SECTION V Page 2 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 • SECTION V — Contract Documents Bond No.: 313671X PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (2) 3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Contractor under the contract; and 4. To the limits of § 725.06(2), Florida Statutes, shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, their officers and employees, from liabilities, damages, losses and costs, including, but not limited to, reasonable attorney's fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of Contractor and persons employed or utilized by Contractor in the performance of the construction contract; and 5. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise, it remains in full force. 6. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Section 255.05(2), Florida Statutes. 7. Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond, and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this day of , 2023 . • (If sole Ownership or Partnership, two (2) Witnesses required). (If Corporation, Secretary only will attest and affix seal). • WITNESS: Corporate Secretor Witness Print Name: DeAnna Justus/Secretary .(affix Corporate seal) SECTION V TLC Diversified, Inc By: Title: Dalas Lamberson Print Name: President WITNESS: N/A We are Corporation Print Name: N/A We are Corporation Westfield Al ance Com . (Corpora 1))1/ NEY-l� Print Name: Don Ia an By: e Attorne Florida Resident Ag (affix corporate seal) (Powe. of Attorney must b Page 3 of 19 ched) uiries: 407-330-3990 Updated: 1/10/2023 General Power of Attorney CERTIFIED COPY POWER NO. 0994592 00 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co. Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, Ohio Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a "Company" and collectively as "Companies," duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these presents make, constitute and appoint DON BRAMLAGE, LAURA D. MOSHOLDER, EDWARD M. CLARK, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY of SANFORD and State of FL its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other instruments or contracts of suretyship LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS. and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: The Attorney -in -Fact. may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary." "Be it Further Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." (Each adopted at a meeting held on February 8, 2000). In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their National Surety Leader and Senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 20th day of FEBRUARY A.D., 2020 . ,...I..WIp, Corporate,,.•'asUAq/�c4 Seals Affixed � 4:7� •ICS ••\071 } SEAL it State of Ohio County of Medina ss.: WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY r t f! - i. By Gary W. Stumper, National Surety Leader and Senior Executive On this 20th day of FEBRUARY A.D., 2020 , before me personally came Gary W. Stumper to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Hartford, CT; that he is National Surety Leader and Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above instrument: that he knows the seals of said Companies: that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals: that they were so affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies: and that he signed his name thereto by like order. Notarial Seal Affixed State of Ohio 1 N 4.TE.OFO. County of Medina ss.: ",.M.INI.,,,.•H, co .1U!iiSF..`; dPage41/60,-- David A. Kotnik, Attorney at Law, Notary Public My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code) 1, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still in full force and effect: and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this day of A.D., 2023 ...... 1(7Nl... i.6' . / -r: SEAL IP BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02) zi OPERTERE013 :2r: • 11348 ° e •• ° A Frank A. Carrino, Secretary 44-4.40'.40 Secrmetar,,,, •'.�c ` iii S/11.117 fi1� 0 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this day of QLI , 2093 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereiner designated as the "City", and TLC Diversified Inc of the City of Palmetto County of Manatee and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". [Or, if out of state:] This CONTRACT made and entered into thisN/A day of N/A , 20 by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City", and N/A , a/an N/A (State) Corporation authorized to do business in the State of Florida, of the City of N/A County of N/A and State of N/A , hereinafter designated as the "Contractor". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: PROJECT NAME: Lift Station 16 Pierce St. Project PROJECT NO.: 20 -0008 -UT in the amount of $ $7,933,000 In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders,,general conditions, technical specifications, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. SECTION V Page 4 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (2) THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES, TO THE LIMITS OF § 725.06(2). In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub -contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the public construction bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such public construction bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. SECTION V Page 5 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (3) In addition to all other contract requirements as provided by law, the contractor executing this agreement agrees to comply with public records law. IF THE CONTRACTOR HAS QUESTIONS REGARDING THE APPLICATION OF CHAPTER 119, FLORIDA STATUTES, THE CONTRACTORS DUTY TO PROVIDE PUBLIC RECORDS RELATING TO THIS CONTRACT. CONTACT THE CUSTODIAN OF PUBLIC RECORDS, Rosemarie Call, City Clerk, AT Rosemarie.Call@myclearwater.com, 727-562-4092, 600 Cleveland St. Clearwater, FL 33756. The contractor's agreement to comply with public records law applies specifically to: a) Keep and maintain public records required by the City of Clearwater (hereinafter "public agency") to perform the service being provided by the contractor hereunder. b) Upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, provide the public agency with a copy of the requested records or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided for in Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, as may be amended from time to time, or as otherwise provided by law. c) Ensure that the public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law for the duration of the contract term and following completion of the contract if the contractor does not transfer the records to the public agency. d) Upon completion of the contract, transfer, at no cost, to the public agency all public records in possession of the contractor or keep and maintain public records required by the public agency to perform the service. If the contractor transfers all public records to the public agency upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. If the contractor keeps and maintains public records upon completion of the contract, the contractor shall meet all applicable requirements for retaining public records. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency, upon request from the public agency's custodian of public records, in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the public agency. e) A request to inspect or copy public records relating to a public agency's contract for services must be made directly to the public agency. If the public agency does not possess the requested records, the public agency shall immediately notify the contractor of the request and the contractor must provide the records to the public agency or allow the records to be inspected or copied within a reasonable time. f) The contractor hereby acknowledges and agrees that if the contractor does not comply with the public agency's request for records, the public agency shall enforce the contract provisions in accordance with the contract. g) A contractor who fails to provide the public records to the public agency within a reasonable time may be subiect to penalties under Section 119.10, Florida Statutes. h) If a civil action is filed against a contractor to compel production of public records relating to a public agency's contract for services, the court shall assess and award against the contractor the reasonable costs of enforcement, including reasonable attorney fees, if: 1. The court determines that the contractor unlawfully refused to comply with the public records request within a reasonable time; and SECTION V Page 6 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 • • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONTRACT (4) 2. At least 8 business days before filing the action, the plaintiff provided written notice of the public records request, including a statement that the contractor has not complied with the request, to the public agency and to the contractor. i) A notice complies with subparagraph (h)2. if it is sent to the public agency's custodian of public records and to the contractor at the contractor's address listed on its contract with the public agency or to the contractor's registered agent. Such notices must be sent by common carrier delivery service or by registered, Global Express Guaranteed, or certified mail, with postage or shipping paid by the sender and with evidence of delivery, which may be in an electronic format. j) A contractor who complies with a public records request within 8 business days after the notice is sent is not liable for the reasonable costs of enforcement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the ageement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: JennifeYPoirrier City Manager Countersigned: By: Brian Aungst Interim Mayor Contractor must indicate whether: X Corporation, Partnership, Attest: ' Rosemarie Call City Clerk Ap • - as to f* Oa("< Owen Kohler Assistant City Attorney Company, or TLC Diversified, Inc. (Contractor) Individual Title: President The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 7 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 • SECTION V — Contract Documents CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT TO OWNER: City of Clearwater PROJECT NAME: Lift Station 16 Pierce St. Project Public Utilities PROJECT NO.: 20 -0008 -UT 100 S. Myrtle Ave. CONTRACT DATE: [ 1 Clearwater, FL 33756 BOND NO.: [ , recorded in O.R. Book [ ], Page [ 1, of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida. CONTRACTOR: TLC Diversified, Inc. Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the: Westfield Insurance Company PO Box 5001 Westfield, OH 44251 on bond of ,SURETY, TLC Diversified, Inc. 271917`" St E • Palmetto, FL 34221 ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to City of Clearwater Public Utilities 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of Attest: (Seal): ,OWNER, (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) (Printed name and title) SECTION V Page 8 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 • • • SECTION V —Contract Documents D ORIGINAL PROPOSAL/BID BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, TLC Diversified, Inc. as Contractor, and Westfield Insurance Company as Surety, whose address is P. 0. Box 5001, Westfield Center, OH 44251 are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Te n Percent Dollars ($_.._10%._...._... _._._..____.....,.._ (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of TLC Diversified, Inc. as Contractor, and Westfield Insurance Comanty as Surety, for work specified as: Lift Station 16 Pierce Street / Protect # 20 -0008 -UT all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Public Construction Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal/Bid Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Principal must indicate whether: X Corporation, Partnership, Company, or Individual Signed this 22nd day of March . 2023 , . Contractor Principal TLC Diversified.. Inc. By: Eric Macek/VP of Pre -Construction Title Westfi urance Co. s any Surety BYE,,.. Surety Don B, Attorney -In -Fa Floe. . ' ' sident Agent - I • u' ies:;407-330-3990 d hi ;title; bind the• The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his aut Corporation — provide Affidavit. SECTION V Page 9 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 General Power •of Attorney • • CERTIFIED COPY POWER NO. 0994592 00 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co. Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, Ohio Know All Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, corporations, hereinafter referred to individually as a "Company" and collectively as "Companies," duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and having its principal office in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these presents make, constitute and appoint DON BRAMLAGE, LAURA D. MOSHOLDER, EDWARD M. CLARK, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY of SANFORD and State of FL its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name, place and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bonds, recognizances, undertakings, or other instruments or contracts of suretyship - LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE GUARANTEE, OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONDS. and to bind any of the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of the applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that the said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in the premises. Said appointment is made under and by authority of the following resolution adopted by the Board of Directors of each of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "Be It Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity & Surety Operations Executive or other Executive shall be and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint any one or more suitable persons as Attorney(s)-in-Fact to represent and act for and on behalf of the Company subject to the following provisions: The Attorney -in -Fact. may be given full power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognizances, contracts, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all notices and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and -any such instruments so executed by any such Attorney -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary." "Be it Further Resolved, that the signature of any such designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any power of attorney or any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any power of attorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is attached." (Each adopted at a meeting held on February 8, 2000). In Witness Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their National Surety Leader and Senior Executive and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed this 20th day of FEBRUARY A.,:,,,,,,0„.,,,,,,70,74,,,,,.,„ Corporate r�•'a.......................... ...... �,••'•( Seals /44(►F.i �a SG:. Affixed lir/o ' � •7 : •••'f 1. '3,‘,„), rq +. State of Ohio County of Medina ss.: Gary W. ,Stumper, NationSenior alturety Leader and WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY On this 20th day of FEBRUARY A.D., 2020 , before me personally came Gary W. Stumper to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say, that he resides in Hartford, CT; that he is National Surety Leader and Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above instrument: that he knows the seals of said Companies; that the seals affixed to said instrument are such corporate seals; that they were so affixed by order of the Boards of Directors of said Companies: and that he signed his name thereto by like order. Notarial Seal Affixed NN..N.MIy1N, ..**. ii.SF • State of Ohio X tfl 41/1.41 o County of Medina ss.: T� �1' s re0Fo I. Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is still in full force and effect: and furthermore, the resolutions of the Boards of Directors, set out in the Power of Attorney are in full force and effect. In Witness Whereof, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this 22nd day of March A.D., 2023 ,(3)/te,d/d0A- David A. Kotnik, Attorney at Law, Notary Public My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio Revised Code) BPOAC2 (combined) (06-02) ;t: u'MTEREi\ 3 V, 184iH1121= 4AA..). Frank A. Carrino, Secretary Secretary • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents A} FIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE DeAnna Justus being duly sworn, deposes and says Secretary of ._...,TLC Diversified. Inc.,_,_______ a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, principal office at: 2719 17th Street East (Street & Number) Palmetto (City) Manatee (County) that he/she is and having its Affiant further says that she is familiar with the records, minute books and TLC Diversified, Inc. FL 34221 (State) by-laws of (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Eric Macek (Officer's Name) is VP of Pre -Construction (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for TLC Diversified Inc.. or said corporation by virtue of Resolution of the Board of Directors on Februa 05 2022 (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of Board of Directors. If by Resolution give date of adoption). Sworn to before me this 22nd day of LINDA KAY MOORE .�:n Notary Public - State of Florida Commission # GG 963661 My Comm. Expires Mar 20, 2024 Bonded through National Notary Assn. SECTION V DeAnna Justus/Secretary Affiant Linda Kay Moore Type/print/stamp name of Notary Notary Public: GG 963661 Title or rank, and Serial No., if any Page 10 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 SECTION V — Contract Documents • NON -COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE ) Eric Macek being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is Vice President of Pre -Construction of TLC Diversified, Inc. the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. Affiant Eric Macek/VP of Pre -Construction • Sworn to and subscribed before me this 22nd day of March , 20 23 . • '�a�v nps', LINDA KAY MOORE -' Notary Public - State of Florida a Commission fi GO 963661 o,,r+.2 My Comm. Expires Mar 20, 2024 Bonded through Nation:; Notary Assn. SECTION V Page 11 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 • • • SECTION V —Contract Documents PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for Lift Station 16 Pierce St. Project (20 -0008 -UT) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked Lift Station 16 Pierce St. Project (20 -0008 -UT) Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Public Construction Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. SECTION V Page 12 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 • • • SECTION V —Contract Documents PROPOSAL (2) Attached hereto is a bond or ixertifieciocilectoom bid bond Bim, for the sum of Ten Percent ($ 10% ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub -contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: Dalas Lamberson/President 303 Ocala Road, Belleair, FL 33756 DeAnna Justus/Secretary 2304 37th Avenue East, Bradenton, FL 34208 Signature of Bidder: X 1-4-7 �r Eric Macek/VP of Pre -Construction The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: TLC Diversified, Inc. By: Eric Macek Title: Company Legal Name: TLC Diversified, Inc. Doing Business As (if different than above): N/A VP of Pre-Construcion Business Address of Bidder: 2719 17th Street East City and State: Phone: (941) 722-0621 Palmetto, FL Zip Code 34221 Dated at Palmetto, FL Email Address:dlamberson@ticdiv.com AND emacek@ticdiv.com , this 22nd day of March , A.D., 2023. State of Incorporation is Florida SECTION V Page 13 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 SECTION V — Contract Documents . CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET • • PROJECT: Lift Station 16 Pierce St. Project (20 -0008 -UT) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: 02/16/2023 Addendum No. 2 Date: 02/24/2023 Addendum No. 3 Date: 03/09/2023 Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: Date: TLC Diversified, Inc. (Name of Bidder) X (Signature of Officer) Eric Macek/VP of Pre -Construction (Title of Officer) March 22, 2023 (Date) SECTION V Page 14 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 SECTION V — Contract Documents • BIDDER'S PROPOSAL • PROJECT: Lift Station 16 Pierce St. Project (20 -0008 -UT) CONTRACTOR: TLC Diversified, Inc. BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ 913,C)), CO (Numbers) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: 5r) .)-11 / I I c.) 1)14Mq l t VAOL 4Oj 1) r !/►rN u Dtrawl Mo/c (Words) SECTION V Page 15 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 BID ITEMS UNIT QTY PRICE AMOUNT 1 Demolition - Demolition of the existing LS -16 facilities. This includes the existing wetwell, valve vaults, concrete slab, valves, piping, conduits/cables, electrical/control panels, light fixtures, instrumentation/control equipment, fencing, etc. as shown in the Contract Documents. LS 1 A I81iwo $ 131/ 000 2 Site civil - Site civil work associated with the WORK, including site preparation grading, erosion control, excavation and backfill materials. Modifications to manholes and bypass pumping as shown in the Contract Documents as well as restoration work of pervious and impervious areas affected by the construction activities. LS 1 1j 232 $232/°°0 3 New Lift Station - Installation of a new 15 -ft diameter, cast in place wetwell with three submersible, solids handling pumps, inclusive of all accessories and appurtenances as shown in the Contract Documents. The wetwell rim shall be installed at elevation 15.0 -ft. this includes commissioning and start up services including individual equipment startup and testing, piping system testing, providing the services of manufacturer field technician and representatives to provide services for installation, startup, and training, coordination with the OWNER, ENGINEER, other CONTRACTORS, and regulatory agencies. LS 1 440g2 $56g2/o05 SECTION V Page 15 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 • • • SECTION V — Contract Documents 4 Electrical Work - Furnish and install cable, conduits, light fixtures, electrical panels, transformer(s), automatic transfer switch, lightning protection system and equipment (including new natural gas backup generator), flow meter, pressure gauge, level transducers, floats, telemetry control units (TCU), and control panels shown in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall also perform a short circuit and coordination study as part to the WORK. Electrical panels shall be installed at elevation 17.0 -ft. The existing communications antenna should also be relocated as part of this work. LS$1( 1 12NCM 0(7, COD 5 Structural Work - Furnish and install elevated structures, retaining walls and platforms to service and maintain the wetwell, electrical, control and instrumentation equipment as shown in the Contract Documents. LS 1 245lcrza $i66,ca) 6 Landscape Work - Protection, removal, replacement, and overall improvements of landscape features at the site. This includes furnish and installation of irrigation system, trees, grasses, plants, and shrubs as shown in the Contract Documents. LS 1 4 31, ooc $ 3 I, cco SUBTOTAL $ &,6140, Ci1D 10% CONTINGENCY 1 $69-44r6 $'7, 654,0 Bid Alternate No. 1 Aluminum Canopy Work - Furnish and install extruded aluminum protective cover, inclusive of fixed, extruded aluminum louvers and structural elements as show in the Contract Documents. The structural components of the protective cover shall be coordinate such as it will be supported from structural platform components, but not be integral to these components. LS 1 42,77,000 $-477 coo SUBTOTAL BID ALTERNATE NO.1 $21771 ow TOTAL CONTRACT $ rj�4133.6x) Grand Total $'1,933,.00a THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SECTION V Page 16 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 SECTION V — Contract Documents • THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE COPIES OF A CURRENT CONTRACTOR LICENSE/REGISTRATION WITH THE STATE OF FLORIDA AND PINELLAS COUNTY IN THE BID RESPONSE. • • SECTION V Page 17 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 SECTION V —Contract Documents 111 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION HI, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. • • The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Authorized Signature Eric Macek Printed Name VP of Pre -Construction Title TLC Diversified, Inc. Name of Entity/Corporation STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 22nd day of March 20 23 , by Eric Macek (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the VP of Pre -Construction (title) of TLC Diversified, Inc. (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein Eric Macek/VP of TLC , or produced a stype of identification) as ideii,1fication, and wh. • . did not take an oath. LINDA KAY MOORE Notary Public - State of Florida Commission A GG 963661 My Comm. Expires Mar 20, 2024 Bonded through National Notary Assn. . My Commission Expires: March 20, 2024 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SECTION V Linda Kay Moore Printed Name Page 18 of 19 Updated: 1/10/2023 SECTION V — Contract Documents • SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES THAT BOYCOTT ISRAEL LIST CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION HI, ITEM 25, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORMAS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. • • The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel; and 3. "Boycott Israel" or "boycott of Israel" means refusing to deal, terminating business activities, or taking other actions to limit commercial relations with Israel, or persons or entities doing business in Israel or in Israeli -controlled territories, in a discriminatory manner. A statement by a company that it is participating in a boycott of Israel, or that it has initiated a boycott in response to a request for a boycott of Israel or in compliance with, or in furtherance of, calls for a boycott of Israel, may be considered as evidence that a company is participating in a boycott of Israel; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies that Boycott Israel List, or engaged in a boycott of Israel. X14 Authorized Signature Eric Macek Printed Name VP of Pre -Construction Title TLC Diversified, Inc. Name of Entity/Corporation STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 22nd day of March 20 23 , by Eric Macek (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the VP of Pre -Construction (title) of TLC Diversified, Inc. (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein Eric MacekNP of TLC , or produced a e, of identification) as ide; tifieation, and wh,Iid/did not take an oath. a{?y- LINDA KAY MOORE Notary Public - State of Florida Commi o n Y 3661 My Comm. Expires sion A G ExpireMar 20, 2024 Bonded through National Notary Assn. My Commission Expires: March 20, 2024 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SECTION V Pub Printed Name Page 19 of 19 Linda Kay Moore Updated: 1/10/2023 APPENDIX — FORMS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION VERIFICATION OF EMPLOYMENT ELIGIBILITY FORM • PER FLORIDA STATUTE 448.095, CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS MUST REGISTER WITH AND USE THE E -VERIFY SYSTEM TO VERIFY THE WORK AUTHORIZATION STATUS OF ALL NEWLY HIRED EMPLOYEES. THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID/PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The Contractor and its Subcontractors are aware of the requirements of Florida Statute 448.095. 2. The Contractor and its Subcontractors are registered with and using the E -Verify system to verify the work authorization status of newly hired employees. 3. The Contractor will not enter into a contract with any Subcontractor unless each party to the contract registers with and uses the E -Verify system. 4. The Subcontractor will provide the Contractor with an affidavit stating that the Subcontractor does not employ, contract with, or subcontract with unauthorized alien. 5. The Contractor must maintain a copy of such affidavit. 6. The City may terminate this Contract on the good faith belief that the Contractor or its Subcontractors knowingly violated Florida Statutes 448.09(1) or 448.095(2)(c). 7. If this Contract is terminated pursuant to Florida Statute 448.095(2)(c), the Contractor may not be awarded a public contract for at least 1 year after the date on which this Contract was terminated. 8. The Contractor is liable for any additional cost incurred by the City as a result of the termination of this Contract. Authorized Eric Macek Printed Name VP of Pre -Construction Title TLC Diversified, Inc. Name of Entity/Corporation STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me by means of El physical presence or ❑ online notarization on, this 22nd day of March , 2023 , by Eric Macek (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the VP of Pre -Construction (title) of (name of corporation/entity), personally known X , or (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not take TLC Diversified, Inc. produced N/A an oath. LINDA KAY MOORE Notary Public - State of Florida Commission # GG 963661 My Comm. Expires Mar 20, 2024 Bonded through National Notary Assr. • My Commission Expires: March 20, 2024 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE APPENDIX ota Linda Ka ' Moore Printed Name 1 Updated 12/3/2020 E Company ID Number:378981 Client Company ID Number:1853660 Information Required for the E -Verify Program information relating to your Company: Company Name TLC Diversified, Inc. Company Facility Address 2719 17th St E Palmetto, FL 34221 Company Alternate Address 2719 17th St E Palmetto, FL 34221 County or Parish Manatee Employer Identification Number 59-2513308 North American Industry Classification Systems Code Construction Of Buildings (236) Parent Company Number of Employees 20 to 99 Number of Sites Verified for 1 Page 15 of 17 I E -Verify MOU for Employers Using a Web Services Employer Agent I Revision Date 06/01/13 EVenly Company ID Number:378981 Client Company ID Number:1853660 Are you verifying for more than 1 site? If yes, please provide the number of sites verified for in each State: Page 16 of 17 I E -Verify MOU for Employers Using a Web Services Employer Agent I Revision Date 06/01/13 EVerIfy Company ID Number:378981 Client Company ID Number:1853660 Information relating to the Program Administrator(s) for your Company on policy questions or operational problems: Name Lauren McGovern Phone Number (941) 722-0621 Fax Number Email Address lmcgovem@ticdiv.com Page 17 of 17 i E -Verify MOU for Employers Using a Web Services Employer Agent I Revision Date 06/01/13 I-CUC053963 Lastsberson, 271917th Street East Palmas°. FL 34221 • • LICENSING BOARD THIS aIRTVERS THAT 11 DHA /LC Di+witelu8 Le IMAM ono I.0 10tl263 HAS MAD ISl1I8R LION= AHD PROOFOt+RBQUlRM UABIL l Y AND WOwGEIRS't ATION INSUBANCE WITH 1118 BOARD. D4 woo STANDING urni. LLL �1, 3123 DATE OP ISSUANLTr W17/= I-CGC041816 lattltemott, Marston 2719 17th Street East Palmetto, FL 34221 • • PINELLAS COUNTY CONSTRUCTION L1(>Ei BOARD THIS CERTIFIES THAT Montan Lbw DBA 'LC DIvoiNkii be STATE CERT 0 I-CG(I471116 HAS FLED HIS 8R-wowAND PROOF OF REQUIRED LIABILITY At D*MEOW CONMINSATION INSURANCE WITII THIS BOARD. IN GOOD STANDING UNTIL Septswaker 30.2 DAM OPISSUA CS 19i274033 • phase cd out &eo.0 along lines Ron DeSantis, Governor Melanie S. Griffin, Secretary ba STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTIOENSING BOARD THE GENERAL C PROVISI ED UNDER THE TUTES Mt 01 , ANEW JIMiterlh. li."..7:1" --Iv! i I 1 ......0.• '-'6,,,,,,..4/...,•••••41,"‘" i • iil h iii !_ .� �` K I 10,. 1•;°'M:,. . i, ..w. i it i \ ! ✓ t1Y,{i►f . 14,?.1t .,} # p.' -- . t 1 „%/«fIt• . LIC t, f!' 816 EXPIRATION DATE: AUGUST 31, 2024 Always verify licenses online at MyFloridaLicense.com Do not alter this document in any form. This is your license. It is unlawful for anyone other than the licensee to use this document. Ron DeSantis, Governor Melanie S. Griffin, Secretary STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF BUSINESS AND PROFESSIONAL REGULATION CONSTRUCTIO ENSING BOARD THE UNDERGROUND UTI"' `. �.�•:"•rl��•{.► a' IS CERTIFIED UNDER THE PROVISI TUTES • i.w %; `k,4,4.iiii.:tillp, - • . M tle • TI 1 • ik r EXPIRATION DATE: AUGUST 31, 2024 Always verify licenses online at MyFloridaLicense.com This is your license. It is unlawful for anyone other than the licensee to use this document. • • ACORD,. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATEDNYYY) 07/31 /3112 /2023 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES VELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED EPRESENTATNE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer any rights to the certificate holder In Ileu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER McGriff Insurance Services 12485 28th Street N 3rd Floor St Petersburg, FL 33716 727 823-5551 CONTACT Theresa Cerf NAME: PHONE ). 727 823-5551 FAX , No 727-894.3339 AooRess: Theresa.Cerf@mcgriff.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIL • INSURER A : National Fire Insurance Co of Hartford 20478 INSURED TLC Diversified, Inc. 2719 17th St E Palmetto, FL 34221 INSURER s : The Continental Insurance Company 35289 INSURER c : AXA XL America 02423 Brad efleld Employers insurance Company INSURER D: 9P Y 10701 INSURER E Travelers Insurance Company 31194 INSURER F : CLAIMS -MADE FICATE NUMBER: 32659841 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. L7 R TYPE OF INSURANCE NSR ADDL UBR SWVD POLICY NUMBER (M1M/LDICYDIYYYY) (MMM/DD/YYYY) LIMITS A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY X X 7036909933 04/01/2023 04/01/2024 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 $100,000 $15,000 PREMISES (EaENcurrence) CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) Contractual Liabilit PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE POLICY OTHER: X JECTT LIMIT APPLIES PER: LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 $ 111 AUTOMOBILE X LIABILITY ANY AUTO OWNED AUTOS ONLY HIRED AUTOS ONLY _ SCHEDULED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY X X 7036910080 04/01/2023 04/01/2024 EMBa�INED SINGLE LIMIT 11 ,000,000 $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ B x UMBRELLA UAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE X X 7036910497 04/01/2023 04/01/2024 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 $5,000,000 AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION $10,000 D WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below YI N N / A X 83057104 04/01/2023 04/01/2024 X STATUTE ERH E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 C B E Profess/Pollution Rented/Leased Equ Cyber Liability PEC006077801 7037100866 107607453 04/01/2023 04/01/2023 04/01/2023 04/01/2024 04/01/2024 04/01/2024 $1,000,000 / $5,000,000 $500,000 $1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) Additional Remarks:TLC Job 2314/Project No. 20 -0008 -UT: Lift Station 16 Pierce Street. City of Clearwater and Certificate Holder are Additional Insured when required by direct written contract. Thirty (30) Days written notice of any cancellation, non -renewal, termination, material change or reduction in coverage will be sent Certificate Holder below. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION Contract/Procurement Specialist City of Clearwater Engineering Department P.O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE kik ACORD 25 (2016/03) 1 of 1 #S32659841/M32130533 © 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ILSA • PROFESSIONAL AND POLLUTION LEGAL LIABILITY POLICY FOR THE CONSTRUCTION AND ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICE INDUSTRIES Certain coverages are "claims -made and reported" and have different reporting requirements from other sections of this Policy. In the event of a Claim, this Policy may require that a Claim be first made during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period. Please read this Policy carefully, including the Declarations and all Endorsements. This Policy contains provisions that limit the amount of Legal Expense we are responsible to pay. Throughout this Policy, the words "we", "us", and "our" mean the Company stated in the Declarations. The words "you" and "your" mean the Insured. Words that are bolded, except for caption headings, have the meaning set forth in SECTION III — DEFINITIONS, whether expressed in singular or plural throughout this Policy. In consideration of the payment of premium, in reliance upon the Application and subject to the Declarations and the terms and conditions of this Policy, we agree with you as follows: SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS A. Professional Coverages 1. Professional Liability Coverage We will pay on your behalf for Professional Loss that you become legally obligated to pay because of a Claim resulting from an actual or alleged negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services, provided that: a. the Professional Services are rendered on or after the Retroactive Date and prior to the end of the Policy Period; and b. the Claim is first made during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period. 2. Rectification Expense Coverage We wilt pay on your behalf for Rectification Expense to avoid or reduce a Claim covered under this Policy, provided that: a. all Professional Services giving rise to actual or potential damages are rendered on or after the Retroactive Date and prior to the end of the Policy Period; b. during the Policy Period, you provide us with immediate notice of the negligent act, error or omission and of the proposed corrective action, if any, along with all supporting documentation, in writing prior to incurring any Rectification Expense; c. you establish and we determine that your proposed Rectification Expense is reasonable and necessary in light of the actual liability for a Claim covered under this Policy that can be avoided or reduced by incurring the Rectification Expense; and d. all Rectification Expense must be approved by us, in writing, prior to being incurred by you. EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 1 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • • If following the payment of Rectification Expense, a Claim is made against you, our total payment, including any payments previously paid by us, will not exceed the Limits of Liability shown in Item (3) and Item (4) of the Declarations. If, in order to prevent Bodily Injury or Property Damage, you take immediate action that results in Rectification Expense, but you are not reasonably able to obtain prior approval from us in writing, we will indemnify you for such expense incurred over a period not exceeding ten (10) business days, beginning from the time the immediate action was taken, provided you can reasonably prove to us that such immediate action reduced the amount of the Bodily Injury or Property Damage that would otherwise have been paid under this Policy in the absence of such immediate action. 3. Protective Loss Coverage We will indemnify the Named Insured for Protective Loss: a. in excess of all applicable Design Professional's Insurance, or b. for all amounts not covered by the Design Professional's Insurance pursuant to a valid coverage denial or limitation that is not contested by the Design Professional, resulting from an actual or alleged negligent act, error or omission in Design Professional Services performed by a Design Professional, provided that: (1) the Design Professional Services are rendered on or after the Retroactive Date and prior to the end of the Policy Period; (ii) the Protective Claim is first made by you against the Design Professional and reported by you to us, in writing, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period; and (iii) you have taken all steps necessary to pursue the Protective Claim and obtain recovery of all Protective Loss from the Design Professional and, where legally permissible, the Design Professional's Insurance. B. Pollution Coverages 1. Job Site Coverage - Occurrence We will pay on your behalf for Pollution Loss that you become legally obligated to pay as a result of a Claim arising from a Pollution Condition on, at, under or migrating from a Job Site, provided that: a. the Bodily Injury, Property Damage or Environmental Damage occurs during the Policy Period; b. the Pollution Condition results from Contracting Services or Completed Operations; and c. the Pollution Condition results in a Claim. 2. Transportation Coverage We will pay on your behalf for Pollution Loss as a result of a Pollution Condition that first commences and finally ends during the course of Transportation, provided that: EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 2 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • • a. the Transportation takes place during the Policy Period; and b. the Pollution Condition is first discovered by you during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, during the Policy Period or within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period; or c. (i) the Pollution Condition results in a Claim; (ii) the Claim is for Pollution Loss that you become legally obligated to pay; and (iii) the Claim is first made during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period. 3. Emergency Remediation Expense Coverage We will indemnify you for Emergency Remediation Expense incurred by you, provided that: a. the Pollution Condition and notice of the Emergency Remediation Expense are reported to us, in writing, during the Policy Period, but in no event later than fourteen (14) days from the discovery of the Pollution Condition, or the end of the Policy Period, whichever occurs first, and b. the Pollution Condition results from Contracting Services at a Job Site, or Transportation, rendered during the Policy Period. 4. Pollution Protective Loss Coverage We will indemnify you for Pollution Protective Loss: a. in excess of all applicable Subcontractor's Insurance, or b. for all amounts not covered by the Subcontractor's Insurance pursuant to a valid coverage denial or limitation that is not contested by the Subcontractor, resulting from a Pollution Condition on, at, under or migrating from a Job Site or a Pollution Condition in the course of Transportation, provided that: (1) the Bodily Injury, Property Damage or Environmental Damage occurs during the Policy Period; (ii) the Pollution Condition results from Subcontractor Services or Completed Operations of the Subcontractor; (iii) the Pollution Protective Claim is first made by you against the Subcontractor; and (iv) you have taken all steps necessary to pursue the Pollution Protective Claim and obtain recovery of all Pollution Protective Loss from the Subcontractor and, where legally permissible, the Subcontractor's Insurance. 5. Non -Owned Disposal Site Coverage We will pay on your behalf for Pollution Loss that you become legally obligated to pay as a result of a Pollution Condition on, at, under or migrating from a Non -Owned Disposal Site, provided that: a. the Pollution Condition first commences on or after the Retroactive Date and prior to the end of the Policy Period; EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 3 of 28 May not be copied without permission. b. the Pollution Condition arises from waste or material generated by Contracting Services 1111 performed at a Job Site or originates from Your Location; • • c. the Pollution Condition results in a Claim; and d. (i) the Pollution Condition results in a Claim; (ii) the Claim is for Pollution Loss that you become legally obligated to pay; and (iii) the Claim is first made during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period. 6. Your Location Coverage We will pay on your behalf for Pollution Loss as a result of a Pollution Condition on, at, under or migrating from Your Location, provided that: a. the Pollution Condition originates from Your Location; and b. the Pollution Condition is sudden and accidental and first commences during the Policy Period and finally ends within ten (10) consecutive days from its first commencement; and c. the Pollution Condition is first discovered by you during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, during the Policy Period or within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period; or d. (i) the Pollution Condition results in a Claim against you; (ii) the Claim is for Pollution Loss that you become legally obligated to pay; and (iii) the Claim is first made against you during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period. SECTION II - SUPPLEMENTAL COVERAGES The following Supplemental Coverages are afforded under this Policy. Any amounts paid under these coverages do not qualify as Professional Loss, Rectification Expense, Protective Loss, Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense or Protective Pollution Loss. In no event will we pay more than the Limits of Liability specified below. The Limits of Liability for each of the following Supplemental Coverages are separate from the Limits of Liability for the coverages in SECTION 1 - INSURING AGREEMENTS of this Policy, and payments made under these Supplemental Coverages do not erode the Aggregate Limits of Liability of this Policy. No Self -Insured Retention Amount applies to these Supplemental Coverages. A. Disaster Response Expense Coverage We will pay on your behalf up to an aggregate limit of liability of $250,000 for any reasonable and necessary expenses incurred by you, with our prior written consent, for a public relations or crisis management firm hired by you, and approved by us, to minimize potential harm to your reputation by maintaining or restoring public confidence in you resulting from a negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services, or a Pollution Condition resulting from Contracting Services or Transportation, that has or is likely to result in a Media Event. This limit of liability is the most we will pay regardless of the number of acts, errors or omissions, Pollution Condition(s) or Media Event(s). B. Green Building Materials Expense Coverage We will pay on your behalf up to an aggregate limit of liability of $250,000 for any reasonable and necessary expenses incurred by you in the use of Green Building Materials, even when the use of such materials is not necessary, as part of Restoration Costs when otherwise covered under this Policy. This limit of liability is the most we will pay regardless of the number of Pollution Condition(s). EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 4 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • C. Protective Loss/Pollution Protective Loss Bankruptcv Litigation Expense Coverage We will indemnify you up to an aggregate limit of liability of $25,000 for the reasonable and necessary fees and expenses incurred by you for retaining bankruptcy counsel in the making of a Protective Claim or a Pollution Protective Claim that qualifies for coverage under this Policy against a Design Professional or Subcontractor, as applicable, who has filed for or has been placed into bankruptcy under the United States Bankruptcy Code, provided that the Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Claim results in a judgment for you against the Design Professional or Subcontractor that is final and no longer subject to appeal. This limit of liability is the most we will pay regardless of the number of Claim(s). D. Litigation Expense Coverage We will indemnify you up to an aggregate limit of liability of $25,000 for the actual loss of earnings and reasonable and necessary expenses incurred by you for attendance at depositions, hearings, arbitrations, Mediation or trials at our written request, for Claim(s) covered under this Policy. This limit of liability is the most we will pay regardless of the number of Claim(s), events or persons attending. E. Subpoena Expense Coverage We will pay on your behalf up to an aggregate limit of liability of $25,000 for reasonable and necessary fees and costs of counsel retained by us to advise you regarding the production of subpoenaed documents or to represent you while preparing for or giving testimony in response to a subpoena that is both served on you during the Policy Period and reported by you to us, in writing, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period, and arises from Professional Services or Pollution Conditions that are within the scope of coverage under this Policy. This limit of liability is the most we will pay regardless of the number of subpoenas served. F. Disciplinary Proceeding Expense Coverage We will pay on your behalf up to an aggregate limit of liability of $25,000 for Legal Expense from a disciplinary proceeding against you before a design professional or contractor licensing board, provided that the disciplinary proceeding arises out of a negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services, or a Pollution Condition caused by Contracting Services, rendered on or after the Retroactive Date and before the end of the Policy Period, if the disciplinary proceeding is brought against you during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, by you, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period. This limit of liability is the most we will pay regardless of the number of proceedings. G. Americans with Disabilities Act and Fair Housing Act Expense Coverage We will pay on your behalf up to an aggregate limit of liability of $25,000 for Legal Expense from the investigation of or response to a regulatory or administrative action from a governmental agency under the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), as amended, or the Fair Housing Act (FHA), as amended, alleging a negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services rendered on or after the Retroactive Date and before the end of the Policy Period, if the regulatory or administrative action is brought against you during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, by you, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period. This limit of liability is the most we will pay regardless of the number of investigations or actions. H. Building Information Modeling Expense Coverage We will indemnify you up to an aggregate limit of liability of $25,000 for reasonable and necessary additional expenses payable to a third -party software consulting company, that are not otherwise recoverable from any warranty or guarantee, arising from loss of or damage to information due to a malfunction of software used in connection with a Building Information Modeling (BIM) system purchased from a third -party vendor that was not modified by you or on your behalf, including erroneous calculations or modeling, provided that the malfunction is first discovered during the Policy Period and after the system has been put to its intended EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 5 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • • use in the course of construction in support of Professional Services or Contracting Services and is reported to us, in writing, by you, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or, where applicable, the Optional Extended Reporting Period. This limit of liability is the most we will pay regardless of the number of consulting companies, systems purchased or malfunctions. SECTION 11I - DEFINITIONS A. Bodily Injury means: 1. physical injury, sickness or disease, sustained by any person, including death resulting therefrom, and any accompanying medical or environmental monitoring; or 2. mental anguish, emotional distress or shock, sustained by any person. B. Claim means any monetary demand, notice, or assertion of a legal right, alleging liability or responsibility on your part, and includes, but is not limited to, a lawsuit, petition, order or government or regulatory action commenced against you. C. Client means the person or entity that directly hires the Named Insured, by written agreement signed by the Named Insured, to render Contracting Services and for whom the Named Insured renders such services. D. Completed Operations means Contracting Services that are completed. Completed Operations does not include Contracting Services that have been abandoned. Contracting Services will be deemed completed at the earliest of the following times: 1. when all Contracting Services to be performed under a contract have been completed; or 2. when all Contracting Services to be performed at the Job Site have been completed; or 3. when that part of the Contracting Services performed at the Job Site has been put to its intended use by any person or entity other than another contractor or subcontractor working on the same project. Contracting Services that may require further service, maintenance, correction, repair or replacement, but are otherwise complete, shall be deemed completed. E. Contracting Services means any construction or environmental activity that is performed by or on behalf of the Named Insured. Contracting Services also includes Completed Operations. F. Design Professional means any person or entity that is qualified, certified or licensed to perform professional services that are covered by Design Professional's Insurance, including any Subcontractors and subconsultants. G. Design Professional's Insurance means any liability insurance issued to a Design Professional. H. Design Professional Services means professional services that any Design Professional: 1. agreed to perform pursuant to a written agreement with you or a Design Professional; retained by you or on your behalf; and 2. are included within the Professional Services that you agreed to perform in your written agreement with a Client. EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 6 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • I. Emergency Remediation Expense means Remediation Expense incurred by you on an emergency basis that we determine was reasonable and necessary to mitigate the immediate effects of the Pollution Condition in light of the liability covered under this Policy that can be avoided or reduced by such mitigation. J. Environmental Damage means physical damage into or upon land or structures thereupon, the atmosphere or any watercourse or body of water, including groundwater, caused by a Pollution Condition and resulting in Remediation Expense. Environmental Damage does not include Property Damage. K. First Named Insured means the person or entity stated in Item (1) of the Declarations. L. Green Building Materials means building products or materials that are recognized by The Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED®), Green Globes Assessment and Rating System, International Green Construction Code or Energy Star as: 1. being environmentally preferable or sustainable; or 2. providing enhanced energy efficiency. M. Insured means each of the following: 1. the First Named Insured; 2. the Named Insured; 3. the Named Insured's current and former directors, partners, principals, members, officers, stockholders, or trustees, but solely while acting within the course and scope of their duties as such; 4. the Named Insured's current and former employees, including Leased Worker, but solely within the course and scope of their employment or lease agreement; 5. the Named Insured's heirs, executors, administrators, assigns or legal representatives in the event of death, incapacity or bankruptcy, but only with respect to the liability of the Named Insured otherwise insured herein; 6. any Predecessor in Interest; 7. any entity newly formed or acquired by the Named Insured during the Policy Period where the Named Insured has greater than fifty percent (50%) ownership, control, or beneficial interest, provided that: a. coverage shall be provided only for Professional Loss and Protective Loss arising out of Professional Services or Design Professional Services or Pollution Loss and Pollution Protective Loss arising out of Contracting Services or Subcontractor Services, for services performed on or after the date of formation or acquisition, subject to the Retroactive Date; and b. this coverage shall expire at the end of the Policy Period or within ninety (90) days of such formation or acquisition of the entity, whichever is earlier, unless you submit written notice to us providing detailed information concerning the newly formed or acquired entity and we agree to accept coverage and issue an endorsement confirming coverage; 8. the Named Insured to the extent of its participation in a legal entity including a limited liability company or joint venture, but only to the extent of the Named Insured's legal liability for its rendering or failure to render Professional Services or Contracting Services under the respective legal entity. EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 7 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • • 9. Solely with regard to SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, B.1. Job Site Coverage - Occurrence, B.2. Transportation Coverage and B.S. Non -Owned Disposal Site Coverage, any person or entity, including a Client, as required by a written agreement, but only for: a. a Pollution Condition caused by Contracting Services; and b. the liability of the person or entity that results from the performance of the Named Insured's Contracting Services, provided that such written agreement is signed prior to the commencement of the Pollution Condition. Any insurance afforded under the terms and conditions of this Policy shall be limited to the scope of coverage required by such agreement and shall be limited to the lesser of the amount of the limits of liability required by such written agreement or the Limits of Liability under this Policy. In no event shall we be liable for any amounts in excess of the Limits of Liability shown in Item (3) and Item (4) B. Pollution Coverages of the Declarations. N. Insured Contract means that part of any written agreement under which, the Named Insured assumes the tort liability of another party to pay compensatory damages for Bodily Injury, Property Damage or Environmental Damage, to a third -person or entity, provided that such written agreement is signed by the Named Insured prior to the Bodily Injury, Property Damage or Environmental Damage. Tort liability means a liability that would be imposed by law in the absence of any agreement. O. Job Site means the location where Contracting Services are rendered. Job Site does not include: 1. any location that is owned, rented, leased, used, or occupied by you except for: a. a location owned, rented, leased, or occupied by the Client; or b. a location that is rented, leased, or occupied (but not owned) by the Named Insured and is used on a temporary basis by you for a single project only, during the course of providing Contracting Services for such single project. 2. a Non -Owned Disposal Site or Your Location. P. Leased Worker means a person leased to the Named Insured, by a labor leasing firm under an agreement between you and the labor leasing firm, to perform duties related to the conduct of your business. Q. Legal Expense means legal costs, charges and expenses incurred by you or on your behalf in the investigation or defense of a Claim arising from Professional Services or Contracting Services, and includes any necessary expert fees paid to experts retained by defense counsel. Legal Expense does not include any of the following: 1. the time and expense incurred by you assisting us in the investigation or resolution of a Claim or in connection with Remediation Expense, including, but not limited to, the costs of your in-house counsel, salary charges of your regular employees or officials, and fees and expenses of counsel retained by you. 2. salary charges of our employees. 3. legal cost, charges and expenses incurred in connection with Rectification Expense, Emergency Remediation Expense or to any legal costs or expenses incurred by you in the investigation, EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 8 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • • prosecution, pursuit, adjustment, making or appeal of a Protective Claim or a Pollution Protective Claim, except as provided by SECTION II - SUPPLEMENTAL COVERAGES, C. Protective Loss/Pollution Protective Loss Bankruptcy Litigation Expense Coverage. R. Low -Level Radioactive Waste and Material means waste or material that when disposed is acceptable for disposal in a near -surface disposal facility or a land disposal facility as defined in 10 CFR 61.2. S. Media Event means a spontaneous event that results in coverage by any television news or newspapers, in either print or Internet editions. Coverage in e-mails, blogs, vlogs or other private or not for profit media does not constitute a Media Event. T. Mediation means an informal and non-binding dispute settlement process run by a neutral third -party approved by us. U. Mold Matter means mold, mildew or any type or form of fungus, including mycotoxins, spores or by-products produced or released by fungi. V. Named Insured means: 1. the First Named Insured; and 2. any person or entity designated as a Named Insured by endorsement to this Policy. W. Natural Resource Damage means physical injury to, or destruction of, as well as the assessment of such injury or destruction, including the resulting loss of use of the land or resources to the general public, fish, wildlife, biota, air, water, groundwater, drinking water supplies, and other such resources belonging to, or managed by, held in trust by, appertaining to, or otherwise controlled by the United States including the resources of the fishery conservation zone established by the Magnuson -Stevens Fishery Conservation and Management Act 16 U.S.C. 1801 et. seq.), any State, Local or Provincial government, any foreign government, any Native American tribe or, if such resources are subject to a trust restriction on alienation, any member of a Native American tribe. The terms Natural Resource Damage and Natural Resource Damage Assessments are as further defined by statute [CERCLA §§101(6); 107(a)(4)(C); OPA §§1001(5); 1002(b)(2)] and regulation [43 CFR Part 11; 15 CFR Part 990]. X. Non -Owned Disposal Site means a location used by you for the treatment, storage or disposal of waste or material, provided that: 1. the Non -Owned Disposal Site is not managed, operated, owned or leased by you or your affiliate; 2. the Non -Owned Disposal Site is permitted or licensed by the applicable Federal, State, Local or Provincial authorities to accept such waste or material as of the date the waste or material is treated, stored or disposed at the Non -Owned Disposal Site; and 3. the Non -Owned Disposal Site is not listed on a proposed or final Federal National Priorities List or any State or Provincial equivalent National Priority List, Superfund or Hazardous Waste List prior to the treatment, storage or disposal of the waste or material at the Non -Owned Disposal Site. Y. Policy Period means the period listed in Item (2) of the Declarations or any shorter period resulting from cancellation. Z. Pollutants means any solid, liquid, gaseous or thermal irritant or contaminant including, but not limited to, acids, alkalis, electromagnetic fields, fumes, hazardous substances, bacteria, Low -Level Radioactive Waste and Material, Mold Matter, odors, smoke, soot, toxic chemicals, vapors and waste materials, including medical, infectious and pathological wastes. EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 9 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • AA. Pollution Condition means: 1. the discharge, dispersal, release, seepage, migration or escape of Pollutants into or upon land or structures thereupon, the atmosphere or any watercourse or body of water, including groundwater; the continued discharge, dispersal, release, seepage, migration or escape of such Pollutants comprises a single Pollution Condition; and 2. the presence of Mold Matter in or on buildings or structures. BB. Pollution Loss means each of the following that results from a Pollution Condition: 1. a monetary judgment, award or settlement of compensatory damages that is entered into with our prior written consent (such consent shall riot be unreasonably withheld), for: a. Bodily Injury or Property Damage; or b. Remediation Expense; 2. with regard to SECTION 1- INSURING AGREEMENTS, B.2. Transportation Coverage and B.6. Your Location Coverage, Remediation Expense that is incurred with our prior written consent (such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld); 3. civil fines and penalties assessed against a Client that the Named Insured is legally liable for, but only where insurance coverage for such fines and penalties is allowable by law; 4. civil fines and penalties assessed against you, but only where insurance coverage for such fines and penalties is allowable by law; 5. punitive, exemplary or multiplied damages that you are legally liable for, but only where insurance coverage for such damages is allowable by law; or 6. Legal Expense associated with Subsections BB.1. through BB.5 referenced directly above, that is incurred with our prior written consent (such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld); 7. Restoration Costs that are incurred with our prior written consent (such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld); and 8. the value of any reasonable and necessary services rendered, pursuant to any resolution that we have approved in advance in writing, by you to mitigate a Pollution Condition resulting from Contracting Services. Pollution Loss does not include: a. injunctive or equitable relief; b. the return of fees or charges for services rendered; c. salaries of your employees or any Leased Worker; or d. your profit, overhead or mark-up. CC. Pollution Protective Claim means a written demand made or lawsuit commenced by you against a Subcontractor alleging liability or responsibility on the part of the Subcontractor for Pollution Protective Loss based upon or arising out of the Subcontractor's rendering or failure to render Subcontractor Services. . DD. Pollution Protective Loss means the amount you are legally entitled to recover from a Subcontractor, as EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 10 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • • determined by: 1. a final monetary judgment by a court of competent jurisdiction; 2. a final monetary award resulting from an arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding that you participate in with our prior written consent; or 3. a settlement that we agree to in advance, in writing. EE. Predecessor in Interest means any entity whose assets have been acquired by the Named Insured or whose partners, principals or shareholders have joined the Named Insured and whose name has been stated in the Application, submitted for this Policy and executed by the Named Insured, and for whose insurance the Named Insured is responsible by written agreement. FF. Professional Loss means: 1. a monetary judgment, award or settlement of compensatory damages that is entered into with our prior written consent (such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld); 2. civil fines and penalties assessed against a third -party other than you that you are legally liable for, but only where insurance coverage for such fines and penalties is allowable by law; 3. civil fines and penalties assessed against you, but only where insurance coverage for such fines and penalties is allowable by law; 4. punitive, exemplary or multiplied damages that you are legally liable for, but only where insurance coverage for such damages is allowable by law; 5. liquidated damages assessed against you, or a settlement of liquidated damages that is entered into with our prior written consent (such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld), but only to the extent you would be legally liable in the absence of a contractual agreement; or 6. Legal Expense associated with Subsections FF.1. through FF.5. referenced directly above, that is incurred with our prior written consent (such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld); and 7. the value of any services rendered by you or on your behalf, pursuant to any resolution approved by us in writing, prior to the services being rendered, to correct a negligent act, error or omission in the performance of Professional Services. Professional Loss does not include: a. injunctive or equitable relief; b. the return of fees or charges for services rendered; c. salaries of your employees or any Leased Worker; or d. your profit, overhead or mark-up. GG. Professional Services means those activities listed in Item (5) of the Declarations that are rendered by or on behalf of the Named Insured. HH. Property Damage means each of the following caused by a Pollution Condition: 1. physical injury to or destruction of tangible property, including the resulting loss of use thereof; 2. loss of use of tangible property that has not been physically injured or destroyed; EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 11 of 28 May not be copied without permission. 3. diminished third -party property value, but only where there is physical injury to or the destruction of such tangible property; or 4. Natural Resource Damage. Property Damage does not include Environmental Damage. II. Protective Claim means a written demand made or lawsuit commenced by you against a Design Professional alleging liability or responsibility on the part of the Design Professional for Protective Loss based upon or arising out of the Design Professional's rendering or failure to render Design Professional Services. JJ. Protective Loss means the amount you are legally entitled to recover from the Design Professional, as determined by: 1. a final monetary judgment by a court of competent jurisdiction; 2. a final monetary award resulting from an arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, that you participate in with our prior written consent; or 3. a settlement that we agree to in advance, in writing. KK. Rectification Expense means direct costs and expenses to correct actual damages or prevent potential damages resulting from a negligent act, error or omission in your Professional Services. Rectification Expense does not include any of your profit, overhead, mark-up; or any betterment to a project that Rectification Expense applies. LL. Remediation Expense means reasonable and necessary expenses resulting from Environmental Damage • caused by a Pollution Condition and incurred to investigate, assess, remove, dispose of, treat, abate, contain or neutralize a Pollution Condition, including any associated monitoring and testing costs. MM. Responsible Insured means any of your officers, directors, partners, members, managers, supervisors or foreman, or any of your employees that have responsibility, in whole or in part, for risk control, risk management, health and safety or environmental affairs, control or compliance, and any manager of Your Location. NN. Restoration Costs means reasonable and necessary costs incurred by you to restore, repair or replace real or personal property to substantially the same condition it was in prior to being damaged during work performed in the course of incurring Remediation Expense. Restoration Costs include the use of Green Building Materials, but only as set forth in SECTION II - SUPPLEMENTAL COVERAGES, B. Green Building Materials Expense Coverage. However, these costs shall not exceed the Actual Cash Value of such real or personal property immediately prior to incurring the Remediation Expense or include costs associated with improvements or betterments, except for Green Building Materials. Actual Cash Value is defined as the cost to replace such real or personal property, immediately prior to incurring the Remediation Expense, minus the accumulated depreciation of the real or personal property. 00. Retroactive Date means the date listed in Item (4) of the Declarations for each applicable coverage that is specified, if any, or any Retroactive Date listed on an endorsement to this Policy. PP. Subcontract means a written agreement, purchase order or any such legal instrument issued under your written agreement for the performance of Contracting Services or Transportation. QQ. Subcontractor means any person or entity that enters into a Subcontract that assumes some or all of your EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 12 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • • obligation(s) to the Client. RR. Subcontractor Services means Contracting Services or Transportation that are rendered by or on behalf of the Subcontractor. SS. Subcontractor's Insurance means any liability insurance under which, the Subcontractor qualifies as an insured. TT. Transportation means the movement of waste or material by land motor vehicle, trailer, semi -trailer, mobile equipment or watercraft, including the loading and unloading of such waste or material from the point of origin until the waste or material has arrived at its final destination, provided that: 1. the Pollution Condition occurs while in support of Contracting Services; 2. the Pollution Condition occurs at a location other than the Job Site or Your Location; and 3. the person or entity transporting the waste or material is properly licensed to transport such waste or material by the means utilized. UU. Underground Storage Tank means any stationary container or vessel, which is ten percent (10%) or more beneath the surface of the ground and includes the associated underground piping, underground ancillary equipment and containment system(s) connected thereto, and is: 1. constructed primarily of non -earthen materials; and 2. designated to contain any substance. For purposes of this definition, associated underground piping means piping leading to and away from the Underground Storage Tank until such piping is above ground or terminates in another Underground Storage Tank, receptacle, dispenser, or manufacturing process. W. Your Location means a location owned, rented to or leased by the Named Insured, provided that such location is listed in the Your Location Schedule endorsed onto this Policy. Your Location does not include a Job Site or Non -Owned Disposal Site. SECTION IV - EXCLUSIONS A. The following exclusions apply to SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, A. Professional Coverages and B. Pollution Coverages: This Policy does not apply to any Claim, negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services, Professional Loss, Rectification Expense, Protective Loss, Pollution Condition, Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense, Pollution Protective Loss, or any other coverage afforded under this Policy, including SECTION II — SUPPLEMENTAL COVERAGES, directly or indirectly for or based upon or arising out of: 1. Contractual Liability your: a. assumption of liability in a contract or agreement; or b. breach of contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to: EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 13 of 28 May not be copied without permission. (1) liability that you would have in the absence of a contract or agreement; or (ii) solely with regard to SECTION I — INSURING AGREEMENTS, B.1. Job Site Coverage - Occurrence and B.2. Transportation Coverage liability assumed by the Named Insured in an Insured Contract. 2. Employer's Liability any injury to: a. any of your employees, including any Leased Workers, directors, partners, principals, members, officers, stockholders or trustees, but solely within the course and scope of their employment or lease agreement and only if such injury arises in the course of: (I) employment by you; or (ii) performing duties related to the conduct of your business; or b. the spouse, domestic partner, child, parent, brother or sister of anyone set forth in Subsection 2.a. directly above, as a consequence of any injury to any of the persons described in Subsection 2.a. directly above. This exclusion applies whether you may be liable as an employer or in any other capacity and to any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the injury. This exclusion does not apply to liability the Named Insured assumed under an Insured Contract. 3. Express Warranty and Guaranty any express warranty or guaranty. • This exclusion does not apply to liability you would have in the absence of such express warranty or guaranty. 4. Your Faulty Workmanship solely with regard to SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, B. Pollution Coverages, the cost to repair or replace faulty workmanship, construction, fabrication, installation, assembly, erecting, manufacture or remediation, if such faulty workmanship, construction, fabrication, installation, assembly, erecting, manufacture or remediation was performed, in whole or in part, by you. 5. Fiduciary Liability any involvement by you: a. as a director, partner, principal, member, officer, stockholder, trustee, or employee of a business enterprise not stated in Item (1) of the Declarations or of any charitable organization, or pension, welfare, profit sharing, mutual or investment fund or trust; or b. as a fiduciary under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended, or any regulation or order issued pursuant thereto or under any other employee benefit plan. 6. Hostile Acts any consequence, whether direct or indirect, of war, invasion, act of foreign enemy, hostilities (whether war be declared or not), civil war, rebellion, revolution, insurrection or military or usurped power, strike, riot, or civil commotion. 7. Insurance and Suretyship the requiring, obtaining, maintaining, advising as to, or the failure to require, obtain, maintain or advise as to any form of insurance, suretyship or bond, either with respect to any Insured or any EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 14 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • • other person or entity. 8. Insured versus Insured any Claim made by an Insured against any other Insured. This exclusion does not apply to a Claim by any person or entity, including a Client, that meets the definition of an Insured in SECTION III — DEFINITIONS, M. Insured, Subsection 9. 9. Intentional and Dishonest Acts a. intentional disregard of, or non-compliance with, any statute, regulation, ordinance, law or order, by or at your direction or your agent's direction; or b. actual or alleged fraudulent, dishonest, malicious or intentionally or inherently harmful conduct by you. This exclusion does not apply to any Insured that did not allegedly commit or allegedly participate in committing any of the foregoing conduct described above. 10. Known Circumstances or Conditions a. a Claim, negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services, Professional Loss, Rectification Expense, Protective Claim, Protective Loss, Pollution Condition, Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense, Pollution Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Loss reported to or known by a Responsible Insured prior to the inception of the Policy Period; or b. a circumstance or condition known by a Responsible Insured prior to the inception of the Policy Period, which is not identified by you in the statements, declarations and information contained in the Application for this Policy, where the Responsible Insured should have reasonably foreseen that a Claim, negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services, Professional Loss, Protective Claim, Protective Loss, Pollution Condition, Pollution Loss, Pollution Protective Claim, or Pollution Protective Loss would result, or Rectification Expense or Emergency Remediation Expense would be incurred. However, in the event that during the Policy Period you exacerbate a Pollution Condition caused by others, coverage is not excluded for that portion of the Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense or Pollution Protective Loss that would not exist but for your exacerbation of the Pollution Condition. 11. Notices to Previous Insurers any Claim, negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services, Rectification Expense, Protective Claim, Pollution Condition, Emergency Remediation Expense, Pollution Protective Claim or other circumstance reported by you in part or in whole under any prior policy. 12. Products Liability any goods, materials or products designed, manufactured, sold, handled, distributed or supplied by you, a Design Professional, a Subcontractor or by others under license or trade name from you, a Design Professional or Subcontractor. This exclusion does not apply to: a. the design of a good or product that has been specifically designed or otherwise provided to accommodate the specifications of a particular project or multiple projects for a specific customer. This exception does not apply to any subsequently manufactured goods or products using the same design, without alteration, as any previously customized good or product; b. computer software or programs specifically developed for a third -party that is not available EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 15 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • for general sale and distribution, and is provided in conjunction with Professional Services, Design Professional Services, Contracting Services or Subcontractor Services; or c. the fabrication, assembly or installation of goods, materials or products provided in connection with the performance of Contracting Services. 13. Property a. damage to any real property owned, rented or leased by you, except for Your Location or real property owned or leased by, or in the care, custody or control of, the Client; or b. for the repair, replacement or restoration of any personal property you own or lease, except for personal property owned or leased by, or in the care, custody or control of, the Client. 14. Radioactive / Nuclear Material a. material or waste that if disposed must be placed in a geologic repository as defined in 10 CFR 60 or 10 CFR 63 or any other existing or planned disposal facility for waste that would not otherwise qualify as Low -Level Radioactive Waste and Material; b. radioactive waste or material for which, you have coverage under any nuclear insurance policy or have received indemnity from any United States or international government authority or statute, including but not limited to the United States Price Anderson Act (Public Law 100-408) or the United States National Defense Contracts Act (Public Law 85-804); c. tailings, milling wastes, or products produced by the extraction of uranium or thorium from any ore processed for its source material; d. any nuclear weapon, engineered assembly, or component thereof designed to cause the release of radiological material or any hazardous substance onto a chosen target or to generate a nuclear detonation; and e. the existence, required removal or abatement of naturally occurring radioactive materials or technologically enhanced naturally occurring radioactive materials, including but not limited to radon, including, but not limited to the actual, alleged or threatened exposure of any person(s) or property to any such matter. 15. Related Entities and Individuals a Claim by an entity or individual: a. that wholly or partially owns, operates or manages you; b. that you have a direct or indirect ownership interest of twenty-five percent (25%) or more; c. that is controlled, operated or managed by you; or d. that is an affiliate of you. 16. Workers' Compensation and Similar Laws your obligation under a workers' compensation, unemployment compensation, or disability benefits law or any similar law. B. The following exclusions apply only to SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, A.3. Protective Loss Coverage and B.4. Pollution Protective Loss Coverage: We shall not be liable to make any payment or indemnify you for any Protective Loss or Pollution Protective Loss directly or indirectly for or based upon or arising out of: EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 16 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • 1. Default Judgment a default judgment, monetary award or any liability imposed where the Design Professional or Subcontractor failed to appear, respond, answer, defend or otherwise plead in connection with the Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Claim. This exclusion does not apply if you establish that you would have recovered, from the Design Professional or Subcontractor in the absence of a default judgment, a monetary award or had any liability imposed where the Design Professional or Subcontractor failed to appear, respond, answer, defend or otherwise plead in connection with the Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Claim. 2. Project -Specific Policy a Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Claim for which, insurance is available to you under a project specific policy, or would have been available but for the exhaustion of limits of liability under such policy. C. The following exclusions apply only to SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, B.6. Your Location Coveraqe: We shall not be liable to make any payment for any Pollution Loss directly or indirectly for or based upon or arising out of: 1. Asbestos and Lead -Based Paint the existence of, required removal or abatement of lead-based paint or asbestos, in any form, in or on any building or structure on or at Your Location, including, but not limited to products containing asbestos, asbestos fibers, asbestos dust, and asbestos containing materials. 2. Divested Location any Pollution Condition on, at, under or migrating from Your Location, where the actual discharge, dispersal, release, seepage, migration or escape of Pollutants commenced subsequent to the time Your Location was sold, given away, no longer used or leased by you, abandoned by you, or condemned. 3. Material Change in Use a material change in the use of, or operations at, Your Location from the use or operations identified by you in the statements and information contained in the Application for this Policy including any other supplemental materials submitted to us prior to the inception of the Policy Period or prior to Your Location being endorsed onto this Policy. 4. Underground Storage Tank the existence of any Underground Storage Tank on, at or under Your Location. This exclusion does not apply to: a. an Underground Storage Tank that is closed, abandoned in place or removed prior to the inception of the Policy Period, in accordance with all applicable Federal, State, Local or Provincial regulations; b. an Underground Storage Tank that is identified in the Your Location Schedule endorsed onto this Policy; c. an Underground Storage Tank, the existence of which, is unknown by a Responsible Insured as of the inception of the Policy Period; d. any flow-through process tank, including oil/water separator; or EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 17 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • e. storage tank(s) situated in a man-made underground area (such as a basement, cellar, mine shaft or tunnel) if the storage tank is situated upon or above the surface of the floor. SECTION V - LIMITS OF LIABILITY AND SELF-INSURED RETENTION AMOUNT A. Aggregate Limits of Liability 1. The Policy Aggregate Limit of Liability set forth in Item (3) of the Declarations is the most we shall pay for the sum of all Professional Loss, Rectification Expense, Protective Loss, Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense, Pollution Protective Loss, and any other amounts for which insurance is afforded under SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS of this Policy, regardless of the number of Claim(s). 2. The Aggregate Limit of Liability for A. Professional Coverages, set forth in Item (4) A. Professional Coverages of the Declarations is the most we shall pay for the sum of all Professional Loss, Rectification Expense, Protective Loss, and any other amounts for which insurance is afforded under SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, A. Professional Coverages of this Policy, regardless of the number of Claim(s). 3. The Aggregate Limit of Liability for B. Pollution Coverages, set forth in Item (4) B. Pollution Coverages of the Declarations is the most we shall pay for the sum of all Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense, Pollution Protective Loss, and any other amounts for which insurance is afforded under SECTION 1 - INSURING AGREEMENTS, B. Pollution Coverages of this Policy, regardless of the number of Pollution Condition(s) or Claim(s). B. Limits of Liability 1. Subject to the Aggregate Limit of Liability for A. Professional Coverages, set forth in Item (4) A. Professional Coverages of the Declarations, the Limit of Liability for each negligent act, error or omission for each coverage set forth in Item (4) A. Professional Coverages of the Declarations is the most we shall pay for all Professional Loss, Rectification Expense and Protective Loss based upon or arising out of a single negligent act, error or omission for which, insurance is afforded under SECTION 1 - INSURING AGREEMENTS, A. Professional Coverages of this Policy. 2. Subject to the Aggregate Limit of Liability for B. Pollution Coverages, set forth in Item (4) B. Pollution Coverages of the Declarations, the Limit of Liability for each Pollution Condition for each coverage set forth in Item (4) B. Pollution Coverages of the Declarations is the most we shall pay for all Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense and Pollution Protective Loss based upon or arising out of the same, related, repeated or continuous Pollution Condition for which, insurance is afforded under SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, B. Pollution Coverages of this Policy. C. Legal Expense in Addition to the Limits of Liability 1. Professional Liability Solely with respect to SECTION 1- INSURING AGREEMENTS, A.1. Professional Liability Coverage, once the applicable Self -Insured Retention Amount has been satisfied, Legal Expense shall not begin to reduce the Limits of Liability set forth in Item (3) or Item (4) A. Professional Coverages Aggregate Limit of Liability of the Declarations, until we have incurred, on behalf of one or more Insureds, the Legal Expense Aggregate Limit of Liability, if any, set forth in Item (4) A. of the Declarations. Once we have incurred the Item (4) A. Legal Expense Aggregate Limit of Liability, Legal Expense applies to and reduces each applicable Limit of Liability set forth in Item (3) and Item (4) A. Professional Coverages Aggregate Limit of Liability of the Declarations. 2. Pollution Liability EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 18 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • • Solely with respect to SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, B.1. Job Site Coverage, B.2. Transportation Coverage B.S. Non -Owned Disposal Site Coverage and B.6. Your Location Coverage, once the applicable Self -Insured Retention Amount has been satisfied, Legal Expense shall not begin to reduce the Limits of Liability set forth in Item (3) and Item (4) B. Pollution Coverages Aggregate Limit of Liability of the Declarations until we have incurred, on behalf of one or more Insureds, the Legal Expense Aggregate Limit of Liability, if any, set forth in Item (4) B. of the Declarations. Once we have incurred the Item (4) B. Legal Expense Aggregate Limit of Liability, Legal Expense applies to and reduces each applicable Limit of Liability set forth in Item (3) and Item (4) B. Pollution Coverages Aggregate Limit of Liability of the Declarations. D. Self -Insured Retention Amount 1. The Self -Insured Retention Amount must first be satisfied by payments by you that have been made with our prior written consent (such consent shall not be unreasonable withheld), or by covered Emergency Remediation Expense, before we have any obligation to pay any amounts under this Policy. The Self -Insured Retention Amount must be paid by you and be uninsured and cannot be satisfied by payments made under another insurance policy. In the event that you or the person or entity designated by the First Named Insured does not satisfy the Self -Insured Retention Amount, the First Named Insured is responsible for the Self -Insured Retention Amount obligation. 2. Subject to the Limits of Liability set forth in Item (3) and Item (4) A. Professional Coverages of the Declarations, we are liable only for that portion of Professional Loss and Rectification Expense under SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, A. Professional Coverages, of this Policy in excess of the Self -Insured Retention Amount for each negligent act, error or omission, if any, set forth in Item (4) A. Professional Coverages of the Declarations for each such coverage. 3. Subject to the Limits of Liability set forth in Item (3) and Item (4) B. Pollution Coverages of the Declarations, we are liable only for that portion of Pollution Loss and Emergency Remediation Expense under SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, B. Pollution Coverages, of this Policy in excess of the Self -Insured Retention Amount for each Pollution Condition, if any, set forth in Item (4) B. Pollution Coverages of the Declarations for each such coverage. 4. Legal Expense applies to and reduces each applicable Self -Insured Retention Amount set forth in Item (4) A. Professional Coverages and Item (4) B. Pollution Coverages and the Legal Expense Aggregate Limit of Liability, if any, set forth in Item (4) A. and Item (4) B. of the Declarations. 5. When a written agreement executed prior to the negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services or discovery of a Pollution Condition, specifies a Self -Insured Retention Amount less than the Self -Insured Retention Amount for the applicable coverage(s) stated in Item (4) of the Declarations, then the Self -Insured Retention Amount applicable to such coverage shall be the lesser amount required by that written agreement, provided that: a. you promptly reimburse us for the amount of the difference between the Self -Insured Retention Amount required by written agreement and the Self -Insured Retention Amount for the applicable coverage(s) stated in Item (4) of the Declarations; and b. you indemnify us for any loss, cost, expense or attorney's fees and costs incurred by us in enforcing our rights herein. 6. If you mutually agree with us to use Mediation to resolve a Claim and the Claim is subsequently resolved as a direct consequence of Mediation, the Self -Insured Retention Amount applicable to said Claim shall be reduced by fifty percent (50%), subject to a maximum reduction of no more than $25,000. In the event you owe any portion of the Self -Insured Retention Amount, it shall be paid to us within thirty (30) days following receipt of the executed, full and final release of the Claim. E. Multiple Insureds and Multiple Related Claims EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 19 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • 1 1. The number of Insureds covered by this Policy shall not operate to increase either any Limits of Liability or Legal Expense set forth in Item (3) or Item (4) of the Declarations, or as set forth in SECTION II - SUPPLEMENTAL COVERAGES, notwithstanding any other provisions of this Policy. 2. Multiple Claim(s) against one or multiple Insureds, Rectification Expense indemnified for one or multiple Insureds, or Protective Claim(s) made by one or multiple Insureds, for Professional Loss, Rectification Expense or Protective Loss, incurred over one or more Policy Period(s) and based upon or arising out of the same, related, repeated or continuous negligent act, error or omission shall be treated as a single Claim, subject to: a. a single Limit of Liability; b. a single Self -Insured Retention Amount; and c. shall not operate to increase any Limits of Liability or Legal Expense set forth in Item (3) or Item (4) of the Declarations. All such Claim(s), Rectification Expense or Protective Claim(s), whenever made, shall be considered first made on the date the earliest such Claim, Rectification Expense or Protective Claim was first made, or incurred and only a policy providing coverage for the earliest Claim(s), incurred Rectification Expense or Protective Claim(s) shall afford coverage. If more than one coverage applies to the whole or a part of any Claim(s), Rectification Expense or Protective Claim(s) treated as a single Claim pursuant to this section, then the each negligent act, error or omission Limit of Liability for the entirety of that single Claim and the applicable Self -Insured Retention Amount for that single Claim shall be those set forth in Items (4) A.1. Professional Liability Coverage, A.2. Rectification Expense Coverage, or A.3. Protective Loss Coverage of the Declarations for the applicable coverage with the largest each negligent act, error or omission Limit of Liability and Self -Insured Retention Amount. If more than one applicable coverage has the same each negligent act, error or omission Limit of Liability, but have different Self -Insured Retention Amounts, then the largest Self -Insured Retention Amount shall apply to that single Claim. 3. Multiple Claim(s) against one or multiple Insureds, Emergency Remediation Expense indemnified for one or multiple Insureds, or Pollution Protective Claim(s) made by one or multiple Insureds, for Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense or Pollution Protective Claim(s), over one or more Policy Period(s) and arising out of the same, related, repeated or continuous Pollution Condition shall be treated as a single Claim, subject to: a. a single Limit of Liability; b. a single Self -Insured Retention Amount; and c. shall not operate to increase any Limits of Liability or Legal Expense set forth in Item (3) or Item (4) of the Declarations. All such Claim(s), Emergency Remediation Expense or Pollution Protective Claim(s), whenever made, shall be considered first made on the date the earliest such Claim(s), Emergency Remediation Expense or Pollution Protective Claim(s) was first made and only the policy providing coverage for the earliest Claim(s), Emergency Remediation Expense or Pollution Protective Claim(s) shall afford coverage. If more than one coverage applies to the whole or a part of a Claim(s), Pollution Protective Claim(s) or Emergency Remediation Expense treated as a single Claim pursuant to this section, then the each Pollution Condition Limit of Liability for the entirety of that single Claim and the applicable Self -Insured Retention Amount for that single Claim shall be those set forth in Items (4) EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 20 of 28 May not be copied without permission. B.1. Job Site Coverage, B.2. Transportation Coverage, B.3. Emergency Remediation Expense, B.4. Pollution Protective Loss Coverage, B.S. Non -Owned Disposal Site Coverage, and B.6. Your Location Coverage of the Declarations for the applicable coverage with the highest each Pollution Condition Limit of Liability. If more than one applicable coverage has the same each Pollution Condition Limit of Liability, but has different Self -Insured Retention Amounts, then the highest Self -Insured Retention Amount shall apply to that single Claim. F. Exhaustion of Applicable Limit of Liability Once any applicable Limit of Liability set forth in Item (3) or Item (4) of the Declarations, or set forth in SECTION II - SUPPLEMENTAL COVERAGES, has been exhausted, we have no obligation to: 1. defend or continue to defend any Claim by paying Legal Expense under the applicable Limit of Liability; or 2. pay any Professional Loss, Rectification Expense, Protective Loss, Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense, Pollution Protective Loss, SECTION II - SUPPLEMENTAL COVERAGES, or any other amounts under that applicable Limit of Liability. G. Insurance Under Multiple Policies 1. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Policy or any other policy issued by us or an entity affiliated with us, under no circumstances shall more than one policy issued to you by us or an entity affiliated with us apply to any Professional Loss, Rectification Expense, Protective Loss, Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense or Pollution Protective Loss that: a. arise(s) out of the same, related, repeated or continuous act(s), error(s) or omission(s) in rendering or failing to render Professional Services or Design Professional Services; or b. arise(s) out of the same, related, repeated or continuous Pollution Condition(s); or c. arise(s) out of Bodily Injury, Property Damage, Environmental Damage or other injury, damage or loss that occurs or continues through more than one policy period of two or more policies (including this Policy) issued by us or an entity affiliated with us. 2. If the Bodily Injury, Property Damage, Environmental Damage or other injury, damage or loss arises out of a Pollution Condition(s), then the only policy that shall respond to any resulting Professional Loss, Rectification Expense, Protective Loss, Pollution Loss, Emergency Remediation Expense or Pollution Protective Loss is the first policy in effect when the first exposure to the Pollution Condition(s) occurs. However, if the date of the first exposure to the Pollution Condition(s): a. occurs prior to the first day of the policy period of the first policy issued by us or an entity affiliated with us, or b. cannot be determined, then the first exposure to the Pollution Condition(s) shall be deemed to have occurred only on the first day of the policy period of the first policy issued by us or an entity affiliated with us. 3. If the Bodily Injury, Property Damage, Environmental Damage or other injury, damage or loss arises out of something other than a Pollution Condition, then the only policy that shall respond is the policy in effect when the actual or alleged negligent act(s), error(s) or omission(s) in rendering or failing to render Professional Services or Design Professional Services was first reported to us EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 21 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • or an entity affiliated with us. SECTION VI — OPTIONAL EXTENDED REPORTING PERIOD SECTION VI — OPTIONAL EXTENDED REPORTING PERIOD only applies to insurance afforded by this Policy under SECTION 1 - INSURING AGREEMENTS, A.1. Professional Liability Coverage, A.3. Protective Loss Coverage, B.2. Transportation Coverage, B.S. Non -Owned Disposal Site Coverage and B.6. Your Location Coverage. In the event of non -renewal or cancellation of this Policy by the First Named Insured, the First Named Insured may purchase an Optional Extended Reporting Period of up to three (3) consecutive three -hundred and sixty-five (365) day periods, subject to the following terms, conditions and exceptions: 1. The Optional Extended Reporting Period becomes effective upon payment of an additional premium. Regardless of the period purchased for the Optional Extended Reporting Period, the additional premium will be not more than one hundred percent (100%) of the total premium of this Policy. The Optional Extended Reporting Period commences on the last day of the Policy Period and becomes effective for up to three (3) consecutive three -hundred and sixty-five (365) day periods. The ninety (90) days of additional reporting, if applicable, will be merged into the Optional Extended Reporting Period and is not in addition to the Optional Extended Reporting Period. 2. The First Named Insured must request the purchase of the Optional Extended Reporting Period in writing to us within thirty (30) days following the termination of this Policy and pay the premium to us promptly when due. 3. If purchased, the Optional Extended Reporting Period shall apply to: a. a Claim or Protective Claim first made against you or by you, as applicable, during the Policy Period and reported to us, in writing, during the Optional Extended Reporting Period and otherwise covered under this Policy; or b. a Claim or Protective Claim first made against you or by you, as applicable, and reported to us, in writing, during the Optional Extended Reporting Period and otherwise covered under this Policy. In this case, the Claim or Protective Claim shall be deemed to have been made against you or by you, as applicable, on the last day of the Policy Period. 4. Solely with respect to SECTION I — INSURING AGREEMENTS, B.6. Your Location Coverage, if purchased, the Optional Extended Reporting Period does not apply where a Pollution Condition is first discovered by you after the Policy Period. 5. The First Named Insured shall not have the right to purchase the Optional Extended Reporting Period where: a. this Policy is terminated for fraud or cancelled on any ground set forth in Subsections 2.a., 2.b. and 2.c. of SECTION VIII - CONDITIONS, D. Cancellation; or b. you have obtained other replacement insurance from an entity other than us or our affiliate which is effective after the end of the Policy Period, regardless of whether the coverage afforded under such replacement insurance is identical to the coverage afforded under this Policy. 6. The Optional Extended Reporting Period granted hereunder shall be subject to all the terms and conditions of this Policy and shall only apply to Claim(s) or Protective Claim(s) based upon or arising out of the performance of Professional Services, Design Professional Services, Contracting Services or Subcontractor Services prior to the cancellation or non -renewal of this Policy, and that are otherwise covered under this Policy. • 7. The Optional Extended Reporting Period shall be non -cancellable except for fraud or for any ground set forth EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 22 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • in Subsections 2.a., 2.b., and 2.c. of SECTION VIII — CONDITIONS, D. Cancellation. At the commencement of the Optional Extended Reporting Period, the entire premium shall be considered one hundred percent (100%) fully earned. 8. The Limits of Liability applicable to the Optional Extended Reporting Period shall be the Limits of Liability remaining under this Policy. 9. The quotation of different terms and conditions by us and the First Named Insured's choice not to accept those quoted terms and conditions shall not be construed as non -renewal of this Policy. SECTION VII - REPORTING, DEFENSE, SETTLEMENT AND COOPERATION A. Admission of Liability and Recommended Settlement As a condition precedent to the coverage hereunder: You shall not admit liability with respect to any Claim without our prior written consent. If we recommend a settlement of a Claim: 1. for an amount within the Self -Insured Retention Amount, and you refuse to settle for such recommended amount, we shall not be liable for any Professional Loss, Pollution Loss, and any other coverage afforded by endorsement; or 2. for a total amount in excess of the Self -Insured Retention Amount, and you refuse to settle for such recommended amount, our liability for Professional Loss, Pollution Loss, and any other coverage afforded by endorsement, shall be limited to that portion of such recommended amount, plus the Legal Expense incurred as of the date we recommended such settlement amount, which exceeds the Self -Insured Retention Amount, but falls at or within the Limits of Liability. • B. Circumstance Reporting If during the Policy Period, the Named Insured first becomes aware of an actual or alleged negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services or a Pollution Condition, that the Named Insured reasonably believes may result in a Claim (hereafter referred to as a "Circumstance") that this Policy may apply, the Named Insured may provide written notice, of the actual or alleged negligent act, error omission in Professional Services or the Pollution Condition, to us during the Policy Period. Any such Circumstance that subsequently becomes a Claim made against the Named Insured and reported to us, in writing, shall be considered to have been first made and reported during the Policy Period and shall be subject to all of the terms and conditions of this Policy. As a condition precedent to the rights afforded to the Named Insured under this Subsection B., such written notice to us of a Circumstance shall contain all of the following information: 1. the date and details of all actual and alleged negligent acts, errors or omissions in Professional Services that took place, along with the specific nature, date and extent of any injury or damage that has been sustained; 2. the date and details of the Pollution Condition and the Contracting Services that may have caused such condition; 3. copies of any agreements that have been entered into by the Named Insured that are related to the Professional Services or Contracting Services; and 4. details explaining how the Named Insured first became aware of the Circumstance. EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 23 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • • We shall determine, in our sole discretion, whether the Named Insured's written notice satisfies the condition precedent above. C. Defense We have the right and the duty to defend any Claim against you seeking Professional Loss or Pollution Loss to which this insurance applies, subject to satisfaction of the Self -Insured Retention Amount, even if any of the allegations are groundless, false or fraudulent. We shall have the right, but not the duty to defend you against any Claim for Professional Loss or Pollution Loss where the Self -Insured Retention Amount has not yet been satisfied. We shall also have the right to select counsel to defend you in connection with any Claim or Pollution Condition covered under this Policy. If we exercise such rights set forth above, you must promptly reimburse us for any payments made by us within the Self -Insured Retention Amount, if any. However, we have no duty to defend any Claim against you to which this insurance does not apply. D. Duties As a condition precedent to the coverage hereunder: 1. You must notify us of each of the following, as soon as practicable: a. a Claim, Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Claim; b. Bodily Injury or Property Damage that may result in a Claim, Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Claim; c. an act, error or omission in Professional Services that may result in a Claim, Rectification Expense or Protective Claim; d. a Pollution Condition; and e. Remediation Expense. 2. You must forward to us or to any of our authorized agents all demands, notices, summonses, legal papers or orders received by you or your representative as soon as practicable. 3. You must provide to us, whether orally or in writing, notice of the particulars including the time, place and circumstances of the Claim, act, error or omission in Professional Services or Design Professional Services, Protective Claim, Pollution Condition, Pollution Protective Claim, Bodily Injury, Property Damage or Remediation Expense, along with the names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses. In the event of oral notice, you must furnish to us a written notice of such particulars as soon as practicable. Notice, whether orally or in writing, must be provided to us when a Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Claim is initiated. 4. You must cooperate with us with respect to any coverage sought under this Policy. Upon our request, you shall submit to examination under oath by a representative of us. 5. You shall attend hearings, depositions and trials and assist in effecting settlement, securing and giving evidence, obtaining the attendance of witnesses and otherwise cooperate in the investigation or defense of a Claim, and the maintenance and pursuit of, and recovery of monies in connection with the Protective Claim and Pollution Protective Claim. You must further cooperate with us and do whatever is necessary to secure and affect any rights of indemnity, contribution, apportionment or subrogation that you or we may have. SECTION VIII - CONDITIONS EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 24 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • A. Action Against Us No action by a third -party to this Policy shall lie against us unless, as a condition precedent thereto: 1. you have fully complied with all of the terms of this Policy; and 2. the amount you are obligated to pay has been finally determined either by judgment against you after actual trial or by your written agreement, the claimant and us. Any person or entity that has secured such judgment or entered into such written agreement shall thereafter be entitled to recover under this Policy to the extent of the insurance afforded by this Policy. No person or entity shall have any right under this Policy to join us as a party to any action against you to determine your liability, nor shall we be brought into such action by you or your legal representative. B. Assignment This Policy cannot be assigned without our prior written consent. Such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. C. Bankruptcy or Insolvency Your bankruptcy or insolvency, or of your estate, shall not relieve us of any of our obligations under this Policy. D. Cancellation The following with regards to cancellation apply to this Policy: 1. Cancellation by the First Named Insured: This Policy may be cancelled by the First Named Insured by mailing to us written notice stating when thereafter the cancellation shall be effective. The mailing of such notice must be sent by certified mail, return receipt requested or by electronic mail. The effective date and time of cancellation stated in the written notice shall become the end of the Policy Period. The Minimum Earned Premium for this Policy shall be the percentage stated in Item (7) of the Declarations of the total premium for this Policy. This means that such percentage of the total premium for this Policy is fully earned by us on the inception of the Policy Period. The First Named Insured is not entitled to any return of the Minimum Earned Premium upon cancellation. If the Minimum Earned Premium is less than one hundred percent (100%) of the total premium for this Policy, and the First Named Insured cancels this Policy, then the amount of premium retumable after the minimum premium earned is retained by us shall be computed in accordance with the customary short -rate table and procedure. 2. Cancellation by Us: This Policy may be cancelled by us by mailing to the First Named Insured at the address shown in Item (1) of the Declarations, written notice stating when not less than ninety (90) days thereafter [or fifteen (15) days for non-payment of premium] such cancellation shall be effective. The mailing of such notice shall be sufficient proof of notice of cancellation. The effective date and time of cancellation stated in the written notice shall become the end of the Policy Period. We may cancel this Policy at any time, but only for the following reasons: EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 25 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • a. you made a material misrepresentation that affects our assessment of the risks insured by this Policy; b. you breached or failed to comply with Policy terms, conditions, contractual duties or any of your obligations under this Policy or at law; or c. you failed to pay the premium or the Self -Insured Retention Amount. If we cancel this Policy for reasons set forth in Subsections D.2.a. or D.2.b. referenced directly above, then the amount of premium returnable to the First Named Insured is computed on a pro -rata basis. If we cancel the Policy for reasons set forth in Subsection D.2.c. above, there shall be no return premium. In the event of cancellation by us from any ground referred to in Subsection D.2.b. referenced directly above, you shall have ninety (90) days from the date of notice of cancellation to remedy each breach and each failure that is a ground for cancellation, but only as to each and every breach and failure that are capable of being remedied. If your remedial efforts are completed within such ninety (90) day period and are satisfactory to us, we shall rescind the Notice of Cancellation with a written confirmation to the First Named Insured. 3. The following provisions also apply to Subsections D.1. and D.2. above: a. The premium adjustment shall occur as soon as practicable after cancellation becomes effective however, payment of unearned premium is not a condition of our cancellation. b. If a Claim for Professional Loss or Pollution Loss is made, a Pollution Condition is discovered, a Protective Claim or Protective Pollution Claim is made by you against a Design Professional or Subcontractor, or coverage is otherwise requested from us by you, during the Policy Period, within ninety (90) days of the end of the Policy Period, or the Optional Extended Reporting Period, then the premium shall be considered one hundred percent (100%) earned, and the First Named Insured is not entitled to any return of premium upon cancellation. c. If this Policy is terminated for fraud, misrepresentation or non-payment of premium, the ninety (90) days of additional reporting will not apply. E. Changes Notice to any agent or knowledge possessed by any agent or by any other person shall not constitute a waiver or a change in any part of this Policy or estop us from asserting any right under the terms of this Policy. The terms and conditions of this Policy cannot be waived or changed, except by endorsement issued by us to form a part of this Policy. F. Choice of Law and Jurisdiction and Venue All matters arising from or related to this Policy, including without limitation questions related to the validity, interpretation, performance, and enforcement of this Policy, and all forms of contractual, tort and statutory claims, shall be determined in accordance with the law and practice of the State of New York (notwithstanding New York's conflicts of law rules). It is agreed that, in the event of any dispute arising from or related to this Policy, including without limitation questions related to the validity, interpretation, performance, and enforcement of this Policy, and all forms of contractual, tort and statutory claims, we and the Insured will submit to the jurisdiction of any court (state or federal) in New York and will comply with all the requirements necessary to give such court jurisdiction. Nothing in this clause constitutes or should be understood to constitute a waiver of the right of us or the Insured to remove an action to the United States District Court, regardless of the jurisdiction in which, an action is commenced. EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 26 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • G. Declarations and Representations By acceptance of this Policy, you agree that: 1. the statements, declarations and information contained in the Application for this Policy are true, correct and complete; 2. all such statements, declarations and information are material to our underwriting of this Policy; 3. this Policy has been issued by us in reliance upon the truth, correctness and completeness of such statements, declarations and information, and 4. the Application for this Policy, including all statements, declarations and information submitted to us as part of the Application process, is incorporated in and made part of this Policy. H. Design Professional's Insurance You shall require that each Design Professional, with whom you enter into a written agreement, carry professional liability insurance. I. Headings The descriptions in the headings of this Policy are solely for convenience and form no part of the terms and conditions of this Policy. J. Inspection and Audit We shall be permitted, but not obligated, to examine, audit, monitor and inspect on a continuing basis any of your books, records, services, properties and activities at any time, as far as they relate to the subject matter of this Policy. Neither our right to examine, audit, monitor and make inspections, or the actual undertaking thereof, or any report thereon, neither constitutes an undertaking to determine or warrant that property or operations are safe, healthful, or conform to acceptable engineering practice, or are in compliance with any law, rule or regulation. Any inspections shall be coordinated through the broker or agent of the First Named Insured. K. Other Insurance Unless expressly stated to the contrary, this Policy is excess over the Self -Insured Retention Amount and any other valid and collectible insurance whether such other insurance is stated to be primary, contributory, excess, contingent or otherwise, unless such other insurance is written specifically excess of this Policy by reference in such other policy to this Policy Number in this Policy's Declarations. When any other insurance has a duty to defend a Claim, we shall have no duty to defend the Claim; if the other insurance does not defend the Claim, we shall have the right, but not the duty to defend the Claim. With regard to SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, B. Pollution Coverages, when you are required by written agreement, executed prior to the first commencement of the Pollution Condition, to include any person or entity as an additional Insured, such coverage shall be provided on a primary and non-contributory basis to the extent required by the written agreement. L. Severability Except with respect to the Limits of Liability and the Self -Insured Retention Amount, and any rights or duties specifically assigned in this Policy to the First Named Insured, this insurance applies: 1. as if each Named Insured were the only Named Insured; and EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 27 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • 2. separately to each Insured against whom a Claim is made. Any misrepresentation, act or omission that is in violation of a duty, term or condition under this Policy by one Insured shall not by itself affect coverage for another Insured under this Policy. However, this exception shall not apply to the Insured who is a parent, subsidiary or affiliate of the Insured which committed the misrepresentation, act or omission referenced above. M. Sole Agent The First Named Insured shall act on behalf of all Insureds for the payment or return of premium, receipt and acceptance of any endorsement issued to form a part of this Policy, giving and receiving notice of cancellation or non -renewal and the exercise of the rights provided in SECTION VI — OPTIONAL EXTENDED REPORTING PERIOD. N. Subrogation and Recoupment In the event of any payment under this Policy, we shall have the right to seek recoupment against you in the event we determine no coverage exists and/or be subrogated to all of your rights of recovery against any person or entity and you will execute and deliver instruments and papers and do whatever else is necessary to secure such rights. Any recovery as a result of subrogation proceedings under this Policy shall accrue first to you to the extent of your payments in excess of the Limits of Liability of this Policy; then to us to the extent of our payment under this Policy; and then to you to the extent of your payment of the Self -Insured Retention Amount. Expenses incurred in such subrogation proceedings shall be apportioned among the interested parties in the recovery in the proportion that each interested party's share in the recovery bears to the total recovery amount. We shall have priority in any recovery, and any amounts recovered in excess of our total payment and the cost of recovery shall be paid to you. You shall do nothing at any time to prejudice our subrogation rights. However, we waive our right of recovery against any person or entity, except for a Design Professional or Subcontractor, including Subcontractors and subconsultants, as referenced in SECTION I — INSURING AGREEMENTS, A.3. Protective Loss Coverage and B.4. Pollution Protective Loss Coverage, if and to the extent you agreed to waive your right of recovery against such person or entity in a written agreement signed by the Named Insured prior to: 1. the negligent act, error or omission in Professional Services out of which the Claim or request for Rectification Expense arises under SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, A. Professional Coverages; or 2. the first commencement of a Pollution Condition out of which the Claim or request for Emergency Remediation Expense or Pollution Loss arises under SECTION I - INSURING AGREEMENTS, B. Pollution Coverages. O. Territory This Policy applies to Professional Services and Contracting Services rendered worldwide, provided that the Claim, Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Claim is first brought, and at all times maintained, within the United States, its territories and possessions, or in Canada. This Policy does not apply to any Claim, Protective Claim or Pollution Protective Claim for which, payment would be in violation of the laws of the United States including, but not limited to, United States economic or trade sanction laws or export control laws administered by the United States Treasury, State, and Commerce Departments, such as the economic and trade sanctions administered by the United States Treasury Office of Foreign Assets Control. EVPCPocCP 0921 © 2021 X.L. America, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Page 28 of 28 May not be copied without permission. • ACORD,. CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MMIDD/YYY1()07/31/2023 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED 'REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer any rights to the certlflcate holder In lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER McGriff Insurance Services 12485 28th Street N 3rd Floor St Petersburg, FL 33716 727 823-5551 CONTACT NAME: Theresa Cerf F PHONE Ext): 727 823-5551 (A/C, No): 727-894-3339 E-MAILS: Theresa.Cerf@mcgriff.com INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A : National Fire Insurance Co of Hartford 20478 INSUREDINSURER TLC Diversified, Inc. 2719 17th St E Palmetto, FL 34221 a : The Continental Insurance Company 35289 INSURER C AXA XL America 02423 Brld efield Em to ers Insurance Com an INSURER D: 9 P Y P Y 10701 INSURER E : $100,000 INSURER F : REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POL CIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE 1IN R y vo POLICY NUMBER (IBR �MIODY/YYYFY) fMMIDD/Y� UMC A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY X X 7036909933 04/01/2023 04/01/2024 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 PREMISES (Ea NTEOence) $100,000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $15,000 $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Contractual Liabilit PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $1,000 Deductible GENERAL AGGREGATE GE 'L AGGREGATE POLICY X J LIMIT APPLIES CT X PER: ' LOC PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 $ IOTHER: AUTOMOBILE X LIABILm ANY AUTO OWNED AUTOS ONLY HIRED AUTOS ONLY _ SCHEDULED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY X X 7036910080 04/01/2023 04/01/2024 (( aBccideneNGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ $ B X UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB X OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE X X 7036910497 04/01/2023 04/01/202 cHOCCURRENCE $5,000,000 AGGREGATE s5,000,000 $ DED X RETENT ON $10,000 D WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' UABILJTY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below Y / N N / A X 83057104 04/01/2023 04/01/2024 X STATUTE OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 B Installation 7037100866 04/01/2023 04/01/2024 5,000,000 Ea Job Site 1,000,000 Transit/Stor 25,000 Ded / 5% Wind DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS/ VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached if more space is required) Additional Remarks:TLC Job 2314/Project No. 20 -0008 -UT: Lift Station 16 Pierce Street. City of Clearwater and Certificate Holder are Additional Insured when required by direct written contract. Thirty (30) Days written notice of any cancellation, non -renewal, termination, material change or reduction in coverage will be sent Certificate Holder below. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION Contract/Procurement Specialist City of Clearwater Engineering Department P,O, Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Ksz. *Lis& ACORD 25 (2016/03) 1 of 1 #S32659527/M32023611 01988.2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ILSA • • 00020003370369099337033 996 CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Blanket Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - with Products -Completed Operations Coverage Endorsement This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART It is understood and agreed as follows: I. WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an Insured any person or organization whom you are required by written contract to add as an additional insured on this coverage part, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury caused in whole or in part by your acts or omissions, or the acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf: A. in the performance of your ongoing operations subject to such written contract; or B. in the performance of your work subject to such written contract, but only with respect to bodily injury or property damage included in the products -completed operations hazard, and only if: 1. the written contract requires you to provide the additional insured such coverage; and 2. this coverage part provides such coverage. II. But if the written contract requires: A. additional insured coverage under the 11-85 edition, 10-93 edition, or 10-01 edition of CG2010, or under the 10- 01 edition of CG2037; or B. additional insured coverage with "arising out of' language; or C. additional insured coverage to the greatest extent permissible by law; then paragraph I. above is deleted in its entirety and replaced by the following: WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include as an Insured any person or organization whom you are required by written contract to add as an additional insured on this coverage part, but only with respect to liability for bodily injury, property damage or personal and advertising injury arising out of your work that is subject to such written contract. III. Subject always to the terms and conditions of this policy, including the limits of insurance, the Insurer will not provide such additional insured with: A. coverage broader than required by the written contract; or B. a higher limit of insurance than required by the written contract. IV. The insurance granted by this endorsement to the additional insured does not apply to bodily injury, property damage, or personal and advertising injury arising out of: A. the rendering of, or the failure to render, any professional architectural, engineering, or surveying services, including: 1. the preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifications; and 2. supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities; or B. any premises or work for which the additional insured is specifically listed as an additional insured on another endorsement attached to this coverage part. V. Under COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS, the Condition entitled Other Insurance is amended to add the following, which supersedes any provision to the contrary in this Condition or elsewhere in this coverage part: CNA75079XX (10-16) Policy No: 7036909933 Page 1 of 2 Endorsement No: 12 Nat' 1 Fire Ins Co of Hartford Effective Date: 04/01/2023 Insured Name: TLC DIVERSIFIED INC. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. CNA CNA PARAMOUNT Blanket Additional Insured - Owners, Lessees or Contractors - with Products -Completed Operations Coverage Endorsement Primary and Noncontributory Insurance With respect to other insurance available to the additional insured under which the additional insured is a named insured, this insurance is primary to and will not seek contribution from such other insurance, provided that a written contract requires the insurance provided by this policy to be: 1. primary and non-contributing with other insurance available to the additional insured; or 2. primary and to not seek contribution from any other insurance available to the additional insured. But except as specified above, this insurance will be excess of all other insurance available to the additional insured. VI. Solely with respect to the insurance granted by this endorsement, the section entitled COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS is amended as follows: The Condition entitled Duties In The Event of Occurrence, Offense, Claim or Suit is amended with the addition of the following: Any additional insured pursuant to this endorsement will as soon as practicable: 1. give the Insurer written notice of any claim, or any occurrence or offense which may result in a claim; 2. send the Insurer copies of all legal papers received, and otherwise cooperate with the Insurer in the investigation, defense, or settlement of the claim; and 3. make available any other insurance, and tender the defense and indemnity of any claim to any other insurer or self -insurer, whose policy or program applies to a loss that the Insurer covers under this coverage part. However, if the written contract requires this insurance to be primary and non-contributory, this paragraph 3. does not apply to insurance on which the additional insured is a named insured. The Insurer has no duty to defend or indemnify an additional insured under this endorsement until the Insurer receives written notice of a claim from the additional insured. VII. Solely with respect to the insurance granted by this endorsement, the section entitled DEFINITIONS is amended to add the following definition: Written contract means a written contract or written agreement that requires you to make a person or organization an additional insured on this coverage part, provided the contract or agreement: A. is currently in effect or becomes effective during the term of this policy; and B. was executed prior to: 1. the bodily injury or property damage; or 2. the offense that caused the personal and advertising injury; for which the additional insured seeks coverage. Any coverage granted by this endorsement shall apply solely to the extent permissible by law. All other terms and conditions of the Policy remain unchanged. This endorsement, which forms a part of and is for attachment to the Policy issued by the designated Insurers, takes effect on the effective date of said Policy at the hour stated in said Policy, unless another effective date is shown below, and expires concurrently with said Policy. CNA75079XX (10-16) Page 2 of 2 Nat'l Fire Ins Co of Hartford Insured Name: TLC DIVERSIFIED INC. Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Policy No: 7036909933 Endorsement No: 12 Effective Date: 04 / 01 /2023 CNA • I Business Auto Policy Policy Endorsement CONTRACTORS EXTENDED COVERAGE ENDORSEMENT BUSINESS AUTO PLUS THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM I. LIABILITY COVERAGE A. Who Is An Insured The following is added to Section II, Paragraph A.1., Who Is An Insured: 1. a. Any incorporated entity of which the Named Insured owns a majority of the voting stock on the date of inception of this Coverage Form; provided that, b. The insurance afforded by this provision A.1. does not apply to any such entity that is an insured under any other liability "policy" providing auto coverage. 2. Any organization you newly acquire or form, other than a limited liability company, partnership or joint venture, and over which you maintain majority ownership interest. The insurance afforded by this provision A.2.: a. Is effective on the acquisition or formation date, and is afforded only until the end of the policy period of this Coverage Form, or the next anniversary of its inception date, whichever is earlier. b. Does not apply to: (1) Bodily injury or property damage caused by an accident that occurred before you acquired or formed the organization; or (2) Any such organization that is an insured under any other liability "policy" providing auto coverage. 3. Any person or organization that you are required by a written contract to name as an additional insured is an insured but only with respect to their legal liability for acts or omissions of a person, who qualifies as an insured under SECTION 11 — WHO IS AN INSURED and for whom Liability Coverage is afforded under this policy. If required by written contract, this insurance will be primary and non-contributory to insurance on which the additional insured is a Named Insured. 4. An employee of yours is an insured while operating an auto hired or rented under a contract or agreement in that employee's name, with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. "Policy", as used in this provision A. Who Is An Insured, includes those policies that were in force on the inception date of this Coverage Form but: 1. Which are no longer in force; or 2. Whose limits have been exhausted. B. Bail Bonds and Loss of Earnings Section 11, Paragraphs A.2. (2) and A.2. (4) are revised as follows: 1. In a.(2), the limit for the cost of bail bonds is changed from $2,000 to $5,000; and 2. In a.(4), the limit for the loss of earnings is changed from $250 to $500 a day. Form No: CNA63359XX 104-2012) Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Endorsement No: 14; Page: 1 of 4 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Policy No: BUA 7036910080 Policy Effective Date: 04/01/2023 Policy Page: 85 of 180 © Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of the Insurance Services Office, Inc., used with its permission. CNA Business Auto Policy Policy Endorsement • C. Fellow Employee Section II, Paragraph B.5 does not apply. Such coverage as is afforded by this provision C. is excess over any other collectible insurance. 11. PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE A. Glass Breakage — Hitting A Bird Or Animal — Falling Objects Or Missiles The following is added to Section III, Paragraph A.3.: With respect to any covered auto, any deductible shown in the Declarations will not apply to glass breakage if such glass is repaired, in a manner acceptable to us, rather than replaced. B. Transportation Expenses Section 111, Paragraph A.4.a. is revised, with respect to transportation expense incurred by you, to provide: a. $60 per day, in lieu of $20; subject to b. $1,800 maximum, in lieu of $600. C. Loss of Use Expenses Section 111, Paragraph A.4.b. is revised, with respect to loss of use expenses incurred by you, to provide: a. $1,000 maximum, in lieu of $600. D. Hired "Autos" The following is added to Section III. Paragraph A.: • 5. Hired "Autos" If Physical Damage coverage is provided under this policy, and such coverage does not extend to Hired Autos, then Physical Damage coverage is extended to: a. Any covered auto you lease, hire, rent or borrow without a driver; and b. Any covered auto hired or rented by your employee without a driver, under a contract in that individual employee's name, with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. c. The most we will pay for any one accident or loss is the actual cash value, cost of repair, cost of replacement or $75,000, whichever is less, minus a $500 deductible for each covered auto. No deductible applies to loss caused by fire or lightning. d. The physical damage coverage as is provided by this provision is equal to the physical damage coverage(s) provided on your owned autos. e. Such physical damage coverage for hired autos will: (1) Include Toss of use, provided it is the consequence of an accident for which the Named Insured is legally liable, and as a result of which a monetary loss is sustained by the leasing or rental concern. (2) Such coverage as is provided by this provision will be subject to a limit of $750 per accident. E. Airbag Coverage The following is added to Section III, Paragraph B.3.: The accidental discharge of an airbag shall not be considered mechanical breakdown. • Form No: CNA63359XX (04-2012) Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Endorsement No: 14; Page: 2 of 4 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Policy No: BUA 7036910080 Policy Effective Date: 04/01/2023 i Policy Page: 86 of 180 © Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of the Insurance Services Office, Inc., used with its permission. • CNA Business Auto Policy Policy Endorsement F. Electronic Equipment Section III, Paragraphs B.4.c and B.4.d. are deleted and replaced by the following: c. Physical Damage Coverage on a covered auto also applies to loss to any permanently installed electronic equipment including its antennas and other accessories d. A $100 per occurrence deductible applies to the coverage provided by this provision. G. Diminution In Value The following is added to Section III, Paragraph 6.6.: Subject to the following, the diminution in value exclusion does not apply to: a. Any covered auto of the private passenger type you lease, hire, rent or borrow, without a driver for a period of 30 days or Tess, while performing duties related to the conduct of your business; and b. Any covered auto of the private passenger type hired or rented by your employee without a driver for a period of 30 days or Tess, under a contract in that individual employee's name, with your permission, while performing duties related to the conduct of your business. c. Such coverage as is provided by this provision is limited to a diminution in value loss arising directly out of accidental damage and not as a result of the failure to make repairs; faulty or incomplete maintenance or repairs; or the installation of substandard parts. d. The most we will pay for loss to a covered auto in any one accident is the lesser of: (1) $5,000; or (2) 20% of the auto's actual cash value (ACV). III. Drive Other Car Coverage — Executive Officers The following is added to Sections II and III: 1. Any auto you don't own, hire or borrow is a covered auto for Liability Coverage while being used by, and for Physical Damage Coverage while in the care, custody or control of, any of your "executive officers", except: a. An auto owned by that "executive officer" or a member of that person's household; or b. An auto used by that "executive officer" while working in a business of selling, servicing, repairing or parking autos. Such Liability and/or Physical Damage Coverage as is afforded by this provision. (1) Equal to the greatest of those coverages afforded any covered auto; and (2) Excess over any other collectible insurance. 2. For purposes of this provision, "executive officer" means a person holding any of the officer positions created by your charter, constitution, by-laws or any other similar governing document, and, while a resident of the same household, includes that person's spouse. Such "executive officers" are insureds while using a covered auto described in this provision. IV. BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS A. Duties In The Event Of Accident, Claim, Suit Or Loss The following is added to Section IV, Paragraph A.2.a.: Form No: CNA63359XX 104-2012) Policy No: BUA 7036910080 Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Policy Effective Date: 04/01/20231 Endorsement No: 14; Page: 3 of 4 Policy Page: 87 of 180 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 1 ® Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of the Insurance Services Office, Inc., used with its permission. • • • CNA Business Auto Policy Policy Endorsement (4) Your employees may know of an accident or loss. This will not mean that you have such knowledge, unless such accident or Toss is known to you or if you are not an individual, to any of your executive officers or partners or your insurance manager. The following is added to Section IV, Paragraph A.2.b.: (6) Your employees may know of documents received concerning a claim or suit. This will not mean that you have such knowledge, unless receipt of such documents is known to you or if you are not an individual, to any of your executive officers or partners or your insurance manager. B. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us The following is added to Section IV, Paragraph A.5. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us: We waive any right of recovery we may have, because of payments we make for injury or damage, against any person or organization for whom or which you are required by written contract or agreement to obtain this waiver from us. This injury or damage must arise out of your activities under a contract with that person or organization. You must agree to that requirement prior to an accident or loss. C. Concealment, Misrepresentation or Fraud The following is added to Section IV, Paragraph B.2.: Your failure to disclose all hazards existing on the date of inception of this Coverage Form shall not prejudice you with respect to the coverage afforded provided such failure or omission is not intentional. D. Other Insurance The following is added to Section IV, Paragraph B.5.: Regardless of the provisions of Paragraphs 5.a. and 5.d. above, the coverage provided by this policy shall be on a primary non-contributory basis. This provision is applicable only when required by a written contract. That written contract must have been entered into prior to Accident or Loss. E. Policy Period, Coverage Territory Section IV, Paragraph B. 7.(5).(a). is revised to provide: a. 45 days of coverage in lieu of 30 days. V. DEFINITIONS Section V. paragraph C. is deleted and replaced by the following: Bodily injury means bodily injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including mental anguish, mental injury or death resulting from any of these. Form No: CNA63359XX (04-2012) Endorsement Effective Date: Endorsement Expiration Date: Endorsement No: 14; Page: 4 of 4 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 1 Policy No: BUA 7036910080 Policy Effective Date: 04/01/2023 Policy Page: 88 of 180 v Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. Includes copyrighted material of the Insurance Services Office, Inc., used with its permission. CNA CNA Paramount Excess and Umbrella Liability Policy Declarations Schedule of Underlying Insurance Underlying Insurer Policy Number Policy Period Note: National Fire Insurance Company of Hartford 7036909933 04/01/2023 to 04/01/2024 Continental Insurance Company 7036910080 04/01/2023 to 04/01/2024 Underlying Insurance I Coverages General Liability Each Occurrence Limit j Auto Liability General Aggregate Limit Per Location : no Per Project : yes Products/ Completed Operations Aggregate Limit Personal and Advertising Injury Liability Limit Combined Single Limit Limits of Insurance $1,000,000 $ 2,000,000 $2,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Form No: CNA75501 XX (03-2015) Policy Declarations Page: 2 of 4 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Policy No: CUE 7036910497 Policy Effective Date: 04/01/2023 j Policy Page: 10 of 58 ® Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. CNA CNA Paramount Excess and Umbrella Liability Policy Declarations Underlying Insurer Policy Number Policy Period Note: Underlying Insurance Coverages Limits of Insurance Bridgefield Employers Insurance Company 830-57104 04/01/2023 to 04/01/2024 Employers Liability Bodily Injury by Accident- Each Accident Limit Bodily Injury by Disease - Policy Limit Bodily Injury by Disease - Each Employee Limit $1,000,000 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 IN ANY JURISDICTION, STATE, OR PROVINCE WHERE THE AMOUNT OF EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING INSURER(S) IS BY LAW "UNLIMITED", THE UNDERLYING EMPLOYERS LIABILITY LIMIT(S) SHOWN IN THE ABOVE SCHEDULE DO NOT APPLY AND NO COVERAGE SHALL BE PROVIDED FOR EMPLOYERS LIABILITY UNDER THIS POLICY. National Fire Insurance Employee Benefits Each Employee Limit Company of Hartford Liability Aggregate Limit 7036909933 04/01/2023 to 04/01/2024 $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Forms and Endorsements Attached to this Policy See SCHEDULE OF FORMS AND ENDORSEMENTS Premium Minimum Earned Premium 0% of the Total Premium , Total Premium $97,761.00 Premium includes the following amount for Certified Acts of Terrorism Coverage $949 Florida Insurance Guaranty Association Regular Assessment Surcharge $1,917.00 Form No: CNA75501XX (03-2015) Policy Declarations Page: 3 of 4 Underwriting Company: The Continental Insurance Company, 151 N Franklin St, Chicago, IL 60606 Policy No: CUE 7036910497 Policy Effective Date: 04/01/2023 !. Policy Page: 11 of 58 ® Copyright CNA All Rights Reserved. WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS LIABILITY INSURANCE POLICY WAIVER OF OUR RIGHT TO RECOVER FROM OTHERS ENDORSEMENT WC 00 03 13 (Ed. 4-84) We have the right to recover our payments from anyone liable for an injury covered by this policy. We will not enforce our right against the person or organization named in the Schedule. (This agreement applies only to the extent that you perform work under a written contract that requires you to obtain this agreement from us.) This agreement shall not operate directly or indirectly to benefit anyone not named in the Schedule. Schedule *Blanket Waiver of Subrogation Applies* This endorsement changes the policy to which it is attached and is effective on the date issued unless otherwise stated. Date Prepared: February 7, 2023 Carrier: Bridgefield Employers Insurance Company Effective Date of Endorsement: April 1, 2023 Policy Number: 830-57104 Countersigned by. Insured: TLC Diversified, Inc. WC 00 03 13 (Ed. 4-84) "Includes copyright material of the National Council on Compensation Insurance, Inc. used with its permission. Copyright 1984 NCCI" BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH ADDENDUM NO. 1 for 20-0008 UT Lift Station 16 Clearwater, Florida DATE: 02/16/2023 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned • Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the Contract Documents: The following items shall be updated in the Contract Documents: Context: after receiving some questions from prospective bidders, we noticed that the current spec book and drawing set uploaded to the City's website were incomplete. The questions from bidders will still be answered in Addendum No.2. Considering this, the most up-to-date specs and drawing set have now been uploaded to the City's website. The differences between incomplete file and corrected file include: • Specs Book: Added Section IVa — Supplemental Technical Specifications. • Drawing Set: Added pages G002 to G006 The following items shall be removed and replaced from the Contract Documents: 1. Disregard the following pdf files from the City's Website Bid Documents: • Contract-Specs-20-0008-UT-Lift-Station-16.pdf (PDF, 2MB) • Drawings-20-0008-UT-Lift-Station-16.pdf (PDF, 45MB) 2. Replace the above files in #1 with the following corrected files: • Contract -Specs -20 -0008 -UT -Lift -Station -16 -Updated -2023-02-16 • Drawings -20 -0008 -UT -Lift -Station -16 -Updated -2023-02-16 Addendum 1 Page 1 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH ADDENDUM NO. 2 for 20-0008 UT Lift Station 16 Clearwater, Florida DATE: 02/24/2023 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned • • For reference, Addendum No.1 was issued 02/16/2023. Please refer to the City of Clearwater website for more details. Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the Contract Documents: General Comment regarding this project: The contractor will have to protect with proper signage and safety for the Public due to increased pedestrian traffic related to Imagine Clearwater. The Contractor staging area will have to be cordoned off to ensure public safety. Q1.Does a GC license requirement or utility license cover that work? Al: The City requires a copy of a current Contractor License/Registration with the State of Florida and Pinellas County. Q2.Does the contractor have adequate space for staging area or is all the grassy area a parking lot for Imagine Clearwater? A2: The City owns the grassy area to the East and South of the project site. The contractor may plan to use this grassy area for staging considering that any stagging plan will require preliminary City approval. Periodically the City may require use of the area for large event overflow parking and will coordinate those events with the Contractor well in advance. Q3. Will you approve other material suppliers for coatings and lining systems? A3: Approved materials for coatings and linings are listed in the project specifications. Contractor may submit a variation request to the Engineer for review but acceptance is not guaranteed. Per Section III, Item 8 of the contract specifications: "The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or 'or equal' items." Addendum 2 Page 1/2 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • SAY T() BEACH Q4.There does not seem to be an input on the PLC for when the hatch opens. Does the City want to see the alarm or just checkit locally on the lift station? A4: The City prefers to check it locally at the lift station. QS.Any preference from PLC from the City? Or open to suggestion? AS: The Contractor shall use the City's Pump Station controller standard as shown on the RTU panel drawings. Please refer to the latest plan set uploaded as part of Addendum No.1. Q6.The pressure switch only appears as information in the drawings. Is the City sure they want a pressure switch since it does not appear in the drawings or specs? A6: Please refer to the latest plan set uploaded as part of Addendum No.1. Detail 1-301 to be applied to pressure gauges only. No pressure switch in the WORK. Q7.Would the City consider adding "Sanitary Pump Stations" as a pre -qualification category for the referenced project? A7: Not at this time. Q8.What are the flow rates for this lift station for bypassing purposes? A8: The full capacity of the existing lift station (2,500 gpm) must be provided. Q9.Please provide a bypass specification with the max gpm and tdh for this lift station as well as the anticipated suction and discharge points. A9: The bypass pumping requirements are shown in Section IV 209. The capacity of the existing lift station is 2,500 gpm @ 75 -ft (+bypass system losses). The anticipated upstream suction manhole is 150 -ft N/NW from the existing lift station, north of Pierce St. The discharge location is an existing aboveground forcemain connection on the lift station site. Addendum 2 Page 2/2 • • • BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH ADDENDUM NO. 3 for 20-0008 UT Lift Station 16 Clearwater, Florida DATE: 03/09/2023 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 3 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned • • For reference, Addendum No.1 was issued 02/16/2023. Addendum No. 2 was issued 02/24/2023. Please refer to the City of Clearwater website for more details. For the General Comment and Q1 through Q9, please see Addendum No.2 Bidders on the above project are hereby notified that the following Addenda are made to the Contract Documents: Q10. It looks like there is only one 12" sanitary line coming into existing station. Please see attached sheet (highlighted in pink). Is this the only flow we need to worry about? A10: Yes, this is the only sanitary line into the existing wetwell. Q11. It shows a manhole right in front of the existing lift station, I'm guessing we cannot bypass out of it because of the demolition that will be taking place and that's why the city noted in addendum 2 that bypass manhole approx. 150' away? All: Correct, the manhole immediately upstream of the existing wetwell will be modified as part of this project, therefore bypassing of the flow will need to be done from the manhole located in the parking area. Q12. There is an 18" existing sanitary line, a 16" existing sanitary line, and another existing sanitary line showing on the plans (highlighted in yellow), are these of any concern to us? Al2: None of these lines are part of the WORK. Addendum 3 Page 1/2 BRIGHT AND BEAUTIFUL • BAY TO BEACH Q13. Can CPP Sprayliner be submitted as an alternate product for the epoxy coating? It has been approved on other City of Clearwater projects as well as being approved in Tampa and Pinellas County. A14: Approved materials for coatings and linings are listed in the project specifications. Contractor may submit a variation request to the Engineer for review, but acceptance is not guaranteed. Per Section III, Item 8 of the contract specifications: "The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or 'or equal' items.". Addendum 3 Page 2/2 • • • • DRUG FREE WORKPLACE FORM • • The undersigned vendor in accordance with Florida Statute 287.087, as amended from time to time, hereby certifies that TLC Diversified, Inc. does: (Name of Business) 1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violation of such prohibition. 2. Inform employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. 3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities, or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement, and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty, or nolo contendere to any violation of chapter 893, Florida Statutes, as amended from time to time, or of any controlled substance law of the United States, or any State, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. 5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance, or rehabilitation program, if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. 6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. As the person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above requirements. TLC Diversified, Inc. Bidders Signature Eric Macek, VP Pre -Construction March 22, 2023 Date • • • SECTION E- BID SUBMITTAL FORM FLORIDA TRENCH SAFETY ACT CERTIFICATION AND DISCLOSURE STATEMENT The undersigned acknowledges the requirements of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Section 553.60 et. seq. Florida Statutes). A. The Bidder further acknowledges that the Florida Trench Safety Act, (the Act) establishes the Federal excavation safety standards set forth at 29 C.F.R Section 1926.650 Subpart P, as the interim state standard until such time as the state of Florida, through its Department of Labor and Employment Security, or any successor agency, adopts, updates, or revises said interim standard. This State of Florida standard may be supplemented by special shoring requirements established by the State of Florida or any of its political subdivisions. 8. The Bidder, as Contractor, shall comply with all applicable excavation/trench safety standards. C. The contractor shall consider the geotechnical data available from the County, if any, the Contractor's own sources, and all other relevant information in its design of the trench safety system to be employed on the subject Project. The Contractor acknowledges sole responsibilities for the selection of the data on which it relies in designing the safety system, as well as for the system itself. D. The amounts that the Bidder has set forth for pipe installation includes the following excavation/trench safety measures and the linear feet of trench excavated under each safety measure. These units, costs, and unit values shall be disclosed solely for the purpose of compliance with procedural requirements of the Act. No adjustment to the Agreement Time or price shall be made for any difference in the actual number of linear feet of trench excavation, except as may be otherwise provided In these Contract For Information Only, Not for Payment Purposes $ 30,000.00 Bidder may use additional sheets as necessary to extend this form. Failure to complete the above may result in the bid being declared non- responsive. E. The amount disclosed as the cost of compliance with the applicable trench safety requirements does not constitute the extent of the Contractor's obligation to comply with said standards. The Contractor shall extend additional sums at no additional cost to the County, if necessary, to comply with the Act (except as otherwise be provided). F. Acceptance of the bid to which this certification and disclosure applies in no way represents that the County or its representatives has evaluated and thereby determined that the above costs are adequate to comply with the applicable trench safety requirements nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor of its sole responsibility to comply with the applicable trench safety requirements. TLC Diversified, Inc. Company Name r�J Name and Title Eric Macek/VP Pre -Construction (941) 722-0621 / (941) 722-1382 Address: Telephone/I-ax 2719 17th Street East 59-2513308 Palmetto, FT. 34221 Federal Employee ID NO. (FEIN) emacek@ticdiv.com Email of Account Representative Trench Safety Measure (Description) Units of Measure (LF, SF) Unit (Quantity) Unit Cost Extended Cost 1. Sheeting LS 1 $ 30,000.00 $ 30,000.00 2. $ $ 3. $ $ 4. $ $ 5. $ $ For Information Only, Not for Payment Purposes $ 30,000.00 Bidder may use additional sheets as necessary to extend this form. Failure to complete the above may result in the bid being declared non- responsive. E. The amount disclosed as the cost of compliance with the applicable trench safety requirements does not constitute the extent of the Contractor's obligation to comply with said standards. The Contractor shall extend additional sums at no additional cost to the County, if necessary, to comply with the Act (except as otherwise be provided). F. Acceptance of the bid to which this certification and disclosure applies in no way represents that the County or its representatives has evaluated and thereby determined that the above costs are adequate to comply with the applicable trench safety requirements nor does it in any way relieve the Contractor of its sole responsibility to comply with the applicable trench safety requirements. TLC Diversified, Inc. Company Name r�J Name and Title Eric Macek/VP Pre -Construction (941) 722-0621 / (941) 722-1382 Address: Telephone/I-ax 2719 17th Street East 59-2513308 Palmetto, FT. 34221 Federal Employee ID NO. (FEIN) emacek@ticdiv.com Email of Account Representative • PUBLIC ENTITY CRIME FORM SWORN STATEMENT UNDER SECTION 287.133(3) (a), FLORIDA STATUTES ON PUBLIC ENTITY CRIMES THIS FORM MUST BE SIGNED AND SWORN TO IN THE PRESENCE OF A NOTARY PUBLIC OR OTHER OFFICER AUTHORIZED TO ADMINISTER OATHS. 1. This sworn statement is submitted to City of Clearwater, FL by: Eric Macek, VP Pre -Construction (print individual's name and title) for TLC Diversified, Inc. (print name of entity submitting sworn statement) whose business address is 2719 17th St. E., Palmetto, FL 34221 • and (if applicable its Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) is 59-2513308 2. I understand that a "public entity crime" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(g), Florida Statutes, means a violation of any state or federal law by a person with respect to and directly related to the transaction of business with any public entity or with an agency or political subdivision of any other state or with the United States, including, but not limited to, any bid or contract for goods or services to be provided to any public entity or an agency or political subdivision of any other state or of the United States and involving antitrust, fraud, theft, bribery, collusion, racketeering, conspiracy, or material misrepresentation. 3. I understand that "convicted" or "conviction" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(b), Florida Statutes means a finding of guilt or a conviction of a public entity crime, with or without an adjudication of guilt, in any federal or state trial court of record relating to charges brought by indictment of information after July 1, 1989, as a result of a jury verdict, non jury trial, or entry of a plea of guilty or nolo contendere. 4. I understand that an "affiliate" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(a), Florida Statutes means: • • a. A predecessor or successor of a person convicted of a public entity crime; or • • b. An entity under the control of any natural person who is active in the management of the entity and who has been convicted of a public entity crime. The term "affiliate" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in the management of an affiliate. The ownership by one person of shares constituting a controlling interest in another person, or a pooling of equipment or income among persons when not for fair market value under an arm's length agreement, shall be a prima facie case that one person controls another person. A person who knowingly enters into a joint - venture with a person who has been convicted of a public entity crime in Florida during the preceding 36 months shall be considered an affiliate. 5. I understand that a "person" as defined in Para. 287.133(1)(e), Florida Statutes means any natural person or entity organized under the laws of any state or of the United States with the legal power to enter into a binding contract and which bids or applies to bid on contracts for the provision of goods or services let by a public entity, or which otherwise transacts or applies to transact business with a public entity. The term "person" includes those officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, and agents who are active in management of an entity. 6. Based on information and belief, the statement which I have marked below is true in relation to the entity submitting this sworn statement. Please indicate which statement applies: X Neither the entity submitting this sworn statement, nor any officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in management of the entity, nor any affiliate of the entity have been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members or agents who are active in management of the entity, or an affiliate of the entity has been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. The entity submitting this sworn statement, or one or more of the officers, directors, executives, partners, shareholders, employees, members, or agents who are active in the management of the entity, or an affiliate of the entity has been charged with and convicted of a public entity crime subsequent to July 1, 1989. However, there has been a subsequent proceeding before a Hearing Officer of the State of Florida, Division of Administrative Hearings and the Final Order entered by the Hearing Officer determined that it was not in the public interest to place e • entity submitting this sworn statement on the convicted vendor list (attach a copy of the final order). I UNDERSTAND THAT THE SUBMISSION OF THIS FORM TO THE CONTRACTING OFFICER FOR THE PUBLIC ENTITY IDENTIFIED IN PARAGRAPH ONE ABOVE IS FOR THAT PUBLIC ENTITY ONLY AND, THAT THIS FORM IS VALID THROUGH DECEMBER 31 OF THE CALENDAR YEAR IN WHICH IT IS FILED. I ALSO UNDERSTAND THAT I AM REQUIRED TO INFORM THE PUBLIC ENTITY PRIOR TO ENTERING INTO A CONTRACT IN EXCESS OF THE THRESHOLD AMOUNT PROVIDED IN SECTION 287.017 FLORIDA STATUTES FOR CATEGORY TWO OF ANY CHANGE IN THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS FORM. TLC Diversified, Inc. (Signature) Eric Macek, VP Pre -Construction Sworn to and subscribed before me this 22nd day of March, 2023 Personally known to me. • Notary Public — State of Florida Notary Stamp: • LINDA KAY MOORE Notary Public - Stato of Florida �s `w;�'� yF Commission # GG ��9636 ;,,,t My Comm. Expires Mar 20, 2024 Bended through Nationa' Notary Assn, Linda Kay Moore • UNANIMOUS CONSENT OF SHAREHOLDERS AND DIRECTORS OF TLC DIVERSIFIED INC. February 5, 2022 The undersigned, being the sole shareholder and director of the TLC Diversified Inc., a Florida corporation (the "Company"), hereby consent to the adoption of the following resolutions, effective as of the date hereof, by written consent in lieu of a meeting: WHEREAS, the undersigned desire to have the Company continue to bid on projects from time to time and further desire to designate which of its officers have the authority to execute and deliver such bids; NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED, that the following officers (the "Authorized Officers") be and each hereby is authorized, empowered and directed, in the name and on behalf of Company, to: (i) to execute and deliver bids for construction projects from time to time and (ii) negotiate, finalize and enter into, execute and deliver such bids and contracts related thereto, with such additions, deletions or other modifications deemed by such Authorized Officer to be necessary, advisable or appropriate: Name of Officer Offices Dalas Lamberson Chief Executive Officer and President Deanna Justus Secretary Eric Macek Vice President of Pre -Construction Robert LaChance Construction Manager Mark Selph Vice President of Operations FURTHER RESOLVED, that each such Authorized Officer be and hereby is authorized, empowered and directed, in the name and on behalf of the Company, to undertake any other action deemed by such Authorized Officer to be necessary, advisable or appropriate in furtherance of the Company's objectives in connection with the foregoing resolution, and that any such action taken or any agreement, certificate, notice, letter or other document executed and delivered by such Authorized Officer in connection with any such action shall be conclusive evidence of such Authorized Officer's authority to take, execute and deliver the same; FURTHER RESOLVED, that all actions heretofore taken by such Authorized Officer or any other manager, director, officer, member, representative or agent of the Company, or any of their affiliates in connection with the foregoing resolutions and the matters or Transaction described therein be and hereby are ratified, confirmed and approved in all respects as the act and deed of the Company; FURTHER RESOLVED, that these resolutions may be executed (i) via facsimile, e-mail or other means of electronic transmission, which shall be deemed an original and (ii) in any number of separate counterparts (by original or electronic means), each of which shall be an original, and all of which taken together shall be deemed to constitute one and the same instrument. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned have authorized, approved and adopted the forgoing resolutions effective as of the date first above written. SHAREHOLDER: Dalas Lamberson DIRECTOR: Dalas Lamberson Swom to and subscribed before me, Dalas Lamberson, whom is Personally Known to Me, this 5th Day of February, 2022 Mom Public State of Florida Coming, HH202764 Expires 11/29/2025 Date: 2/5/2022 Notary Public: Lauren McGovern • PALMETTO WEST PALM BEACH TAMPA Corporate Office 7233 Southern Blvd 12814 Dupont Circle 2719 17th St. East Suite B-1 Building B, Suite 4-A Palmetto, FL 34221 West Palm Beach, FL 33413 Tampa, FL 33626 .. 941.722.0621 M 941.722.1382 CG C041816 CU C053963 • UNANIMOUS CONSENT OF THE SOLE SHAREHOLDER AND DIRECTOR OF TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC. February 4, 2022 The undersigned, being the sole shareholder and sole the director of the TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC., a Florida corporation (the "Company"), hereby consents to the adoption of the following resolutions, effective as of the date hereof, by written consent in lieu of a meeting: WHEREAS, the undersigned shareholder acquired 100% of the capital stock of the Company as of the date hereof and desires to appoint new directors to serve on the Company's Board of Directors (the "Board") and the undersigned newly appointed directors desire to appoint new officers to serve as the Company's officers; NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED, that the undersigned sole shareholder of the Company hereby elects and appoints the following individuals as sole new directors of the Corporation, to serve as directors until their successors are duly elected and qualified: Dales Lamberson FURTHER RESOLVED, that undersigned newly appointed director hereby appoints the following persons to the office set forth opposite their names, to serve in those capacities until the Board duty elects their successors, or until their earlier resignation, removal or death: Name of Officer Offices Dales Lamberson Chief Executive Officer and President Thurston Lamberson Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer Deanna Justus Secretary Eric Macek Vice President of Pre -Construction Robert LaChance Construction Manager Mark Selph Vice President of Operations FURTHER RESOLVED, that these resolutions may be executed (i) via facsimile, e-mail or other means of electronic transmission, which shall be deemed an original and (ii) in any number of separate counterparts (by original or electronic means), each of which shall be an original, and alt of which taken together shall be deemed to constitute one and the same instrument. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned have authorized, approved and adopted the forgoing resolutions effective as of the date first above written. SHAREHOLDER: Dales Lamberson DIRECTOR: Dales Lamberson Sworn to and subscribed before me, Dales Lamberson, whom is Personally Known to Me, this 4th Day of February, 2022 Ofiummoillqn ee:10,4cn- LAUREN MCGOVEERN Notary Public State of Florida Commie HH202764 Expires 11/29/2025 Date: 2/4/2022 Notary Public: Lauren McGovern • PALMETTO WEST PALM BEACH TAMPA Corporate Office 7233 Southern Blvd 12814 Dupont Circle 2719 17th St. East Suite B-1 Building B, Suite 4-A Palmetto, FL 34221 West PaLm Beach, FL 33413 Tampa, FL 33626 �. 941.722.0621 el 941.722.1382 CG C041816 CU C053963 • • February 22, 2023 Thurston Lamberson, President TLC Diversified 22719 17th Street East Palmetto, FL 34221 City of Clearwater Engineering Department, Post Office Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758-4748 Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Ste. 220, Clearwater, Florida 33756 Telephone (727) 562-4750, Fax (727) 562-4755 Please accept this official notice that TLC Diversified has been approved to bid for City of Clearwater construction projects falling into the following parameters: Approved Maximum Bid Limit: $UNLIMITED Prequalification Expiration: February 22, 2026 Approved Categories: • Demolition • Horizontal Directional Drilling • Sanitary & Storm Sewers • Sanitary Pump Stations • Specialty Concrete Repair & Coating Work • Wastewater & Water Treatment Facilities • Water and Force Mains The Engineering Construction Manager reserves the right to adjust categories and the maximum project bid value during the three-year approval period based on direct work experience and updates submitted. This pre -qualification applies to standard types of construction projects. Projects requiring special expertise or unusually difficult construction categories may require separate pre - qualifications following bid advertisement. City policy dictates that financial statement documents not be copied or retained, so this item was deleted following the pre -qualification approval. We appreciate your interest and look forward to receiving your bids on City of Clearwater projects. For our current bid list visit: httios://www.mvclearwater.com/business/bid-information. Je ,r &wg-ett- Jennifer Burgett Contract & Procurement Specialist NOTE: There could be project -specific requirements (i.e. licensure, registration, certification, etc.) necessary to bid on projects. It is important to read bid documents carefully. Doreen Caudell, Councilmember Dr. Bob Cundiff, Councilmember George N. Cretekos, Mayor David Allbritton, Councilmember Hoyt Hamilton, Councilmember "Equal Employment and Affirmative Action Employer" 4/26/22, 9:37 AM Detail by Entity Name • • • DIVISION OF CORPORATIONS Jivnicm r (if org C10,)'Pur) Yrrr it ■...rte mi official JSiuv of Florida wee ii Department of State / Division of Corporations / Search Records / Search by Entity Name / Detail by Entity Name Florida Profit Corporation TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC. Filing Information Document Number H51364 FEUEIN Number 59-2513308 Date Filed 04/04/1985 State FL Status ACTIVE Last Event AMENDMENT AND NAME CHANGE Event Date Filed 08/23/2017 Event Effective Date NONE Principal Address 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO, FL 34221 Changed: 04/25/2001 M i ing Address 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO, FL 34221 Changed: 04/25/2001 Registered Agent Name & Address Lamberson, Dales 303 Ocala Rd Belleair, FL 33756 Name Changed: 02/18/2022 Address Changed: 02/21/2022 Officer/Director Detail Name & Address Title DP Lamberson, Dalas haps://search.sunbiz.org/Inquiry/CorporationSearch/SearchResultDetail?inquirytype=EntityName&directionType=Initial&searchNameOrder=TLCDIVE... 1/3 4/26/22, 9:37 AM Detail by Entity Name 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO, FL 34221 • • 1 Title CFO LAMBERSON, THURSTON 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO, FL 34221 Title Secretary Justus, Deanna 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO, FL 34221 Annual Reports Report Year Filed Date 2021 01/11/2021 2022 02/18/2022 2022 02/21/2022 Document Imam 02/21/2022 -- AMENDED ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/18/2022 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/11/2021 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/23/2020 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/29/2019 --ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/12/2018 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 08/23/2017 -- Amendment and Name Change View image in PDF format 01/09/2017 --ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/24/2016 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/12/2015 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/14/2014 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/28/2013 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format I J 01/25/2012 --ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format J 02/02/2011 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/08/2010 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/05/2009 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 1 03/28/2008 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 01/16/2007 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 03/13/2006 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/05/2005 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/20/2004 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/28/2003 --ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/19/2002 —ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/13/2001 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format 02/01/2000 -- ANNUAL REPORT View image in PDF format https://search.sunbiz.org/I nquiry/CorporationSearch/SearchResultDetail?inquirytype=EntityName&directionType=Initial&searchNameOrder-TLCDIVE... 2/3 4/26/22, 9:37 AM 04/20/1999 --ANNUAL REPORT 02/10/1998 --ANNUAL REPORT • 02/18/1997 -- ANNUAL REPORT 01/29/1996 -- ANNUAL REPORT 01/19/1995 -- ANNUAL REPORT Detail by Entity Name View image in PDF format View image in PDF format View image in PDF format View image in PDF format View image in PDF format https://search.sunbiz.org/Inquiry/CorporationSearch/SearchResultDetail?inquirytype=EntityName&directionType=Initial&searchNameOrdemTLCDIVE... 3/3 2022 FLORIDA PROFIT CORPORATION ANNUAL REPORT DOCUMENT# H51364 Entity Name: TLC DIVERSIFIED, INC. a/Current Principal Place of Business: 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO, FL 34221 Current Mailing Address: 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO, FL 34221 US FEI Number: 59-2513308 Name and Address of Current Registered Agent: LAMBERSON, DALAS 5539 2ND AVE CIRCLE PALMETTO, FL 34221 US FILED Feb 18, 2022 Secretary of State 0952915952CC Certificate of Status Desired: No The above named entity submits this statement for the purpose of changing its registered office or registered agent, or both, in the State of Florida. SIGNATURE: DALAS LAMBERSON 02/18/2022 Electronic Signature of Registered Agent Officer/Director Detail : Title Name Address .City -State -Zip: Title • Name Address City -State -Zip: DP LAMBERSON, DALAS 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO FL 34221 SECRETARY JUSTUS, DEANNA 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO FL 34221 Title Name Address City -State -Zip: CFO LAMBERSON, THURSTON 2719 17TH STREET EAST PALMETTO FL 34221 Date 1 hereby certify that the information indicated on this report or supplemental report is true and accurate and that my electronic signature shall have the same legal effect as if made under oath; that I am an officer or director of the corporation or the receiver or trustee empowered to execute this report as required by Chapter 607, Florida Statutes; and that my name appears above, or on an attachment with all other like empowered. SIGNATURE: DALAS LAMBERSON PRESIDENT 02/18/2022 Electronic Signature of Signing Officer/Director Detail Date • • CLEARWATER BIRICIIIT AND 8F Al.TrU UL • SAY' To BIA.c14 BID ITEMS UNIT QTY UNIT PRICE AMOUNT 1 Demolition - Demolition of the existing LS -16 facilities. This includes the existing wetwell, valve vaults, concrete slab, valves, piping, conduits/cables, electricaUcontrol panels, light fixtures, instrumentation/control equipment, fencing, etc. as shown in the Contract Documents. LS 1 $ 131,000.00 $ 131,000.00 2 Site civil - Site civil work associated with the WORK, including site preparation grading, erosion control, excavation and backfill materials. Modifications to manholes and bypass pumping as shown in the Contract Documents as well as restoration work of pervious and impervious areas affected by the construction activities. LS 1 $ 232,000.00 $ 232,000.00 3 New Lift Station - Installation of a new 15 -ft diameter, cast in place wetwell with three submersible, solids handling pumps, inclusive of all accessories and appurtenances as shown in the Contract Documents. The wetwell rim shall be installed at elevation 15.0 -ft. this includes commissioning and start up services including individual equipment startup and testing, piping system testing, providing the services of manufacturer field technician and representatives to provide services for installation, startup, and training, coordination with the OWNER, ENGINEER, other CONTRACTORS, and regulatory agencies. LS 1 4 s . 06 / $,, c192, .( 4 Electrical Work - Furnish and install cable, conduits, light fixtures, electrical panels, transformer(s), automatic transfer switch, lightning protection system and equipment (including new natural gas backup generator), flow meter, pressure gauge, level transducers, floats, telemetry control units (TCU), and control panels shown in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall also perform a short circuit and coordination study as part to the WORK. Electrical panels shall be installed at elevation 17.0 -ft. The existing communications antenna should also be relocated as Dart of this work. LS 1 $ 1,209,000.00 $ 1,209,000.00 • • • • • CLEARWATER BPiarr Am DEAUTtrUL' BAY TO IMACH BID ITEMS UNIT QTY UNIT PRICE AMOUNT 5Structural Work - Fumish and install elevated structures, retaining walls andLS platforms to service and maintain the wetwell, electrical, control and instrumentation equipment as shown in the Contract Documents. 1 $ 265,000.00 $ 265,000.00 6 Landscape Work - Protection, removal, replacement, and overall improvements of landscape features at the site. This includes fumish and installation of irrigation system, trees, grasses, plants, and shrubs as shown in the Contract Documents. LS 1 $ 31,000.00 -~Wickei0004 $ 31,000.00 SUBTOTAL 10% CONTINGENCY 1 $ fcl6, o0o. c.No $7,65( , 1 60 Bid,aluminum Alltern ate No. 1 Canopy Work - Fumish and install extruded aluminum protective cover, inclusive of fixed, extruded aluminum louvers and structural elements as show in the Contract Documents. The structural components of the protective cover shall be coordinate such as it will be supported from structural platform components, but not be integral to these components. LS 1 $ 277,000.00 $ 277,000.00 SUBTOTAL BID ALTERNATE NO.1 $ 277,000.00 TOTAL CONTRACT $ 9,g33.CW•00 Grand Total $ 933,,.»c.cO • • •